An Introduction to TEI simplePrint

An Introduction to TEI simplePrint

Lou Burnard
Martin Mueller
Sebastian Rahtz
James Cummings
Magdalena Turska
January 2017

Preface

This document is the formal specification for TEI simplePrint, an entry-level customization of the Text Encoding Initiative (TEI) Guidelines, intended to be generally useful to a large variety of encoders attempting to cope with the standardized representation of a variety of documents in digital form.

Like every other TEI customization, TEI simplePrint was designed for use with a particular type of material. If the material you are planning to encode matches the following criteria, then TEI simplePrint is for you. If it does not, it may not be.

- You are encoding print material, rather than manuscript: simplePrint provides no way of encoding manuscript features such as correction, deletion, or scribal variation
- You are encoding material from the Early Modern period (i.e., up to the end of the nineteenth century): some of the features for which simplePrint provides encodings are rarely found in modern materials.
- You are encoding material written, broadly speaking, within the Western European tradition, using largely Western European characters. simplePrint does provide facilities for encoding short passages in non Western European languages, but many features needed to cope with Asian or ancient scripts are missing.
- Your intention is to provide a relatively simple encoding for a large amount of material, rather than a rich encoding of a small amount of material: simplePrint is intended to help libraries and archives wishing to go beyond basic digital facsimiles, rather than to support specialist research. It does not, for example, include features for detailed linguistic tagging beyond simple word-level tagging, nor for specialised text types such as dictionaries, historical or biographical databases, etc.

If your needs go beyond those summarized here, simplePrint may still be a good point of departure, and may be very useful as a basis for the creation of your own TEI customisation. We don't however discuss the creation of a TEI customization in this document: the TEI website provides a number of links to tutorial material and tools which may assist in this process.

The present document is intended to be generally comprehensible and accessible, but does assume some knowledge of XML (the encoding language used by the TEI), and of the way it is used by the TEI. Further information on both these topics are available from many places, not least the TEI's own web site at .

The TEI simplePrint schema was first elaborated as a part of the TEI Simple project funded by the Andrew W. Mellon Foundation (2012-2014). The project sought to define a new highly-constrained and prescriptive subset of the Text Encoding Initiative (TEI) Guidelines suited to the representation of early modern print materials, a formally-defined set of processing rules which permit modern web applications to easily present and analyze the encoded texts, mapping to other ontologies, and processes to describe the encoding status and richness of a TEI digital text. Its choice of elements reflected the practices followed in the encoding of large-scale literary archives, notably those produced by the Text Creation Partnership. Practice of other comparable archives such as the German Text Archive was also taken into account.

The most distinctive feature of TEI simplePrint is its use of the TEI Processing Model, which provides explicit and recommended options for the display or processing of every textual element. Programmers developing systems to handle texts encoded with TEI simplePrint do not have to look beyond this when building stylesheets or other components. This greatly reduces the complexity of developing applications that will work reliably and consistently for many users and across large corpora of documents.

The TEI simplePrint schema and the TEI Processing Model were first defined by a working group led by Martin Mueller (Northwestern University) and Sebastian Rahtz (Oxford University). Major contributions to the project were made by Magdalena Turska (Oxford University), James Cummings (Oxford University), and Brian Pytlik Zillig. The changes to the TEI scheme needed to support the TEI Processing Model were reviewed and approved by the TEI Technical Council for inclusion in release 3.0.0 of TEI P5 in February 2016. The present document was extensively revised and extended by Lou Burnard in July 2016 for submission to the TEI Technical Council.

A Short Example

We begin with a short example. How should we go about transferring into a computer a passage of prose, such as the start of the last chapter of Charlotte Brontë's novel Jane Eyre? We might start by simply copying what we see on the printed page, typing it in such a way that what appears on the screen looks as similar as possible, for example, by retaining the original line breaks, by introducing blanks to represent the layout of the original headings, page breaks, and paragraphs, and so forth. Of course, the possibilities are limited by the nature of the computer program we use to capture the text: it may not be possible for example to reflect accurately the typographic characteristics of our source with all such software. Some characters in the printed text (such as the accented letter a in faàl or the long dash) may not be available on the keyboard; some typographic distinctions (such as that between small capitals and full capitals) may not be readily accessible. Our first attempt tries to mimic the appearance of the former, and simply ignores the latter.

                                CHAPTER 38

READER, I married him. A quiet wedding we had: he and I, the par-
son and clerk, were alone present. When we got back from church, I
went into the kitchen of the manor-house, where Mary was cooking
the dinner, and John cleaning the knives, and I said --
  'Mary, I have been married to Mr Rochester this morning.' The
housekeeper and her husband were of that decent, phlegmatic
order of people, to whom one may at any time safely communicate a
remarkable piece of news without incurring the danger of having
one's ears pierced by some shrill ejaculation and subsequently stunned
by a torrent of wordy wonderment. Mary did look up, and she did
stare at me; the ladle with which she was basting a pair of chickens
roasting at the fire, did for some three minutes hang suspended in air,
and for the same space of time John's knives also had rest from the
polishing process; but Mary, bending again over the roast, said only --
   'Have you, miss? Well, for sure!'
   A short time after she pursued, 'I seed you go out with the master,
but I didn't know you were gone to church to be wed'; and she
basted away. John, when I turned to him, was grinning from ear to
ear.
   'I telled Mary how it would be,' he said: 'I knew what Mr Ed-
ward' (John was an old servant, and had known his master when he
was the cadet of the house, therefore he often gave him his Christian
name) -- 'I knew what Mr Edward would do; and I was certain he
would not wait long either: and he's done right, for aught I know. I
wish you joy, miss!' and he politely pulled his forelock.
   'Thank you, John. Mr Rochester told me to give you and Mary
this.'
   I put into his hand a five-pound note.  Without waiting to hear
more, I left the kitchen. In passing the door of that sanctum some time
after, I caught the words --
   'She'll happen do better for him nor ony o' t' grand ladies.' And
again, 'If she ben't one o' th' handsomest, she's noan faa\l, and varry
good-natured; and i' his een she's fair beautiful, onybody may see
that.'
   I wrote to Moor House and to Cambridge immediately, to say what
I had done: fully explaining also why I had thus acted. Diana and

                            474

                 JANE EYRE                      475

Mary approved the step unreservedly. Diana announced that she
would just give me time to get over the honeymoon, and then she
would come and see me.
   'She had better not wait till then, Jane,' said Mr Rochester, when I
read her letter to him; 'if she does, she will be too late, for our honey-
moon will shine our life long: its beams will only fade over your
grave or mine.'
   How St John received the news I don't know: he never answered
the letter in which I communicated it: yet six months after he wrote
to me, without, however, mentioning Mr Rochester's name or allud-
ing to my marriage. His letter was then calm, and though very serious,
kind. He has maintained a regular, though not very frequent correspond-
ence ever since: he hopes I am happy, and trusts I am not of those who
live without God in the world, and only mind earthly things.

This transcription suffers from a number of shortcomings:

- the page numbers and running titles are intermingled with the text in a way which makes it difficult for software to distinguish them;
- no distinction is made between single quotation marks and apostrophe, so it is difficult to be certain exactly which passages are in direct speech;
- the preservation of the copy text's hyphenation means that simple-minded search programs will not find words broken across a line;
- the accented letter in faàl and the long dash have been rendered by ad hoc keying conventions (faa\l) which follow no standard pattern and will be processed correctly only if the transcriber remembers to mention them in the documentation;
- paragraph divisions are marked only by the use of white space, and hard carriage returns have been introduced at the end of each line. Consequently, if the size of type used to display the text changes, reformatting will be problematic.

We now present the same passage, as it might be encoded in TEI simplePrint. As we shall see, there are many ways in which this encoding could be extended, but as a minimum, the TEI approach allows us to represent the following distinctions in a standardized way:

- Paragraph and chapter divisions are now marked explicitly by means of tags rather than implicitly by white space.
- Apostrophes are retained, but the quotation marks indicating direct speech have been removed, and direct speech is now marked explicitly by means of a tag.
- The accented letter and the long dash are accurately represented, using the appropriate Unicode character.
- Page divisions have been marked with an empty <pb> tag; the page heading and running text have been suppressed.
- The lineation of the original has also been suppressed and words broken by typographic accident at the end of a line have been re-assembled without comment.
- For convenience of proof reading, a new line has been introduced at the start of each paragraph, but the indentation is removed.

<pb n="474"/>
<div type="chapter" n="38">
  <p>Reader, I married him. A quiet wedding we had: he and I, the parson and clerk, were
    alone present. When we got back from church, I went into the kitchen of the
    manor-house, where Mary was cooking the dinner, and John cleaning the knives, and I
    said —</p>
  <p><q>Mary, I have been married to Mr Rochester this morning.</q> The housekeeper and
    her husband were of that decent, phlegmatic order of people, to whom one may at any
    time safely communicate a remarkable piece of news without incurring the danger of
    having one's ears pierced by some shrill ejaculation and subsequently stunned by a
    torrent of wordy wonderment. Mary did look up, and she did stare at me; the ladle
    with which she was basting a pair of chickens roasting at the fire, did for some
    three minutes hang suspended in air, and for the same space of time John's knives
    also had rest from the polishing process; but Mary, bending again over the roast,
    said only —</p>
  <p><q>Have you, miss? Well, for sure!</q></p>
  <p>A short time after she pursued, <q>I seed you go out with the master, but I didn't
      know you were gone to church to be wed</q>; and she basted away. John, when I
    turned to him, was grinning from ear to ear. <q>I telled Mary how it would be,</q>
    he said: <q>I knew what Mr Edward</q> (John was an old servant, and had known his
    master when he was the cadet of the house, therefore he often gave him his Christian
    name) — <q>I knew what Mr Edward would do; and I was certain he would not wait long
      either: and he's done right, for aught I know. I wish you joy, miss!</q> and he
    politely pulled his forelock.</p>
  <p><q>Thank you, John. Mr Rochester told me to give you and Mary this.</q></p>
  <p>I put into his hand a five-pound note. Without waiting to hear more, I left the
    kitchen. In passing the door of that sanctum some time after, I caught the words
    —</p>
  <p><q>She'll happen do better for him nor ony o' t' grand ladies.</q> And again, <q>If
      she ben't one o' th' handsomest, she's noan faàl, and varry good-natured; and i'
      his een she's fair beautiful, onybody may see that.</q></p>
  <p>I wrote to Moor House and to Cambridge immediately, to say what I had done: fully
    explaining also why I had thus acted. Diana and <pb n="475"/> Mary approved the step
    unreservedly. Diana announced that she would just give me time to get over the
    honeymoon, and then she would come and see me.</p>
  <p><q>She had better not wait till then, Jane,</q> said Mr Rochester, when I read her
    letter to him; <q>if she does, she will be too late, for our honeymoon will shine
      our life long: its beams will only fade over your grave or mine.</q></p>
  <p>How St John received the news I don't know: he never answered the letter in which I
    communicated it: yet six months after he wrote to me, without, however, mentioning
    Mr Rochester's name or alluding to my marriage. His letter was then calm, and though
    very serious, kind. He has maintained a regular, though not very frequent
    correspondence ever since: he hopes I am happy, and trusts I am not of those who
    live without God in the world, and only mind earthly things.</p>
</div>

This encoding is expressed in TEI XML, a very widely used and standardized method of representing information about a document within the document itself. The transcribed words are complemented by special flags within angle brackets, called tags, which both characterise and mark the beginning and end of a string of characters. For example, each paragraph is marked by a tag <p> at its start, and a corresponding </p> at its end. We don't elaborate further on the syntax of TEI XML here.[^1]

[^1: Many introductory tutorials on XML are available on the web, for example at . The way the TEI uses XML is fully documented in section v of the TEI Guidelines; a very basic introduction to TEI XML is also available at . The formal specification of the XML language is at .]

Aside from its syntax, it is important to note that this particular encoding represents a set of choices or priorities. We have chosen to prioritize and simplify the representation of the words of the text over the representation of the typographic layout associated with them in this source document. This makes it easier for a computer to answer questions about the words in the document than about its typesetting, reflecting our research priorities. This priority also leads us to suppress end-of-line hyphenation. Conceivably Brontë (or her printer) intended the word honeymoon to appear as honey-moon on its second appearance, though this seems unlikely: our decision to focus on Brontë's text, rather than on the printing of it in this particular edition, makes it impossible to be certain. Similarly, our decision makes it impossible to use this transcription as a means of statistically analysing hyphenation practice. An encoding makes explicit all and only those textual features of importance to the encoder.

It is not difficult to think of ways in which the encoding of even this short passage might readily be extended to address other research priorities. For example:

- a regularized form of the passages in dialect could be provided;
- footnotes glossing or commenting on any passage could be added;
- pointers linking parts of this text to others could be added;
- proper names of various kinds could be distinguished from the surrounding text;
- names could be classified as personal, geographical, or institutional
- detailed bibliographic information about the text's provenance and context could be prefixed to it;
- a linguistic analysis of the passage into sentences, clauses, words, etc., could be provided, each unit being associated with appropriate category codes;
- the text could be segmented into narrative or discourse units;
- systematic analysis or interpretation of the text could be included in the encoding, with potentially complex alignment or linkage between the text and the analysis, or between the text and one or more translations of it;
- passages in the text could be linked to images or sound held on other media.

In the remainder of this document, we present a number of TEI-recommended ways of supporting these and other encoding requirements. These ways generally involve the application of specific TEI XML elements, selected from the full range of possibilities documented in the TEI Guidelines. Like every other TEI project, TEI Simple proposes a view of the TEI Guidelines. This document defines and documents that view.

The Structure of a TEI simplePrint Document

A TEI-conformant text contains (a) a TEI header (marked up as a <teiHeader> element) and (b) one or more representations of a text. These representations may be of three kinds: a transcribed text, marked up as a <text> element; a collection of digital images representing the text, marked up using a <facsimile> element; or a literal transcription of one or more documents instantiating the text, marked up using the <sourceDoc> element.

These elements are combined together to form a single <TEI> element, which must be declared within the TEI namespace, and therefore usually takes the form <TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">[^2].

[^2: A namespace is an XML concept. Its function is to identify the vocabulary from which a group of element names are drawn, using a standard identifier resembling a web address. The namespace for TEI elements is "http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0"]

Some aspects of the TEI header are described in more detail in section The Electronic Title Page. In what follows, we will focus chiefly on the use of the <text> element, though we describe one way of using the <facsimile> element in combination with it or alone in section Encoding a Digital Facsimile. We do not consider the <sourceDoc> element further, since it is mainly used in very specialised applications for which TEI simplePrint would not be appropriate.

A text may be unitary (a single work) or composite (a collection of single works, such as an anthology). In either case, the text may have optional front or back matter such as title pages, prefaces, appendixes etc. We use the term body for whatever comes between these in the source document. We discuss various kinds of composite text in section Composite and Floating Texts below.

A unitary text will be encoded using an overall structure like this:

<TEI>
  <teiHeader/>
  <text>
    <front/>
    <body/>
    <back/>
  </text>
</TEI>

In each of the following sections we include a short list of the TEI elements under discussion, along with a brief description, and in most cases an example of how they are used. Throughout the text, element names are linked to their detailed reference documentation, as given in the TEI Guidelines. Note that most of the examples provided by the reference documentation, and all of the links, are not specific to TEI simplePrint.

For example, here are the elements discussed so far:

Encoding the Body

As indicated above, a unitary text is encoded by means of a <text> element, which may contain the following elements: Elements specific to front and back matter are described below in section Front and Back Matter. In this section we discuss the elements making up the body of a text. A text must always have a body.

Text Division Elements and Global Attributes

The body of a prose text may be just a series of paragraphs or similar blocks of text, or these may be grouped together into chapters, sections, subsections, etc. The <div> element is used to represent any such grouping of blocks.

The @type attribute on the <div> element may be used to supply a conventional name for this category of text division in order to distinguish them. Typical values might be "book", "chapter", "section", "part", "poem", "song", etc. TEI simplePrint does not constrain the range of values that may be used here.

A <div> element may itself contain further, nested, <div>s, thus mimicking the traditional structure of a book, which can be decomposed hierarchically into units such as parts, containing chapters, containing sections, and so on. TEI texts in general conform to this simple hierarchic model.

Here as elsewhere the @xml:id attribute may be used to supply a unique identifier for the division, which may be used for cross references or other links to it, such as a commentary, as further discussed in section Cross References and Links. It is good practice to provide an @xml:id attribute for every major structural unit in a text, and to derive its values in some systematic way, for example by appending a section number to a short code for the title of the work in question, as in the examples below.

The @n attribute may be used to supply (additionally or alternatively) a short mnemonic name or number for a division, or any other element. If a conventional form of reference or abbreviation for the parts of a work already exists (such as the book/chapter/verse pattern of Biblical citations), the @n attribute is the place to record it; unlike the identifier supplied by the @xml:id attribute, it does not need to be unique.

The @xml:lang attribute may be used to specify the language of the division. Languages are identified by an internationally defined code, as further discussed in section Foreign Words or Expressions below.

The @rendition attribute may be used to supply information about the rendition (appearance) of a division, or any other element, as further discussed in section Marking Highlighted Phrases below. Note that this attribute is used to describe the appearance of the source text, rather than the appearance of any intended output when the encoded text is displayed. The two may of course be similar, or identical, but the TEI does not assume or require this.

These four attributes, @xml:id, @n, @xml:lang, and @rendition are so widely useful that they are allowed on any element in any TEI schema: they are called global attributes. Other attributes defined in the TEI simplePrint schema are discussed in section Special Kinds of Linking.

As noted above, the value of every @xml:id attribute must be unique within a document. One simple way of ensuring this is to make it reflect the hierarchic structure of the document. For example, Smith's Wealth of Nations as first published consists of five books, each of which is divided into chapters, while some chapters are further subdivided into parts. We might define @xml:id values for this structure as follows:

<body>
  <div xml:id="WN1" n="I" type="book">
    <div xml:id="WN101" n="I.1" type="chapter"/>
    <div xml:id="WN102" n="I.2" type="chapter"/>

    <div xml:id="WN110" n="I.10" type="chapter">
      <div xml:id="WN1101" n="I.10.1" type="part"/>
      <div xml:id="WN1102" n="I.10.2" type="part"/>
    </div>

  </div>
  <div xml:id="WN2" n="II" type="book"/>
</body>

A different numbering scheme may be used for @xml:id and @n attributes: this is often useful where a canonical reference scheme is used which does not tally with the structure of the work. For example, in a novel divided into books each containing chapters, where the chapters are numbered sequentially through the whole work, rather than within each book, one might use a scheme such as the following:

<body>
  <div xml:id="TS01" n="1" type="volume">
    <div xml:id="TS011" n="1" type="chapter"/>
    <div xml:id="TS012" n="2" type="chapter"/>
  </div>
  <div xml:id="TS02" n="2" type="volume">
    <div xml:id="TS021" n="3" type="chapter"/>
    <div xml:id="TS022" n="4" type="chapter"/>
  </div>
</body>

Here the work has two volumes, each containing two chapters. The chapters are numbered conventionally 1 to 4, but the @xml:id values specified allow them to be regarded additionally as if they were numbered 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2.

Headings and Closings

Every <div> may have a title or heading at its start, and (less commonly) a trailer such as End of Chapter 1 at its end. The following elements may be used to transcribe them: Some other elements which may be found at the beginning or ending of text divisions are discussed below in section Prefatory Matter.

Whether or not headings and trailers are included in a transcription is a matter for the individual transcriber to decide. Where a heading is completely regular (for example Chapter 1) or may be automatically constructed from attribute values (e.g. <div type="chapter" n="1">), it may be omitted; where it contains otherwise unrecoverable text it should always be included. For example, the start of Hardy's Under the Greenwood Tree might be encoded as follows:

<div xml:id="UGT1" n="Winter" type="part">
  <div xml:id="UGT101" n="1" type="chapter">
    <head>Mellstock-Lane</head>
    <p>To dwellers in a wood almost every species of tree ... </p>
  </div>
</div>

Textual Components

In prose texts such as the Brontë example above, the divisions are generally composed of paragraphs, represented as <p> elements, though in some circumstances it may be preferred to use the anonymous block element <ab>. In poetic or dramatic texts different elements are used, representing stanzas and verse lines in the first case, and individual speeches or stage directions in the second:

We discuss each of these kinds of component separately below.

Verse

Here, for example, is the start of a poetic text in which verse lines and stanzas are tagged:

<lg n="I">
  <l>I Sing the progresse of a deathlesse soule,</l>
  <l>Whom Fate, with God made, but doth not controule,</l>

  <l>A worke t'out weare Seths pillars, bricke and stone,</l>
  <l>And (holy writs excepted) made to yeeld to none,</l>
</lg>

Note that the <l> element marks verse lines, not typographic lines: as elsewhere the original lineation of the source text is not therefore preserved by this encoding. The <lb> element described in section Page and Line Numbers might additionally be used to mark typographic lines if so desired.

In a poetic text it may also be considered useful to identify the rhymes, for which the following element may be used: The following example shows how this element might be used both to identify rhyming words or word parts and to assign each rhyme to a part of a rhyming pattern by means of its @label attribute. The rhyming pattern here is specified by the @rhyme attribute supplied on the <lg> representing the stanza within which the pattern operates:

<lg rhyme="AABCCBBA">
  <l>The sunlight on the <rhyme label="A">garden</rhyme></l>
  <l><rhyme label="A">Harden</rhyme>s and grows <rhyme label="B">cold</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>We cannot cage the <rhyme label="C">minute</rhyme></l>
  <l>Wi<rhyme label="C">thin it</rhyme>s nets of <rhyme label="B">gold</rhyme>
  </l>
  <l>When all is <rhyme label="B">told</rhyme>
  </l>
  <l>We cannot beg for <rhyme label="A">pardon</rhyme>.</l>
</lg>

The @rhyme attribute may be used independently of the <rhyme> element, or in combination with it, as above.

Drama

A dramatic text contains speeches, which may be in prose or verse, and will also contain stage directions. The <sp> element is used to represent each identified speech. It contains an optional speaker indication, marked with the <speaker> element, which can be followed by one or more <l> or <p> elements, depending on whether the speech is considered to be in prose or in verse. Stage directions, whether within or between speeches, are marked using the <stage> element.

For example:

<sp>
  <speaker>Vladimir</speaker>
  <p>Pull on your trousers.</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>Estragon</speaker>
  <p>You want me to pull off my trousers?</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>Vladimir</speaker>
  <p>Pull <hi>on</hi> your trousers.</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>Vladimir</speaker>
  <p><stage>(realizing his trousers are down)</stage>. True</p>
</sp>
<stage>He pulls up his trousers</stage>
<sp>
  <speaker>Vladimir</speaker>
  <p>Well? Shall we go?</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>Estragon</speaker>
  <p>Yes, let's go.</p>
</sp>
<stage>They do not move.</stage>

In a verse drama, it is quite common to find that verse lines are split between speakers. The easiest way of encoding this is to use the @part attribute to indicate that the lines so fragmented are incomplete:

<div type="Act" n="I">
  <head>ACT I</head>
  <div type="Scene" n="1">
    <head>SCENE I</head>
    <stage rendition="#italic">Enter Barnardo and Francisco, two Sentinels, at
      several doors</stage>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="Y">Who's there?</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l>Nay, answer me. Stand and unfold yourself.</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="I">Long live the King!</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l part="M">Barnardo?</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="F">He.</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l>You come most carefully upon your hour.</l>
    </sp>

  </div>
</div>

The value of the @part attribute may indicate just that the element bearing is fragmented in some (unspecified) respect rather than a complete verse line (part="Y"); alternatively it may indicate whether this is an initial (I), medial (M) or F (final) fragment.

The same mechanism may be applied to stanzas which are divided between two speakers:

<div>
  <sp>
    <speaker>First voice</speaker>
    <lg type="stanza" part="I">
      <l>But why drives on that ship so fast</l>
      <l>Withouten wave or wind?</l>
    </lg>
  </sp>
  <sp>
    <speaker>Second Voice</speaker>
    <lg type="stanza" part="F">
      <l>The air is cut away before.</l>
      <l>And closes from behind.</l>
    </lg>
  </sp>

</div>

The <sp> element can also be used for dialogue presented in a prose work as if it were drama, as in the next example, which also demonstrates the use of the @who attribute to bear a code identifying the speaker of the piece of dialogue concerned:

<div>
  <sp who="#OPI">
    <speaker>The reverend Doctor Opimian</speaker>
    <p>I do not think I have named a single unpresentable fish.</p>
  </sp>
  <sp who="#GRM">
    <speaker>Mr Gryll</speaker>
    <p>Bream, Doctor: there is not much to be said for bream.</p>
  </sp>
  <sp who="#OPI">
    <speaker>The Reverend Doctor Opimian</speaker>
    <p>On the contrary, sir, I think there is much to be said for him. In the first
      place....</p>
    <p>Fish, Miss Gryll -- I could discourse to you on fish by the hour: but for the
      present I will forbear.</p>
  </sp>
</div>

Here the @who attribute values ("#OPI" etc.) are links, pointing to items in a list of the characters in the novel. In the case of a play, this list of characters might appear in the original source as a cast list or dramatic personae, which might be marked up using the <castList> element described in section Specialized Front and Back Matter below. Such a list would not, of course, be appropriate to provide descriptive information about each character, much of which does not appear in the original source. Instead a <particDesc> (participant description) element should be provided in the TEI header, as further discussed in section The Profile Description below.

Other Kinds of Text Block

As mentioned above, the <ab> element may also be used in preference to the <p> element. It should be used for blocks of text which are not clearly paragraphs, verse lines, or dramatic speeches. Typical examples include the canonical verses of the Bible, and the textual blocks of other ancient documents which predate the invention of the paragraph, such as Greek inscriptions or Egyptian hieroglyphs. The element is also useful as a means of encoding more specialized kinds of textual block, such as the question and answer structure of a catechism, or the highly formalized substructure of a legal document (if <div> is not considered appropriate for these). In more modern documents, it can be used to encode semi-organized or fragmentary materials such as an artist's notebook or work in progress; or to faithfully capture the substructure of a file produced by an OCR system.

Page and Line Numbers

Page and line breaks etc. may be marked with the following elements: The <pb>, <lb>, and <cb> elements are special cases of a general class of elements known as milestones because they mark reference points within a text. The generic <milestone> element can mark any kind of reference point: for example, a column break, the start of a new kind of section not otherwise tagged, a change of author or style, or in general any significant change in the text not enclosed by an XML element. Unlike other elements, milestone elements do not enclose a piece of text and make an assertion about it; instead they indicate a point in the text where something changes, as indicated by a change in the values of the milestone's attributes @unit, which indicates the something concerned, and @n which indicates the new value.

The <pb>, <lb>, and <cb> elements are shortcuts or syntactic sugar for <milestone unit="page"/> <milestone unit="line"/> and <milestone unit="column"/> respectively.

When working from a paginated original, it is often useful to record its pagination, whether to simplify later proof-reading, or to align the transcribed text with a set of page images, as further discussed below.

Because <pb> and other milestone elements are empty, they may be placed freely within or between other elements. However, it is recommended practice always to put them at the beginning of whatever unit it is that their presence implies, and not to nest them within elements contained by that unit. For example, in the following example a page break occurs between two lines of a poem:

<l>Mary had a little lamb</l>
<pb n="13"/>
<l>Its fleece was white as snow</l>

The <pb> element should be placed ahead of all the text encoded on the 13th page. Contrast this with the following less accurate encoding:

<l>Mary had a little lamb</l>
<l>
  <pb n="13"/>Its fleece was white as snow</l>

This is less accurate because it implies that the second verse line actually begins before the page break.

Similar considerations apply to line breaks (<lb>), though these are less frequently considered useful when encoding modern printed textual sources. When transcribing manuscripts or early printed books, however, it is often helpful to retain them in an encoding, if only to facilitate alignment of transcription and original. Like <pb>, the <lb> element should appear before the text of the line whose start it signals.

If features such as pagination or lineation are marked for more than one edition, the edition in question may be specified by the @ed attribute. For example, in the following passage we indicate where the page breaks occur in two different editions ("ED1" and "ED2"):

<p>I wrote to Moor House and to Cambridge immediately, to say what I had done:
fully explaining also why I had thus acted. Diana and <pb ed="ED1" n="475"/> Mary
approved the step unreservedly. Diana announced that she would <pb ed="ED2" n="485"/>just give me time to get over the honeymoon, and then she would come and see
me.</p>

When transcribing from a paginated source, the encoder must decide whether to suppress such features as running titles, page signatures, catch words etc., to replace them by a simplified representation using the <pb> element, perhaps using the @n attribute to preserve some of the information, or to preserve them entirely using the <fw> element. The latter strategy is appropriate in encodings which aim to retain as much information as possible about the original typography; it will however make more complex the processing of the source for other purposes, as in the following example:

<l>He also fix'd the wandering
  QUEEN OF NIGHT,</l>
<fw type="sig">Ii 2</fw>
<fw type="catch">Whether</fw>
<pb n="244"/>
<l>Whether she wanes into a scanty orb</l>...

The <pb> element is also used to align parts of a transcription with a digital image of the page concerned. This may be done in a very simple but inflexible way by using the @facs attribute to point to each page image concerned:

<p>I wrote to Moor House and to Cambridge
immediately, to say what I had done: fully explaining also why I had thus acted.
Diana and <pb ed="ED1" n="475" facs="ed1p475.png"/> Mary approved the step
unreservedly... </p>

The @facs attribute can supply (as here) a filename, or any other form of URI, if for example the page image is stored remotely. One drawback of this simplistic approach is that there must be exactly one image file per page of text. It is not therefore suitable in the case where the available page images represent double page spreads, or where there are multiple images of the same page (for example at different resolutions).

A more powerful approach, discussed in section Encoding a Digital Facsimile below, is to use the <facsimile> element to define the organisation of the set of images representing the text, and then use the @facs attribute to point to individual components of that representation.

Marking Highlighted Phrases

Changes of Typeface, etc.

Highlighted words or phrases are those made visibly different from the rest of the text, typically by a change of type font, handwriting style, ink colour etc., which is intended to draw the reader's attention to some associated change.

The global @rendition attribute can be attached to any element, and used wherever necessary to specify details of the highlighting used for it in the source. For example, a heading rendered in bold might be tagged <head rendition="simple:bold">, and one in italic <head rendition="simple:italic">.

The values used for the @rendition attribute point to definitions provided for the formatting concerned. These definitions are typically provided by a <rendition> element in the document's header, as further discussed in section Tagging Declaration.

It is not always possible or desirable to interpret the reasons for such changes of rendering in a text. In such cases, the element <hi> may be used to mark a sequence of highlighted text without making any claim as to its status.

In the following example, the use of a distinct typeface for the subheading and for the included name are recorded but not interpreted:

<p><hi rendition="simple:blackletter">And
  this Indenture further witnesseth</hi> that the said <hi rendition="simple:italic">Walter Shandy</hi>, merchant, in consideration of the
said intended marriage ...</p>

Alternatively, where the cause for the highlighting can be identified with confidence, a number of other, more specific, elements are available.

Some features (notably quotations, titles, and foreign words) may be found in a text either marked by highlighting, or with quotation marks. In either case, the element <q> (as discussed in the following section) should be used. Again, the global @rendition attribute can be used to record details of the highlighting used in the source if this is thought useful.

As an example of the elements defined here, consider the following sentence: On the one hand the Nibelungenlied is associated with the new rise of romance of twelfth-century France, the romans d'antiquité, the romances of Chrétien de Troyes, and the German adaptations of these works by Heinrich van Veldeke, Hartmann von Aue, and Wolfram von Eschenbach. Interpreting the role of the highlighting, the sentence might be encoded as follows:

<p>On the one hand the
  <title>Nibelungenlied</title> is associated with the new rise of romance of
twelfth-century France, the <foreign>romans d'antiquité</foreign>, the romances of
Chrétien de Troyes, ...</p>

Describing only the appearance of the original, it might be encoded like this:

<p>On the one hand the <hi rendition="simple:italic">Nibelungenlied</hi> is associated with the new rise of
romance of twelfth-century France, the <hi rendition="simple:italic">romans
  d'antiquité</hi>, the romances of Chrétien de Troyes, ...</p>

Quotations and Related Features

Like changes of typeface, quotation marks are conventionally used to denote several different features within a text, of which the most frequent is quotation, though many other features are possible. The full TEI Guidelines provide additional elements such as <mentioned> or <said> to distinguish some of these features, but these more specialised elements are not included in TEI simplePrint. In TEI Simple however, we use the <quote> element for quotation only, and the <q> element for all other material found within quotation marks in the text.

Here is a simple example of a quotation:

<p>Few dictionary makers are likely to
forget Dr. Johnson's description of the lexicographer as <quote>a harmless
  drudge.</quote></p>

As elsewhere, the way that a citation or quotation was printed (for example, in-line or set off as a display or block quotation), may be represented using the @rendition attribute. This may also be used to indicate the kind of quotation marks used.

Direct speech interrupted by a narrator can be represented simply by ending the <q> element and beginning it again after the interruption, as in the following example:

<p><q>Who-e debel
  you?</q> — he at last said — <q>you no speak-e, damme, I kill-e.</q> And so
saying, the lighted tomahawk began flourishing about me in the dark.</p>

If it is important to convey the idea that the two <q> elements together make up a single speech, the linking attributes @next and @prev may be used, as described in section Special Kinds of Linking.

Direct speech may be accompanied by a reference to the source or speaker, using the @who attribute, whether or not this is explicit in the text, as in the following example:

<q who="#Wilson">Spaulding, he came down into the office just this day eight weeks with this very
paper in his hand, and he says:—<q who="#Spaulding">I wish to the Lord, Mr.
  Wilson, that I was a red-headed man.</q></q>

This example also demonstrates how quotations may be embedded within other quotations: one speaker (Wilson) quotes another speaker (Spaulding).

The creator of the electronic text must decide whether quotation marks are replaced by the tags or whether the tags are added and the quotation marks kept. If the quotation marks are removed from the text, the @rendition attribute may be used to record the way in which they were rendered in the copy text.

Foreign Words or Expressions

Words, phrases, or longer stretches of text that are not in the main language of the texts may be tagged as such in one of two ways. The global @xml:lang attribute may be attached to any element to show that it uses some other language than that of the surrounding text. Where there is no applicable element, the element <foreign> may be used, again using the @xml:lang attribute. For example: <p>John has real <foreign xml:lang="fr">savoir-faire</foreign>.</p><p>Have you read <title xml:lang="de">Die Dreigroschenoper</title>?</p>

As these examples show, the <foreign> element should not be used to tag foreign words if some other more specific element such as <title>, or <div> applies.

The value of the @xml:lang attribute on an element applies hierarchically to everything contained by that element, unless overridden:

<div xml:lang="la">
  <p>Pars haec Latine composita est.</p>
  <p xml:lang="en">Except that this sentence is in English.</p>
  <p>Vita brevis, ars longa.</p>
</div>

Here we specify that the whole <div> element uses the language with the coded identifier "la" i.e., Latin. Since it is contained by that <div> there is no need to supply this information again for the first <s> element. The second <s> element however overrides this value, and indicates that its content is in English (the language with identifier "en"). The third <s> element is again in Latin.

The codes used to identify languages, supplied on the @xml:lang attribute, are defined by an international standard[^3], as further explained in the relevant section of the TEI Guidelines. Some simple example codes for a few languages are given here:

zh	Chinese	grc	Ancient Greek
en	English	el	Greek
enm	Middle English	ja	Japanese
fr	French	la	Latin
de	German	sa	Sanskrit

[^3: The relevant Internet standard is Best Current Practice 47 (). The authoritative list of registered subtags is maintained by IANA and is available at . For a general overview of the construction of language tags, see , and for a practical step-by-step guide, see .]

Notes

A note is any additional comment found in a text, marked in some way as being out of the main textual stream. A note is always attached to some part of the text, implicitly or explicitly: we call this its target, or its point of attachment. The element <note> should be used to mark any kind of note whether it appears as a separate block of text in the main text area, at the foot of the page, at the end of the chapter or volume, in the margin, or in some other place.

Notes may be in a different hand or typeface, may be authorial or editorial, and may have been added later. The attributes @type and @resp can be used to distinguish between different kinds of notes or identify their authors.

In a printed or written text, the point of attachment for a note is typically represented by a siglum such as an alphanumerical or other character, often in superscripted form. When encoding such a text, it is conventional to replace this siglum by a note element containing the annotation itself, as in the following example: <p>...some text <note xml:id="n6">a note about some text</note> .... </p>

An alternative approach is to encode the point of attachment wherever it appears in the text, using for example the <ref> element discussed in the next section, and to place the <note> element anywhere convenient. The two can then be associated by using the @target attribute on the <ref> element to point to the <note> element, as in the following example, in which the superscripted 7 indicating the point of attachment has been retained as part of the encoding: <p>...some text <ref target="#n7" rendition="simple:superscript">7</ref> .... <note xml:id="n7">a note about some text</note></p>

It may however be problematic to determine the precise position of the point of attachment, particularly in the case of marginal notes. A marginal note may also be hard to distinguish from a label or subheading which introduces the text with which it is associated. Where the purpose of the note is clearly to label the associated text, rather than to comment on it, the element <label> may be preferable. Where it is clearly a subheading attached to a distinct subdivision, it may be preferable to start a new element <div> and encode the subheading as a <head>. Note however that a <head> cannot be inserted anywhere except at the beginning of a <div>. And where (as in some Early Modern English plays) marginal annotation is systematically used to identify speakers, it may be better to represent these using the <speaker> element introduced above. In cases of doubt, the encoder should decide on a clear policy and preferably document it for the use of others.

Cross References and Links

Any kind of cross reference or link found at one point in a text which points to another part of the same or another document may be encoded using the <ref> element discussed in this section. Implicit links (such as the association between two parallel texts, or that between a text and its interpretation) may be encoded using the linking attributes discussed in section Special Kinds of Linking.

Simple Cross References

Usually, the presence of a cross-reference or link will be indicated by some text or symbol in the source being encoded, which will then become the content of the <ref> element. Occasionally, however, and frequently in the case of a born digital document, the exact form and appearance of the cross reference text will be determined dynamically by the software processing the document. In such cases, the <ref> element will have no content, and serve simply to mark a point from which a link is to be made, along with the target of the link.

The following two forms, for example, are logically equivalent:

See especially <ref target="#SEC12">section
12 on page 34</ref>.

See especially <ref target="#SEC12"/>. In both cases, there is a cross reference from the position in the source document immediately following the word especially to whatever element in the encoded document has the identifier "SEC12". In the first case, the encoder has supplied the original form of the cross reference section 12 on page 34; in the second, the task of generating an appropriate form of cross reference has been left to the formatting software. Perhaps the pagination and section numbers of the document in question are not yet determined; perhaps the cross reference should be replaced by a big red button. In either case, however, the value of the @target attribute must be the identifier of some other element within the current document. Since the passage or phrase being pointed at must bear an identifier, it must be an element of some kind. In the following example, the cross reference is to a <div> element:

... see especially <ref target="#SEC12"/>.
               ... <div xml:id="SEC12">
                 <head>Concerning Identifiers</head>

               </div>

Because the @xml:id attribute is global, any element in a TEI document may be pointed to in this way. In the following example, a paragraph has been given an identifier so that it may be pointed at:

... this is discussed in <ref target="#pspec">the paragraph on links</ref> ... <p xml:id="pspec">Links may be
                 made to any kind of element ...</p>

Sometimes the target of a cross reference does not correspond with any particular feature of a text, and so may not be tagged as an element of some kind. If the desired target is simply a point in the current document, the easiest way to mark it is by introducing an <anchor> element at the appropriate spot. If the target is some sequence of words not otherwise tagged, the <seg> element may be used to mark them. These two elements are described as follows:

In the following example, <ref> elements have been used to represent points in this text which are to be linked in some way to other parts of it; in the first case to a point, and in the second, to a sequence of words:

Returning to <ref target="#ABCD">the point
                 where I dozed off</ref>, I noticed that <ref target="#EFGH">three words</ref> had
               been circled in red by a previous reader

This encoding requires that elements with the specified identifiers ("ABCD" and "EFGH" in this example) are to be found somewhere else in the current document. Assuming that no element already exists to carry these identifiers, the <anchor> and <seg> elements may be used: .... <anchor type="bookmark" xml:id="ABCD"/> .... ....<seg type="target" xml:id="EFGH"> ... </seg> ...

The @type attribute should be used (as above) to distinguish amongst different purposes for which these general purpose elements might be used in a text. Some other uses are discussed in section Special Kinds of Linking below.

Pointing to other documents

So far, we have shown how the <ref> element may be used for cross-references or links whose targets occur within the same document as their source. The element may also be used to refer to elements in any other XML document or resource, such as a document on the web, or a database component. This is possible because the value of the @target attribute may be any valid Uniform Resource Identifier (URI)[^4].

[^4: A full definition of this term, defined by the W3C (the consortium which manages the development and maintenance of the World Wide Web), is beyond the scope of this tutorial: however, the most frequently encountered version of a URI is the familiar URL used to indicate a web page, such as http://www.tei-c.org/index.xml]

A URI may reference a web page or just a part of one, for example http://www.tei-c.org/index.xml#SEC2. The hash sign indicates that what follows it is the identifier of an element to be located within the XML document identified by what precedes it: this example will therefore locate an element which has an @xml:id attribute value of "SEC2" within the document retrieved from http://www.tei-c.org/index.xml. In the examples we have discussed so far, the part to the left of the sharp sign has been omitted: this is understood to mean that the referenced element is to be located within the current document.

It is also possible to define an abbreviated form of the URI, using a predefined prefix separated from the rest of the code by a colon, as for example "cesr:SEC2". This is known as a private URI, since the prefix is not standardized (except that the prefix "xml:" is reserved for use by XML itself). A <prefixDef> element should be supplied within the TEI header specifying how the prefix (here "cesr") should be translated to give a full URL for the link. This is particularly useful if a document contains many references to an external document such as an authority file.

Parts of an XML document can be specified by means of other more sophisticated mechanisms using a language called Xpointer, also defined by the W3C. This is useful when, for example, the elements to be linked to do not bear identifiers. Further information about this and other forms of link addressing is provided in chapter 16 of the TEI Guidelines but is beyond the scope of the present document.

Special Kinds of Linking

The following special purpose linking attributes are defined for every element in the TEI simplePrint schema:

@ana
- links an element with its interpretation.
@corresp
- links an element with one or more other corresponding elements.
@next
- links an element to the next element in an aggregate.
@prev
- links an element to the previous element in an aggregate.

The @ana (analysis) attribute is intended for use where a set of abstract analyses or interpretations have been defined somewhere within a document, as further discussed in section Analysis. For example, a linguistic analysis of the sentence John loves Nancy might be encoded as follows:

<seg type="sentence" ana="#SVO">
  <seg type="lex" ana="#NP1">John</seg>
  <seg type="lex" ana="#VVI">loves</seg>
  <seg type="lex" ana="#NP1">Nancy</seg>
</seg>

This encoding implies the existence elsewhere in the document of elements with identifiers "SVO", "NP1", and "VV1" where the significance of these particular codes is explained. Note the use of the <seg> element to mark particular components of the analysis, distinguished by the @type attribute.

The @corresp (corresponding) attribute provides a simple way of representing some form of correspondence between two elements in a text. For example, in a multilingual text, it may be used to link translation equivalents, as in the following example:

<seg xml:lang="fr" xml:id="FR1" corresp="#EN1">Jean aime Nancy</seg>
<seg xml:lang="en" xml:id="EN1" corresp="#FR1">John loves Nancy</seg>

The same mechanism may be used for a variety of purposes. In the following example, it has been used to represent the correspondences between the show and Shirley, and between NBC and the network:

<p><title xml:id="shirley">Shirley</title>,
which made its Friday night debut only a month ago, was not listed on <name xml:id="nbc">NBC</name>'s new schedule, although <seg xml:id="network" corresp="#nbc">the network</seg> says <seg xml:id="show" corresp="#shirley">the
  show</seg> still is being considered.</p>

The @next and @prev attributes provide a simple way of linking together the components of a discontinuous element, as in the following example:

<q xml:id="Q1a" next="#Q1b">Who-e
  debel you?</q> — he at last said — <q xml:id="Q1b" prev="#Q1a">you no speak-e,
  damme, I kill-e.</q> And so saying, the lighted tomahawk began flourishing about
me in the dark.

Editorial Interventions

The process of encoding an electronic text has much in common with the process of editing a manuscript or other text for printed publication. In either case a conscientious editor may wish to record both the original state of the source and any editorial correction or other change made in it. The elements discussed in this and the next section provide some facilities for meeting these needs.

Correction and Normalization

The following elements may be used to mark corrections, that is editorial changes introduced where the editor believes the original to be erroneous:

The following elements may be used to mark normalization, that is editorial changes introduced for the sake of consistency or modernization of a text:

Consider, for example, the following famous passage as it appears in the first quarto printing of Shakespeare's Henry V: [Detail from Henry V, first quarto (1600)] in particular the phrase we might transcribe directly as

... for his Nose
             was as sharpe as a Pen, and a Table of greene fields

A modern editor might wish to make a number of interventions here, specifically to modernize (or normalize) the Elizabethan spellings of a' and sharpe for he and sharp respectively. They might also want to emend table to babbl'd, following an editorial tradition that goes back to the 18th century Shakespearian scholar Lewis Theobald. The following encoding would then be appropriate:

... for his Nose was as <reg>sharp</reg> as a
Pen and <reg>he</reg>
<corr resp="#Theobald">babbl'd</corr> of green fields

A more conservative or source-oriented editor, however, might want to retain the original, but at the same time signal that some of the readings it contains are in some sense anomalous:

... for his Nose was as
  <orig>sharpe</orig> as a Pen, and <orig>a</orig>
<sic>Table</sic> of green fields

Finally, a modern digital editor may decide to combine both possibilities in a single composite text, using the <choice> element. This allows an editor to indicate where alternative encodings are possible:

... for his Nose was as <choice>
  <orig>sharpe</orig>
  <reg>sharp</reg>
</choice> as a Pen, and <choice>
  <orig>a</orig>
  <reg>he</reg>
</choice>
<choice>
  <corr resp="#Theobald">babbl'd</corr>
  <sic>Table</sic>
</choice> of green fields

Omissions, Deletions, and Additions

In addition to correcting or normalizing words and phrases, editors and transcribers may also supply missing material, omit material, or transcribe material deleted or crossed out in the source. In addition, some material may be particularly hard to transcribe because it is hard to make out on the page. The following elements may be used to record such phenomena:

These elements may be used to record changes made by an editor, by the transcriber, or (in manuscript material) by the author or scribe. For example, if the source for an electronic text read The following elements are provided for for simple editorial interventions. then it might be felt desirable to correct the obvious error, but at the same time to record the deletion of the superfluous second for, thus:

The
following elements are provided for <del resp="#LB">for</del> simple editorial
interventions.

The attribute value "#LB" on the @resp attribute is used to point to a fuller definition (typically in a <respStmt> element) of the person or other agency responsible for correcting the duplication of for.

If the source read The following elements provided for simple editorial interventions. (i.e. if the word are had been inadvertently dropped) then the scholar identified as "LB" might choose to encode the corrected text as follows:

The following
elements <add resp="#LB">are</add> provided for simple editorial
interventions.

These elements may also be used to record the actual writing process, for example to record passages which have been deleted, added, corrected etc., whether by the author of a literary text or by a scribe copying out a manuscript. An analysis of such documentary modifications may be essential before a reading text can be presented, and is clearly of importance in the editorial process.

The example is taken from the surviving authorial manuscript of a poem by the English writer Wilfred Owen, a part of which is shown here:

Detail from Dulce et decorum est autograph manuscript in the English Faculty Library, Oxford University.

Owen first wrote Helping the worst amongst us, but then deleted it, adding Dragging the worst amongt us over the top. In the same way, he revised the phrase half–blind by deleting the half– and adding all above it. In the last line, he started a word beginning fif before deleting it and writing the word five–nines. We can encode all of this as follows:

<l>And towards our distant rest began to trudge,</l>
<l><subst>
    <del>Helping the worst amongst us</del>
    <add>Dragging the worst amongt us</add>
  </subst>, who’d no boots </l>
<l>But limped on, blood–shod. All went lame; <subst>
    <del status="shortEnd">half–</del>
    <add>all</add>
  </subst> blind;</l>
<l>Drunk with fatigue ; deaf even to the hoots</l>
<l>Of tired, outstripped <del>fif</del> five–nines that dropped behind.</l>

The tags <add> and <del> elements are used to enclose passages added or deleted respectively. Additional attributes are available such as @resp to indicate responsibility for the modification, or @place to indicate where in the text (for example, above or below the line) the modification has been made. Where the encoder wishes to assert that the addition and deletion make up a single editorial act of substitution, these elements can be combined within a <subst> element as shown above.

A very careful examination of Owen’s second modification shows that he really did write amongt rather than amongst, presumably in error. An equally careful editor wishing to restore the missing s might use the <supplied> element to indicate that they have done so:

<add>Dragging the worst among<supplied resp="#ED">s</supplied>t us</add>

Here the @resp attribute has been used to indicate that the s was not supplied by Owen but by someone else, specifically the person documented elsewhere by an element with the identifier "ED".

The <unclear> element is useful where material in the source is so hard to read that the transcriber is uncertain as to whether they have done so correctly. The <gap> element by contrast should be used where the material is so illegible that the transcriber does not wish even to attempt it. The two may however be used together as in the following example:

One hundred &amp; twenty good regulars joined <unclear>to me <gap extent="2 words" reason="indecipherable"/> and </unclear> instantly, would aid me signally in an
enterprise against Wilmington.

The <del> element marks material which is deleted in a source, but has been transcribed as part of the electronic text all the same, while <gap> marks the location of source material which is omitted from the electronic text, whether it is legible or not. A language corpus, for example, might omit long quotations in foreign languages. An @extent attribute is available on the <gap> element to indicate how much material has been omitted. The <desc> element can be used inside the <gap> element to provide a brief characterisation of the omitted material, as in the following examples:

<p> ... An example of a list appearing in a fief ledger of <name type="place">Koldinghus</name>
  <date>1611/12</date> is given below. It shows cash income from a sale of
  honey.</p><gap extent="50 lines">
  <desc>quotation from ledger (in Danish)</desc>
</gap><p>A description of the overall structure of the account is once again ...
</p>

(The <name> and <date> elements used in this example are discussed further below)

Language corpora (particular those constructed before the widespread use of scanners) often systematically omit figures and mathematics:

<p>At the bottom of your screen below the
  mode line is the <hi>minibuffer</hi>. This is the area where Emacs echoes the
  commands you enter and where you specify filenames for Emacs to find, values for
  search and replace, and so on. <gap reason="graphic">
    <desc>diagram of Emacs screen</desc>
  </gap>
</p>

Abbreviation and their Expansion

Like names, dates, and numbers, abbreviations may be transcribed as they stand or expanded; they may be left unmarked, or encoded using the following elements:

The <abbr> element is useful as a means of distinguishing semi-lexical items such as acronyms or jargon:

Every
manufacturer of <abbr>3GL</abbr> or <abbr>4GL</abbr> languages is currently nailing on
  <abbr>OOP</abbr> extensions

The @type attribute may be used to distinguish types of abbreviation by their function.

The <expan> element is used to mark an expansion supplied by an encoder. This element is particularly useful in the transcription of manuscript materials. For example, the character p with a bar through its descender as a conventional representation for the word "per" is commonly encountered in Medieval European manuscripts. An encoder may choose to expand this as follows: <expan>per</expan>

To record both an abbreviation and its expansion, the <choice> element mentioned above may be used to group the abbreviated form with its proposed expansion:

<choice>
  <abbr>wt</abbr>
  <expan>with</expan>
</choice>

The elements <expan> and <abbr> should contain a full word, or the abbreviated form of a full word respectively. For a fuller discussion of abbreviations and the intricacies of representing them consult the section on Abbreviation and Expansion in the TEI Guidelines.

Names, Codes, and Numbers

The TEI scheme defines elements for a large number of data-like features which may appear almost anywhere within almost any kind of text. These features may be of particular interest in a range of disciplines; they all relate to objects external to the text itself, such as the names of persons and places, strings of code, formulae, or numbers and dates. These items may also pose particular problems for natural language processing (NLP) applications. The elements described here, by making such features explicit, reduce the complexity of processing texts containing them.

Names and Referring Strings

A referring string is any phrase which refers to some person, place, object, etc. A name is a referring string which contains proper nouns and honorifics only. Two elements are provided to mark such strings:

The @type attribute is used to distinguish amongst (for example) names of persons, places and organizations, where this is possible:

<q>My dear <name type="person">Mr.
Bennet</name>, </q>said his lady to him one day, <q>have you heard that <name type="place">Netherfield Park</name> is let at last?</q>

It being one of the principles of the
  <name type="org">Circumlocution Office</name> never, on any account whatsoever, to
give a straightforward answer, <name type="person">Mr Barnacle</name> said,
  <q>Possibly.</q>

As the following example shows, the <rs> element may be used for a reference to a person, place, etc., which does not contain a proper noun or noun phrase:

<q>My dear <name type="person">Mr.
Bennet</name>,</q> said <rs type="person">his lady</rs> to him one day...

Simply tagging something as a name is rarely enough to enable automatic processing of personal names into the canonical forms usually required for reference purposes. The name as it appears in the text may be inconsistently spelled, partial, or vague. Moreover, name prefixes such as van or de la, may or may not be included as part of the reference form of a name, depending on the language and country of origin of the bearer.

The @ref attribute provides a way of linking a name with a description of the object being named, and may thus act as a normalized identifier for it. It is also very useful as a means of gathering together all references to the same individual or location scattered throughout a document:

<q>My dear <name type="person" ref="#BENM1">Mr. Bennet</name>, </q> said <rs type="person" ref="#BENM2">his lady</rs> to him
one day, <q>have you heard that <name type="place" ref="#NETP1">Netherfield
    Park</name> is let at last?</q>

The values used for the @ref attribute here ("#BENM1" etc.) are pointers; in this case indicating an element with the identifier "BENM1" etc. somewhere in the current document, though any form of URI could be used. The element indicated will typically (for a person) be a <person> element, listed within a <particDesc> element, or (for a place) a <place> element, listed within a <settingDesc> element in the TEI header, as further discussed in The Profile Description below.

This use should be distinguished from the case of the <reg> (regularization) element, which provides a means of marking the standard form of a referencing string as demonstrated below:

<name type="person" ref="#WADLM1"><choice>
    <orig>Walter de la Mare</orig>
    <reg>de la Mare, Walter</reg>
  </choice></name> was born at <name ref="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Charlton,_London" type="place">Charlton</name>,
in <name type="place">Kent</name>, in 1873.

Formulae, Codes, and Special Characters

The following elements may be useful when marking up sequences of text that represent mathematical expressions, chemical formulae, and the like:

In many cases, a simple Unicode character suffices to represent the superscript or subscript digits and other symbols which may appear inside a mathematical formula: <formula>E=mc²</formula> In other more complex cases, the encoder may choose to use a different XML scheme (such as MathML) to encode the content of a formula, or a non-XML notation. These possibilities are not discussed further here.

The <g> element is useful in the case that no Unicode character exists to represent the character or glyph required. Its @ref attribute can be used to point to a definition of the symbol intended, while its content (if any) represents a Unicode approximation to it:

...Thereto
<g ref="#air">[air]</g> and ...

The TEI header provides a number of additional elements for the definition of such non-Unicode characters, as further discussed in section The character declaration below.

The following elements are useful for stretches of code or similar formal language appearing within a text:

This can be expressed in XML as follows:
             <code>&amp;lt;date notBefore="2016-06-23"/&gt;</code> Contact the author at
             <email>lou.burnard@gmail.com</email>

Note in this example that characters which have a syntactic function in XML (such as the ampersand or the angle bracket) must be represented within a TEI simplePrint document by means of an entity reference such as &lt; or &amp;.

The element <ref> discussed in section Cross References and Links should be used to represent a coded reference such as a link given as a URL within a text, either as content or as an attribute value:

<p>Further discussion of <ref target="http://www.tei-c.org/">the Text Encoding
    Initiative website</ref> may be found at <ref>http://www.tei-c.org/</ref></p>

Dates and Times

The following elements are provided for the detailed encoding of times and dates:

These elements have a number of attributes which can be used to provide normalized versions of their values in various ways. The @when attribute specifies a normalized form for the date or time, using one of the standard formats defined by ISO 8601. Partial dates or times (e.g. 1990, September 1990, twelvish) can be expressed by omitting a part of the value supplied, as in the following examples:

<date when="1980-02-21">21 Feb
1980</date><date when="1990">1990</date><date when="1990-09">September
1990</date><date when="--09">September</date><date when="2001-09-11T12:48:00">Sept
11th, 12 minutes before 9 am</date>

These attributes are typically used to make a date or time more easily processable, as in the following examples:

Given on the
<date when="1977-06-12">Twelfth Day of June in the Year of Our Lord One Thousand
Nine Hundred and Seventy-seven of the Republic the Two Hundredth and first and of
the University the Eighty-Sixth.</date>

<l>specially when it's nine below zero</l>
<l>and <time when="15:00:00">three o'clock in the afternoon</time></l>

They are also useful in cases where the date concerned is uncertain or only vaguely specified: <p>... <date period="secondEmpire">during the second empire</date></p>

<date notAfter="1946-12-09" notBefore="1946-11-01">in the weeks shortly before my
  birth</date>

Numbers and Measurements

Like dates, both numbers and quantities can be written with either letters or digits and may therefore need to be normalized for ease of processing. Their presentation is also highly language-dependent (e.g. English 5th becomes Greek 5.; English 123,456.78 equals French 123.456,78).

The following elements are provided for the detailed encoding of numbers and quantities:

For example: <num value="33">xxxiii</num><num type="cardinal" value="21">twenty-one</num><num type="percentage" value="10">ten percent</num><num type="percentage" value="10">10%</num><num type="ordinal" value="5">5th</num>

<measure quantity="40" unit="hogshead" commodity="rum">2 score hh rum</measure>
<measure quantity="1" unit="dozen" commodity="blooms">1 doz. roses</measure>
<measure quantity="1" unit="count" commodity="blooms">a yellow tulip</measure>

Lists

The element <list> is used to mark any kind of list. A list is a sequence of text items, which may be numbered, bulleted, or arranged as a glossary list. Each item may be preceded by an item label (in a glossary list, this label is the term being defined):

Individual list items are tagged with <item>. The first <item> may optionally be preceded by a <head>, which gives a heading for the list. The numbering of items within the list may be omitted, indicated using the @n attribute on each item, or (rarely) tagged as content using the <label> element. The following are all thus equivalent:

<list>
  <head>A short list</head>
  <item>First item in list.</item>
  <item>Second item in list.</item>
  <item>Third item in list.</item>
</list><list>
  <head>A short list</head>
  <item n="1">First item in list.</item>
  <item n="2">Second item in list.</item>
  <item n="3">Third item in list.</item>
</list><list>
  <head>A short list</head>
  <label>1</label>
  <item>First item in list.</item>
  <label>2</label>
  <item>Second item in list.</item>
  <label>3</label>
  <item>Third item in list.</item>
</list>

The styles should not be mixed in the same list.

A simple two-column table may be treated as a glossary list, tagged <list type="gloss">. Here, each item comprises a term and a gloss, marked with <label> and <item> respectively.

<list type="gloss">
  <head>Vocabulary</head>
  <label xml:lang="enm">nu</label>
  <item>now</item>
  <label xml:lang="enm">lhude</label>
  <item>loudly</item>
  <label xml:lang="enm">bloweth</label>
  <item>blooms</item>
  <label xml:lang="enm">med</label>
  <item>meadow</item>
  <label xml:lang="enm">wude</label>
  <item>wood</item>
  <label xml:lang="enm">awe</label>
  <item>ewe</item>

</list>

Where the internal structure of a list item is more complex, it may be preferable to regard the list as a table, for which special-purpose tagging is defined in section Tables.

Lists of whatever kind can, of course, nest within list items to any depth required. Here, for example, a glossary list contains two items, each of which is itself a simple list:

<list type="gloss">
  <label>EVIL</label>
  <item><list type="simple">
      <item>I am cast upon a horrible desolate island, void of all hope of
        recovery.</item>
      <item>I am singled out and separated as it were from all the world to be
        miserable.</item>
      <item>I am divided from mankind — a solitaire; one banished from human
        society.</item>
    </list></item>
  <label>GOOD</label>
  <item><list type="simple">
      <item>But I am alive; and not drowned, as all my ship's company were.</item>
      <item>But I am singled out, too, from all the ship's crew, to be spared from
        death...</item>
      <item>But I am not starved, and perishing on a barren place, affording no
        sustenances....</item>
    </list></item>
</list>

Lists of bibliographic items should be tagged using the <listBibl> element, described in the next section.

Bibliographic Citations

It is often useful to distinguish bibliographic citations where they occur within texts being transcribed for research, if only so that they will be properly formatted when the text is printed out. The element <bibl> is provided for this purpose. Where the components of a bibliographic reference are to be distinguished, the following elements may be used as appropriate. It is generally useful to distinguish at least those parts (such as the titles of articles, books, and journals) which will need special formatting. The other elements are provided for cases where particular interest attaches to such details:

Consider, for example the following editorial note: He was a member of Parliament for Warwickshire in 1445, and died March 14, 1470 (according to Kittredge, Harvard Studies 5. 88ff). This might be encoded as follows:

He was a member of Parliament for Warwickshire
in 1445, and died March 14, 1470 (according to <bibl><author>Kittredge</author>,
    <title>Harvard Studies</title> 5. 88ff</bibl>).

The bibliographic elements listed above are particularly useful in a born digital document which contains a bibliography encoded using the <listBibl> element. Entries in the bibliography should be given an identifier, which can then be used as the target of cross references from elsewhere in the document:

<p>Perec citing, amongst others <ref target="#MK_73">Sturm und Drang, 1973</ref>,
  concludes ... </p>

A <bibl> element may contain simply text, with possibly a few of its components distinguished by tagging, and much use of conventionalized punctuation, as in this example:

<bibl xml:id="MK_73">Sturm, U. &amp; Drang, F. : <title>Musikalische
  Katastrophe</title>. (Berlin, W. de Gruyter, 1973)</bibl>

Alternatively, each of the components of the bibliographic reference may be clearly distinguished by tagging; in this case there is no requirement for conventionalized punctuation, since the processor will be able to generate this appropriately:

<bibl xml:id="MK73"><author>Sturm, U.</author>
  <author>Drang, F.</author>
  <title xml:lang="de" level="m">Musikalische Katastrophe</title>
  <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>
  <publisher>W. de Gruyter</publisher>
  <date>1973</date></bibl>

The element <biblFull> is also provided for convience in cases where bibliographic citations following a more sophisticated model have been used; it is permitted only in the TEI header.

The <listBibl> element is used to group lists of bibliographic citations. It may contain a series of <bibl> or <biblFull> elements.

Tables

The following elements are provided for the description of tabular matter, commonly found in many kinds of narrative text. Note that TEI simplePrint provides no sophisticated ways of describing the detailed layout of a table beyond its organization into rows and columns.

The @role attribute may be used on either <cell> or <row>to indicate the function of a cell, or of a row of cells. Its values should be taken from the following list:

"data"
- data cell
"label"
- label cell
"sum"
- row or column sum data
"total"
- table total data

For example, Defoe uses mortality tables like the following in the Journal of the Plague Year to show the rise and ebb of the epidemic:

<p>It was indeed coming on amain, for the
  burials that same week were in the next adjoining parishes thus:— <table rows="5" cols="4">
    <row role="data">
      <cell role="label">St. Leonard's, Shoreditch</cell>
      <cell>64</cell>
      <cell>84</cell>
      <cell>119</cell>
    </row>
    <row role="data">
      <cell role="label">St. Botolph's, Bishopsgate</cell>
      <cell>65</cell>
      <cell>105</cell>
      <cell>116</cell>
    </row>
    <row role="data">
      <cell role="label">St. Giles's, Cripplegate</cell>
      <cell>213</cell>
      <cell>421</cell>
      <cell>554</cell>
    </row>
  </table></p><p>This shutting up of houses was at first counted a very cruel and
  unchristian method, and the poor people so confined made bitter lamentations. ...
</p>

Figures and Graphics

Not all the components of a document are necessarily textual. The most straightforward text will often contain diagrams or illustrations, to say nothing of documents in which image and text are inextricably intertwined, or electronic resources in which the two are complementary.

The encoder may simply record the presence of a graphic within the text, possibly with a brief description of its content, and may also provide a link to a digitized version of the graphic, using the following elements:

Any textual information accompanying the graphic, such as a heading and/or caption, may be included within the <figure> element itself, in a <head> and one or more <p> elements, as may any text appearing within the graphic itself. It is strongly recommended that a prose description of the image be supplied, as the content of a <figDesc> element, for the use of applications which are not able to render the graphic, and to render the document accessible to vision-impaired readers. (Such text is not normally considered part of the document proper.)

The simplest use for these elements is to mark the position of a graphic and provide a link to it, as in this example:

<pb n="412"/><figure>
  <graphic url="images/p412fig.png" width="40%"/>
</figure>
<pb n="413"/>

This indicates that the graphic contained by the file p412fig.png appears between pages 412 and 413.

The <graphic> element can appear anywhere that textual content is permitted, within but not between paragraphs or headings. In the following example, the encoder has decided to treat a specific printer's ornament as a heading: <head><graphic url="http://www.iath.virginia.edu/gants/Ornaments/Heads/hp-ral02.gif"/></head>

More usually, a graphic will have at the least an identifying title, which may be encoded using the <head> element, or a number of figures may be grouped together in a particular structure, as in the following example: [Mr Fezziwig's Ball: illustration by George Cruikshank from Dickens' A Christmas Carol (1843)] The <figure> element provides a means of wrapping one or more such elements together as a kind of graphic block. It may also include a brief description of the image:

<figure>
  <graphic url="images/fezzipic.png"/>
  <head>Mr Fezziwig's Ball</head>
  <figDesc>A Cruikshank engraving showing Mr Fezziwig leading a group of
    revellers.</figDesc>
</figure>

These cases should be carefully distinguished from the case where an encoded text is complemented by a collection of digital images, maintained as a distinct resource. The @facs attribute may be used to associate any element in an encoded text with a digital facsimile of it. In the simplest case, the @facs attribute on the <pb> element may be used to supply a location for an image file corresponding with that point in the text:

<div>
  <pb facs="page1.png" n="1"/>

  <pb facs="page2.png" n="2"/>

</div>

This method is only appropriate in the simple case where each digital image file page1.png etc. corresponds with a single transcribed and encoded page. If multiple images are provided for each page, or more detailed alignment of image and transcription is required, for example because the image files actually represent double page spreads, more sophisticated mechanisms are needed, as further discussed in Encoding a Digital Facsimile below.

Analysis

Orthographic Sentences

Interpretation typically ranges across the whole of a text, with no particular respect to other structural units. A useful preliminary to intensive interpretation is therefore to segment the text into discrete and identifiable units, each of which can then bear a label for use as a sort of canonical reference. To facilitate such uses, these units may not cross each other, nor nest within each other. They may conveniently be represented using the following element:

As the name suggests, the <s> element is most commonly used (in linguistic applications at least) for marking orthographic sentences, that is, units defined by orthographic features such as punctuation. For example, the passage from Jane Eyre discussed earlier might be divided into s-units as follows:

<div type="chapter" n="38">
  <pb n="474"/>
  <p><s n="001">Reader, I married him.</s><s n="002">A quiet wedding we had:</s><s n="003">he and I, the parson and clerk, were alone present.</s><s n="004">When
      we got back from church, I went into the kitchen of the manor-house, where Mary
      was cooking the dinner, and John cleaning the knives, and I said —</s></p>
  <p><q><s n="005">Mary, I have been married to Mr Rochester this morning.</s></q> ...
  </p>
</div>

Note that <s> elements cannot nest: the beginning of one <s> element implies that the previous one has finished. When s-units are tagged as shown above, it is advisable to tag the entire text end-to-end, so that every word in the text being analyzed will be contained by exactly one <s> element, whose identifier can then be used to specify a unique reference for it. If the identifiers used are unique within the document, then the @xml:id attribute might be used in preference to the @n attribute used in the above example.

Words and Punctuation

Tokenization, that is, the identification of lexical or non-lexical tokens within a text, is a very common requirement for all kinds of textual analysis, and not an entirely trivial one. The decision as to whether, for example, can't in English or du in French should be treated as one word or two is not simple. Consequently it is often useful to make explicit the preferred tokenization in a marked up text. The following elements are available for this purpose:

For example, the output from a part of speech tagger might be recorded in TEI simplePrint as follows:

<s n="1">
  <w ana="#NP0">Marley</w>
  <w ana="#VBD">was</w>
  <w ana="#AJ0">dead</w><pc>:</pc>
  <w ana="#TO0">to</w>
  <w ana="#VBB">begin</w>
  <w ana="#PRP">with</w>
  <pc ana="#SENT">.</pc>
</s>

In this example, each token in the input has been decorated with an automatically generated part of speech code, using the @ana attribute discussed in section Special Kinds of Linking above. The system has also distinguished between tokens to be treated as words (tagged <w>) and tokens considered to be punctuation (tagged <pc>). It may also sometimes be useful to distinguish tokens which consist of a single letter or character: the <c> element is provided for this purpose.

The <w> also provides for each word to be associated with a root form or lemma, either explicitly using the @lemma attribute, or by reference, using the @lemmaRef attribute, as in this example: ...<w ana="#VBD" lemma="be" lemmaRef="http://www.myLexicon.com/be">was</w> ...

General-Purpose Interpretation Elements

The <w> element is a specialisation of the <seg> element which has already been introduced for use in identifying otherwise unmarked targets of cross references and hypertext links (see section Cross References and Links); it can be used to distinguish any portion of text to which the encoder wishes to assign a user-specified @type or a unique identifier; it may thus be used to tag textual features for which there is no other provision in the published TEI Guidelines.

For example, the TEI Guidelines provide no apostrophe element to mark parts of a literary text in which the narrator addresses the reader (or hearer) directly. One approach might be to regard these as instances of the <q> element, distinguished from others by an appropriate value for the @who attribute. A possibly simpler, and certainly more general, solution would however be to use the <seg> element as follows:

<div type="chapter" n="38">
  <p><seg type="apostrophe">Reader, I married him.</seg> A quiet wedding we had:
    ...</p>
</div>

The @type attribute on the <seg> element can take any value, and so can be used to distinguish phrase-level phenomena of any kind; it is good practice to record the values used and their significance in the TEI header or in the documentation of the encoding system.

Common Attributes

Some attributes are available on many elements, though not on all. These attributes are defined using a TEI attribute class, a concept which is discussed further in the TEI Guidelines. We list here some attribute classes which have been adapted or customized for use in TEI simplePrint.

The elements <add>, <figure>, <fw>, <label>, <note> and <stage> all take the attribute @place to indicate whereabouts on the page they appear. In TEI simplePrint the possible values for this attribute are limited as indicated below:

above
- above the line
below
- below the line
top
- at the top of the page
top-right
- at the top right of the page
top-left
- at the top left of the page
top-centre
- at the top center of the page
bottom-right
- at the bottom right of the page
bottom-left
- at the bottom left of the page
bottom-centre
- at the bottom centre of the page
bottom
- at the foot of the page
tablebottom
- underneath a table
margin-right
- in the right-hand margin
margin
- in the outer margin
margin-inner
- in the inner margin
margin-left
- in the left-hand margin
opposite
- on the opposite, i.e. facing, page
overleaf
- on the other side of the leaf
overstrike
- superimposed on top of the current context
end
- at the end of the volume
divend
- at the end of the current division
parend
- at the end of the current paragraph
inline
- within the body of the text
inspace
- in a predefined space, for example left by an earlier scribe
block
- formatted as an indented paragraph

The elements <add>, <am>, <corr>, <date>, <del>, <ex>, <expan>, <gap>, <name>, <reg>, <space>, <subst>, <supplied>, <time> and <unclear> all use the attribute @unit to indicate the units in which the size of the feature concerned is expressed. In TEI simplePrint the possible values for this attribute are limited as indicated below:

chars
- characters
lines
- lines
pages
- pages
words
- words
cm
- centimetres
mm
- millimetres
in
- inches

Very many TEI elements take the value @type (see the specification for att.typed for a full list). In most cases, no constraint is placed on the possible values for this attribute. In the case of the element <name> however, the possible values for this attribute are limited as indicated below:

person
- person
forename
- forename
surname
- surname
personGenName
- generational name component
personRoleName
- role or position in society
personAddName
- additional name component (e.g. nickname)
nameLink
- connecting link within a name (e.g. van der)
org
- organization
country
- country
placeGeog
- geographical name
place
- place

Composite and Floating Texts

A composite text, like a simple text, has an optional front and back matter. In between however, instead of a single body, it contains one or more discrete texts, each with its own optional front and back matter. The following elements are provided to handle composite texts of various kinds.

A typical example might be an anthology containing several distinct works, or any other kind of collection, encoded using an overall structure like this:

<TEI>
  <teiHeader/>
  <text>
    <front/>
    <group>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>

    </group>
    <back/>
  </text>
</TEI>

A different kind of composite text occurs when one text is embedded within another, as for example in the Arabian Nights or similar collections of stories, or in other cases where one narrative is interrupted by another. The element <floatingText> may be preferred to encode such materials as the following:

<p>The Gentleman having finish'd his Story, Galecia waited on him to the Stairs-head;
  and at her return, casting her Eyes on the Table, she saw lying there an old dirty
  rumpled Book, and found in it the following story:</p>
<floatingText>
  <body>
    <p>IN the time of the Holy War when Christians from all parts went into the Holy
      Land to oppose the Turks; Amongst these there was a certain English Knight...</p>

    <p>The King graciously pardoned the Knight; Richard was kindly receiv'd into his
      Convent, and all things went on in good order: But from hence came the Proverb, We
      must not strike <hi>Robert</hi> for <hi>Richard.</hi>
    </p>
  </body>
</floatingText>
<pb n="43"/>
<p>By this time Galecia's Maid brought up her Supper; after which she cast her Eyes
  again on the foresaid little Book, where she found the following Story ....</p>

Note that there is only a single TEI header for composite texts of either kind, since the assumption is that the composite is at some level describable as a single work. However, it is also possible to define a composite of complete TEI texts, each with its own TEI header. Such a collection is known as a TEI corpus, and must itself have a TEI header:

<teiCorpus>
  <teiHeader/>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
</teiCorpus>

It is also possible to create a composite of corpora -- that is, one <teiCorpus> element may contain many nested <teiCorpus> elements rather than many nested <TEI> elements, to any depth considered necessary.

Front and Back Matter

Front Matter

For many purposes, particularly in older texts, the preliminary material such as title pages, prefatory epistles, etc., may provide very useful additional linguistic or social information.The TEI Guidelines provide a set of recommendations for distinguishing the textual elements most commonly encountered in front matter, which are summarized here.

Title Page

The start of a title page should be marked with the element <titlePage>. All text contained on the page should be transcribed and tagged with the appropriate element from the following list:

Typeface distinctions should be marked with the @rendition attribute when necessary, as described above though a very detailed description of the letter spacing and sizing used in ornamental titles is not easily done. Changes of language should be marked by appropriate use of the @xml:lang attribute or the <foreign> element, as necessary. Names of people, places, or organizations, may be tagged using the <name> element wherever they appear if no other more specific element is available.

Two example title pages follow:

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart type="main">PARADISE REGAIN'D. A POEM In IV
      <hi>BOOKS</hi>.</titlePart>
    <titlePart>To which is added <title>SAMSON AGONISTES</title>.</titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <byline>The Author <docAuthor>JOHN MILTON</docAuthor></byline>
  <docImprint><name>LONDON</name>, Printed by <name>J.M.</name> for <name>John
      Starkey</name> at the <name>Mitre</name> in <name>Fleetstreet</name>, near
      <name>Temple-Bar.</name></docImprint>
  <docDate>MDCLXXI</docDate>
</titlePage>

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart type="main">Lives of the Queens of England, from the Norman
      Conquest;</titlePart>
    <titlePart type="sub">with anecdotes of their courts.</titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <titlePart>Now first published from Official Records and other authentic documents
    private as well as public.</titlePart>
  <docEdition>New edition, with corrections and additions</docEdition>
  <byline>By <docAuthor>Agnes Strickland</docAuthor></byline>
  <epigraph>
    <q>The treasures of antiquity laid up in old historic rolls, I opened.</q>
    <bibl>BEAUMONT</bibl>
  </epigraph>
  <docImprint>Philadelphia: Blanchard and Lea</docImprint>
  <docDate>1860.</docDate>
</titlePage>

As elsewhere, the @ref attribute may be used to link a name with a canonical definition of the entity being named. For example: <byline>By <docAuthor><name ref="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agnes_Strickland">Agnes Strickland</name></docAuthor></byline>

Prefatory Matter

Major blocks of text within the front matter should be marked using <div> elements; the following suggested values for the @type attribute may be used to distinguish various common types of prefatory matter:

preface
- A foreword or preface addressed to the reader in which the author or publisher explains the content, purpose, or origin of the text.
dedication
- A formal offering or dedication of a text to one or more persons or institutions by the author.
abstract
- A summary of the content of a text as continuous prose.
ack
- A formal declaration of acknowledgment by the author in which persons and institutions are thanked for their part in the creation of a text.
contents
- A table of contents, specifying the structure of a work and listing its constituents. The <list> element should be used to mark its structure.
frontispiece
- A pictorial frontispiece, possibly including some text.

Where other kinds of prefatory matter are encountered, the encoder is at liberty to invent other values for the @type attribute.

Liminal Elements

All text divisions, whether in front matter or elsewhere, may begin and end with one or more components which we term liminal elements, because they begin or end the division. A typical example is a heading or title of some kind which should be tagged using the <head> element; but there are many other possibilities:

As an example, the beginning and end of the dedication to Milton's Comus might be marked up as follows:

<div type="dedication">
  <head>To the Right Honourable <name>JOHN Lord Viscount BRACLY</name>, Son and Heir
    apparent to the Earl of Bridgewater, &amp;c.</head>
  <salute>MY LORD,</salute>
  <p>THis <hi>Poem</hi>, which receiv'd its first occasion of Birth from your Self,
    and others of your Noble Family .... and as in this representation your
    attendant <name>Thyrsis</name>, so now in all reall expression</p>
  <closer>
    <salute>Your faithfull, and most humble servant</salute>
    <signed>
      <name>H. LAWES.</name>
    </signed>
  </closer>
</div>

Back Matter

Structural Divisions of Back Matter

Because of variations in publishing practice, back matter can contain virtually any of the elements listed above for front matter, and the same elements should be used where this is so. Additionally, back matter may contain the following types of matter within the <back> element. Like the structural divisions of the body, these should be marked as <div> elements, and distinguished by the following suggested values of the @type attribute:

appendix
- An ancillary self-contained section of a work, often providing additional but in some sense extra-canonical text.
glossary
- A list of terms associated with definition texts (glosses): this should be encoded as a <list type="gloss"> element.
notes
- A section in which textual or other kinds of notes are gathered together.
bibliogr
- A list of bibliographic citations: this should be encoded as a <listBibl>.
index
- Any form of pre-existing index to the work
colophon
- A statement appearing at the end of a book describing the conditions of its physical production.

Specialized Front and Back Matter

TEI simplePrint also provides elements for some additional components of front or back matter which are characteristic of particular kinds of text, in particular old play texts. These often include lists of dramatis personae and notes about the setting of a play, for which the following elements are provided:

Note that these elements are intended for use in marking up cast lists and setting notes as they appear in a source document. They are not intended for use when marking up definitive lists of the different roles identified in a play, except in so far as that may have been their original purpose.

The following example shows one way of encoding the last part of Shakespeare's Tempest, as printed in the first folio:

<back>
  <div type="epilogue">
    <head>Epilogue, spoken by Prospero.</head>
    <sp>
      <l>Now my Charmes are all ore-throwne,</l>
      <l>And what strength I have's mine owne</l>
      <l>As you from crimes would pardon'd be,</l>
      <l>Let your Indulgence set me free.</l>
    </sp>
    <stage>Exit</stage>
  </div>
  <set>
    <p>The Scene, an un-inhabited Island.</p>
  </set>
  <castList>
    <head>Names of the Actors.</head>
    <castItem>Alonso, K. of Naples</castItem>
    <castItem>Sebastian, his Brother.</castItem>
    <castItem>Prospero, the right Duke of Millaine.</castItem>

  </castList>
  <trailer>FINIS</trailer>
</back>

Encoding a Digital Facsimile

The following elements may be used to encode a text represented by a collection of digital images, either alone or in conjunction with a textual transcription.

As mentioned in section Figures and Graphics above, a TEI simplePrint document may reference a set of page images, alone, or in combination with a transcription. For ease of management, it is strongly recommended that the <graphic> elements representing those page images be grouped together within a <facsimile> element, as in the following example:

<facsimile>
  <graphic url="page1.png" xml:id="pg1"/>
  <graphic url="page2.png" xml:id="pg2"/>
</facsimile>

If a transcription is supplied in addition, the @xml:id values can be used to align the page breaks within it with the relevant image, rather than using the URL given on the <graphic> element.

<text>

  <pb facs="#page1"/>

  <pb facs="#page2"/>

</text>

The <surface> element is useful in two situations: when it is desired to group different images of the same page, for example of different resolutions; and when it is desired to align parts of a page image with parts of a transcription. The <zone> element is used to define (and hence provide an identifier for) the location of a part of an image with reference to the surface on which it appears.

In this example, a thumbnail and a high resolution image are associated with the same surface:

<facsimile>
  <surface>
    <graphic xml:id="page1T" url="thumbs/page1.png"/>
    <graphic xml:id="page1" url="page1.png"/>
  </surface>
</facsimile>

In this example, the <head> element in the transcription is aligned with the top half of a square image:

<facsimile>
  <surface ulx="1" uly="1" lrx="4" lry="4">
    <graphic url="page1.png" xml:id="page1"/>
    <zone xml:id="topHalfP1" ulx="1" uly="1" lrx="2" lry="4"/>
  </surface>
</facsimile>
<text>
  <body>

    <pb facs="#page1"/>
    <head facs="#topHalfP1">Text of Heading</head>

  </body>
</text>

A more detailed explanation of the use of these attributes and other associated elements is given in the full TEI Guidelines.

The Electronic Title Page

Every TEI text has a header which provides information analogous to that provided by the title page of printed text. The header is introduced by the element <teiHeader> and has four major parts:

A corpus or collection of texts with many shared characteristics may have one header for the corpus and individual headers for each component of the corpus. In this case the @type attribute indicates the type of header. <teiHeader type="corpus"> introduces the header for corpus-level information.

Some of the header elements contain running prose which consists of one or more <p>s. Others are grouped:

- Elements whose names end in Stmt (for statement) usually enclose a group of elements recording some structured information.
- Elements whose names end in Decl (for declaration) enclose information about specific encoding practices.
- Elements whose names end in Desc (for description) contain a prose description.

The File Description

The <fileDesc> element is mandatory. It contains a full bibliographic description of the file with the following elements:

A minimal TEI header has the following structure:

<teiHeader>
  <fileDesc>
    <titleStmt/>
    <publicationStmt/>
    <sourceDesc/>
  </fileDesc>
</teiHeader>

The Title Statement

The following elements can be used in the <titleStmt> to provide information about the title of a work and those responsible for its content:

The title of a digital resource derived from a non-digital original may be similar to that of its source but should be distinct from it, for example:
[title of
               source]: TEI XML edition
or
A machine readable version of: [title of
                source]

The generic <respStmt> element may be used to indicate any kind of responsibility, ranging from a funder or sponsor to an illustrator or editor. It contains the following subcomponents: Example:

<titleStmt>
  <title>Two stories by Edgar Allen Poe </title>
  <author>Poe, Edgar Allen (1809-1849)</author>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>TEI encoding</resp>
    <name>James D. Benson</name>
  </respStmt>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>Funding </resp>
    <name>Getty Foundation</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>

The Edition Statement

The <editionStmt> groups information relating to one edition of the digital resource (where edition is used as elsewhere in bibliography), and may include the following elements:

Example:

<editionStmt>
  <edition n="U2">Third draft, substantially revised <date>1987</date>
  </edition>
</editionStmt>

Determining exactly what constitutes a new edition of an electronic text is left to the encoder.

The Extent Statement

The <extent> statement describes the approximate size of the digital resource.

Example:

<extent>15 Mb
</extent>

The Publication Statement

The <publicationStmt> is mandatory. It may contain a simple prose description or groups of the elements described below:

At least one of these elements must be present, unless the entire publication statement is in prose. The following elements may occur within them:

Example:

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>University of Victoria Humanities Computing and Media
    Centre</publisher>
  <pubPlace>Victoria, BC</pubPlace>
  <date>2011</date>
  <availability status="restricted">
    <licence target="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"> Distributed
      under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License
    </licence>
  </availability>
</publicationStmt>

Series and Notes Statements

The <seriesStmt> element groups information about the series, if any, to which a publication belongs. It may contain <title>, <idno>, or <respStmt> elements.

The <notesStmt>, if used, contains one or more <note> elements which contain a note or annotation. Some information found in the notes area in conventional bibliography has been assigned specific elements in the TEI scheme.

The Source Description

The <sourceDesc> is a mandatory element which records details of the source or sources from which the computer file is derived. It may contain simple prose or a bibliographic citation, using one or more of the following elements:

Examples:

<sourceDesc>
  <bibl>The first folio of Shakespeare, prepared by Charlton Hinman (The Norton
    Facsimile, 1968)</bibl>
</sourceDesc>

<sourceDesc>
  <bibl>
    <author>CNN Network News</author>
    <title>News headlines</title>
    <date>12 Jun 1989</date>
  </bibl>
</sourceDesc>

The Encoding Description

The <encodingDesc> element specifies the methods and editorial principles which governed the transcription of the text. Its use is highly recommended. It may be prose description or may contain more specialized elements chosen from the following list:

Project Description and Sampling Declaration

Examples of <projectDesc> and <samplingDecl>:

<encodingDesc>
  <projectDesc>
    <p>Texts collected for use in the Claremont Shakespeare Clinic, June 1990. </p>
  </projectDesc>
</encodingDesc>

<encodingDesc>
  <samplingDecl>
    <p>Samples of 2000 words taken from the beginning of the text</p>
  </samplingDecl>
</encodingDesc>

Editorial Declarations

The <editorialDecl> contains a prose description of the practices used when encoding the text. Typically this description should cover such topics as the following, each of which may conveniently be given as a separate paragraph:

correction
- how and under what circumstances corrections have been made in the text.
normalization
- the extent to which the original source has been regularized or normalized.
quotation
- what has been done with quotation marks in the original -- have they been retained or replaced by entity references, are opening and closing quotes distinguished, etc.
hyphenation
- what has been done with hyphens (especially end-of-line hyphens) in the original -- have they been retained, replaced by entity references, etc.
segmentation
- how has the text has been segmented, for example into sentences, tone-units, graphemic strata, etc.
interpretation
- what analytic or interpretive information has been added to the text.

Example:

<editorialDecl>
  <p>The part of speech analysis applied throughout section 4 was added by hand and
    has not been checked.</p>
  <p>Errors in transcription controlled by using the WordPerfect spelling
    checker.</p>
  <p>All words converted to Modern American spelling using Webster's 9th Collegiate
    dictionary.</p>
</editorialDecl>

The full TEI Guidelines provide specialized elements for each of the topics above; these are not however included in TEI simplePrint.

Tagging Declaration

When it does not consist simply of a prose description, the <tagsDecl> element may contain a number of more specialized elements providing additional information about how the document concerned has been marked up. The following elements may be used:

Here is a simple example, showing how these elements may be used. It indicates the number of times the elements <hi> and <title> from the TEI namespace have been used in the document. It also documents how the way that the source document was originally printed has been represented using TEI tagging:

<tagsDecl partial="true">
  <rendition xml:id="rend-bo">font-weight:bold</rendition>
  <rendition xml:id="rend-it" selector="hi, title">font-style:italic</rendition>
  <namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
    <tagUsage gi="hi" occurs="467"/>
    <tagUsage gi="title" occurs="45"/>
  </namespace>
</tagsDecl>

The <rendition> elements here contain fragments expressed in the W3C standard Cascading Stylesheets language (CSS). Their function here is to associate the particular styles concerned with an identifier (for example rend-bo) which can then be pointed to from elsewhere within the document by means of the @rendition attribute mentioned in section Changes of Typeface, etc. above. To indicate, for example, that a particular name in the document was rendered in a bold font it might be tagged <name rendition="#rend-bo">. The @selector attribute used in the preceding example is used to indicate once for all a default rendition value to be associated with several elements: in this example, unless otherwise indicated, it is assumed that the content of each <hi> and each <title> element was originally rendered using an italic font.

For TEI simplePrint, a large set of such rendition definitions has been predefined. The encoder is not therefore required to supply any detailed declarations, but can refer to the predefined list using the following list:

simple:allcaps
- all capitals
simple:blackletter
- black letter or gothic typeface
simple:bold
- bold typeface
simple:bottombraced
- marked with a brace under the bottom of the text
simple:boxed
- border around the text
simple:centre
- centred text
simple:cursive
- cursive typeface
simple:display
- block display
simple:doublestrikethrough
- strikethrough with double line
simple:doubleunderline
- underlined with double line
simple:dropcap
- initial letter larger or decorated
simple:float
- floated out of main flow
simple:hyphen
- with a hyphen here (e.g. in line break)
simple:inline
- inline rendering
simple:justify
- justified text
simple:italic
- italic typeface
simple:larger
- larger type
simple:left
- aligned to the left or left-justified
simple:leftbraced
- marked with a brace on the left side of the text
simple:letterspace
- larger-than-normal spacing between letters, usually for emphasis
simple:literal
- fixed-width typeface, spacing preserved
simple:normalstyle
- upright shape and default weight of typeface
simple:normalweight
- normal typeface weight
simple:right
- aligned to the right or right-justified
simple:rightbraced
- marked with a brace to the right of the text
simple:rotateleft
- rotated to the left
simple:rotateright
- rotated to the right
simple:smallcaps
- small caps
simple:smaller
- smaller type
simple:strikethrough
- strikethrough
simple:subscript
- subscript
simple:superscript
- superscript
simple:topbraced
- marked with a brace above the text
simple:typewriter
- fixed-width typeface, like typewriter
simple:underline
- underlined with single line
simple:wavyunderline
- underlined with wavy line

The "simple:" prefix used here must be mapped to a location at which the full rendition declaration can be found, by default the XML source of the present document.

Full details of the way these elements may be used are provided in the relevant section of the TEI Guidelines ().

Reference, Prefix, and Classification Declarations

The <refsDecl> element is used to document the way in which any standard referencing scheme built into the encoding works. In its simplest form, it consists of prose description.

Example:

<refsDecl>
  <p>The @n attribute on each &lt;div&gt; element contains the canonical reference for
    each division in the form XX.yyy where XX is the book number in roman numeral
    and yyy is the section number in arabic.</p>
  <p>Milestone tags refer to the edition of 1830 as E30 and that of 1850 as E50.</p>
</refsDecl>

The <listPrefixDef> element contains one or more <prefixDef> elements, each defining a prefix which has been used to abbreviate references to other documents, for example as the value of a @target or other pointing attribute. The definition provides information about how the prefix can be translated automatically into a full URL, as in the following example:

<listPrefixDef>
  <prefixDef ident="psn" matchPattern="([A-Z]+)" replacementPattern="http://www.example.com/personography.xml#$1"/>
</listPrefixDef>

In this case, a pointer value in the form "psn:MDH" would be translated to http://www.example.com/personography.xml#MDH.

The <classDecl> element groups together definitions or sources for any descriptive classification schemes or taxonomies used by other parts of the header. These schemes may be defined in a number of different ways, using one or more of the following elements:

In the simplest case, the taxonomy may be defined by a bibliographic reference, as in the following example:

<classDecl>
  <taxonomy xml:id="LC-SH">
    <bibl>Library of Congress Subject Headings </bibl>
  </taxonomy>
</classDecl>

Alternatively, or in addition, the encoder may define a special purpose classification scheme, as in the following example:

<taxonomy xml:id="B">
  <bibl>Brown Corpus</bibl>
  <category xml:id="B.A">
    <catDesc>Press Reportage</catDesc>
    <category xml:id="B.A1">
      <catDesc>Daily</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.A2">
      <catDesc>Sunday</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.A3">
      <catDesc>National</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.A4">
      <catDesc>Provincial</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.A5">
      <catDesc>Political</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.A6">
      <catDesc>Sports</catDesc>
    </category>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="B.D">
    <catDesc>Religion</catDesc>
    <category xml:id="B.D1">
      <catDesc>Books</catDesc>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="B.D2">
      <catDesc>Periodicals and tracts</catDesc>
    </category>
  </category>
</taxonomy>

Linkage between a particular text and a category within such a taxonomy is made by means of the <catRef> element within the <textClass> element, as described in the next section.

The character declaration

As mentioned in section Formulae, Codes, and Special Characters above, the element <g> is used to indicate the presence of a nonstandard character or glyph in a transcription, and to reference a definition or description of it in the Header. These definitions are provided by means of the following specialised elements given within the <charDecl> component of the <encodingDesc>: For example, the alchemical symbol for air might be encoded where it appears in a text using a <g> element, whose @ref attribute might have a value "#air" to link to the following simple definition for the symbol concerned:

<char xml:id="air">
  <unicodeProp name="Name" value="ALCHEMICAL SYMBOL FOR AIR"/>
  <mapping type="standard">🜁</mapping>
</char>

Further details of these and related elements are provided in section of the TEI Guidelines.

The Profile Description

The <profileDesc> element gathers together information about various descriptive aspects of a text. It has the following optional components:

The <creation> element documents where a work was created, even though it may not have been published or recorded there:

Example: <creation><date when="1992-08">August 1992</date><name type="place">Taos, New Mexico</name></creation>

The <abstract> element may be used to provide a brief summary or abstract of the document concerned. It is most usually applied to texts born digital:

<profileDesc>
  <abstract>
    <p>This paper is a draft studying various aspects of using the TEI as a reference
      serialization framework for LMF. Comments are welcome to bring this to a useful
      document for the community.</p>
  </abstract>
</profileDesc>

The <particDesc> element is used to list descriptive information about the real or fictional participants in a text, for example the characters in a novel or a play. It contains at least one <listPerson> element, which contains individual <person> elements. For example:

<profileDesc>
  <particDesc>
    <listPerson>
      <person xml:id="OPI">
        <p><name>Dr Opimian</name>: named for the famous Roman fine wine.</p>
      </person>
      <person xml:id="GRM">
        <p><name>Mr Gryll</name>: named for the mythical Gryllus, one of Ulysses'
          sailors transformed by Circe into a pig, who argues that he was happier in
          that state than as a man.</p>
      </person>
    </listPerson>
  </particDesc>
</profileDesc>

In the same way, the <settingDesc> element can be used to list descriptive information about the real or fictional places mentioned in a text. It contains at least one <listPlace> element, which contains individual <place> elements. For example:

<profileDesc>
  <settingDesc>
    <listPlace>
      <head>Houses mentioned in <title>Pride and Prejudice</title></head>
      <place xml:id="NETF1">
        <p><name>Netherfield Park</name>: home of the Bingleys</p>
      </place>
      <place xml:id="PEMB1">
        <p><name>Pemberley</name>: home of Mr Darcy</p>
      </place>
    </listPlace>
  </settingDesc>
</profileDesc>

The full TEI Guidelines provide a rich range of additional elements to define more structured information about persons and places; these are not however available in TEI Simple.

The <langUsage> element is useful where a text contains many different languages. It may contain <language> elements to document each particular language used: For example, a text containing predominantly text in French as spoken in Quebec, but also smaller amounts of British and Canadian English might be documented as follows:

<langUsage>
  <language ident="fr-CA" usage="60">Québecois</language>
  <language ident="en-CA" usage="20">Canadian Business English</language>
  <language ident="en-GB" usage="20">British English</language>
</langUsage>

The <textClass> element classifies a text. This may be done with reference to a classification system locally defined by means of the <classDecl> element, or by reference to some externally defined established scheme such as the Universal Decimal Classification. Texts may also be classified using lists of keywords, which may themselves be drawn from locally or externally defined control lists. The following elements are used to supply such classifications:

The simplest way of classifying a text is by means of the <classCode> element. For example, a text with classification 410 in the Universal Decimal Classification might be documented as follows: <classCode scheme="http://www.udc.org">410</classCode>

When a classification scheme has been locally defined using the <taxonomy> element discussed in the preceding subsection, the <catRef> element should be used to reference it. To continue the earlier example, a work classified in the Brown Corpus as "Press reportage - Sunday" and also as "Religion" might be documented as follows: <catRef target="#B.A3 #B.D"/>

The element <keywords> contains one or more keywords or phrases identifying the topic or nature of a text, each tagged as a <term>. As usual, the attribute @scheme identifies the source from which these terms are taken. For example, if the LC Subject Headings are used, following declaration of that classification system in a <taxonomy> element as above:

<textClass>
  <keywords scheme="#LCSH">
    <term>English literature</term>
    <term>History and criticism</term>
    <term>Data processing.</term>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

Multiple classifications may be supplied using any of the mechanisms described in this section.

Other forms of metadata

The TEI header was one of the first attempts to provide a full range of metadata elements, but it is by no means the only standard now used for this purpose. To facilitate the management of large digital collections and to simplify interoperability of TEI and non-TEI resources, the following element may be found useful:

A typical use for this element might be to store a set of descriptors conforming to the Dublin Core standard in the TEI header rather than to generate them automatically from the corresponding TEI elements. For examples and discussion, see the TEI Guidelines at

The Revision Description

The <revisionDesc> element provides a change log in which each significant change made to a text may be recorded. It is always the last element in a <teiHeader> and contains the following elements:

Each <change> element contains a brief description of a significant change. The attributes @when and @who may be used to identify when the change was carried out and the person responsible for it.

It is good practice (but not required) to group changes together within a <listChange> element.

Example:

<revisionDesc>
  <listChange>
    <change when="1991-11-11" who="#LB">deleted chapter 10</change>
    <change when="1991-11-02" who="#MSM">completed first draft</change>
  </listChange>
</revisionDesc>

In a production environment it will usually be found preferable to use some kind of automated system to track and record changes. Many such version control systems, as they are known, can also be configured to update the TEI header of a file automatically.

The Simple Processing Model

Unlike most other TEI customizations, TEI simplePrint includes documentation of the intended processing associated with the majority of elements. As noted above, the TEI provides components such as the @rendition attribute to indicate the appearance of particular parts of a document in the non-digital source from which it is derived. With TEI simplePrint, it is also possible to indicate how in general an element should be processed, in particular its intended appearance when processed for display on a screen or on paper. This ability derives from a number of capabilities recently added to the TEI architecture for the specification of processing, which were developed as part of the project that defined the TEI simplePrint schema.

The key feature of this Processing Model is a notation that allows the encoder to associate each element with one or more categories, which we call its behaviours. In addition, the Processing Model indicates how the element should be rendered, possibly differently in differing circumstances, using the W3C Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) mentioned above. It is consequently much easier to develop processors for documents conforming to TEI simplePrint, since the complexity of the task is much reduced.

Twenty-five different behaviours are currently defined by the TEI Processing Model. Their names indicate informally the categorization concerned, and should be readily comprehensible for most programmers. The following table indicates the TEI simplePrint elements associated with each:

Behaviour	Used by	Effect
alternate	choice date	support display of alternative visualizations, for example by displaying the preferred content, by displaying both in parallel, or by toggling between the two.
anchor	anchor	create an identifiable anchor point in the output.
block	address addrLine argument back body byline closer dateline div docTitle epigraph figure floatingText formula front fw group head imprimatur l lg listBibl note opener postscript q quote role roleDesc salute signed sp speaker spGrp stage titlePage titlePart trailer	create a block structure
body	text	create the body of a document
break	cb lb pb	create a line, column, or page break according to the value of type
cell	cell	create a table cell
cit	cit	show the content, with an indication of the source
document	TEI	start a new output document
glyph	g	show a character by looking up reference to a chardesc at the given URI
graphic	graphic	if URL is present, use it to display graphic, else display a placeholder image
heading	head	creates a heading
index	body	generate list according to type
inline	abbr actor add am author bibl biblScope c choice code corr date del desc docAuthor docDate docEdition docImprint editor email ex expan figDesc figure foreign formula fw g gap hi label measure milestone name note num orig pc q quote ref reg relatedItem rhyme rs s salute seg sic signed subst supplied time title unclear w	creates inline element out of content if there's something in <outputRendition>, use that formatting; otherwise just show text of selected content
link	ref	create hyperlink
list	castGroup castList list listBibl	create a list
listItem	bibl castItem item	create a list item
metadata	teiHeader	create metadata section
note	note	create a note, often out of line, depending on the value of place; could be margin, footnote, endnote, inline
omit	author editor publisher pubPlace profileDesc revisionDesc encodingDesc	do nothing, do not process children
paragraph	ab p	create a paragraph out of content
row	row	create a table row
section	div	create a new section of the output document
table	table	create a table
text	title	create literal text
title	fileDesc	create document title

Full documentation of the Processing Model is provided in section of the TEI Guidelines, and we do not describe it further here.

The TEI simplePrint schema

Like other TEI customizations, TEI simplePrint is defined by reference to the TEI Guidelines. The following reference documentation provides formal specifications for each element, model class, attribute class, macro and datatype it uses. These concepts are further explained in the TEI Guidelines.

Specifications are provided here for each component which has been modified for inclusion in TEI simplePrint. Almost every textual element has been modified, if only to include a processing model component. Note that the cross references included in these specifications are to the section of the full TEI Guidelines where the subject is treated, and not to sections of the present document.

att.anchoring
anchoring
provides attributes for use on annotations, e.g. notes and groups of notes describing the existence and position of an anchor for annotations.
@anchored
anchored
verankert
indicates whether the copy text shows the exact place of reference for the note.
indique si l'exemplaire du texte montre l'emplacement de référence exact pour la note
indica si el texto de copia muestra el lugar exacto de referencia para una nota.
說明來源文件是否指出附註的確切參照位置。
indica se il testo copia mostra l'esatta posizione di riferimento della nota.
当該注釈がある場所への参照は、正確にその場所を示しているかどうか。
gibt an, ob eine Vorlage den exakten Referenzort der Anmerkung anzeigt.
true

In modern texts, notes are usually anchored by means of explicit footnote or endnote symbols. An explicit indication of the phrase or line annotated may however be used instead (e.g. page 218, lines 3–4). The @anchored attribute indicates whether any explicit location is given, whether by symbol or by prose cross-reference. The value "true" indicates that such an explicit location is indicated in the copy text; the value "false" indicates that the copy text does not indicate a specific place of attachment for the note. If the specific symbols used in the copy text at the location the note is anchored are to be recorded, use the @n attribute.

Dans des textes modernes, les notes sont habituellement ancrées au moyen d’appels de notes explicites (pour des notes de bas de page ou des notes de fin de texte). A la place, une indication explicite de l'expression ou de la ligne annotée peut cependant être employée (par exemple page 218, lignes 3–4). L'attribut @anchored indique si un emplacement est donné explicitement ou s'il est exprimé par un symbole ou par un renvoi. La valeur "true" indique qu'un endroit explicite est indiqué dans le texte ; la valeur "false" indique que le texte n'indique pas un endroit spécifique d'attachement pour la note. Si des symboles spécifiques utilisés dans le texte à l'endroit où la note est ancrée doivent être enregistrés, l'attribut @n sera utilisé.

In modernen Texten wird auf Anmerkungen üblicherweise durch explizite Fuß- oder Endnotensymbole verwiesen. Stattdessen kann aber auch ein expliziter Hinweis auf die Phrase oder Zeile verwendet werden (z. B. Seite 218, Zeile 3–4). Das @anchored-Attribut gibt an, ob ein expliziter Ort durch ein Symbol oder einen Querverweis angegeben ist. Der Wert "true" gibt an, dass ein expliziter Ort in der Vorlage angegeben ist; der Wert "false" gibt an, dass die Vorlage kein spezifisches Verweisziel für die Anmerkung angibt. Zur Verzeichnung von spezifischen Referenzzeichen, die in der Vorlage verwendet werden, wird das @n-Attribut benutzt.

@targetEnd
target end
Bereichsende
points to the end of the span to which the note is attached, if the note is not embedded in the text at that point.
pointe vers la fin d'un passage auquel la note est attachée, si la note n'est pas enchâssée dans le texte à cet endroit
indica el final de un periodo al cual una nota está enlazada, si la nota no está insertada en ese punto del texto.
如果附註不是嵌在正文中，則用以標明附註所註段落的終點。
rimanda alla fine della porzione di testo a cui la nota è allegata nel caso in cui la nota non sia inclusa nel testo in quel punto.
当該注釈・コメントの終了点を示す。(当該注釈が注釈先の場所に埋め込 まれていない場合)
verweist auf das Ende eines Bereichs, dem das <note>-Element angefügt ist, es sei denn die Anmerkung ist in den Text an diesem Punkt bereits eingebettet.

This attribute is retained for backwards compatibility; it may be removed at a subsequent release of the Guidelines. The recommended way of pointing to a span of elements is by means of the range function of XPointer, as further described in 16.2.4.6. range().

Cet attribut est conservé pour assurer un arrière-plan compatible ; il sera supprimé dans la prochaine mise à jour des Recommandations. La procédure recommandée pour pointer en direction d'une expansion des éléments est de le faire au moyen de la fonction range de XPointer, telle que la description en est faite à 16.2.4.6. range().

Dieses Attribut wurde beibehalten, um eine Abwärtskompatibilität zu gewährleisten; bei einem zukünftigen Release der Guidelines kann es entfernt werden. Der empfohlene Weg, um auf einen Bereich zu verweisen, ist die Verwendung der range-Funktion von XPointer, wie in 16.2.4.6. range() beschrieben.

<p>(...) tamen reuerendos dominos archiepiscopum et canonicos Leopolienses
      necnon episcopum in duplicibus Quatuortemporibus<anchor xml:id="A55234"/> totaliter expediui...</p>

    <noteGrp targetEnd="#A55234">
    <note xml:lang="en">
        Quatuor Tempora, so called dry fast days.
    </note>
    <note xml:lang="pl">
        Quatuor Tempora, tzw. Suche dni postne.
    </note>
    </noteGrp>

att.ascribed
provides attributes for elements representing speech or action that can be ascribed to a specific individual.
특정 개인의 대화 또는 행위를 표시하는 요소에 대한 속성을 제공한다.
提供的元素屬性代表言詞或行為，可出自某一特定個人。
特定個人の発話や行動を示す要素に付随する。
fournit des attributs pour des éléments transcrivant la parole ou l'action qui peuvent être attribuées à un individu en particulier.
proporciona atributos para los elementos que representan palabras o acciones atribuibles a individuos determinados.
assegna degli attributi agli elementi che rappresentano parole o azioni attribuibili a singoli individui
@who
indicates the person, or group of people, to whom the element content is ascribed.
요소 내용이 속하는 사람 또는 사람의 그룹을 나타낸다.
指出該元素內容所歸屬的個人或團體。
当該要素の内容が示す人物を示す。
indique la personne ou le groupe de personnes à qui le contenu de l'élément est attribué.
indica la persona o grupo de personas a las que se refiere el contenido del elemento.
indica la persona o gruppo di persone alle quali viene attribuito il contenuto dell'elemento

In the following example from Hamlet, speeches (<sp>) in the body of the play are linked to <role> elements in the <castList> using the @who attribute.

<castItem type="role">
  <role xml:id="Barnardo">Bernardo</role>
</castItem>
<castItem type="role">
  <role xml:id="Francisco">Francisco</role>
  <roleDesc>a soldier</roleDesc>
</castItem>

<sp who="#Barnardo">
  <speaker>Bernardo</speaker>
  <l n="1">Who's there?</l>
</sp>
<sp who="#Francisco">
  <speaker>Francisco</speaker>
  <l n="2">Nay, answer me: stand, and unfold yourself.</l>
</sp>

For transcribed speech, this will typically identify a participant or participant group; in other contexts, it will point to any identified <person> element.

Pour un discours transcrit, identifiera typiquement un participant ou un groupe participant ; dans d'autres contextes, pointera vers n'importe quel élément <person> identifié.

転記された音声の場合、これは通常、参加者または参加者グループを識別する。他のコンテキストでは、識別された<person>要素を指し示す。

3.3.3. Quotation 8.3. Elements Unique to Spoken Texts

att.ascribed.directed
provides attributes for elements representing speech or action that can be directed at a group or individual.
@toWhom
indicates the person, or group of people, to whom a speech act or action is directed.

In the following example from Mary Pix's The False Friend, speeches (<sp>) in the body of the play are linked to <castItem> elements in the <castList> using the @toWhom attribute, which is used to specify who the speech is directed to. Additionally, the <stage> includes @toWhom to indicate the directionality of the action.

<castItem type="role">
    <role xml:id="emil">Emilius.</role>
</castItem>
<castItem type="role">
    <role xml:id="lov">Lovisa</role>
</castItem>
<castItem type="role">
    <role xml:id="serv">A servant</role>
</castItem>

<sp who="#emil" toWhom="#lov">
    <speaker>Emil.</speaker>
    <l n="1">My love!</l>
</sp>
<sp who="#lov" toWhom="#emil">
    <speaker>Lov.</speaker>
    <l n="2">I have no Witness of my Noble Birth</l>
    <stage who="emil" toWhom="#serv">Pointing to her Woman.</stage>
    <l>But that poor helpless wretch——</l>
</sp>

To indicate the recipient of written correspondence, use the elements used in section 2.4.6. Correspondence Description, rather than a @toWhom attribute.

3.3.3. Quotation 8.3. Elements Unique to Spoken Texts

att.canonical
provides attributes that can be used to associate a representation such as a name or title with canonical information about the object being named or referenced.
fournit des attributs qui peuvent être utilisés pour associer une représentation telle qu'un nom ou un titre à l'information canonique concernant l'objet nommé ou auquel il est fait référence.
名前やタイトルのような表現を参照対象についての典拠情報と関連付けるのに利用する属性を提供する。
@ref
reference
référence
参照
provides an explicit means of locating a full definition or identity for the entity being named by means of one or more URIs.
fournit un moyen explicite de localiser une définition complète de l'entité nommée au moyen d'un ou plusieurs URIs.
一つ以上のURIを用いて、名付けられたエンティティの完全な定義かIDを参照するための明確な手段を提供する。

<name ref="http://viaf.org/viaf/109557338" type="person">Seamus Heaney</name>

The value must point directly to one or more XML elements or other resources by means of one or more URIs, separated by whitespace. If more than one is supplied the implication is that the name identifies several distinct entities.

La valeur doit pointer directement vers un ou plusieurs éléments XML au moyen d'un ou plusieurs URIs, séparés par un espace. Si plus d'un URI est fourni, cela implique que le nom identifie plusieurs entités distinctes.

値は1つまたは複数のXML要素あるいは、空白によって区切られた1つまたは複数のURIを指し示すものでなければならない。1つ以上の値が与えられているときは、その名前が複数の異るエンティティに対応することを示唆する。

In this contrived example, a canonical reference to the same organisation is provided in four different ways.

<author n="1">
  <name ref="http://nzetc.victoria.ac.nz/tm/scholarly/name-427308.html" type="organisation">New Zealand Parliament, Legislative Council</name>
</author>

<author n="2">
  <name ref="nzvn:427308" type="organisation">New Zealand Parliament, Legislative Council</name>
</author>

<author n="3">
  <name ref="./named_entities.xml#o427308" type="organisation">New Zealand Parliament, Legislative Council</name>
</author>

<author n="4">
  <name key="name-427308" type="organisation">New Zealand Parliament, Legislative Council</name>
</author>

The first presumes the availability of an internet connection and a processor that can resolve a URI (most can). The second requires, in addition, a <prefixDef> that declares how the nzvm prefix should be interpreted. The third does not require an internet connection, but does require that a file named named_entities.xml be in the same directory as the TEI document. The fourth requires that an entire external system for key resolution be available.

The @key attribute is more flexible and general-purpose, but its use in interchange requires that documentation about how the key is to be resolved be sent to the recipient of the TEI document. In contrast values of the @ref attribute are resolved using the widely accepted protocols for a URI, and thus less documentation, if any, is likely required by the recipient in data interchange.

These guidelines provide no semantic basis or suggested precedence when both @key and @ref are provided. For this reason simultaneous use of both is not recommended unless documentation explaining the use is provided, probably in an ODD customizaiton, for interchange.

13.1.1. Linking Names and Their Referents

att.dimensions
provides attributes for describing the size of physical objects.
물리적 대상의 크기를 기술하는 속성을 제공한다.
提供符合某種度量值的屬性值。
物理的対象の大きさを表す属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour décrire la taille des objets physiques
assegna degli attributi che descrivono la grandezza di oggetti fisici
proporciona atributos que califican una determinata medición.
@unit
names the unit used for the measurement
측정 단위의 이름을 기술한다.
度量單位的名稱。
当該大きさの単位を示す。
noms des unités utilisées pour la mesure.
especifica las unidades usadas para la medición.
specifica le unità usate per la misurazione
"chars"
characters
"lines"
lines
"pages"
pages
"words"
words
"cm"
centimetres
"mm"
millimetre
"in"
inches
@quantity
specifies the length in the units specified
명시된 단위의 길이를 명시한다.
especifica la longitud en las unidades especificadas
当該単位の大きさを示す。
spécifie la longueur dans les unités indiquées
specifica la lunghezza nelle unità indicate
@extent
indicates the size of the object concerned using a project-specific vocabulary combining quantity and units in a single string of words.
indique la dimension de l'objet en utilisant un vocabulaire spécifique à un projet qui combine la quantité et l'unité dans une chaîne seule de mots.
単一の文字列の数量と単位を組み合わせたプロジェクト固有の語彙を使用して、関連するオブジェクトのサイズを示す。

<gap extent="5 words"/>

<height extent="half the page"/>

@scope
where the measurement summarizes more than one observation, specifies the applicability of this measurement.
측정의 적용가능성을 명시하며, 하나 이상의 대상이 측정된다.
測量多個物件時，標明此度量的可應用範圍。
対象物が複数あった場合に、当該数値の適応範囲を示す。
spécifie l'applicabilité de cette mesure, là où plus d'un objet est mesuré.
especifica la aplicabilidad de esta medición, en los casos en que se mida más de un objeto.
indica l'applicabilità della misurazione, laddove venga misurato più di un oggetto
"all"
measurement applies to all instances.
측정은 모두 사례에 적용된다.
度量可應用於所有實例。
la medida se aplica a todos los casos.
全インスタンスに当てはまる単位。
la mesure s'applique à tous les cas.
la misurazione fa riferimento a tutti i casi
"most"
measurement applies to most of the instances inspected.
측정은 대부분의 사례에 적용된다.
度量可應用於大部分實例。
la medida se aplica a la mayoría de los casos examinados.
計測インスタンスの殆どに当てはまる単位。
la mesure s'applique à la plupart des cas examinés
la misurazione fa riferimento alla maggior parte dei casi esaminati
"range"
measurement applies to only the specified range of instances.
측정이 사례의 명시적 범위에 한정하여 적용된다.
度量僅應用於特定範圍的實例。
la medida se aplica solamente a los casos especificados
特定インスタンスにのみ当てはまる単位。
la mesure s'applique seulement à l'ensemble des exemples indiqués.
la misurazione fa riferimento solo ai casi specificati

att.written
provides attributes to indicate the hand in which the content of an element was written in the source being transcribed.
@hand
points to a <handNote> element describing the hand considered responsible for the content of the element concerned.
간섭을 만든 당사자의 필적을 나타낸다.
当該調整を行った主体の筆致を特定する。
signale la main de celui qui est intervenue.
indica il responsabile dell'aggiunta o della cancellazione
indica el responsable de la adición o de la omisión.
1.3.1. Attribute Classes

att.breaking
provides attributes to indicate whether or not the element concerned is considered to mark the end of an orthographic token in the same way as whitespace.
fournit un attribut pour indiquer si un élément est consideré ou pas comme marquant la fin d'un mot orthographique, comme le fait une espace.
当該要素が空白と同じ方法で正字トークンの終わりを示すとみなされるかどうかを示す属性を提供する。
@break
indicates whether or not the element bearing this attribute should be considered to mark the end of an orthographic token in the same way as whitespace.
indique si l'élément qui porte cet attribut peut être considéré comme une espace blanc indiquant la fin d'un mot orthographique.
この属性を持つ要素が空白と同じ方法で正字トークンの終わりを示すとみなされるべきかどうかを示す。
"yes"
the element bearing this attribute is considered to mark the end of any adjacent orthographic token irrespective of the presence of any adjacent whitespace
l'élément qui porte cet attribut peut être considéré comme indiquant la fin d'un mot orthographique
この属性を持つ要素は、隣接する任意の空白の存在に関係なく、隣接する正字法トークンの終わりをマークするとみなされる。
"no"
the element bearing this attribute is considered not to mark the end of any adjacent orthographic token irrespective of the presence of any adjacent whitespace
l'élément qui porte cet attribut ne peut être pas considéré comme indiquant la fin d'un mot orthographique
この属性を持つ要素は、隣接する空白の存在に関係なく、隣接する正字法トークンの終わりをマークしないとみなされる。
"maybe"
the encoding does not take any position on this issue.
l'encodage ne prends aucune position sur la question.
当該符号化はこの問題に関していかなる立場もとらない。

In the following lines from the Dream of the Rood, linebreaks occur in the middle of the words lāðost and reord-berendum.

      <ab>
  ...eƿesa tome iu icƿæs ȝeƿorden ƿita heardoſt .
  leodum la<lb break="no"/>  ðost ærþan ichim lifes
  ƿeȝ rihtne ȝerymde reord be<lb break="no"/>
  rendum hƿæt me þaȝeƿeorðode ƿuldres ealdor ofer...
</ab>

3.11.3. Milestone Elements

att.cReferencing
provides attributes that may be used to supply a canonical reference as a means of identifying the target of a pointer.
ポインタのターゲットを識別する手段としてcanonical referenceを提供するために使用される属性を提供する。
@cRef
canonical reference
표준 참조
referencia canónica
référence canonique
riferimento canonico
基準的形式の参照
specifies the destination of the pointer by supplying a canonical reference expressed using the scheme defined in a <refsDecl> element in the TEI header
TEI 헤더의 <refsDecl> 요소에서 정의된 체계의 표준 참조를 이용하여 포인터의 목적지를 명시한다.
用元素<refsDecl>在TEI標頭內所定義的標準參照來說明指標所指位置。
TEIヘダー内の要素<refsDecl>で定義されているスキームにある、基準的参照形式により、当該ポインタの参照場所を示す。
précise la cible du pointeur en fournissant une référence canonique issue d'un modèle défini par un élément <refsDecl>dans l'En-tête TEI.
especifica la destinación de un señalizador proporcionando una referencia canónica de un esquema definido en un elemento <refsDecl> en el encabezado TEI.
specifica la destinazione di un puntatore usando un riferimento canonico a partire da uno schema definito in un elemento <refsDecl> nell'intestazione TEI

The value of @cRef should be constructed so that when the algorithm for the resolution of canonical references (described in section 16.2.5. Canonical References) is applied to it the result is a valid URI reference to the intended target.

The <refsDecl> to use may be indicated with the @decls attribute.

Currently these Guidelines only provide for a single canonical reference to be encoded on any given <ptr> element.

Le résultat de l’application de l'algorithme pour la résolution des références canoniques (décrit à la section 16.2.5. Canonical References). Ce sera une référence URI valide pour la cible prévue.

La <refsDecl> à utiliser peut être indiquée à l'aide de l'attribut @decls. Actuellement ces Principes directeurs ne permettent que l'encodage d'une unique référence canonique pour tout élément <ptr> donné.

16.2.5. Canonical References 節での正規化参照を解決するためのアルゴリズムが適用される時にその結果が対象への正しいURI参照となるように、 @cRef の値は作られるべきである

<refsDecl> は @decls 属性とともに示されてもよい。現行のガイドラインが <ptr> 要素に渡すのは、単一の符号化された正規化参照のみである。

att.datable.w3c
provides attributes for normalization of elements that contain datable events conforming to the W3C XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition.
W3C 데이터 유형을 사용하여 날짜가 명기된 사건을 포함하는 요소의 규격화를 위한 속성을 제공한다.
提供用於元素規格化的屬性，這些元素包含以W3C datatypes所定義的日期明確之事件。
W3CのXML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Editionに準拠した年代測定可能なイベントを含む要素の正規化に関する属性を提供する。
fournit des attributs pour la normalisation d'éléments qui contiennent des mentions d'événements datés ou susceptibles de l'être
indica degli attributi per la normalizzazione di elementi che contengono eventi databili utilizzando i tipi di dati del W3C
proporciona atributos para la normalización de elementos que contienen eventos datables.
The @when attribute cannot be used with any other att.datable.w3c attributes. The @from and @notBefore attributes cannot be used together. The @to and @notAfter attributes cannot be used together.
@when
supplies the value of the date or time in a standard form, e.g. yyyy-mm-dd.
표준형식으로 날짜 또는 시간의 값을 제공한다.
標準形式での日付や時刻を提供する。たとえば、yyyy-mm-dd
spécifie une date exacte pour un événement sous une forme normalisée, par ex. aaaa-mm-jj.
indica il valore di una data o di un orario in un formato standard
proporciona el valor de una fecha o una hora en un formato estandard.

Examples of W3C date, time, and date & time formats.

<p>
  <date when="1945-10-24">24 Oct 45</date>
  <date when="1996-09-24T07:25:00Z">September 24th, 1996 at 3:25 in the morning</date>
  <time when="1999-01-04T20:42:00-05:00">Jan 4 1999 at 8 pm</time>
  <time when="14:12:38">fourteen twelve and 38 seconds</time>
  <date when="1962-10">October of 1962</date>
  <date when="--06-12">June 12th</date>
  <date when="---01">the first of the month</date>
  <date when="--08">August</date>
  <date when="2006">MMVI</date>
  <date when="0056">AD 56</date>
  <date when="-0056">56 BC</date>
</p>

<p>
  <date when="1945-10-24">24 Oct 45</date>
  <date when="1996-09-24T07:25:00Z">24 septembre 1996 à 3h 25 du matin</date>
  <time when="1999-01-04T20:42:00-05:00">4 janvier 1999 à 8h de l'après-midi.</time>
  <time when="14:12:38">14 h 12 minutes et 38 secondes</time>
  <date when="1962-10">octobre 1962</date>
  <date when="--06-12">12 juin</date>
  <date when="---01">premier du mois</date>
  <date when="--08">Août</date>
  <date when="2006">MMVI</date>
  <date when="0056">56 ap. J.-C.</date>
  <date when="-0056">56 av. J.-C.</date>
</p>

Shakespeare meurt dix jours plus tard, à Stratford-on-Avon,
Warwickshire, dans l'Angleterre protestante et dans le
calendrier julien, le
<date calendar="#julian" when="--05-03">mardi 23 avril ancien style</date>,
c'est-à-dire le
<date calendar="#gregorian" when="--05-03">3 mai</date> dans
le calendrier grégorien.

This list begins in
    the year 1632, more precisely on Trinity Sunday, i.e. the Sunday after
    Pentecost, in that year the
<date calendar="#julian" when="1632-06-06">27th of May (old style)</date>.

<opener><dateline><placeName>Dorchester, Village,</placeName><date when="1828-03-02">March 2d.  1828.</date></dateline><salute>To
  Mrs. Cornell,</salute> Sunday <time when="12:00:00">noon.</time>
</opener>

@notBefore
specifies the earliest possible date for the event in standard form, e.g. yyyy-mm-dd.
yyyy-mm-dd와 같은 표준 형식으로 사건의 가능한 한 이른 날짜를 명시한다.
以標準格式說明該事件可能發生的最早日期，例如年-月-日。
当該事象の一番古い日付を、標準形式で示す。例えば、yyyy-mm-dd。
spécifie la date la plus ancienne pour l'événement sous une forme normalisée, par ex. aaaa-mm-jj
specifica la prima data possibile per un evento nel formato standard aaaa-mm-gg
especifica la fecha más temprana posible para un evento en un formato estándard, p.ej. aaaa-mm-dd.
@notAfter
specifies the latest possible date for the event in standard form, e.g. yyyy-mm-dd.
yyyy-mm-dd와 같은 표준 형식으로 사건의 가능한 한 나중 날짜를 명시한다.
以標準形式標明該事件可能的最晚日期，例如年-月-日。
当該事象の一番新しい日付を、標準形式で示す。例えば、yyyy-mm-dd。
spécifie la date la plus récente possible pour l'événement sous une forme normalisée, par ex. aaaa-mm-jj
specifica l'ultima data possibile per un evento nel formato standard aaaa-mm-gg
especifica la fecha más tardana posible para un evento en un formato estándard, p.ej. aaaa-mm-dd.
@from
indicates the starting point of the period in standard form, e.g. yyyy-mm-dd.
표준 형식으로 기간의 시작 지점을 표시한다.
以標準格式表示該段時間的起始點。
標準形で当該時間幅の始点を示す。
indique le point de départ d'une période sous une forme normalisée, par ex. aaaa-mm-jj
indica l'inizio del periodo nel formato standard
indica el punto de inicio del período en el formato estándard.
@to
indicates the ending point of the period in standard form, e.g. yyyy-mm-dd.
표준 형식으로 기간의 종료 지점을 나타낸다.
以標準格式表示該段時間的結束點。
標準形で当該時間幅の終点を示す。
indique le terme de la période sous une forme normalisée, par ex. aaaa-mm-jj
indica la fine del periodo nel formato standard
indica el punto final de un periodo en formato estándard.

<date from="1863-05-28" to="1863-06-01">28 May through 1 June 1863</date>

The value of these attributes should be a normalized representation of the date, time, or combined date & time intended, in any of the standard formats specified by XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition, using the Gregorian calendar.

The most commonly-encountered format for the date portion of a temporal attribute is yyyy-mm-dd, but yyyy, --mm, ---dd, yyyy-mm, or --mm-dd may also be used. For the time part, the form hh:mm:ss is used.

Note that this format does not currently permit use of the value "0000" to represent the year 1 BCE; instead the value "-0001" should be used.

La valeur de l'attribut @when doit être une représentation normalisée de la date ou de l'heure, ou des deux, dans l'un des formats spécifiés par le XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition, selon le calendrier grégorien.

Pour la date, le format le plus courant est yyyy-mm-dd, mais on trouve aussi yyyy, --mm, ---dd, yyyy-mm, ou --mm-dd. Pour l'heure, on utilise le format hh:mm:ss.

Il faut noter qu'actuellement ce format ne permet pas d'utiliser la valeur "0000" pour représenter l'année précédant le début de l'ère chrétienne ; on doit utiliser la valeur "-0001".

El valor del atributo @cuando es una serie que representa una fecha o una hora, o ambas, en cualquiera de los siguientes formatos:

- una fecha en los formatos estándares descritos por la XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition, p.ej. en el formato más común aaaa-mm-dd, pero también aaaa, --mm, ---dd, aaaa-mm, o --mm-dd
- ; una hora en el formato estándar descrito en XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition, es decir. hh: mm: ss
- ; o una fecha y una hora combinadas en los formatos estándares descritos en XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition, es decir. aaaa-mm-ddThh: mm: ss

. Obligatoriamente el valor de @cuando aparecerá en un formato de fecha, tiempo, o ambos formatos combinados, de los reconocidos por W3C XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition. Esto se dará si el componente de la fecha (eventualmente) es una fecha gregoriana o proléptica gregoriana. A la hora de esta escritura, W3C no permite el año "0000", que sería utilizado normalmente para representar el año 1 antes de nuestra era. Usando el sistema actual de W3C, el año 1 a.C. se indica con "-0001", el año 2 a.C. con "-0002", etc. Es la intención del grupo de trabajo del esquema de XML permitir "0000" como la representación léxica de 1 a.C. (que es un año bisiesto), "-0001" se convertiria en la representación léxica de 2 a.C., "-0002" de 3 a.C., etc. Así en algunos casos puede ser ventajoso utilizar en su lugar el atributo @cuando-ISO para indicar los años anteriores a nuestra era.

この属性の値は、グレゴリオ暦を用い、XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Editionで定義されるいずれかの標準形式で正規化された日付や時刻、あるいはその組み合わせである。時間の属性としてもっともよく使われる形式は、yyyy-mm-ddだが、yyyy、--mm、---dd、yyyy-mm、--mm-ddも用いてもよい。時間については、hh:mm:ssが用いられる。この形式は、紀元前1年を表現するのに"0000"という値を用いることは現在のところ許容していないことには注意されたい。代わりに"-0001"という値を用いる必要がある。

属性@whenの値は、日付や時間またはその組み合わを、 XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Editionに従って示される。当該日付の値が、グレゴリオ暦またはそれ以前の前グレゴリオ暦システムの場合に真となる。

現時点では、W3Cは年号の値として"0000"を認めていない。この場合、一般的には、1BCE(紀元前1世紀)と記される。現行W3Cのシステムを採用すれば、1BCEは"-0001"、2BCEは、 "-0002"と記される。この背景には、XML Schema Working Groupが、値 "0000"を1BCE(閏年)の文字表記として、"-0001" を2BCEの文字表記として、"-0002"を3BCEの文字表記として利用したかったためである。従って、場合によっては、属性@when-isoにより紀元前を示した方が便利かもしれない。

3.6.4. Dates and Times 13.4. Dates

att.datable
provides attributes for normalization of elements that contain dates, times, or datable events.
날짜, 시간 또는 날짜 명기 사건을 포함하는 요소의 규격화에 대한 속성을 제공한다.
提供用於元素規格化的屬性， 這些元素包含日期明確的事件。
日付や時間または時間事象を含む要素の正規化手法を示す属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour la normalisation d'éléments qui contiennent des mentions d'événements datés ou susceptibles de l'être
atributos para registrar expresiones temporales normalizadas.
assegna attributi per la normalizzazione di elementi che contengono eventi databili
@calendar
indicates one or more systems or calendars to which the date represented by the content of this element belongs.
날짜 표현 시스템 또는 달력 표시 형식을 표시한다.
指明該日期表示所使用的曆法計算系統。
この要素を含むコンテントにおける日付の暦やシステムを示す。
indique le système ou le calendrier auquel appartient la date exprimée dans le contenu de l'élément.
indica el sistema o calendario en que se muestra una fecha.
indica il sistema o calendario al quale la data appartiene.
@calendar indicates one or more systems or calendars to which the date represented by the content of this element belongs, but this element has no textual content.

He was born on <date calendar="#gregorian">Feb. 22, 1732</date> (<date calendar="#julian" when="1732-02-22">Feb. 11, 1731/32,
O.S.</date>).

He was born on <date calendar="#gregorian #julian" when="1732-02-22">Feb. 22, 1732
  (Feb. 11, 1731/32, O.S.)</date>.

<date calendar="#julian #gregorian" when="1829-05-19">Dienstag 7/19
Mai</date>.

L'année
         1960 fut, en vertu du calendrier grégorien, bissextile ; le 22 juin tomba ainsi le jour de
         l'été, le <date calendar="#gregorian">22 juin</date>.

Note that the @calendar attribute (unlike @datingMethod defined in att.datable.custom) defines the calendar system of the date in the original material defined by the parent element, not the calendar to which the date is normalized.

@calendar属性は(att.datable.customクラスで定義される@datingMethod属性と異なり、親要素によって定義される原資料の日付の暦日システムを定義するものであり、どの暦日に日付を正規化するかではない。

@period
supplies pointers to one or more definitions of named periods of time (typically <category>s, <date>s or <event>s) within which the datable item is understood to have occurred.
시간을 명시할 수 있는 항목이 일어난 시간의 기간명을 정의하는 특정 위치로의 포인터를 제공한다.
suministra un indicador a una localización concreta que define un periodo de tiempo conocido dentro del cual el item datable se ha producido.
年代測定可能な事柄が起きたとされる名前付の時間幅を定義する、何らかの場所へのポインタを提供する。
fournit un pointeur vers un emplacement donné définissant une période de temps nommée durant laquelle l'item concerné s'inscrit.
fornisce un puntatore a una data posizione definendo un determinato periodo di tempo entro il quale l'oggetto da datare è collocabile

This superclass provides attributes that can be used to provide normalized values of temporal information. By default, the attributes from the att.datable.w3c class are provided. If the module for names & dates is loaded, this class also provides attributes from the att.datable.iso and att.datable.custom classes. In general, the possible values of attributes restricted to the W3C datatypes form a subset of those values available via the ISO 8601 standard. However, the greater expressiveness of the ISO datatypes may not be needed, and there exists much greater software support for the W3C datatypes.

Cettesuperclasse fournit des attributs qui peuvent être employés pour donner des valeurs normalisées à des informations relatives au temps. Par défaut, les attributs de la classe att.datable.w3c sont fournis. Si le module pour les noms et les dates est chargé, cette classe fournit également des attributs de la classe att.datable.iso. En général, les valeurs possibles des attributs, limitées aux types de données W3C, forment un sous-ensemble des valeurs que l'on trouve dans la norme ISO 8601. Cependant, il n'est peut-être pas nécessaire de recourir aux possibilités très étendues des types de données de l'ISO. Il existe en effet une bien plus grande offre logicielle pour le traitement des types de données W3C.

Esta superclase proporciona atributos que pueden ser utilizados para proporcionar valores normalizados de información temporal. Por defecto, los atributos de la clase att.datable.w3c son proporcionados. Si el módulo para los nombres y las fechas se acciona, esta clase también proporciona atributos de att.datable.iso. En general, los valores posibles de los atributos son los restringidos por la forma de los datatypes de W3C, un subconjunto de esos valores disponibles vía el estándar de ISO 8601. Sin embargo, la mayoría de expresiones de los datatypes de ISO pueden no ser necesarios, y existe software de soporte para los datatypes de W3C.

この親クラス(スーパークラス)は、正規化された時間情報を示すために用いる属性を提供する。デフォルト値として、当該属性は、クラスatt.datable.w3cが付与されている。名前と日付に関するモジュールが使用される場合、当該クラスは、クラス att.datable.isoから属性が与えられる。一般には、 W3Cのデータ形式に従った属性値は、ISO8601に従った属性値の下位集合をなす。しかし、より強力な表現力を持つISOのデータ形式が必要にはならないかもしれない。 W3Cのデータ形式に対するさらに強力な表現力をサポートするソフトウェアも存在する。

3.6.4. Dates and Times 13.4. Dates

att.fragmentable
provides attributes for representing fragmentation of a structural element, typically as a consequence of some overlapping hierarchy.
通常は階層関係のオーバーラップなどに起因する、構造を持つ要素の断片化を表現するための属性を与える。
@part
specifies whether or not its parent element is fragmented in some way, typically by some other overlapping structure: for example a speech which is divided between two or more verse stanzas, a paragraph which is split across a page division, a verse line which is divided between two speakers.
通常は他の階層関係のオーバーラップなどに起因して、親要素が何らかの形で断片化されているかどうかを示す。例えば、二つ以上の韻文詩で分割された発話、頁区切りをまたぐ段落、二人の話者に分割された韻文の一行など。
N
"Y"
yes
はい
the element is fragmented in some (unspecified) respect
要素はいくつかの（不特定の）点で断片化されている。
"N"
no
いいえ
the element is not fragmented, or no claim is made as to its completeness
要素が断片化されていないか、または完全性についての主張はない。
"I"
initial
最初の
this is the initial part of a fragmented element
これは断片化された要素の最初の部分を示す。
"M"
medial
中間の
this is a medial part of a fragmented element
これは断片化された要素の中間の部分を示す。
"F"
final
最後の
this is the final part of a fragmented element
これは断片化された要素の最後の部分を示す。

The values "I", "M", or "F" should be used only where it is clear how the element may be reconstituted.

"I"、"M"、または"F"という値は、要素の再構成方法が明らかな場合にのみ使用する。

att.docStatus
provides attributes for use on metadata elements describing the status of a document.
文書のステータスを記述するメタデータ要素用の属性を提供する。
@status
describes the status of a document either currently or, when associated with a dated element, at the time indicated.
現在の、もしくは日時に関連づけられた要素にあっては、指定された時点における文書のステータスを記述する。
draft
"approved"
"candidate"
"cleared"
"deprecated"
"draft"
"embargoed"
"expired"
"frozen"
"galley"
"proposed"
"published"
"recommendation"
"submitted"
"unfinished"
"withdrawn"

<revisionDesc status="published">
  <change when="2010-10-21" status="published"/>
  <change when="2010-10-02" status="cleared"/>
  <change when="2010-08-02" status="embargoed"/>
  <change when="2010-05-01" status="frozen" who="#MSM"/>
  <change when="2010-03-01" status="draft" who="#LB"/>
</revisionDesc>

att.global.responsibility
provides attributes indicating the agent responsible for some aspect of the text, the markup or something asserted by the markup, and the degree of certainty associated with it.
テキストやマークアップ、あるいはマークアップによって示されたものの何らかの側面についての責任者と、それに関する確信の度合を示す属性を提供する。
@cert
certainty
확실성
certeza
certitude
certezza
確信性
signifies the degree of certainty associated with the intervention or interpretation.
간섭 또는 해석과 연관된 확실성의 정도를 나타낸다.
表示該更動或詮釋的相關正確度。
donne le degré de certitude associée à l'intervention ou à l'interprétation.
significa el grado de certeza asociado con la intervención o la interpretación.
corrisponde al grado di certezza associato all'intervento o interpretazione
介入や解釈に関する確信度を示す。
@resp
responsible party
책임 당사자
parte responsable
responsable
responsabile
責任者
indicates the agency responsible for the intervention or interpretation, for example an editor or transcriber.
편집자 또는 전사자와 같이 또는 해석에 대한 책임이 있는 대리인을 나타낸다.
指出負責該更動或詮釋的代理者，例如編輯或轉錄者。
介入や解釈の責任者を示す。例えば、編集者、翻刻者など。
indique l'agent responsable de l'intervention ou de l'interprétation, par exemple un éditeur ou un transcripteur.
indica el agente responsable de la intervención o la interpretación, p.ej. un editor o un transcriptor.
indica il responsabile dell'intervento o interpretazione, per esempio un curatore o trascrittore

To reduce the ambiguity of a @resp pointing directly to a person or organization, we recommend that @resp be used to point not to an agent (<person> or <org>) but to a <respStmt>, <author>, <editor> or similar element which clarifies the exact role played by the agent. Pointing to multiple <respStmt>s allows the encoder to specify clearly each of the roles played in part of a TEI file (creating, transcribing, encoding, editing, proofing etc.).

@resp が直接個人や組織を指した場合のあいまいさを減らすため、@resp は行為者 (<person> or <org>) ではなく <respStmt>、<author>、<editor> などその行為者の正確な役割を明示するエレメントを指して用いることを推奨する。エンコード者は <respStmt> にTEI文書内の役割分担を明確に記述できる（作成・翻刻・エンコード・編集・校正など。

Blessed are the
<choice><sic>cheesemakers</sic><corr resp="#editor" cert="high">peacemakers</corr></choice>: for they shall be called the children of God.

<lg>

<l>Punkes, Panders, baſe extortionizing
  sla<choice><sic>n</sic><corr resp="#JENS1_transcriber">u</corr></choice>es,</l>

</lg>

<respStmt xml:id="JENS1_transcriber">
  <resp when="2014">Transcriber</resp>
  <name>Janelle Jenstad</name>
</respStmt>

1.3.1.1.4. Sources, certainty, and responsibility 3.5. Simple Editorial Changes 11.3.2.2. Hand, Responsibility, and Certainty Attributes 17.3. Spans and Interpretations 13.1.1. Linking Names and Their Referents

att.editLike
provides attributes describing the nature of an encoded scholarly intervention or interpretation of any kind.
어떤 유형의 부호화된 학문적 간섭 또는 해석의 특성을 기술하는 속성을 제공한다.
提供屬性，描述任何已標記的學者更正或詮釋的性質。
学術的調整・解釈の性質を表す属性を示す。
fournit des attributs décrivant la nature d'une intervention savante encodée ou de tout autre interprétation.
proporciona atributos que describen la naturaleza de una intervención crítica codificada o una interpretación de cualquier tipo.
assegna degli attributi che descrivono il carattere di un intervento critico codificato o interpretazione di altro tipo

The members of this attribute class are typically used to represent any kind of editorial intervention in a text, for example a correction or interpretation, or to date or localize manuscripts etc.

Each pointer on the @source (if present) corresponding to a witness or witness group should reference a bibliographic citation such as a <witness>, <msDesc>, or <bibl> element, or another external bibliographic citation, documenting the source concerned.

Les membres de cette classe d'attributs sont couramment employés pour représenter tout type d'intervention éditoriale dans un texte, par exemple une correction ou une interprétation, ou bien une datation ou une localisation de manuscrit, etc.

los miembros de esta clase de atributo se usan normalmente para representar cualquier tipo de intervención editorial en un texto, por ejemplo una corrección, una interpretación, la fecha o incluso la signatura de los manuscritos etc.

当該クラスは、あらゆる編集上の調整、例えば、原稿に対する修正や解釈、日時や場所の特定などを示すために、一般には使用される。

3.5. Simple Editorial Changes 10.3.1. Origination 13.3.2. The Person Element 11.3.1.1. Core Elements for Transcriptional Work

att.global.rendition
provides rendering attributes common to all elements in the TEI encoding scheme.
TEIの符号化スキーマにおけるすべての要素に共通するレンダリング属性を提供する。
Error: Each of the rendition values in "" must point to a local ID or to a token in the Simple scheme () Error: Every local pointer in "" must point to an ID in this document ()
@rendition
points to a description of the rendering or presentation used for this element in the source text.
원본 텍스트에서 이 요소에 대해 사용된 모양과 제시에 대한 기술을 가리킨다.
indica una descripción de la representación o de la presentación empleada para este elemento en el texto original.
当該要素が示す表現が現れている、元資料のテキスト部分を示す。
pointe vers une description du rendu ou de la présentation utilisés pour cet élément dans le texte source
indica una descrizione della resa o della presentazione utilizzate per tale elemento nel testo di partenza
"simple:allcaps"
all capitals
"simple:blackletter"
black letter or gothic typeface
"simple:bold"
bold typeface
"simple:bottombraced"
marked with a brace under the bottom of the text
"simple:boxed"
border around the text
"simple:centre"
centred
"simple:cursive"
cursive typeface
"simple:display"
block display
"simple:doublestrikethrough"
strikethrough with double line
"simple:doubleunderline"
underlined with double line
"simple:dropcap"
initial letter larger or decorated
"simple:float"
floated out of main flow
"simple:hyphen"
with a hyphen here (eg in line break)
"simple:inline"
inline rendering
"simple:justify"
justified text
"simple:italic"
italic typeface
"simple:larger"
larger type
"simple:left"
aligned to the left or left-justified
"simple:leftbraced"
marked with a brace on the left side of the text
"simple:letterspace"
larger-than-normal spacing between letters, usually for emphasis
"simple:literal"
fixed-width typeface, spacing preserved
"simple:normalstyle"
upright shape and default weight of typeface
"simple:normalweight"
normal typeface weight
"simple:right"
aligned to the right or right-justified
"simple:rightbraced"
marked with a brace to the right of the text
"simple:rotateleft"
rotated to the left
"simple:rotateright"
rotated to the right
"simple:smallcaps"
small caps
"simple:smaller"
smaller type
"simple:strikethrough"
strike through
"simple:subscript"
subscript
"simple:superscript"
superscript
"simple:topbraced"
marked with a brace above the text
"simple:typewriter"
fixed-width typeface, like typewriter
"simple:underline"
underlined with single line
"simple:wavyunderline"
underlined with wavy line

<head rendition="#ac #sc"><lb/>To The <lb/>Duchesse <lb/>of <lb/>Newcastle, <lb/>On Her
    <lb/><hi rendition="#normal">New Blazing-World</hi>. </head>

<rendition xml:id="sc" scheme="css">font-variant: small-caps</rendition>
<rendition xml:id="normal" scheme="css">font-variant: normal</rendition>
<rendition xml:id="ac" scheme="css">text-align: center</rendition>

<head rendition="#ac #sc"><lb/>épître dédicatoire <lb/>à <lb/>Monsieur de Coucy <lb/>
     </head>
<rendition xml:id="fr_sc" scheme="css">font-variant: uppercase</rendition>
<rendition xml:id="fr_ac" scheme="css">text-align: center</rendition>

The @rendition attribute is used in a very similar way to the @class attribute defined for XHTML but with the important distinction that its function is to describe the appearance of the source text, not necessarily to determine how that text should be presented on screen or paper.

If @rendition is used to refer to a style definition in a formal language like CSS, it is recommended that it not be used in conjunction with @rend. Where both @rendition and @rend are supplied, the latter is understood to override or complement the former.

Each URI provided should indicate a <rendition> element defining the intended rendition in terms of some appropriate style language, as indicated by the @scheme attribute.

属性@renditionは、XHTMLの属性@classと大変 似たように使用される。但し、重要な違いとして、当該属性は、元資 料の表現を記述するものであり、スクリーン上または紙上でどう表示 されているかを示すものではない。

もし@rendition属性がCSSのような形式言語において定義されるスタイル定義を参照するのに用いられているなら、@rend属性と同時に用いないことが推奨される。属性@renditionと属性@rendの両方が使用されている場合、後者の値が前者の値を上書きする、または補うと判断される。

当該属性値となるURIは、属性@schemeで提示されているス タイル言語により、当該表現を定義する要素<rendition>を示すべきである。

L'attribut @rendition est employé à peu près de la même manière que l'attribut @class défini pour XHTML mais avec cette sérieuse différence que sa fonction est de décrire la présentation du texte source mais pas nécessairement de déterminer comment ce texte doit être représenté à l'écran ou sur le papier.

Où @rendition et @rend sont donnés ensembles, il faut comprendre que le dernier remplace ou complète le premier.

Chaque URI fourni doit indiquer un élément <rendition> définissant le rendu prévu dans les termes d'un langage approprié pour définir les styles, comme indiqué par l'attribut @scheme.

El atributo @rendition (interpretación) se utiliza en una manera muy similar al atributo @clase definido por XHTML pero con una diferencia importante: que su función es describir el aspecto del texto original, no necesariamente para determinar la presentación visual de ese texto en la pantalla o el papel.

Donde ambos @interpretación y @rend se dan, este último se emplea para reemplazar o para complementar el anterior.

Cada URI proporcionado debe indicar al elemento <interpretación> que define la interpretación prevista en términos de cualquier lenguaje apropiado del estilo, según lo indicado por el atributo @scheme (esquema).

1.3.1.1.3. Rendition Indicators

att.global.source
provides attributes used by elements to point to an external source.
外部ソースを参照する要素によって用いられる属性を示す。
@source
specifies the source from which some aspect of this element is drawn.
この要素の何らかの側面を示すソースを指定する。
When used on a schema description element (like ), the @source attribute should have only 1 value. (This one has .)

The @source attribute points to an external source. When used on an element describing a schema component (<classRef>, <dataRef>, <elementRef>, <macroRef>, <moduleRef>, or <schemaSpec>), it identifies the source from which declarations for the components should be obtained.

On other elements it provides a pointer to the bibliographical source from which a quotation or citation is drawn.

In either case, the location may be provided using any form of URI, for example an absolute URI, a relative URI, a private scheme URI of the form tei:x.y.z, where x.y.z indicates the version number, e.g. tei:4.3.2 for TEI P5 release 4.3.2 or (as a special case) tei:current for whatever is the latest release, or a private scheme URI that is expanded to an absolute URI as documented in a <prefixDef>.

When used on elements describing schema components, @source should have only one value; when used on other elements multiple values are permitted.

@source 属性は外部ソースを指し示す。<schemaSpec> や <moduleRef> といったスキーマの構成要素を記述する要素で用いられた場合は、その定義しようとしているオブジェクトの構成要素の宣言が得られるソースを特定する。その他の要素では、引用の出典となる書誌ソースへのポインタを提供する。いずれの場合も、場所は何らかの URI、例えば絶対 URI や相対 URI、<prefixDef> に定められた方法で絶対 URI に展開できる私用形式の URI で与えることができる。複数の場所が指定された場合、デフォルトでは要求されたソースがそれらのリソースの組み合わせによって得られるものと想定される。

<p> As Willard McCarty (<bibl xml:id="mcc_2012">2012, p.2</bibl>) tells us, <quote source="#mcc_2012">‘Collaboration’ is a problematic and should be a contested
    term.</quote>

</p>

<p>

  <quote source="#chicago_15_ed">Grammatical theories are in flux, and the more we learn, the
    less we seem to know.</quote>

</p>

<bibl xml:id="chicago_15_ed"><title level="m">The Chicago Manual of Style</title>,
    <edition>15th edition</edition>. <pubPlace>Chicago</pubPlace>: <publisher>University of
    Chicago Press</publisher> (<date>2003</date>), <biblScope unit="page">p.147</biblScope>.
</bibl>

<elementRef key="p" source="tei:2.0.1"/>

Include in the schema an element named <p> available from the TEI P5 2.0.1 release.

<schemaSpec ident="myODD" source="mycompiledODD.xml"/>

Create a schema using components taken from the file mycompiledODD.xml.

1.3.1.1.4. Sources, certainty, and responsibility 3.3.3. Quotation 8.3.4. Writing

att.global
provides attributes common to all elements in the TEI encoding scheme.
TEI 부호화 스키마의 모든 요소에 공통 속성을 제공한다.
提供一組屬性，通用於TEI編碼標準中的所有元素。
TEI符号化スキーム中の全要素に共通する属性を示す。
fournit un jeu d'attributs communs à tous les éléments dans le système de codage TEI.
proporciona un conjunto de atributos común a todos los elementos del esquema de codificación TEI.
stabilisce un insieme di attributi comuni a tutti gli elementi dello schema di codifica TEI
@xml:id
identifier
확인소
identificador
identifiant
identificatore
識別子
provides a unique identifier for the element bearing the attribute.
속성을 포함하는 요소에 대한 고유한 확인소를 제공한다.
提供一個獨特識別符碼，識別帶有該屬性的元素。
当該要素にユニークな識別子を示す。
fournit un identifiant unique pour l'élément qui porte l'attribut
proporciona un identificador único para el elemento al cual se asocia el atributo.
assegna un identificatore unico all'elemento a cui è associato l'attributo

The @xml:id attribute may be used to specify a canonical reference for an element; see section 3.11. Reference Systems.

L'attribut @xml:id peut être employé pour indiquer une référence canonique pour un élément ; voir la section3.11. Reference Systems.

El atributo @xml:id se puede utilizar para especificar una referencia canónica para un elemento; ver la sección 3.11. Reference Systems.

@xml:id属性は、その要素に対する基準的形式の参照を表すために用いてもよい。詳細は3.11. Reference Systems節を参照のこと。

@n
number
수
número
nombre
numero
数値
gives a number (or other label) for an element, which is not necessarily unique within the document.
요소의 번호(또는 다른 표지)를 제시하며, 문서 내에서 반드시 고유값일 필요는 없다.
將元素標上一個數字 (或其他標號)，該標號在文件中未必是獨特的。
要素に数値やラベルを与える。これは当該文書中でユニークである必要 はない。
donne un nombre (ou une autre étiquette) pour un élément, qui n'est pas nécessairement unique dans le document TEI.
proporciona un número (u otra etiqueta) a un elemento que no es necesariamente único en el documento.
assegna un numero (o altra etichetta) a un elemento che non è necessariamente unico all'interno del documento

The value of this attribute is always understood to be a single token, even if it contains space or other punctuation characters, and need not be composed of numbers only. It is typically used to specify the numbering of chapters, sections, list items, etc.; it may also be used in the specification of a standard reference system for the text.

L'attribut @n peut être employé pour indiquer la numérotation de chapitres, sections, items de liste, etc. ; il peut également être employé dans les spécifications d'un système standard de référence pour le texte.

El atributo @n se puede utilizar para especificar la enumeración de los capítulos, de las secciones, de los items de una lista, etc.; puede también ser utilizado en la especificación de un sistema de referencia estándar para el texto.

この属性の値は、もし空白やその他の区切り符号があったとしても、つねにひとまとまりのトークンとして解釈され、また数字のみで構成される必要はない。この属性は典型的には章や節、リスト等の構成要素の付番に用いられる。テキストの標準的な参照体系の仕様に含めることができる。

@xml:lang
language
언어
lengua
langue
lingua
言語
indicates the language of the element content using a tag generated according to BCP 47.
BCP 47에 따라 생성된 tag를 사용하는 요소 내용의 언어를 나타낸다.
使用RFC3066的代碼，指出該元素內容的使用語言
BCP 47に従って生成されたタグを用いて要素の内容の言語を示す。
indique la langue du contenu de l'élément en utilisant les codes du RFC 3066
indica la lengua del contenido del elemento utilizando los códigos extraídos de RFC 3066
indica la lingua del contenuto dell'elemento utilizzando i codici tratti da RFC 3066

    <p> … The consequences of
this rapid depopulation were the loss of the last
<foreign xml:lang="rap">ariki</foreign> or chief
(Routledge 1920:205,210) and their connections to
ancestral territorial organization.</p>

The @xml:lang value will be inherited from the immediately enclosing element, or from its parent, and so on up the document hierarchy. It is generally good practice to specify @xml:lang at the highest appropriate level, noticing that a different default may be needed for the <teiHeader> from that needed for the associated resource element or elements, and that a single TEI document may contain texts in many languages.

Only attributes with free text values (rare in these guidelines) will be in the scope of @xml:lang.

The authoritative list of registered language subtags is maintained by IANA and is available at . For a good general overview of the construction of language tags, see , and for a practical step-by-step guide, see .

The value used must conform with BCP 47. If the value is a private use code (i.e., starts with "x-" or contains "-x-"), a <language> element with a matching value for its @ident attribute should be supplied in the TEI header to document this value. Such documentation may also optionally be supplied for non-private-use codes, though these must remain consistent with their Internet Engineering Task Force definitions.

Si aucune valeur n'est indiquée pour @xml:lang, la valeur de l'attribut@xml:lang de l'élément immédiatement supérieur est héritée ; c'est pour cette raison qu'une valeur devrait toujours être attribuée à l'élément du plus haut niveau hiérarchique (<TEI>).

La valeur doit être conforme au BCP 47. Si la valeur est un code d'usage privé (c'est-à-dire commence par x- ou contient -x-), il devrait correspondre à la valeur d'un attribut @ident d'un élément <language> fourni dans l'en-tête TEI du document courant.

Si no se especifica ningún valor para @xml:lang, el valor de @xml:lang para el elemento inmediatamente englobado, se hereda; por esta razón, un valor se debe especificar siempre en el elemento exterior (<TEI>).

xml:lang の値は、直接の親要素、そのまた親要素からというように、文書の上位階層から継承されてくる。できるだけ高い適切な階層に xml:lang を指定するのが一般には望ましいが、teiHeader には関連するリソース要素と異なるデフォルト値が必要となったり、一つのTEI文書が多くの言語のテキストを含みうることには注意されたい。登録された言語タグの正式なリストはIANAが管理しており、 から確認できる。言語タグの構造についての良い概説は を、手順を追った実用的なガイドは を参照されたい。利用する値は、BCP 47 に準拠しなければならない。もし値が私用コード（"x-" から始まったり "-x-" を含む）ならば、その @ident 属性と一致する値を持つ <language> 要素をTEIヘッダ内に追加して内容を説明すべきである。この説明は私用コード以外にも任意で追加できるが、Internet Engineering Task Force による定義と整合していなければならない。

@xml:base
provides a base URI reference with which applications can resolve relative URI references into absolute URI references.
애플리케이션이 상대 URI 참조를 절대 URI 참조로 해결할 수 있게 해 주는 기본 URI 참조를 제공한다.
提供一個基礎統一資源識別符 (URI) 參照，可將相對統一資源識別符參照轉變為絕對統一資源識別符參照。
相対URIから絶対URIを構成する際に必要なベースURIを示す。
donne une référence URI de base au moyen de laquelle les applications peuvent résoudre des références d'URI relatives en références d'URI absolues
proporciona una referencia URI de base gracias a la aplicación eventual de la cual pueden analizarse tanto referencias URI relativas como referencias URI absolutas.
assegna un riferimento URI di base grazie al quale eventuali applicazioni possono analizzare riferimenti URI relativi come riferimenti URI assoluti

<div type="bibl">
  <head>Selections from <title level="m">The Collected Letters of Robert Southey. Part 1: 1791-1797</title></head>
  <listBibl xml:base="https://romantic-circles.org/sites/default/files/imported/editions/southey_letters/XML/">
    <bibl>
      <ref target="letterEEd.26.3.xml">
        <title>Robert Southey to Grosvenor Charles Bedford</title>, <date when="1792-04-03">3 April 1792</date>.
      </ref>
    </bibl>
    <bibl>
      <ref target="letterEEd.26.57.xml">
        <title>Robert Southey to Anna Seward</title>, <date when="1793-09-18">18 September 1793</date>.
      </ref>
    </bibl>
    <bibl>
      <ref target="letterEEd.26.85.xml">
        <title>Robert Southey to Robert Lovell</title>, <date from="1794-04-05" to="1794-04-06">5-6 April, 1794</date>.
      </ref>
    </bibl>
  </listBibl>
</div>

@xml:space
signals an intention about how white space should be managed by applications.
signale que les applications doivent préserver l'espace blanc
señala la voluntad de hacer que el espaciado sea preservado por cualquier aplicación.
segnala la volontà di far sì che la spaziatura sia mantenuta da qualsivoglia applicazione.
空白文字類をアプリケーションがどう解釈するかを示す。
"default"
signals that the application's default white-space processing modes are acceptable
アプリケーションがデフォルトで持つ空白文字類処理モードが有効であることを知らせる。
"preserve"
indicates the intent that applications preserve all white space
アプリケーションがすべての空白文字類を保持するという意図を示す。

The XML specification provides further guidance on the use of this attribute. Note that many parsers may not handle xml:space correctly.

この属性の利用に関する案内はXML仕様を参照。xml:spaceを適切に扱うパーサーは多くない。

1.3.1.1. Global Attributes

att.internetMedia
provides attributes for specifying the type of a computer resource using a standard taxonomy.
표준 분류법을 사용하는 컴퓨터 자원의 유형을 명시하는 속성을 제시한다.
標準的な用語による計算機資源の種類を表す属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour spécifier le type de ressource informatique selon une taxinomie normalisée.
indica degli attributi che specificano il tipo di risorsa informatica utilizzando una tassonomia standard
atributos para registrar un periodo temporal normalizado
@mimeType
MIME media type
MIME 매체 유형
Tipo de media del MIME
type de média MIME
MIMEメディアタイプ
specifies the applicable multimedia internet mail extension (MIME) media type
적용 가능한 다중매체 인터넷 메일 확장자(MIME) 매체 유형을 명시한다.
当該データのMIMEタイプ。
spécifie le type MIME (multipurpose internet mail extension) applicable.
specifica il tipo MIME appropriato
El tipo de MIME
MIME協定種類

In this example @mimeType is used to indicate that the URL points to a TEI XML file encoded in UTF-8.

<ref mimeType="application/tei+xml; charset=UTF-8" target="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/TEIC/TEI/dev/P5/Source/guidelines-en.xml"/>

This attribute class provides an attribute for describing a computer resource, typically available over the internet, using a value taken from a standard taxonomy. At present only a single taxonomy is supported, the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Media Type system. This typology of media types is defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force in RFC 2046. The list of types is maintained by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). The @mimeType attribute must have a value taken from this list.

Cette classe d'attributs fournit des attributs pour décrire une ressource informatique, en général disponible sur internet, selon les taxinomies normalisées. Actuellement une seule taxinomie est reconnue : le système "Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Media Type". Ce système de typologie des types de média est définie par l'Internet Engineering Task Force dansRFC 2046. La liste des types est maintenue par l'Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.

Esta clase de atributo proporciona los atributos para describir un recurso del ordenador, típicamente disponibles en Internet, según las taxonomías estándar. Solamente una única taxonomía se utiliza actualmente, el sistema Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Media Type. Este sistema de tipología de los tipos de media es definido por el Internet Engineering Task Force RFC 2046. . La lista de tipos es mantenida por el Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.

当該属性クラスは、コンピューターリソースを示すためのもので、通常、インターネット上にあるリソースを標準的な用語で示す。現時点では、MIME（Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions）タイプのみが標準的な用語として使用可能である。このMIMEタイプについては、IETF（Internet Engineering Task Force）のRFC 2046で規定されている。使用できるタイプ名のリストの管理は、IANA（Internet Assigned Numbers Authority）によって行われている。@mimeType属性は上記のタイプ名リストにより定義された値を含んでいなくてはならない。

att.media
provides attributes for specifying display and related properties of external media.
外部メディアの表示と関連プロパティを指定するための諸属性を提供する。
@width
Where the media are displayed, indicates the display width
メディアが表示されている場合、表示部分の幅を示す。
@height
Where the media are displayed, indicates the display height
メディアが表示されている場合、表示部分の高さを示す。
@scale
Where the media are displayed, indicates a scale factor to be applied when generating the desired display size
メディアが表示されている場合、望ましい表示サイズを生成する際に適用されるスケール倍率を示す。

att.resourced
provides attributes by which a resource (such as an externally held media file) may be located.
@url
uniform resource locator
표준 원본 위치 지정소
localizador de recurso uniforme
adresse URL
URL (localizzatore universale di risorse)
specifies the URL from which the media concerned may be obtained.

att.measurement
provides attributes to represent a regularized or normalized measurement.
정상화 또는 규격화된 측정 방식을 표상하는 속성을 제시한다.
提供屬性，代表一般化或規格化的度量。
正規化単位を表す属性を示す。
donne des attributs pour représenter une mesure régularisée ou normalisée.
proporciona atributos que representen una medición regularizada o normalizada.
assegna degli attributi che rappresentano una misurazione regolarizzata o normalizzata
The @unit attribute may be unnecessary when @unitRef is present.
@unit
unit
unité
indicates the units used for the measurement, usually using the standard symbol for the desired units.
측정에 사용된 단위를 나타내며, 일반적으로 요구 단위에 대한 표준 기호를 사용한다.
指出度量單位，通常以標準符號表示
一般には標準記号により、計測単位を示す。
indique les unités de mesure utilisées ; il s'agit en général du symbole normalisé pour les unités dont on a besoin.
indica las unidades usadas para la medición, normalmente utilizando el símbolo estándard para la unidad de medición en cuestión.
indica le unità impiegate per la misurazione, generalmente utilizzando il simbolo standard per l'unità di misura in questione
"m"
metre
미터
公尺
mètre
metro
metro
metro
SI base unit of length
길이의 SI 기본 단위
SI基礎長度單位
メータ。長さを示す国際単位系。
unité SI (système international) de longueur
unidad de medida de la longitud
unità di misura della lunghezza
"kg"
kilogram
킬로그램
公斤
kilogramme
chilogrammo
kilogramo
キログラム
SI base unit of mass
분량의 SI 기본 단위
SI基礎質量單位
キログラム。重さを示す国際単位系。
unité SI de masse
unidad de medida de la masa
unità di misura della massa
"s"
second
초
秒
秒
seconde
secondo
segundo
SI base unit of time
시간의 SI 기본 단위
SI基礎時間單位
秒。時間を示す国際単位系。
unité SI de temps
unidad de medida del tiempo
unità di misura del tempo
"Hz"
hertz
헤르츠
赫茲
hérzio
ヘルツ
SI unit of frequency
주파수의 SI 단위
SI頻率單位
ヘルツ。周波数を示す国際単位系。
unité SI de fréquence
unidad de medida de la frecuencia
unità di misura della frequenza
"Pa"
pascal
파스칼
Pascal
PASCAL
パスカル
SI unit of pressure or stress
압력 또는 강도의 SI 단위
SI壓力單位
パスカル。気圧を示す国際単位系。
unité SI de pression
unidad de medida de la presión
unità di misura della pressione
ohm
옴
歐姆
ohmio
オーム
SI unit of electric resistance
전기 저항의 SI 단위
SI 電阻單位
オーム。抵抗を示す国際単位系。
unité SI de résistance électrique
unidad de medida de la resistencia eléctrica
unità di misurà della resistenza elettrica
"L"
litre
리터
公升
litro
litro
リットル
1 dm³
1dm³
リッター。体積を示す。
1 dmÂ³
"t"
tonne
톤
公噸
tonnellata
tonelada
トン
10³ kg
10³ 公斤
トン。重さを示す。
10³ kg
"ha"
hectare
헥타르
公頃
ettaro
hectárea
ヘクタール
1 hm²
1² hm
ヘクタール。広さを示す。
1 hm²
ångström
옹스트롱
埃格斯特朗 (單位)
angstrom
10⁻¹⁰ m
オングストローム
10⁻¹⁰ 公尺
オングストローム。長さの単位。
10⁻¹⁰ m
"mL"
millilitre
millilitro
mililitro
ミリリットル
"cm"
centimetre
centimètre
centimetro
centímetro
センチメートル
"dB"
decibel
데시벨
décibel
decibelio
デシベル
see remarks, below
아래 언급 참조
分貝
デシベル。エネルギーの強さを示す。
Voir remarques, ci-dessous.
ver las notas a continuación
vedi note di seguito
"kbit"
kilobit
킬로비트
キロビット
10³ or 1000 bits
10³ 또는 1000 비트
10³或1000 位元
キロビット。1000ビット(10の3乗bits)のこと。
10³ ou 1000 bits
>10³ or 1000 bits
10³ or 1000 bit
"Kibit"
kibibit
킬로바이비트
キビビット
2¹⁰ or 1024 bits
2¹⁰ 또는 1024 비트
2¹⁰或1024 位元
2¹⁰ o 1024 bits
キビビット。1024ビット(2の10乗bits)のこと。
2¹⁰ ou 1024 bits
2¹⁰ or 1024 bit
"kB"
kilobyte
kilo-octet
킬로바이트
キロバイト
10³ or 1000 bytes
10³ 또는 1000 바이트
10³或1000位元組
10 ³ o 1000 bytes
キロバイト。1000バイト(10の3乗bytes)のこと。
10³ ou 1000 octets
10³ or 1000 byte
"KiB"
kibibyte
kibioctet
킬로바이바이트
キビバイト
2¹⁰ or 1024 bytes
2¹⁰ 또는 1024 바이트
2¹⁰或1024位元組
2¹⁰ o 1024 bytes
キビバイト。1024バイト(2の10乗bytes)のこと。
2¹⁰ ou 1024 octets
2¹⁰ or 1024 byte
"MB"
megabyte
mégaoctet
メガバイト
메가바이트
10⁶ or 1 000 000 bytes
10⁶ 또는 1 000 000 바이트
10⁶或1 000 000位元組
10 ⁶ o 1 000 000 bytes
メガバイト。1,000,000バイト(10の6乗bytes)のこと。
10⁶ ou 1 000 000 octets
10⁶ or 1 000 000 byte
"MiB"
mebibyte
메가바이바이트
mébioctet
メビバイト
2²⁰ or 1 048 576 bytes
2²⁰ 또는 1 048 576 바이트
2²⁰或1 048 576位元組
2²⁰ o 1 048 576 bytes
メビバイト。1,048,576バイト(2の20乗bytes)のこと。
2²⁰ ou 1 048 576 octets
2²⁰ o 1 048 576 byte

If the measurement being represented is not expressed in a particular unit, but rather is a number of discrete items, the unit "count" should be used, or the @unit attribute may be left unspecified.

Wherever appropriate, a recognized SI unit name should be used (see further ; ). The list above is indicative rather than exhaustive.

Si la mesure représentée n'est pas exprimée dans une unité particulière mais plutôt comme un certain nombre d'items distincts, l'unité "count" doit être employée ou l'attribut @unit peut être laissé comme non spécifié.

Partout où c'est approprié, un nom d'unité reconnu par le SI (système international) doit être employé (voir plus loin ; ). La liste ci-dessus est plus indicative qu'exhaustive.

Si la medida que se representa no se expresa con una unidad determinada, pero constituye un número de elementos discretos, se debe utilizar la unidad "cuenta", o el atributo @unidad se puede dejar sin especificar.

Dondequiera que sea apropiado, un nombre de la unidad SI reconocido debe ser utilizado (véase ; ). La lista mencionada serà más indicativa que exhaustiva.

計測されたものが特定の単位で表現できず、むしろ離散的なものである場合、単位"count"が使われるべきである。そうでない場合は、属性@unitの値は付与されないかもしれない。

適切な単位がある場合には、国際単位名を使用するべきである。(詳細は、、を参照のこと。) 上記リストはこれらの全てではない。

@unitRef
points to a unique identifier stored in the @xml:id of a <unitDef> element that defines a unit of measure.
@quantity
quantity
quantité
量
specifies the number of the specified units that comprise the measurement
측정을 구성하는 명시적 단위의 수를 명시한다.
標明包含該度量的特定單位數目
計測単位の数を示す。
spécifie le nombre des unités indiquées que comprend la mesure.
especifica el número de las unidades que costituyen la medición
indica il numero delle unità che costituiscono la misurazione
@commodity
commodity
article
物品
indicates the substance that is being measured
측정되고 있는 물질을 나타낸다.
指出所度量的物品。
計測される対象を示す。
indique ce qui est mesuré.
indica la substancia que está siendo medida.
identifica la sostanza misurata

In general, when the commodity is made of discrete entities, the plural form should be used, even when the measurement is of only one of them.

En général, si l'article est composé d'entités distinctes, la forme plurielle doit être employée, même si la mesure ne s'applique qu'à l'une d'entre elles.

Generalmente cuando el material se compone de entidades discretas, se debe usar la forma plural, incluso cuando la medida se refiere solamente a una de ellas.

一般に、当該対象が離散的なものである場合、単位の複数形が使用される。当該計測対象がひとつの場合もそうである。

This attribute class provides a triplet of attributes that may be used either to regularize the values of the measurement being encoded, or to normalize them with respect to a standard measurement system.

<l>
So weren't you gonna buy <measure quantity="0.5" unit="gal" commodity="ice cream">half
a gallon</measure>, baby</l><l>
So won't you go and buy <measure quantity="1.893" unit="L" commodity="ice cream">half
a gallon</measure>, baby?</l>

The unit should normally be named using the standard symbol for an SI unit (see further ; ). However, encoders may also specify measurements using informally defined units such as "lines" or "characters".

Cette classe d'attributs fournit un ensemble de trois attributs qui peuvent être employés soit pour régulariser les valeurs de la mesure encodée, soit pour les normaliser en conformité avec un système de mesure normalisé.

L'unité doit normalement être nommée avec une abréviation normalisée issue d'une unité SI (voir plus loin ; ). Cependant les encodeurs peuvent aussi spécifier des mesures avec des unités définies de manière informelle, telles que "lines" ou "characters".

Esta clase de atributo proporciona un trío de atributos que se pueden utilizar para regularizar los valores de medida que se codifican, o normalizarlos en un sistema de medida estándar.

La unidad debe ser nombrada normalmente usando la abreviatura estándar para una unidad SI (véase ; ). Sin embargo, los codificadores pueden también especificar las medidas usando unidades definidas informalmente, por ejemplo como "líneas" o "caracteres".

当該属性クラスは、3つ組属性を規定している。これは、標準計測システムの計測値を正規化するものである。

<l>So weren't you gonna buy <measure quantity="0.5" unit="gal" commodity="icecream">half a gallon</measure>, baby</l><l>So won't you go and buy <measure quantity="1.893" unit="L" commodity="icecream">half a gallon</measure>,
baby?</l>

当該単位は、一般には、国際単位系の標準的な略式表記で示されるべきである。(詳細は、, を参照のこと。) けれども、符号化する人は、非公式な計測単位、例えば、 "lines"や"characters"も使用してもよい。

att.naming
provides attributes common to elements which refer to named persons, places, organizations etc.
사람, 장소, 조직 등의 이름을 지시하는 요소에 공통적 속성을 제공한다.
提供屬性，通用於參照到人物、地點、組織等的元素。
名前、人物、場所、組織を示す要素に付与される属性を示す。
fournit des attributs communs aux éléments qui font référence à des personnes, lieux, organismes, etc., nommés.
identifica los atributos comunes a los elementos que se refieren a personas, lugares, organizaciones, etc. indicados por nombre
identifica degli attributi comuni a elementi che si riferiscono a persone, luoghi, organizzazioni, ecc. indicati per nome
@role
may be used to specify further information about the entity referenced by this name in the form of a set of whitespace-separated values, for example the occupation of a person, or the status of a place.
この属性名によって参照されるエンティティに関する詳細な情報（例えば人物の職業や場所のステータスなど）を示すために用いられる。この値は空白文字で区切られる。
@nymRef
reference to the canonical name
표준 이름에 대한 참조
referencia al nombre canónico
référence au nom canonique
riferimento al nome canonico
基準化された名前への参照
provides a means of locating the canonical form (nym) of the names associated with the object named by the element bearing it.
URI를 포함하는 요소에 의해 명명된 대상과 연관된 이름의 표준형식 (nym)의 위치를 가리키는 방법을 제공한다.
proporciona los medios para localizar la forma canónica (nym) de los nombres asociados al objeto nombrado por el elemento que lo contiene.
当該要素で名前が付与されている対象に関連する基準形(nym)と紐付ける。
indique comment localiser la forme canonique (nym) des noms qui sont associés à l'objet nommé par l'élément qui le contient.
indica un modo di localizzare la forma canonica (nym) dei nomi associati all'oggetto definito dall'elemento che lo contiene

The value must point directly to one or more XML elements by means of one or more URIs, separated by whitespace. If more than one is supplied, the implication is that the name is associated with several distinct canonical names.

La valeur doit pointer directement vers un ou plusieurs éléments XML au moyen d'un ou plusieurs URIs, séparés par un espace blanc. Si plus d'un URI est fourni, alors le nom est associé à plusieurs noms canoniques distincts.

El valor debe señalar directamente a uno o más elementos XML mediante uno o más URIs, separado por espacios en blanco. Si se suministra más de uno, la implicación es que el nombre está asociado a varios nombres canónicos distintos.

当該属性値は、ひとつ以上のXML要素を直接指示する、空白文字で区切られたひとつ以上のURIでなくてはならない。複数与えられている場合は、その名前がいくつかの異なる基準形に対応していることを示唆する。

3.6.1. Referring Strings 13.3.6. Names and Nyms

att.notated
provides attributes to indicate any specialised notation used for element content.
@notation
names the notation used for the content of the element.
요소 내용으로 사용되어 앞서 정의된 표기법 이름을 제시한다.
提供先前已定義過、適用於該元素內容的記號名稱。
当該要素の内容にある既定表記法の名前を示す。
précise le nom d'une notation définie précédemment, utilisée dans le contenu de l'élément.
indica el nombre de una anotación definida previamente y usada para el contenido de un elemento.
fornisce il nome di un'annotazione definita precedentemente utilizzata come contenuto dell'elemento.

att.placement
provides attributes for describing where on the source page or object a textual element appears.
원본 페이지 또는 대상에서 텍스트 요소가 나타나는 위치를 기술하기 위한 속성을 제공한다.
提供屬性，描述文件元素在來源頁面或物件上出現的位置。
テキスト要素が出現する元資料中のページやオブジェクトを表す属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour décrire l'emplacement où apparaît un élément textuel dans la page ou l'objet source.
proporciona atributos para describir en que página u objeto de la fuente aparece el elemento textual.
identifica degli attributi che descrivono la collocazione di un elemento testuale all'interno della pagina o dell'oggetto di origine
@place
specifies where this item is placed.
specifie où cet item se trouve.
"above"
above the line
"below"
below the line
"top"
at the top of the page
"top-right"
at the top right of the page
"top-left"
at the top left of the page
"top-centre"
at the top center of the page
"bottom-right"
at the bottom right of the page
"bottom-left"
at the bottom left of the page
"bottom-centre"
at the bottom centre of the page
"bottom"
at the foot of the page
"tablebottom"
underneath a table
"margin-right"
in the right-hand margin
"margin"
in the outer margin
"margin-inner"
in the inner margin
"margin-left"
in the left-hand margin
"opposite"
on the opposite, i.e. facing, page.
"overleaf"
on the other side of the leaf.
"overstrike"
superimposed on top of the current context
"end"
at the end of the volume.
"divend"
at the end the current division.
"parend"
at the end the current paragraph.
"inline"
within the body of the text.
"inspace"
in a predefined space, for example left by an earlier scribe.
"block"
formatted as an indented paragraph

    <add place="margin">[An addition written in the margin]</add>
    <add place="bottom opposite">[An addition written at the
foot of the current page and also on the facing page]</add>

<note place="bottom">Ibid, p.7</note>

3.5.3. Additions, Deletions, and Omissions 11.3.1.4. Additions and Deletions

att.typed
provides attributes that can be used to classify or subclassify elements in any way.
요소의 분류 또는 하위분류에서 사용될 수 있는 속성을 제공한다.
提供可依任何方法將元素分類或次要分類的一般屬性。
要素を分類するための属性を示す。
fournit des attributs qui peuvent être utilisés pour classer ou interclasser des éléments de n'importe quelle façon.
proporciona atributos genéricos utilizables para cualquier clasificación o subclasificación de elementos.
assegna degli attributi generici utilizzabili per qualsiasi classificazione e sottoclassificazione di elementi
The element should not be categorized in detail with @subtype unless also categorized in general with @type
@type
characterizes the element in some sense, using any convenient classification scheme or typology.
다양한 분류 스키마 또는 유형을 사용해서 요소의 특성을 기술한다.
用合適的分類標準或類型來描述該元素。
当該要素の分類を示す。
caractérise l'élément en utilisant n'importe quel système ou typologie de classification approprié.
caracteriza el elemento utilizando una clasificación o tipología funcional.
caratterizza l'elemento utilizzando una classificazione o tipologia funzionale

<div type="verse">
  <head>Night in Tarras</head>
  <lg type="stanza">
    <l>At evening tramping on the hot white road</l>
    <l>…</l>
  </lg>
  <lg type="stanza">
    <l>A wind sprang up from nowhere as the sky</l>
    <l>…</l>
  </lg>
</div>

The @type attribute is present on a number of elements, not all of which are members of att.typed, usually because these elements restrict the possible values for the attribute in a specific way.

@subtype
subtype
sous-type
provides a sub-categorization of the element, if needed
필요하다면 요소의 하위범주를 제시한다.
若有需要，提供該元素的次要分類
必要であれば、当該要素の下位分類を示す。
fournit une sous-catégorisation de l'élément, si c'est nécessaire.
proporciona, si es necesario, una subcategorización del elemento.
stabilisce, se necessario, una sottocategorizzazione dell'elemento

The @subtype attribute may be used to provide any sub-classification for the element additional to that provided by its @type attribute.

L'attribut @subtype peut être employé pour fournir une sous-classification pour cet élément, en plus de celle fournie par son propre attribut @type.

El atributo @subtype (subtipo) se puede utilizar para proporcionar cualquier subclasificación para el elemento, adicional a ésa proporcionada por su @type (tipo) de atributo.

属性@subtypeは、属性@typeに加えて、当該要素の下位分類を示すために使われる。

When appropriate, values from an established typology should be used. Alternatively a typology may be defined in the associated TEI header. If values are to be taken from a project-specific list, this should be defined using the <valList> element in the project-specific schema description, as described in 23.3.1.3. Modification of Attribute and Attribute Value Lists .

1.3.1. Attribute Classes 17.1.1. Words and Above 3.6.1. Referring Strings 3.7. Simple Links and Cross-References 3.6.5. Abbreviations and Their Expansions 3.13.1. Core Tags for Verse 7.2.5. Speech Contents 4.1.1. Un-numbered Divisions 4.1.2. Numbered Divisions 4.2.1. Headings and Trailers 4.4. Virtual Divisions 13.3.2.3. Personal Relationships 11.3.1.1. Core Elements for Transcriptional Work 16.1.1. Pointers and Links 16.3. Blocks, Segments, and Anchors 12.2. Linking the Apparatus to the Text 22.5.1.2. Defining Content Models: RELAX NG 8.3. Elements Unique to Spoken Texts 23.3.1.3. Modification of Attribute and Attribute Value Lists

att.pointing
provides a set of attributes used by all elements which point to other elements by means of one or more URI references.
하나 이상의 URI 참조를 통해서 다른 요소를 가리키는 모든 요소에 의해 사용된 속성 집합을 정의한다.
定義一組與其他元素相連結的所有元素皆使用的屬性，連結是使用ㄧ個或多個統一資源識別符 (URI) 參照。
URIにより要素を参照する要素に共通して付与される属性を定義する。
fournit un ensemble d'attributs utilisés par tous les éléments qui pointent vers d'autres éléments au moyen d'une ou de plusieurs références URI.
define un conjunto de atributos usados por todos los elementos que señalan a otros elementos a través de uno o más URI.
definisce un insieme di attributi usati da tutti gli elementi che puntano ad altri elementi tramite uno o più URI
@targetLang should only be used on if @target is specified.
@targetLang
specifies the language of the content to be found at the destination referenced by @target, using a language tag generated according to BCP 47.
@targetLang should only be used on if @target is specified.

<linkGrp xml:id="pol-swh_aln_2.1-linkGrp">
  <ptr xml:id="pol-swh_aln_2.1.1-ptr" target="pol/UDHR/text.xml#pol_txt_1-head" type="tuv" targetLang="pl"/>
  <ptr xml:id="pol-swh_aln_2.1.2-ptr" target="swh/UDHR/text.xml#swh_txt_1-head" type="tuv" targetLang="sw"/>
</linkGrp>

In the example above, the <linkGrp> combines pointers at parallel fragments of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights: one of them is in Polish, the other in Swahili.

The value must conform to BCP 47. If the value is a private use code (i.e., starts with "x-" or contains "-x-"), a <language> element with a matching value for its @ident attribute should be supplied in the TEI header to document this value. Such documentation may also optionally be supplied for non-private-use codes, though these must remain consistent with their Internet Engineering Task Force definitions.

@target
specifies the destination of the reference by supplying one or more URI References
하나 혹은 다수의 URI 참조를 제시하여 참조의 목적지를 명시한다.
用一個或多個統一資源識別符參照 (URI References) 來說明參照所指位置。
ひとつ以上のURIで、参照先を特定する。
précise la cible de la référence en donnant une ou plusieurs références URI
especifica la destinación de una referencia proporcionando una o más referencias URI.
specifica la destinazione di un riferimento, fornendo uno o più riferimenti URI
Error: Every local pointer in "" must point to an ID in this document ()

One or more syntactically valid URI references, separated by whitespace. Because whitespace is used to separate URIs, no whitespace is permitted inside a single URI. If a whitespace character is required in a URI, it should be escaped with the normal mechanism, e.g. TEI%20Consortium.

Une ou plusieurs références URI syntaxiquement valables, séparée par un espace. Puisqu'un espace est employé pour séparer des URIs, aucun espace n’est autorisé à l'intérieur d'un URI. Si un espace est requis dans un URI, il faut le représenter avec une séquence d'échappement, comme par exemple TEI%20Consortium.

@evaluate
evaluate
évalué
specifies the intended meaning when the target of a pointer is itself a pointer.
포인터의 대상이 포인터일 때 의도된 의미를 명시한다.
若指標的目標本身為指標，則在此說明其用意。
当該ポインタの参照先がポインタである場合、その意図を示す。
détermine le sens attendu, si la cible d'un pointeur est elle-même un pointeur.
indica el significado previsto cuando la meta de un indicador es también un indicador.
indica il significato previsto quando la destinazione di un puntatore è essa stessa un puntatore
"all"
if the element pointed to is itself a pointer, then the target of that pointer will be taken, and so on, until an element is found which is not a pointer.
만약 지시되는 요소가 포인터라면, 포인터의 대상은 포인터가 아닌 요소가 발견될 때까지 계속 연결된다.
若指向的元素本身為指標，則該指標的目標會被移除，依此類推，直到找到一個非指標的元素為止。
si el elemento que señala a sí mismo es un indicador, entonces el target de ese indicador será tomado, y así sucesivamente, hasta que se encuentre un elemento que no sea un indicador.
参照先の要素がポインターである場合、そのポインターの参照先へと展開する。これを、参照先がポインターでなくなるまで続ける。
si l'élément pointé est lui-même un pointeur, alors on prendra la cible de ce pointeur, et ainsi de suite jusqu'à trouver un élément qui n'est pas un pointeur.
se l'elemento puntato è esso stesso un puntatore, allora sarà presa la destinazione di quel puntatore e così via fino a trovare un elemento che non è un puntatore
"one"
if the element pointed to is itself a pointer, then its target (whether a pointer or not) is taken as the target of this pointer.
지시된 요소가 포인터라면, 그 대상(포인터이든지 아니든지)은 이 포인터의 대상으로 취급된다.
若指向的元素本身為指標，則該指標的目標(無論是否為指標)會作為這項指標的目標。
si el elemento que señala a sí mismo es un puntero, entonces el target (puntero o no) se toma como el target de este puntero.
参照先の要素がポインターである場合、(そのポインターの参照先がどうであれ)そのポインターが参照先になる。
si l'élément pointé est lui-même un pointeur, alors sa cible (qui est ou non un pointeur) devient la cible retenue.
se l'elemento puntato è esso stesso un puntatore, allora la sua destinazione (che sia un puntatore o meno) è presa come destinazione del puntatore
"none"
no further evaluation of targets is carried out beyond that needed to find the element specified in the pointer's target.
포인터의 대상에서 명시된 요소를 발견할 필요가 없을 때 더 이상의 대상에 대한 평가는 수행되지 않는다.
尋找指標的目標元素時，未對目標進行不必要的延伸評估。
no se realiza ninguna otra evaluación de los targets más allá de la necesaria para encontrar el elemento especificado en el target del puntero.
当該ポインターの参照先から先にあるリンクへの展開は行わない。
aucune évaluation ultérieure des cibles n'est menée au-delà de la recherche de l'élément désigné dans la cible du pointeur.
non viene condotta altra valutazione delle destinazioni se non quella necessaria a rintracciare l'elemento specificato nella destinazione del puntatore

If no value is given, the application program is responsible for deciding (possibly on the basis of user input) how far to trace a chain of pointers.

Si aucune valeur n'est fournie, c'est au programme d'application de décider (éventuellement à partir d'une donnée entrée par l'utilisateur) jusqu'où retracer une chaîne de pointeurs.

値がない場合、ソフトウェア側がポインター連鎖の扱いを決める(恐らく利用者が指示を元に行われる)。

1.3.1.1.2. Language Indicators 3.7. Simple Links and Cross-References

att.segLike
provides attributes for elements used for arbitrary segmentation.
임의적 분할을 위해 사용된 요소의 값을 제공한다.
提供屬性，用於有隨機分割功用的元素。
任意の部分に使用される要素向けの属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour des éléments utilisés pour une segmentation arbitraire.
proporciona atributos a los elementos usados para una segmentación arbitraria.
assegna degli attributi agli elementi usati per una segmentazione arbitraria
@function
function
fonction
characterizes the function of the segment.
분절 기능의 특성을 기술한다.
描述該分割的功能。
当該部分の役割を示す。
caractérise la fonction du segment.
caracteriza la función de un segmento.
caratterizza la funzione del segmento

Attribute values will often vary depending on the type of element to which they are attached. For example, a <cl>, may take values such as coordinate, subject, adverbial etc. For a <phr>, such values as subject, predicate etc. may be more appropriate. Such constraints will typically be implemented by a project-defined customization.

16.3. Blocks, Segments, and Anchors 17.1. Linguistic Segment Categories

att.sortable
provides attributes for elements in lists or groups that are sortable, but whose sorting key cannot be derived mechanically from the element content.
@sortKey
supplies the sort key for this element in an index, list or group which contains it.

David's other principal backer, Josiah
ha-Kohen <index indexName="NAMES"><term sortKey="Azarya_Josiah_Kohen">Josiah ha-Kohen b. Azarya</term></index> b. Azarya, son of one of the last gaons of Sura was David's own first
cousin.

Je me suis
           procuré une <term>clef anglaise</term> pour dévisser les écrous qui attachent le canot à
           la coque du Nautilus. Ainsi tout est prêt.

The sort key is used to determine the sequence and grouping of entries in an index. It provides a sequence of characters which, when sorted with the other values, will produced the desired order; specifics of sort key construction are application-dependent

Dictionary order often differs from the collation sequence of machine-readable character sets; in English-language dictionaries, an entry for 4-H will often appear alphabetized under fourh, and McCoy may be alphabetized under maccoy, while A1, A4, and A5 may all appear in numeric order alphabetized between a- and AA. The sort key is required if the orthography of the dictionary entry does not suffice to determine its location.

La clé de tri est utilisée pour déterminer la séquence et le groupement d'entrées dans un index. Elle fournit une séquence de caractères qui, lorsqu'ils sont triés avec les autres valeurs, produisent l'ordre souhaité ; les détails de construction d'une clé de tri dépendent des applications. .

La structure d'un dictionnaire diffère souvent de l'ordre de collation des jeux de caractères lisibles par la machine ; dans des dictionnaires de langue anglaise, une entrée pour 4-H apparaîtra souvent alphabétiquement sous fourh, et McCoypeut être classé alphabétiquement sous maccoy, tandis que A1, A4 et A5 apparaîtront tous dans un ordre alphanumérique entre a- et AA. La clef de tri est exigée si l'orthographe de l'entrée du dictionnaire n'est pas suffisante pour déterminer son emplacement.

La clave de ordenación se utiliza para determinar la secuencia y agrupar las entradas en un índice.

当該属性は、索引中の項目の一連やグループを決めるために使用され る。当該属性がない場合、当該要素の内容が、並び替えのために使用 される。

辞書順序は、機械可読文字集合の照合順序とは、多くの場合異なって いる。例えば、英語の場合、辞書項目4-Hは、文字化されたfourhの所に出てくる。また、項目 McCoyは、maccoyの所に出てくるだろう。しかし、項目A1, A4, A5らは、文字 順のa-とAAとの間で、数字順で出てくる。当該並び替えキーは、当該辞書が採る正書法では、場所の特定が十分 に行えない場合に、必要となる。

9.1. Dictionary Body and Overall Structure

att.edition
provides attributes identifying the source edition from which some encoded feature derives.
fournit des attributs identifiant l'édition source dont provient une quelconque caractéristique encodée.
符号化された属性が派生する元のソースのエディションを特定する属性を提供する。
@ed
edition
édition
版
supplies a sigil or other arbitrary identifier for the source edition in which the associated feature (for example, a page, column, or line break) occurs at this point in the text.
fournit un identifiant arbitraire pour l'édition source dans laquelle la caractéristique associée (par exemple, une page, une colonne ou un saut de ligne) apparaît à ce point du texte.
関連する属性（ページ・段落・行の切れ目）がテキストのこの地点において発生するソースのエディションについての印やその他の任意の識別子を提供する。
@edRef
edition reference
参照
provides a pointer to the source edition in which the associated feature (for example, a page, column, or line break) occurs at this point in the text.
このポインタが示すのは、当該テキスト中に現れる（頁や段、行等の）関連する素性が生じる元の版である。

<l>Of Mans First Disobedience,<lb ed="1674"/> and<lb ed="1667"/> the Fruit</l>
<l>Of that Forbidden Tree, whose<lb ed="1667 1674"/> mortal tast</l>
<l>Brought Death into the World,<lb ed="1667"/> and all<lb ed="1674"/> our woe,</l>

  <listBibl>
    <bibl xml:id="stapledon1937"><author>Olaf Stapledon</author>,
<title>Starmaker</title>, <publisher>Methuen</publisher>, <date>1937</date></bibl>
    <bibl xml:id="stapledon1968"><author>Olaf Stapledon</author>,
<title>Starmaker</title>, <publisher>Dover</publisher>, <date>1968</date></bibl>
  </listBibl>

  <p>Looking into the future aeons from the supreme moment of
  the cosmos, I saw the populations still with all their
  strength maintaining the<pb n="411" edRef="#stapledon1968"/>essentials of their ancient culture,
  still living their personal lives in zest and endless
  novelty of action, … I saw myself still
  preserving, though with increasing difficulty, my lucid
  con-<pb n="291" edRef="#stapledon1937"/>sciousness;</p>

att.spanning
provides attributes for elements which delimit a span of text by pointing mechanisms rather than by enclosing it.
포함보다는 포인터 메카니즘을 통하여 구분된 텍스트 구간을 나타내는 요소의 속성을 제공한다.
提供元素的屬性，這些元素使用參照機制來限定某一文字段，而非包含此文字段。
テキスト幅の範囲を内容としてではなく参照機能を使って示す要素に付与される属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour les éléments qui délimitent un passage de texte par des mécanismes de pointage plutôt qu'en entourant le passage.
proporciona atributos para elementos que delimitan un fragmento de texto utilizando los señalizadores en lugar de cerrando el texto.
assegna degli attributi agli elementi che delimitano una porzione di testo utilizzando dei puntatori invece di racchiudere il testo stesso
@spanTo
indicates the end of a span initiated by the element bearing this attribute.
이 속성을 포함하는 요소에 의해 시작된 구간의 끝을 나타낸다.
指出文字段的結尾，該文字段以帶有此屬性的元素開頭。
当該要素が示す範囲の終点を示す。
indique la fin d'un passage introduit par l'élément portant cet attribut.
indica el final de un fragmento de texto iniciado con el elemento al cual es asignaado el atributo.
indica la fine della porzione di testo che ha inizio con l'elemento a cui è assegnato l'attributo
The @spanTo attribute must point to an element following the current element The element indicated by @spanTo () must follow the current element

The span is defined as running in document order from the start of the content of the pointing element to the end of the content of the element pointed to by the @spanTo attribute (if any). If no value is supplied for the attribute, the assumption is that the span is coextensive with the pointing element. If no content is present, the assumption is that the starting point of the span is immediately following the element itself.

Le passage est défini comme courant depuis le début du contenu de l'élément pointeur (s'il y en a un) jusqu'à la fin du contenu de l'élément pointé par l'attribut @spanTo (s'il y en a un), dans l'ordre du document. Si aucune valeur n'est fournie pour l'attribut, il est entendu que le passage est de même étendue que l'élément pointeur.

El span se define como ejecutándose en la orden del documento des del comienzo del contenido del elemento indicado (si lo hay) al extremo del contenido del elemento señalado por el atributo del spanTo (si lo hay). Si no se suministra ningún valor para el atributo, la asunción es que el span es coextensivo con el elemento indicado.

当該範囲は、当該文書中にある、(もしあれば)参照要素の内容の始点から、 (もしあれば)属性spanToで示された要素の内容の終点までになる。当該属性に値がない場合、当該範囲は、当該参照要素と同じ範囲と想定する。

11.3.1.4. Additions and Deletions 1.3.1. Attribute Classes

att.styleDef
provides attributes to specify the name of a formal definition language used to provide formatting or rendition information.
@scheme
identifies the language used to describe the rendition.
모양을 기술하는 언어를 식별한다.
identifica el lenguaje usado para describir la interpretación.
当該描出を解説する言語を特定する。
identifie la langue employée pour décrire le rendu
identifica la lingua utilizzata per descrivere la resa
"css"
Cascading Stylesheet Language
연속식 스타일시트 언어
Lenguaje de CSS
CSS
langage CSS (Cascading Stylesheet )
linguaggio CSS
"xslfo"
Extensible Stylesheet Language Formatting Objects
확장가능 스타일시트 언어
Objetos extensibles del formato del lenguaje de Stylesheet
XSL-FO
Langage XSL (Extensible Stylesheet )Formatting Objects
linguaggio XSL-FO
"free"
Informal free text description
격식이 자유로운 텍스트 기술
Descripción informal y libre del texto
自由記述。
description en texte libre non structuré.
descrizione informale testo libero
"other"
A user-defined rendition description language
사용자 정의 해석 기술 언어
Un idioma descriptivo de interpretación definido por el usario.
利用者が決めた、描出記述言語。
langue de description de l'interprétation définie par l'utilisateur
linguaggio di descrizione della resa definito dall'utente

If no value for the @scheme attribute is provided, then the default assumption should be that CSS is in use.

@schemeVersion
supplies a version number for the style language provided in @scheme.
@schemeVersion can only be used if @scheme is specified.

If @schemeVersion is used, then @scheme should also appear, with a value other than "free".

att.timed
provides attributes common to those elements which have a duration in time, expressed either absolutely or by reference to an alignment map.
절대적 또는 배열 지도에 대한 참조에 의해 표현된 시간의 지속을 나타내는 요소들 사이에 공통적 속성을 제공한다.
提供一組屬性，通用於帶有時間長度的元素，這些元素以絕對方式表明，或是參照到組序表。
時間幅を持つ要素に共通する属性を示す。絶対的または関連図への参照で示される。
fournit des attributs communs aux éléments qui expriment une durée dans le temps, soit de manière absolue, soit en se référant à une carte d'alignement.
proporciona un conjunto de atributos comunes a los elementos que tienen una duración en el tiempo expresada en términs absolutos o por referencia a un esquema de alineamiento
assegna un insieme di attributi comuni agli elementi che hanno una durata nel tempo espressa in termini assoluti o rispetto a uno schema di allineamento
@start
indicates the location within a temporal alignment at which this element begins.
이 요소가 시작된 시간 배열 내의 위치를 제시한다.
指出時間組序中此元素的起始位置。
時間関連図上で、当該要素が始まることを示す時間点を示す。
indique dans un alignement temporel (un ordre chronologique) l'endroit où commence cet élément.
indica el punto en el ámbito de un alineamiento temporal en el cual comienza el elemento
indica il punto nell'ambito di un allineamento temporale in cui comincia l'elemento

If no value is supplied, the element is assumed to follow the immediately preceding element at the same hierarchic level.

Si aucune valeur n'est donnée, il est entendu que l'élément suit l'élément immédiatement précédent au même niveau hiérarchique.

Si no se suministra ningún valor, el elemento es asumido para seguir el elemento inmediatament anterior en el mismo nivel jerárquico.

値がない場合は、当該要素は同じ構造レベル上の直前の要素の後に続くものとされる。

@end
indicates the location within a temporal alignment at which this element ends.
이 요소가 종료된 시간 배열 내의 위치를 제시한다.
指出時間組序 (順序點) 中此元素的結尾位置。
時間関連図上で、当該要素が終わることを示す時間点を示す。
indique l'endroit où se termine cet élément dans un alignement temporel.
indica el punto en el ámbito de un alineamiento temporal en el cual comienza el elemento
indica il punto nell'ambito di un allineamento temporale in cui termina l'elemento

If no value is supplied, the element is assumed to precede the immediately following element at the same hierarchic level.

Si aucune valeur n'est donnée, il est entendu que l'élément précède l'élément immédiatement suivant au même niveau hiérarchique.

Si no se suministra ningún valor, el elemento es asumido para preceder el elemento inmediatamente posterior en el mismo nivel jerárquico.

値がない場合は、当該要素は同じ構造レベル上の直前の要素の後に続くものとされる。

8.3.5. Temporal Information

att.transcriptional
provides attributes specific to elements encoding authorial or scribal intervention in a text when transcribing manuscript or similar sources.
원고 또는 유사 원본을 전사할 때 텍스트의 저작 또는 필사 간섭을 부호화하는 요소에 특징적으로 사용되는 속성을 제시한다.
proporciona a los atributos específicos a los elementos que codifican la intervención authorial o scribal en un texto al transcribir el manuscrito o las fuentes similares.
手書き資料や同様の資料を転記する場合、著者や筆写者に関する調整を記録する要素に付与される属性を示す。
fournit des attributs spécifiques au codage d'éléments relatifs à l'intervention de l'auteur ou du copiste dans un texte lors de la transcription de sources manuscrites ou assimilées.
assegna degli attributi propri degli elementi che descrivono il carattere di un intervento dell'autore o del trascrittore di un testo nella redazione di un manoscritto o di altra fonte simile
@status
indicates the effect of the intervention, for example in the case of a deletion, strikeouts which include too much or too little text, or in the case of an addition, an insertion which duplicates some of the text already present.
간섭의 효과를 나타낸다. 예를 들어, 삭제의 경우 너무 많은 또는 너무 적은 텍스트를 포함한 지우기, 또는 추가의 경우, 이미 존재하는 텍스트 일부의 중복 삽입 등.
indica el resultado de una intervención, por ejemplo en el caso de una cancelación, una tachadura que incluyen demasiado o demasiado poco texto, o en el caso de una adición o una inserción que duplica información ya presente en el texto.
当該調整の影響を示す。例えば、削除の際、取消線の範囲が多すぎたり少なすぎたりする場合や、追加の際、既にあるテキストの部分をコピーして挿入したりする場合。
indique la conséquence de l'intervention, par exemple dans le cas d'un effacement, une biffure, qui inclut trop ou pas assez de texte, ou dans le cas d'un ajout, une insertion, qui reproduit une portion du texte déjà présent.
indica l'effetto dell'intervento, per esempio in caso di cancellazione, quando questa comprenda troppo testo o troppo poco, o in caso di aggiunta, quando questa riproduce parte del testo già presente
unremarkable
"duplicate"
all of the text indicated as an addition duplicates some text that is in the original, whether the duplication is word-for-word or less exact.
중복이 단어 대 단어로 된 것이지, 아니면 중복이 비교적 덜 정확하게 된 것인지 간에, 삽입으로 표시된 모든 텍스트는 원본의 일부 텍스트를 중복한 것임.
todo el texto indicado como adición duplica un fragmento de texto presente en el original, siendo la duplicación palabra por palabra o algo menos exacta.
当該テキストは全て、元資料にあるテキストのコピーを追加するものである。その程度は、語単位であったりそれより小さいこともある。
tout le texte indiqué comme étant une addition reprend le texte de l'original, que la duplication soit identique mot pour mot ou moins exacte.
l'intero testo identificato come aggiunta riproduce parte del testo già presente nell'originale, indipendentemente dal fatto che la riproduzione sia esatta (parola per parola) o meno
"duplicate-partial"
part of the text indicated as an addition duplicates some text that is in the original
일부 텍스트가 원본의 일부 텍스트를 중복
la parte del texto marcado como adición duplica un fragmento de texto presente en el original
当該テキストの部分は、元資料にあるテキストのコピーを追加するものである。
la partie du texte indiquée comme étant un ajout est redondante avec un texte présent dans l'original.
una parte del testo identificato come aggiunta riproduce parte del testo già presente nell'originale
"excessStart"
some text at the beginning of the deletion is marked as deleted even though it clearly should not be deleted.
분명히 그렇게 되어 있지 않았어야 하는데도, 삭제부의 시작에 있는 어떤 텍스트가 삭제된 것으로 표지되어 있다.
un fragmento de texto del principio de una cancelación se marca como suprimido aunque este no lo haya sido claramente.
当該削除部分の始点は、例えそれが明白な削除ではなくとも、マークされている。
un passage du texte situé au début de la supression est indiqué comme supprimé bien qu'à l'évidence il ne devrait pas l'être.
una parte del testo all'inizio della cancellazione è identificata come cancellata anche se chiaramente non dovrebbe esserlo
"excessEnd"
some text at the end of the deletion is marked as deleted even though it clearly should not be deleted.
분명히 그렇게 되어 있지 않았어야 하는데도, 삭제부의 끝에 있는 어떤 텍스트가 삭제된 것으로 표지되어 있다.
un fragmento de texto del final de una cancelación se marca como suprimido aunque este no lo haya sido claramente.
当該削除部分の終点は、例えそれが明白な削除ではなくとも、マークされている。
un passage du texte situé à la fin de la supression est indiqué comme supprimé bien qu'à l'évidence il ne devrait pas l'être.
una parte del testo alla fine della cancellazione è identificata come cancellata anche se chiaramente non dovrebbe esserlo
"shortStart"
some text at the beginning of the deletion is not marked as deleted even though it clearly should be.
분명히 그렇게 되어 있어야 하는데도, 삭제부의 시작에 있는 어떤 텍스트가 삭제된 것으로 표지되어 있지 않다.
un fragmento de texto del inicio de la cancelación no se marca como suprimido aunque claramente haya sido suprimido.
当該削除部分の始点は、例えそれが明白な削除ではなくとも、マークされていない。
un passage du texte situé au début de la supression n'est pas indiqué comme supprimé bien qu'à l'évidence il devrait l'être.
una parte del testo all'inizio della cancellazione non è identificata come cancellata anche se chiaramente dovrebbe esserlo
"shortEnd"
some text at the end of the deletion is not marked as deleted even though it clearly should be.
분명히 그렇게 되어 있어야 하는데도, 삭제부의 끝에 있는 어떤 텍스트가 삭제된 것으로 표지되어 있지 않다.
un fragmento de texto del final de la cancelación no se marca como suprimido aunque claramente haya sido suprimido.
当該削除部分の終点は、例えそれが明白な削除ではなくとも、マークされていない。
un passage du texte situé à la fin de la supression n'est pas indiqué comme supprimé bien qu'à l'évidence il devrait l'être.
una parte del testo alla fine della cancellazione non è identificata come cancellata anche se chiaramente dovrebbe esserlo
"partial"
some text in the deletion is not marked as deleted even though it clearly should be.
분명히 그렇게 되어 있어야 하는데도, 삭제부에 있는 어떤 텍스트가 삭제된 것으로 표지되어 있지 않다.
un fragmento de texto de la cancelación no se marca como suprimido aunque claramente haya sido suprimido.
当該削除部分は、例えそれが明白な削除ではなくとも、マークされていない。
un passage du texte dans la supression n'est pas indiqué comme disparu bien qu'à l'évidence il devrait l'être.
una parte del testo all'interno della cancellazione non è identificata come cancellata anche se chiaramente dovrebbe esserlo
"unremarkable"
the deletion is not faulty.
삭제가 잘못된 것이 아니다.
la cancelación no es defectuosa.
当該削除部分は、間違いではない。
l'indication de suppression n'est pas erronée.
la cancellazione non è erronea

Status information on each deletion is needed rather rarely except in critical editions from authorial manuscripts; status information on additions is even less common.

Marking a deletion or addition as faulty is inescapably an interpretive act; the usual test applied in practice is the linguistic acceptability of the text with and without the letters or words in question.

Il est rarement nécessaire de donner de l'information sur le statut de chaque suppression sauf dans le cas des éditions critiques de manuscrits d'auteur, l'information sur le statut des additions étant encore plus rare.

L'indication d'une suppression ou d'une addition comme erronée est indéniablement un acte d'interprétation ; le test habituel appliqué dans la pratique est l'acceptabilité linguistique du texte avec et sans les lettres ou mots en question.

La información del estado de cada cancelación se necesita raramente, excepto en las ediciones críticas de los manuscritos de autor; la información del estado sobre las adiciones es incluso menos común.

El marcaje de una cancelación o una adición como defectuoso es ineludible en un acto interpretativo; el test generalmente aplicado en la práctica es la aceptabilidad lingüística del texto con y sin las letras o las palabras en cuestión.

各削除部分に関する状態情報は、著者の自筆原稿からの校勘版を除いて、滅多に必要にはならない。追加に関する状態情報も、一般的ではない。

削除部分や追加を間違いとして記録することは、必然的に解釈が含まれてしまう。実際には、問題となる文字や単語の有無によって、当該テキストが言語学的に問題ないかどうかで判断される。

@cause
documents the presumed cause for the intervention.
@seq
sequence
연쇄
secuencia
séquence
sequenza
assigns a sequence number related to the order in which the encoded features carrying this attribute are believed to have occurred.
이 속성을 포함하는 부호화된 자질이 발생했다고 가정되는 순서와 관련된 번호를 할당한다.
asigna un número de serie relacionado con el orden en el cual se cree que se han sucedido las características codificadas que llevan este atributo.
当該属性が示す素性が出現すると想定されている順番の、番号を示す。
assigne un numéro séquentiel relatif à l'ordre dans lequel les traits encodés portant cet attribut sont supposés être apparus.
stabilisce un numero sequenziale relativo all'ordine in cui si ritiene che ricorrano i tratti codificati ai quali è assegnato tale attributo
11.3.1.4. Additions and Deletions

att.citing
provides attributes for specifying the specific part of a bibliographic item being cited.
引用された書誌の特定箇所を指示するための属性を提供する。
@unit
identifies the unit of information conveyed by the element, e.g. "columns", "pages", "volume", "entry".
identifie le type d'information que transmet l'élément, par exemple "colonnes", "pages", "volume", "inscription", etc.
当該要素が伝える情報の単位を特定する。たとえば、カラム ("columns")、頁 ("pages")、巻 ("volume")、エントリ ("entry") 等。
"volume"
volume
권
volumen
the element contains a volume number.
권수를 포함한다.
該元素標記的內容為冊號。
el elemento contiene el número de volumen.
巻番号を含む。
l'élément contient un numéro de volume.
l'elemento contiene il numero del volume.
"issue"
the element contains an issue number, or volume and issue numbers.
호, 또는 권과 호를 포함한다.
該元素標記的內容為一期刊號或冊號與期刊號。
el elemento contiene el número de la edición, o los números del volumen y de la edición.
号番号かまたは巻と号の番号を含む。
l'élément contient un numéro de livraison ou bien un numéro de volume et de livraison.
l'elemento contiene l'indicazione del numero della pubblicazione
"page"
page
페이지
pagine
página
the element contains a page number or page range.
페이지 번호 또는 페이지 범위를 포함한다.
該元素標記的內容為一頁數或頁數範圍。
el elemento contiene un número de página o un intervalo de páginas.
ページ番号またはページ範囲を含む。
l'élément contient un nombre de pages ou l'étendue de sélection des pages.
l'elemento contiene l'indicazione di pagina o pagine
"line"
the element contains a line number or line range.
行番号か行範囲を含む。
"chapter"
chapter
장
capítulo
chapitre
capitolo
the element contains a chapter indication (number and/or title)
장 표시(숫자와/또는 제목)를 포함한다.
el elemento contiene la indicación del capítulo (número y/o el título)
章の識別子(番号やタイトル)を含む。
l'élément contient une indication de chapitre (le numéro et/ou le titre)
l'elemento contiene un'indicazione di capitolo (numero e/o titolo
"part"
the element identifies a part of a book or collection.
책 또는 모음집의 부분을 식별한다.
該元素標明的內容為單書或集合作品的一部份。
el elemento identifica una parte de un libro o de una colección.
書籍や叢書の部分を特定する。
l'élément identifie une partie d'un livre ou une anthologie.
l'elemento identifica una parte di un libro o di una raccolta
"column"
the element identifies a column.
一つのカラムを特定する。
"entry"
the element identifies an entry number or label in a list of entries.
エントリのリスト中の番号やラベルを特定する。
@from
specifies the starting point of the range of units indicated by the @unit attribute.
@unit属性で指定された時間単位の幅における開始点を表す。
@to
specifies the end-point of the range of units indicated by the @unit attribute.
@unit属性で指定された時間単位の幅における終点を表す。
1.3.1. Attribute Classes

model.nameLike.agent
groups elements which contain names of individuals or corporate bodies.
개인 또는 기업체의 이름을 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集包含個人或團體名稱的元素。
個人や団体の名前を含む要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui contiennent des noms d'individus ou de personnes morales.
agrupa elementos que contienen nombres de individuos o de agrupaciones o sociedades.
raggruppa elementi che contengono nomi di individui o enti societari

This class is used in the content model of elements which reference names of people or organizations.

Cette classe est utilisée dans le modèle de contenu des éléments qui référencent des noms de personnes ou d'organisations.

Esta clase se utiliza en el modelo de elementos cuyos nombres se refieren a gente o a organizaciones.

当該クラスは、人物や団体の名前を参照する要素の内容モデル中で使用される。

3.6. Names, Numbers, Dates, Abbreviations, and Addresses

model.segLike
groups elements used for arbitrary segmentation.
임의적 분할에 사용되는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集用於隨機分割的元素。
任意の区分で使用される要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments utilisés pour une segmentation arbitraire.
agrupa elementos usados por una segmentación arbitraria.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per una segmentazione arbitraria

The principles on which segmentation is carried out, and any special codes or attribute values used, should be defined explicitly in the <segmentation> element of the <encodingDesc> within the associated TEI header.

Les principes sur lesquels repose la segmentation, ainsi que tout code particulier ou valeur d'attribut utilisée, doivent être définis explicitement dans l'élément <segmentation> de l'élément <encodingDesc> situé dans l'En-tête TEI associé.

Los principios en los cuales se realiza la segmentación, y cualesquiera sean los códigos o valores de atributo especiales usados, se deben definir explícitamente en el elemento <segmentación> del <encodingDesc> dentro del encabezado TEI asociado.

どの区分、どのコード、どの属性値を使うかを決める原則は、関連する TEIヘダー内の要素<encodingDesc>にある要素 <segmentation>中で明示的に宣言されるべきである。

16.3. Blocks, Segments, and Anchors 17.1. Linguistic Segment Categories

model.hiLike
groups phrase-level elements which are typographically distinct but to which no specific function can be attributed.
인쇄상 구분되나 특정 기능이 없는 구 층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的詞組層次元素與顯目標示相關，且無特定語義
印刷上他とは異なるが、特別な機能は付与されていない、句レベルの要素を まとめる。
regroupe des éléments du niveau de l’expression qui sont typographiquement distincts mais auxquels aucune fonction spécifique ne peut être attribuée.
agrupa elementos de nivel sintagmático para subrayar que no tienen una semántica específica.
raggruppa elementi a livello sintagmatico relativi a evidenziatura
3.3. Highlighting and Quotation

model.emphLike
groups phrase-level elements which are typographically distinct and to which a specific function can be attributed.
인쇄상 구분되며 특정 기능을 수행하는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集語義上的詞組層次元素
印刷上他とは異なり、特定の機能が付与されている、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui sont distingués visuellement, et auxquels on peut attribuer une signification sémantique.
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma tipograficamente distinti e ai quali è attribuibile una funzione specifica
agrupa elementos sintagmáticos semánticos.
3.3. Highlighting and Quotation

model.highlighted
groups phrase-level elements which are typographically distinct.
인쇄상 구분되는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集與顯目標示相關的詞組層次元素。
印刷上他とは異なる、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments du niveau de l'expression qui sont typographiquement distincts.
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma tipograficamente distinti
agrupa elementos de nivel sintagmático relativos al énfasis.
3.3. Highlighting and Quotation

model.dateLike
groups elements containing temporal expressions.
시간 표현을 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集包含時間格式的元素。
時間表現用の要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments contenant des expressions relatives au temps.
agrupa elementos que contienen expresiones temporales.
raggruppa elementi che contengono indicazioni relative a date
3.6.4. Dates and Times 13.4. Dates

model.measureLike
groups elements which denote a number, a quantity, a measurement, or similar piece of text that conveys some numerical meaning.
숫자, 양, 측정값 등 수치적 의미를 드러내는 텍스트 부분을 가리키는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素代表一個數字、數量、度量，或類似的文字，傳達某些數值上的意義
数値、量、計測値など、数値的意味を示すテキストを示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui indiquent un nombre, une quantité, une mesure ou un extrait d'un texte qui porte une signification numérique.
agrupa elementos que contienen un número, una cantidad, una medida, o un fragmento de texto similar que refleja algún significado numérico.
raggruppa elementi riferiti a numeri, quantità, misurazioni o altra porzione di testo che veicola un significato di tipo numerico
3.6.3. Numbers and Measures

model.graphicLike
groups elements containing images, formulae, and similar objects.
이미지, 수식, 그리고 유사 대상을 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素包含影像、方程式和類似物件
画像や式などを含む要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments contenant des images, des formules et d'autres objets semblables.
agrupa elementos que contienen imágenes, fórmulas u objetos similares.
raggruppa elementi che contengono immagini, formule, esempi, e oggetti simili
3.10. Graphics and Other Non-textual Components

model.pPart.editorial
groups phrase-level elements for simple editorial interventions that may be useful both in transcribing and in authoring.
전사와 저작 모두에서 유용할 수 있는 간단한 편집 간섭에 대한 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的詞組層次元素用於簡單的編輯更正，且有助於轉錄和編寫
転記や編集の両方で使用される、単純な編集上の調整を示す、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau expression, utilisés pour de simples interventions éditoriales utiles dans la transcription comme dans la rédaction.
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma per semplici interventi editoriali, utili sia per il trascrittore che per l'autore
agrupa elementos a nivel sintagmático utilizados para simples intervenciones editoriales que pueden ser útiles tanto en la transcripción como para autoría.
3.5. Simple Editorial Changes

model.pPart.transcriptional
groups phrase-level elements used for editorial transcription of pre-existing source materials.
앞서 존재하는 원본 자료의 편집상 전사에 사용되는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
僅匯集用於簡單的編輯更正和轉錄、而未能助於編寫的詞組層次元素
現存している資料に、編集を加えて転記する際に使う、句レベルの要素をま とめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau expression, utilisés pour des transcriptions éditoriales de sources pré-existantes
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma utilizzati per la trascrizione di fonti preesistenti
agrupa solo elementos sintagmáticos utilizados para simples correcciones y transcripciones editoriales que no parecen ser útiles para la autoría.
3.5. Simple Editorial Changes

model.pPart.edit
groups phrase-level elements for simple editorial correction and transcription.
간단한 편집상 수정과 전사에 대한 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的詞組層次元素用於簡單的編輯更正或轉錄
単純な編集上の修正や転記を示す、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau expression, utilisés pour de simples interventions éditoriales de corrections et de transcriptions.
agrupa elementos de nivel sintagmático utilizados para simples correcciones o transcripciones editoriales.
raggruppa elementi a livello sintagmatico utilizzati per semplici interventi editoriali di correzione e trascrizione
3.5. Simple Editorial Changes

model.linePart
groups transcriptional elements which appear within lines or zones of a source-oriented transcription within a <sourceDoc> element.
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent figurer dans les zones d'une transcription orientée source dans un élément <sourceDoc>.

model.ptrLike
groups elements used for purposes of location and reference.
위치 및 참조에 대한 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素用於位置和參照
場所や参照を示すための要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments utilisés pour localiser et faire référence à quelque chose.
agrupa elementos usados para establecer localizaciones y referencias.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per stabilire collocazioni e riferimenti
3.7. Simple Links and Cross-References

model.lPart
groups phrase-level elements which may appear within verse only.
운문 내에서만 나타날 수 있는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集僅可能出現於韻文內的詞組層次元素。
韻文内にのみある、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments du niveau de l'expression qui ne peuvent apparaître que dans des vers.
agrupa elementos de nivel sintagmático utilizados sólo para los versos.
raggruppa elementi a livello sintagmatico utilizzati solo per i versi
6.2. Components of the Verse Line

model.global.meta
groups globally available elements which describe the status of other elements.
다른 요소의 상태를 기술하며, 전체적으로 이용가능한 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集描述其他元素狀態的空白元素，例如連結或抽象詮釋，或者提供正確度等，且空白元素可能出現於文件任一處。
他の要素の状態を示す、どこでも使える要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments disponibles globalement qui décrivent le statut d'autres éléments.
agrupa elementos vacíos que describen el estatus de otros elementos, p.ej. estableciendo grupos de relaciones o interpretaciones abstractas, o bien proporcionando indicaciones de certeza, etc., y que pueden aparecer en cualquier punto de un documento.
raggruppa elementi vuoti che descrivono lo status di altri elementi, per esempio stabilendo gruppi di collegamenti o interpretazioni astratte, oppure fornendo indicazioni di certezza, ecc., e che possono apparire in qualsiasi punto all'interno di un documento

Elements in this class are typically used to hold groups of links or of abstract interpretations, or by provide indications of certainty etc. It may find be convenient to localize all metadata elements, for example to contain them within the same divison as the elements that they relate to; or to locate them all to a division of their own. They may however appear at any point in a TEI text.

Les éléments de cette classe sont utilisés pour contenir des groupes de liens ou d'interprétations abstraites, ou pour fournir des indications quant à la certitude, etc. Il peut être commode de situer tous les éléments contenant des métadonnées, par exemple de les rassembler dans la même divison que les éléments auxquels ils sont reliés ; ou de les retrouver tous dans la division qui leur est propre. Ils peuvent cependant apparaître à un point quelconque d'un texte TEI.

Los elementos en esta clase se utilizan típicamente para llevar a cabo los grupos de conexiones o de interpretaciones abstractas, o bien para proporcionar indicaciones de la certeza etc. Puede ser conveniente localizar todos los elementos de los metadatos, por ejemplo para contenerlos dentro de la misma división que los elementos con los cuales se relacionan; o para localizarlos todos en la división que les es propia. Sin embargo pueden aparecer en cualquier momento en un texto de TEI.

当該クラスの要素は、リンクや確信度といった抽象的解釈をまとめるため に使われる。これは、ユーザがメタデータを記述する際に便利であろう。例えば、関連する要素と同じ部分レベル内にあるものまとめたり、関連す る要素を、自身の部分レベル内にまめめたりする場合である。しかし、これらは、TEIデータ中では、どこにでも出現可能である。

1.3. The TEI Class System

model.milestoneLike
groups milestone-style elements used to represent reference systems.
참조 체계를 표상하는 이정표 유형의 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集用於呈現參照系統的類似分界點元素
参照システムを示すための、標石要素相当の要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de type borne utilisés pour représenter des systèmes de référence
agrupa elementos del tipo frontera (milestone) utilizados para representar sistemas de referencia.
raggruppa elementi del tipo milestone utilizzati per rappresentare sistemi di riferimento
1.3. The TEI Class System 3.11.3. Milestone Elements

model.gLike
groups elements used to represent individual non-Unicode characters or glyphs.
개별 비유니코드 문자 또는 그림문자를 표상하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素穿插於正規文本中，代表非統一碼項目。
ユニコードになる文字やグリフを示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments utilisés pour représenter différents caractères non-Unicode ou différents glyphes.
agrupa elementos que son
raggruppa elementi di cui è inframmezzato il testo che rapresentano oggetti non Unicode

model.phrase.xml
groups phrase-level elements used to encode XML constructs such as element names, attribute names, and attribute values
요소명, 속성명, 그리고 속성값과 같이 XML 구성물을 부호화하는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
XML要素を符号化する、句レベルの要素をまとめる。例えば、要素名、属性 名、属性値など。
regroupe des éléments de niveau expression utilisés pour encoder des constructions XML telles que des noms d'éléments, des noms d'attributs ou des valeurs d'attributs
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma utilizzati per codificare costrutti XML quali nomi di elementi e nomi e valori di attributi
agrupa elementos usados para codificar construcciones en XML en el nivel sintagmático, p.ej. nombre de elemento, nombres de atributo, y valores de atributo.
22. Documentation Elements

model.biblLike
groups elements containing a bibliographic description.
서지 기술을 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集包含書目描述的元素。
書誌情報を含む要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments contenant une description bibliographique.
agrupa elementos que contienen una descripción bibliográfica.
raggruppa elementi che contengono una descrizione bibliografica
3.12. Bibliographic Citations and References

model.headLike
groups elements used to provide a title or heading at the start of a text division.
텍스트 구역의 시작부에서 제목 또는 표제를 제시하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos usados para proporcionar un título o un encabezadoa al principio de una división textual.
テキスト部分の始まりにあるタイトルや見出しを示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments employés pour donner un titre ou un intitulé au début d'une division de texte
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per fornire un titolo all'inizio di una partizione testuale

model.labelLike
groups elements used to gloss or explain other parts of a document.
문서의 다른 부분을 해설 또는 설명하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos usados para glosar o para explicar otras partes de un documento.
文書中の他の部分をまとめたり説明するために使われる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments employés pour gloser ou expliquer d'autres parties d'un document.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per spiegare o illustrare altre parti di un documento

model.listLike
groups list-like elements.
목록 같은 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集所有類似列表的元素
リスト相当の要素をまとめる。
regroupe les éléments de type liste.
agrupa todos los elementos del tipo de lista.
raggruppa tutti gli elementi del tipo lista
3.8. Lists

model.noteLike
groups globally-available note-like elements.
전체적으로 이용 가능한 주석 같은 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集所有類似註解的元素。
どこでも出現可能な、注釈相当の要素をまとめる。
regroupe tous les éléments globaux de type note
agrupa todos los elementos del tipo de nota.
raggruppa tutti gli elementi del tipo nota
3.9. Notes, Annotation, and Indexing

model.lLike
groups elements representing metrical components such as verse lines.
운문 행 같이 운율적 성분을 표상하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集代表韻律組件的元素，例如詩行。
韻文の行のような、韻律的構成要素となる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments représentant des composants de la métrique comme des vers.
agrupa elementos que representan componentes métricos como los versos.
raggruppa elementi che rappresentano componenti metriche come i versi

model.pLike
groups paragraph-like elements.
문단 같은 요소를 모아 놓는다.
該元素集是以交換資料為目的段落。
段落相当の要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de type paragraphe.
la clase de elementos de tipo párrafa con la finalidad de intercambio.
classe di elementi di tipo paragrafo a scopo di interscambio.

model.stageLike
groups elements containing stage directions or similar things defined by the module for performance texts.
공연 텍스트의 모듈에 의해 정의된 무대 지시 또는 유사 내용을 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素包含特殊的舞台指示，定義於劇本的附加標籤組中。
舞台芸術モジュールで定義されている、ト書きなどを示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments contenant des indications scéniques ou des indications de même nature, définies par le module relatif aux textes de théâtre
aggrupa elementos que contienen indicaciones específicas de escena definidas en el conjunto adicional de marcadores de textos teatrales.
raggruppa elementi che contengono specifiche indicazioni di scena definite nell'insieme aggiuntivo di marcatori per testi teatrali

Stage directions are members of class inter: that is, they can appear between or within component-level elements.

Les indications scéniques appartiennent à la classe inter : cela signifie qu'elles peuvent apparaître à l'intérieur d'éléments de niveau composant ou bien entre ces éléments.

Las direcciones de etapa son miembros de la clase inter: es decir, pueden aparecer entre o dentro de los elementos del componente-nivel.

ト書きは、クラスinterのメンバーである。すなわち、構成 要素レベル要素内または間で出現可能である。

7.3. Other Types of Performance Text

model.eventLike
groups elements which describe events.

model.global.edit
groups globally available elements which perform a specifically editorial function.
명확한 편집 기능을 수행하며, 전체적으로 이용 가능한 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的空白元素有特殊的編輯功能，例如指出來源文件中一個文字段的附加、刪除、或缺漏的起始點。
特に編集機能を担い、どこでも使用できる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments globalement disponibles qui exécutent une fonction spécifiquement éditoriale.
agrupa elementos vacíos con funciones editoriales específicas, p.ej. la indicación del comienzo de un fragmento de texto añadido, omitido o perdido en el original.
raggruppa elementi vuoti con funzioni editoriali specifiche, per esempio l'indicazione dell'inizio di una porzione di testo aggiunto, rimosso o mancante nell'originale
1.3. The TEI Class System

model.divPart
groups paragraph-level elements appearing directly within divisions.
구역 내에서 직접적으로 나타나는 문단-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集可出現於段落與其他區塊之間，而非出現於兩者之內的元素。
テキスト部分中にある段落レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau paragraphe apparaissant directement dans des divisions
agrupa elementos que pueden aparecer entre párrafos u otras divisiones, pero no dentro de estos.
raggruppa elementi che compaiono tra paragrafi e altre porzioni di testo ma non al loro interno

Note that this element class does not include members of the model.inter class, which can appear either within or between paragraph-level items.

Noter que cette classe d'éléments ne comprend pas les membres de la classe model.inter, qui peuvent apparaître soit à l'intérieur, soit entre des items de niveau paragraphe.

Observa que esta clase de elemento no incluye a los miembros de la clase model.inter, que puede aparecer dentro o entre los items del nivel-párrafo.

当該要素クラスは、クラスmodel.interの メンバーを含まないことに注意すること。 クラスmodel.interは、段落レベル項目内 または間にのみ出現可能である。

1.3. The TEI Class System

model.persStateLike
groups elements describing changeable characteristics of a person which have a definite duration, for example occupation, residence, or name.
직업, 거주지, 이름과 같이 일정 기간 유지되는 변화가능한 사람의 특성을 기술하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
該元素集描述人物的可改變特性，有明確的時間長度，例如職業、居所、姓名等。這些特性通常是個人或他人行為的結果。
一定期間で変容する、個人の特性を示す要素をまとめる。例えば、仕事、住 所、名前など。
regroupe des éléments décrivant les caractéristiques d'une personne, variables mais définies dans le temps, par exemple sa profession, son lieu de résidence ou son nom.
clase de elementos que describen las características mutables o con una duración determinada en una persona, p.ej. ocupación, residencia, nombre, etc.; tales características de un individuo representan generalmente una consecuencia de sus acciones o de las de otros.
classe di elementi che descrivono le caratteristiche mutevoli e con una determinata durata di una persona, per esempio occupazione, residenza, nome, ecc.; tali caratteristiche di un individuo rappresentano in genere una conseguenza delle sue azioni o di quelle degli altri

These characteristics of an individual are typically a consequence of their own action or that of others.

Il s'agit en général des caractéristiques d'un individu résultant de sa propre action ou de celle d'autrui.

Estas características de un individuo son típicamente una consecuencia de su propia acción o de la de otros.

当該個人の特性は、自らの行動などによる結果である。

model.personLike
groups elements which provide information about people and their relationships.
사람과 그들의 친족관계에 관한 정보를 제공하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
該元素集提供人物及人物關係的資訊。
人々やその関係を表す情報を示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui donnent des informations sur des personnes et leurs relations.
clase de elementos utilizados para proporcionar informaciones relativas a personas y a las relaciones entre estas.
classe di elementi utilizzati per fornire informazioni relative a persone e relazioni tra le stesse

model.personPart
groups elements which form part of the description of a person.
개인에 대한 기술의 부분을 형성하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素描述由文本所參照、或參與語言互動的人物特性。
個人の説明する部分となる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui font partie de la description d'une personne
agrupa elementos que describen determinadas características de las personas a las cuales se hace referencia en el texto o que participan en una interacción verbal.
raggruppa elementi che descrivono determinate caratteristiche delle persone a cui si fa riferimento nel testo o che partecipano a un'interazione verbale
15.2.2. The Participant Description

model.publicationStmtPart.agency
groups the child elements of a <publicationStmt> element of the TEI header that indicate an authorising agent.
TEI 헤더의 <publicationStmt> 요소 내에 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集元素<publicationStmt>的子元素
TEIヘダーの要素<publicationStmt>内に出現する要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître à l'intérieur de l'élément <publicationStmt> de l'En-tête TEI
agrupa los hijos de <publicationStmt>.
raggruppa i figli di <publicationStmt>

The agency child elements, while not required, are required if one of the detail child elements is to be used. It is not valid to have a detail child element without a preceding agency child element.

See also model.publicationStmtPart.detail.

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

model.publicationStmtPart.detail
groups the agency-specific child elements of the <publicationStmt> element of the TEI header.
TEI 헤더의 <publicationStmt> 요소 내에 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集元素<publicationStmt>的子元素
TEIヘダーの要素<publicationStmt>内に出現する要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître à l'intérieur de l'élément <publicationStmt> de l'En-tête TEI
agrupa los hijos de <publicationStmt>.
raggruppa i figli di <publicationStmt>

A detail child element may not occur unless an agency child element precedes it.

See also model.publicationStmtPart.agency.

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

model.availabilityPart
groups elements such as licences and paragraphs of text which may appear as part of an availability statement
regroupe des éléments tels que les licences ou les paragraphes indiquant la disponibilité d'un ouvrage.
2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

model.descLike
groups elements which contain a description of their function.
regroupe des éléments qui contiennent une description de la fonction d'un élément.

model.quoteLike
groups elements used to directly contain quotations.
인용을 직접 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集直接包含引言的元素。
引用を示すために使われる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments employés pour contenir directement des citations
agrupa los elementos que contienen directamente las citas
raggruppa elementi che contengono direttamente le citazioni

model.attributable
groups elements that contain a word or phrase that can be attributed to a source.
gruppiert Elemente, die ein Wort oder eine Phrase enthalten, welche einer Quelle zugeschrieben werden können.
3.3.3. Quotation 4.3.2. Floating Texts

model.respLike
groups elements which are used to indicate intellectual or other significant responsibility, for example within a bibliographic element.
예를 들어 서지 요소 내에서 지적 책임을 나타내는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集指出智慧責任的元素，例如在書目元素內。
知的責任を示す要素をまとめる。例えば、書誌情報要素内にあるもの。
regroupe des éléments qui sont utilisés pour indiquer une responsabilité intellectuelle ou une autre responsabilité significative, par exemple dans un élément bibliographique.
aggrupa elementos utilizados para indicar responsabilidad intelectual, p.ej. dentro de un elemento bibliográfico.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per indicare responsabilità intellettuale, per esempio all'interno di un elemento bibliografico

model.divWrapper
groups elements which can appear at either top or bottom of a textual division.
텍스트 구역 상단 또는 하단에 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集可出現於任何區段集元素起始或結尾的元素。
テキスト部分の上部また下部に現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent être placés au début ou à la fin de n'importe quelle division de texte.
agrupa elementos que pueden aparecer al principio o al final de cualquier elemento de clase de división.
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono all'inizio di una partizione testuale
4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

model.divTopPart
groups elements which can occur only at the beginning of a text division.
텍스트 구역의 시작부에만 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos que pueden aparecer solamente al principio de una división textual.
テキスト部分の始まりにのみ現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qu'on ne trouve qu'au début d'une division de texte.
raggruppa elementi che possono presentarsi solo all'inizio di una partizione testuale
4.6. Title Pages

model.divTop
groups elements appearing at the beginning of a text division.
텍스트 구역 시작에 나타나는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos que aparecen al principio de una división textual.
テキスト部分の始まりに現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments apparaissant au début d'une division de texte.
raggruppa elementi che si presentano all'inizio di una partizione testuale
4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

model.frontPart.drama
groups elements which appear at the level of divisions within front or back matter of performance texts only.
단지 공연 텍스트 앞쪽 자료 또는 뒤쪽 자료 내의 구역 층위에서 나타나는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素僅出現於劇本正文前或後資訊內的區段層次。
演技テキストにおける前付、後付の部分レベルに現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui n'apparaissent comme des divisions que dans les parties liminaires ou finales des textes de théâtre.
agrupa elementos que aparecen a nivel de partición textual al interno del paratexto inicial o final.
raggruppa elementi che appaiono a livello di partizioni testuali all'interno del peritesto iniziale o del peritesto finale solo in testi di tipo teatrale
7.1. Front and Back Matter

model.pLike.front
groups paragraph-like elements which can occur as direct constituents of front matter.
앞쪽 자료의 직접 구성성분으로 나타날 수 있는 문단 같은 요소를 모아 놓는다.
未提供完整標題頁時，匯集的元素可顯示為正文前資訊的直接組成要素。
前付の構成要素として出現可能な、段落相当の要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de type paragraphe qui peuvent apparaître comme des constituants directs des parties liminaires.
agrupa los elementos que aparecen como componentes directos del paratexto inicial cuando no se da un encabezamiento electrónico.
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono come componenti diretti del peritesto iniziale quando non è dato un frontespizio elettronico.
4.6. Title Pages

model.divBottomPart
groups elements which can occur only at the end of a text division.
텍스트 구역의 종료부에만 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos que pueden aparecer solamente al final de una división textual.
テキスト部分の終わりにのみ出現できる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qu'on ne peut trouver qu'à la fin d'une division de texte.
raggruppa elementi che possono presentarsi solo alla fine di una partizione testuale
4.6. Title Pages

model.divBottom
groups elements appearing at the end of a text division.
텍스트 구역의 종료부에 나타타는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集僅可出現於文本區段結尾的元素，例如結尾題名。
テキストの終わりに現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments placés à la fin d'une division de texte.
agrupa elementos que pueden aparecer sólo al final de una división textual, p.ej. un tráiler.
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono alla fine di una partizione testuale, per esempio trailer, byline, ecc.
4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

model.titlepagePart
groups elements which can occur as direct constituents of a title page, such as <docTitle>, <docAuthor>, <docImprint>, or <epigraph>.
<docTitle>, <docAuthor>, <docImprint>, 또는 <epigraph>와 같이 제목 페이지의 직접 구성성분으로 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素可成為標題頁的直接組成要素 (元素<docTitle>, <docAuth>, <docImprint>, <epigraph>等。)
タイトルページの構成要素となる要素をまとめる。例えば、要素 <docTitle>、 <docAuth>、<docImprint>、<epigraph>など。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître comme constituants directs d'une page de titre (<docTitle>, <docAuth>,<docImprint> ou <epigraph>)
agrupa los elementos que aparecen como componentes directos del frontispicio electrónico (<docTitle>, <docAuthor>, <docImprint>, <epigraph>, etc.)
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono come componenti dirette del frontespizio elettronico (<docTitle>, <docAuthor>, <docImprint>, <epigraph>, ecc.)
4.6. Title Pages

model.choicePart
groups elements (other than <choice> itself) which can be used within a <choice> alternation.
<choice> 대체 내에서 사용될 수 있는 (<choice> 외의) 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素 (而非選擇本身) 可用於元素<choice>之替換
要素<choice>中に現れる(要素<choice>以外の)要素をまとめ る。
regroupe des éléments (autres que <choice>) qui peuvent être utilisés en alternance avec <choice>
agrupa los elementos (excluída el propio elemento "choice") que pueden ser usados en alternancia con <choice>.
raggruppa gli elementi (escluso l'elemento choice) che possono essere usati in alternanza con <choice>
3.5. Simple Editorial Changes

model.imprintPart
groups the bibliographic elements which occur inside imprints.
간기 내에 나타날 수 있는 서지 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集出現於版本說明內的書目元素。
刊記にある書誌情報要素をまとめる。
regoupe les éléments bibliographiques qui apparaissent à l'intérieur de documents imprimés.
agrupa los elementos bibliográficos que aparecen al interno de las siglas editoriales.
raggruppa gli elementi bibliografici che appaiono all'interno delle sigle editoriali
3.12. Bibliographic Citations and References

model.catDescPart
groups component elements of the TEI header Category Description.
regroupe des éléments composants de l'élément <catDesc> dans l'en-tête TEI.
TEI 헤더 범주 기술의 성분 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集可用於元素<catDesc>內、並多次出現的元素
TEIヘダーの要素をまとめる。
agrupa elementos que pueden usarse dentro de <catDesc> y que aparecen en numerosas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <catDesc> e che appaiono più volte

model.castItemPart
groups component elements of an entry in a cast list, such as dramatic role or actor's name.
극에서 역할 또는 배우의 이름과 같이 등장인물 목록에서 항목의 성분 요소를 모아 놓는다.
用於角色列表中一個項目內的元素，如戲劇角色或演員名稱
芝居中の役や役者名などの、配役中の項目要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments composants utilisés comme entrée dans une distribution, comme le nom d'un rôle ou le nom d'un acteur.
elementos usados dentro de una entrada en una lista de personajes, por ejemplo los roles dramáticos o los nombres de actores.
elementi utilizzati all'interno di una voce in una lista di personaggi, per esempio ruolo o nome dell'attore

model.addressLike
groups elements used to represent a postal or email address.
우편 또는 전자메일 주소를 나타내는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的詞組層次元素代表郵寄或電子郵件地址。
郵便におけるまたはeメールにおけるアドレスを表す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments employés pour représenter des adresses postales ou électroniques.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per rappresentare un indirizzo postale o di posta elettronica
agrupa elementos sintagmáticos usados para representar una dirección postal o electrónica.
1. The TEI Infrastructure

model.nameLike
groups elements which name or refer to a person, place, or organization.
인물, 장소, 또는 조직의 이름 또는 지시를 나타내는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的空白元素可出現於TEI文件內的任何位置。
人物、場所、団体に名前を付与する、または参照する要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui nomment une personne, un lieu ou une organisation, ou qui y font référence à.
agrupa los elementos que nombran o indican a una persona, un lugar (construido por el hombre o geográfico), o una organización.
raggruppa gli elementi che nominano o indicano una persona, un luogo (costruito dall'uomo o geografico), o un'organizzazione

A superset of the naming elements that may appear in datelines, addresses, statements of responsibility, etc.

Un ensemble de niveau supérieur regroupant les éléments d'appellation qui peuvent apparaître dans les dates, les adresses, les mentions de responsabilité, etc.

Un superconjunto de elementos de nombramiento que pueden aparecer en las líneas de fecha, de dirección, de declaración de esponsabilidad,l etc.

日付欄、住所情報、責任表示等に現れる、名前を示す要素の親集合。

model.global
groups elements which may appear at any point within a TEI text.
TEI 텍스트 내의 어떤 지점에서 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
TEIデータ内のどこでも出現可能な要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître à un point quelconque dans un texte TEI.
agrupa elementos vacíos que pueden aparecer en cualquier punto de un texto TEI
raggruppa elementi vuoti che possono apparire in qualsiasi punto di un testo TEI
1.3. The TEI Class System

model.biblPart
groups elements which represent components of a bibliographic description.
서지 기술의 성분을 표상하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集可出現於書目引用元素內的元素。
書誌情報の項目を表す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui sont des composantes d’une description bibliographique.
agrupa los elementos que pueden aparecer al interno citas bibliográficas.
raggruppa gli elementi che possono apparire all'interno di elementi di citazioni bibliografiche
3.12. Bibliographic Citations and References

model.frontPart
groups elements which appear at the level of divisions within front or back matter.
전면부 또는 후면부 자료 내에서 구역 층위에 나타나는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素出現於正文前或後資訊內的區段層次中。
前付、後付の部分レベルに現れる要素をまとめる。
regroupe les éléments du niveau des divisions qui peuvent apparaître dans un <front> ou un <back>.
agrupa elementos que aparecen a nivel de particiones textuales al interno del paratexto inicial o final.
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono a livello di partizioni testuali all'interno del peritesto iniziale o finale
7.1. Front and Back Matter

model.addrPart
groups elements such as names or postal codes which may appear as part of a postal address.
우편 주소의 부분으로 나타날 수 있는 이름 또는 우편 번호와 같은 요소를 모아 놓는다.
可能出現於郵寄地址部份的元素，如名稱或郵遞區號。
郵便情報としてある名前や郵便番号等の要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments comme des noms ou des codes postaux qui peuvent apparaître dans une adresse postale
agrupa los elementos que constituyen una dirección postal o de cualquier otro tipo.
raggruppa elementi che costituiscono un indirizzo postale o altro tipo di indirizzo
3.6.2. Addresses

model.pPart.data
groups phrase-level elements containing names, dates, numbers, measures, and similar data.
이름, 날짜, 수, 측정, 그리고 유사 데이터를 포함하는 구-층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集包含名稱、日期、數字、度量和類似數據的詞組層次元素。
名前、日付、数値、大きさなどを示す、句レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau expression contenant des noms, des dates, des nombres, des mesures et d'autres données semblables
agrupa los elementos a nivel sintagmàtico que contienen nombres, fechas, medidas o datos similares.
raggruppa elementi a livello sintagmatico che contengono nomi, date, numeri, misurazioni, e dati simili
3.6. Names, Numbers, Dates, Abbreviations, and Addresses

model.inter
groups elements which can appear either within or between paragraph-like elements.
문단 같은 요소 내에서 또는 그 사이에서 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集中間層次的元素：可出現於段落內與段落之間，或方塊性層次內與層次間。
句相当レベルの要素内または間に出現可能な要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître à l’intérieur ou entre des composants semblables au paragraphe.
agrupa elementos de la clase intermedia (internivel): tales elementos pueden aparecer bien al interno bien entre párrafos u entre otros elementos de tipo división de texto.
raggruppa elementi della classe intermedia (interlivello): tali elementi possono apparire sia all'interno che tra paragrafi e altri elementi del tipo porzione di testo
1.3. The TEI Class System

model.common
groups common chunk- and inter-level elements.
공통적인 덩어리 및 상호 층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集通用的方塊性與中間層次元素。
塊レベルと挿入レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de niveau fragment - et des éléments de niveau intermédiaire.
agrupa elementos comunes a nivel de fragmentos de texto o internivel.
raggruppa elementi comuni a livello di porzioni di testo o interlivello

This class defines the set of chunk- and inter-level elements; it is used in many content models, including those for textual divisions.

Cette classe définit l'ensemble des éléments de niveau fragment et de niveau intermédiaire ; de nombreux modèles de contenu y font appel, y compris ceux qui sont relatifs aux divisions textuelles.

Esta clase define el conjunto de los elementos de fragmento e inter-nivel; se utiliza en muchos modelos de contención, incluyendo aquellos para las divisiones textuales.

当該クラスは、塊レベルと挿入レベルの要素集合を定義する。当該クラス は、テキスト部分の要素を含む、多くの内容モデルで使われる。

1.3. The TEI Class System

model.phrase
groups elements which can occur at the level of individual words or phrases.
개별 단어 또는 구 층위에서 나타날 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素可出現於個人字詞層次上。
独立した語句レベルに出現する要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui apparaissent au niveau des mots isolés ou des groupes de mots.
agrupa los elementos que pueden aparecer en el nivel de palabras o sintagmas.
raggruppa gli elementi che appaiono a livello di singole parole o sintagmi

This class of elements can occur within paragraphs, list items, lines of verse, etc.

Cette classe d'éléments peut se trouver dans des paragraphes, des entrées de listes, des vers, etc.

Esta clase de elementos puede aparecer dentro de párrafos, en los elementos de una lista, en las líneas de verso, etc.

当該要素クラスは、クラスinterにある大きめの要素、すな わち塊の中で出現可能である。散文においては、当該要素は、段落、リスト項目、韻文行などの中で出現可能である。

1.3. The TEI Class System

model.paraPart
groups elements that may appear in paragraphs and similar elements
3.1. Paragraphs

model.limitedPhrase
groups phrase-level elements excluding those elements primarily intended for transcription of existing sources.
존재하는 원본의 전사의 주요 목적에 해당하는 요소를 배제한 구 층위 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素可出現於個人字詞層次，不包含預定用於轉錄的元素。
現存する元資料から転記するために使用される要素を除く、句レベルの要素 をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments du niveau de l'expression excluant ceux qui sont principalement destinés à la transcription des sources existantes.
raggruppa elementi a livello di sintagma ad eccezione degli elementi intesi principalmente per la trascrizione di fonti esistenti
agrupa los elementos que pueden aparecer a nivel de palabras o sintagmas, excluyendo los elementos destinados a la transcripción.
1.3. The TEI Class System

model.divLike
groups elements used to represent un-numbered generic structural divisions.
숫자화되지 않은 일반 구조 구역을 표상하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素代表未編號的一般結構性區段。
番号づけられていない、共通構造部分を示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments utilisés pour représenter des divisions structurelles génériques non numérotées.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per rappresentare partizioni testuali generiche non numerate
agrupa los elementos usados para representar divisiones estructurales recursivamente.

model.divGenLike
groups elements used to represent a structural division which is generated rather than explicitly present in the source.
원본에 분명하게 나타났다기보다 생성된 구조적 구역을 표상하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集的元素代表一個結構性區段，產生於來源文本中，而非明確存在。
元資料に明示的にはなく、生成された構造部分を示すための要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments utilisés pour représenter une division structurelle qui est générée plutôt que présente de manière explicite dans la source
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per rappresentare una partizione testuale generata piuttosto che esplicitamente presente nella fonte
agrupa elementos usados para representar divisiones estructurales que se generan explícitamente porque estan presentes en la fuente.

model.div1Like
groups top-level structural divisions.
최상위 층위 구조 구역을 모아 놓는다.
匯集頂端層次的結構性區段。
最上位レベルの構造部分をまとめる。
regroupe des divisions structurelles du niveau le plus haut.
raggruppa partizioni testuali di primo livello
agrupa divisiones estructurales de nivel superior.

model.teiHeaderPart
groups high level elements which may appear more than once in a TEI header.
TEI 헤더에 한번 이상 출현하는 상위 층위 요소들을 모아 놓는다.
匯集可在<teiHeader>中使用並且可多次出現的元素
TEIヘダー内で高々1回出現する、上位レベルの要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments de macrostructure qui peuvent apparaître plus d'une fois dans l’en-tête TEI.
umfasst Elemente, die innerhalb des TEI-Headers benutzt werden dürfen und mehrmals auftreten können.
agrupa elementos que pueden usarse al interno del <teiHeader> y aparecen en diversas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <teiHeader> e che appaiono più volte.

model.sourceDescPart
groups elements which may be used inside <sourceDesc> and appear multiple times.
regroupe des éléments que l'on peut utiliser plusieurs fois dans l'élément <sourceDesc>.
<sourceDesc> 내부에 사용되어 여러 번 출현할 수 있는 요소들을 모아 놓는다.
匯集可在<sourceDesc>中使用並且可多次出現的元素
要素<sourceDesc>内で、複数回出現可能な要素をまとめる。
umfasst Elemente, die innerhalb des <sourceDesc>-Elements verwendet werden und mehrfach auftreten können.
agrupa los elementos que pueden usarse al interno de <sourceDesc> (descripción de la fuente) y que aparecen en diversas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <sourceDesc> e che appaiono più volte.

model.encodingDescPart
groups elements which may be used inside <encodingDesc> and appear multiple times.
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent apparaître plusieurs fois dans l'élément <encodingDesc>.
<encodingDesc> 내부에 사용되어 여러 번 출현될 수 있는 요소들을 모아 놓는다.
匯集可在<encodingDesc>中使用並且可多次出現的元素
要素<encodingDesc>内で使われ、複数回出現可能な要素をまとめる。
umfasst Elemente, die innerhalb des <encodingDesc>-Elements verwendet werden und mehrfach auftreten können.
agrupa elementos que pueden aparecer al interno de <encodingDesc> (Descripción de la codificación) y que aparecen en diversas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <encodingDesc> e che appaiono più volte.

model.editorialDeclPart
groups elements which may be used inside <editorialDecl> and appear multiple times.
regroupe des éléments qui peuvent être employés dans l'élément <editorialDecl> et souvent à de nombreuses reprises.
<editorialDecl> 내부에 사용되어 여러 번 출현될 수 있는 요소들을 모아 놓는다.
匯集可在<editorialDecl>中使用並且可多次出現的元素
要素<editorialDecl>中で使われ、複数回出現可能な要素をまとめる。
umfasst Elemente, die innerhalb des <editorialDecl>-Elements verwendet werden und mehrfach auftreten können.
agrupa elementos que pueden aparecer al interno de <editorialDecl> (declaración editorial) y que aparecen en diversas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <editorialDecl> e che appaiono più volte.

model.profileDescPart
groups elements which may be used inside <profileDesc> and appear multiple times.
regroupe des éléments que l'on peut utiliser plusieurs fois dans l'élément <profileDesc>.
<profileDesc> 내부에 사용되어 여러 번 출현할 수 있는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集可用於元素<profileDesc>內，且多次出現的元素
要素<profileDesc>内で使われ、複数回出現可能な要素をまとめる。
umfasst Elemente, die innerhalb des <profileDesc>-Elements genutzt werden und mehrfach auftreten können.
agrupa los elementos que pueden ser usados al interno de <profileDesc> y que aparecen en diversas ocasiones.
raggruppa gli elementi utilizzati all'interno di <profileDesc> e che appaiono più volte.

macro.abContent
anonymous block content
defines the content of anonymous block elements.
1.3. The TEI Class System

macro.paraContent
paragraph content
문단 내용
段落內容
contenu de paragraphe.
contenido del párrafo
contenuto di paragrafo
defines the content of paragraphs and similar elements.
문단과 유사 요소 내용을 정의한다.
定義段落與類似元素的內容。
段落やそれ相当の要素の内容を定義する。
définit le contenu de paragraphes et d' éléments semblables.
define el contenido de párrafos y elementos similares.
definisce il contenuto di paragrafi ed elementi simili
1.3. The TEI Class System

macro.limitedContent
paragraph content
문단 내용
段落內容
contenu du paragraphe
contenido del párrafo
defines the content of prose elements that are not used for transcription of extant materials.
현존 자료의 전사에 사용되지 않은 산문적 요소 내용을 정의한다.
定義散文元素的內容，該元素未用於轉錄現存資料
現存する資料の転記で使われるものではない散文要素の内容を定義する。
définit le contenu des éléments textuels qui ne sont pas utilisés pour la transcription des contenus existants.
define el contenido de elementos de prosa que no se usan para la transcripción de materiales existentes.
1.3. The TEI Class System

macro.phraseSeq
phrase sequence
구 연쇄
詞組序列
suite de syntagmes.
secuencia sintagmática
sequenza sintagmatica
defines a sequence of character data and phrase-level elements.
문자 데이터 및 구층위 요소의 연쇄를 정의한다.
定義一連串文字資料與詞組層次元素。
一連の文字列と句レベル要素を定義する。
définit un ordre de données et d'éléments syntagmatiques.
>defince una secuencia de caracteres y elementos de tipo sintagmático.
definisce una sequenza di caratteri ed elementi di tipo sintagmatico
1.4.1. Standard Content Models

macro.phraseSeq.limited
limited phrase sequence
한정된 구 연쇄
限定詞組序列
séquence d'expression délimitée
secuencia de sintagma limitada
defines a sequence of character data and those phrase-level elements that are not typically used for transcribing extant documents.
현존 문서의 전사에 전형적으로 사용되지 않은 문자 테이터 및 구 층위 요소의 연쇄를 정의한다.
定義一連串文字資料與詞組層次元素，通常不用於轉錄現存文件。
一般には、現存資料の転記に使われることはない、一連の文字列と句レベルの要素を定義する。
définit un ordre de données de caractère et ces éléments de niveau d'expression qui ne sont pas typiquement utilisées pour transcrire des documents existants.
define una secuencia de caracteres y elementos de tipo sintagmático que no se usan normalmente para transcribir.
1.4.1. Standard Content Models

macro.specialPara
'special' paragraph content
특별 문단 내용
「特殊」段落內容
contenu "spécial" de paragraphe
contenido de párrafo 'especial'
contenuto di paragrafo "speciale"
defines the content model of elements such as notes or list items, which either contain a series of component-level elements or else have the same structure as a paragraph, containing a series of phrase-level and inter-level elements.
일련의 성분층위 요소를 포함하거나 아니면 문단과 동일 구조를 갖는 주석 또는 목록 항목과 같은 요소의 내용 모델을 정의하며, 이것은 일련의 구 층위 및 상호층위 요소를 포함한다.
定義元素的內容模型，如註解或列表項目，這些內容模型包含一系列組合性層次元素，或與一個段落有相同的結構，包含一系列的詞組層次或inter-層次元素。
一連の句レベルまたは挿入レベルの要素と共に、一連の構成要素レベルの要素、または段落相当の構造を持つ、注釈やリスト項目となる要素の内容モデ ルを定義する。
définit le modèle de contenu des éléments tels que des notes ou des items de liste, contenant soit une suite d'éléments de niveau composant soit qui ont la même structure qu'un paragraphe, contenant une suite d’éléments du niveau de l’expression et de niveau intermédiaire.
define el modelo de contenido de elementos tipo notas o entradas de lista que contienen una serie de elementos a nivel de componentes que tienen la misma estructura de un párrafo con una serie de elementos a nivel sintagmático y inter-nivel.
definisce il modello di contenuto di elementi quali note o voci di lista che contiene una serie di elementi a livello di componenti aventi la stessa struttura di un paragrafo con una serie di elementi a livello sintagmatico e interlivello
1.3. The TEI Class System

macro.xtext
extended text
확장 텍스트
擴充文件
texte étendu
el texto
testo esteso
defines a sequence of character data and gaiji elements.
문자 데이터 및 외부 문자 요소의 연쇄를 정의한다.
定義一連串文字資料與缺字元素。
一連の文字列や外字要素を定義する。
définit une suite de caractères et d'éléments gaiji
define una secuencia de caracteres y elementos gaiji.
definisce una sequenza di caratteri ed elementi gaiji

teidata.certainty
defines the range of attribute values expressing a degree of certainty.
확실성 정도를 표현하는 속성 값의 범위를 정의한다.
定義表示正確度的屬性值範圍
確信度を示す属性値の程度を示す。
Définit la gamme des valeurs d'attribut exprimant un degré de certitude
define la gama de valores de atributos que exprimen un grado de certeza.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi che esprimono un grado di certezza
"high"
"medium"
"low"
"unknown"

Certainty may be expressed by one of the predefined symbolic values "high", "medium", or "low". The value "unknown" should be used in cases where the encoder does not wish to assert an opinion about the matter.

確信度は、"high", "medium", "low"のうち の1つが選択される。より詳細に示したい場合には、 teidata.probabilityを単独または追加と して使用することができる。

Le degré de certitude peut être exprimé par l'une des valeurs symboliques prédéfinies "high", "medium", ou "low".

teidata.probability
defines the range of attribute values expressing a probability.
확률을 표현하는 속성 값의 범위를 정의한다.
定義表示可能性的屬性值範圍
出現度を示す属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une probabilité.
define la gama de valores de atributos que exprimen un grado de probabilida.d
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi che esprimono una probabilità

Probability is expressed as a real number between 0 and 1; 0 representing certainly false and 1 representing certainly true.

出現度は、0から1までの実数で表現される。0は 確実に偽、1は、 確実に真を示す。

Le degré de probabilité est exprimé par un nombre réel entre 0 et 1 ; 0 représentant certainement faux et 1 certainement vrai.

teidata.numeric
defines the range of attribute values used for numeric values.
수치에 사용되는 속성 값의 범위를 정의한다.
定義用於數值的屬性值範圍
数値をとる属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs utilisées pour des valeurs numériques
define la gama de valores de atributos para valores numéricos.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per valori numerici

Any numeric value, represented as a decimal number, in floating point format, or as a ratio.

To represent a floating point number, expressed in scientific notation, E notation, a variant of exponential notation, may be used. In this format, the value is expressed as two numbers separated by the letter E. The first number, the significand (sometimes called the mantissa) is given in decimal format, while the second is an integer. The value is obtained by multiplying the mantissa by 10 the number of times indicated by the integer. Thus the value represented in decimal notation as 1000.0 might be represented in scientific notation as 10E3.

A value expressed as a ratio is represented by two integer values separated by a solidus (/) character. Thus, the value represented in decimal notation as 0.5 might be represented as a ratio by the string 1/2.

10進数を作る数値。

また、IEEE倍精度浮動小数点(64bit長)をとることもできる。例えば、 ±10⁻³²³ から ±10³⁰⁸など。

科学的数値を評点する際、指数表現は、属性値と して記述される。 10進数による仮数部、続いて記号E、続いて指数 部がくる。乗算記号と底(10)は省略される。仮数部と指数 部には負になるかもしれない。記号Eと指数部を分けるために空白文字を入れる必要はない。例えば、3×10⁸ は "3E8"と書かれる。

他の例として、以下のようなものがある。

- "3E10" (光の速度(cm/秒))
- "9.12E-31" (電子の質量(kg))
- "4E11" (銀河系にある恒星の数(推定値))
- "-1.76E11" (電子の電荷(クローン))

仮数部と指数部を分ける記号はeまたは Eのどちらでもよいが、当ガイドラインでは Eを使うことを推奨する。これは、他の規格との 整合性を保ち、数学における定数との混同を避けるためである。

Toute valeur numérique, représentée en nombre décimal, notée en virgule flottante ou en fraction.

Pour représenter un nombre en virgule flottante, exprimé en notation scientifique, E notation, une variante de la notation exponentielle peut être utilisée. Dans ce format, la valeur est exprimée par deux nombres séparés par la lettre E. Le premier facteur, le significande (parfois appelé mantisse) est donné sous forme décimale, tandis que le second est un entier. La valeur est obtenue en multipliant la mantisse par 10 fois le nombre indiqué par l'entier. Ainsi la valeur représentée en notation décimale 1000.0 pourrait être représentée en notation scientifique 10E3.

Une valeur exprimée en fraction est représentée par deux nombres entiers séparés par une barre oblique (/). Ainsi, la valeur représentée en notation décimale 0.5 pourrait être représentée en fraction par la chaîne de caractères 1/2.

teidata.count
defines the range of attribute values used for a non-negative integer value used as a count.
계산으로 사용된 음이 아닌 정수 값의 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍，用於作為總數的非負整數值
非負整数値を採る属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs des attributs exprimant une valeur entière et non négative utilisé pour des calculs.
define la gama de valores de atributos para números enteros no negativos usados como un cálculo.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per un numero intero non negativo impiegato come computo

Any positive integer value or zero is permitted

非負整数値のみが許される。

Seules des valeurs positives entières sont autorisées.

teidata.temporal.w3c
defines the range of attribute values expressing a temporal expression such as a date, a time, or a combination of them, that conform to the W3C XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition specification.
날짜, 시간 또는 이들의 조합과 같은 시간 표현을 나타내는 속성 값 범위를 정의하며, 이는 W3C XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition 명시를 따른다.
定義表示時間的屬性值範圍，如日期、時間或兩者的結合，依照W3CXML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Editionspecification標準所定義。
日付や時間などの時間表現をとる属性値の範囲を定義する。これは、W3Cの XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Editionに従ったものになる。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs propre à exprimer une valeur temporelle comme une date, une période, ou une combinaison des deux conformément aux spécifications XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition du W3C.
define la gama de valores de atributos que expresan un valor temporal del tipo fecha, hora, o combinación de ambas, de acuerdo con la especificación de W3C XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes Second Edition.

If it is likely that the value used is to be compared with another, then a time zone indicator should always be included, and only the dateTime representation should be used.

当該属性値が他の値と比較される場合、時間帯は必ず示されるべきである。またはdateTimeを使うべきである(訳注：この文は修正されるかもしれない)。

S'il est probable que la valeur utilisée doive être comparée à d’autres, alors une indication de fuseau horaire sera toujours incluse, et seule la représentation de dateTime sera employée.

teidata.duration.w3c
defines the range of attribute values available for representation of a duration in time using W3C datatypes.
W3C 데이터 유형을 사용해서 시간 지속을 나타내는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
以W3C datatypes標準格式來定義表示一段持續性時間的屬性值範圍
W3Cのデータ型を使い、時間幅を表現する当該属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une durée temporaraire utilisant les types de données W3C
define la gama de valores de atributos disponibles para la representación de un periodo de tiempo usando tipos de datos W3C

<time dur="PT45M">forty-five minutes</time>

<date dur="P1DT12H">a day and a half</date>

<date dur="P7D">a week</date>

<time dur="PT45M">quarante-cinq minutes</time>

<date dur="P1DT12H">une journée et demie</date>

<date dur="P7D">une semaine</date>

<time dur="PT0.02S">20 ms</time>

A duration is expressed as a sequence of number-letter pairs, preceded by the letter P; the letter gives the unit and may be Y (year), M (month), D (day), H (hour), M (minute), or S (second), in that order. The numbers are all unsigned integers, except for the S number, which may have a decimal component (using . as the decimal point). If any number is 0, then that number-letter pair may be omitted. If any of the H (hour), M (minute), or S (second) number-letter pairs are present, then the separator T must precede the first time number-letter pair.

For complete details, see the W3C specification.

時間幅は、先頭文字Pに続いて、数値-文字のペア列で示される。文字は単位を示している。Y(年)、M(月)、D(日)、H(時間)、M(分)、S(秒) の順番になる。数値は符号のない整数である。但し、Sの場合、最後に10進数の表記記号(小数点を示す.)をとることがある。数値が0の場合、数値-文字のペアは省略されることがある。H(時間)、M(分)、S(秒)が数値-文字のペアを作る場合、区切子Tを先頭にして時間を示す数値-文字のペアを示す必要がある。

詳細については、 W3C specificationを参照のこと。

Une durée est exprimée par une suite de paires alphanumériques, précédée par la lettre P ; la lettre donne l'unité et peut être Y (année), M (mois), D (jour), H (heure), M (minute), ou S (seconde), dans cet ordre. Les nombres sont des entiers non signés à l'exception du dernier, qui peut comporter une décimale (en utilisant soit . soit , pour la virgule ; la dernière possibilité est préférable). Si un nombre est 0, alors la paire alphanumérique peut être omise. Si les paires alphanumériques H (heure), M (minute), ou S (seconde) sont présentes, alors le séparateur T doit précéder la première paire alphanumérique time.

Pour des détails complets, voir W3C specification.

teidata.truthValue
defines the range of attribute values used to express a truth value.
진리값을 표현하는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍表示一個可能未知的真實值
真偽値を示す属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant la vérité d'une proposition.
define la gama de valores de atributos usados para expresar un valor cierto.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per esprimere un valore di verità

The possible values of this datatype are "1" or "true", or "0" or "false".

This datatype applies only for cases where uncertainty is inappropriate; if the attribute concerned may have a value other than true or false, e.g. "unknown", or "inapplicable", it should have the extended version of this datatype: teidata.xTruthValue.

曖昧な値が許されない場合に使われるデータ型になる。属性値が真偽値でない場合、例えば"unknown"や"inapplicable"の場合には、当該データ型の拡張版であるteidata.xTruthValueを使うべきである。

Ce type de données ne s'applique que dans les cas où l'incertitude est inappropriée ; c’est-à-dire si l'attribut concerné peut avoir une valeur autre que vrai ou faux, par ex. "inconnu", ou "inapplicable", il devrait alors y avoir la version étendue de ce type de données : teidata.xTruthValue.

teidata.language
defines the range of attribute values used to identify a particular combination of human language and writing system.
인간의 언어와 문자 체계의 특별한 조합을 식별하는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍標明人類語言與寫作系統的特殊結合
自然言語を示す属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une combinaison particulière du langage humain avec un système d'écriture.
define la gama de valores de atributos usados para identificar una combinación determinada de lenguaje y escritura humanos.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per identificare una determinata combinazione di linguaggio e sistema di scrittura umani

The values for this attribute are language tags as defined in BCP 47. Currently BCP 47 comprises RFC 5646 and RFC 4647; over time, other IETF documents may succeed these as the best current practice.

A language tag, per BCP 47, is assembled from a sequence of components or subtags separated by the hyphen character (-, U+002D). The tag is made of the following subtags, in the following order. Every subtag except the first is optional. If present, each occurs only once, except the fourth and fifth components (variant and extension), which are repeatable.

language
- The IANA-registered code for the language. This is almost always the same as the ISO 639 2-letter language code if there is one. The list of available registered language subtags can be found at . It is recommended that this code be written in lower case.
script
- The ISO 15924 code for the script. These codes consist of 4 letters, and it is recommended they be written with an initial capital, the other three letters in lower case. The canonical list of codes is maintained by the Unicode Consortium, and is available at . The IETF recommends this code be omitted unless it is necessary to make a distinction you need.
region
- Either an ISO 3166 country code or a UN M.49 region code that is registered with IANA (not all such codes are registered, e.g. UN codes for economic groupings or codes for countries for which there is already an ISO 3166 2-letter code are not registered). The former consist of 2 letters, and it is recommended they be written in upper case; the list of codes can be searched or browsed at . The latter consist of 3 digits; the list of codes can be found at .
variant
- An IANA-registered variation. These codes are used to indicate additional, well-recognized variations that define a language or its dialects that are not covered by other available subtags.
extension
- An extension has the format of a single letter followed by a hyphen followed by additional subtags. These exist to allow for future extension to BCP 47, but as of this writing no such extensions are in use.
private use
- An extension that uses the initial subtag of the single letter x (i.e., starts with x-) has no meaning except as negotiated among the parties involved. These should be used with great care, since they interfere with the interoperability that use of RFC 4646 is intended to promote. In order for a document that makes use of these subtags to be TEI-conformant, a corresponding <language> element must be present in the TEI header.

There are two exceptions to the above format. First, there are language tags in the IANA registry that do not match the above syntax, but are present because they have been grandfathered from previous specifications.

Second, an entire language tag can consist of only a private use subtag. These tags start with x-, and do not need to follow any further rules established by the IETF and endorsed by these Guidelines. Like all language tags that make use of private use subtags, the language in question must be documented in a corresponding <language> element in the TEI header.

Examples include

"sn"
- Shona
"zh-TW"
- Taiwanese
"zh-Hant-HK"
- Chinese written in traditional script as used in Hong Kong
"en-SL"
- English as spoken in Sierra Leone
"pl"
- Polish
"es-MX"
- Spanish as spoken in Mexico
"es-419"
- Spanish as spoken in Latin America

The W3C Internationalization Activity has published a useful introduction to BCP 47, Language tags in HTML and XML.

当該属性値は、 BCP 47 で定義されている言語タグになる。 現行のBCPには、RFC4646とRFC4647の内容が含まれている。今後は、他のIETF文書も採用されるかもしれない。

BCP 47にある言語タグは、ハイフン (-, U+002D)で区切られた一連の下位タグから構成されている。下位タグは、以下の順番 らなる。下位タグは、初めの1つは必須で、あとは選択的である。 variantとextensionは複数回、他は1回のみ出現出現する。この下位タグ のグループは繰り返し可能である。

language
- IANAの言語コード。この殆どは、該当言語が既にあれば、ISO 639の2文字 (以下、この場合の文字はラテン文字)言語コードと同じである。利用可能な言語下位タグのリストは にある。言語コードは、小文字で書かれることが推奨されている。
script
- ISO 15924による文字を示すコード。4文字から構成され、冒頭文字は大文 字で、残り3文字は小文字で書かれることが推奨されている。このコードは、ユニコードコンソーシアムで管理され、 から入手することができる。IETFでは、不要であれば当該コードを省略する ことを推奨している。
region
- ISO 3166またはUN M.49による国または地域コード。このコードはIANAに 登録されている(但し全てではない。例えば、UNコードには経済圏や、 ISO 3166の2文字コードで既に登録されているところは含まれていない)。 ISOコードは、2文字から構成され、大文字で書かれることが推奨されてい る。このコードは、 にある。 またUNコードは、3文字から構成されている。このコードは、 にあ る。
variant
- IANAにある登録値。このコードは、 他の下位タグでは対応できない、追加的であるがよく知られている、ある言語や方言の種類を示すために使用される。
extension
- いち文字、ハイフン、追加下位タグの順番で、拡張情報が示される。 これは、BCP 47が将来拡張された時のためある。現時点ではそのような 拡張はない。
private use
- xXで始まる(すなわち、x-)下位タグで示される拡張情報は、関連する団体間で決められた範囲の意味を持つ。 このコードは大文字で書かれるべきである。これは、RFC4646aで使われているタグとの相互運用性を保つためである。 このタグを使用してTEI準拠の文書を作成するには、要素 <language>をTEIヘダー中に記述しなければならない。

上記記述形式には、2つの例外がある。ひとつは、ここにある言語タグは、 IANAにある統語規則に違反しているものがある。 これはIANAでは昔の規定を継承しているからであ る。

ふたつめは、言語タグを、下位タグprivateだけで構成することができる ことである。x-で始まるタグの内容は、IETFにある規定にも当該TEIガイドラインにある規定にも従う必要はない。他の言語タグと 同様に、このタグを使用した場合には、TEIヘダーにある要素 <language>にこのタグを記述しなければならない。

言語コードには、以下のようなものがある。

"sn"
- ショナ語
"zh-TW"
- 中国語、台湾
"zh-Hant-HK"
- 中国語、繁体字、香港
"en-SL"
- 英語、シエラレオネ共和国
"pl"
- ポーランド語
"es-MX"
- スペイン語、メキシコ
"es-419"
- スペイン語、ラテンアメリカ

W3Cの国際化活動では、BCP 47の解説を以下に用意している。 HTMLとXMLで使用される言語タグ.

Les valeurs pour cet attribut sont les étiquettes de langue définies dans la norme BCP 47. Actuellement, la norme BCP 47 intègre les normes RFC 4646 et RFC 4647 ; à l'avenir, d'autres documents de l'IETF pourront leur succéder en tant que meilleure pratique.

Une étiquette de langue, pour la norme BCP 47, est formée par l'assemblage d'une suite de composants ou de sous-étiquettes reliés par un trait d'union (-, U+002D). L'étiquette est composée des sous-étiquettes suivantes, dans l'ordre indiqué. Chaque sous-étiquette est facultative, à l'exception de la première. Chacune ne peut avoir qu'une occurrence, sauf les quatrième et cinquième (variante et extension), qui sont répétables.

langue
- Code de langue enregistré par l'IANA. Il est presque toujours identique au code de langue alphabétique ISO 639-2, s'il y en a un. La liste des sous-étiquettes de langue enregistrées est disponible à : . Il est recommandé d'écrire ce code en minuscules.
écriture
- Code ISO 15924 pour l'écriture. Ces codes sont constitués de 4 lettres, et il est recommandé d'écrire la première lettre en majuscule, les trois autres en minuscules. La liste canonique des codes est maintenue par le Consortium Unicode, et elle est disponible à : . L'IETF recommande d'omettre ce code, sauf s'il est nécessaire pour établir une distinction.
région
- Soit un code de pays ISO 3166, soit un code de région UN M.49 enregistré par l'IANA (tous les codes de ce type ne sont pas enregistrés : par exemple, ne sont pas enregistrés les codes UN pour des regroupements économiques ou les codes de pays pour lesquels il existe déjà un code de pays alphabétique ISO 3166-2). Le premier est constitué de 2 lettres, et il est recommandé de l'écrire en majuscules. La liste des codes est disponible à : . Le second est constitué de 3 chiffres ; la liste des codes est disponible à : .
variante
- Variante enregistrée par l'IANA. Ces codes sont utilisés pour indiquer des variantes additionnelles et bien établies, qui définissent une langue ou ses dialectes et qui ne sont pas couverts par d'autres sous-étiquettes existantes.
extension
- Une extension a la forme d'une lettre unique, suivie d'un trait d'union, lui-même suivi de sous-étiquettes additionnelles. Ces dernières existent pour tenir compte d'une future extension de la norme BCP 47, mais à l'heure actuelle de telles extensions ne sont pas utilisées.
usage privé
- Une extension utilisant la sous-étiquette initiale de la lettre x (i.e., commençant par x-) n'a pas d'autre signification que celle négociée entre les parties impliquées. Ces sous-étiquettes doivent être utilisées avec beaucoup de prudence, car elles interfèrent avec l'interopérabilité que l'utilisation de la norme RFC 4646 vise à promouvoir. Pour qu'un document qui utilise ces sous-étiquettes soit conforme à la TEI, un élément <language> correspondant doit être présent dans l'en-tête TEI.

Il y a deux exceptions au format ci-dessus. Premièrement, il y a des codes de langue dans le registre de l'IANA qui ne correspondent pas à la syntaxe ci-dessus, mais qui sont présents car ils ont été hérités de spécifications antérieures.

En second lieu, une étiquette complète de langue peut consister seulement en une sous-étiquette d'usage privé. Ces étiquettes commencent par x- ; il n'est pas nécessaire qu'elles suivent les autres règles établies par l'IETF et acceptées par les présents Principes directeurs. Comme toutes les étiquettes de langue qui utilisent des sous-étiquettes d'usage privé, la langue en question doit être documentée dans un élément correspondant <language> dans l'en-tête TEI.

Les exemples incluent :

"sn"
- Shona
"zh-TW"
- Taïwanais
"zh-Hant-HK"
- Chinois de Hong Kong écrit dans l'écriture traditionnelle
"en-SL"
- Anglais parlé au Sierra Leone
"pl"
- Polonais
"es-MX"
- Espagnol parlé au Mexique
"es-419"
- Espagnol parlé en Amérique latine

La W3C Internationalization Activity a publié une introduction à la norme BCP 47 dont la lecture peut être utile : Language tags in HTML and XML.

6.1. Language Identification

teidata.namespace
defines the range of attribute values used to indicate XML namespaces as defined by the W3C Namespaces in XML Technical Recommendation.
W3C Namespaces in XML 기술적 권고안에 의해 정의된 XML 이름공간을 나타내는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍指出XML名稱空間，由XML technical recommendation中的W3C名稱空間所定義。
W3Cの XML名前空間で定義されている名前空間を示す属性値の範囲を示す。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une espace de noms XML tels qu'ils sont définis par le W3C.
define la gama de valores de atributos usados para indicar los nombres de los espacios en XML como establecen las recomendaciones técnicas del W3C para los
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per indicare i nomi degli spazi in XML come stabilito dalle raccomandazioni tecniche del W3C per gli spazi dei nomi in XML.

The range of syntactically valid values is defined by RFC 3986 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax

当該データ値は、RFC 2396 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) Reference に定義されている。

La gamme des valeurs syntaxiquement valides est définie par RFC 3986 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax .

teidata.outputMeasurement
defines a range of values for use in specifying the size of an object that is intended for display.
웹에서 디스플레이 목적의 대상 크기를 명시하는 값의 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍說明預定呈現在網路上之物件大小
webページ上で表示する際の大きさを定義する値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme de valeurs exprimant les dimensions d'un objet destiné à être affiché
define una gama de valores para emplearlos en la especificación de las dimensiones de un objeto que se ha de incluir in la red.
definisce una gamma di valori da impiegare nello specificare le dimensioni di un oggetto da inserire in rete

<figure>
   <head>The TEI Logo</head>
   <figDesc>Stylized yellow angle brackets with the letters <mentioned>TEI</mentioned> in
 between and <mentioned>text encoding initiative</mentioned> underneath, all on a white
 background.</figDesc>
   <graphic height="600px" width="600px" url="http://www.tei-c.org/logos/TEI-600.jpg"/>
</figure>

<figure>
   <head>Le logo TEI</head>
   <graphic height="600px" width="600px" url="http://www.tei-c.org/logos/TEI-600.jpg"/>
</figure>

These values map directly onto the values used by XSL-FO and CSS. For definitions of the units see those specifications; at the time of this writing the most complete list is in the CSS3 working draft.

当該値は、XSLFOやCSSで使用される値になる。詳細は各規格を参照のこと。 現時点で一番詳細なリストは、 CSS3 working draftになる。

Ces valeurs peuvent être reportées directement sur des valeurs utilisées par XSL-FO et CSS. Pour les définitions des unités, voir ces spécifications ; à ce jour la liste la plus complète est dans un CSS3 working draft.

teidata.pattern
defines attribute values which are expressed as a regular expression.
정규표현으로 표시된 속성 값을 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍以固定方法表示
正規表現を属性値として定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une expression régulière
define una gama de valores de atributos expresados como una expresión regular.
definisce una gamma di valori di attributi rappresentati come espressione regolare

A regular expression, often called a pattern, is an expression that describes a set of strings. They are usually used to give a concise description of a set, without having to list all elements. For example, the set containing the three strings Handel, Händel, and Haendel can be described by the pattern H(ä|ae?)ndel (or alternatively, it is said that the pattern H(ä|ae?)ndel matches each of the three strings) Wikipedia

This TEI datatype is mapped to the XSD token datatype, and may therefore contain any string of characters. However, it is recommended that the value used conform to the particular flavour of regular expression syntax supported by XSD Schema.

正規表現は、よくパタン/パターンともいわれるもので、一連の文字列を示すための表現方法である。一般には、簡潔な表現で、 多くのものを表現するために使用される。例えば、3つの文字列 Handel, Händel, Haendelを、１つのパタン H(ä|ae?)ndelで示すことができる(または、 H(ä|ae?)ndelは、3つの文字列のいずれにも マッチする、といえる)。 wikipedia

Une expression régulière, souvent appelée modèle, est une expression qui décrit un jeu de chaînes de caractères. Elles sont généralement utilisées pour donner une brève description d'un jeu, sans avoir à en lister tous les éléments. Par exemple, le jeu contenant les trois chaînes de caractères Handel, Händel, et Haendel peut être décrit comme le modèle H(ä|ae?)ndel (ou on peut dire que H(ä|ae?)ndel équivaut à chacune des trois chaînes) wikipedia wikipedia

teidata.point
defines the data type used to express a point in cartesian space.

  <facsimile>
<surface ulx="0" uly="0" lrx="400" lry="280">
  <zone points="220,100 300,210 170,250 123,234">
    <graphic url="handwriting.png"/>
  </zone>
</surface>
  </facsimile>

A point is defined by two numeric values, which should be expressed as decimal numbers. Neither number can end in a decimal point. E.g., both "0.0,84.2" and "0,84" are allowed, but "0.,84." is not.

teidata.pointer
defines the range of attribute values used to provide a single URI, absolute or relative, pointing to some other resource, either within the current document or elsewhere.
현 문서 또는 다른 곳 어디서든 다른 자원에 대한 단일 포인터를 제공하는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍提供單一指標，連結到其他位於目前文件或他處的資源
他の資源へのポインタをとる属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs utilisées pour fournir un pointeur URI unique sur une autre ressource, soit dans le document courant, soit dans un autre document
define una gama de valores de atributos usados para proporcionar un indicador de cualquier recurso, bien en el documento corriente o en otro.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi usati per indicare un unico puntatore rispetto a qualsiasi altra risorsa all'interno del documento corrente o altrove

The range of syntactically valid values is defined by RFC 3986 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax. Note that the values themselves are encoded using RFC 3987 Internationalized Resource Identifiers (IRIs) mapping to URIs. For example, https://secure.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/en/wiki/% is encoded as https://secure.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/en/wiki/%25 while http://موقع.وزارة-الاتصالات.مصر/ is encoded as http://xn--4gbrim.xn----rmckbbajlc6dj7bxne2c.xn--wgbh1c/

当該属性値は、 RFC 3986 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) Reference に定義されている。

La gamme des valeurs valides syntaxiquement est définie parRFC 3986 Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax

teidata.version
defines the range of attribute values which may be used to specify a TEI or Unicode version number.
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attribut exprimant un numéro de version TEI.

The value of this attribute follows the pattern specified by the Unicode consortium for its version number (). A version number contains digits and fullstop characters only. The first number supplied identifies the major version number. A second and third number, for minor and sub-minor version numbers, may also be supplied.

La valeur de cet attribut devrait suivre le format proposé par le Consortium Unicode pour identifier les versions (). Un numéro de version ne contient que des chiffres et des points. Le numéro initiale identifie le numéro majeur de la version. Un deuxième et un troisième numéro sont aussi disponibles pour la numérotation facultative des versions mineures ou sous-mineurs.

teidata.versionNumber
defines the range of attribute values used for version numbers.

teidata.replacement
defines attribute values which contain a replacement template.

teidata.xpath
defines attribute values which contain an XPath expression.

Any XPath expression using the syntax defined in 6.2. .

When writing programs that evaluate XPath expressions, programmers should be mindful of the possibility of malicious code injection attacks. For further information about XPath injection attacks, see the article at OWASP.

teidata.word
defines the range of attribute values expressed as a single word or token.
단일 단어 또는 토큰으로 표현된 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍表示一個單字或代號
いち単語またはトークンをとる属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant un seul mot ou signe
define una gama de valores de atributos expresados como una única palabra o señal.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi espressi come singola parola o singolo token

Attributes using this datatype must contain a single word which contains only letters, digits, punctuation characters, or symbols: thus it cannot include whitespace.

当該データ型を使用する属性値は、ひとつの単語になる。単語とは、文字、数字、句読点などの記号から構成されている。空白文字は含むことができない。

Les attributs employant ce type de données doivent contenir un mot simple ne contenant que des lettres, des chiffres, des signes de ponctuation, ou des symboles : ils ne peuvent donc pas inclure d’espace.

teidata.text
defines the range of attribute values used to express some kind of identifying string as a single sequence of Unicode characters possibly including whitespace.
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs exprimant une chaine de caracteres Unicode, y compris des espaces blancs.

Attributes using this datatype must contain a single token in which whitespace and other punctuation characters are permitted.

teidata.name
defines the range of attribute values expressed as an XML Name.
XML 이름으로 표현되는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍以XML名稱或識別符碼表示
XML名前としてある属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attribut exprimant un nom XML
define la gama de valores de atributos expresados como identificador o un nombre en XML.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi espressi come identificatore o nome XML

Attributes using this datatype must contain a single word which follows the rules defining a legal XML name (see ): for example they cannot include whitespace or begin with digits.

当該属性は、妥当なXML名前(詳細は を参照)であるひとつの単語をとる。例えば、空白文字を含まず、数字が先頭文字にこな いもの。

Les attributs utilisant ce type de données doivent contenir un seul mot, qui suit les règles de définition d'un nom XML valide (voir ) : par exemple ils ne peuvent contenir de blancs ou commencer par des chiffres.

teidata.xmlName
defines attribute values which contain an XML name.

The rules defining an XML name form a part of the XML Specification.

teidata.prefix
defines a range of values that may function as a URI scheme name.

This datatype is used to constrain a string of characters to one that can be used as a URI scheme name according to RFC 3986, section 3.1. Thus only the 26 lowercase letters a–z, the 10 digits 0–9, the plus sign, the period, and the hyphen are permitted, and the value must start with a letter.

teidata.enumerated
defines the range of attribute values expressed as a single XML name taken from a list of documented possibilities.
기록된 확률의 목록으로부터 얻어진 단일 XML 이름으로 표현된 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍以單字或代號呈現，該單字或代號出自於一份紀錄所有可能性的列表
符号化されている記述にある、ひつとのXML名前を示す属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme de valeurs des attributs exprimant un nom XML extrait d'une liste de possibilités documentées
define la gama de valores de atributos expresados como una única palabra o señal tomada de una lista de posibilidades documentadas.
definisce la gamma di valori di attributi espressi come singola parola o token tratto da una lista di possibilità attestate

Attributes using this datatype must contain a single word which contains only letters, digits, punctuation characters, or symbols: thus it cannot include whitespace.

Typically, the list of documented possibilities will be provided (or exemplified) by a value list in the associated attribute specification, expressed with a <valList> element.

当該データ型は、妥当なXML名前 (詳細はを参照のこと)である単語でなくてはならない。例えば、 属性値として空白文字、または数値で始まる名前をとることはできない。

典型例は、可能な記述またはその例のリストが、要素<valList> 中に属性定義として示されている。

Les attributs utilisant ce type de données doivent contenir un mot qui suit les règles de définition d'un nom XML valide (voir ): par exemple ils ne peuvent pas contenir des blancs ni commencer par des chiffres.

Normalement, la liste des possibilités documentées est fournie (ou exemplifiée) par une liste de valeurs dans la spécification de l'attribut associé, exprimée par un élément <valList>.

teidata.gender
defines the range of attribute values used to represent the gender of a person, persona, or character.

Values for attributes using this datatype may be defined locally by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

Values for this datatype should not be used to encode morphological gender (cf. <gen>, @msd as defined in att.linguistic, and 9.3.1. Information on Written and Spoken Forms).

teidata.sex
defines the range of attribute values used to identify the sex of an organism.
인간 또는 동물의 성을 식별하는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
定義的屬性值範圍用以識別人類或動物的性別
人間または動物の性を示す属性値の範囲を定義する。
définit la gamme des valeurs d'attributs employés pour identifier le sexe d’un organisme.
define la gama de valores de atributos usados para identificar el sexo de un organismo.
definisce una gamma di valori di attributi usati per identificare il sesso di un organismo.

Values for attributes using this datatype may be defined locally by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

Les valeurs de cet attribut peuvent être définies localement par un projet ou peuvent faire référence à un standard externe.

teidata.probCert
defines a range of attribute values which can be expressed either as a numeric probability or as a coded certainty value.

model.resource
groups separate elements which constitute the content of a digital resource, as opposed to its metadata.
TEI 문서를 구성하는 헤더 및 텍스트와 함께 나타날 수 있는 비테스트적 요소를 모아 놓는다.
agrupa los elementos no-textuales que pueden aparecer junto al encabezado y un texto para constituir un documento de TEI.
ヘダーやTEI文書を構成するテキストと共に出現する、非テキスト要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments non-textuels qui, avec un en-tête et un texte, constitue un document TEI.
raggruppa elementi non testuali che possono costituire un documento TEI insieme a un'intestazione e a un testo
1.3. The TEI Class System

model.describedResource
groups elements which contain the content of a digital resource and its metadata; these elements may serve as the outermost or root element of a TEI-conformant document
1.3. The TEI Class System

att.personal
attributes for components of names usually, but not necessarily, personal names
사람 이름의 성분에 대한 속성
用於個人名稱元件的屬性
attributs des composantes des noms de personnes
atributos para los componentes de nombres propios de persona
attributi per componenti di nomi propri di persona
common attributes for those elements which form part of a name usually, but not necessarily, a personal name.
사람 이름의 부분을 형성하는 요소에 대한 공통 속성
構成部分個人名稱的元素所用之通用屬性
個人名の構成要素となる要素に付与される属性。
attributs communs des éléments qui composent un nom de personne
atributos comunes para los elementos que forman parte de un nombre propio de persona.
attributi comuni agli elementi che compongono un nome proprio di persona
@full
indicates whether the name component is given in full, as an abbreviation or simply as an initial.
축약 또는 이니셜로 간단하게 이름 성분이 완전히 제시된 것인지의 여부를 나타낸다.
指出所提供的名稱元件是否完整，為一縮寫或僅為一字首字母。
当該名前要素は省略がないか、省略形か、イニシャルのような簡単なものか示す。
indique si la composante du nom est donnée en intégralité, sous forme d'abréviation ou simplement d'initiale.
indica si el componente del nombre aparece por completo, como una abreviatura o como una inicial.
indica se la componente del nome compare per esteso, come abbreviazione o come iniziale
yes
"yes"
yes
complet
the name component is spelled out in full.
이름 성분이 완전히 제시된다.
該名稱元件的拼字完整。
el componente nombre se deletrea por completo.
当該名前要素は、省略無く示されている。
la composante du nom est orthographiée en intégralité.
la componente del nome compare per esteso
"abb"
abbreviated
축약된
abrégé
abbreviato
el componente del nombre aparece como forma abreviada.
the name component is given in an abbreviated form.
이름 성분이 축약형으로 제시된다.
該名稱元件為縮寫形式。
el componente conocido se da en una forma abreviada.
当該名前要素には、省略がある。
la composante du nom est donnée sous forme abrégée.
la componente del nome compare in forma abbreviata
"init"
initial letter
이니셜 문자
initiale
lettera iniziale
el componente del nombre aparece mediante la inicial.
the name component is indicated only by one initial.
이름 성분이 하나의 이니셜(첫글자)로 제시되었다.
該名稱元件僅以一字首字母表示。
el componente conocido es indicado solamente por una inicial.
当該名前要素は、イニシャルだけで示されている。
la composante du nom n'est indiquée que par sa lettre initiale.
la componente del nome è indicata da una sola iniziale
@sort
sort
ordre
specifies the sort order of the name component in relation to others within the name.
사람 이름 내에 다른 것과 관련된 이름 성분의 정렬 순서를 명시한다.
指明個人名稱中該名稱元件與其他元件之間的排列順序。
個人名間で並び替えをする際の順番を示す。
précise dans quel ordre est placé la composante par rapport aux autres dans le nom d'une personne.
especifica la posición del componente al interno del nombre propio de persona en relación con los otros componentes.
specifica la posizione della componente all'interno del nome proprio di persona in relazione alle altre componenti
13.2.1. Personal Names

model.placeLike
groups elements used to provide information about places and their relationships.
장소와 그 관계에 관한 정보를 제공하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
elementos de los grupos usados para proporcionar a la información sobre los lugares y sus lazos.
場所やそれらの関連性に関する情報を示す要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments qui donne des informations sur des lieux et leurs relations.
raggruppa elementi utilizzati per fornire informazioni relative a luoghi e relazioni corrispondenti

teidata.duration.iso
defines the range of attribute values available for representation of a duration in time using ISO 8601 standard formats
ISO 8601 표준 형식을 사용하여 시간의 지속을 나타내는 속성 값 범위를 정의한다.
以ISO 8601標準格式定義表示一段持續性時間的屬性值範圍
ISO 8601にある標準形式を使い、時間幅を表現する当該属性値の範囲を定義 する。
définit la gamme de valeurs d'attributs exprimant une durée temporaraire utilisant le norme ISO 8601.
define la gama de valores de atributos posibles para representar la duración en el tiempo usando formatos estàndards ISO 8601.

<time dur-iso="PT0,75H">three-quarters of an hour</time>

<date dur-iso="P1,5D">a day and a half</date>

<date dur-iso="P14D">a fortnight</date>

<time dur-iso="PT0,75H">trois quarts d'une heure</time>

<date dur-iso="P1,5D">une journee et demie</date>

<date dur-iso="P14D">une quinzaine</date>

<time dur-iso="PT0.02S">20 ms</time>

A duration is expressed as a sequence of number-letter pairs, preceded by the letter P; the letter gives the unit and may be Y (year), M (month), D (day), H (hour), M (minute), or S (second), in that order. The numbers are all unsigned integers, except for the last, which may have a decimal component (using either . or , as the decimal point; the latter is preferred). If any number is 0, then that number-letter pair may be omitted. If any of the H (hour), M (minute), or S (second) number-letter pairs are present, then the separator T must precede the first time number-letter pair.

For complete details, see ISO 8601 Data elements and interchange formats — Information interchange — Representation of dates and times.

時間幅は、先頭文字Pに続いて、数値-文字のペア列で示される。 文字は単位を示している。Y(年)、M(月)、D(日)、H(時間)、M(分)、S(秒) の順番になる。数値は符号のない整数である。但し、最後に10進数の 表記記号(小数点を示す.または,。後者が望ましい)をとることはある。数値が0の場合、 数値-文字のペアは省略されることがある。 H(時間)、M(分)、 S(秒)が数値-文字のペアを作る場合、区切子 Tを先頭にして時間を示す数値-文字 のペアを示す必要がある。

詳細については、ISO 8601Data elements and interchange formats - Information interchange - Representation of dates and timesを参照のこと。

Une durée est exprimée par une suite de paires alphanumériques, précédée par la lettre P ; la lettre donne l'unité et peut être Y (année), M (mois), D (jour), H (heure), M (minute), ou S (seconde), dans cet ordre. Les nombres sont des entiers sans signe, à l'exception du dernier, qui peut comporter une décimale (en utilisant soit . soit , pour la virgule ; la dernière possibilité est préférable). Si un nombre est 0, alors la paire alphanumérique peut être omise. Si les paires alphanumériques H (heure), M (minute), ou S (seconde) sont présentes, alors le séparateur T doit précéder la première paire alphanumérique time.

Pour des détails complets, voir ISO 8601 Data elements and interchange formats — Information interchange — Representation of dates and times.

att.gaijiProp
provides attributes for defining the properties of non-standard characters or glyphs.
liefert Attribute zur Definition der Eigenschaften von nicht standardisierten Zeichen und Glyphen.
fornisce attributi per definire le proprietà di caratteri o glifi non standard
@name
provides the name of the character or glyph property being defined.
@value
provides the value of the character or glyph property being defined.
@version
specifies the version number of the Unicode Standard in which this property name is defined.
gibt die Versionsnummer eines externen Standards an, in dem dieser Eigenschaftsname definiert ist.
"unassigned"

In this example a definition for the Unicode property Decomposition Mapping is provided.

<unicodeProp name="Decomposition_Mapping" value="circle"/>

All name-only attributes need an xs:boolean attribute value inside @value.

5. Characters, Glyphs, and Writing Modes

<charDecl>
character declarations
문자 선언
文字描述
description de caractère
descripción del carácter
descrizione del carattere
provides information about nonstandard characters and glyphs.
비표준 문자와 그림문자에 대한 정보를 제공한다.
提供文字或字體的描述性資訊。
規格にない文字やグリフに関する情報を示す。
fournit des informations sur des caractères ou des glyphes sortant de l'ordinaire
proporciona información descriptiva sobre los carácteres o pictogramas.
fornisce informazioni descrittive su un caratteri o glifi.

<charDecl>
  <char xml:id="aENL">
    <unicodeProp name="Name" value="LATIN LETTER ENLARGED SMALL A"/>
    <mapping type="standard">a</mapping>
  </char>
</charDecl>

5.2. Markup Constructs for Representation of Characters and Glyphs

<char>
character
문자
文字
caractère
carácter
carattere
provides descriptive information about a character.
문자에 관한 기술 정보를 제공한다.
提供一個文字的描述性資訊。
文字に関する情報を示す。
fournit des informations descriptives sur un caractère
proporciona información descriptiva sobre un carácter.
fornisce informazioni descrittive su di un carattere.

<char xml:id="circledU4EBA">
  <localProp name="Name" value="CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH 4EBA"/>
  <localProp name="daikanwa" value="36"/>
  <unicodeProp name="Decomposition_Mapping" value="circle"/>
  <mapping type="standard">人</mapping>
</char>

<char xml:id="fr_circledU4EBA">
  <localProp name="nom" value="IDEOGRAMME ENCADRE 4EBA"/>
  <localProp name="daikanwa" value="36"/>
  <unicodeProp name="Decomposition_Mapping" value="circle"/>
  <mapping type="standard">人</mapping>
</char>

5.2. Markup Constructs for Representation of Characters and Glyphs

<glyph>
character glyph
그림 문자
文字的形體
glyphe d'un caractère
pictograma
glifo
provides descriptive information about a character glyph.
그림 문자에 관한 기술적 정보를 제공한다.
提供一種字體的描述性資訊。
グリフの解説を示す。
fournit des informations descriptives sur un glyphe
proporciona información descriptiva sobre un pictograma.
fornisce informazioni descrittive su di un glifo.

<glyph xml:id="rstroke">
  <localProp name="Name" value="LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH A FUNNY STROKE"/>
  <localProp name="entity" value="rstroke"/>
  <figure>
    <graphic url="glyph-rstroke.png"/>
  </figure>
</glyph>

<glyph xml:id="fr_napos">
  <localProp name="nom" value="N latin minuscule précédé d'une apostrophe"/>
  <localProp name="entity" value="napos"/>
  <graphic url="glyph-napos.png"/>
</glyph>

5.2. Markup Constructs for Representation of Characters and Glyphs

<localProp>
locally defined property
provides a locally defined character (or glyph) property.

<char xml:id="daikanwaU4EBA">
    <localProp name="name" value="CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH 4EBA"/>
    <localProp name="entity" value="daikanwa"/>
    <unicodeProp name="Decomposition_Mapping" value="circle"/>
    <mapping type="standard">人</mapping>
</char>

No definitive list of local names is proposed. However, the name "entity" is recommended as a means of naming the property identifying the recommended character entity name for this character or glyph.

Il n'est pas proposé de liste fermée de noms locaux de propriétés. Cependant, la dénomination entity (entité) est recommandée pour la propriété donnant le nom de l'entité caractère conseillée pour le caractère ou le glyphe en cours de description.

ローカル名のリストで勧告されているものはない。但し、文字やグリフを 表す文字エンティティを特定する際には、名前エンティティ を使い素性に名付けることは推奨されている。

5.2.1. Character Properties

<mapping>
character mapping
문자 사상
文字對應
caractères associés
representación del carácter
mappatura di carattreri
contains one or more characters which are related to the parent character or glyph in some respect, as specified by the @type attribute.
@type 상위 문자 또는 그림 문자와 관련된 하나 이상의 문자들을 포함한다. 속성으로 명시된다.
包含與父文字或字體在某方面有所關聯的一個或多個文字，在屬性@type中加以說明。
属性@typeで示される、親文字またはグリフと関連する、ひとつ以上の文字を示す。
contient un ou plusieurs caractères reliés par certains aspects (spécifiés par l'attribut @type) au glyphe ou au caractère défini dans l'élément parent
contiene uno o más caracteres que se relacionan en algún sentido con el carácter o pictograma del padre, como se especifica por el atributo de @type.
contiene uno u più caratteri in una qualche relazione con il carattere o glifo parente, come specificato dall'attributo @type.

<mapping type="modern">r</mapping>
<mapping type="standard">人</mapping>

<mapping type="modern">r</mapping>
<mapping type="standard">人</mapping>

Suggested values for the @type attribute include "exact" for exact equivalences, "uppercase" for uppercase equivalences, "lowercase" for lowercase equivalences, and "simplified" for simplified characters. The <g> elements contained by this element can point to either another <char> or <glyph> element or contain a character that is intended to be the target of this mapping.

Les valeurs conseillées de l'attribut @type sont : exact pour une relation d'équivalence, uppercase pour spécifier une correspondance avec un caractère en majuscules, lowercase pour spécifier une correspondance avec un caractère en minuscules, et simplified pour spécifier une correspondance avec un caractère simplifié. Les éléments <g> contenus par l'élément <mapping> peuvent, soit pointer vers un autre élément <char> ou <glyph>, soit contenir un caractère, cible de la relation de correspondance.

属性@typeの値として、同等物の場合にはexact を、大文字表記の場合にはuppercaseを、小文字表記の場合にはlowercaseを、簡易表記の場合には simplifiedなどをとる。当該要素に含まれる要素<g> は、他の要素<char>や<glyph>を参照することや、当該要素で対象となる文字をとることも可能である。

5.2. Markup Constructs for Representation of Characters and Glyphs

<unihanProp>
unihan property
holds the name and value of a normative or informative Unihan character (or glyph) property as part of its attributes.
@name
specifies the normalized name of a unicode han database (Unihan) property
"kZVariant"
"kAccountingNumeric"
"kBigFive"
"kCCCII"
"kCNS1986"
"kCNS1992"
"kCangjie"
"kCantonese"
"kCheungBauer"
"kCheungBauerIndex"
"kCihaiT"
"kCompatibilityVariant"
"kCowles"
"kDaeJaweon"
"kDefinition"
"kEACC"
"kFenn"
"kFennIndex"
"kFourCornerCode"
"kFrequency"
"kGB0"
"kGB1"
"kGB3"
"kGB5"
"kGB7"
"kGB8"
"kGSR"
"kGradeLevel"
"kHDZRadBreak"
"kHKGlyph"
"kHKSCS"
"kHanYu"
"kHangul"
"kHanyuPinlu"
"kHanyuPinyin"
"kIBMJapan"
"kIICore"
"kIRGDaeJaweon"
"kIRGDaiKanwaZiten"
"kIRGHanyuDaZidian"
"kIRGKangXi"
"kIRG_GSource"
"kIRG_HSource"
"kIRG_JSource"
"kIRG_KPSource"
"kIRG_KSource"
"kIRG_MSource"
"kIRG_TSource"
"kIRG_USource"
"kIRG_VSource"
"kJIS0213"
"kJa"
"kJapaneseKun"
"kJapaneseOn"
"kJinmeiyoKanji"
"kJis0"
"kJis1"
"kJoyoKanji"
"kKPS0"
"kKPS1"
"kKSC0"
"kKSC1"
"kKangXi"
"kKarlgren"
"kKorean"
"kKoreanEducationHanja"
"kKoreanName"
"kLau"
"kMainlandTelegraph"
"kMandarin"
"kMatthews"
"kMeyerWempe"
"kMorohashi"
"kNelson"
"kOtherNumeric"
"kPhonetic"
"kPrimaryNumeric"
"kPseudoGB1"
"kRSAdobe_Japan1_6"
"kRSJapanese"
"kRSKanWa"
"kRSKangXi"
"kRSKorean"
"kRSUnicode"
"kSBGY"
"kSemanticVariant"
"kSimplifiedVariant"
"kSpecializedSemanticVariant"
"kTGH"
"kTaiwanTelegraph"
"kTang"
"kTotalStrokes"
"kTraditionalVariant"
"kVietnamese"
"kXHC1983"
"kXerox"
@value
specifies the value of a named Unihan property

<unihanProp name="kRSKangXi" value="120.5" version="12.1"/>

A definitive list of current Unihan property names is provided in the Unicode Han Database.

5.2.1. Character Properties

<unicodeProp>
unicode property
provides a Unicode property for a character (or glyph).
@name
specifies the normalized name of a Unicode property.
"Age"
"AHex"
"Alpha"
"Alphabetic"
"ASCII_Hex_Digit"
"bc"
"Bidi_C"
"Bidi_Class"
"Bidi_Control"
"Bidi_M"
"Bidi_Mirrored"
"Bidi_Mirroring_Glyph"
"Bidi_Paired_Bracket"
"Bidi_Paired_Bracket_Type"
"blk"
"Block"
"bmg"
"bpb"
"bpt"
"Canonical_Combining_Class"
"Case_Folding"
"Case_Ignorable"
"Cased"
"ccc"
"CE"
"cf"
"Changes_When_Casefolded"
"Changes_When_Casemapped"
"Changes_When_Lowercased"
"Changes_When_NFKC_Casefolded"
"Changes_When_Titlecased"
"Changes_When_Uppercased"
"CI"
"Comp_Ex"
"Composition_Exclusion"
"CWCF"
"CWCM"
"CWKCF"
"CWL"
"CWT"
"CWU"
"Dash"
"Decomposition_Mapping"
"Decomposition_Type"
"Default_Ignorable_Code_Point"
"Dep"
"Deprecated"
"DI"
"Dia"
"Diacritic"
"dm"
"dt"
"ea"
"East_Asian_Width"
"EqUIdeo"
"Equivalent_Unified_Ideograph"
"Expands_On_NFC"
"Expands_On_NFD"
"Expands_On_NFKC"
"Expands_On_NFKD"
"Ext"
"Extender"
"FC_NFKC"
"FC_NFKC_Closure"
"Full_Composition_Exclusion"
"gc"
"GCB"
"General_Category"
"Gr_Base"
"Gr_Ext"
"Gr_Link"
"Grapheme_Base"
"Grapheme_Cluster_Break"
"Grapheme_Extend"
"Grapheme_Link"
"Hangul_Syllable_Type"
"Hex"
"Hex_Digit"
"hst"
"Hyphen"
"ID_Continue"
"ID_Start"
"IDC"
"Ideo"
"Ideographic"
"IDS"
"IDS_Binary_Operator"
"IDS_Trinary_Operator"
"IDSB"
"IDST"
"Indic_Positional_Category"
"Indic_Syllabic_Category"
"InPC"
"InSC"
"isc"
"ISO_Comment"
"Jamo_Short_Name"
"jg"
"Join_C"
"Join_Control"
"Joining_Group"
"Joining_Type"
"JSN"
"jt"
"kAccountingNumeric"
"kCompatibilityVariant"
"kIICore"
"kIRG_GSource"
"kIRG_HSource"
"kIRG_JSource"
"kIRG_KPSource"
"kIRG_KSource"
"kIRG_MSource"
"kIRG_TSource"
"kIRG_USource"
"kIRG_VSource"
"kOtherNumeric"
"kPrimaryNumeric"
"kRSUnicode"
"lb"
"lc"
"Line_Break"
"LOE"
"Logical_Order_Exception"
"Lower"
"Lowercase"
"Lowercase_Mapping"
"Math"
"na"
"na1"
"Name"
"Name_Alias"
"NChar"
"NFC_QC"
"NFC_Quick_Check"
"NFD_QC"
"NFD_Quick_Check"
"NFKC_Casefold"
"NFKC_CF"
"NFKC_QC"
"NFKC_Quick_Check"
"NFKD_QC"
"NFKD_Quick_Check"
"Noncharacter_Code_Point"
"nt"
"Numeric_Type"
"Numeric_Value"
"nv"
"OAlpha"
"ODI"
"OGr_Ext"
"OIDC"
"OIDS"
"OLower"
"OMath"
"Other_Alphabetic"
"Other_Default_Ignorable_Code_Point"
"Other_Grapheme_Extend"
"Other_ID_Continue"
"Other_ID_Start"
"Other_Lowercase"
"Other_Math"
"Other_Uppercase"
"OUpper"
"Pat_Syn"
"Pat_WS"
"Pattern_Syntax"
"Pattern_White_Space"
"PCM"
"Prepended_Concatenation_Mark"
"QMark"
"Quotation_Mark"
"Radical"
"Regional_Indicator"
"RI"
"SB"
"sc"
"scf"
"Script"
"Script_Extensions"
"scx"
"SD"
"Sentence_Break"
"Sentence_Terminal"
"Simple_Case_Folding"
"Simple_Lowercase_Mapping"
"Simple_Titlecase_Mapping"
"Simple_Uppercase_Mapping"
"slc"
"Soft_Dotted"
"stc"
"STerm"
"suc"
"tc"
"Term"
"Terminal_Punctuation"
"Titlecase_Mapping"
"uc"
"UIdeo"
"Unicode_1_Name"
"Unified_Ideograph"
"Upper"
"Uppercase"
"Uppercase_Mapping"
"Variation_Selector"
"Vertical_Orientation"
"vo"
"VS"
"WB"
"White_Space"
"Word_Break"
"WSpace"
"XID_Continue"
"XID_Start"
"XIDC"
"XIDS"
"XO_NFC"
"XO_NFD"
"XO_NFKC"
"XO_NFKD"
@value
specifies the value of a named Unicode property.

<char xml:id="U4EBA_circled"> <unicodeProp name="Decomposition_Mapping" value="circle" version="12.1"/> <localProp name="Name" value="CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH 4EBA"/> <localProp name="daikanwa" value="36"/> <mapping type="standard">人</mapping> </char>

A definitive list of current Unicode property names is provided in The Unicode Standard.

Eine definitive Liste der aktuellen Unicode Eigenschaftsnamen wird vom Unicode Standard bereitgestellt.

Une liste fermée des noms de propriétés Unicode est donnée dans la norme Unicode.

現行のユニコード基準名のリストは、ユニコード規格にある。

5.2.1. Character Properties

att.patternReplacement
provides attributes for regular-expression matching and replacement.
@matchPattern
specifies a regular expression against which the values of other attributes can be matched.

The syntax used should follow that defined by W3C XPath syntax. Note that parenthesized groups are used not only for establishing order of precedence and atoms for quantification, but also for creating subpatterns to be referenced by the @replacementPattern attribute.

Les groupes parenthésés ne sont pas seulement utilisés pour établir un ordre de priorité et des unités de quantification, mais aussi pour créer des sous-modèles référencés par l'attribut @replacementPattern.

Utilizan a los grupos de Parenthesised no sólo para establecer el orden de la precedencia y los átomos para la cuantificación, sino también para crear los subpatterns que se referirán por el atributo @replacementPattern.

丸括弧で区切られたグループは、出現順序や量化単位の他、属性 @replacementPatternで示された下位パタンを示す。

@replacementPattern
specifies a replacement pattern, that is, the skeleton of a relative or absolute URI containing references to groups in the @matchPattern which, once subpattern substitution has been performed, complete the URI.
spécifie une règle de remplacement qui, après avoir opéré les substitutions prévues à chaque nœud, génère une URI.
하위 유형 대치가 실행되면, URI를 제공하는 replacement pattern를 명시한다.
標明一個取代模式，一旦進行次要模式的替換，會自動提供統一資源識別符 (URI) 。
変形パタンを示す。下位の置換パタンが実行されれば、これはURIになる。
beschreibt ein replacement pattern (Ersetzungsmuster), das heißt das Grundgerüst einer relativen oder absoluten URI, die Referenzen auf Gruppen im @matchPattern-Attribut enthalten und die URI komplettieren, sobald die Ersetzung der untergeordneten Muster durchgeführt wurde.
especifica un replacement pattern (patrón de remplazamiento), el cual, una vez se ha ejecutado el subpatrón de sustitución, proporciona un URI.
specifica un replacement pattern che, una volta applicato un sub-pattern di sostituzione, fornisce un URI.

The strings $1, $2 etc. are references to the corresponding group in the regular expression specified by @matchPattern (counting open parenthesis, left to right). Processors are expected to replace them with whatever matched the corresponding group in the regular expression.

If a digit preceded by a dollar sign is needed in the actual replacement pattern (as opposed to being used as a back reference), the dollar sign must be written as %24.

Les chaînes $1 à $9 sont des références au groupe correspondant dans l'expression régulière spécifiée par l'attribut @matchPattern (en incluant la parenthèse ouvrante, de gauche à droite). Les processeurs devraient remplacer ces groupes par les valeurs correspondant aux groupes dans l'expression régulière.

Si un chiffre précédé par un dollar est nécessaire dans le modèle de remplacement actuel (en opposition à ce qui a été utilisé comme référence antérieure), le signe dollar doit être encodé %24.

Las series $1a través $9 son referencias al grupo correspondiente en la expresión regular especificada por el @matchPattern (contando paréntesis abiertos, de izquierda a derecha). Se espera que los procesadores las substituyan por el grupo correspondiente en la expresión regular.

Si un dígito precedido por el signo del dólar se necesita en el modelo actual de substitución (en contraposición a ser utilizado como una referencia posterior), el signo de dólar se debe escribir como %24.

文字列$1から$9は、属性@matchPatternにある正規表現 に該当するグループに(左から右の順番で)対応したものである。ソフトウェアは、当該正規表現に対応したグループを変形することが期待 されている。

ドル記号に続く数値が(後方参照に対する)置換パタンとして必要な場 合には、当該ドル記号は%24と書かれなければならない。

16.2.3. Using Abbreviated Pointers 2.3.6.3. Milestone Method 2.3.6. The Reference System Declaration 2.3.6.2. Search-and-Replace Method

<teiHeader>
TEI header
en-tête TEI
TEI 헤더
TEI標頭
TEI-Header (elektronische Titelseite)
Encabezado TEI
intestazione
supplies descriptive and declarative metadata associated with a digital resource or set of resources.
fournit des informations descriptives et déclaratives qui constituent une page de titre électronique au début de tout texte conforme à la TEI.
모든 TEI 구조의 텍스트 서두에 위치하는 전자 제목 페이지를 구성하는 기술적이고 선언적인 정보를 제공한다.
在所有符合TEI標準的文本起始的電子題名頁當中提供敘述性以及宣告性的資訊。
全てのTEI準拠テキストが伴う、電子版のタイトルページを構成する、記述 的・宣言的情報を示す。
beinhaltet beschreibende und erklärende Metadaten, die einer digitalen Ressource oder einer Sammlung von Ressourcen vorangestellt sind.
proporciona información descriptiva y declarativa de una página de título electrónico prefijada como un texto conforme a TEI.
fornisce informazioni descrittive e dichiarative che costituiscono un frontespizio elettronico che precede qualsiasi testo TEI-conforme.
@type

<teiHeader>
  <fileDesc>
    <titleStmt>
      <title>THE TEMPEST.</title>
      <author>Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616</author>
    </titleStmt>
    <publicationStmt>
      <distributor>
        <name>University of Oxford Text Archive</name>
        <address>
          <addrLine>Oxford University Computing Services</addrLine>
          <addrLine>13 Banbury Road</addrLine>
          <addrLine>Oxford</addrLine>
          <addrLine>OX2 6NN</addrLine>
        </address>
        <email>ota@oucs.ox.ac.uk</email>
      </distributor>
      <idno type="ota">http://ota.ox.ac.uk/id/5725</idno>
      <idno type="isbn10">1106027248</idno>
      <idno type="isbn13">9781106027245</idno>
      <availability status="free">
        <licence target="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">
          Distributed by the University of Oxford under a Creative Commons
          Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License </licence>
      </availability>
    </publicationStmt>
    <sourceDesc>
      <bibl>Revised version of <relatedItem type="older" target="http://ota.ox.ac.uk/id/0119"/>
      </bibl>
      <bibl>The texts were originally prepared by Trevor Howard-Hill for use in
        his single volume concordances to Shakespeare (OUP, 1969f). They have
        since been reformatted to modern standards and carefully proofread by
        staff of Oxford University Press' Shakespeare Department for use in the
        new "Old Spelling" Oxford Shakespeare, under the general editorship of Dr
        Stanley Wells: <title>The complete works / William Shakespeare</title>;
        general editors, Stanley Wells and Gary Taylor ; editors Stanley Wells ...
        [et al.] ; with introductions by Stanley Wells. -- Oxford : Clarendon
        Press, 1986. -- (Oxford Shakespeare). -- ISBN 0-19-812926-2</bibl>
      <biblFull>
        <titleStmt>
          <title>THE TEMPEST.</title>
          <author>Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616</author>
          <editor role="editor">Lee, Sidney, Sir, 1859-1926</editor>
        </titleStmt>
        <extent>xxxv, 908 p. : facsims. ; 39 cm.</extent>
        <publicationStmt>
          <publisher>Clarendon Press</publisher>
          <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
          <date>1902</date>
        </publicationStmt>
      </biblFull>
    </sourceDesc>
  </fileDesc>
  <encodingDesc>
    <classDecl>
      <taxonomy xml:id="OTASH">
        <bibl>University of Oxford Text Archive Subject Headings</bibl>
      </taxonomy>
      <taxonomy xml:id="LCSH">
        <bibl>Library of Congress Subject Headings</bibl>
      </taxonomy>
    </classDecl>
  </encodingDesc>
  <profileDesc>
    <creation>
      <date notAfter="1623"/>
    </creation>
    <langUsage>
      <language ident="eng">English</language>
    </langUsage>
    <textClass>
      <keywords scheme="#LCSH">
        <term type="genre">Plays -- England -- 16th century</term>
        <term type="genre">Plays -- England -- 17th century</term>
        <term type="genre">Comedies -- England -- 16th century</term>
        <term type="genre">Comedies -- England -- 17th century</term>
        <term type="genre">Tragedies -- England -- 16th century</term>
        <term type="genre">Tragedies -- England -- 17th century</term>
      </keywords>
    </textClass>
  </profileDesc>
  <revisionDesc>
    <change when="2010-08-31">Header normalised</change>
  </revisionDesc>
</teiHeader>

One of the few elements unconditionally required in any TEI document.

Un des seuls éléments obligatoires dans tout document TEI.

Uno de los pocos elementos incondicionalmente requeridos en cualquier documento de TEI.

当該要素は、TEI文書中で無条件に必要となる要素の1つである。

Eines der wenigen Elemente, die verpflichtend für ein valides TEI-Dokument sind.

2.1.1. The TEI Header and Its Components 15.1. Varieties of Composite Text

<fileDesc>
file description
description bibliographique du fichier
파일 기술
檔案描述
Dateibeschreibung
Descripción del archivo
descrizione del file
contains a full bibliographic description of an electronic file.
contient une description bibliographique complète du fichier électronique.
전자 파일에 관한 완전한 서지 정보의 기술을 포함한다.
包含對電子檔案的完整書目敘述。
電子ファイルに関する完全な書誌情報を示す。
enthält die vollständige bibliografische Beschreibung einer elektronischen Datei.
contiene una descripción bibliográfica completa del archivo electrónico.
contiene una descrizione bibliografica completa di un file elettronico.

<fileDesc>
  <titleStmt>
    <title>The shortest possible TEI document</title>
  </titleStmt>
  <publicationStmt>
    <p>Distributed as part of TEI P5</p>
  </publicationStmt>
  <sourceDesc>
    <p>No print source exists: this is an original digital text</p>
  </sourceDesc>
</fileDesc>

<teiHeader>
  <fileDesc>
    <titleStmt>
      <title>Le document TEI minimal</title>
    </titleStmt>
    <publicationStmt>
      <p>Distribué comme partie de TEI P5</p>
    </publicationStmt>
    <sourceDesc>
      <p>Aucune source : ce document est né numérique</p>
    </sourceDesc>
  </fileDesc>
</teiHeader>

The major source of information for those seeking to create a catalogue entry or bibliographic citation for an electronic file. As such, it provides a title and statements of responsibility together with details of the publication or distribution of the file, of any series to which it belongs, and detailed bibliographic notes for matters not addressed elsewhere in the header. It also contains a full bibliographic description for the source or sources from which the electronic text was derived.

Cet élément est la source d'information principale pour créer une notice de catalogage ou une référence bibliographique destinée à un fichier électronique. Il fournit le titre et les mentions de responsabilité, ainsi que des informations sur la publication ou la distribution du fichier, sur la collection à laquelle il appartient le cas échéant, ainsi que des notes détaillées sur des informations qui n'apparaissent pas ailleurs dans l'en-tête. Il contient également une description bibliographique complète de la ou des sources du texte produit.

La fuente de información principal para intentar crear una entrada de catálogo o una citación bibliográfica para un fichero electrónico. Como tal, proporciona un título y las declaraciones de responsabilidad junto con los detalles de la publicación o de la distribución del fichero, de cualquier serie a la que pertenezca, y las notas bibliográficas detalladas de las materias no abordadas en el encabezado. También contiene una descripción bibliográfica completa para la fuente o las fuentes de las cuales el texto electrónico se deriva.

電子ファイルの書誌項目または書誌引用を示す中心となるもの。 タイトル、当該ファイルの出版や頒布に関連する責任表示、他には記述されいない書誌情報に関する詳細な事項を含む。また、当該電子ファイルの 元になった、元資料に関する完全な書誌情報も示す。

Die wesentliche Informationsquelle für die Erstellung eines Katalogeintrags oder eines bibliografischen Zitats einer elektronischen Datei. Das Element liefert einen Titel und Angaben zu Verantwortlichkeiten zusammen mit Details zu Publikation und Distribution der Datei, sowie eine mögliche Zugehörigkeit zu einer Reihe. Außerdem kann es detaillierte bibliografische Anmerkungen für Sachverhalte, die an keiner anderen Stelle im TEI-Header behandelt werden können, enthalten. Es beinhaltet außerdem eine vollständige bibliografische Beschreibung der Quelle selbst bzw. der Quellen von welchen sich der elektronische Text ableitet.

2.2. The File Description 2.1.1. The TEI Header and Its Components

<titleStmt>
title statement
mention de titre
제목 진술
題名陳述
Angaben zum Titel
declaración del título
dichiarazione sul titolo
groups information about the title of a work and those responsible for its content.
regroupe les informations sur le titre d’une œuvre et les personnes ou institutions responsables de son contenu intellectuel.
저작의 제목 그리고 지적 내용에 대한 책임에 관한 정보를 모아 놓는다.
匯集關於作品標題與作品智慧內容責任歸屬的資訊。
作品や知的内容に責任のあるもののタイトルに関する情報をまとめる。
umfasst Angaben zum Titel eines Werks und zu den für seinen Inhalt Verantwortlichen.
agrupa la información referente al título de una obra y a los responsables de su contenido intelectual.
raggruppa le informazioni sul titolo di un'opera e sulle responsabilità del suo contenuto intellettuale.

<titleStmt>
  <title>Capgrave's Life of St. John Norbert: a machine-readable transcription</title>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>compiled by</resp>
    <name>P.J. Lucas</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>

<titleStmt>
  <title>Le sanctoral du lectionnaire de l'office dominicain (1254-1256)</title>
  <funder>2008—..., École nationale des chartes</funder>
  <principal>Anne-Élisabeth Urfels-Capot</principal>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>responsable des publications</resp>
    <name>Olivier Canteaut (École nationale des chartes)</name>
  </respStmt>
  <respStmt>
    <resp> 2009—..., Éditeur électronique : du TEI à l'écran</resp>
    <name ref="vincent.jolivet@enc.sorbonne.fr">Vincent Jolivet (École nationale
        des chartes)</name>
  </respStmt>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>2009, Éditeur scientifique</resp>
    <name ref="pascale.bourgain@enc.sorbonne.fr">Pascale Bourgain (École
        nationale des chartes)</name>
  </respStmt>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>2008, Conversion du document bureautique vers TEI</resp>
    <name ref="frederic.glorieux@enc.sorbonne.fr">Frédéric Glorieux (École
        nationale des chartes)</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>

<titleStmt>
  <title>Taisho Tripitaka, Electronic version, No. 251 般若波羅蜜多心經</title>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>電子化</resp>
    <name>中華電子佛典協會</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>

2.2.1. The Title Statement 2.2. The File Description

<editionStmt>
edition statement
mention d'édition
편집 진술
版本陳述
Angaben zur Ausgabe
declaración de la edición
dichiarazione sull'edizione
groups information relating to one edition of a text.
regroupe les informations relatives à l’édition d’un texte.
텍스트의 한 판에 관련된 정보를 모아 놓는다.
匯集文件某一版本的相關資訊。
版に関する情報をまとめる。
umfasst Angaben, die sich auf eine spezifische Ausgabe eines Textes beziehen.
agrupa la información relativa a la edición de un texto.
raggruppa le informazioni riguardo una edizione di un testo.

<editionStmt>
  <edition n="S2">Students' edition</edition>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>Adapted by </resp>
    <name>Elizabeth Kirk</name>
  </respStmt>
</editionStmt>

<editionStmt>
  <edition>Deuxième édition</edition>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>réalisée par</resp>
    <name>L. F.</name>
  </respStmt>
</editionStmt>

<editionStmt>
  <p>Première édition électronique, Nancy, <date> 2002</date>, réalisée dans le cadre de la
      base <ref target="http://www.frantext.fr/">FRANTEXT</ref> .</p>
</editionStmt>

<editionStmt>
  <edition n="S2">學生版</edition>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>改編自</resp>
    <name>伊莉莎白．科克</name>
  </respStmt>
</editionStmt>

<editionStmt>
  <p>初版<date>1991年，上學期</date>
      </p>
</editionStmt>

<editionStmt>
  <p>First edition, <date>Michaelmas Term, 1991.</date>
      </p>
</editionStmt>

2.2.2. The Edition Statement 2.2. The File Description

<edition>
edition
édition
편집, 판
版本
Ausgabe
edición
Edizione
describes the particularities of one edition of a text.
décrit les particularités de l’édition d’un texte.
텍스트의 한 판의 특성을 기술한다.
描述文件某一版本的特質。
テキストの版の詳細を示す。
beschreibt die Details einer Ausgabe eines Textes.
describe las particularidades de la edición de un texto.
descrive le peculiarità di una edizione del testo.

<edition>First edition <date>Oct 1990</date>
   </edition>
<edition n="S2">Students' edition</edition>

<edition>Première édition électronique, Nancy <date>2002</date>
   </edition>

<edition>初版<date>1990年10月</date>
   </edition>
<edition n="S2">學生版</edition>

2.2.2. The Edition Statement

<extent>
extent
étendue
describes the approximate size of a text stored on some carrier medium or of some other object, digital or non-digital, specified in any convenient units.
décrit la taille approximative d’un texte stocké sur son support, numérique ou non numérique, exprimé dans une unité quelconque appropriée.
전달 매체, 즉, 디지털 또는 비디지털로 저장된 텍스트의, 다양한 단위로 명시되는, 대략적 규모를 기술한다.
描述電子文件儲存在某一承載媒介時的約略大小，標以任何適用的單位。
電子・非電子テキストのおよその大きさを任意の単位で示す。
beschreibt die ungefähre Größe des elektronischen Textes, die er auf einem Datenträger einnimmt; kann auch für andere digitale oder nicht digitale Objekte verwendet werden; die Angabe erfolgt in entsprechenden Maßeinheiten.
describe el tamaño aproximado de un texto almacenado en algún medio, digital o no, especificándolo en alguna unidad funcional.
descrive la grandezza approssimativa di un documento elettronico così come immagazzinata su supporto, secondo una qualsiasi unità funzionale.

<extent>3200 sentences</extent>
<extent>between 10 and 20 Mb</extent>
<extent>ten 3.5 inch high density diskettes</extent>

The <measure> element may be used to supply normalized or machine tractable versions of the size or sizes concerned.

      <extent>
        <measure unit="MiB" quantity="4.2">About four megabytes</measure>
        <measure unit="pages" quantity="245">245 pages of source
material</measure>
      </extent>

<extent>400 Seiten</extent>
<extent>ungefähr 10MB</extent>

Das <measure>-Element kann dazu verwendet werden, um normalisierte oder maschinenlesbare Versionen der Größen-Angaben bereitzustellen.

<extent>
  <measure unit="MiB" quantity="4.2">Ungefähr vier Megabyte</measure>
  <measure unit="pages" quantity="245">Textumfang 245 Seiten</measure>
</extent>

<extent>198 pages</extent>
<extent>90 195 mots</extent>
<extent>1 Mo</extent>

<extent>3200個句子</extent>
<extent>介於10 到20 Mb</extent>
<extent>10片3.5吋磁碟片</extent>

2.2.3. Type and Extent of File 2.2. The File Description 3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information 10.7.1. Object Description

<publicationStmt>
publication statement
mention de publication
출판 진술
出版陳述
Angaben zur Veröffentlichung
declaración de la publicación
dichiarazione sulla pubblicazione
groups information concerning the publication or distribution of an electronic or other text.
regroupe des informations concernant la publication ou la diffusion d’un texte électronique ou d’un autre type de texte.
전자 또는 기타 텍스트의 출판 또는 배포에 관한 정보를 모아 놓는다.
匯集電子文件或其他類型文件的出版或發行相關資訊。
電子テキストなどの出版や頒布に関する情報をまとめる。
umfasst Angaben zu Veröffentlichung oder Vertrieb eines elektronischen oder sonstigen Textes.
agrupa la información concerniente a la publicación o distribución de un texto electrónico u otro texto.
raggruppa le informazioni riguardo la pubblicazione o la distribuzione di un documento elettronico o di altra natua.

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>C. Muquardt </publisher>
  <pubPlace>Bruxelles &amp; Leipzig</pubPlace>
  <date when="1846"/>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <distributor>ATILF (Analyse et Traitement Informatique de la Langue Française)</distributor>
  <idno type="FRANTEXT">L434</idno>
  <address>
    <addrLine>44, avenue de la Libération</addrLine>
    <addrLine>BP 30687</addrLine>
    <addrLine>54063 Nancy Cedex</addrLine>
    <addrLine>FRANCE</addrLine>
  </address>
  <availability status="free">
    <p>Dans un cadre de recherche ou d'enseignement</p>
  </availability>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>重慶大學出版社</publisher>
  <pubPlace>中國：重慶</pubPlace>
  <date when="2002"/>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>大塊文化</publisher>
  <pubPlace>台灣：台北</pubPlace>
  <availability>
    <p>版權所有 翻印必究</p>
  </availability>
  <date when="1992">1992</date>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>Chadwyck Healey</publisher>
  <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>
  <availability>
    <p>Available under licence only</p>
  </availability>
  <date when="1992">1992</date>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>Zea Books</publisher>
  <pubPlace>Lincoln, NE</pubPlace>
  <date>2017</date>
  <availability>
    <p>This is an open access work licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International license.</p>
  </availability>
  <ptr target="http://digitalcommons.unl.edu/zeabook/55"/>
</publicationStmt>

Where a publication statement contains several members of the model.publicationStmtPart.agency or model.publicationStmtPart.detail classes rather than one or more paragraphs or anonymous blocks, care should be taken to ensure that the repeated elements are presented in a meaningful order. It is a conformance requirement that elements supplying information about publication place, address, identifier, availability, and date be given following the name of the publisher, distributor, or authority concerned, and preferably in that order.

Bien que non imposé par les schémas, un document conforme à la TEI doit donner des informations sur le lieu de publication, l'adresse, l'identifiant, les droits de diffusion et la date dans cet ordre, après le nom de l'éditeur, du distributeur, ou de l'autorité concernée.

Aunque no sea hecho obligatorio por los esquemas, es un requisito para la conformidad de TEI que la información sobre el lugar de publicación, la dirección, el identificador, la disponibilidad, y la fecha de publicación. se dé en ese orden, después del nombre del editor, del distribuidor, o de la autoridad referida

TEI準拠としてスキーマが求めるものではないが、出版に関する情報は、 出版者名、頒布者名、関連著作者に続いて、出版の場所、住所、識別子、可用性、日付が、この順番で出現することが望ましい。

Wenn die Angaben zur Veröffentlichung mehrere Mitglieder der Klassen model.publicationStmtPart.agency oder model.publicationStmtPart.detail enthalten und nicht einen oder mehrere Absätze (<p>) bzw. unbestimmte Einheiten (<ab>), dann hat die Reihenfolge der Elemente eine Bedeutung, auf die zu achten ist. So müssen Elemente, die Angaben über den Veröffentlichungsort, die Adresse, den Identifikator, die Verfügbarkeit und das Veröffentlichungsdatum enthalten, auf den Namen des Verlags, des Distributors oder der Freigabeinstanz folgen, und zwar möglichst in dieser Reihenfolge.

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc. 2.2. The File Description

<distributor>
distributor
diffuseur
Distributor
supplies the name of a person or other agency responsible for the distribution of a text.
donne le nom d’une personne ou d’un organisme responsable de la diffusion d’un texte.
텍스트 배포 권한을 갖는 개인 또는 기관의 이름을 제시한다.
提供負責發行文件的個人或其他經銷商的名稱。
テキストの頒布に責任を持つ人物または団体の名前を示す。
gibt die Person oder Instanz an, die für die Distribution des Textes verantwortlich ist.
proporciona el nombre de la persona o agente responsable de la distribución de un texto.
fornisce il nome di una persona o di un'organizzazione responsabile della distribuzione di un testo.

<distributor>Oxford Text Archive</distributor>
<distributor>Redwood and Burn Ltd</distributor>

<distributor>Laboratoire : Analyse et Traitement Informatique de la Langue Française)</distributor>
<distributor>Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique</distributor>

<distributor>中央研究院</distributor>
<distributor>中華電子佛典協會</distributor>

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

<idno>
identifier
identifiant
식별 숫자
識別代碼
Identifikator
número identificativo
numero identificatore
supplies any form of identifier used to identify some object, such as a bibliographic item, a person, a title, an organization, etc. in a standardized way.
donne un identifiant standardisé qui peut être utilisé pour identifier une référence bibliographique, une personne, un titre d'ouvrage ou une organisation.
서지 정보 항목을 식별하기 위해 사용되는 표준 또는 비표준 숫자를 제시한다.
提供任何用來識別書目項目的標準或非標準編碼。
書誌項目、人物、タイトル、組織など、何らかのオブジェクトを標準化された方法で識別するために使用される任意の形式の識別子を提供する。
enthält einen frei wählbaren Identifikator, der ein beliebiges Objekt, z. B. eine bibliografische Einheit, eine Person, einen Titel, eine Organisation, in standardisierter Weise identifiziert.
proporciona un identificador estándar para un objecto; se usa parla la identificación de, por ejemplo, un elemento bibliográfico, una persona, un título o una organización.
fornisce un identificatore, standard o meno, usato per identificare un oggetto, come per esempio un'unità bibliografica, una persona, un titolo, un'organizzazione, ecc.
@type
categorizes the identifier, for example as an ISBN, Social Security number, etc.
classe un numéro dans une catégorie, par exemple comme étant un numéro ISBN ou comme appartenant une autre série normalisée.
예를 들어 ISBN 또는 기타 표준 일련번호로, 숫자를 범주화한다.
表明編碼的種類，例如國際標準書號 (ISBN) 或其他標準系列編碼。
当該数値の分類を示す。例えば、ISBNなど。
bestimmt die Art des Identifikators (z. B. ISBN, Sozialversicherungsnummer, URI)
clasifica el número, por ejemplo como un ISBN o cualquier otro número estándard.
classifica l'identificatore, ad esempio come codice ISBN o altri generi di identificatori standard.
"ISBN"
International Standard Book Number: a 13- or (if assigned prior to 2007) 10-digit identifying number assigned by the publishing industry to a published book or similar item, registered with the International ISBN Agency.
"ISSN"
International Standard Serial Number: an eight-digit number to uniquely identify a serial publication.
"DOI"
Digital Object Identifier: a unique string of letters and numbers assigned to an electronic document.
"URI"
Uniform Resource Identifier: a string of characters to uniquely identify a resource, following the syntax of RFC 3986.
"VIAF"
A data number in the Virtual Internet Authority File assigned to link different names in catalogs around the world for the same entity.
"ESTC"
English Short-Title Catalogue number: an identifying number assigned to a document in English printed in the British Isles or North America before 1801.
"OCLC"
OCLC control number (record number) for the union catalog record in WorldCat, a union catalog for member libraries in the Online Computer Library Center global cooperative.

<idno type="ISBN">978-1-906964-22-1</idno>
<idno type="ISSN">0143-3385</idno>
<idno type="DOI">10.1000/123</idno>
<idno type="URI">http://www.worldcat.org/oclc/185922478</idno>
<idno type="URI">http://authority.nzetc.org/463/</idno>
<idno type="LT">Thomason Tract E.537(17)</idno>
<idno type="Wing">C695</idno>
<idno type="oldCat"><g ref="#sym"/>345</idno>

In the last case, the identifier includes a non-Unicode character which is defined elsewhere by means of a <glyph> or <char> element referenced here as #sym.

<idno type="ISBN">978-1-906964-22-1</idno>
<idno type="ISSN">0143-3385</idno>
<idno type="DOI">10.1000/123</idno>
<idno type="URI">http://www.worldcat.org/oclc/185922478</idno>
<idno type="URI">http://authority.nzetc.org/463/</idno>
<idno type="LT">Thomason Tract E.537(17)</idno>
<idno type="Wing">C695</idno>
<idno type="oldCat"><g ref="#sym"/>345</idno>

In letztgenanntem Fall enthält der Identifikator ein Nicht-Unicode-Zeichen, das an anderer Stelle mit Hilfe eines <glyph> oder <char>-Elements definiert ist und hier als #sym referenziert wird.

<idno type="ISSN">0143-3385</idno>
<idno type="OTA">116</idno>
<idno type="ISBN">1-896016-00-6</idno>

<idno> should be used for labels which identify an object or concept in a formal cataloguing system such as a database or an RDF store, or in a distributed system such as the World Wide Web. Some suggested values for @type on <idno> are "ISBN", "ISSN", "DOI", and "URI".

<idno> sollte für Identifikatoren genutzt werden, die ein Objekt oder Konzept in einem formalen Katalogsystem wie z. B. einer Datenbank oder einem RDF store oder in einem verteilten System wie dem World Wide Web eindeutig identifizieren. Als Werte für @type von <idno> bieten sich z. B. die "ISBN", die "ISSN", ein "DOI" oder ein "URI" an.

13.3.1. Basic Principles 2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc. 2.2.5. The Series Statement 3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information

<availability>
availability
disponibilité
disponibilità
Verfügbarkeit
supplies information about the availability of a text, for example any restrictions on its use or distribution, its copyright status, any licence applying to it, etc.
renseigne sur la disponibilité du texte, par exemple sur toutes restrictions quant à son usage ou sa diffusion, son copyright, etc.
텍스트 이용에 관한 정보를 제시한다. 예를 들어 사용 또는 배포의 제한, 저작권 상태 등.
提供關於文件可利用性的資訊，例如使用或發行上的任何限制、版權狀態等。
テキストの利用可能性に関する情報を示す。例えば、その使用や頒布、 著作権に関する制限など。
liefert Informationen zur Verfügbarkeit eines Textes, zum Beispiel Einschränkungen bezüglich des Gebrauchs oder der Weitergabe, Lizensierungen usw.
proporciona información sobre la disponibilidad de un texto, por ejemplo cualquier restricción en cuanto a su uso o distribución, su copyright, etc.
fornisce informazioni sulla disponibilità di un testo, per esempio su qualsiasi restrizione che si applica alla sua utilizzazione o distribuzione, il suo statuto in merito al copyright, etc.
@status
status
Statuscode
supplies a code identifying the current availability of the text.
donne un code caractérisant la disponibilité actuelle d’un texte.
텍스트의 현재 이용 가능성을 식별하는 부호를 제공한다.
提供一個代號，用來確認文件目前的可利用性。
当該テキストの、現在の利用可能性を表すコードを示す。
gibt einen Code an, der die derzeitige Nutzbarkeit eines Textes festlegt.
proporciona un código identificativo de la disponibilidad actual del texto.
fornisce un codice che identifica l'attuale disponibilità del testo.
"free"
free
frei
the text is freely available.
Le texte est libre de droits.
텍스트를 자유롭게 이용할 수 있음.
文件的可利用性不受限。
el texto está libremente disponible.
当該テキストは、自由に使用できる。
il testo è disponibile gratuitamente.
der Text ist frei verfügbar.
"unknown"
unknown
unbekannt
the status of the text is unknown.
Le statut du texte est inconnu.
텍스트의 상태를 알 수 없다.
文件狀態不明。
el estatus del texto es desconocido.
当該テキストの利用可能性は不明。
la disponibilità del testo non è nota
der Status des Textes ist unbekannt.
"restricted"
restricted
eingeschränkt
the text is not freely available.
le texte est sous droits.
텍스트를 자유롭게 사용할 수 없음.
文件的可利用性受限制。
el texto no está libremente disponible.
当該テキストは、自由に使用できない。
il testo non è disponibile gratuitamente.
der Text ist nicht frei verfügbar.

<availability status="restricted">
  <p>Available for academic research purposes only.</p>
</availability>
<availability status="free">
  <p>In the public domain</p>
</availability>
<availability status="restricted">
  <p>Available under licence from the publishers.</p>
</availability>

<availability status="restricted">
  <p>L' ABES a adopté le système Créative Commons pour permettre à tous ceux qui le
  souhaitent, de reproduire tout ou partie des rubriques du site de l'ABES sur support
  papier ou support électronique.</p>
</availability>

<availability status="restricted">
  <p>僅供學術研究使用</p>
</availability>
<availability status="free">
  <p>用於公共領域</p>
</availability>
<availability status="restricted">
  <p>需徵求出版商授權</p>
</availability>

<availability>
  <licence target="http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT">
    <p>The MIT License
    applies to this document.</p>
    <p>Copyright (C) 2011 by The University of Victoria</p>
    <p>Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
    of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
    in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
    to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
    copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
    furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:</p>
    <p>The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
    all copies or substantial portions of the Software.</p>
    <p>THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
    IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
    FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
    AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
    LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
    OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
    THE SOFTWARE.</p>
  </licence>
</availability>

A consistent format should be adopted

On devrait adopter un format de codage reconnu.

Se debe adoptar un formato constante

永続的な形式で示されるべきである。

Es sollte ein einheitliches Format verwendet werden.

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

<licence>
contains information about a licence or other legal agreement applicable to the text.
contient des informations légales applicables au texte, notamment le contrat de licence définissant les droits d'utilisation.
beinhaltet für den Text gültige Lizenzinformationen oder andere rechtswirksame Vereinbarungen.

<licence target="http://www.nzetc.org/tm/scholarly/tei-NZETC-Help.html#licensing">
  Licence: Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 New Zealand Licence
</licence>

<licence target="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/deed.fr">
  Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 non transposé (CC BY 3.0)
</licence>

<licence target="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0/"> Ce document
                  est publié librement sur le web à destination de la communauté scientifique
                  dans le cadre de la licence Creative Commons « Paternité-Pas d’Utilisation
                  Commerciale-Partage des Conditions Initiales à l’Identique 2.0 France ».
                </licence>

<availability>
  <licence target="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/" notBefore="2013-01-01">
    <p>The Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported (CC BY 3.0) Licence
applies to this document.</p>
    <p>The licence was added on January 1, 2013.</p>
  </licence>
</availability>

A <licence> element should be supplied for each licence agreement applicable to the text in question. The @target attribute may be used to reference a full version of the licence. The @when, @notBefore, @notAfter, @from or @to attributes may be used in combination to indicate the date or dates of applicability of the licence.

Das <licence>-Element soll für jede Lizenzvereinbarung, die sich auf den Text bezieht, angegeben werden. Das @target-Attribut kann verwendet werden, um auf eine vollständige Version der Lizenz zu referenzieren. Die Attribute @when, @notBefore, @notAfter, @from oder @to können in Kombination verwendet werden, um den Gültigkeitszeitraum der Lizenz anzugeben.

2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

<seriesStmt>
series statement
mention de collection
연속간행물 진술
集叢陳述
Angaben zu einer Publikationsreihe
declaración de serie
dichiarazione sulla serie
groups information about the series, if any, to which a publication belongs.
regroupe toute information relative à la collection (si elle existe) à laquelle appartient une publication.
연속 간행물에 대한 정보를 모아 놓는다.
若出版品隸屬於某叢書，則在此匯集該叢書的相關資訊。
出版されたシリーズの情報をまとめる。
umfasst Angaben zu einer Publikationsreihe, zu der eine Veröffentlichung gehört.
agrupa información sobre la serie, si la hay, a la que pertenece una publicación.
raggruppa le informazioni circa la serie alla quale eventualmente la pubblicazione appartiene.

<seriesStmt>
  <title>Machine-Readable Texts for the Study of Indian Literature</title>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>ed. by</resp>
    <name>Jan Gonda</name>
  </respStmt>
  <biblScope unit="volume">1.2</biblScope>
  <idno type="ISSN">0 345 6789</idno>
</seriesStmt>

<seriesStmt>
  <title>Babel</title>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>directeur de collection</resp>
    <name>Jacques Dubois</name>
  </respStmt>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>directeur de collection</resp>
    <name>Hubert Nyssen</name>
  </respStmt>
  <idno type="ISSN">1140-3853</idno>
</seriesStmt>

<seriesStmt>
  <title>《印度文學研究》的電腦可讀文件</title>
  <respStmt>
    <resp>編者</resp>
    <name>珍．崗妲</name>
  </respStmt>
  <idno type="ISSN">0 345 6789</idno>
  <biblScope unit="volume">1.2</biblScope>
</seriesStmt>

2.2.5. The Series Statement 2.2. The File Description

<notesStmt>
notes statement
mention de notes
주석 진술
附註陳述
Zusätzliche Anmerkungen
declaración de notas
dichiarazione sulle note
collects together any notes providing information about a text additional to that recorded in other parts of the bibliographic description.
rassemble toutes les notes fournissant des informations sur un texte, en plus des informations mentionnées dans d'autres parties de la description bibliographique.
서지 정보 기술의 다른 부분에 기록된 것들 이외에, 텍스트에 관한 정보를 제공하는 주석들을 모아 놓는다.
收集其他部分的書目描述中所未記載的任何文件相關附註。
当該書誌情報の他の場所に記録されているテキストに関する注釈をまとめる。
fasst Anmerkungen zu einem Text zusammen, zusätzlich zu jenen Informationen, die in anderen Teilen der bibliografischen Beschreibung bereits festgehalten sind.
agrupa algunas notas que proporcionan información sobre un texto adicional referido en otras partes de la descripción bibliográfica.
raggruppa tutte le note sul testo in aggiunta a quelle registrate nelle altre parti della descrizione bibliografica.

<notesStmt>
  <note>Historical commentary provided by Mark Cohen</note>
  <note>OCR scanning done at University of Toronto</note>
</notesStmt>

<notesStmt>
  <note>Les photographies, héliogravures et cartes postales colorisées signées Lehnert
      &amp; Landrock, de techniques novatrices, sont réellement des œuvres d'art ; elles
      apportent en outre une documentation considérable sur la Tunisie du début du XXe
    siècle.</note>
</notesStmt>

<notesStmt>
  <note>歷史評論由馬克．可漢提共</note>
  <note>OCR光學辨識掃描於多倫多大學</note>
</notesStmt>

Information of different kinds should not be grouped together into the same note.

des informations hétérogènes ne doivent pas être regroupées dans une même note.

La información de diversos tipos no se debe agrupar junta en la misma nota.

種類が異なる情報は、同じ注釈としてまとめるべきではない。

Informationen unterschiedlicher Art sollten nicht in einer gemeinsamen Anmerkung gruppiert werden.

2.2.6. The Notes Statement 2.2. The File Description

<sourceDesc>
source description
description de la source
원전 기술
descripción de la fuente
descrizione della fonte
Beschreibung der Quellen
describes the source(s) from which an electronic text was derived or generated, typically a bibliographic description in the case of a digitized text, or a phrase such as "born digital" for a text which has no previous existence.
décrit la source à partir de laquelle un texte électronique a été dérivé ou produit, habituellement une description bibliographique pour un texte numérisé, ou une expression comme "document numérique natif " pour un texte qui n'a aucune existence précédente.
전자 파일을 생성하거나 도출한 원전 텍스트에 대한 기술을 제시한다.
提供所製電子文件的一個或數個來源文件的書目描述。
電子テキストが作られた元テキストの情報を示す。
beschreibt die Quelle, von der sich der elektronische Text ableitet. Üblicherweise eine bibliografische Beschreibung im Falle eines digitalisierten Textes oder eine Bezeichnung wie "born digital" für einen nur in elektronischer Form vorliegenden Text.
proporciona una descripción del texto (o textos) fuente del que un texto electrónico deriva o ha sido generado.
fornisce una descrizione relativa alla o alle fonti da cui è derivato o generato un documento elettronico.

<sourceDesc>
  <bibl><title level="a">The Interesting story of the Children in the Wood</title>. In
      <author>Victor E Neuberg</author>, <title>The Penny Histories</title>.
      <publisher>OUP</publisher><date>1968</date>. </bibl>
</sourceDesc>

<sourceDesc>
  <p>Texte original : le texte a été créé sous sa forme électronique.</p>
</sourceDesc>

<sourceDesc>
  <p>無來源：以電腦可讀格式建立</p>
</sourceDesc>

<sourceDesc>
  <p>Born digital: no previous source exists.</p>
</sourceDesc>

2.2.7. The Source Description

<biblFull>
fully-structured bibliographic citation
완전히 구조화된 서지 인용 정보
citación bibliográfica estructurada completa
référence bibliographique totalement structurée
citazione bibliografica strutturata
contains a fully-structured bibliographic citation, in which all components of the TEI file description are present.
완전히 구조화된 서지 정보를 포함하며, 그 안에 TEI 파일 기술의 모든 성분이 제시된다.
包含結構完整的書目資料，其中呈現出TEI檔案描述內的所有元件。
厳密な構造を持つ書誌情報を示す。TEIのファイル記述の全要素は、ここ に記述される。
contient une référence bibliographique totalement structurée : tous les composants de la description du fichier TEI y sont présents.
contiene una cita bibliográfica completamente estructurada, en la cual están presentes todos los componentes de la descripción del archivo TEI.
contiene una citazione bibliografica interamente strutturata nella quale sono presenti tutti i componenti di descrizione di un file TEI.

<sourceDesc>
  <biblFull>
    <titleStmt>
      <title>Buxom Joan of Lymas's love to a jolly sailer: or, The maiden's
        choice: being love for love again. To an excellent new play-house
        tune.</title>
      <author>Congreve, William, 1670-1729.</author>
    </titleStmt>
    <extent>1 sheet ([1] p.) : music. </extent>
    <publicationStmt>
      <publisher>printed for P[hilip]. Brooksby, at the Golden-ball, in
        Pye-corner.,</publisher>
      <pubPlace>London: :</pubPlace>
      <date>[between 1693-1695]</date>
    </publicationStmt>
    <notesStmt>
      <note>Attributed to William Congreve by Wing.</note>
      <note>Date of publication and publisher's name from Wing.</note>
      <note>Verse: "A soldier and a sailer ..."</note>
      <note>Printed in two columns.</note>
      <note>Reproduction of original in the British Library.</note>
    </notesStmt>
  </biblFull>
</sourceDesc>

3.12.1. Methods of Encoding Bibliographic References and Lists of References 2.2. The File Description 2.2.7. The Source Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<encodingDesc>
encoding description
description de l'encodage
부호화 기술
編碼描述
Beschreibung der Kodierung
Descripción de la codificación
descrizione della codifica
documents the relationship between an electronic text and the source or sources from which it was derived.
documente la relation d'un texte électronique avec sa ou ses sources.
전자 텍스트와 그것의 원전 텍스트 혹은 텍스트들 사이의 관련성을 기록한다.
記錄電子文件和其ㄧ個或多個文件來源之間的關係。
電子テキストとその元資料との関係を示す。
dokumentiert das Verhältnis zwischen dem elektronischen Text und seiner Quelle oder den Quellen, von denen er sich ableitet.
documenta la relación entre un texto electrónico y la fuente o fuentes de las que este deriva.
documenta la relazione fra un documento elettronico e la o le fonti da cui è derivato.

      <encodingDesc>
        <p>Basic encoding, capturing lexical information only. All
hyphenation, punctuation, and variant spellings normalized. No
formatting or layout information preserved.</p>
      </encodingDesc>

<encodingDesc>
  <projectDesc>
    <p>Corpus de
                textes sélectionnés pour la formation MISAT, Frejus,
        juillet 2010.
              </p>
  </projectDesc>
  <samplingDecl>
    <p>Corpus
                d'échantillons de 2000 mots pris au début de chaque texte. </p>
  </samplingDecl>
</encodingDesc>

2.3. The Encoding Description 2.1.1. The TEI Header and Its Components

<projectDesc>
project description
description du projet
프로젝트 기술
計畫描述
Beschreibung des Projekts
descripción del proyecto
descrizione del progetto
describes in detail the aim or purpose for which an electronic file was encoded, together with any other relevant information concerning the process by which it was assembled or collected.
décrit en détail le but ou l’objectif visé dans l’encodage d’un fichier électronique, ainsi que toute autre information pertinente sur la manière dont il a été construit ou recueilli.
전자 파일이 부호화된 목적을 상세히 기술하며, 아울러 그것이 수집된 절차에 관한 기타 관련 정보를 기술한다, .
詳述將電子檔案編碼的目標或目的，以及其他關於檔案匯集或收集程序的任何資訊。
制作過程に関する情報も含めて、電子ファイルが作られた目的の詳細を示す。
beschreibt detailliert Ziel bzw. Zweck, für den eine Datei kodiert wurde, zusammen mit weiteren relevanten Informationen, die das Verfahren betreffen, nach dem die Daten zusammengestellt oder gesammelt wurden.
describe con detalle el objetivo o propósito para el que un archivo electrónico ha sido codificado, junto a cualquier otra información relevante sobre el proceso de codificación.
descrive in dettaglio lo scopo per il quale un documento elettronico è sato codigicato, insieme a qualsiasi altra informazione rilevante riguardo le procedure di raccolta.

<projectDesc>
  <p>Texts collected for use in the Claremont Shakespeare Clinic, June 1990</p>
</projectDesc>

<projectDesc>
  <p>La saisie a été effectuée par notre partenaire Datactivity. Le texte saisi a été
      ensuite converti et remis en forme selon les normes du format XML, standard d’échange ou
      d’affichage de documents permettant de séparer la forme et le contenu et offrant une
      déclinaison d’outils qui donnent la possibilité d’exploiter un texte comme une véritable
      base de données. La norme adoptée (DTD) est le TEI (Text Encoding Initiative). </p>
  <p> Affichage et manipulation du texte (mise au format, filtrage, réorganisation) se font
      sur un serveur Apache à l'aide de l'infrastructure Axkit.</p>
  <p> Le moteur logiciel du site a été développé en Xpathscript et s'appuie sur les travaux
      de Dominique Quatravaux (Alliance Francophone Pour l'Avancement d'XPathScript) et de
      Yanick Champoux (support de Libxml via YPathScript).</p>
  <p>Les programmes développés pour le site sont mis à la disposition en open-source sur
      demande (contacter Alexandre Gefen). </p>
  <p>Les fonctions de recherche plein texte sont fournies par Philologic dans le cadre du
      partenariat du projet avec ARTFL.</p>
  <p>L’architecture de travail, sous Linux, est destinée à garantir une haute disponibilité
      et des performances optimales. La liaison avec Internet est assurée par les services
      informatiques de l’Université de Neuchâtel (SITEL).</p>
</projectDesc>

<projectDesc>
  <p>文件收集於1990年7月，杭州杜甫詩作研討會使用</p>
</projectDesc>

2.3.1. The Project Description 2.3. The Encoding Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<samplingDecl>
sampling declaration
déclaration d'échantillonnage
표본 추출 선언
取樣宣告
Angabe der Auswahlverfahren
declaración de muestra
dichiarazione di campionatura
contains a prose description of the rationale and methods used in sampling texts in the creation of a corpus or collection.
contient une description en texte libre du raisonnement et des méthodes utilisés pour l'échantillonnage des textes dans la création d’un corpus ou d’une collection.
코퍼스 또는 텍스트 집단 구축에서 표본 추출에 사용된 원리와 방법에 대한 산문체 기술을 포함한다.
以篇章描述的方式說明建立文集或文選時文件取樣的原理與方法。
コーパス等を作成する際、テキストを標本化する原理や手法に関する、散文 による解説を含む。
enthält eine Beschreibung der Kriterien und Methoden, nach denen die Texte für ein Korpus oder eine Sammlung zusammengestellt wurden.
contiene una descripción en prosa sobre los fundamentos y métodos usados en textos de muestra en la creación de un corpus o una selección de textos.
contiene una descrizione dei metodi e dei principi usati nella campionatura dei testi nella creazione o raccolta del corpus.

<samplingDecl>
  <p>Samples of up to 2000 words taken at random from the beginning, middle, or end of each
    text identified as relevant by respondents.</p>
</samplingDecl>

<samplingDecl>
  <p>Corpus
                d'échantillons de 2000 mots pris au début de chaque texte. </p>
</samplingDecl>

This element records all information about systematic inclusion or omission of portions of the text, whether a reflection of sampling procedures in the pure sense or of systematic omission of material deemed either too difficult to transcribe or not of sufficient interest.

Cet élément rassemble toute information sur l'inclusion ou l'omission systématique de segments du texte, quel que soit le résultat des procédures d'échantillonnage au sens strict, ou de l'omission systématique d'éléments jugés soit trop difficiles à transcrire, soit sans intérêt.

Este elemento registra toda la información sobre la inclusión sistemática o la omisión de fragmentos de texto, si los procedimientos de muestra en el sentido estricto o la omisión sistemática del material se consideran demasiado difíciles de transcribir o no de suficiente interés.

純粋な意味での標本化過程または体系的な資料の省略が、難しすぎて転記 できない、または充分な関心が得られていないと考えられているにしても、 当該要素は、テキスト部分の体系的な取捨選択に関する情報の全てを 記録する。

Dieses Element umfasst Informationen über das systematische Einbinden oder Auslassen von Textteilen. Dabei kann es sich um eine Beschreibung der Auswahlprozesse handeln oder um Angaben darüber, warum bestimmtes Material ausgelassen wurde, z. B. weil das Material zu schwierig zu transkribieren oder nicht interessant genug war.

2.3.2. The Sampling Declaration 2.3. The Encoding Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<editorialDecl>
editorial practice declaration
déclaration des pratiques éditoriales
편집 실행 선언
編輯實行宣告
Angabe der Editionsprinzipien
declaración de la edición
dichiarazione sulle pratiche editoriali
provides details of editorial principles and practices applied during the encoding of a text.
donne des précisions sur les pratiques et les principes éditoriaux appliqués au cours de l’encodage du texte.
텍스트 부호화에서 적용된 편집 원리 및 기준의 상세 항목을 제시한다.
提供文件編碼時使用的編輯原則與實行方法的細節。
テキストを符号化する際に適用される編集方針や編集方法の詳細を示す。
beschreibt die Details der Editionsprinzipien und Verfahren, die bei der Kodierung des Textes angewandt wurden.
proporciona detalles de principios editoriales y prácticas aplicadas en la codificación de un texto.
fornisce dettagli su principi e pratiche editoriali seguite nella codifica di un testo.

<encodingDesc>
  <editorialDecl>
    <p>EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford
      and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded
      texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English
      Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of
      EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every
      monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available
      in EEBO.</p>
    <p>EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual
      project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create
      diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with
      light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding
      Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).</p>
    <p>The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created
      during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as
      of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own
      purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is
      given to their original source.</p>
    <p>Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and
      therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.</p>
    <p>Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English
      Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title)
      appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was
      intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true
      nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a
      works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in
      other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or
      later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do
      so.</p>
    <p>Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and
      basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in
      Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text
      was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were
      returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was
      enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected
      where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining
      illegibles were encoded as &lt;gap&gt;s. Understanding these processes
      should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good,
      some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as
      illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances
      will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.</p>
    <p>The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4
      of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.</p>
    <p>Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII
      text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema;
      characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within
      braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8
      Unicode or TEI g elements).</p>
    <p>Keying and markup guidelines are available at the <ref target="http://www.textcreationpartnership.org/docs/.">Text Creation
        Partnership web site</ref>.</p>
  </editorialDecl>
</encodingDesc>

2.3.3. The Editorial Practices Declaration 2.3. The Encoding Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<tagsDecl>
tagging declaration
déclaration de balisage
태깅 선언
標誌宣告
Beschreibung des Tag-Gebrauchs
declaración del etiquetado
dighiarazione sulla marcatura
provides detailed information about the tagging applied to a document.
donne l’information détaillée sur le balisage appliqué à un document .
문서에 적용된 태깅에 관한 정보를 상세하게 제공한다.
提供關於應用在XML文件中的標誌的詳細資訊。
タグ付けに関する詳細な情報を示す。
liefert detaillierte Angaben zum Gebrauch von Tags, die in einem Dokument verwendet werden.
proporciona información pormenorizada sobre el etiquetado aplicado a un documento.
fornisce informazioni dettagliate sulla mercatura applicata ad un documento SGML o XML.
@partial
indicates whether the element types listed exhaustively include all those found within <text>, or represent only a subset.

TEI recommended practice is to specify this attribute. When the <tagUsage> elements inside <tagsDecl> are used to list each of the element types in the associated <text>, the value should be given as "false". When the <tagUsage> elements inside <tagsDecl> are used to provide usage information or default renditions for only a subset of the elements types within the associated <text>, the value should be "true".

<tagsDecl partial="true">
  <rendition xml:id="rend-it" scheme="css" selector="emph, hi, name, title">font-style: italic;</rendition>
  <namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
    <tagUsage gi="hi" occurs="467"/>
    <tagUsage gi="title" occurs="45"/>
  </namespace>
  <namespace name="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
    <tagUsage gi="para" occurs="10"/>
  </namespace>
</tagsDecl>

If the @partial attribute were not specified here, the implication would be that the document in question contains only <hi>, <title>, and <para> elements.

2.3.4. The Tagging Declaration 2.3. The Encoding Description

<tagUsage>
element usage
usage des balises
Verwendung eines Elements
documents the usage of a specific element within a specified document.
donne des informations sur l’utilisation d’un élément spécifique dans un texte.
텍스트에서 특정 요소의 사용에 관한 정보를 제공한다.
提供文件中某個特定元素的使用資訊。
テキスト中にある特定要素の使い方に関する情報を示す。
dokumentiert den Gebrauch eines spezifischen Elements innerhalb eines bestimmten Dokuments.
proporciona información sobre el uso de un elemento específico al interno del texto.
fornisce informazioni circa l'uso di uno specifico elemento all'interno di un testo.
@gi
generic identifier
요소 이름
nombre de elemento
nom de l'élément
nome di elemento
generische Kennung
specifies the name (generic identifier) of the element indicated by the tag, within the namespace indicated by the parent <namespace> element.
nom (identifiant générique) de l’élément indiqué par la balise.
태그로 제시된 요소의 이름(일반적 확인소)
該標籤所指明的元素名稱 (通用識別符碼)。
当該タグで示された要素の名前(GI、 共通識別子)。
gibt den Namen (generische Kennung) des durch das Tag angegebenen Elements innerhalb jenes Namensraums an, der im übergeordneten <namespace>-Element angegeben wird.
el nombre (identificador genérico) de un elemento indicado mediante una etiqueta.
il nome (identificatore generico) dell'elemento indicato dal marcatore.
@occurs
specifies the number of occurrences of this element within the text.
spécifie le nombre d’occurrences de cet élément dans le texte.
텍스트 내부에 이 요소가 출현 횟수를 명시한다.
指出該元素在文本中出現的次數。
当該要素が、テキスト中で出現する回数を示す。
gibt an, wie oft das Element im Text vorkommt
especifica el número de veces que un elemento determinado aparece en el texto.
specifica il numero di occorrenze dell'elemento nel testo.
@withId
with unique identifier
고유한 확인소를 가진
con identificador único
avec identificateur unique
con identificatore unico
mit eindeutiger Kennung
specifies the number of occurrences of this element within the text which bear a distinct value for the global @xml:id attribute.
spécifie le nombre d’occurrences de cet élément dans le texte qui porte une valeur donnée pour l’attribut global @xml:id.
전반적 @xml:id 속성에 대한 분별 값을 포함하는 텍스트 내의 이 요소에 대한 출현 횟수를 명시한다.
指出帶有明確全域屬性@xml:id屬性值的元素在文本中的出現次數。
グローバル属性@xml:idを持つテキスト中にある当該要素の 出現回数を示す。
gibt an, wie oft dieses Element mit einem bestimmten Wert für das globale Attribut @xml:id im Text vorkommt.
indica el número de veces que este elemento aparece en el texto con un valor distintivo apara el atributo global @xml:id.
specifica il numero di occorrenze dell'elemento nel testo e che reca un valore distinto dall'attributo globale @xml:id.

<tagsDecl partial="true">
  <rendition xml:id="it" scheme="css" selector="foreign, hi"> font-style: italic; </rendition>

  <namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
    <tagUsage gi="hi" occurs="28" withId="2"> Used to mark English words italicized in the copy text.</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="foreign">Used to mark non-English words in the copy text.</tagUsage>

  </namespace>
</tagsDecl>

<tagsDecl>
  <rendition xml:id="fr_it">A noter l'emploi d'une variante penchée ou italique dans la fonte
      actuelle.</rendition>
  <namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
    <tagUsage gi="abbr"> Les abréviations étant très courantes et de type
        <term>brevigraph</term> (voir le manuel TEI), l'attribut "type" a cette valeur par
        défaut. Dans les autres cas, ("Sénécial" abrégé par "Sénat") , l'attribut "type " a
        explicitement la valeur "contraction" et l'attribut "expan" contient la forme
        développée.</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="lb">Chaque ligne est numérotée depuis le début du corps de la lettre (sauf
        le titre).</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="lb">Chaque page est numérotée sous la forme d'un numéro de folio suivi de
        "recto" ou "verso". Dans certains cas, le foliotage réel n'est pas celui qui est
        indiqué sur le registre. Dans ce cas, les deux numérotations sont gardées.</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="unclear">Mots difficiles à lire</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="opener">Phrase(s) d'introduction de la lettre.</tagUsage>
    <tagUsage gi="signed">Signature du copiste.</tagUsage>
  </namespace>
</tagsDecl>

2.3.4. The Tagging Declaration

<namespace>
namespace
espace de noms
supplies the formal name of the namespace to which the elements documented by its children belong.
fournit le nom formel de l'espace de noms auquel appartiennent les éléments documentés par ses éléments fils.
그 자식이 기술한 요소가 속하는 네임스페이스의 공식적 이름을 제공한다.
提供其子元素所描述的元素所屬的名稱空間之正式名稱。
当該要素が属する名前空間の形式名を示す。
liefert die formale Bezeichnung des Namensraums, zu dem die Elemente als Kind-Elemente gehören.
proporciona el nombre formal del namespace al cual pertenecen los elementos documentados por sus hijos.
fornisce il nome formale del namespace a cui appartengono gli elementi documentati dai suoi figli.
@name
specifies the full formal name of the namespace concerned.
le nom formel complet de l'espace de noms concerné.
관련된 네임스페이스의 공식적 전체 이름
名稱空間的正式完整名稱。
名前空間の全形式名。
gibt die vollständige formale Bezeichnung des betreffenden Namensraums an.
el nombre formal completo del namespace concerniente.
l'intero nome formale del namespace in questione.

<namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <tagUsage gi="hi" occurs="28" withId="2"> Used only to mark English words
    italicized in the copy text </tagUsage>
</namespace>

<namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <tagUsage gi="foreign">Employé pour marquer des mots non-français dans le
      texte.</tagUsage>
</namespace>

<namespace name="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <tagUsage gi="hi" occurs="28" withId="2"> 僅用於標示副本上的斜體英文字</tagUsage>
</namespace>

2.3.4. The Tagging Declaration

<rendition>
rendition
rendu
supplies information about the rendition or appearance of one or more elements in the source text.
donne des informations sur le rendu ou sur l'apparence d'un ou de plusieurs éléments dans le texte source.
원본 텍스트에서 요소의 모양에 대한 정보를 제공한다.
提供關於一個或多個元素預定呈現方式的資訊。
元資料テキスト中にある、ひとつ以上の要素の描出や現れ方に関する情報を 示す。
liefert Informationen über die Darstellung oder das Aussehen eines oder mehrerer Elemente im Quelltext.
proporciona información sobre la interpretación ideada para uno o más elementos.
fornisce informazioni circa la resa prevista di uno o più elementi.
@scope
where CSS is used, provides a way of defining pseudo-elements, that is, styling rules applicable to specific sub-portions of an element.
"first-line"
styling applies to the first line of the target element
"first-letter"
styling applies to the first letter of the target element
"before"
styling should be applied immediately before the content of the target element
"after"
styling should be applied immediately after the content of the target element
@selector
contains a selector or series of selectors specifying the elements to which the contained style description applies, expressed in the language specified in the @scheme attribute.

<rendition scheme="css" selector="text, front, back, body, div, p, ab">
  display: block;
</rendition>

<rendition scheme="css" selector="*[rend*=italic]">
  font-style: italic;
</rendition>

Since the default value of the @scheme attribute is assumed to be CSS, the default expectation for this attribute, in the absence of @scheme, is that CSS selector syntax will be used.

While @rendition is used to point from an element in the transcribed source to a <rendition> element in the header which describes how it appears, the @selector attribute allows the encoder to point in the other direction: from a <rendition> in the header to a collection of elements which all share the same renditional features. In both cases, the intention is to record the appearance of the source text, not to prescribe any particular output rendering.

<tagsDecl>
  <rendition xml:id="r-center" scheme="css">text-align: center;</rendition>
  <rendition xml:id="r-small" scheme="css">font-size: small;</rendition>
  <rendition xml:id="r-large" scheme="css">font-size: large;</rendition>
  <rendition xml:id="initcaps" scope="first-letter" scheme="css">font-size: xx-large</rendition>
</tagsDecl>

2.3.4. The Tagging Declaration

<refsDecl>
references declaration
Déclaration du système de références
참조 선언
參照宣告
Angabe der Referenzstruktur
declaración de referencias
dichiarazione sui riferimenti
specifies how canonical references are constructed for this text.
précise la manière dont les références canoniques ont été construites pour ce texte.
표준 참조가 이러한 텍스트에 대해 어떻게 구성되는가를 명시한다.
標明本文件與某一個權威參照標準的關係。
標準的な参照の作られ方を示す。
beschreibt, wie Standardreferenzen für diesen Text aufgebaut sind.
indica cómo se han formado las referencias canónicas para este texto.
specifica in che modo siano costruiti i riferimenti canonici per il testo.

<refsDecl>
  <cRefPattern matchPattern="([A-Za-z0-9]+) ([0-9]+):([0-9]+)" replacementPattern="#xpath(//body/div[@n='$1']/div[$2]/div3[$3])"/>
</refsDecl>

This example is a formal representation for the referencing scheme described informally in the following example.

<refsDecl>
  <cRefPattern matchPattern="([A-Za-z0-9]+) ([0-9]+):([0-9]+)" replacementPattern="#xpath(//body/div[@n='$1']/div[$2]/div3[$3])"/>
</refsDecl>

Dieses Beispiel ist eine formale Repräsentation für das im folgenden Beispiel informell beschriebene Referenzierungsschema.

<refsDecl xml:id="fr_ASLREF">
  <cRefPattern matchPattern="(\S+) ([^.]+)\.(.*)" replacementPattern="#fr_xpath(//div1[@n='$1']/div2/[@n='$2']//lb[@n='$3'])">
    <p>Une référence a été créée en assemblant les éléments suivants dans l'ordre inverse de
        la liste qui suit : <list><item>la valeur <att>n</att> du précédent <gi>lb</gi>
               </item><item>une période</item><item>la valeur <att>n</att> de l'ancêtre <gi>div2</gi>
               </item><item>un espace</item><item>la valeur<att>n</att> du parent <gi>div1</gi>
               </item></list>
         </p>
  </cRefPattern>
</refsDecl>

<refsDecl>
  <p>參照是將位於最高層級的<gi>div</gi>元素的屬性<att>n</att>值串聯起來，
        其後跟著空格和續接的下一層級<gi>div</gi>，接著冒點，
        然後是續接的下一(最低) 層級的<gi>div</gi>所組成。</p>
</refsDecl>

<refsDecl>
  <p>References are made up by concatenating the value for the
  <att>n</att> attribute on the highest level <gi>div</gi>
  element, followed by a space, followed by the sequential
  number of the next level <gi>div</gi> followed by a colon
  followed by the sequential number of the next (and lowest)
  level <gi>div</gi>.</p>
</refsDecl>

2.3.6.3. Milestone Method 2.3. The Encoding Description 2.3.6. The Reference System Declaration

<prefixDef>
prefix definition
defines a prefixing scheme used in teidata.pointer values, showing how abbreviated URIs using the scheme may be expanded into full URIs.
@ident
supplies a name which functions as the prefix for an abbreviated pointing scheme such as a private URI scheme. The prefix constitutes the text preceding the first colon.

The value is limited to teidata.prefix so that it may be mapped directly to a URI prefix.

<prefixDef ident="ref" matchPattern="([a-z]+)" replacementPattern="../../references/references.xml#$1">
  <p>
    In the context of this project, private URIs with
    the prefix "ref" point to <gi>div</gi> elements in
    the project's global references.xml file.
  </p>
</prefixDef>

The abbreviated pointer may be dereferenced to produce either an absolute or a relative URI reference. In the latter case it is combined with the value of @xml:base in force at the place where the pointing attribute occurs to form an absolute URI in the usual manner as prescribed by XML Base.

16.2.3. Using Abbreviated Pointers

<listPrefixDef>
list of prefix definitions
contains a list of definitions of prefixing schemes used in teidata.pointer values, showing how abbreviated URIs using each scheme may be expanded into full URIs.

In this example, two private URI scheme prefixes are defined and patterns are provided for dereferencing them. Each prefix is also supplied with a human-readable explanation in a <p> element.

<listPrefixDef>
  <prefixDef ident="psn" matchPattern="([A-Z]+)" replacementPattern="personography.xml#$1">
    <p>
      Private URIs using the <code>psn</code>
      prefix are pointers to <gi>person</gi>
      elements in the personography.xml file.
      For example, <code>psn:MDH</code>
      dereferences to <code>personography.xml#MDH</code>.
    </p>
  </prefixDef>
  <prefixDef ident="bibl" matchPattern="([a-z]+[a-z0-9]*)" replacementPattern="http://www.example.com/getBibl.xql?id=$1">
    <p>
      Private URIs using the <code>bibl</code> prefix can be
      expanded to form URIs which retrieve the relevant
      bibliographical reference from www.example.com.
    </p>
  </prefixDef>
</listPrefixDef>

16.2.3. Using Abbreviated Pointers

<classDecl>
classification declarations
déclaration de classification
분류 선언
分類宣告
Angabe zur Klassifikation
declaraciones de clasificación
dichiarazioni sulla ckassificazione
contains one or more taxonomies defining any classificatory codes used elsewhere in the text.
contient une ou plusieurs taxinomies définissant les codes de classification utilisés n’importe où dans le texte.
텍스트 내 어디서든 사용될 수 있는 분류 부호를 정의하는 분류법을 포함한다.
包含一個或多個分類法，用來定義在文件中他處所使用之任何分類碼。
当該テキスト中で使用されている分類コードを定義する、ひとつ以上の分類法を示す。
enthält eine oder mehrere Taxonomien, die im Text verwendete Klassifikationscodes definieren.
contiene una o más taxonomías que definen cualquier código usado en algún punto del texto.
contiene una o più tassonomie che definiscono un qualsiasi codice classificatorio usato in un'altra porzione del testo.

<classDecl>
  <taxonomy xml:id="LCSH">
    <bibl>Library of Congress Subject Headings</bibl>
  </taxonomy>
</classDecl>

<textClass>
  <keywords scheme="#LCSH">
    <term>Political science</term>
    <term>United States -- Politics and government —
                Revolution, 1775-1783</term>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

<classDecl>
  <taxonomy xml:id="RAMEAU">
    <bibl>Répertoire d'autorité-matière encyclopédique et alphabétique unifié
                (RAMEAU) de la Bibliothèque nationale de France. <ptr target="http://rameau.bnf.fr/"/>
         </bibl>
  </taxonomy>
</classDecl>

<textClass>
  <keywords scheme="#RAMEAU">
    <term>Bien et mal -- Enseignement coranique</term>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

2.3.7. The Classification Declaration 2.3. The Encoding Description

<taxonomy>
taxonomy
taxinomie
Taxonomie
defines a typology either implicitly, by means of a bibliographic citation, or explicitly by a structured taxonomy.
définit une typologie soit implicitement au moyen d’une référence bibliographique, soit explicitement au moyen d’une taxinomie structurée.
서지 정보 인용으로 비명시적으로 또는 구조화된 분류법으로 명시적으로 텍스트를 분류하는 유형을 정의한다.
定義文件分類的類型學，可以是潛在地以書目資料的方式，或是明確地以結構分類法的方式來分類。
テキストの分類法を、書誌情報を参照したり、または構造化された分類法を 示すことで、定義する。
definiert eine Typologie entweder implizit durch einen bibliografischen Verweis oder explizit durch eine strukturierte Taxonomie.
define una tipología o implícitamente, mediante una cita bibliográfica, o explícitamente, mediante una taxonomía estructurada.
definisce una tipologia o in modo implicito, usando una citazione bibliograficha, o in modo esplicito attraverso una tassonomia strutturata.

<classDecl>
  <taxonomy xml:id="OTASH">
    <bibl>University of Oxford Text Archive Subject Headings</bibl>
  </taxonomy>
</classDecl>

<taxonomy>
  <category xml:id="literature">
    <catDesc>Literature</catDesc>
    <category xml:id="poetry">
      <catDesc>Poetry</catDesc>
      <category xml:id="sonnet">
        <catDesc>Sonnet</catDesc>
        <category xml:id="shakesSonnet">
          <catDesc>Shakespearean Sonnet</catDesc>
        </category>
        <category xml:id="petraSonnet">
          <catDesc>Petrarchan Sonnet</catDesc>
        </category>
      </category>
      <category xml:id="haiku">
        <catDesc>Haiku</catDesc>
      </category>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="drama">
      <catDesc>Drama</catDesc>
    </category>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="meter">
    <catDesc>Metrical Categories</catDesc>
    <category xml:id="feet">
      <catDesc>Metrical Feet</catDesc>
      <category xml:id="iambic">
        <catDesc>Iambic</catDesc>
      </category>
      <category xml:id="trochaic">
        <catDesc>trochaic</catDesc>
      </category>
    </category>
    <category xml:id="feetNumber">
      <catDesc>Number of feet</catDesc>
      <category xml:id="pentameter">
        <catDesc>Pentameter</catDesc>
      </category>
      <category xml:id="tetrameter">
        <catDesc>Tetrameter</catDesc>
      </category>
    </category>
  </category>
</taxonomy>

<lg ana="#shakesSonnet #iambic #pentameter">
  <l>Shall I compare thee to a summer's day</l>

</lg>

Nested taxonomies are common in many fields, so the <taxonomy> element can be nested.

Da in vielen Bereichen verschachtelte Taxonomien gängig sind, kann das <taxonomy>-Element verschachtelt werden.

2.3.7. The Classification Declaration

<category>
category
catégorie
Kategorie
contains an individual descriptive category, possibly nested within a superordinate category, within a user-defined taxonomy.
contient une catégorie descriptive particulière, éventuellement intégrée dans une catégorie de niveau supérieur, à l’intérieur d’une taxinomie définie par l’utilisateur.
사용자가 정의한 분류법 안의 개별 기술 범주를 포함한다. 상위 범주 내에 포함될 수 있다.
在使用者定義之分類法當中，此元素包含一項個別的描述性類目，該類目可能位於一個更上層的類目之中。
記述的な分類項目を示す。利用者が定義した分類法の元に上位分類項目中に 入れ子にしてもよい。
enthält eine eigenständige, gegebenfalls in eine übergeordnete Kategorie eingebettete, deskriptive Kategorie in einer benutzerdefinierten Taxonomie.
contiene una categoría descriptiva individual, posiblemente anidada dentro de una categoría superior, dentro de una taxonomía definida por el usuario.
contiene una sola categoria descrittiva, possibilmente innestata in una categoria più generale, all'interno di una tassonomia definita dall'utente.

<category xml:id="b1">
  <catDesc>Prose reportage</catDesc>
</category>

<category xml:id="fr_tax.a.d2">
  <catDesc>Récits de voyage</catDesc>
</category>
<bibl>indexation selon le système d'indexation RAMEAU, géré par la Bibliothèque nationale de
France</bibl>

<category xml:id="fr_b1">
  <catDesc>Devinettes et énigmes </catDesc>
  <category xml:id="fr_b11">
    <catDesc>Anagrammes </catDesc>
  </category>
</category>

<category xml:id="zh-tw_b1">
  <catDesc>報導文學</catDesc>
</category>

<category xml:id="zh-tw_b2">
  <catDesc>散文 </catDesc>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_b11">
    <catDesc>報導性質</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_b12">
    <catDesc>虛構</catDesc>
  </category>
</category>

<category xml:id="b2">
  <catDesc>Prose </catDesc>
  <category xml:id="b11">
    <catDesc>journalism</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="b12">
    <catDesc>fiction</catDesc>
  </category>
</category>

<category xml:id="LIT">
  <catDesc xml:lang="pl">literatura piękna</catDesc>
  <catDesc xml:lang="en">fiction</catDesc>
  <category xml:id="LPROSE">
    <catDesc xml:lang="pl">proza</catDesc>
    <catDesc xml:lang="en">prose</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="LPOETRY">
    <catDesc xml:lang="pl">poezja</catDesc>
    <catDesc xml:lang="en">poetry</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="LDRAMA">
    <catDesc xml:lang="pl">dramat</catDesc>
    <catDesc xml:lang="en">drama</catDesc>
  </category>
</category>

2.3.7. The Classification Declaration

<catDesc>
category description
Description de la catégorie
범주 기술
類目描述
Beschreibung der Kategorie
descripción de una categoría
descrizione della categoria
describes some category within a taxonomy or text typology, either in the form of a brief prose description or in terms of the situational parameters used by the TEI formal <textDesc>.
décrit une catégorie particulière à l’intérieur d’une taxinomie ou d’une typologie de texte, sous forme d’un court texte descriptif suivi ou dans les termes des paramètres contextuels utilisés dans l’élément Description du texte <textDesc>.
간단한 산문체 기술 형식 또는 TEI의 형식적 텍스트 기술에 의해 사용된 상황 매개변수를 통해 분류법 또는 텍스트 유형 내에서 어떤 범주를 기술한다.
描述分類法中或文件類型學中的某些類目，可用短文描述的型式，或是用TEI正式元素<textDesc>所使用的狀況參數。
テキスト分類や分類法における分類項目を示す。簡単な散文形式またはTEI のtextDescで使用される状況パラメータで示される。
beschreibt eine Kategorie innerhalb einer Taxonomie oder Texttypologie, entweder als einfacher Fließtext oder über kontextbezogene Parameter, mittels des strukturierten <textDesc>-Elements.
describe alguna categoría dentro de una taxonomía o tipología textual, a través de una breve e descripción en prosa o en términos de parámetros situacionales usados por el <textDesc> formal de TEI.
descrive una categoria all'interno di una tassonomia o tipologia di testo, sotto forma di una breve descrizione in prosa o secondo i parametri situazionali usati in modo formale dall'elemento TEI <textDesc>.

<catDesc>Prose reportage</catDesc>

<catDesc>Texte documentaire</catDesc>

<category>
  <catDesc>genre</catDesc>
  <category>
    <catDesc>Géneral</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category>
    <catDesc>Journal</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category>
    <catDesc>Manuel technique</catDesc>
  </category>
</category>

<catDesc>報導文學</catDesc>

<catDesc>
  <textDesc n="novel">
    <channel mode="w">出版品；專輯</channel>
    <constitution type="single"/>
    <derivation type="original"/>
    <domain type="art"/>
    <factuality type="fiction"/>
    <interaction type="none"/>
    <preparedness type="prepared"/>
    <purpose type="entertain" degree="high"/>
    <purpose type="inform" degree="medium"/>
  </textDesc>
</catDesc>

<catDesc>
  <textDesc n="novel">
    <channel mode="w">print; part issues</channel>
    <constitution type="single"/>
    <derivation type="original"/>
    <domain type="art"/>
    <factuality type="fiction"/>
    <interaction type="none"/>
    <preparedness type="prepared"/>
    <purpose type="entertain" degree="high"/>
    <purpose type="inform" degree="medium"/>
  </textDesc>
</catDesc>

2.3.7. The Classification Declaration

<profileDesc>
text-profile description
description du profil
텍스트-개요 기술
文件背景描述
Beschreibung des Textprofils
descripción del perfil del texto.
descrizione del profilo del testo
provides a detailed description of non-bibliographic aspects of a text, specifically the languages and sublanguages used, the situation in which it was produced, the participants and their setting.
fournit une description détaillée des aspects non bibliographiques du texte, notamment les langues utilisées et leurs variantes, les circonstances de sa production, les collaborateurs et leur statut.
분명하게 언어와 특수 언어가 사용된 텍스트, 텍스트가 생산된 상황, 참여자, 배경에 관한 비서지적 측면을 상세히 기술한다.
提供文件非書目性方面的細節描述，特別是所使用的語言及次要語言、在何種情況下製作、參與人員及其環境背景。
書誌情報的ではない詳細な解説を示す。例えば、言語や特殊言語、生成され たときの状況、参加者など。
enthält eine detaillierte Beschreibung der nicht-bibliografischen Merkmale des Textes, besonders der verwendeten Sprachen und Subsprachen, der Entstehungsbedingungen eines Textes sowie der Beteiligten und deren Umfeld.
proporciona una descripción detallada de los aspectos no bibliográficos de un texto, especialmente las lenguas y jergas usadas, la situación en que se aparecen, los participantes que intervienen, etc.
fornisce una descrizione dettagliata degli aspetti non bibliografici di un testo, in modo particolare le lingue e i linguaggi secondari utilizzati, la situazione in cui è stato prodotto il testo, i partecipanti e la relativa ambientazione

<profileDesc>
  <creation>
    <date notAfter="1623"/>
  </creation>
  <langUsage>
    <language ident="eng">English</language>
  </langUsage>
  <textClass>
    <keywords scheme="#LCSH">
      <term type="genre">Plays -- England -- 16th century</term>
      <term type="genre">Plays -- England -- 17th century</term>
      <term type="genre">Comedies -- England -- 16th century</term>
      <term type="genre">Comedies -- England -- 17th century</term>
      <term type="genre">Tragedies -- England -- 16th century</term>
      <term type="genre">Tragedies -- England -- 17th century</term>
    </keywords>
  </textClass>
</profileDesc>

Although the content model permits it, it is rarely meaningful to supply multiple occurrences for any of the child elements of <profileDesc> unless these are documenting multiple texts.

2.4. The Profile Description 2.1.1. The TEI Header and Its Components

<abstract>
contains a summary or formal abstract prefixed to an existing source document by the encoder.
Contiene un resumen o abstract formal prefijado a una fuente documental por el codificador.
contiene un riepilogo o abstract formale aggiunto, in testa a un dato documento di origine, da chi codifica.
enthält eine (formale) Zusammenfassung, die einem bestehenden Quelldokument vorangestellt wird.
符号化する人によって既存の元文書の前に付加された要約または正式な要約を含む。

<profileDesc>
  <abstract resp="#LB">
    <p>Good database design involves the acquisition and deployment of
      skills which have a wider relevance to the educational process. From
      a set of more or less instinctive rules of thumb a formal discipline
      or "methodology" of database design has evolved. Applying that
      methodology can be of great benefit to a very wide range of academic
      subjects: it requires fundamental skills of abstraction and
      generalisation and it provides a simple mechanism whereby complex
      ideas and information structures can be represented and manipulated,
      even without the use of a computer. </p>
  </abstract>
</profileDesc>

This element is intended only for cases where no abstract is available in the original source. Any abstract already present in the source document should be encoded as a <div> within the <front>, as it should for a born-digital document.

Este elemento debe utilizarse solo en casos en los que el abstract no se encuentra disponible en la fuente original. Cualquier abstract presente en el documento fuente debe ser codificado como un <div> dentro del <front>, como corresponde en los casos de documentos de origen digital.

この要素は、元資料で要約が利用できない場合にのみ使用されます。 元文書に既に存在する任意の要約は、ボーンデジタル文書の場合と同じように、<front>内の<div>として符号化する必要があります。

2.4.4. Abstracts

<creation>
creation
création
Entstehung
contains information about the creation of a text.
contient des informations concernant la création d’un texte.
텍스트 생성에 관한 정보를 포함한다.
包含關於文件建置的資訊。
テキストの作成に関する情報を示す。
beinhaltet Informationen zur Entstehung eines Textes.
contiene información sobre la creación del texto.
contiene informazioni riguardanti la creazione di un testo.

<creation>
  <date>Before 1987</date>
</creation>

<creation>
  <date>Avant 1987</date>
</creation>

<creation>
  <date when="1988-07-10">10 Juillet 1988</date>
</creation>

<creation>
  <date>1987年之前</date>
</creation>

<creation>
  <date when="1988-07-10">1988年7月10日</date>
</creation>

<creation>
  <date when="1988-07-10">10 July 1988</date>
</creation>

The <creation> element may be used to record details of a text's creation, e.g. the date and place it was composed, if these are of interest.

It may also contain a more structured account of the various stages or revisions associated with the evolution of a text; this should be encoded using the <listChange> element. It should not be confused with the <publicationStmt> element, which records date and place of publication.

L’élément <creation> peut être utilisé pour détailler des éléments concernant l’origine du texte, c’est-à-dire sa date et son lieu de composition ; on ne doit pas le confondre avec l'élément <publicationStmt> qui contient la date et le lieu de publication.

El elemento <creación> se puede utilizar para registrar los detalles de la creación de un texto, p.ej. la fecha y el lugar en el que fue compuesto, si éstos son de interés; no debe ser confundido con el elemento <publicationStmt>, que registra la fecha y el lugar de la publicación.

文字データまたは句レベルの要素。

当該要素<creation>は、テキストの作成に関する詳細を記録する ために使用される。例えば、作られた日付や場所など。出版日や出版地を示す要素<publicationStmt>と混同しないように。

Das <creation>-Element kann dafür verwendet werden, Einzelheiten über die Entstehung eines Textes, z. B. Entstehungszeit und Entstehungsort, zu dokumentieren, wenn diese von Interesse sind.

Es kann auch eine mehr oder weniger strukturierte Entstehungsgeschichte mit den einzelnen Bearbeitungs- und Revisionstufen enthalten; diese sollten mithilfe des <listChange>-Elements ausgezeichnet werden. Das <creation>-Element darf aber nicht mit dem <publicationStmt>-Element, das Zeit und Ort der Veröffentlichung verzeichnet, verwechselt werden.

2.4.1. Creation 2.4. The Profile Description

<langUsage>
language usage
langue utilisée
언어 사용
語言使用
Sprachgebrauch
lengua empleada
lingua utilizzata
describes the languages, sublanguages, registers, dialects, etc. represented within a text.
décrit les langues, variétés de langues, registres, dialectes, etc. présents à l’intérieur d’un texte.
텍스트 내에 나타나는 언어, 특수 언어, 레지스터, 방언 등을 기술한다.
描述文件中使用的語言、次要語言、語域、方言等。
テキスト中にある言語、特殊言語、社会的方言、方言などを示す。
beschreibt Sprachen, Subsprachen, Register, Dialekte usw., die innerhalb eines Textes vorkommen.
describe las lenguas, jergas, registros, dialectos, etc. presentes en el texto.
descrive le lingue, i linguaggi secondari, i registri, i dialetti ecc. rappresentati all'interno di un testo.

<langUsage>
  <language ident="fr-CA" usage="60">Québecois</language>
  <language ident="en-CA" usage="20">Canadian business English</language>
  <language ident="en-GB" usage="20">British English</language>
</langUsage>

<langUsage>
  <language ident="fr-CA" usage="60">Québecois</language>
  <language ident="en-CA" usage="20">Anglais canadien des affaires</language>
  <language ident="en-GB" usage="20">Anglais de Grande-Bretagne</language>
</langUsage>

<langUsage>
  <language ident="fr-CA" usage="60">加拿大魁北克省法語</language>
  <language ident="en-CA" usage="20">加拿大商用英語</language>
  <language ident="en-GB" usage="20">英式英語</language>
</langUsage>

2.4.2. Language Usage 2.4. The Profile Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<language>
language
langue
Sprache
characterizes a single language or sublanguage used within a text.
caractérise une langue ou une variété de langue utilisée dans un texte.
텍스트 내에서 사용되는 언어 또는 특수 언어의 특징을 기술한다.
個別敘述文本中使用的語言或次要語言。
テキスト中にあるひとつの言語または特殊言語を示す。
beschreibt eine einzelne Sprache oder eine Subsprache, die innerhalb eines Textes verwendet wird.
caracteriza una lengua o jerga empleada en un texto.
indica una lingua o un linguaggio secondario utilizzato all'interno di un testo.
@ident
identifier
확인소
identificador
identificateur
identificatore
Identifikator
Supplies a language code constructed as defined in BCP 47 which is used to identify the language documented by this element, and which is referenced by the global @xml:lang attribute.
fournit un code de langue issu de la recommandation BCP 47 (ou son successeur) utilisé pour identifier la langue précisée par cet élément, référencé par l’attribut global @xml:lang s’appliquant à l’élément considéré.
요소로 기록된 언어를 식별하고기 위해 사용되는, 전체 @xml:lang 속성에 의해 참조되는 BCP 47에서 정의된 방식대로 구축된 언어 부호를 제시한다.
提供一語言代碼，其編碼方式定義在BCP 47中 (或其系列中) ，用來識別此元素所紀錄的語言，並由全域屬性@xml:lang所參照。
当該要素で記録される言語を特定するために、 BCP 47 で定義されている言語コードを示す。また、 BCP 47 は、グローバル属性@xml:langでも使用される。
gibt einen Sprachcode, aufgebaut nach BCP 47 an, der zur Identifikation der im Element dokumentierten Sprache benutzt wird und auf den das globale @xml:lang-Attribut verweist.
proporciona un código de lengua construido según se define en BCP 47 (o en su sucesor) que se utiliza para identificar la lengua documentada por este elemento, y a la cual se hace referencia mediante el atributo globlal @xml:lang.
fornisce un codice per la lingua costruito come definito in BCP 47 (o nei sui successori), utilizzato per identificare la lingua documentata da questo elemento e che è indicato dall'attributo globale @xml:lang.
@usage
specifies the approximate percentage (by volume) of the text which uses this language.
précise approximativement le pourcentage du volume de texte utilisant cette langue.
이 언어를 사용하는 텍스트의 대략적 백분율(분량)을 명시한다.
標明該文本使用此語言的大約比例 (以冊計) 。
当該言語がテキスト中で使用されているおよその割合を示す。
gibt den ungefähren prozentualen Anteil des Textes an, der in dieser Sprache verfasst wurde.
especifica el porcentaje (de volumen) aproximado de texto que usa esa lengua.
specifica la percentuale approsimativa (per volume) di testo che usa questa lingua.

<langUsage>
  <language ident="en-US" usage="75">modern American English</language>
  <language ident="i-az-Arab" usage="20">Azerbaijani in Arabic script</language>
  <language ident="x-lap" usage="05">Pig Latin</language>
</langUsage>

<langUsage>
  <language ident="en-US" usage="75">Anglais américain moderne</language>
  <language ident="i-az-Arab" usage="20">Azerbaijanais en caractères arabes</language>
  <language ident="x-verlan" usage="05">verlan</language>
</langUsage>

<langUsage>
  <language ident="en-US" usage="75">現代美語</language>
  <language ident="i-az-Arab" usage="20">阿拉伯文手寫的亞塞拜然語</language>
  <language ident="x-lap" usage="05">一種行話，將字頭的子音調至字尾，再多加一個音節</language>
</langUsage>

Particularly for sublanguages, an informal prose characterization should be supplied as content for the element.

Dans le cas particulier des variétés de langues, l'élément contiendra un texte caractérisant mais non structuré.

Determinado para los sublenguajes, se debe suministrar una caracterización informal de la prosa como contenido del elemento.

特殊言語の場合には、非公式の散文による記述にすべきである。

Insbesondere für Subsprachen sollte eine Beschreibung als Inhalt des Elements angegeben werden.

2.4.2. Language Usage

<textClass>
text classification
classification du texte
텍스트 분류
文件分類
Textklassifikation
clasificación de texto
classificazione del testo
groups information which describes the nature or topic of a text in terms of a standard classification scheme, thesaurus, etc.
regroupe des informations décrivant la nature ou le sujet d’un texte selon des termes issus d’un système de classification standardisé, d’un thésaurus, etc.
표준 분류 스키마, 시소러스 등을 통해서 텍스트의 특성 또는 주제를 기술하는 정보를 모아 놓는다.
匯集以標準分類架構、索引典等來描述文件性質或主題的資訊。
標準的な分類スキーム、分類語彙などにより、テキストの性格や話題を示す 情報をまとめる。
gruppiert Informationen über Art oder Thematik eines Textes unter Bezug auf ein Standard-Klassifikationsschema, einen Thesaurus o. ä.
agrupa información que describe la naturaleza o la temática de un texto en términos de un esquema de clasificación estándard.
raggruppa le informazioni che descrivono la natura o l'argomento di un testo secondo uno schema di classificazione standard, un dizionario i sinonimi, ecc.

<taxonomy>
  <category xml:id="acprose">
    <catDesc>Academic prose</catDesc>
  </category>

</taxonomy>

<textClass>
  <catRef target="#acprose"/>
  <classCode scheme="http://www.udcc.org">001.9</classCode>
  <keywords scheme="http://authorities.loc.gov">
    <list>
      <item>End of the world</item>
      <item>History - philosophy</item>
    </list>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

<textClass>
  <keywords scheme="#fr_RAMEAU">
    <list>
      <item>Littérature française -- 20ème siècle -- Histoire et critique</item>
      <item>Littérature française -- Histoire et critique -- Théorie, etc.</item>
      <item>Français (langue) -- Style -- Bases de données.</item>
    </list>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

<textClass>
  <catRef target="#fr_forme_prose"/>
</textClass>

<taxonomy>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_chineseliterature">
    <catDesc>中國文學</catDesc>
  </category>

</taxonomy>

<textClass>
  <catRef target="#zh-tw_chineseliterature"/>
  <classCode scheme="http://www.ncl.edu.tw/">820</classCode>
  <keywords scheme="http://authorities.loc.gov">
    <list>
      <item>傷痕文學</item>
      <item>語文類</item>
    </list>
  </keywords>
</textClass>

2.4.3. The Text Classification

<keywords>
keywords
mot clé
Schlagwörter
contains a list of keywords or phrases identifying the topic or nature of a text.
contient une liste de mots clés ou d’expressions décrivant la nature ou le sujet d’un texte.
텍스트의 주제 또는 특성을 식별하는 주제어 또는 구의 목록을 포함한다.
包含標明文件主題或性質的關鍵詞或字詞列表。
テキストの話題や性格を特定するキーワードや句のリストを示す。
enthält eine Zusammenstellung von Schlagwörtern oder Phrasen zur Art oder Thematik des Textes.
contiene una lista de palabras clave o sintagmas que identifican la temática o la naturaleza del texto.
contiene una lista delle parole chiave o frasi che identificano l'argomento o la natura di un testo.
@scheme
identifies the controlled vocabulary within which the set of keywords concerned is defined, for example by a <taxonomy> element, or by some other resource.
désigne la liste close de mots dans lequel l'ensemble des mots-clés concernés est défini.
관련 키워드 집합이 정의된 통제 어휘를 식별하며, 이 정의는 통제 어휘 내에서 수행된다.
標明相關關鍵詞所使用到的詞彙範圍。
当該キーワードリストが定義されている統制語彙を示す。
gibt das kontrollierte Vokabular an, in dem die benutzten Schlagwörter definiert sind. Dabei kann das @scheme-Attribut auf ein <taxonomy>-Element oder eine andere Ressource verweisen.
identifican el vocabulario con el que se define el conjunto de palabras clave referidas.
identifica il vocabolario controllato all'interno del quale sono definite le parole chiave.

<keywords scheme="http://classificationweb.net">
  <term>Babbage, Charles</term>
  <term>Mathematicians - Great Britain - Biography</term>
</keywords>

<keywords>
  <term>Fermented beverages</term>
  <term>Central Andes</term>
  <term>Schinus molle</term>
  <term>Molle beer</term>
  <term>Indigenous peoples</term>
  <term>Ethnography</term>
  <term>Archaeology</term>
</keywords>

<keywords scheme="#fr_RAMEAU">
  <term>Littérature française -- 20ème siècle -- Histoire et critique</term>
  <term>Littérature française -- Histoire et critique -- Théorie, etc.</term>
  <term>Français (langue) -- Style -- Bases de données.</term>
</keywords>

<keywords scheme="http://classificationweb.net">
  <term>李白</term>
  <term>詩人 - 唐代 - 傳記</term>
</keywords>

Each individual keyword (including compound subject headings) should be supplied as a <term> element directly within the <keywords> element. An alternative usage, in which each <term> appears within an <item> inside a <list> is permitted for backwards compatibility, but is deprecated.

If no control list exists for the keywords used, then no value should be supplied for the @scheme attribute.

Jedes einzelne Schlagwort (zusammengesetzte Themen-Schlagwörter eingeschlossen) sollte als <term>-Element direkt im <keywords>-Element notiert werden. Aus Gründen der Rückwärtskompatibilität ist es zwar auch erlaubt, ein <term>-Element in einem <item>-Element zu notieren, das wiederum Kindelement eines <list>-Elementes ist. Allerdings ist dieses Vorgehen veraltet und wird daher nicht empfohlen.

Wenn keine kontrollierte Liste für die verwendeten Schlagwörter existiert, sollte das @scheme-Attribute nicht gesetzt werden.

2.4.3. The Text Classification

<classCode>
classification code
code de classification
분류 부호
código de clasificación
Klassifikationscode
codice di clasificazione
contains the classification code used for this text in some standard classification system.
contient le code de classification attribué à ce texte en référence à un système standard de classification.
표준 분류 체계에서 이 텍스트에 대하여 사용된 분류 부호를 포함한다.
包含文件在某標準分類系統中所屬的分類代碼。
当該テキストで使用されている、ある規格に従った分類コードを示す。
enthält den für den Text verwendeten Klassifikationscode auf Basis eines normierten Klassifikationssystems.
indica el código de clasificación empleado para este texto en algún sistema de clasificación estándard.
contiene il codice di classificazione utilizzato per questo testo in un sistema di calssificazione standard.
@scheme
identifies the classification system in use, as defined by, e.g. a <taxonomy> element, or some other resource.
identifie le système de classification ou la taxinomie utilisée.
사용하고 있는 분류 체계 또는 분류법을 표시한다.
說明使用中的分類系統或分類法。
当該分類法を定義する。
benennt das verwendete Klassifikationssystem, definiert z. B. durch Verweis auf ein <taxonomy>-Element oder eine andere Ressource
identifica el sistema de clasificación o taxonomía en uso.
idantifica il sistema di classificazione o la tassonomia utilizzati.

<classCode scheme="http://www.udc.org">410</classCode>

<classCode scheme="http://www.oclc.org/">801</classCode>
<bibl>classification Dewey</bibl>

2.4.3. The Text Classification

<catRef>
category reference
référence à la catégorie
범주 참조
類目參照
Verweis auf eine Kategorie
referencia de categoría
riferimento alla categoria
specifies one or more defined categories within some taxonomy or text typology.
spécifie une ou plusieurs catégories définies dans une taxinomie ou une typologie textuelle.
분류법 또는 텍스트 유형 내에서 하나 이상의 정의된 범주를 명시한다.
標明在某分類法或文件類型學中，一個或多個已定義之類目。
分類法やテキスト分類中の、ひとつ以上の分類項目を定義する。
gibt eine oder mehrere Kategorien an, die innerhalb einer Taxonomie oder Texttypologie definiert sind.
indica una o más categorías definidas al interno de una taxonomía o tipología textual.
specifica una o più categorie definite all'interno di una tassonomia o tipologia di testo
@scheme
identifies the classification scheme within which the set of categories concerned is defined, for example by a <taxonomy> element, or by some other resource.
identifie le schéma de classification dans lequel est défini le jeu de catégories concerné.
관련 범주 집합이 정의된 분류 스키마를 표시한다.
標明該分類架構，其中相關的類目群組已被定義
当該分類項目が定義されている分類スキームを示す。
gibt das Klassifikationsschema an, in dem die entsprechenden Kategorien definiert sind, z. B. über ein <taxonomy>-Element oder eine andere Ressource.
indica el esquema de clasificación al interno del cual se define una serie de categorias referidas.
identifica lo schema di classificazione all'interno del quale sono definite le categorie interessate.

<catRef scheme="#myTopics" target="#news #prov #sales2"/>

<taxonomy xml:id="myTopics">
  <category xml:id="news">
    <catDesc>Newspapers</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="prov">
    <catDesc>Provincial</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="sales2">
    <catDesc>Low to average annual sales</catDesc>
  </category>
</taxonomy>

<catRef scheme="#mesTopos" target="#fr_lex #fr_dict #fr_gloss"/>

<taxonomy xml:id="mesTopos">
  <category xml:id="fr_lexique">
    <catDesc>Lexique</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="fr_dict">
    <catDesc>Dictionnaire</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="fr_gloss">
    <catDesc>Glossaire</catDesc>
  </category>
</taxonomy>

<catRef target="#zh-tw_news #zh-tw_prov #zh-tw_sales2"/>

<taxonomy>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_news">
    <catDesc>報紙</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_prov">
    <catDesc>全省的</catDesc>
  </category>
  <category xml:id="zh-tw_sales2">
    <catDesc>低於每年平均銷售額</catDesc>
  </category>
</taxonomy>

The @scheme attribute needs to be supplied only if more than one taxonomy has been declared.

L'attribut @scheme n'est donné que si plus d'une taxinomie a été déclarée.

El atributo del esquema necesita ser suministrado solamente si se ha declarado más de una taxonomía

当該属性sdchemeは、複数の分類法が宣言されている場合にのみ、必要と なる。

Das @scheme-Attribut muss nur dann verwendet werden, wenn mehr als eine Taxonomie deklariert ist.

2.4.3. The Text Classification

<xenoData>
non-TEI metadata
provides a container element into which metadata in non-TEI formats may be placed.

This example presumes that the prefix dc has been bound to the namespace http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/ and the prefix rdf is bound to the namespace http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#. Note: The @about attribute on the <rdf:Description> in this example gives a URI indicating the resource to which the metadata contained therein refer. The <rdf:Description> in the second <xenoData> block has a blank @about, meaning it is pointing at the current document, so the RDF is about the document within which it is contained, i.e. the TEI document containing the <xenoData> block. Similarly, any kind of relative URI may be used, including fragment identifiers (see ). Do note, however, that if the contents of the <xenoData> block are to be extracted and used elsewhere, any relative URIs will have to be resolved accordingly.

<xenoData>
  <RDF><Description about="http://www.worldcat.org/oclc/606621663"><title>The description of a new world, called the blazing-world</title>
      <creator>The Duchess of Newcastle</creator>
      <date>1667</date>
      <identifier>British Library, 8407.h.10</identifier>
      <subject>utopian fiction</subject></Description></RDF>
</xenoData>
<xenoData>
      <RDF><Description about=""><title>The Description of a New World, Called the Blazing-World, 1668</title>
      <creator>Cavendish, Margaret (Lucas), Duchess of Newcastle</creator>
      <publisher>Women Writers Project</publisher>
      <date>2002-02-12</date>
      <subject>utopian fiction</subject></Description></RDF>
</xenoData>

In this example, the prefix rdf is bound to the namespace http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#, the prefix dc is bound to the namespace http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/, and the prefix cc is bound to the namespace http://web.resource.org/cc/.

<xenoData>
    <RDF>
      <Work about="">
        <title>Applied Software Project Management  - review</title>
        <type resource="http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/Text"/>
        <license resource="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0/uk/"/>
      </Work>
      <License about="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0/uk/">
        <permits resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/Reproduction"/>
        <permits resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/Distribution"/>
        <requires resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/Notice"/>
        <requires resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/Attribution"/>
        <permits resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/DerivativeWorks"/>
        <requires resource="http://web.resource.org/cc/ShareAlike"/>
      </License>
    </RDF>
</xenoData>

In this example, the prefix dc is again bound to the namespace http://www.openarchives.org/OAI/2.0/oai_dc/, and the prefix oai_dc is bound to the namespace http://www.openarchives.org/OAI/2.0/oai_dc/.

<xenoData>
     <dc>
   <title>The colonial despatches of Vancouver Island and British
   Columbia 1846-1871: 11566, CO 60/2, p. 291; received 13 November.
   Trevelyan to Merivale (Permanent Under-Secretary)</title>
   <date>1858-11-12</date>
   <creator>Trevelyan</creator>
   <publisher>University of Victoria Humanities Computing and Media
   Centre, and UVic Libraries</publisher>
   <type>InteractiveResource</type>
   <format>application/xhtml+xml</format>
   <type>text</type>
   <identifier>http://bcgenesis.uvic.ca/getDoc.htm?id=B585TE13.scx</identifier>
   <rights>This document is licensed under a Creative Commons …</rights>
   <language>(SCHEME=ISO639) en</language>
   <source>Transcribed from microfilm and/or original documents, and
   marked up in TEI P5 XML. The interactive XHTML resource is generated
   from the XHTML using XQuery and XSLT.</source>
   <source>repository: CO</source>
   <source>coNumber: 60</source>
   <source>coVol: 2</source>
   <source>page: 291</source>
   <source>coRegistration: 11566</source>
   <source>received: received 13 November</source>
   <subject>Trevelyan, Sir Charles Edward</subject>
   <subject>Merivale, Herman</subject>
   <subject>Elliot, T. Frederick</subject>
   <subject>Moody, Colonel Richard Clement</subject>
   <subject>Lytton, Sir Edward George Earle Bulwer</subject>
   <subject>Jadis, Vane</subject>
   <subject>Carnarvon, Earl</subject>
   <subject>British Columbia</subject>
   <description>British Columbia correspondence: Public Offices
   document (normally correspondence between government
   departments)</description>
     </dc>
   </xenoData>

In this example, the prefix mods is bound to the namespace http://www.loc.gov/mods/v3.

  <xenoData>
<mods>
  <titleInfo>
    <title>Academic adaptation and cross-cultural
    learning experiences of Chinese students at American
    universities</title>
    <subTitle>a narrative inquiry</subTitle>
  </titleInfo>
  <name type="personal" authority="local">
    <namePart/>
    <role>
      <roleTerm authority="marcrelator" type="text">Author</roleTerm>
    </role>
    <affiliation>Northeastern University</affiliation>
    <namePart type="given">Hong</namePart>
    <namePart type="family">Zhang</namePart>
  </name>
  <name type="personal" authority="local">
    <namePart/>
    <role>
      <roleTerm authority="local" type="text">Advisor</roleTerm>
    </role>
    <namePart type="given">Liliana</namePart>
    <namePart type="family">Meneses</namePart>
  </name>

  <typeOfResource>text</typeOfResource>
  <genre>doctoral theses</genre>
  <originInfo>
    <place>
      <placeTerm type="text">Boston (Mass.)</placeTerm>
    </place>
    <publisher>Northeastern University</publisher>
    <copyrightDate encoding="w3cdtf" keyDate="yes">2013</copyrightDate>
  </originInfo>
  <language>
    <languageTerm authority="iso639-2b" type="code">eng</languageTerm>
  </language>
  <physicalDescription>
    <form authority="marcform">electronic</form>
    <digitalOrigin>born digital</digitalOrigin>
  </physicalDescription>

</mods>
  </xenoData>

This example shows GeoJSON embedded in <xenoData>. Note that JSON does not permit newlines inside string values. These must be escaped as \n. To avoid the accidental insertion of newlines by software, the use of @xml:space is recommended. Blocks of JSON should be wrapped in CDATA sections, as they may contain characters illegal in XML.

<xenoData xml:space="preserve">
&lt;![CDATA[
{
    "features": [
        {
            "geometry": {
                "type": "Point",
                "coordinates": [
                    68.388483,
                    33.498616
                ]
            },
            "type": "Feature",
            "id": "darmc-location-19727",
            "properties": {
                "snippet": "Unknown; 330 BC - AD 300",
                "link": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/59694/darmc-location-19727",
                "description": "5M scale point location",
                "location_precision": "precise",
                "title": "DARMC location 19727"
            }
        }
    ],
    "id": "59694",
    "subject": [
        "dare:ancient=1",
        "dare:feature=settlement",
        "dare:major=0"
    ],
    "title": "Arachosiorum Oppidum/Alexandria",
    "provenance": "Barrington Atlas: BAtlas 6 B3 Arachosiorum Oppidum/Alexandria",
    "placeTypeURIs": [
        "https://pleiades.stoa.org/vocabularies/place-types/settlement"
    ],
    "details": "&lt;p&gt;The Barrington Atlas Directory notes: Kalat-e-Ghilzai? AFG&lt;/p&gt;",
    "@context": {
        "snippet": "dcterms:abstract",
        "rights": "dcterms:rights",
        "description": "dcterms:description",
        "title": "dcterms:title",
        "dcterms": "http://purl.org/dc/terms/",
        "subject": "dcterms:subject",
        "uri": "@id",
        "created": "dcterms:created"
    },
    "review_state": "published",
    "type": "FeatureCollection",
    "description": "An ancient place, cited: BAtlas 6 B3 Arachosiorum Oppidum/Alexandria",
    "reprPoint": [
        68.388483,
        33.498616
    ],
    "placeTypes": [
        "settlement"
    ],
    "bbox": [
        68.388483,
        33.498616,
        68.388483,
        33.498616
    ],
    "rights": "Copyright © The Contributors. Sharing and remixing permitted under CC-BY.",
    "created": "2010-09-23T04:31:55Z",
    "uri": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/59694",
    "creators": [
        {
            "username": null,
            "name": "M.U. Erdosy"
        }
    ],
    "@type": "Place"
}
]]&gt;
</xenoData>

Note: the example above has been trimmed for legibility. The original may be found linked from Arachosiorum Oppidum/Alexandria. The contributors, listed per the license terms, are R. Talbert, Jeffrey Becker, W. Röllig, Tom Elliott, H. Kopp, DARMC, Sean Gillies, B. Siewert-Mayer, Francis Deblauwe, and Eric Kansa.

2.5. Non-TEI Metadata

<revisionDesc>
revision description
descriptif des révisions
수정 기술
修訂描述
Beschreibung der Dateihistorie
descripción de la revisión
descirzione della revisione
summarizes the revision history for a file.
fournit un résumé de l’historique des révisions d’un fichier.
하나의 파일에 대한 수정 이력을 요약한다.
概述檔案的修訂歷史。
ファイルの改訂履歴を示す。
dokumentiert die Änderungen, die an der Datei vorgenommen wurden.
resume el historial de la revisión de un archivo.
sintetizza la storia delle revisioni di un file

<revisionDesc status="embargoed">
  <change when="1991-11-11" who="#LB"> deleted chapter 10 </change>
</revisionDesc>

<revisionDesc>
  <list>
    <item><date when="2003-04-12">12 avril 03</date>Dernière révision par F. B.</item>
    <item><date when="2003-03-01">1 mars 03</date> F.B a fait le nouveau fichier.</item>
  </list>
</revisionDesc>

<revisionDesc status="embargoed">
  <change when="1991-11-11"> 王大明刪除第十章</change>
</revisionDesc>

If present on this element, the @status attribute should indicate the current status of the document. The same attribute may appear on any <change> to record the status at the time of that change. Conventionally <change> elements should be given in reverse date order, with the most recent change at the start of the list.

Les changements les plus récents apparaissent en début de liste

Registran los cambios más recientes en el top de la lista.

直近の変更をリストの先頭に記録する。

Wenn an diesem Element gesetzt, sollte das @status-Attribut den aktuellen Status des Dokuments widerspiegeln. An jedem <change>-Kindelement gibt das selbe Attribut den jeweiligen Status zum Zeitpunkt der Änderung an. Die <change>-Elemente werden der Konvention nach so angeordnet, dass die letzte Änderung am Anfang steht und die erste zum Schluss.

2.6. The Revision Description 2.1.1. The TEI Header and Its Components

<change>
change
Änderung
documents a change or set of changes made during the production of a source document, or during the revision of an electronic file.
résume une modification ou une correction apportée à une version particulière d’un texte électronique partagé entre plusieurs chercheurs.
몇몇 연구자들 사이에 공유된 전자 텍스트의 특정 버전에 대한 특정 변경 또는 수정 사항을 요약한다.
概述多位研究者共享的某版本電子文本當中，某特定的內容變更或修正。
研究者間で共有されている電子テキストの特定の版に対して施された変更や 修正を示す。
verzeichnet Änderungen oder Korrekturen während der Erstellung eines Basisdokuments oder während der Überarbeitung einer elektronischen Datei.
resume un cambio o corrección determinada llevada a cabo en una versión dada de un texto electrónico en el que trabajan diversos investigadores.
sintetizza un particolare cambiamento o correzione effettuato ad una particolare versione di un documento elettronico, condivisa da più ricercatori.
@target
target
Ziel
points to one or more elements that belong to this change.
verweist auf ein oder mehrere Elemente, die zu dieser Änderung gehören.

<titleStmt>
  <title> ... </title>
  <editor xml:id="LDB">Lou Burnard</editor>
  <respStmt xml:id="BZ">
    <resp>copy editing</resp>
    <name>Brett Zamir</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>

<revisionDesc status="published">
  <change who="#BZ" when="2008-02-02" status="public">Finished chapter 23</change>
  <change who="#BZ" when="2008-01-02" status="draft">Finished chapter 2</change>
  <change n="P2.2" when="1991-12-21" who="#LDB">Added examples to section 3</change>
  <change when="1991-11-11" who="#MSM">Deleted chapter 10</change>
</revisionDesc>

      <profileDesc>
        <creation>
          <listChange>
            <change xml:id="DRAFT1">First draft in pencil</change>
            <change xml:id="DRAFT2" notBefore="1880-12-09">First revision, mostly
using green ink</change>
            <change xml:id="DRAFT3" notBefore="1881-02-13">Final corrections as
supplied to printer.</change>
          </listChange>
        </creation>
      </profileDesc>

<titleStmt>
  <title> ... </title>
  <editor xml:id="fr_GK">G.K.</editor>
  <respStmt xml:id="fr_RT">
    <resp>copie</resp>
    <name>R.T.</name>
  </respStmt>
</titleStmt>
<revisionDesc>
  <change who="#fr_RT" when="2008-02-02">Fin du chapitre 23</change>
  <change who="#fr_RT" when="2008-01-02">FIn du chapitre 2</change>
  <change n="P2.2" when="1991-12-21" who="#fr_GK">Ajout d'exemples dans la section 3</change>
  <change when="1991-11-11" who="#fr_MSM">Suppression du chapitre 10</change>
</revisionDesc>

<change n="P2.2" when="1991-12-21">張三新增範例於第三節</change>
<change when="1991-11-11">李四刪除第十章</change>

The @who attribute may be used to point to any other element, but will typically specify a <respStmt> or <person> element elsewhere in the header, identifying the person responsible for the change and their role in making it.

It is recommended that changes be recorded with the most recent first. The @status attribute may be used to indicate the status of a document following the change documented.

Les modifications doivent être enregistrées dans l'ordre, par exemple la plus récente en premier.

El atributo @quién (who) se puede utilizar para señalar a cualquier otro elemento, pero especificará típicamente a <respStmt> o al elemento <persona> de cualquier parte del encabezado, identificando a la persona responsable del cambio y de su papel en la producciónl.

Se recomienda que los cambios se registren con el primero más reciente.

修正は一貫した並びで記録されるべきである。例えば、最新のものが 最初に書かれる、など。

Das @who-Attribut kann dafür verwendet werden, um zu einem beliebigen anderen Element zu verweisen, sollte aber typischerweise auf ein <respStmt>- oder <person>-Element innerhalb des TEI-Headers zeigen, um die für die Änderungen Verantwortlichen und deren Rolle zu identifizieren.

Es wird empfohlen, Änderungen so aufzuzeichnen, dass die neuesten am Anfang eingetragen werden. Das @status-Attribut kann dafür verwendet werden, um den Zustand des Dokuments nach erfolgter Änderung zu beschreiben.

2.6. The Revision Description 2.4.1. Creation 11.7. Identifying Changes and Revisions

<listChange>
groups a number of change descriptions associated with either the creation of a source text or the revision of an encoded text.
@ordered
indicates whether the ordering of its child <change> elements is to be considered significant or not
true

<revisionDesc>
  <listChange>
    <change when="1991-11-11" who="#LB"> deleted chapter 10 </change>
    <change when="1991-11-02" who="#MSM"> completed first draft </change>
  </listChange>
</revisionDesc>

      <profileDesc>
        <creation>
          <listChange ordered="true">
            <change xml:id="CHG-1">First stage, written in ink by a writer</change>
            <change xml:id="CHG-2">Second stage, written in Goethe's hand using pencil</change>
            <change xml:id="CHG-3">Fixation of the revised passages and further revisions by
Goethe using ink</change>
            <change xml:id="CHG-4">Addition of another stanza in a          different hand,
probably at a later stage</change>
          </listChange>
        </creation>
      </profileDesc>

When this element appears within the <creation> element it documents the set of revision campaigns or stages identified during the evolution of the original text. When it appears within the <revisionDesc> element, it documents only changes made during the evolution of the encoded representation of that text.

2.6. The Revision Description 11.7. Identifying Changes and Revisions

<particDesc>
participation description
참여 기술
參與描述
description des participants
descripción de participación
descrizione dei partecipanti
describes the identifiable speakers, voices, or other participants in any kind of text or other persons named or otherwise referred to in a text, edition, or metadata.
언어적 상호작용에서 식별가능한 화자, 음성, 또는 기타 참여자를 기술한다.
描述在一個語言互動中可辨識的說話者、聲音或其他參與者。
言語交流における、特定可能な発話者、声、その他の参加者を示す。
décrit les locuteurs, voix ou autres participants identifiables d'une interaction linguistique.
describe los hablantes identificables, voces u otros participantes de una interacción lingüística.
descrive parlanti, voci o altri parlanti identificabili in una interazione linguistica.

<particDesc>
  <listPerson>
    <person xml:id="Trinder" sex="m">
      <p>
        <name type="surname">Trinder</name>
        <name type="forename">William</name>
        <name type="forename">Martin</name>
      </p>
    </person>
    <person xml:id="Leland" sex="m">
      <p>
        <name type="surname">Leland</name>
        <name type="forename">Thomas</name>
      </p>
    </person>
  </listPerson>
</particDesc>

15.2. Contextual Information

<settingDesc>
setting description
무대 기술
背景描述
description du contexte
descripción de realización
descrizione dello scenario
describes the setting or settings within which a language interaction takes place, or other places otherwise referred to in a text, edition, or metadata.
언어적 상호작용이 발생하는 무대 또는 배경을 산문적 기술로서 또는 일련의 무대 요소로서 기술한다.
描述語言互動所發生的一個或多個背景，可用一段散文描述或是一系列的背景元素來表達。
言語交流が行われた状況設定を、散文または一連の要素<setting>により示す。
décrit le(s) contexte(s) dans lesquels se situe une interaction linguistique, soit sous la forme d'une description en prose, soit sous celle d'une série d'éléments décrivant le contexte.
describe en prosa, o mediante una serie de elementos de realización, la realización o realizaciones dentro de las cuales una interacción lingüística tiene lugar.
descrive lo scenario o gli scenari nei quali si svolge l'interazione linuistica, sia in forma di prosa descrittiva sia con elementi di scenario.

<settingDesc> <p>Texts recorded in the
           Canadian Parliament building in Ottawa, between April and November 1988 </p>
           </settingDesc>

<settingDesc> <p>Pierre Mendès France,
           Entretiens avec Jean Lacouture (1980-1981 )</p> </settingDesc>

<settingDesc>
           <p>文本錄於渥太華的加拿大國會大廈，介於1988年4月至11月間</p> </settingDesc>

May contain a prose description organized as paragraphs, or a series of <setting> elements. If used to record not settings of language interactions, but other places mentioned in the text, then <place> optionally grouped by <listPlace> inside <standOff> should be preferred.

Peut contenir un texte organisé en paragraphes ou une série d'éléments <setting>.

段落レベルの散文、または一連の要素<setting>を含むかもしれない。

15.2. Contextual Information 2.4. The Profile Description

att.global.analytic
provides additional global attributes for associating specific analyses or interpretations with appropriate portions of a text.
텍스트의 일정한 부분의 특별한 분석 혹은 해석과 관련된 부가적인 전반적 속성들을 제공한다.
提供附加的全域屬性，將特定的分析或詮釋和合宜的文字結合。
任意のテキスト部分への分析・解釈に関連するグローバル属性を示す。
fournit des attributs globaux complémentaires pour associer des analyses ou des interprétations spécifiques avec des portions de texte appropriées.
proporciona atributos globales adicionales para asociar análisis específicos o interpretaciones con las partes apropiadas de un texto.
assegna ulteriori attributi globali per associare specifiche analisi o interpretazioni alle adeguate porzioni di un testo
@ana
analysis
분석
análisis
analyse
analisi
分析
indicates one or more elements containing interpretations of the element on which the @ana attribute appears.
@ana 속성이 나오는 요소들의 해석을 포함하는 하나 혹은 그 이상의 요소들을 가리킨다.
指出一個或多個元素，其中包含帶有屬性@ana的元素解釋。
属性@anaを伴う要素の解釈を含む要素を示す。
indique un ou plusieurs éléments contenant des interprétations de l'élément qui porte l'attribut @ana.
indica uno o más elementos que contienen interpretaciones del elemento en el cual aparece el atributo @ana
indica uno o più elementi che contengono interpretazioni dell'elemento specificato dall'attributo @ana

When multiple values are given, they may reflect either multiple divergent interpretations of an ambiguous text, or multiple mutually consistent interpretations of the same passage in different contexts.

Quand on donne de multiples valeurs, celles-ci peuvent refléter, soit des interprétations multiples et divergentes d'un texte ambigu soit des interprétations multiples et compatibles du même passage dans différents contextes.

複数の属性値が付与される場合、各値は当該テキストの異なる解釈や、または同じ部分が異なる文脈でも同じ解釈であることを示す。

17.2. Global Attributes for Simple Analyses 17.3. Spans and Interpretations

att.global.facs
provides attributes used to express correspondence between an element and all or part of a facsimile image or surface.
<facsimile> 요소 내에서 이미지 또는 표면부와 관련될 수 있는 요소
los elementos que se pueden asociar a una imagen o a una superficie dentro de un <facsímil>.
転写されたテキストを含む要素と、そのテキストを表す画像の全部または一部との間の対応を表すために使用される属性を提供する。
attributs utilisables pour les éléments correspondant à tout ou partie d'une image, parce qu'ils contiennent une représentation alternative de cette image, généralement mais pas nécessairement, une transcription.
elementi che possono essere associati a un'immagine o una superficie all'interno dell'elemento facsimile
@facs
facsimile
모사
facsímil
fac-similé
ファクシミリ
points to one or more images, portions of an image, or surfaces which correspond to the current element.
이미지 또는 이 요소와 일치하는 <facsimile> 요소의 부분을 직접 가리킨다.
indica directamente a la imagen, o a la parte de un <facsímil> que se corresponde con este elemento.
当該要素に対応する要素<facsimile>にある画像やその部分への 参照。
pointe directement vers une image ou vers une partie d'une image correspondant au contenu de l'élément.
indica direttamente un'immagine o una parte di un elemento facsimile corrispondente a tale elemento
11.1. Digital Facsimiles

att.milestoneUnit
provides attributes to indicate the type of section which is changing at a specific milestone.
@unit
provides a conventional name for the kind of section changing at this milestone.
이 이정표에서 단락 변경을 위한 관례적 이름을 제공한다.
提供此分界段落所使用的通用單位名稱。
当該標石要素がある、変化が起きるセクションの種類の名前を示す。
fournit un nom conventionnel pour le type de section qui change à partir de cette balise de bornage
proporciona un nombre convencional para el tipo de sección que cambia en este hito.
fornisce un nome convenzionale per il tipo di sezione che cambia con l'elemento milestone.
"page"
physical page breaks (synonymous with the <pb> element).
물리적 페이지 바꿈
分頁 (和元素<pb>同義) 。
cambio físico de página (sinónimo del elemento <Pb>).
物理的な改ページ(要素<pb>と同義)。
sauts de page matériels (synonymes de l'élément <pb>)
interruzione di pagina (sininimo dell'elemento <pb>)
"column"
column breaks.
열 바꿈
分段。
cambio de columna.
段替え。
sauts de colonnes
interruzione di colonna
"line"
line breaks (synonymous with the <lb> element).
행 바꿈
分行 (和元素<lb>同義) 。
salto de línea (sinónimo del elemento <libra>).
改行(要素<lb>と同義)。
sauts de ligne (synonymes de l'élément<lb>)
interruzione di colonna (sininimo dell'elemento <lb>)
"book"
any units termed book, liber, etc.
책, 서책 등의 구분 단위
所有稱為書、冊、或函等的單位。
cualquier unidad llamada libro, pliego, etc.
冊子などの単位。
n'importe quel unité désignée par les termes livre, liber, etc.
qualsiasi unità indicata come libro, libretto, ecc.
"poem"
individual poems in a collection.
모음집에서 각각의 시
詩集中的單首詩。
poemas individuales de una colección.
叢書にある独立した詩。
poèmes séparés dans une collection
singole poesie di una raccolta.
"canto"
cantos or other major sections of a poem.
시의 편 또는 다른 주요 단락
長詩的詩篇，或詩的大段落。
cantos u otras secciones importantes de un poema.
韻文の編や節。
chants ou autres parties principales dans une poésie
canti o altre sezioni principali di una poesia.
"speaker"
changes of speaker or narrator.
changement de locuteur ou de narrateur
"stanza"
stanzas within a poem, book, or canto.
시, 책, 또는 시편에서 연
一首詩、一本書、或一詩篇中的詩節。
estrofas dentro de un poema, de un libro, o de un canto.
詩、冊子、編中にある連。
strophes dans une poésie, livre, ou chant
stanze di una poesia, libro o canti.
"act"
acts within a play.
희곡에서 막
劇本中的幕。
actos dentro de un drama.
芝居中の幕。
actes dans une pièce
atti di un'opera teatrale
"scene"
scenes within a play or act.
희곡 또는 막에서 장
劇本中的景。
escenas dentro de un drama o de un acto.
芝居または幕中の場。
scènes dans une pièce ou dans un acte
scene di un'opera teatrale o di un atto.
"section"
sections of any kind.
어떤 종류에서 절
任何種類的段落。
secciones de cualquier tipo.
各種のセクション。
parties de toute catégorie.
sezioni di qualsiasi natura.
"absent"
passages not present in the reference edition.
참조 판에 단락이 표시되어 있지 않다.
該段文字未在參照版本中出現。
pasajes no presentes en la edición de referencia.
参照版中にはない一節。
passages qui ne sont pas présents dans l'édition de référence.
passaggi non presenti nell'edizione di riferimento.
"unnumbered"
passages present in the text, but not to be included as part of the reference.
passages figurant dans le texte, mais qui ne sont pas destinés à être inclus comme élément de référence.

<milestone n="23" ed="La" unit="Dreissiger"/>
... <milestone n="24" ed="AV" unit="verse"/> ...

<milestone n="23" ed="La" unit="Dreissiger"/> ... <milestone n="24" ed="AV" unit="verse"/>
...

<milestone n="23" ed="拉丁文版本" unit="三十"/> ...
<milestone n="24" ed="聖經欽定版本" unit="韻文"/> ...

If the milestone marks the beginning of a piece of text not present in the reference edition, the special value absent may be used as the value of @unit. The normal interpretation is that the reference edition does not contain the text which follows, until the next <milestone> tag for the edition in question is encountered.

In addition to the values suggested, other terms may be appropriate (e.g. Stephanus for the Stephanus numbers in Plato).

The @type attribute may be used to characterize the unit boundary in any respect other than simply identifying the type of unit, for example as word-breaking or not.

Si l'élément <milestone> marque le début d'un fragment de texte qui n'est pas présent dans l'édition de référence, la valeur absent peut être donnée à l'attribut @unit. On comprendra alors que l'édition de référence ne contient pas le fragment de texte qui suit et qui s'achève à la balise <milestone> suivante dans le texte.

En plus des valeurs proposées pour cet attribut, d'autres termes peuvent être appropriés (par ex. Stephanus pour les numéros dits de Henri Estienne dans les éditions de Platon).

L'attribut @type sera utilisé pour caractériser l’unité de bornage sans autre précaution d’emploi que celle de l'identification du type d'unité, par exemple s’il s’agit d’un mot coupé ou pas.

標石要素が参照版中にはないテキスト部分の始点を示す場合、属性 @unitには、特別な値absentが付与されるかもしれない。一般的な解釈では、等が版に対応する次の要素 <milestone>が出現するまで、当該参照版はテキストを含まな い。

ここに挙げた属性値以外にも適切なものはあるだろう(例えば、プラ トンの作品を表すステファヌス番号を示す値Stephanus など。

3.11.3. Milestone Elements 2.3.6.3. Milestone Method 2.3.6. The Reference System Declaration

att.global.linking
provides a set of attributes for hypertextual linking.
하이퍼텍스트와 다른 연결에 대한 속성의 집합을 정의한다. 이것은 연결에 대한 부가적 태그 집합이 선택될 때 모든 요소에 가능해야 한다.
定義一組用於超文字連結及其他連結的屬性，當連結的附加標籤組被選擇時，這些屬性可用於所有元素。
ハイパーテキストリンクの属性セットを提供する。
fournit un ensemble d'attributs pour décrire les liens hypertextuels.
define un conjunto de atributos para hipertexto u otro vínculo habilitado para todos los elementos cuando se selecciona la etiqueta adicional para los enlaces.
definisce un insieme di attributi per ipertesto o altro legame abilitati per tutti gli elementi quando è selezionato il sottoinsieme di marcatori per i collegamenti
@corresp
corresponds
일치
correspondencia
correspond
corrispondente
対応
points to elements that correspond to the current element in some way.
어떤 식으로든 현 요소와 일치하는 요소를 가리킨다.
連結到的元素在某方面符合現有元素。
当該要素と対応する要素を示す。
pointe vers des éléments qui ont une correspondance avec l'élément en question.
señala los elementos que presentan una correspondencia con el elemento corriente.
punta a elementi che hanno una qualche corrispondenza con l'elemento corrente

<group>
  <text xml:id="t1-g1-t1" xml:lang="mi">
    <body xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body1">
      <div type="chapter">
        <head>He Whakamaramatanga mo te Ture Hoko, Riihi hoki, i nga Whenua Maori, 1876.</head>
        <p>…</p>
      </div>
    </body>
  </text>
  <text xml:id="t1-g1-t2" xml:lang="en">
    <body xml:id="t1-g1-t2-body1" corresp="#t1-g1-t1-body1">
      <div type="chapter">
        <head>An Act to regulate the Sale, Letting, and Disposal of Native Lands, 1876.</head>
        <p>…</p>
      </div>
    </body>
  </text>
</group>

In this example a <group> contains two <text>s, each containing the same document in a different language. The correspondence is indicated using @corresp. The language is indicated using @xml:lang, whose value is inherited; both the tag with the @corresp and the tag pointed to by the @corresp inherit the value from their immediate parent.

<place xml:id="LOND1" corresp="people.xml#LOND2 people.xml#GENI1">
  <placeName>London</placeName>
  <desc>The city of London...</desc>
</place>

<person xml:id="LOND2" corresp="places.xml#LOND1 #GENI1">
  <persName type="lit">London</persName>
  <note>
    <p>Allegorical character representing the city of <placeName ref="places.xml#LOND1">London</placeName>.</p>
  </note>
</person>
<person xml:id="GENI1" corresp="places.xml#LOND1 #LOND2">
  <persName type="lit">London’s Genius</persName>
  <note>
    <p>Personification of London’s genius. Appears as an
      allegorical character in mayoral shows.
    </p>
  </note>
</person>

In this example, a <place> element containing information about the city of London is linked with two <person> elements in a literary personography. This correspondence represents a slightly looser relationship than the one in the preceding example; there is no sense in which an allegorical character could be substituted for the physical city, or vice versa, but there is obviously a correspondence between them.

@next
points to the next element of a virtual aggregate of which the current element is part.
현 요소가 그 부분인 가상 집합의 다음 요소를 가리킨다.
連結到現有元素所屬虛擬集合中的下一個元素。
indica el elemento siguiente de un agregado virtual del cual elemento actual es una parte.
当該要素も所属する仮想集合における次の要素を示す。
pointe vers l'élément suivant d'un ensemble virtuel dont l'élément en question est une partie.
punta all'elemento seguente all'interno di un aggregazione virtuale di cui l'elemento corrente fa parte

It is recommended that the element indicated be of the same type as the element bearing this attribute.

指定された要素も、この属性を持つ要素と同じ型であることが推奨される。

@prev
previous
이전
anterior
précédent
precedente
前の
points to the previous element of a virtual aggregate of which the current element is part.
현 요소가 그 부분인 가상 집합의 이전 요소를 가리킨다.
連結到現有元素所屬虛擬集合中的上一個元素。
当該要素も所属する仮想集合における前の要素を示す。
pointe vers l'élément précédent d'un ensemble virtuel auquel appartient l'élément en question.
señala al elemento precedente de una adición virtual, de la cual el elemento corriente forma parte.
punta all'elemento precedente all'interno di un aggregazione virtuale di cui l'elemento corrente fa parte

It is recommended that the element indicated be of the same type as the element bearing this attribute.

指定された要素も、この属性を持つ要素と同じ型であることが推奨される。

16. Linking, Segmentation, and Alignment

att.coordinated
provides attributes that can be used to position their parent element within a two dimensional coordinate system.
이차원 좌표 체계 내에서 위치될 수 있는 요소
los elementos se pueden colocar dentro de un sistema de coordenadas bidimensional.
2次元座標システムによる、親要素の場所を示す属性。
attributs utilisables pour les éléments pouvant être positionnés dans un système de coordonnées à deux dimensions.
elementi posizionabili all'interno di un sistema di coordinate bidimensionale
@start
indicates the element within a transcription of the text containing at least the start of the writing represented by this zone or surface.
désigne l'élément qui, dans la transcription du texte, contient au moins le début de la section de texte représentée dans la zone ou surface.
このzoneまたはsurface要素で示される記述の少なくとも開始点を含むようなテクストの翻刻内の要素を示す。
@ulx
gives the x coordinate value for the upper left corner of a rectangular space.
직사각형 공간의 좌측 상단에 대한 x 좌표 값을 제시한다.
proporciona el valor de la coordinada X para el ángulo superior izquierdo de un espacio rectangular.
矩形における左上点のX軸の値を示す。
donne la valeur x de l'abscisse du coin supérieur gauche d'un rectangle.
assegna il valore x all'angolo superiore sinistro di uno spazio rettangolare
@uly
gives the y coordinate value for the upper left corner of a rectangular space.
직사각형 공간의 좌측 상단에 대한 y 좌표 값을 제시한다.
proporciona el valor de la coordinada Y para el ángulo superior izquierdo de un espacio rectangular.
矩形における左上点のY軸の値を示す。
donne la valeur y de l'ordonnée du coin supérieur gauche d'un rectangle.
assegna il valore y all'angolo superiore sinistro di uno spazio rettangolare
@lrx
gives the x coordinate value for the lower right corner of a rectangular space.
직사각형 공간의 오른쪽 하단에 대한 x 좌표 값을 제시한다.
proporciona el valor de la coordinada X para el ángulo inferior derecho de un espacio rectangular
矩形における右下点のX軸の値を示す。
donne la valeur x de l'abscisse du coin inférieur droit d'un rectangle.
assegna il valore x all'angolo inferiore destro di uno spazio rettangolare
@lry
gives the y coordinate value for the lower right corner of a rectangular space.
직사각형 공간의 오른쪽 하단에 대한 y 좌표 값을 제시한다.
proporciona el valor de la coordinada Y para el ángulo inferior izquierdo de un espacio rectangular
矩形における右下点のY軸の値を示す。
donne la valeur y de l'ordonnée du coin inférieur droit d'un rectangle.
assegna il valore y all'angolo inferiore destro di uno spazio rettangolare
@points
identifies a two dimensional area by means of a series of pairs of numbers, each of which gives the x,y coordinates of a point on a line enclosing the area.
当該の領域を取り囲む線上の点のXとY軸を与える一連の数値の組を持つ他の属性によって指定されたバウンディングボックス内の2次元の領域を特定する。

att.tableDecoration
provides attributes used to decorate rows or cells of a table.
테이블의 행 또는 셀을 장식하는 속성을 제공한다.
提供屬性，用以裝飾表格內的儲存格或列。
表の行またはセルを修飾する属性を示す。
fournit des attributs pour mettre en forme les lignes ou les cellules d'un tableau.
proporciona atributos usados para decorar filas o celdas de una tabla.
assegna degli attributi utilizzati per decorare righe e celle di una tabella
@role
role
rôle
indicates the kind of information held in this cell or in each cell of this row.
이 셀에 또는 이 행의 각 셀에 나타난 정보의 종류를 제시한다.
指出此儲存格或列當中，各儲存格所包含的資訊類型。
当該セル、または当該行中のセルにある情報の種類を示す。
indique le type des informations contenues dans cette cellule ou dans chaque cellule de cette ligne.
especifica el tipo de información contenida en la celda en cuestión o en cada una de las celdas de la fila.
specifica il tipo di informazione contenuta nela cella in questione o in ciascuna delle celle della riga presa in esame
data
"label"
labelling or descriptive information only.
표지 또는 기술적 정보만 허용
僅為標號或描述性資訊。
etiquetado o información descriptiva solamente.
記述的情報またはラベルのみ。
uniquement des informations relatives au codage ou à la description
informazione esclusivamente descrittiva o del tipo etichetta
"data"
data values.
데이터 값
數據值。
valores de datos.
日付情報。
valeurs de données
valori di dati

When this attribute is specified on a row, its value is the default for all cells in this row. When specified on a cell, its value overrides any default specified by the @role attribute of the parent <row> element.

Quand cet attribut est appliqué à une ligne de tableau, sa valeur est transmise comme valeur par défaut à toutes les cellules de cette ligne. Quand il est spécifié sur une cellule, sa valeur annule et remplace toute valeur spécifiée par défaut dans l'attribut @role de l'élément parent <row>.

Cuando este atributo se especifica en una fila, su valor es el valor por defecto para todas las celdas de esta fila. Cuando está especificado en una celda, su valor reemplaza cualquier valor por defecto especificado por el atributo @role (papel) del elemento padre <row> (fila).

当該属性が行に付与されている場合、当該属性値は当該行中の全セルのデフォルト値になる。当該属性がセルに付与されている場合、当該属性値は、親要素<row>の属性@roleにあるデフォルト値を上書きする。

@rows
rows
lignes
indicates the number of rows occupied by this cell or row.
이 셀 또는 행에 의해 사용된 행의 수를 나타낸다.
指出此儲存格或列所占的列數。
当該セルまたは行を含む行の数を示す。
indique le nombre de lignes occupées par la cellule ou la ligne en question.
indica el número de filas ocupado por una celda o por la fila en cuestión.
indica il numero di righe occupate dalla cella o riga in questione
1

A value greater than one indicates that this cell spans several rows. Where several cells span multiple rows, it may be more convenient to use nested tables.

Lorsque plusieurs cellules s'étendent sur plusieurs lignes, il peut être plus pratique d'employer des tableaux inclus.

Donde varias celdas atraviesan varias filas, puede ser más conveniente utilizar los vectores jerarquizados.

複数のセルが複数行に渡る場合には、入れ子の表を使った方が便利である。

@cols
columns
열
columnas
colonnes
colonne
indicates the number of columns occupied by this cell or row.
이 셀 또는 행에 의해 사용된 열의 수를 나타낸다.
指出此儲存格或列所佔的欄位數。
当該セルまたは行を含む列の数を示す。
indique le nombre de colonnes occupées par cette cellule ou cette ligne.
indica el número de columnas que abraza una celda o fila.
indica il numero di colonne occupate dalla cella o riga
1

A value greater than one indicates that this cell or row spans several columns. Where an initial cell spans an entire row, it may be better treated as a heading.

Une valeur plus grande que 1 indique que cette cellule (ou cette ligne) occupe plusieurs colonnes. Lorsqu'une première cellule s'étend sur une ligne entière, il peut être préférable de la considérer comme un titre.

Donde una celda inicial atraviesa una fila entera, puede ser tratada como título.

始めのセルが行全体である場合には、見出しとして扱った方がよい。

14. Tables, Formulæ, Graphics, and Notated Music

att.metrical
defines a set of attributes that certain elements may use to represent metrical information.
운율 정보를 표시하기 위하여 특정 요소들이 사용할 수 있는 속성 집합을 정의한다.
定義一組特定元素所使用、表示詩行韻律的屬性。
特性の要素が韻律情報を示す属性を定義する。
définit un ensemble d'attributs que certains éléments peuvent utiliser pour représenter de l'information métrique.
define un grupo de atributos utilizados dentro de determinados elementos para representar información métrica
definisce un insieme di attributi utilizzati entro determinati elementi per rappresentare informazioni relative alla metrica
@rhyme
rhyme scheme
운 스키마
esquema de la rima
schéma rimique
schema rimico
韻構造
specifies the rhyme scheme applicable to a group of verse lines.
시행 군집에 적용 가능한 운 스키마를 명시한다.
標明適用於一詩行組的押韻組合。
韻文の行集合に当てはまる韻構造を示す。
spécifie quel schéma de rimes a été appliqué à un groupe de lignes versifiées.
especifica el esquema de la rima de un grupo de versos.
specifica lo schema rimico di un gruppo di versi

By default, the rhyme scheme is expressed as a string of alphabetic characters each corresponding with a rhyming line. Any non-rhyming lines should be represented by a hyphen or an X. Alternative notations may be defined as for @met by use of the <metDecl> element in the TEI header.

When the default notation is used, it does not make sense to specify this attribute on any unit smaller than a line. Nor does the default notation provide any way to record internal rhyme, or to specify non-conventional rhyming practice. These extensions would require user-defined alternative notations.

Par défaut, le schéma de rimes est exprimé sous la forme d'une chaîne de caractères alphabétiques correspondant chacun à une ligne rimée. Toute ligne non rimée doit être repésentée par un tiret ou un X. Des notations alternatives peuvent être définies comme pour l'attribut @met en utilisant l'élément <metDecl> dans l'en-tête TEI.

Lorsque la notation par défaut est utilisée, cela n'a pas de sens de renseigner l'attribut @rhyme pour une unité plus petite qu'une ligne de vers. La notation par défaut ne donne aucun moyen de noter une rime interne, non plus que de spécifier une utilisation non conventionnelle des rimes. Ces extensions requièrent des notations différentes définies par l'utilisateur de la TEI.

デフォルトでは、韻構造は、一つの韻を踏む行と逐一対応するアルファベットの文字列として表現される。すべての押韻しない行は、ハイフンまたはXで表す。 TEIヘッダーの<metDecl>要素を使用して、@metの代替表記を定義できる。デフォルトの表記法が使用される時、この属性を行未満の単位に指定しても、意味をなさない。デフォルトの表記法は、行内部の韻を記録するものでも、定型でない押韻を指定するものでもない。このような拡張をするには、ユーザが代替の表記法を定義する必要がある。

6.4. Rhyme and Metrical Analysis

att.divLike
provides attributes common to all elements which behave in the same way as divisions.
구역과 동일한 방식으로 처리되는 모든 요소에 공통적인 속성을 제공한다.
提供一組屬性，通用於所有與區段作用相同的元素。
区分(div、division)に相当する全要素に共通の属性を示す。
fournit un jeu d'attributs communs à tous les éléments qui offrent les mêmes caractéristiques que des divisions
proporciona un conjunto de atributos comunes a todos los elementos que se comportan como particiones textuales.
identifica un insieme di attributi comuni a tutti gli elementi che si comportano come partizioni testuali
@org
organization
조직
organización
organisation
organizzazione
組織
specifies how the content of the division is organized.
구역 내용이 조직된 방법에 대해 명시한다.
說明該區段內容的組合方式。
当該区分の内容がどのように構成されているかを示す。
précise l'organisation du contenu de la division
especifica cómo está organizado el contenido de una división textual.
specifica come è organizzato il contenuto della partizione testuale
uniform
"composite"
no claim is made about the sequence in which the immediate contents of this division are to be processed, or their inter-relationships.
혼합 내용: 즉, 이 구역의 직접적 내용이 처리되는 순서 또는 상호 관련성에 관해 어떠한 주장도 없다.
複合內容：未說明此區段目前內容的處理順序或相互關係。
contenido compuesto: es decir no se hace ninguna solicitud sobre la secuencia en la cual el contenido inmediato de esta división debe ser procesado, o en sus interrelaciones.
この部分に含まれる諸内容が処理される順番、すなわち内部関係には制約がない。
aucune déclaration n'est faite quant à l'ordre dans lequel les composants de cette division doivent être traités ou bien quant à leurs corrélations
non viene specificato quale sia l'ordine in cui debbano essere elaborati i contenuti della partizione, né viene indicato il rapporto in cui questi si trovano tra loro
"uniform"
the immediate contents of this element are regarded as forming a logical unit, to be processed in sequence.
통일 내용: 즉, 이 요소의 직접적 내용이 차례대로 처리되는 논리적 단위를 형성하는 것으로 간주된다.
一致內容：此區段目前的內容形成一個邏輯單位，且會依序處理。
es decir el contenido inmediato de este elemento se considera integrante de una unidad lógica, para ser procesado en la secuencia.
この要素直下の諸内容が論理的単位を構成しており、順番に処理すべきものと見なす。
contenu uniforme : c'est-à-dire que les composants de cet élément sont à considérer comme formant une unité logique et doivent être traités dans l'ordre séquentiel
contenuto uniforme: i contenuti dell'elemento costituiscono un'unità logica che va elaborata in sequenza
@sample
indicates whether this division is a sample of the original source and if so, from which part.
이 구역이 원본의 표본이며 어떤 부분인지를 나타낸다.
指出此區段是否為來源文件的樣本，若為樣本，則說明出自哪一部分。
当該区分が、元資料のものを含むかどうか、そうであればその場所はどこかを示す。
indique si cette division est un échantillon de la source originale et dans ce cas, de quelle partie.
indica si la división es una muestra de la fuente original y, en ese caso, de que parte de este se trata
indica se la partizione è un campione del testo originario e, in tal caso, da quale parte di questo è tratta
complete
"initial"
division lacks material present at end in source.
구역이 원본의 후반부에서 제시된 자료가 부족하다.
區段的末端無資料
la división falta el material presente en el extremo en la fuente.
当該区分は、元資料の終わりの部分が欠けている。
par rapport à la source, lacune à la fin de la division
alla partizione testuale manca del materiale nella parte finale presente nell'originale
"medial"
division lacks material at start and end.
구역이 초반부와 후반부 자료가 부족하다.
區段的起始與末端無資料
el fragmento carece de material al comienzo y al final.
当該区分は、元資料の始めと終わりの部分が欠けている。
par rapport à la source, lacune au début et à la fin de la division
alla partizione testuale manca del materiale nella parte iniziale e in quella finale
"final"
division lacks material at start.
구역이 초반부 자료가 부족하다.
區段的起始部分無資料
el fragmento carece de material en el comienzo.
当該区分は、元資料の始めの部分が欠けている。
par rapport à la source, lacune au début de la division
alla partizione manca del materiale nella parte iniziale
"unknown"
position of sampled material within original unknown.
표본 자료의 원본 내의 위치를 알 수 없다.
來源文件中的樣本資料位置不明
ubicación del material de muestra dentro del original desconocido.
元資料のどの部分かは不明。
par rapport à la source, position de l'échantillon inconnue
la posizione del materiale prelevato dall'originale all'interno di quest'ultimo è sconosciuta
"complete"
division is not a sample.
구역이 표본이 아니다.
區段非樣本
el fragmento no es una muestra.
当該領域は、元資料の一部ではない。
la division n'est pas un échantillon
la partizione testuale non è stata prelevata da alcun originale
4. Default Text Structure

att.linguistic
provides a set of attributes concerning linguistic features of tokens, for usage within token-level elements, specifically <w> and <pc> in the analysis module.
@lemma
provides a lemma (base form) for the word, typically uninflected and serving both as an identifier (e.g. in dictionary contexts, as a headword), and as a basis for potential inflections.
단어의 레마(사전의 표제 형식)를 명시한다.
指出在字典中該字的詞條形式。
当該語の、辞書の見出し形を示す。
fournit le lemme du mot (entrée du dictionnaire)
identifica el lema de una palabra (forma en que se encuentra como entrada en un diccionario).
identifica il lemma (la voce di un dizionario)

<w lemma="wife">wives</w>

<w lemma="Arznei">Artzeneyen</w>

<w type="動詞" lemma="hit">hitt<m type="字尾">ing</m>
</w>

@lemmaRef
provides a pointer to a definition of the lemma for the word, for example in an online lexicon.

<w type="verb" lemma="hit" lemmaRef="http://www.example.com/lexicon/hitvb.xml">hitt<m type="suffix">ing</m>
</w>

<w type="verb" lemma="nage" lemmaRef="http://www.example.com/lexicon/hitvb.xml">nag<m type="suffix">er</m>
</w>

These attributes make it possible to encode simple language corpora and to add a layer of linguistic information to any tokenized resource. See section 17.4.2. Lightweight Linguistic Annotation for discussion.

17.4.2. Lightweight Linguistic Annotation

<ab>
anonymous block
익명 구역
匿名區塊
bloc anonyme
bloque anónimo
blocco anonimo
無名ブロック
contains any component-level unit of text, acting as a container for phrase or inter level elements analogous to, but without the same constraints as, a paragraph.
의미적 부담 없이, 문단과 유사한 구 또는 상호층위 요소에 대한 익명 전달체로 기능하는 임의적 성분-층위 단위를 포함한다.
包含文件中任何隨機組合性層次的單元，匿名收容類似一個段落、但不包含段落語義的字詞或中間層元素。
任意の部分的テキスト単位を示す。特定の意味はなくとも、段落に相当する、 句レベル・挿入レベルの単位として無名単位になる。
contient une unité de texte quelconque, de niveau "composant", faisant office de contenant anonyme pour une expression ou des éléments de niveau intermédiaire, analogue à un paragraphe mais sans sa portée sémantique.
contiene cualquier unidad textual a nivel de componente que actua como un contenedor anónimo de sintagmas o de elementos de internivel similares al párrafo pero sin la carga semántica de este último.
contiene una qualsiasi unità testuale a livello di componente che funge da contenitore anonimo di sintagmi o elementi interlivello simili al paragrafo ma senza il bagaglio semantico di quest'ultimo
Abstract model violation: Lines may not contain higher-level divisions such as p or ab, unless ab is a child of figure or note, or is a descendant of floatingText.

<div type="book" n="Genesis">
  <div type="chapter" n="1">
    <ab>In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.</ab>
    <ab>And the earth was without form, and void; and
         darkness was upon the face of the deep. And the
         spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.</ab>
    <ab>And God said, Let there be light: and there was light.</ab>

  </div>
</div>

The <ab> element may be used at the encoder's discretion to mark any component-level elements in a text for which no other more specific appropriate markup is defined. Unlike paragraphs, <ab> may nest and may use the @type and @subtype attributes.

El elemento <ab> se puede utilizar a discreción del codificador para marcar cualquier elemento a nivel de componente en un texto para el que no se haya definido ningún otro marcado apropiado más específico.

L'élément <ab> peut être utilisé à la discrétion de l'encodeur pour marquer dans un texte tout élément de niveau composant pour lequel aucune méthode appropriée de balisage plus spécifique n'est définie.

要素<ab>は、符号化する人が望むあらゆる単位レベルで、適切な 要素が規定されていない場合に、自由に使用することが出来る。

16.3. Blocks, Segments, and Anchors

<abbr>
abbreviation
약어
縮寫
abréviation
abreviatura
abbreviazione
Abkürzung
省略形
contains an abbreviation of any sort.
어떤 종류의 약어를 포함한다.
包含任何形式的縮寫。
あらゆる種類の名称の省略を一つ含む。
contient une abréviation quelconque.
contiene una abreviatura de cualquier clase.
contiene un'abbreviazione di qualsiasi genere.
enthält eine Abkürzung beliebiger Form.
@type
type
tipo
Typ
allows the encoder to classify the abbreviation according to some convenient typology.
적절한 방식에 따른 약어를 분류하는 것을 가능하게 한다.
標記者可以用合宜的分類方法將縮寫形式分類。
符号化する人の分類に従って省略名称を付与することができる。
permet à l'encodeur de caractériser l'abréviation selon une typologie adéquate
permite al codificador clasificar la abreviatura según la tipología conveniente.
pemette al codificatore di classificare l'abbreviazione secondo una tipologia funzionale.
erlaubt es, die Abkürzung nach einer geeigneten Typologie zu klassifizieren.
"suspension"
suspension
Suspension
the abbreviation provides the first letter(s) of the word or phrase, omitting the remainder.
단어 또는 구의 첫 문자(들)로 제시된 약어
僅提供字詞開端的一個或一個以上的字母，並省略其他部分的縮寫形式。
la abreviatura proporciona a las primeras letras de la palabra o de la frase, omitiendo el resto.
語頭文字(列)を使い、省略形とする。
l'abréviation donne la première lettre lettre du mot ou de l'expression et omet le reste.
l'abbreviazione consiste delle prime lettere di una parola o sintagma, omettendo il restante.
die Abkürzung gibt nur den Anfang des Wortes oder der Phrase, der Rest wird weggelassen, z. B. H(ansestadt) H(amburg), u(nd) s(o) w(eiter).
"contraction"
contraction
Kontraktion
the abbreviation omits some letter(s) in the middle.
중간의 몇 개 문자들이 생략된 약어
省略單字當中某些字母的縮寫形式。
la abreviatura omite algunas letras en el centro.
語中の文字(列)を省略して作る。
l'abréviation omet une ou plusieurs lettres au milieu.
l'abbreviazione omette alcune lettere nella parte centrale.
die Abkürzung lässt Buchstaben im Wortinneren weg.
"brevigraph"
the abbreviation comprises a special symbol or mark.
약어가 특별한 기호 또는 부호로 구성된다.
包含特殊符號或標記的縮寫形式。
la abreviatura refiere un símbolo especial o una marca.
特別な記号や印が使われている。
l'abréviation comprend un symbole spécial ou une marque.
l'abbreviazione consiste di un simbolo o segno speciale.
die Abkürzung verwendet ein spezielles Zeichen für die ausgelassenen Buchstaben.
"superscription"
superscription
Superskript
the abbreviation includes writing above the line.
약어가 행 위에 기록된 것을 포함한다.
包含上標文字的縮寫形式。
la abreviatura incluye la escritura sobre la línea.
当該省略形上に、文字列が乗っている。
l'abréviation inclut ce qui est écrit au-dessus de la ligne.
l'abbreviazione include testo scritto al di sopra della linea.
die Abkürzung enthält Zeichen auf oder über der Mittellinie.
"acronym"
acronym
Akronym
the abbreviation comprises the initial letters of the words of a phrase.
약어가 구를 구성하는 각 단어의 시작 문자로 구성된 것이다.
僅包含一詞組當中字首字母的縮寫形式。
la abreviatura abarca las letras iniciales de las palabras de una frase.
省略形は、語頭字でできている。
l'abréviation comprend les initiales des mots d'une expression.
l'abbreviazione consiste delle lettere iniziali delle una parola di una frase.
die Abkürzung besteht aus den Anfangsbuchstaben mehrer Wörter.
"title"
title
Titel
the abbreviation is for a title of address (Dr, Ms, Mr, …)
호칭에 대한 약어(Dr, Ms, Mr 등)
用於頭銜稱呼的縮寫 (Dr, Ms, Mr, …)。
la abreviatura se emplea para un tratamiento en la dirección (el Dr., Sr.,…)
宛名に使用する肩書きの省略形(Dr、 Ms、 Mr、…)。
l'abréviation recouvre une identité sociale (Dr., Mme, M., …)
labbreviazione si riferisce al titolo (Sig., Sig.ra ecc.)
eine Abkürzung für eine Anrede oder einen akademischen Titel (Dr., Hr., Fr., ...)
"organization"
organization
Organisation
the abbreviation is for the name of an organization.
약어가 기관명에 대한 것이다.
用於機構團體名稱的縮寫。
la abreviatura se emplea en el nombre de una organización.
組織名の省略形。
l'abréviation recouvre le nom d'un organisme.
l'abbreviazione si riferisce al nome di un organizzazione.
eine Abkürzung für den Namen einer Organisation.
"geographic"
geographic
Geographisch
the abbreviation is for a geographic name.
약어가 지명에 대한 것이다.
用於地理名稱的縮寫。
la abreviatura se usa para un nombre geográfico.
地名の省略形。
l'abréviation recouvre un nom géographique.
l'abbreviazione si riferisce ad un toponimo
die Abkürzung steht für einen geografischen Namen.

<choice>
  <expan>North Atlantic Treaty Organization</expan>
  <abbr cert="low">NorATO</abbr>
  <abbr cert="high">NATO</abbr>
  <abbr cert="high" xml:lang="fr">OTAN</abbr>
</choice>

<abbr>SPQR</abbr>

<choice>
  <abbr>SPQR</abbr>
  <expan xml:lang="la">senatus populusque romanorum</expan>
</choice>

<abbr>北大</abbr>

<choice>
  <abbr>北大</abbr>
  <expan>北京大學</expan>
</choice>

<choice>
  <abbr>SPQR</abbr>
  <expan>senatus populusque romanorum</expan>
</choice>

3.6.5. Abbreviations and Their Expansions

<actor>
contains the name of an actor appearing within a cast list.
배역 목록에 나타나는 배우의 이름
角色名單中的演員姓名。
Nombre de un actor que aparece dentro de la lista del reparto.
登場人物リスト中の役者名を示す。
Nom d'un acteur apparaissant dans une distribution.
nome di un attore che appare nella lista dei personaggi.
@sex
specifies the sex of the actor.

Values for this attribute may be locally defined by a project, or may refer to an external standard.

@gender
specifies the gender of the actor.

Values for this attribute may be locally defined by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

<castItem>
  <role>Mathias</role>
  <roleDesc>the Burgomaster</roleDesc>
  <actor ref="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Henry_Irving">Mr. Henry Irving</actor>
</castItem>

  <castItem>
<role>Mrs Saunders</role>
<roleDesc>la logeuse</roleDesc>
<actor>Sylvia Marriott</actor>
  </castItem>

<castItem>
  <role>梁山伯</role>
  <roleDesc>窮書生</roleDesc>
  <actor>凌波</actor>
</castItem>

This element should be used only to mark the name of the actor as given in the source. Chapter 13. Names, Dates, People, and Places discusses ways of marking the components of names, and also of associating names with biographical information about a person.

Este elemento debe ser usado solo para marcar el nombre del actor tal como aparece en la fuente. El capítulo 13. Names, Dates, People, and Places comenta/discute formas de marcar los componentes de los nombres, asi como también asociar nombre con información biográfica sobre una persona

Cet élément ne devrait être utilisé que pour encoder le nom de l'acteur tel qu'il est donné dans la source. Le chapitre 13. Names, Dates, People, and Places traite des différentes manières d'encoder les composants des noms, et aussi celui d'associer des noms à des informations biographiques concernant une personne.

当該要素は、元資料にある役者名を示すために使用されるべきである。 13. Names, Dates, People, and Placesでは、名前の構成要素や、当該人物に関する情報に関連する名前をタグ付けする方法が解説されている。

7.1.4. Cast Lists

<add>
addition
삽입, 첨가
插入
ajout
adición
aggiunta
Hinzufügung
書き入れ
contains letters, words, or phrases inserted in the source text by an author, scribe, or a previous annotator or corrector.
저자, 전사자, 부호화 작업자 또는 수정작업자에 의해 텍스트에 삽입된 문자, 단어, 또는 구를 포함한다.
包含由作者、抄寫者、註解者、或更正者在文本中插入的字母、單字或詞彙。
著者、筆写者、注釈者、校正者によって挿入された文字、単語、句を示す。
contient des lettres, des mots ou des phrases insérés dans le texte par un auteur, un copiste, un annotateur ou un correcteur.
contiene letras, palabras o frases introducidas en el texto por el autor, transcriptor, glosador o corrector.
contiene lettere, parole o frasi inserite in un testo da un autore, copista, commentatore o correttore.
enthält Buchstaben, Wörter oder Phrasen, die in den Ausgangstext von einem Autor, einem Schreiber oder im Rahmen einer zuvor erfolgten Annotation oder Korrektur in den Ausgangstext eingefügt wurden
color: green; text-decoration: underline;

The story I am
going to relate is true as to its main facts, and as to the
consequences <add place="above">of these facts</add> from which
this tale takes its title.

In a diplomatic edition attempting to represent an original source, the <add> element should not be used for additions to the current TEI electronic edition made by editors or encoders. In these cases, either the <corr> or <supplied> element are recommended.

In a TEI edition of a historical text with previous editorial emendations in which such additions or reconstructions are considered part of the source text, the use of <add> may be appropriate, dependent on the editorial philosophy of the project.

Dans une édition diplomatique souhaitant representer une source originalle, l'élément <add> ne sera pas utilisé pour les ajouts effectués par les éditeurs ou les encodeurs. Dans ce cas, on va préféra soit l'élément <corr> soit l'élément <supplied>.

El elemento <addición> no se debe utilizar para las adiciones hechas por los editores o los codificadores. En estos casos, cualquiera de los elementos <corr> o <supplied> son más convenientes.

元のソースを表現しようとしているdiplomatic editionでは、<add>要素は、編集者や符号化する人が作成した現在のTEI電子版への追加には使用しないでください。このような場合は、<corr>または<supplied>要素のいずれかをお勧めします。そのような追加や再構成が原文の一部とみなされる以前の編集上の訂正を含む歴史的テキストのTEI版では、プロジェクトの編集理念に応じて、<add>の使用が適切かもしれません。

In einer diplomatischen Ausgabe, die auf eine genaue Wiedergabe der Vorlage zielt, sollte das <add>-Element nicht für jene Hinzufügungen genutzt werden, die von den Editoren oder Auszeichnenden zu der elektronischen TEI-Edition gemacht werden. In diesen Fällen wird empfohlen, entweder das <corr>-Element oder <supplied>-Element zu verwenden.

In der TEI-Edition eines historischen Textes mit bereits vorhandenen editorischen Korrekturen, in dem solche Ergänzungen oder Rekonstruktionen als Teil der Textvorlage betrachtet werden, kann - im Rahmen der Editionsgrundsätze eines Projekts - die Verwendung des <add>-Elements geeignet sein.

3.5.3. Additions, Deletions, and Omissions

<address>
address
Adresse
contains a postal address, for example of a publisher, an organization, or an individual.
예를 들어, 출판사, 기관, 개인의 우편 주소를 포함한다.
包含出版者、機構、或是個人的郵寄地址或其他地址。
郵便配達情報を示す。例えば、出版者、組織、個人の住所など。
contient une adresse postale ou d'un autre type, par exemple l'adresse d'un éditeur, d'un organisme ou d'une personne.
contiene una dirección postal, por ejemplo de un editor, una institución, etc.
contiene un indirizzo (postale), ad esempio di un editore, di un'organizzazione, di un individuo.
enthält eine Postadresse, z. B. eines Verlegers, einer Organisation oder einer Einzelperson.
margin-top: 2em; margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;

Using just the elements defined by the core module, an address could be represented as follows:

<address>
  <street>via Marsala 24</street>
  <postCode>40126</postCode>
  <name>Bologna</name>
  <name>Italy</name>
</address>

When a schema includes the names and dates module more specific elements such as country or settlement would be preferable over generic <name>:

<address>
  <street>via Marsala 24</street>
  <postCode>40126</postCode>
  <settlement>Bologna</settlement>
  <country>Italy</country>
</address>

      <address>
        <addrLine>Centre d'Études Supérieures de la Renaissance</addrLine>
        <addrLine>59, rue Néricault-Destouches</addrLine>
        <addrLine> 37013
TOURS</addrLine>
        <addrLine>France</addrLine>
      </address>

<address>
  <street>邯郸路220号</street>
  <postCode>200433</postCode>
  <name>上海市</name>
  <name n="I">中華人民共和國</name>
</address>

<address>
  <addrLine>沙田</addrLine>
  <addrLine>新界</addrLine>
  <addrLine>香港特別行政區</addrLine>
  <addrLine>中華人民共和國</addrLine>
</address>

<address>
  <addrLine>Computing Center, MC 135</addrLine>
  <addrLine>P.O. Box 6998</addrLine>
  <addrLine>Chicago, IL  60680</addrLine>
  <addrLine>USA</addrLine>
</address>

<address>
     <country key="FR"/>
       <settlement type="city">Lyon</settlement>
        <postCode>69002</postCode>
       <district type="arrondissement">IIème</district>
       <district type="quartier">Perrache</district>
       <street><num>30</num>, Cours de Verdun</street>
   </address>

This element should be used for postal addresses only. Within it, the generic element <addrLine> may be used as an alternative to any of the more specialized elements available from the model.addrPart class, such as <street>, <postCode> etc.

Cet élément ne doit être utilisé que pour donner une adresse postale. A l'intérieur de cet élément, l'élément générique <addrLine> peut être utilisé comme élément alternatif aux éléments plus spécialisés de la classe model.addrPart class, tels que <street>, <postCode> etc.

当該要素は、郵便配達情報にのみ使用されるべきである。 子要素として要素<addrLine>は、クラスmodel.addrPartにある要素の代わりとして、例えば、要素<street>や要素 <postcode>として使用することができる。

Dieses Element sollte ausschließlich für postalische Addressen verwendet werden. Innerhalb des Elements kann das generische <addrLine>-Element als Alternative zu den spezielleren Elementen aus der model.addrPart-Klasse, wie <street> (Straße), <postCode> (Postleitzahl), etc. verwendet werden.

3.6.2. Addresses 2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc. 3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information

<addrLine>
address line
주소 행
dirección
ligne d'adresse
riga dell'indirizzo
Adresszeile
contains one line of a postal address.
우편 주소의 한 행을 포함한다.
包含郵寄地址或其他地址其的一行。
住所情報を記述する行を示す。
contient une ligne d'adresse postale.
contiene una línea de la dirección postal.
contiene una riga di un indirizzo (postale).
enthält eine Zeile einer Postadresse.
white-space: nowrap;

<address>
  <addrLine>Computing Center, MC 135</addrLine>
  <addrLine>P.O. Box 6998</addrLine>
  <addrLine>Chicago, IL</addrLine>
  <addrLine>60680 USA</addrLine>
</address>

<addrLine>
  <ref target="tel:+1-201-555-0123">(201) 555 0123</ref>
</addrLine>

<address>
  <addrLine>44, avenue de la Libération</addrLine>
  <addrLine>B.P. 30687</addrLine>
  <addrLine>F 54063 NANCY CEDEX</addrLine>
  <addrLine>FRANCE</addrLine>
</address>

<address>
  <addrLine> 276號4樓</addrLine>
  <addrLine>光明路</addrLine>
  <addrLine>北投區，台北市11246</addrLine>
  <addrLine>台灣，中華民國</addrLine>
</address>

Addresses may be encoded either as a sequence of lines, or using any sequence of component elements from the model.addrPart class. Other non-postal forms of address, such as telephone numbers or email, should not be included within an <address> element directly but may be wrapped within an <addrLine> if they form part of the printed address in some source text.

Les adresses peuvent être encodées soit comme une suite de lignes, soit en utilisant un jeu d'éléments de la classe model.addrPart. Les types d'adresses autres que l'adresse postale, tels que les numéros de téléphone, les courriels, ne doivent pas être inclus directement à l'intérieur d'un élément <address> mais peuvent être contenus dans un élément <addrLine> s'ils font partie de l'adresse imprimée dans un texte source.

住所情報は、複数の行から構成されるか、クラスmodel.addrPartにある要素から構成されているかもしれない。住所情報で、郵便配達には関連しない、例えば電話番号や電子メールアドレスについては、ここに直接は記述すべきではない。しかし、印刷物にこれらが住所情報として含まれている場合には、要素<addrLine>を使い記述することはできる。

Adressen können entweder als eine Abfolge von Zeilen kodiert werden oder als eine beliebige Folge von Elementen der model.addrPart-Klasse. Andere, nicht-postalische Formen von Adressen, wie z. B. Telefonnummern oder E-Mail-Adressen, dürfen nicht direkt in ein <address>-Element eingeschlossen werden, sondern müssen innerhalb eines <addrLine>-Elements kodiert werden, wenn sie Teil einer gedruckten Adresse in einer Textvorlage sind.

3.6.2. Addresses 2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc. 3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information

<anchor>
anchor point
앵커 지점
錨點
point d'ancrage
punto de anclaje
punto di ancoraggio
Ankerpunkt
アンカーポイント
attaches an identifier to a point within a text, whether or not it corresponds with a textual element.
텍스트적 요소와의 일치여부와 상관없이 텍스트 내의 특정 지점에 확인소를 부착한다.
在文件中某一位置附上識別符碼，無論該位置是否符合一個文字性元素。
テキスト中のある地点に対して識別子を付与する。テキスト要素と対応するかは問われない。
attache un identifiant à un point du texte, que ce point corresponde ou non à un élément textuel.
enlanza un indentificador con una posición al interno del texto, independientemente del hecho que esta corresponda o no a un elemento textual.
aggancia un indentificatore a una posizione all'interno del testo indipendentemente dal fatto che questa corrisponda o meno a un elemento testuale
fügt an einer Stelle im Text eine Kennung ein, unabhängig von der Textstruktur.

<s>The anchor is he<anchor xml:id="A234"/>re somewhere.</s>
<s>Help me find it.<ptr target="#A234"/>
   </s>

<s>L'ancre est i<anchor xml:id="fr_A234"/>ci quelque part.</s>
<s>Aidez-moi à la trouver.<ptr target="#fr_A234"/>
   </s>

<s>此錨點指向這<anchor xml:id="zh-tw_A234"/>裡</s>
<s>請搜尋此處<ptr target="#zh-tw_A234"/>
   </s>

On this element, the global @xml:id attribute must be supplied to specify an identifier for the point at which this element occurs within a document. The value used may be chosen freely provided that it is unique within the document and is a syntactically valid name. There is no requirement for values containing numbers to be in sequence.

Il faut donner à cet élément un attribut global @xml:id afin de spécifier un identifiant pour le point où l'élément intervient dans un document TEI. La valeur utilisée peut être choisie librement, pourvu qu'elle soit unique dans le document TEI et que le nom soit syntaxiquement valide. Les valeurs contenant des nombres ne doivent pas nécessairement former une séquence.

当該要素において、グローバル属性@xml:idの値としてIDを付 与する必要がある。この値は、該当する文書中でユニークであり、かつ統語 上妥当な名前であれば、自由に決めてよい。必ずしも連続する番号を振る必 要はない。

In diesem Element muss das globale @xml:id-Attribut gesetzt werden, um eine Kennung für genau diese Stelle innerhalb des Dokuments angeben zu können. Der Wert kann frei gewählt werden, solange er innerhalb des Dokuments eindeutig ist und es sich um einen syntaktisch validen Namen handelt. Werden innerhalb des @xml:id-Attributs Zahlen verwendet, müssen die Werte nicht sequenziell verwendet werden.

8.4.2. Synchronization and Overlap 16.5. Correspondence and Alignment

<argument>
argument
argument
contains a formal list or prose description of the topics addressed by a subdivision of a text.
텍스트의 하위 구역에서 서술된 주제에 대한 형식적 목록 또는 산문체 기술
規則列表或文字敘述，說明文本分段內容包含的主題。
下位部分にあるテキストのトピックを整形のリストまたは散文説明を含む。
liste formelle ou description en texte libre des sujets traités dans une subdivision d’un texte
beinhaltet eine systematische Aufzählung oder eine Prosabeschreibung der Themen, die in einem Unterabschnitt des Textes behandelt werden.
lista formal o descripción de los argumentos contenidos en una sección de texto.
lista formale o descrizione degli argomenti contenuti in una sezione di testo
margin-bottom: 0.5em;

<argument>
  <l>With ſighs and tears her love he doth deſire,</l>
  <l>Since Cupid hath his ſenſes ſet on fire;</l>
  <l>His torment and his pain to her he ſhews,</l>
  <l>With all his proteſtations and his vows:</l>
  <l>At laſt ſhe yields to grant him ſome relief,</l>
  <l>And make him joyful after all his grief.</l>
</argument>

4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions 4.6. Title Pages

<author>
author
autor/a
auteur
Autor
in a bibliographic reference, contains the name(s) of an author, personal or corporate, of a work; for example in the same form as that provided by a recognized bibliographic name authority.
참고문헌에 작가, 단독 저자, 공동 저자의 이름을 포함한다; 서지 항목의 책임에 관한 1차적 진술.
在書目參照中，包含一件作品的作者 (群) 姓名，無論是個人或是團體性質；這也是書目項目責任歸屬的主要陳述。
書誌情報における、著作者(個人・団体)の名前を示す。書誌項目における歴 任者を示す第一位の記述を示す。
dans une référence bibliographique contient le nom de la (des) personne(s) physique(s) ou du collectif, auteur(s) d'une oeuvre ; par exemple dans la même forme que celle utilisée par une référence bibliographique reconnue.
en una referencia bibliográfica, contiene el nombre del autor/a/es, ya sea una persona o una institución, de una obra; por ejemplo, en la misma forma que la proporcionada por una autoridad bibliográfica reconocida.
in un riferimento bibliografico contiene il nome dell'autore (o degli autori), personale o collettivo, di un'opera; è la dichiarazione di responsabilità primaria di ciascuna unità bibliografica.
enthält in einer bibliografischen Referenz den oder die Namen eines Autors eines Werks (oder einer für das Werk verantwortlichen Körperschaft); zum Beispiel in der Form, wie sie eine anerkannte bibliografische Instanz anbietet.

<author>British Broadcasting Corporation</author>
<author>La Fayette, Marie Madeleine Pioche de la Vergne, comtesse de (1634–1693)</author>
<author>Anonymous</author>
<author>Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation</author>
<author><persName>Beaumont, Francis</persName> and
<persName>John Fletcher</persName>
   </author>
<author><orgName key="BBC">British Broadcasting
Corporation</orgName>: Radio 3 Network</author>

<author>La Fayette, Marie Madeleine Pioche de la Vergne, comtesse de (1634–1693)</author>
<author>Anonyme</author>
<author> Erckmann-Chatrian</author>
<author>
  <orgName key="ARTE">Association relative à la télévision européenne</orgName>
</author>

<author>中央日報</author>
<author>中央通訊社董事長馬星野</author>

Particularly where cataloguing is likely to be based on the content of the header, it is advisable to use a generally recognized name authority file to supply the content for this element. The attributes @key or @ref may also be used to reference canonical information about the author(s) intended from any appropriate authority, such as a library catalogue or online resource.

In the case of a broadcast, use this element for the name of the company or network responsible for making the broadcast.

Where an author is unknown or unspecified, this element may contain text such as Unknown or Anonymous. When the appropriate TEI modules are in use, it may also contain detailed tagging of the names used for people, organizations or places, in particular where multiple names are given.

En particular, cuando es probable que la catalogación se base en el contenido del encabezado, se recomienda utilizar una autoridad bibliográfica de nombres generalmente reconocida para proporcionar el contenido de este elemento. Los atributos @key o @ref también se pueden usar para hacer referencia a información canónica sobre el/la autor/a o autores procedente de cualquier autoridad apropiada, como un catálogo de biblioteca o un recurso en línea. En el caso de una retransmisión, este elemento debe usarse para el nombre de la empresa o cadena responsable de realizar dicha retransmisión. Cuando se desconoce o no se especifica un/a autor/a, este elemento puede contener texto como Desconocido/a o Anónimo. Cuando se utilizan los módulos TEI apropiados, también puede contener etiquetas detalladas de los nombres utilizados para personas, organizaciones o lugares, en particular cuando se proporcionan varios nombres.

Il est conseillé d'utiliser des listes d'autorité reconnues pour trouver la forme exacte des noms de personnes, en particulier lorsque le catalogage repose sur le contenu de l'en-tête TEI. Les attributs @key ou @ref seront aussi employés pour donner une référence canonique documentant l'auteur concerné grâce à une autorité appropriée, comme le catalogue d'une bibliothèque ou une ressource en ligne.

Dans le cas d'une émission, cet élément sert à encoder le nom de la société ou du réseau qui diffuse le programme.

書誌情報を当該ヘダーに収録する場合、個人名の正確な記述を、一般に理 解可能な著者リストとして使用した方がよい。

放送の場合、当該要素は会社や放送局の名前として使用される。

Insbesondere wenn eine Katalogisierung auf Basis des TEI-Headers erfolgen soll, ist es ratsam einen Namen aus einer annerkannten Normdatei zu verwenden. Die Attribute @key und @ref können außerdem benutzt werden, um auf kanonische Informationen über einen Autor zu verweisen, etwa in einem Bibliothekskatalog oder einer Online-Ressource.

Im Fall von Rundfunksendungen sollte dies Element benutzt werden, um den Namen der Firma oder der Sendergruppe zu notieren, welche diese Rundfunksendung verantwortet.

Wo ein Autor unbekannt oder nicht angegeben ist, kann dieses Element Text wie z. B. Unbekannt oder Nicht angegeben beinhalten. Wenn die entsprechenden TEI-Module benutzt werden, kann das Element auch detaillierte Auszeichnungen für Namen von Personen, Organisationen oder Orten beinhalten - insbesondere wenn mehrere Namen vorhanden sind.

3.12.2.2. Titles, Authors, and Editors 2.2.1. The Title Statement

<back>
back matter
후면부 내용
正文後資訊
texte annexe
Nachspann (back)
paratexto final
peritesto finale
contains any appendixes, etc. following the main part of a text.
텍스트의 주요부 뒤에 오는 부록 등을 포함한다.
在正文之後，包含附錄等。
後付。本文の後に続く付録などを示す。
contient tout supplément placé après la partie principale d'un texte : appendice, etc.
enthält Anhänge jeglicher Art, die auf den Hauptteil eines Textes folgen.
contiene cualquier tipo de apéndice, etc. que aparece detrás del texto.
contiene qualsiasi appendice che segua il testo vero e proprio

<back>
  <div type="appendix">
    <head>The Golden Dream or, the Ingenuous Confession</head>
    <p>TO shew the Depravity of human Nature, and how apt the Mind is to be misled by Trinkets
    and false Appearances, Mrs. Two-Shoes does acknowledge, that after she became rich, she
    had like to have been, too fond of Money
    </p>
  </div>

  <div type="epistle">
    <head>A letter from the Printer, which he desires may be inserted</head>
    <salute>Sir.</salute>
    <p>I have done with your Copy, so you may return it to the Vatican, if you please;

    </p>
  </div>
  <div type="advert">
    <head>The Books usually read by the Scholars of Mrs Two-Shoes are these and are sold at Mr
    Newbery's at the Bible and Sun in St Paul's Church-yard.</head>
    <list>
      <item n="1">The Christmas Box, Price 1d.</item>
      <item n="2">The History of Giles Gingerbread, 1d.</item>

      <item n="42">A Curious Collection of Travels, selected from the Writers of all Nations,
      10 Vol, Pr. bound 1l.</item>
    </list>
  </div>
  <div type="advert">
    <head>By the KING's Royal Patent, Are sold by J. NEWBERY, at the Bible and Sun in St.
    Paul's Church-Yard.</head>
    <list>
      <item n="1">Dr. James's Powders for Fevers, the Small-Pox, Measles, Colds, &amp;c. 2s.
      6d</item>
      <item n="2">Dr. Hooper's Female Pills, 1s.</item>

    </list>
  </div>
</back>

<back>
  <div n="1" type="appendice">
    <head>APPENDICE I </head>
    <head>CHAPITRE XV bis </head>
    <p>Des cruautez exercées par les Turcs, et autres peuples : et nommément par les
    Espagnols, beaucoup plus barbares que les Sauvages mesmes </p>
    <p>Premierement Chalcondile en son histoire de la decadence de l'Empire des Grecs, ...</p>
  </div>
  <div n="2" type="appendice">
    <head> Appendice 2</head>
    <head>Advertissement de l'autheur</head>
    <p>Outre les augmentations bien amples, et la revision beaucoup plus exacte que je n'avoye
    fait és precedentes Editions, j'ai pour le contentement des Lecteurs, plusieurs endroits
    de ceste quatrieme et derniere monstré ...</p>
  </div>
</back>

<back>
  <div1 type="appendix">
    <head>臺灣現代詩論戰史資料彙編</head>
    <p>現代詩論戰史第一階段</p>
  </div1>
  <div1 type="epistle">
    <head>白先勇致瘂弦洛夫</head>
    <salute>您好，</salute>
    <p>您的副本我已使用完畢，可以歸還了，麻煩您。</p>
  </div1>
  <div1 type="advert">
    <head>本論文提及的專書，可於台灣各大書店詢問訂購。</head>
    <list>
      <item n="1">陳芳明《詩與現實》，台北：洪範，1983。</item>
      <item n="2">洛夫《詩人之鏡》，台北：大業，1969。</item>
      <item n="42">廖炳惠《回顧現代》，台北：麥田，1994。</item>
    </list>
  </div1>
  <div1 type="advert">
    <head><hi rend="center">詩集、詩選</hi>也可於網路書店購得。</head>
    <list>
      <item n="1">余光中《天狼星》，台北：洪範，1976。</item>
      <item n="2">席慕蓉著《無怨的青春》，台北，大地，1983。</item>
    </list>
  </div1>
</back>

Because cultural conventions differ as to which elements are grouped as back matter and which as front matter, the content models for the <back> and <front> elements are identical.

Le modèle de contenu de l'élément <back> est identique à celui de l'élément <front>, ce qui permet de rendre compte de pratiques éditoriales qui ont évolué avec l'histoire culturelle.

後付の内容モデルは、文化的背景によっては、前付に相当するものになる。

Aufgrund von unterschiedlichen kulturellen Konventionen, die Angaben in Vorspann und Nachspann betreffend, sind die Inhaltsmodelle für die Elemente <front> und <back> identisch.

4.7. Back Matter 4. Default Text Structure

<bibl>
bibliographic citation
서지 인용
書目資料
référence bibliographique.
cita bibliográfica.
citazione bibliografica
bibliografische Angabe
contains a loosely-structured bibliographic citation of which the sub-components may or may not be explicitly tagged.
하위 성분이 명시적으로 구분된 또는 그렇지 않은 덜 구조화된 서지 인용을 포함한다.
包含結構零散的書目資料，其中次要元件不一定會明確標記。
厳密でない構造を持つ書誌情報の引用を含む。下位要素で明示されていたり、 いなかったりする。
contient une référence bibliographique faiblement structurée dans laquelle les sous-composants peuvent ou non être explicitement balisés.
contiene una cita bibliográfica estructurada libremente, los componentes de la cual pueden nohaber sido etiquetados explícitamente.
contiene una citazione bibliografica strutturata liberamente i cui componeneti potrebbero o meno essere codificati esplicitamente.
enthält eine lose strukturierte bibliografische Angabe, in der einzelne Komponenten explizit ausgezeichnet sein können.
Element "" may not be empty.

<epigraph>
  <bibl>Deut. Chap. 5.</bibl>
  <q>11 Thou ſhalt not take the name of the Lord thy God in vaine, for the Lord
    will not hold him guiltleſſe which ſhall take his name in vaine.</q>
</epigraph>

Contains phrase-level elements, together with any combination of elements from the model.biblPart class

Cet élément contient des éléments de type expression, ainsi qu'un jeu d'éléments de la classe model.biblPart.

model.biblPartで規定された要素と共に、句レベルの要素を示す。

Enthält Phrasen-Level-Elemente, zusammen mit einer beliebigen Kombination von Elementen der model.biblPart-Klasse

3.12.1. Methods of Encoding Bibliographic References and Lists of References 2.2.7. The Source Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<biblScope>
scope of bibliographic reference
인용 범위
書目引用範圍
extension d'une référence bibliographique
extensión de una cita
estensione del riferimento bibliografico
Geltungsbereich einer bibliografischen Referenz
defines the scope of a bibliographic reference, for example as a list of page numbers, or a named subdivision of a larger work.
예를 들어 페이지수의 목록 또는 작품의 이름 붙은 하위 성분으로, 문헌 참조의 범위를 정의한다.
標明書目參照資訊的範圍，例如標示頁碼列表、或是某著作的分支作品名稱。
書誌情報の参照範囲を示す。例えば、ページ番号、下部単位の名前など。
définit l'extension d'une référence bibliographique, comme par exemple une liste de numéros de page, ou le nom d'une subdivision d'une oeuvre plus grande.
define la extensión de una referencia bibliográfica, como por ejemplo los números de página u otra subdivisión numerada en la obra mayor.
definisce l'estensione di un riferimento bibliografico, per esempio mediante una lista di numeri di pagina, o il titolo di una parte di un'opera più ampia.
grenzt den Geltungsbereich einer bibliografischen Referenz ein, zum Beispiel in Form von Seitenangaben oder benannten Unterabschnitten eines umfangreicheren Werks.

<biblScope>pp 12–34</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="page" from="12" to="34"/>
<biblScope unit="volume">II</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="page">12</biblScope>

<biblScope>pp 12–34</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="page" from="12" to="34"/>
<biblScope unit="volume">II</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="page">12</biblScope>

<biblScope>頁數 12–34</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="頁數" from="12" to="34"/>
<biblScope unit="冊">II</biblScope>
<biblScope unit="頁數">12</biblScope>

When a single page is being cited, use the @from and @to attributes with an identical value. When no clear endpoint is provided, the @from attribute may be used without @to; for example a citation such as p. 3ff might be encoded <biblScope from="3">p. 3ff</biblScope>.

It is now considered good practice to supply this element as a sibling (rather than a child) of <imprint>, since it supplies information which does not constitute part of the imprint.

Wird nur eine einzelne Seite zitiert, erhalten die Attribute @from und @to identische Werte. Gibt es keinen klaren Endpunkt, sollte nur das @from-Attribut ohne korrespondierendes @to-Attribut verwendet werden, zum Beispiel könnte ein Zitat wie S. 3ff. als <biblScope from="3">p. 3ff</biblScope> kodiert werden.

Es wird nun als gute Praxis angesehen, dieses Element als Geschwisterelement (anstatt eines Kindelements) von <imprint> anzugeben, da es Informationen enthält, die nicht Teil des Impressums sind.

3.12.2.5. Scopes and Ranges in Bibliographic Citations

<body>
text body
텍스트 본문
正文
corps du texte
Textkörper
cuerpo del texto
corpo del testo
contains the whole body of a single unitary text, excluding any front or back matter.
전면부 또는 후면부 자료를 배제한 단일 텍스트의 전체 본문을 포함한다.
單篇文章的整體部分，不包含正文前及正文後資訊。
前付、後付を除いた、単一の作品の本文全体を示す。
contient la totalité du corps d’un seul texte simple, à l’exclusion de toute partie pré- ou post-liminaire.
enthält den gesamten Textkörper eines eigenständigen Textes, außer den Vorspann (front) und Nachspann (back).
contiene el cuerpo completo de un texto unitario, excluyendo los eventuales añadidos paratextuales (prólogos, dedicatorias, apéndices, etc.) al inicio o fin de un texto.
contiene l'intero corpo di un testo unitario, esclusi eventuale peritesto iniziale e finale

<body>
  <l>Nu scylun hergan hefaenricaes uard</l>
  <l>metudæs maecti end his modgidanc</l>
  <l>uerc uuldurfadur sue he uundra gihuaes</l>
  <l>eci dryctin or astelidæ</l>
  <l>he aerist scop aelda barnum</l>
  <l>heben til hrofe haleg scepen.</l>
  <l>tha middungeard moncynnæs uard</l>
  <l>eci dryctin æfter tiadæ</l>
  <l>firum foldu frea allmectig</l>
  <trailer>primo cantauit Cædmon istud carmen.</trailer>
</body>

4. Default Text Structure

<byline>
byline
mention de responsabilité
Verfasserzeile
contains the primary statement of responsibility given for a work on its title page or at the head or end of the work.
제목 페이지 또는 작품의 시작부 또는 종료부에서 작품 책임성에 대한 주요 진술을 포함한다.
包含作品的主要責任陳述，出現在題名頁或作品開頭或結尾處。
タイトルページや作品の冒頭や最後にある、作品の責任者を表す第一位の記述。
indique la responsabilité principale pour une œuvre donnée sur la page de titre ou au début ou à la fin de l’œuvre.
enthält Angaben zur Hauptverantwortlichkeit eines Werks, entweder auf der Titelseite oder am Anfang oder Ende des Werks.
contiene la declaración principal de responsabilidad de una obra tal y como aparece en su título correspondiente, o al inicio o fin de la obra.
contiene la principale dichiarazione di responsabilità per un'opera così come appare sul corrispondente frontespizio oppure all'inizio o alla fine dell'opera stessa

      <byline>Written by a CITIZEN who continued all the
while in London. Never made publick before.</byline>

<byline>écrit par Costals sur le feuillet blanc de cette lettre : " cette correspondance n'
    était pour vous qu' un jeu. "</byline>

<byline>extraits de Villoison et de Schlegel. Commencé la rédaction du quatrième
  livre.</byline>

<byline>Reportage céleste de notre envoyé spécial au paradis</byline>

<dateline>Zagreb :</dateline>
<byline>de notre envoyé spécial.</byline>

<byline>Par le docteur <docAuthor>Martin Becanus</docAuthor>, au tome troisiesme de ses
    opuscules</byline>

<byline>由一個倫敦土生土長的市民撰寫，先前未曾出版過。</byline>

<byline>錄自她自己的回憶錄</byline>

<byline>來自華盛頓的政治編輯喬治．瓊斯</byline>

<dateline>重慶:</dateline>
<byline>外交使節專用</byline>

<byline>源自美國哥倫比亞大學博士<docAuthor>胡適</docAuthor>
   </byline>

<byline>Written from her own MEMORANDUMS</byline>

<byline>By George Jones, Political Editor, in Washington</byline>

      <byline>BY
<docAuthor>THOMAS PHILIPOTT,</docAuthor>
Master of Arts,
(Somtimes)
Of Clare-Hall in Cambridge.</byline>

The byline on a title page may include either the name or a description for the document's author. Where the name is included, it may optionally be tagged using the <docAuthor> element.

La mention de reponsabilité sur une page de titre peut inclure, soit le nom, soit la description de l'auteur d'un document. Lorsque le nom y est donné, on peut éventuellement l'encoder au moyen de l'élément <docAuthor>.

タイトルページにある署名欄には、当該文書の作者名や説明があるかもしれない。作者名がある場合、要素<docAuthor>を使い符号化してもよい。

Die Verfasserzeile auf einer Titelseite kann entweder den Namen oder die Beschreibung des Dokumentautors enthalten. Wenn der Name angegeben wird, kann er optional mit dem <docAuthor>-Element ausgezeichnet werden.

4.2.2. Openers and Closers 4.5. Front Matter

<c>
character
문자(글자)
文字符號
caractère
carácter
carattere
represents a character.
문자(글자)를 표시한다.
表示一個文字符號。
文字を示す。
représente un caractère
representa un carácter gráfico.
rappresenta il carattere

<phr>
  <c>M</c>
  <c>O</c>
  <c>A</c>
  <c>I</c>
  <w>doth</w>
  <w>sway</w>
  <w>my</w>
  <w>life</w>
</phr>

<c type="punctuation">?</c>

<c type="標點符號">?</c>

Contains a single character, a <g> element, or a sequence of graphemes to be treated as a single character. The @type attribute is used to indicate the function of this segmentation, taking values such as "letter", "punctuation", or "digit" etc.

Contient un seul caractère, un élément <g> ou une suite de graphèmes à traiter comme un seul caractère. L'attribut @type est utilisé pour indiquer la fonction de cette segmentation, avec des valeurs telles que "letter", "punctuation", ou "digit", etc.

文字データ。一文字、または一文字を示すエンティティであるべき。

17.1. Linguistic Segment Categories

<castGroup>
cast list grouping
배역 목록 모아 놓기
角色群組
grupo de reparto
liste de personnages
raggruppamento della lista dei personaggi
groups one or more individual <castItem> elements within a cast list.
배역 목록 내의 몇 개의 개별 castItem 요소를 모아 놓는다.
匯集角色清單中一個或多個角色項目元素。
agrupa uno o más elementos individuales del reparto (castItem).
配役リストにある、ひとつ以上の要素castItemをまとめるもの。
dans une distribution, catégorie qui rassemble un ou plusieurs personnages.
raggruppa uno o più elementi individuali castItem in una lista dei personaggi.
Insert list.

<castGroup rend="braced">
  <castItem>
    <role>Walter</role>
    <actor>Mr Frank Hall</actor>
  </castItem>
  <castItem>
    <role>Hans</role>
    <actor>Mr F.W. Irish</actor>
  </castItem>
  <roleDesc>friends of Mathias</roleDesc>
</castGroup>

<castGroup>
  <head>Messagers</head>
  <castItem><actor>Jean-Claude Islert</actor>, <actor>Michel Sausin</actor>.</castItem>
</castGroup>
<castGroup>
  <head>Servantes troyennes</head>
  <castItem><actor>Dominique Jayr</actor>, <actor>Annie Seurat</actor>,<actor> Hélène
      Augier</actor></castItem>
</castGroup>

<castGroup rend="braced">
  <castItem>
    <role>程蝶衣</role>
    <actor>張國榮</actor>
  </castItem>
  <castItem>
    <role>菊仙</role>
    <actor>鞏俐</actor>
  </castItem>
  <roleDesc>原是妓女，後嫁段小樓為妻</roleDesc>
</castGroup>

The @rend attribute may be used, as here, to indicate whether the grouping is indicated by a brace, whitespace, font change, etc.

Note that in this example the role description friends of Mathias is understood to apply to both roles equally.

L'attribut @rend peut être utilisé comme ici pour indiquer si le regroupement est indiqué par une parenthèse, un espace, un changement de police de caractère, etc.

À noter que dans cet exemple il est entendu que la description du rôle friends of Mathias (amis de Mathias) s'applique de la même façon aux deux rôles.

属性@rendは、当該グループが括弧、空白、字形の違いなどで示されていることを示す。

この例では、役に関する情報friends of Mathiasは、2つの役に同じく当てはまると理解される。

7.1.4. Cast Lists

<castItem>
cast list item
배역 목록 항목
角色項目
elemento del reparto
personnage
oggetto della lista dei personaggi
contains a single entry within a cast list, describing either a single role or a list of non-speaking roles.
배역 목록에서 하나의 배역, 또는 대사가 없는 배역 목록을 기술하는 하나의 항목을 포함한다.
包含角色清單中的一個項目，描述單一角色或無台詞角色的列表。
contiene una sola entrada dentro de la lista del reparto, describiendo un solo papel o una lista de papeles sin diálogo.
配役リスト中の各項目を示す。ひとつの役、または台詞のない役のリストになる。
dans une liste de personnages, entrée décrivant un rôle en particulier ou une liste de rôles muets.
contiene una singola voce all'interno della lista dei personaggi, descrive o un ruolo o una lista di ruoli privi di battute.
@type
characterizes the cast item.
배역 항목의 특성 기술
說明角色項目的特性。
caracteriza el elemento del reparto.
当該項目の種類を示す。
caractérise le personnage.
indica la voce della lista dei personaggi
role
"role"
the item describes a single role.
항목이 하나의 배역을 기술한다.
該項目為單一角色
el elemeto describe un único papel.
ひとつ役を示す。
l'item décrit un simple rôle.
l'oggetto descrive un solo ruolo.
"list"
the item describes a list of non-speaking roles.
항목이 대사 없는 배역 목록을 기술한다.
該項目為無台詞角色的列表
el item describe una lista de papeles sin diálogo.
科白がない役のリストを示す。
l'item décrit une liste de rôles muets
l'oggetto descrive una lista di ruoli privi di battute.
Insert item, rendered as described in parent list rendition.

<castItem>
  <role>Player</role>
  <actor>Mr Milward</actor>
</castItem>

<castItem>
  <role>Un marin</role>
  <actor>Henry Courseaux</actor>
</castItem>

<castItem type="list">Agent de police, dessinateur, serrurier, etc.</castItem>

<castItem>
  <role>段小樓</role>
  <actor>張豐毅</actor>
</castItem>

<castItem type="list">張國榮、張豐毅、鞏俐…等等</castItem>

<castItem type="list">Constables, Drawer, Turnkey, etc.</castItem>

7.1.4. Cast Lists

<castList>
cast list
배역 목록
角色清單
reparto
distribution
elenco dei personaggi
contains a single cast list or dramatis personae.
하나의 배역 목록 또는 드라마 등장인물을 포함한다.
包含單一角色名單或出場人物列表。
contiene una única lista con los personajes del reparto.
ひとつの配役リストまたは配役表を示す。
contient la distribution ou la liste des personnages.
contiene un unico elenco dei personaggio le dramatis personae.
list-style: ordered;

      <castList>
        <castGroup>
          <head rend="braced">Mendicants</head>
          <castItem>
            <role>Aafaa</role>
            <actor>Femi Johnson</actor>
          </castItem>
          <castItem>
            <role>Blindman</role>
            <actor>Femi Osofisan</actor>
          </castItem>
          <castItem>
            <role>Goyi</role>
            <actor>Wale Ogunyemi</actor>
          </castItem>
          <castItem>
            <role>Cripple</role>
            <actor>Tunji Oyelana</actor>
          </castItem>
        </castGroup>
        <castItem>
          <role>Si Bero</role>
          <roleDesc>Sister to Dr Bero</roleDesc>
          <actor>Deolo Adedoyin</actor>
        </castItem>
        <castGroup>
          <head rend="braced">Two old women</head>
          <castItem>
            <role>Iya Agba</role>
            <actor>Nguba Agolia</actor>
          </castItem>
          <castItem>
            <role>Iya Mate</role>
            <actor>Bopo George</actor>
          </castItem>
        </castGroup>
        <castItem>
          <role>Dr Bero</role>
          <roleDesc>Specialist</roleDesc>
          <actor>Nat Okoro</actor>
        </castItem>
        <castItem>
          <role>Priest</role>
          <actor>Gbenga Sonuga</actor>
        </castItem>
        <castItem>
          <role>The old man</role>
          <roleDesc>Bero's father</roleDesc>
          <actor>Dapo Adelugba</actor>
        </castItem>
      </castList>
      <stage type="mix">The action takes place in and around the home surgery of
Dr Bero, lately returned from the wars.</stage>

<div n="1">
  <head>T.N.P. 1963</head>
  <note place="foot" n="1">A la création au Festivai d'Avignon en juillet 1962, la
      distribution était légèrement différente : dans l'ordre ci-dessus : Hécube (Annie
      Monnier) ; Iris (Paule Noël) ; Hector (Daniel lvernel) ; Pâris (Jean-Louis Trintignant)
      ; Troïus (Bernard Laïk).</note>
  <castList>
    <castItem>
      <role>Andromaque</role>
      <actor>MARIA MAUBAN </actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hélène</role>
      <actor>CHRISTIANE MINAZZOLLI</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hécube</role>
      <actor>ALINE BERTRAND</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem><role> Cassandre </role>JUDITH MAGRE ANNE</castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>La Paix</role>
      <actor>DOMINIQUE VILAR</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Iris </role>
      <actor>NOELLE VINCENT</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>La petite Polyxène</role>
      <actor>CLAUDINE MAUGEY</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hector</role>
      <actor>PIERRE VANECK</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Ulysse</role>
      <actor>JEAN VILAR</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Demokos</role>
      <actor> PASCAL MAZZOTTI </actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Priam</role>
      <actor>JEAN-FRANÇOIS REMY</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Pâris</role>
      <actor>ROBERT ETCHEVERRY</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Oiax</role>
      <actor>MARIO PILAR</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Le Gabier</role>
      <actor>GEORGES GERET</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Le Géomètre</role>
      <actor>PHILIPPE AVRON</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Abnéos</role>
      <actor>LUCIEN ARNAUD</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Troïlus</role>
      <actor>MICHEL GONZALES</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Olpidès</role>
      <actor>MAURICE COUSSONNEAU</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Busiris</role>
      <actor>GEORGES RIQUIER</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Premier Vieillard</role>
      <actor>JEAN MONDAIN</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Deuxième Vieillard</role>
      <actor>LUCIEN ARNAUD</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Messagers</head>
      <castItem><actor>Bernard Laïk</actor>, <actor>Jean-Pierre Maurin</actor>.</castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Servantes troyennes</head>
      <castItem><actor>Christiane Oscar</actor>, <actor>Noëlle Vincent.</actor></castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Notables</head>
      <castItem>
        <actor>Jean-Daniel Ehrrnann</actor>
        <actor>Bernard Wawer</actor>
        <actor>Bernard Klein</actor>
      </castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Gardes grecs</head>
      <castItem><actor>Jean Dufau</actor>, <actor>Alain Deny</actor>, <actor>Jean-Jacques Leconte</actor><actor>Richard Rein</actor></castItem>
    </castGroup>
  </castList>
</div>
<div n="2">
  <head>Théâtre de la Ville 1971</head>
  <note place="foot" n="2">La pièce a été reprise au Théâtre de la Ville le 22 janvier 1971
      dans une nouvelle mise en scène de Jean Mercure, musique de Marc Wilkinson, scénographie
      et costumes Yannis Kokkos. Elle a été ensuite donnée à partir du 12 juillet dans le
      cadre du 25e Festival d'Avignon, et continuera sa carrière au Théâtre de la Ville à
      partir du 5 novembre 1971 (avec quelques modifications de distribution).</note>
  <castList>
    <castItem>
      <role>Andromaque</role>
      <actor>FRANCINE BERGE </actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hélène</role>
      <actor>ANNIE DUPEREY</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hécube</role>
      <actor>LOUISE CONTE</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role> Cassandre </role>
      <actor>ANNE DOAT</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>La Paix</role>
      <actor>JANDELINE</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Iris </role>
      <actor>ISA MERCURE</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem><role>La petite Polyxène</role><actor>CHRISTIANE SELLAM </actor> ou<actor> VANINA VINITZKY</actor>
         </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Hector</role>
      <actor>JOSE-MARIA FLOTATS</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Ulysse</role>
      <actor>MICHEL DE RE</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Demokos</role>
      <actor>MAURICE CHEVIT</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Priam</role>
      <actor>ANDRE VALTIER</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Pâris</role>
      <actor>DOMINIQUE MAURIN</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Oiax</role>
      <actor>MARCO-PERRIN</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Le Gabier</role>
      <actor>LAFLEUR</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Le Géomètre</role>
      <actor>BERNARD VERON</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Abnéos</role>
      <actor>ANGELO BARDI</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Troïlus</role>
      <actor>PHILIPPE NORMAND</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Olpidès</role>
      <actor>COUSSONNEAU</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Busiris</role>
      <actor>JEAN MERCURE</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Premier Vieillard</role>
      <actor>JEAN-MARIE BON</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Deuxième Vieillard</role>
      <actor>EUGENE BERTHIER</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Messagers</head>
      <castItem><actor>Jean-Claude Islert</actor>, <actor>Michel Sausin</actor>.</castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Servantes troyennes</head>
      <castItem><actor>Dominique Jayr</actor>, <actor>Annie Seurat</actor>,<actor> Hélène
            Augier</actor></castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castGroup>
      <head>Gardes grecs</head>
      <castItem><actor>Jacques Gaffuri</actor>, <actor>Georges Joannon</actor></castItem>
    </castGroup>
    <castItem>
      <role>Suivant de Busiris</role>
      <actor>Charles Capezzali</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>Un marin</role>
      <actor>Henry Courseaux</actor>
    </castItem>
  </castList>
</div>

<castList>
  <castGroup>
    <head rend="braced">楊延輝</head>
    <castItem>
      <role>少年楊延輝</role>
      <actor>李少春</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>中年楊延輝</role>
      <actor>周信芳</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>中年楊延輝</role>
      <actor>譚富英</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>老年楊延輝</role>
      <actor>馬連良</actor>
    </castItem>
  </castGroup>
  <castItem>
    <role>鐵鏡公主</role>
    <roleDesc>遼國公主，嫁楊延輝為妻</roleDesc>
    <actor>梅蘭芳</actor>
  </castItem>
  <castGroup>
    <head rend="braced">楊家兄弟</head>
    <castItem>
      <role>楊延昭</role>
      <actor>馬盛龍</actor>
    </castItem>
    <castItem>
      <role>楊宗保</role>
      <actor>姜妙香</actor>
    </castItem>
  </castGroup>
  <castItem>
    <role>蕭太后</role>
    <roleDesc>遼景宗耶律賢的皇后</roleDesc>
    <actor>芙蓉草</actor>
  </castItem>
  <castItem>
    <role>四夫人</role>
    <actor>高玉倩</actor>
  </castItem>
  <castItem>
    <role>佘太君</role>
    <roleDesc>楊延輝的母親</roleDesc>
    <actor>馬富祿</actor>
  </castItem>
</castList>
<stage type="mix">場景交換於遼國廷內與飛虎峽宋營之間。</stage>

7.1.4. Cast Lists 7.1. Front and Back Matter

<cb>
column beginning
열 바꿈
分段
début de colonne
inicio de columna
inizio di colonna
marks the beginning of a new column of a text on a multi-column page.
표준 참조 시스템에서 텍스트의 한 열과 다음 열 사이의 경계를 표지한다.
用標準參照系統來標明文本段落之間的分界。
テキストの段と段の境界を、標準的な参照システムにより示す。
marque le début d'une nouvelle colonne de texte sur une page multi-colonne.
indica el inicio de una nueva columna de texto en una página divida en columnas .
segna l'inizio di una nuova colonna di un testo in una pagina a più colonne.

Markup of an early English dictionary printed in two columns:

<pb/>
<cb n="1"/>
<entryFree><form>Well</form>, <sense>a Pit to hold Spring-Water</sense>:
          <sense>In the Art of <hi rend="italic">War</hi>, a Depth the Miner
              sinks into the Ground, to find out and disappoint the Enemies Mines,
              or to prepare one</sense>.</entryFree>
<entryFree>To <form>Welter</form>, <sense>to wallow</sense>, or
          <sense>lie groveling</sense>.</entryFree>

<cb n="2"/>
<entryFree><form>Wey</form>, <sense>the greatest Measure for dry Things,
              containing five Chaldron</sense>.</entryFree>
<entryFree><form>Whale</form>, <sense>the greatest of
              Sea-Fishes</sense>.</entryFree>

On this element, the global @n attribute indicates the number or other value associated with the column which follows the point of insertion of this <cb> element. Encoders should adopt a clear and consistent policy as to whether the numbers associated with column breaks relate to the physical sequence number of the column in the whole text, or whether columns are numbered within the page. The <cb> element is placed at the head of the column to which it refers.

L'attribut global @n donne un nouveau numéro ou une autre valeur à la colonne qui suit l'élément <cb>. Les encodeurs doivent faire un choix clair, et s'y tenir, entre l'option consistant à se fonder sur la séquence physique des colonnes dans le texte entier, et celle qui consiste à se fonder sur la numérotation des colonnes à l'intérieur de la page. L'élément <cb> apparaît en haut de la colonne à laquelle il se rapporte.

当該要素にあるグローバル属性@nは、当該要素<cb>があるすぐ後にある段と関連する番号等を示す。符号化する人は、テキスト全体における物理的な段の並びから示された境界を示す番号であるか、または当該ページ内で振られた番号であるのかなど、段境界に付与される番号付けには、明確で一貫した方針を採るべきである。一般的には、要素<cb>は、段落の始めに置かれる。

3.11.3. Milestone Elements

<cell>
cell
cellule
Tabellenzelle
contains one cell of a table.
하나의 테이블의 하나의 셀을 포함한다.
包含表格中的一個儲存格。
表中のひとつのセルを示す。
contient une cellule d'un tableau.
contiene una celda de una tabla.
contiene una cella di una tabella.
enthält eine Zelle einer Tabelle.
@role
"data"
data cell
"label"
label cell
"sum"
row or column sum data
"total"
table total data
Insert table cell.

<row>
  <cell role="label">General conduct</cell>
  <cell role="data">Not satisfactory, on account of his great unpunctuality
               and inattention to duties</cell>
</row>

<row>
  <cell role="label">Comportement général</cell>
  <cell role="data">Non satisfaisant, à cause de son inexactitude et de son
    inconséquence</cell>
</row>

<row>
  <cell role="label">工作評價</cell>
  <cell role="data">不滿意；因為工作拖延、粗心。</cell>
</row>

14.1.1. TEI Tables

<choice>
choice
choix
Alternative
groups a number of alternative encodings for the same point in a text.
텍스트 동일 지점에서 대체 가능한 부호화를 모아 놓는다.
匯集文件中對於同一部分文字所有可供替換的不同標記。
テキスト中の同じ場所で、異なる符号化記述をまとめる。
regroupe un certain nombre de balisages alternatifs possibles pour un même endroit dans un texte.
agrupa un número de codificaciones alternativas para el mismo punto en un texto.
raggruppa un numero di codifiche alternative per la stessa porzione di testo.
gruppiert alternative Kodierungen für eine Stelle im Text.
Element "" must have at least two child elements. Element "" must have corresponding corr/sic, expand/abbr, reg/orig

An American encoding of Gulliver's Travels which retains the British spelling but also provides a version regularized to American spelling might be encoded as follows.

<p>Lastly, That, upon his solemn oath to observe all the above
          articles, the said man-mountain shall have a daily allowance of
          meat and drink sufficient for the support of <choice><sic>1724</sic><corr>1728</corr></choice> of our subjects,
          with free access to our royal person, and other marks of our
          <choice><orig>favour</orig><reg>favor</reg></choice>.</p>

Eine Kodierung von Gulliver's Travels, die die britische Schreibweise beibehält, aber auch eine der amerikanischen Rechtschreibung entsprechende Version anbietet, kann wie folgt kodiert werden.

<p>Lastly, That, upon his solemn oath to observe all the above
  articles, the said man-mountain shall have a daily allowance of
  meat and drink sufficient for the support of <choice><sic>1724</sic><corr>1728</corr></choice> of our subjects,
  with free access to our royal person, and other marks of our
  <choice><orig>favour</orig><reg>favor</reg></choice>.</p>

L'encodage d'une édition des Essais pourra faire état à la fois des formes originales et des formes modernisées correspondantes:.

<p>Ainsi lecteur, je suis<choice><orig>moy-mesmes</orig><reg>moi-même</reg></choice> la matière de mon livre : ce n'est pas raison que tu emploies ton loisir en un <choice><orig>subject</orig><reg>sujet</reg></choice>si frivole et si vain.</p>

<p>清朝與日本為爭奪北韓半島控制權，爆發歷史上著名的甲午戰爭。 發生於清光緒二十年，西元 <choice><sic>1892</sic><corr>1894</corr></choice>年，雙方水陸大戰，傷亡者<choice><orig>衆</orig><reg>眾</reg></choice>。</p>

Because the children of a <choice> element all represent alternative ways of encoding the same sequence, it is natural to think of them as mutually exclusive. However, there may be cases where a full representation of a text requires the alternative encodings to be considered as parallel.

Note also that <choice> elements may self-nest.

Where the purpose of an encoding is to record multiple witnesses of a single work, rather than to identify multiple possible encoding decisions at a given point, the <app> element and associated elements discussed in section 12.1. The Apparatus Entry, Readings, and Witnesses should be preferred.

Parce que les éléments contenus par un élément <choice> correspondent tous à des solutions possibles pour encoder la même séquence, il est naturel de les envisager comme exclusifs les uns des autres. Toutefois il peut y avoir des cas où la pleine représentation d'un texte requiert de considérer ces encodages alternatifs comme parallèles.

A Noter aussi que les <choice> peuvent s'imbriquer.

Pour une version de <choice> spécialisée pour l'encodage de témoins multiples d'une même oeuvre, l'élément <app> peut etre préférable : voir la section 12.1. The Apparatus Entry, Readings, and Witnesses.

Porque los niños de un elemento <opción> representan las maneras alternativas de codificar la misma secuencia, es natural pensar en ellas como mutuamente exclusivas. Sin embargo, puede haber casos donde una representación completa de un texto requiera que las codificaciones alternativas sean consideradas como paralelas.

Se Observa también que los elementos <opción> pueden ser uno mismo-jerarquía.

Para una versión especializada de la <opción> para codificar los testimonios múltiples de un único trabajo, ver la sección 12.1. The Apparatus Entry, Readings, and Witnesses.

要素<choice>の子要素は全て、選択的な符号化方法を示している。従って、それらは互いに排他的であるとするのが自然である。けれども、並列的に符号化されていると考えられる場合もあるだろう。

要素<choice>は、入れ子化できることにも注意して欲しい。

1つの作品にある複数の現存資料を要素<choice>符号化することについては、12.1. The Apparatus Entry, Readings, and Witnessesを参照のこと。

Da die Kindelemente des <choice>-Elements alternative Kodierungsmöglichkeiten der selben Textstelle repräsentieren, ist es naheliegend, sie als sich gegenseitig ausschließend zu betrachten. Es sind jedoch Fälle vorstellbar, in der Kodierungsalternativen als Kodierungsparallelen verstanden werden müssen, um den Text vollständig zu repräsentieren.

Man beachte außerdem, dass <choice>-Elemente weitere <choice>-Elemente als Kindelemente enthalten können.

In Fällen, in denen nicht mehrere mögliche Kodierungsvarianten, sondern Varianten aus mehreren Zeugen eines Werkes kodiert werden sollen, sind das <app>-Element und dazu gehörige Elemente, die im Abschnitt 12.1. The Apparatus Entry, Readings, and Witnesses erläutert werden, zu bevorzugen.

3.5. Simple Editorial Changes

<cit>
cited quotation
참조 인용
cita
citation
citazione
Zitat mit Referenz
contains a quotation from some other document, together with a bibliographic reference to its source. In a dictionary it may contain an example text with at least one occurrence of the word form, used in the sense being described, or a translation of the headword, or an example.
원문 참고문헌과 함께 제시된 다른 문서로부터의 인용을 포함한다. 사전에서는 기술된 의미로 사용된 어형이 들어간 용례, 또는 표제어의 번역어 또는 예문을 포함할 수 있다.
從其他文件中引用的內容，並包含引用來源的書目參照資料。
書誌参照を伴い、他の文書からの引用を示す。例えば、辞書の場合には、当該単語形が出現する例文を示したり、当該見出し語の翻訳や用例を示した りする。
citation provenant d'un autre document comprenant la référence bibliographique de sa source. Dans un dictionnaire il peut contenir un exemple avec au moins une occurrence du mot employé dans l’acception qui est décrite, ou une traduction du mot-clé, ou un exemple.
Una cita de algún otro documento junto a la referencia bibliográfica a la fuente.
Un acitazione da un altro documento accompagnata da riferimenti bibliografici alla fonte.
enthält ein Zitat aus einem anderen Dokument, zusammen mit einer bibliografischen Referenz auf die Quelle. In einem Wörterbuch kann es ein Beispieltext mit mindestens einem Vorkommen der Wortform enthalten, welches in dem beschriebenen Sinne verwendet wird, oder eine Übersetzung des Lemmas, oder ein Beispiel.
Insert citation

<cit>
  <quote>and the breath of the whale is frequently attended with such an insupportable smell,
    as to bring on disorder of the brain.</quote>
  <bibl>Ulloa's South America</bibl>
</cit>

<cit>
  <quote>Regarde de tous tes yeux, regarde</quote>
  <bibl>Jules Verne, Michel Strogof</bibl>
</cit>

<entry>
  <form>
    <orth>to horrify</orth>
  </form>
  <cit type="translation" xml:lang="en">
    <quote>horrifier</quote>
  </cit>
  <cit type="example">
    <quote>she was horrified at the expense.</quote>
    <cit type="translation" xml:lang="en">
      <quote>elle était horrifiée par la dépense.</quote>
    </cit>
  </cit>
</entry>

<cit>
  <quote>棋開始了。上千人不再出聲兒。只有自願服務的人一會兒緊一會兒慢地用話傳出棋步，外邊兒自願服務的人就變動著棋子兒。</quote>
  <bibl>阿城，《棋王》。</bibl>
</cit>

<entry>
  <form>
    <orth>horrifier</orth>
  </form>
  <cit type="translation" xml:lang="zh">
    <quote>使驚嚇</quote>
  </cit>
  <cit type="example">
    <quote>elle était horrifiée par la dépense</quote>
    <cit type="translation" xml:lang="zh">
      <quote>成本把她嚇呆了。</quote>
    </cit>
  </cit>
</entry>

<entry>
  <form>
    <orth>horrifier</orth>
  </form>
  <cit type="translation" xml:lang="en">
    <quote>to horrify</quote>
  </cit>
  <cit type="example">
    <quote>elle était horrifiée par la dépense</quote>
    <cit type="translation" xml:lang="en">
      <quote>she was horrified at the expense.</quote>
    </cit>
  </cit>
</entry>

<cit type="example">
  <quote xml:lang="mix">Ka'an yu tsa'a Pedro.</quote>
  <media url="soundfiles-gen:S_speak_1s_on_behalf_of_Pedro_01_02_03_TS.wav" mimeType="audio/wav"/>
  <cit type="translation">
    <quote xml:lang="en">I'm speaking on behalf of Pedro.</quote>
  </cit>
  <cit type="translation">
    <quote xml:lang="es">Estoy hablando de parte de Pedro.</quote>
  </cit>
</cit>

3.3.3. Quotation 4.3.1. Grouped Texts 9.3.5.1. Examples

<closer>
closer
cierre
formule finale
groups together salutations, datelines, and similar phrases appearing as a final group at the end of a division, especially of a letter.
구역의 마지막, 특히 편지의 종료부에 발문으로 나타나는 인사말, 날짜 표시란, 그리고 유사 구를 합하여 모아 놓는다.
匯集日期地點、署名、稱呼語、及其他在區段結尾出現的類似措辭，尤指信件結尾。
挨拶文言、日付欄など、ある区分の終わり、特に手紙の終わりにある一連の 文言をまとめる。
regroupe une formule de politesse, une indication d'une date et d'autres expressions semblables figurant comme expression à la fin d’une division, en particulier à la fin d’une lettre.
fasst Grußformeln, Datumszeilen und ähnliche Phrasen zusammen, die am Ende eines Abschnitts stehen, vor allem bei einem Brief.
agrupa saludos, fechas, y expresiones similares que aparecen en la última sección al final de una división, especialmente en una carta.
raggruppa dateline, byline, formule conclusive o di saluto ed espressioni simili utilizzate alla fine di una partizione, soprattutto in una lettera
margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-left: 1em;

<div type="letter">
  <p> perhaps you will favour me with a sight of it when convenient.</p>
  <closer>
    <salute>I remain, &amp;c. &amp;c.</salute>
    <signed>H. Colburn</signed>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="letter">
  <p> N'y voyez que le signe de l'intérêt que je que je porte à une profession qui fut la
      mienne. Je désire en effet, insérer votre article dans un ouvrage sur la presse
      française contemporaine. </p>
  <closer>
    <salute>Veuillez agréer, je vous prie, Monsieur, l'assurance de mes sentiments les
        meilleurs. </salute>
    <signed> Françoise Giroud</signed>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="chapter">
  <p>Voilà, cher Rhedi, ce que j' appelle le droit public. Voilà le droit des gens, ou
      plutôt celui de la raison. </p>
  <closer>
    <dateline><name type="place">à Paris </name>, <date>le 4 de la lune de Zilhagé, 1716. </date></dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="letter">
  <p> 不久，我們就能再見面。</p>
  <closer>
    <salute>祝事事順心</salute>
    <signed>謝甯</signed>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="chapter">
  <p> 自己想吃人，又怕被別人吃了，都用著疑心极深的眼光，面面相覷。…… </p>
  <closer>
    <dateline>
      <name type="place">南京</name>
      <date>1918–1919</date>
    </dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="chapter">
  <p> and his heart was going like mad and yes I said yes I will Yes.</p>
  <closer>
    <dateline>
      <name type="place">Trieste-Zürich-Paris,</name>
      <date>1914–1921</date>
    </dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

4.2.2. Openers and Closers 4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

<code>
contains literal code from some formal language such as a programming language.
프로그래밍 언어와 같은 형식 언어의 문자적 부호를 포함한다.
包含一個正式語言的字母代碼，像是一個程式語言。
プログラミング言語のような形式言語のコードを示す。
contient un code littéral provenant d'un langage formel, comme un langage de programmation.
contiene un código alfabético que se deriva de un lenguaje formal, p.ej. un lenguaje de programación.
contiene un codice alfabetico derivante da un linguaggio formale, per esempio un linguaggio di programmazione
@lang
formal language
형식 언어
lenguaje formal
langage formel
linguaggio formale
a name identifying the formal language in which the code is expressed
부호가 표현된 형식 언어를 식별하는 이름
表示該代碼的正式語言名稱
当該コードの形式言語名を示す。
nom identifiant le langage formel dans lequel le code est exprimé
es el nombre que identifica el lenguaje formal en el que se expresa el código.
è il nome che identifica il linguaggio formale nel quale viene espresso il codice
font-family:monospace

      <code lang="JAVA">
       Size fCheckbox1Size = new Size();
       fCheckbox1Size.Height = 500;
       fCheckbox1Size.Width = 500;
       xCheckbox1.setSize(fCheckbox1Size);
</code>

22.1.1. Phrase Level Terms

<corr>
correction
정정
更正
corrección
correzione
Korrektur
contains the correct form of a passage apparently erroneous in the copy text.
복사된 텍스트에서 오류로 보이는 단락의 정정 형식을 포함한다.
包含文本中看似錯誤並加以更正過後的文字。
元資料中の明らかな間違いを正したものを示す。
contient la forme correcte d'un passage qui est considéré erroné dans la copie du texte.
contiene la forma correcta de un pasaje aparentemente erróneo en el texto de copia.
enthält die korrekte Form einer offenbar fehlerhaften Textstelle in der Vorlage.
simple inline, if in parent choice. content: '['; content: ']';

If all that is desired is to call attention to the fact that the copy text has been corrected, <corr> may be used alone:

I don't know,
Juan. It's so far in the past now — how <corr>can we</corr> prove
or disprove anyone's theories?

Wenn es nur darum geht, darauf hinzuweisen, dass die Textvorlage korrigiert wurde, kann das <corr>-Element auch allein verwendet werden:

I don't know,
Juan. It's so far in the past now — how <corr>can we</corr> prove
or disprove anyone's theories?

Si l'on veut mettre l'accent sur le fait que le texte a été corrigé, <corr> seul sera employé:

Tel est le
    chat Rutterkin des sorcières Margaret et Filippa Flower, qui
furent <corr>brûlées</corr> à Lincoln, le 11 mars 1619, pour avoir envoûté un parent du comte de
  Rutland.

Il est aussi possible d'associer <choice> et<sic>, pour donner une lecture incorrecte :

Tel est le
  chat Rutterkin des sorcières Margaret et Filippa Flower, qui furent<choice><sic>prûlées</sic><corr>brûlées</corr></choice> à Lincoln, le 11 mars 1619, pour avoir envoûté un parent du comte de
Rutland.

不怨天，不尤人。下學而上達。<corr>知我</corr> 者，其天乎！

不怨天，不尤人。下學而上達。<choice><sic>我知</sic><corr>知我</corr></choice>者，其天乎！

It is also possible, using the <choice> and <sic> elements, to provide an uncorrected reading:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now —
how <choice><sic>we can</sic><corr>can we</corr></choice> prove or
disprove anyone's theories?

Es ist auch möglich, zusätzlich die Elemente <choice> und <sic> zu verwenden, um eine nicht korrigierte Lesart anzubieten:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now —
how <choice><sic>we can</sic><corr>can we</corr></choice> prove or
disprove anyone's theories?

3.5.1. Apparent Errors

<date>
date
date
Datum
contains a date in any format.
다양한 형식의 날짜를 포함한다.
包含任何格式的日期表示。
日付を示す。
contient une date exprimée dans n'importe quel format.
contiene una fecha en cualquier formato.
contiene una data in qualsiasi foemato
enthält ein Datum in beliebigem Format.

<date when="1980-02">early February 1980</date>

<date when="1980-02">au début de février 1980</date>

<date when="1654-11-23">L'an de grâce 1654,<lb/> Lundi, 23 novembre, jour de saint Clément,
    pape et martyr et autres au martyrologe, <lb/>Veille de saint Chrysogone, martyr, et
    autres, <lb/> Depuis environ dix heures et demie du soir jusques environ minuit et
  demi.</date>

<date when="1990-09">septembre
          mcmxc</date>
<date when="--09">septembre</date>
<date when="2001-09-11T12:48:00">11
          septembre, neuf heures moins douze GMT</date>

他出生於<date calendar="#gregorian">西元2007年12月24日</date> (<date calendar="#chinese" when="2007-12-24"> 丁亥年11月15日</date>).

<date when="1980-02">西元1980年2月初</date>

<date when="0637-11">貞觀十一年十一月</date>，唐太宗聽說年輕的武則天長得妖媚嬌艷，楚楚動人，便將她納入宮中，封為四品才人，賜號「武媚」。

<date when="1990-09">西元1990年9月</date>

Given on the <date when="1977-06-12">Twelfth Day
of June in the Year of Our Lord One Thousand Nine Hundred and Seventy-seven of the Republic
the Two Hundredth and first and of the University the Eighty-Sixth.</date>

<date when="1990-09">September 1990</date>

3.6.4. Dates and Times 2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc. 2.6. The Revision Description 3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information 15.2.3. The Setting Description 13.4. Dates

<dateline>
dateline
mention de date
contains a brief description of the place, date, time, etc. of production of a letter, newspaper story, or other work, prefixed or suffixed to it as a kind of heading or trailer.
편지, 신문 기사 또는 다른 작품에 제목부 또는 종료 요약부로서, 앞에 또는 뒤에 부착되어 있는, 그것이 생성된 장소, 날짜, 시간 등의 간단한 기술.
包含簡短的地點、日期及時間等的描述，通常出現在信件、報紙文章、或其他作品中的開頭或結尾，作為一種標頭或結尾。
手紙や新聞記事などの前後に付加されている、場所、日付、時間などを簡易 に示す。
contient une brève description des lieux, date, heure, etc. concernant la production d’une lettre, d’un article de journal ou d’un autre texte qui, placée au début ou à la fin, lui est associée comme en-tête ou annonce de fin.
enthält kurze Angaben zu Entstehungsort, -datum, -zeit, usw. eines Briefs, Zeitungsartikels oder anderen Werks. Diese können als Überschrift oder Nachsatz dem Text voran- bzw. nachgestellt werden.
contiene una breve descripción de lugar, fecha, hora, etc. de producción de una carta, un artículo periodístico u otro tipo de texto; viene antepuesto o pospuesto a este como elemento de abertura o clausura.
contiene una breve descrizione di luogo, data, ora, ecc. di produzione di una lettera, un articolo di giornale o altro tipo di testo; viene anteposto o posposto a mo' di elemento di apertura o chiusura

<dateline>Walden, this 29. of August 1592</dateline>

<front>
  <dateline>Datum in Mexico <date when="1531">primo die Augusti 1531</date></dateline>
  <p>
    Al muy Magnifico y muy Reverendo Señor el Señor <rs type="person" ref="#IoannesDantiscus">obispo diócesis Colmensis</rs>
  </p>
</front>

<dateline>Avignon, le 11 février. </dateline>

<div type="chapter">
  <p>Et, sur cet océan bourdonnant de mille vaguelettes, se leva l'armée caressante et si
      tendre des merveilleuses sirènes blondes aux seins durs comme ça. </p>
  <closer>
    <dateline><name type="place">Thionne-Paris</name>, <date>1950-1951.</date></dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

<dateline>2008年7月3日，香港。</dateline>

<div type="chapter">
  <p> 自己想吃人，又怕被別人吃了，都用著疑心极深的眼光，面面相覷。…… </p>
  <closer>
    <dateline>
      <name type="place">南京</name>
      <date>1918–1919</date>
    </dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

<div type="chapter">
  <p> and his heart was going like mad and yes I said yes I will Yes.</p>
  <closer>
    <dateline>
      <name type="place">Trieste-Zürich-Paris,</name>
      <date>1914–1921</date>
    </dateline>
  </closer>
</div>

4.2.2. Openers and Closers

<del>
deletion
삭제
刪除
suppression
cancelación
cancellatura
Streichung
contains a letter, word, or passage deleted, marked as deleted, or otherwise indicated as superfluous or spurious in the copy text by an author, scribe, or a previous annotator or corrector.
삭제된 것으로 표시되었거나, 저자, 전사자, 부호화자 또는 수정작업자에 의해 사본 텍스트에서 불필요하거나 위조된 것으로 표시되어 삭제된 문자, 단어, 단락을 포함한다.
標記在文本中，由作者、抄寫者、註解者、或更正者刪除、標上刪除記號、或者標明為多餘或偽造的字母或單字。
著者・筆写者・注釈者・校正者により、削除または削除として符号化または余分なものまたは間違いとして示されている、文字、単語、句を示す。
contient une lettre, un mot ou un passage supprimé, marqué comme supprimé, sinon indiqué comme superflu ou erroné dans le texte par un auteur, un copiste, un annotateur ou un correcteur.
contiene una letra, palabra o pasaje cancelado, marcado como omitido o bien como supérfluo o espurio en el texto por el autor, transcriptor, glosador o corrector.
contiene un carattere, parola o brano cancellati, codificati come cancellati, o altrimenti indicati come superflui o spuri, nella copia originale da parte di un autore, copista, commentatore o correttore.
enthält Buchstaben, Wörter oder Textpassagen, die in der Vorlage von einem Autor, einem Schreiber oder im Rahmen einer zuvor erfolgten Annotation oder Korrektur gelöscht wurden oder als gelöscht bzw. gegenstandslos gekennzeichnet wurden.
text-decoration: line-through;

<l><del rend="overtyped">Mein</del> Frisch <del rend="overstrike" type="primary">schwebt</del>
  weht der Wind</l>

<del rend="overstrike">
  <gap reason="illegible" quantity="5" unit="character"/>
</del>

<p>[...] mais il y reste quelque chose de mystérieux, de furtif. <del rend="overtyped">Je</del> On cesse un instant d'y penser; <del rend="overstrike">les </del>mes yeux se
    ferment ou <del rend="overstrike">s'attardent sur </del> se détournent sur un livre... On
    relève la tête: il est là </p>

<l><del rend="改寫">雨</del> 風 <del rend="改寫" type="primary">飄</del> 吹來涼爽。</l>

This element should be used for deletion of shorter sequences of text, typically single words or phrases. The <delSpan> element should be used for longer sequences of text, for those containing structural subdivisions, and for those containing overlapping additions and deletions.

The text deleted must be at least partially legible in order for the encoder to be able to transcribe it (unless it is restored in a <supplied> tag). Illegible or lost text within a deletion may be marked using the <gap> tag to signal that text is present but has not been transcribed, or is no longer visible. Attributes on the <gap> element may be used to indicate how much text is omitted, the reason for omitting it, etc. If text is not fully legible, the <unclear> element (available when using the additional tagset for transcription of primary sources) should be used to signal the areas of text which cannot be read with confidence in a similar way.

Degrees of uncertainty over what can still be read, or whether a deletion was intended may be indicated by use of the <certainty> element (see 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility).

There is a clear distinction in the TEI between <del> and <surplus> on the one hand and <gap> or <unclear> on the other. <del> indicates a deletion present in the source being transcribed, which states the author's or a later scribe's intent to cancel or remove text. <surplus> indicates material present in the source being transcribed which should have been so deleted, but which is not in fact. <gap> or <unclear>, by contrast, signal an editor's or encoder's decision to omit something or their inability to read the source text. See sections 11.3.1.7. Text Omitted from or Supplied in the Transcription and 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination for the relationship between these and other related elements used in detailed transcription.

Cf. <gap>.

Les degrés d'incertitude sur ce qui est encore lisible peuvent être indiqués par l'emploi de l'élément <certainty> (voir 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility).

Cet élément doit être utilisé pour la suppression de courtes séquences de texte, généralement des mots ou des expressions. Il faut utiliser l'élément <delSpan> pour les séquences de texte plus longues, celles qui contiennent des divisions structurelles, et celles qui contiennent un chevauchement d'ajouts et de suppressions.

Le texte supprimé doit être au moins partiellement lisible, afin que l'encodeur soit en mesure de le transcrire. La partie illisible du texte à l'intérieur d'une suppression peut être marquée au moyen de la balise <gap> pour signaler la présence de texte non transcrit. La quantité de texte omise, la raison de l'omission, etc., peuvent être indiquées au moyen des attributs de l'élément <gap>. Si le texte n'est pas entièrement lisible, l'élément <unclear> (disponible avec le jeu additionnel de balises pour la transcription des sources primaires) doit être utilisé pour signaler les zones de texte ne pouvant pas être lues de manière fiable. Voir les sections suivantes 11.3.1.7. Text Omitted from or Supplied in the Transcription et, pour l'association étroite entre les balises <del> et <gap>, <damage>, <unclear> et <supplied> (ces trois dernières balises étant disponibles avec le jeu additionnel de balises pour la transcription de sources primaires), voir la section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination.

La balise <del> ne doit pas être utilisée pour les suppressions par des éditeurs scientifiques ou des encodeurs. Dans ce cas, il faut utiliser soit la balise <corr>, soit la balise <gap>.

<gap>を参照のこと。

当該解釈の確信度は要素<certainty>で示される (21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibilityを参照のこと)。

当該要素は、短いテキスト部分、例えばひつとの単語や句が削除されてい る時に使用されるべきである。要素<delSpan>は、より大きなテキスト部分、例えば、下位構造を含むものや追加と削除をともに含むような ものが削除されているときに使用されるべきである。

当該削除されているテキストは、少なくとも転記するに充分なほどには読 めるものでなければならない。全く読めないのであれば、要素 <del>は使うべきではない。この場合には、要素<gap>を使 い、転記できない単一のテキスト部分を示すべきである。この際、属性 @reasonにより転記ができない理由が削除であることを示すこ とができる。全てが読めるわけではないという場合には、要素 <unclear>を使い、確信が持てないが読めるひとつのテキスト部分 を示すべきである。詳しくは、11.3.1.7. Text Omitted from or Supplied in the Transcriptionを参照のこと。また、要素<del>と要素<gap>, <damage>, <unclear>, <supplied>との関係については、 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combinationを参照のこと(damageとsuppliedは元資料を転記するための追加モジュールを使用する際に使うことができる)。

要素<del>は、編集者や符号化する人による削除部分に使用される べきではない。この場合は、要素<corr>または要素<gap> が使われるべきである。

Dieses Element sollte nur für Löschungen kürzerer Textpassagen wie etwa einzelner Wörter oder Phrasen benutzt werden. Für längere Textpassagen, sowie jene mit strukturellen Untergliederungen oder sich überschneidenden Hinzufügungen bzw. Löschungen, sollte das <delSpan>-Element benutzt werden.

Der gelöschte Text muss zumindest teilweise lesbar sein, um von den Bearbeitern transkribiert werden zu können (außer er wurde in einem <supplied>-Element rekonstruiert). Nicht lesbarer oder nicht mehr vorhandender Text innerhalb einer Löschung kann mit dem <gap>-Element markiert werden, um anzuzeigen, dass Text zwar vorhanden ist aber nicht transkribiert wurde oder nicht mehr sichtbar ist. Im <gap>-Element können Attribute benutzt werden, um, unter anderem, Angaben zur ausgelassenen Textmenge zu machen oder die Gründe für die Auslassung anzugeben. Wenn Text nur teilweise lesbar ist und daher nicht mit Sicherheit entziffert werden kann, sollte das <unclear>-Element (verfügbar im zusätzlichen Tagset für die Transkription von primären Ressourcen) benutzt werden.

Das <certainty>-Element (siehe 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility) kann benutzt werden, um den Grad an Gewissheit anzugeben, was noch lesbar ist bzw. ob eine Löschung intendiert war oder nicht.

Die TEI unterscheidet eindeutig zwischen <del> und <surplus> auf der einen und <gap> und <unclear> auf der anderen Seite. <del> beschreibt eine Löschung in der zu transkribierenden Ressource, die darauf hinweist, dass ein Autor oder späterer Schreiber bewusst Text löschen oder entfernen wollte. Das <surplus>-Element beschreibt Text in der zu transkribierenden Ressource, der gelöscht werden sollte, aber in Wirklichkeit nicht gelöscht wurde. Die Elemente <gap> oder <unclear> hingegen beschreiben eine vom Editor oder Auszeichnenden getroffene Entscheidung, etwas auszulassen oder deren Unvermögen, die Textvorlage zu entziffern. Vergleiche die Abschnitte 11.3.1.7. Text Omitted from or Supplied in the Transcription und 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination zur Beziehung dieser Elemente untereinander und zu anderen, verwandten Elementen und wie diese in einer detaillierten Transkription verwendet werden.

3.5.3. Additions, Deletions, and Omissions

<desc>
description
기술
描述
descripción
descrizione
description
Beschreibung
contains a short description of the purpose, function, or use of its parent element, or when the parent is a documentation element, describes or defines the object being documented.
요소, 속성, 또는 속성 값의 목적과 적용에 대한 간단한 기술을 포함한다.
包含一段簡短描述，說明一元素、屬性、或屬性值的應用與目的。
当該要素、属性、属性値を採用した目的の簡単な解説を示す。
contient une courte description de l'objet documenté par son élément parent, qui comprend son utilisation prévue, son but, ou son application là où c'est approprié.
contiene una breve descripción del objetivo y la aplicación de un elemento, atributo o valor de un atributo.
contiene una breve descrizione dello scopo o dell'applicazione di un elemento, attributo, o valore di attributo.
enthält eine kurze Beschreibung des Objekts, das von seinem übergeordneten Element annotiert wird, üblicherweise einem Dokumentationselement oder einer Einheit.
A <desc> with a @type of "deprecationInfo" should only occur when its parent element is being deprecated. Furthermore, it should always occur in an element that is being deprecated when <desc> is a valid child of that element. Information about a deprecation should only be present in a specification element that is being deprecated: that is, only an element that has a @validUntil attribute should have a child <desc type="deprecationInfo">.
@type
"deprecationInfo"
deprecation information
This element describes why or how its parent element is being deprecated, typically including recommendations for alternate encoding.

  <dataSpec module="tei" ident="teidata.point" validUntil="2050-02-25">
   <desc type="deprecationInfo" versionDate="2018-09-14" xml:lang="en">Several standards bodies, including NIST in the USA,
   strongly recommend against ending the representation of a number
   with a decimal point. So instead of <q>3.</q> use either <q>3</q>
   or <q>3.0</q>.</desc>

</dataSpec>

Example of a <desc> element inside a documentation element.

<dataSpec module="tei" ident="teidata.point">
  <desc versionDate="2010-10-17" xml:lang="en">defines the data type used to express a point in cartesian space.</desc>
  <content>
    <dataRef name="token" restriction="(-?[0-9]+(\.[0-9]+)?,-?[0-9]+(\.[0-9]+)?)"/>
  </content>

</dataSpec>

Example of a <desc> element in a non-documentation element.

<place xml:id="KERG2">
  <placeName>Kerguelen Islands</placeName>

  <terrain>
    <desc>antarctic tundra</desc>
  </terrain>

</place>

<desc>contient une description brève de la raison d'être et du champ d'application d'un
    élément, d'un attribut ou de la valeur d'un attribut, d'une classe ou une entité.</desc>

<desc>包含某個元素或屬性之定義與用法的簡短描述。</desc>

When used in a specification element such as <elementSpec>, TEI convention requires that this be expressed as a finite clause, begining with an active verb.

La convention TEI exige que cela soit exprimé sous la forme d'une proposition finie, introduite par un verbe actif.

La convención de TEI requiere que esto esté expresado como cláusula finita, comenzando con un verbo activo.

TEIの慣習では、動詞を先頭にした文で表現される(訳注：英語で表現する 場合のこと)。

Wenn die Beschreibung innerhalb eines Spezifikationselements wie zum Beispiel <elementSpec> verwendet wird, empfiehlt die TEI, dass diese durch einen vollständigen Satz ausgedrückt wird, der mit einem Verb im Aktiv beginnt.

22.4.1. Description of Components

<div>
text division
텍스트 구역
文本區段
division du texte
Textabschnitt
división de texto
partizione testuale
contains a subdivision of the front, body, or back of a text.
텍스트의 전면부, 본문, 후면부의 하위 구역을 포함한다.
文本的正文前資訊、正文、及正文後資訊的分段。
前付、本文、後付中のテキスト部分を示す。
contient une subdivision dans le texte préliminaire, dans le corps d’un texte ou dans le texte postliminaire.
enthält einen Unterabschnitt in Vorspann (front), Textkörper oder Nachspann (back) eines Textes.
contiene una subdivisión del paratexto inicial, del cuerpo del texto o del paratexto final.
contiene una suddivisione del peritesto iniziale, del corpo del testo, o del peritesto finale
Abstract model violation: Lines may not contain higher-level structural elements such as div, unless div is a descendant of floatingText. Abstract model violation: p and ab may not contain higher-level structural elements such as div, unless div is a descendant of floatingText. border: 1px solid black; padding: 5px;

<body>
  <div type="part">
    <head>Fallacies of Authority</head>
    <p>The subject of which is Authority in various shapes, and the object, to repress all
    exercise of the reasoning faculty.</p>
    <div n="1" type="chapter">
      <head>The Nature of Authority</head>
      <p>With reference to any proposed measures having for their object the greatest
      happiness of the greatest number [...]</p>
      <div n="1.1" type="section">
        <head>Analysis of Authority</head>
        <p>What on any given occasion is the legitimate weight or influence to be attached to
        authority [...] </p>
      </div>
      <div n="1.2" type="section">
        <head>Appeal to Authority, in What Cases Fallacious.</head>
        <p>Reference to authority is open to the charge of fallacy when [...] </p>
      </div>
    </div>
  </div>
</body>

<body>
  <div type="oeuvre">
    <head>Les Chouans </head>
    <div n="1" type="partie">
      <head> Première partie</head>
      <head> L'embuscade</head>
      <div n="1" type="chapitre">
        <head>Chapitre premier </head>
        <div n="1">
          <head>I</head>
          <p>Dans les premiers jours de l'an VIII, au commencement de vendémiaire, ou, pour
          se conformer au calendrier actuel, vers la fin du mois de septembre 1799, une
          centaine de paysans et un assez grand nombre de bourgeois, partis le matin de
          Fougères pour se rendre à Mayenne, gravissaient la montagne de la Pèlerine,
          située à mi-chemin environ de Fougères à Ernée, petite ville où les voyageurs
          ont coutume de se reposer. </p>
        </div>
      </div>
    </div>
  </div>
</body>

<body>
  <div type="part">
    <head>對話的喧囂：巴赫汀文化理論述評</head>
    <p>本書以中國人的觀點，介紹巴赫汀的一生志業。深入淺出、引證周詳。尤其面對海峽兩岸劇變中的政治、文化思潮，巴赫汀從對話到喧嘩的理論，更具有深刻的歷史意義，發人省思。</p>
    <div n="1" type="chapter">
      <head>引言：巴赫汀對話論—轉型期的文化理論</head>
      <p>文化轉型期的文藝理論，一般都呈現著特別關注文藝之外的歷史社會環境的傾向。不過，這種關注在二十世紀之前的文論中，大致上均以一種文藝內在規律語歷史社會語境二元對立的面貌出現。...</p>
      <div n="1.1" type="section">
        <head>眾聲喧嘩：轉型期的文化理論</head>
        <p>當代西方文論對巴赫汀思想的看法迥異，見仁見智。有強調其「對話性」的，有看重他的「複調小說」理論的，也有語言學、符號學、哲學和美學的不同角度來解釋巴赫汀的。...
        </p>
      </div>
      <div n="1.2" type="section">
        <head>哲學建構論語對話美學</head>
        <p>眾聲喧嘩的文化理論形成於二○年代末和三○年代，是巴赫汀思想成熟階段的結晶。... </p>
      </div>
    </div>
  </div>
</body>

4.1. Divisions of the Body

<docAuthor>
document author
문서 저자
文件作者
auteur du document
Verfasser des Dokuments
autor del documento
autore del documento
contains the name of the author of the document, as given on the title page (often but not always contained in a byline).
제목 페이지에 제시되는 문서의 작가명을 포함한다(그러나 종종 작자명 행에 포함되는 것은 아니다.)
包含文件作者名稱，同於題名頁上顯示的作者名 (經常但不一定出現在署名當中) 。
タイトルページにある(一般には署名欄にある)当該文書の著者名を示す。
contient le nom de l’auteur du document tel qu’il est donné sur la page de titre (ce nom est le plus souvent contenu dans une mention de responsabilité) .
enthält den Namen des Verfassers des Dokuments, wie auf dem Titelblatt angegeben (häufig, jedoch nicht immer in der Verfasserzeile)
contiene el nombre del autor del documento, tal y como aparece indicado en el frontispicio (a menudo, pero no siempre, contenido dentro del elemento <byline>).
contiene il nome dell'autore del documento, come indicato nel frontespizio (spesso ma non sempre contenuto all'interno dell'elemento byline)

      <titlePage>
        <docTitle>
          <titlePart>Travels into Several Remote Nations of the World, in Four
Parts.</titlePart>
        </docTitle>
        <byline> By <docAuthor>Lemuel Gulliver</docAuthor>, First a Surgeon,
and then a Captain of several Ships</byline>
      </titlePage>

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart>Le quart livre de faicts et dict Heroiques du bon
Pantagruel</titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <byline>Composé par <docAuthor>M. François Rabelais</docAuthor> docteur en Medicine.</byline>
</titlePage>

The document author's name often occurs within a byline, but the <docAuthor> element may be used whether the <byline> element is used or not. It should be used only for the author(s) of the entire document, not for author(s) of any subset or part of it. (Attributions of authorship of a subset or part of the document, for example of a chapter in a textbook or an article in a newspaper, may be encoded with <byline> without <docAuthor>.)

Le nom de l'auteur d'un document apparaît souvent au sein d'un élément <byline>, mais l'élément <docAuthor> peut être utilisé même si l'élément <byline> n'est pas présent.

当該文書の著者名が署名欄に書かれている場合、要素<byline> の使用状況とは関係なく、要素<docAuthor>は使用されることがある。

Der Name eines Autors eines Dokuments erscheint zwar häufig in einer Verfasserzeile, das <docAuthor>-Element kann jedoch auch unabhängig von einem <byline>-Element benutzt werden. Es sollte jedoch nur für Autoren des gesamten Dokuments und nicht für Autoren von Abschnitten des Dokuments eingesetzt werden. (Für solche Fälle, wie z. B. Beiträge in Sammelbänden oder einzelne Zeitungsartikel, kann das <byline>-Element ohne die Angabe eines <docAuthor>-Elements benutzt.)

4.6. Title Pages

<docDate>
document date
문서 날짜
文件日期
date du document
Datierung des Dokuments
fecha del documento
data del documento
contains the date of a document, as given on a title page or in a dateline.
대개 제목 페이지에 제시되는 문서의 날짜를 포함한다.
包含文件日期， 同於 (通常) 在題名頁上顯示的日期。
文書の日付を示す。一般にはタイトルページに書かれている。
contient la date d’un document telle qu’elle est (généralement ) donnée sur une page de titre.
enthält die Datierung des Dokuments, wie auf der Titelseite oder in einer Datumszeile angegeben.
contiene la fecha del documento, tal y como, normalmente, aparece en el frontispicio.
contiene la data del documento così come riportata di norma nel frontespizio

<docImprint>Oxford, Clarendon Press, <docDate>1987</docDate>
   </docImprint>

<docImprint>Lettres Modernes Minard, <pubPlace>PARIS-CAEN</pubPlace>
      <docDate>2003</docDate>
  </docImprint>

<docImprint>上海：中華書局，<docDate>2001</docDate>年。
</docImprint>

Cf. the general <date> element in the core tag set. This specialized element is provided for convenience in marking and processing the date of the documents, since it is likely to require specialized handling for many applications. It should be used only for the date of the entire document, not for any subset or part of it.

Voir l'élément générique <date> dans le module core. L'élément spécifique <docDate> est fourni à toutes fins utiles pour encoder et traiter la date des documents, puisque celle-ci requiert une gestion particulière pour de nombreux besoins.

要素<date>は、コアタグ集合で定義されている。当該要素は、当該文書の日付を記述・処理するためのものである。多くのソフトウェアは独自の扱いをするだろう。

Vgl. das allgemeine <date>-Element im core-Modul. Dieses spezialisierte Element erleichtert die Kodierung und Verarbeitung der Datierung eines Dokuments, die vermutlich in vielen Anwendungsszenarien gesondert behandelt wird. Es sollte nur für das Datum des gesamten Dokuments verwendet werden, nicht für Datierungen von Abschnitten oder Teilen.

4.6. Title Pages

<docEdition>
document edition
문서 편집
文件版本
édition du document
Ausgabe des Dokuments
edición del documento
edizione del documento
contains an edition statement as presented on a title page of a document.
문서의 제목 페이지에 제시되는 편집 진술을 포함한다.
包含一份版本陳述，與文件題名頁所顯示的相同。
タイトルページにある当該文書の版を示す。
contient une mention d’édition telle qu’elle figure sur la page de titre d’un document.
enthält Angaben zur Ausgabe, entsprechend den Informationen auf dem Titelblatt eines Dokuments.
contiene una declaración editorial como la contiene el frontispicio de un documento.
contiene una dichiarazione editoriale così come riportata nel frontespizio di un documento

<docEdition>The Third edition Corrected</docEdition>

<docEdition>3e Edition Augmentée</docEdition>

<docEdition>修訂第三版</docEdition>

Cf. the <edition> element of bibliographic citation. As usual, the shorter name has been given to the more frequent element.

Voir l'élément <edition> dans une citation bibliographique. Comme d'habitude, un nom abrégé a été donné à l'élément le plus fréquent.

要素<edition>も参照のこと。一般には、よく使われる要素により簡単な名前が記述される。

Vgl. das <edition>-Element für bibliografische Angaben. Wie üblich wurde der kürzere Name für das häufiger benutzte Element verwendet.

4.6. Title Pages

<docImprint>
document imprint
문서 간기
文件出版說明
mention d'impression
Impressum des Dokuments
declaración de imprenta
sigla editoriale del documento
contains the imprint statement (place and date of publication, publisher name), as given (usually) at the foot of a title page.
대개 제목 페이지 아래에 제시되는 인쇄 판 진술(출판 장소와 날짜, 출판사명)을 포함한다.
包含文件出版陳述 (出版日期、地點以及出版公司名稱) ，同於 (通常) 題名頁尾所顯示的出版資訊。
刊記にある出版関連情報を示す。例えば、出版日、出版者名など。一般にはタイトルページの下にある。
contient la mention d'impression de l'éditeur (lieu et date de publication, nom de l’éditeur), telle qu’elle est généralement donnée au bas de la page de titre.
enthält das Impressum (Erscheinungsort und -datum, Verlag), das (üblicherweise) am unteren Rand der Titelseite steht.
contiene la declaración de la publicación (lugar y fecha de publicación, casa editorial) tal y como consta al pie del frontispicio.
contiene la dichiarazione di pubblicazione (luogo e data di pubblicazione, casa editrice) così come riportata di norma in fondo al frontespizio

<docImprint>Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1987</docImprint>

Imprints may be somewhat more complex:

<docImprint><pubPlace>London</pubPlace>
Printed for <name>E. Nutt</name>,
at
<pubPlace>Royal Exchange</pubPlace>;
<name>J. Roberts</name> in
<pubPlace>wick-Lane</pubPlace>;
<name>A. Dodd</name> without
<pubPlace>Temple-Bar</pubPlace>;
and <name>J. Graves</name> in
<pubPlace>St. James's-street.</pubPlace>
               <date>1722.</date>
            </docImprint>

<docImprint>Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1987</docImprint>

Das Impressum kann auch etwas komplexer sein:

<docImprint><pubPlace>London</pubPlace>
  Printed for <name>E. Nutt</name>,
  at
  <pubPlace>Royal Exchange</pubPlace>;
  <name>J. Roberts</name> in
  <pubPlace>wick-Lane</pubPlace>;
  <name>A. Dodd</name> without
  <pubPlace>Temple-Bar</pubPlace>;
  and <name>J. Graves</name> in
  <pubPlace>St. James's-street.</pubPlace>
  <date>1722.</date>
</docImprint>

<docImprint>2006, Les Editions Trintexte, Trinity College, Toronto, Canada M5S
  1H8</docImprint>

La description de l'impression est parfois plus complexe:

<docImprint><pubPlace>PARIS</pubPlace>, <name>Delangle Frères</name> Éditeurs-libraires,
      <pubPlace>Place de la Bourse</pubPlace>
  </docImprint>
<docDate>MDCCCXXX</docDate>

<docImprint>上海：中華書局，2001年。</docImprint>

<docImprint><date>1995</date>年初版發行於<pubPlace>台北</pubPlace>：<pubPlace>麥田出版</pubPlace>，<name>王德威</name>主編 ; 另外亦出版於<pubPlace>香港</pubPlace>： <pubPlace>城邦</pubPlace>; <pubPlace>馬來西亞</pubPlace>：<pubPlace>城邦</pubPlace>。</docImprint>

Cf. the <imprint> element of bibliographic citations. As with title, author, and editions, the shorter name is reserved for the element likely to be used more often.

Voir l'élément <imprint> dans une citation bibliographique. Comme pour le titre, l'auteur, et la mention d'édition, le nom le plus court est réservé à l'élément le plus fréquemment utilisé.

書誌情報向けの要素<imprint>も参照のこと。タイトル、著者名、版については、よく使われる要素により簡単な名前が記述される。

Vgl. das <imprint>-Element für bibliografische Angaben. Wie bei <title>, <author> und <edition> ist der kürzere Name für das häufiger benutzte Element reserviert.

4.6. Title Pages

<docTitle>
document title
문서 제목
文件題名
titre du document
Dokumenttitel
título del documento
titolo del documento
contains the title of a document, including all its constituents, as given on a title page.
제목 페이지에 제시되는 모든 구성성분을 포함한 문서의 제목을 제시한다.
包含文件題名，包含所有組成部分，同於題名頁上所顯示的題名。
当該文書のタイトルを示す。タイトルページにあるタイトルの全情報を含む。
contient le titre d’un document, incluant la totalité de ses composants tels qu’ils sont donnés sur la page de titre.
enthält den Titel eines Dokuments, einschließlich aller Bestandteile, wie sie auf dem Titelblatt angegeben sind.
contiene el título del documento incluyendo todos sus elementos constitutivos, como especificado en el frontispicio.
contiene il titolo del documento in tutti i suoi elementi costitutivi, come specificato nel frontespizio
font-size: larger;

<docTitle>
  <titlePart type="main">The DUNCIAD, VARIOURVM.</titlePart>
  <titlePart type="sub">WITH THE PROLEGOMENA of SCRIBLERUS.</titlePart>
</docTitle>

<docTitle>
  <titlePart type="main">LES CHOSES</titlePart>
  <titlePart type="sub">Une histoire des années soixante.</titlePart>
</docTitle>

<docTitle>
  <titlePart type="main">食物的歷史</titlePart>
  <titlePart type="sub">透視人類的飲食與文明 </titlePart>
</docTitle>

4.6. Title Pages

<editor>
contains a secondary statement of responsibility for a bibliographic item, for example the name of an individual, institution or organization, (or of several such) acting as editor, compiler, translator, etc.
서지 항목의 책임에 관한 2차적 진술, 예를 들어, 편집, 번역 등의 작업을 한 편집, 개인, 기관, 또는 기구의 이름
書目項目的次要責任歸屬，例如扮演編輯、編譯、翻譯等角色的個人、機構或組織 (或其他類似者) 的名稱。
書誌情報における、第二位の責任者を示す。個人、団体、組織、編集者、編 纂者、翻訳者の名前など。
mention de responsabilité secondaire pour un item bibliographique, par exemple le nom d'une personne, d'une institution ou d'un organisme (ou de plusieurs d'entre eux) comme éditeur scientifique, compilateur, traducteur, etc.
declaración secundaria de responsabilidad para un ítem bibliográfico, por ejemplo un nombre particular, o institucional (o cualquier otro) que ha actuado como editor, compilador, traductor, etc.
è la dichiarazione di responsabilità secondaria di ciascuna unità bibliografica, ad esempio il nome di un individuo, di un'istituzione o organizzazione che agisce come curatore, compilatore, traduttore, ecc.
beinhaltet zusätzliche Angaben zur Verantwortlichkeit für ein bibliografisches Objekt, z. B. den Namen einer Person, Institution oder Organisation (oder mehreren davon), welche als Herausgeber, Kompilator, Übersetzer etc. fungiert.

<editor role="Technical_Editor">Ron Van den Branden</editor>
<editor role="Editor-in-Chief">John Walsh</editor>
<editor role="Managing_Editor">Anne Baillot</editor>

<editor> Pierre-Jules Hetzel</editor>
<editor role="illustrator">George Roux</editor>

<editor>王大明</editor>
<editor role="繪圖者">陳紅</editor>

A consistent format should be adopted.

Particularly where cataloguing is likely to be based on the content of the header, it is advisable to use generally recognized authority lists for the exact form of personal names.

Il est conseillé d'adopter un format cohérent.

Particulièrement lorsque le catalogage repose sur le contenu de l'en-tête TEI, il est conseillé d'utiliser des listes d'autorité reconnues pour trouver la forme exacte des noms de personnes.

一貫した形式で記述されるべきである。

特に、書誌情報をヘダー内容に依存する際には、個人名の正確な形のリス トを使用した方がよい。

Es sollte auf ein einheitliches Format geachtet werden.

Vor allem wenn die Katalogisierung auf dem Inhalt des TEI-Headers aufbauen soll, wird die Verwendung allgemein gebräuchlicher Normdateien für die Namensansetzung empfohlen.

3.12.2.2. Titles, Authors, and Editors

<email>
electronic mail address
전자우편 주소
dirección de correo electrónico
adresse de courrier électronique
indirizzo di posta elettronica
contains an email address identifying a location to which email messages can be delivered.
전자우편 메시지가 전달되는 위치를 식별하는 전자우편 주소를 포함한다.
包含一個電子郵件位址，標明電子郵件訊息可傳送的位置。
eメールを届けるeメールアドレスを示す。
contient l'adresse de courriel identifiant un emplacement où un courriel peut être envoyé.
localizza un indirizzo di posta elettronica al quale possono essere inviati dei messaggi di posta elettronica
contiene una dirección de correo electrónico indentificando el lugar dónde los mensajes electrónicos pueden ser enviados.
font-family:monospace

<email>membership@tei-c.org</email>

<email>membership@tei-c.org</email>

The format of a modern Internet email address is defined in RFC 2822

Le format d'une adresse de courrier électronique internet moderne est défini dans la RFC 2822

インターネット上で使用されるメールアドレスの書式については、 RFC 2822 を参照のこと。

3.6.2. Addresses

<epigraph>
epigraph
Motto
contains a quotation, anonymous or attributed, appearing at the start or end of a section or on a title page.
절 또는 장의 시작, 또는 제목 페이지에 나타나는 인용, 작자미상, 또는 추정을 포함한다.
包含一段匿名或署名引文，出現在段落或章節的開頭，或在題名頁中。
章や節の始め、タイトルページなどにある引用(題辞)を示す。
contient une citation, anonyme ou attribuée et qui apparaît au début d’une section ou d’un chapitre ou sur une page de titre.
enthält ein anonymes oder jemandem zugeschriebenes Zitat, das am Beginn eines Abschnitts, Kapitels oder auf einer Titelseite steht.
contiene una cita, anónima o atribuida, que aparece al inicio de una sección o capítulo, o en el frontispicio.
contiene una citazione, anonima o attribuita, che appare all'inizio di una sezione o capitolo, o sul frontespizio

<epigraph>
  <bibl>Deut. Chap. 5.</bibl>
  <q>11 Thou ſhalt not take the name of the Lord thy God in vaine, for the Lord
    will not hold him guiltleſſe which ſhall take his name in vaine.</q>
</epigraph>

4.2.3. Arguments, Epigraphs, and Postscripts 4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions 4.6. Title Pages

<expan>
expansion
확장 표기
縮寫還原
expansion
expansión
espansione
Abkürzungsauflösung
contains the expansion of an abbreviation.
약어의 확장(비약어) 표기
包含一個縮寫詞的還原形式。
省略形の元の表現を示す。
contient l'expansion d'une abréviation.
contiene la expansión de una abreviatura.
contiene l'esapnsione di un'abbreviazione.
enthält die aufgelöste Form einer Abkürzung.

The address is Southmoor
<choice>
    <expan>Road</expan>
    <abbr>Rd</abbr>
</choice>

Il habite
<choice>
    <expan>Avenue</expan>
    <abbr>Av.</abbr>
</choice>de la Paix

<choice>
  <expan>歐洲聯盟</expan>
  <abbr>歐盟</abbr>
</choice>

<choice xml:lang="la">
  <abbr>Imp</abbr>
  <expan>Imp<ex>erator</ex></expan>
</choice>

The content of this element should be the expanded abbreviation, usually (but not always) a complete word or phrase. The <ex> element provided by the transcr module may be used to mark up sequences of letters supplied within such an expansion.

If abbreviations are expanded silently, this practice should be documented in the <editorialDecl>, either with a <normalization> element or a <p>.

En général, le contenu de cet élément doit être une expression ou un mot complet. L'élément <ex> fourni par le module transcr peut être utilisé pour baliser des suites de lettres données dans une expansion de ce type.

当該要素の内容は、完全な語句であるべきである。 転記モジュールにある要素<ex> を使い、省略形の元の形を文字列として示すことができる。

Der Inhalt dieses Elements sollte die aufgelöste Abkürzung sein, üblicherweise ein vollständiges Wort oder eine Phrase. Das <ex>-Element aus dem Modul transcr kann verwendet werden, um einzelne Buchstaben innerhalb der Auflösung auszuzeichnen.

Werden Abkürzungen stillschweigend aufgelöst, sollte diese Vorgehensweise im TEI-Header über das <editorialDecl>-Element dokumentiert werden, entweder in einem <normalization>- oder einem <p>-Element.

3.6.5. Abbreviations and Their Expansions

<facsimile>
contains a representation of some written source in the form of a set of images rather than as transcribed or encoded text.
전사 또는 부호화된 텍스트 형태보다는 이미지 집합의 형태로 기록 원본의 표상을 포함한다.
contiene una representación de una cierta fuente escrita bajo la forma de conjunto de las imágenes algo que como texto transcrito o codificado.
転記または符号化されたテキストではなく、画像データ中にある、書記資料の表現を示す。
contient une représentation d'une source écrite quelconque sous la forme d'un ensemble d'images plutôt que sous la forme d'un texte transcrit ou encodé.
contiene una rappresentazione di una qualche fonte scritta sotto forma di una serie di immagini piuttosto che di testo trascritto o codificato
A facsimile element represents a text with images, thus transcribed text should not be present within it.

<facsimile>
  <graphic url="page1.png"/>
  <surface>
    <graphic url="page2-highRes.png"/>
    <graphic url="page2-lowRes.png"/>
  </surface>
  <graphic url="page3.png"/>
  <graphic url="page4.png"/>
</facsimile>

<facsimile>
  <surface ulx="0" uly="0" lrx="200" lry="300">
    <graphic url="Bovelles-49r.png"/>
  </surface>
</facsimile>

11.1. Digital Facsimiles

<figDesc>
description of figure
Beschreibung einer Abbildung
그림 기술
圖表描述
description d'une figure
descripción de una figura
Descrizione di una figura
contains a brief prose description of the appearance or content of a graphic figure, for use when documenting an image without displaying it.
包含圖表內容的簡短文字描述，用於紀錄圖像但未呈現圖像的情況。
図表の内容や現れ方について簡単な散文で解説を示す。当該図表を示さないで記録する場合に使用される。
contient une brève description de l'apparence ou du contenu d'une représentation graphique, pour documenter une image sans avoir à l'afficher
contiene una breve descripción de la apariencia o del contenido de una figura gráfica, para utilizarla al documentar una imagen sin mostrarla.
contiene una breve descrizione dell'aspetto o del contenuto di una figura, da utilizzare quando si vuole documentare un'immagine senza mostrarla.
enthält einen kurzen Beschreibungstext des Inhalts oder des Aussehens einer Abbildung, um etwa ein Bild ohne dessen Anzeige dokumentieren zu können.
content: '[..'; content: '..]'; color: grey;font-style:italic;

  <figure>
    <graphic url="emblem1.png"/>
    <head>Emblemi d'Amore</head>
    <figDesc>A pair of  naked winged cupids, each holding a
flaming torch, in a rural setting.</figDesc>
  </figure>

<figure>
  <graphic url="chap3fig2.png"/>
  <head>Dick Kennedy </head>
  <figDesc>Gravure de E. Riou représentant un jeune homme assis sur une chaise, les
          pieds sur une autre et tenant à la main une canne. En arrière plan, une théière, et
          l'inscription <q>Map of Africa</q> .</figDesc>
</figure>

This element is intended for use as an alternative to the content of its parent <figure> element ; for example, to display when the image is required but the equipment in use cannot display graphic images. It may also be used for indexing or documentary purposes.

Cet élément est prévu pour être utilisé comme alternative au contenu de son élément parent <figure>; par exemple, pour montrer que l'image est exigée mais que le matériel en service ne peut pas montrer des documents graphiques. Il peut également être employé pour l'indexation ou dans un but documentaire.

当該要素は、要素<figure>の内容の代わりに使用されるものである。例えば、当該図表を表示する際に、機器がその表示に対応していない場合に使用されるものである。また、索引や記録資料を作成するために使用されるかもしれない。

Dieses Element ist als Ersatz für den Inhalt seines Elternelements <figure> gedacht. Zum Beispiel wenn das Bild nicht angezeigt werden kann und man auf einen Alternativtext angewiesen ist. Es kann weiters für Indexierungen und Dokumentationen benutzt werden.

14.4. Specific Elements for Graphic Images

<figure>
figure
figure
Abbildung
groups elements representing or containing graphic information such as an illustration, formula, or figure.
삽화 또는 그림과 같은 시각 정보를 표시하거나 포함하는 요소를 모아 놓는다.
所標記的區塊包含圖示、插圖、或圖表。
図表を示すまたは含む要素をまとめる。
regroupe des éléments représentant ou contenant une information graphique comme une illustration ou une figure.
indica un bloque que contiene gráficos, ilustraciones o figuras.
contiene una porzione di testo costituita da grafici, illustrazioni o figure.
umfasst Elemente, die grafische Informationen repräsentieren oder beinhalten, wie z. B. eine Abbildung, Formel oder Diagramm.
display: block; border-top: solid 1pt blue; border-bottom: solid 1pt blue;

<figure>
  <head>The View from the Bridge</head>
  <figDesc>A Whistleresque view showing four or five sailing boats in the foreground, and a
    series of buoys strung out between them.</figDesc>
  <graphic url="http://www.example.org/fig1.png" scale="0.5"/>
</figure>

<figure>
  <head>La tour rouge, de Giorgio De Chirico</head>
  <figDesc>Le tableau représente un donjon au pied duquel s'étend un espace quasiment vide,
      hormis quelques détails</figDesc>
  <graphic url="http://www.cineclubdecaen.com/cinepho/peint/dechericho/tourrouge.jpg" scale="0.5"/>
</figure>

<figure>
  <head>圖一: 橋上的視野</head>
  <figDesc>前景有四五隻風帆，中間一堆救生圈串連。</figDesc>
  <graphic url="http://www.example.org/fig1.png" scale="0.5"/>
</figure>

14.4. Specific Elements for Graphic Images

<floatingText>
floating text
texte mobile
contains a single text of any kind, whether unitary or composite, which interrupts the text containing it at any point and after which the surrounding text resumes.
단일 또는 혼합이든지 간에, 어떤 지점에서 그것을 포함한 텍스트를 중단시키고 그 이후 주변 텍스트가 다시 시작하는 텍스트.
包含一份任何種類的文本，無論是單一或複合的，該份文本任意穿插於整體文本中，而週遭文字則接續其後。
ひとつのテキストを示す。下位構造はあってもよい。当該部分はテキスト中 のどこにでも出現できる。自在テキスト。
contiene un unico testo di qualsiasi tipo, sia esso unitario o composito, che interrompe il testo che lo contiene in un qualsiasi punto e dopo il quale il testo circostante riprende
contient un texte quelconque, homogène ou composite, qui interrompt le texte le contenant à n’importe quel endroit et après lequel le texte environnant reprend.
contiene un texto de cualquier tipo, unitario o compuesto, que se insiere en algún punto en un texto que lo contiene interrumpiéndolo.
margin: 6pt; border: solid black 1pt;

<body>
  <div type="scene">
    <sp>
      <p>Hush, the players begin...</p>
    </sp>
    <floatingText type="pwp">
      <body>
        <div type="act">
          <sp>
            <l>In Athens our tale takes place [...]</l>
          </sp>

        </div>
      </body>
    </floatingText>
    <sp>
      <p>Now that the play is finished ...</p>
    </sp>
  </div>
</body>

<body>
  <div type="scene">
    <sp>
      <p>Chut ! Les acteurs commencent...</p>
    </sp>
    <floatingText type="pwp">
      <body>
        <div type="act">
          <sp>
            <l>Notre histoire se passe à Athènes [...]</l>

          </sp>
        </div>
      </body>
    </floatingText>
    <sp>
      <p>La pièce est maintenant finie ...</p>
    </sp>
  </div>
</body>

<body>
  <div type="scene">
    <sp>
      <p>快點，演員開始了...</p>
    </sp>
    <floatingText type="pwp">
      <body>
        <div type="act">
          <sp>
            <l>故事開始於雅典...</l>
          </sp>

        </div>
      </body>
    </floatingText>
    <sp>
      <p>戲劇結束...</p>
    </sp>
  </div>
</body>

A floating text has the same content as any other <text> and may thus be interrupted by another floating text, or contain a <group> of tesselated texts.

Un texte "flottant" a le même contenu que tout autre texte : il peut donc être interrompu par un autre texte "flottant" ou contenir un groupe de textes composites.

自在テキストは、他の自在テキストと同じ内容をとったり、定まった構造 の部分としてあるテキスト(充填テキスト)をとる。

4.3.2. Floating Texts

<foreign>
foreign
외국어
外文
étranger
extranjero
straniero
fremd
identifies a word or phrase as belonging to some language other than that of the surrounding text.
주변 텍스트와 다른 언어로 사용된 단어나 구를 표시한다.
標明所屬語言不同於週遭文字的字詞。
記述のベースで使われている言語と異なる言語による語句を定義する。
reconnaît un mot ou une expression comme appartenant à une langue différente de celle du contexte.
identidica una palabra o frase perteneciente a otra lengua distinta de la del resto del texto en que se incluye.
identifica una parola o un sintagma appartenente ad una lingua diversa da quella del testo circostante.
identifiziert ein Wort oder eine Phrase, die zu einer anderen Sprache gehört, als der umgebende Text.
font-style:italic;

This is
heathen Greek to you still? Your <foreign xml:lang="la">lapis
philosophicus</foreign>?

<foreign xml:lang="la">Et vobis</foreign> messieurs,
Ce ne seroyt que bon que nous rendissiez noz cloches...

<p>Pendant ce temps-là, dans le bureau du rez- de-chaussée, les secrétaires faisaient du
      <foreign xml:lang="en">hulla-hoop</foreign>.</p>

整天窩在家裏看卡通打電動，你是<foreign xml:lang="ja">御宅族</foreign>嗎?

The global @xml:lang attribute should be supplied for this element to identify the language of the word or phrase marked. As elsewhere, its value should be a language tag as defined in 6.1. Language Identification.

This element is intended for use only where no other element is available to mark the phrase or words concerned. The global @xml:lang attribute should be used in preference to this element where it is intended to mark the language of the whole of some text element.

The <distinct> element may be used to identify phrases belonging to sublanguages or registers not generally regarded as true languages.

L'attribut global @xml:lang doit être fourni dans cet élément pour identifier la langue à laquelle appartiennent le mot ou l'expression balisée. Comme ailleurs, sa valeur devrait être une balise de langue définie dans 6.1. Language Identification.

Cet élément n'est utilisé que lorsqu'il n'y a pas d'autre élément disponible pour baliser l'expression ou les mots concernés. L'attribut global @xml:lang doit être préféré à cet élément lorsqu'il s'agit de caractériser la langue de l'ensemble d'un élément textuel.

L'élément <distinct> peut être utilisé pour identifier des expressions appartenant à des variétés de langue ou à des registres qui ne sont pas généralement considérés comme de vraies langues.

El atributo global @xml:lang se debe suministrar para que este elemento identifique la lengua de la palabra o de la frase marcada. Como en otras partes, su valor debe ser una etiqueta de lengua según lo definido en 6.1. Language Identification.

Este elemento se reserva para los casos en que no hay disponible otro elemento para marcar la frase o las palabras referidas. Es preferente el uso del atributo global @xml:lang a este elemento donde se quiere marcar la lengua del conjunto de un cierto elemento del texto.

El elemento <distinto> se puede utilizar para identificar las frases que pertenecen a sublenguajes o a registros no considerados generalmente como lenguas verdaderas.

マークアップされた語句の言語を特定するには、グローバル属性 @xml:langを使うべきである。その値は6.1. Language Identificationで 定義されている言語コードであるべきである。

当該要素は、当該語句に他の要素が使えない時にのみ使用されることが期 待されている。グローバル属性@xml:langが、テキスト全体の言語を示すために使用されている場合でも、当該要素の言語を指示するために 使用されるべきである。

要素<distinct>は、特殊言語、すなわち正統な言語とは一般には 認められていない言語による語句を示す場合にも使われるかもしれない。

Das globale @xml:lang-Attribut sollte mit diesem Element verwendet werden, um die Sprache des markierten Wortes oder der markierten Phrase anzugeben. Der Wert dieses Attributs soll den Empfehlungen von 6.1. Language Identification folgen.

Das <foreign>-Element sollte nur dann benutzt werden, wenn sonst keine anderen Elemente zur Verfügung stehen, um das betroffene Wort oder die Phrase zu markieren. Wird das <foreign>-Element nicht verwendet, sollte das globale @xml:lang-Attribut bevorzugt verwendet werden, um eine Sprache dem Inhalt eines Elements zuzuweisen.

Das <distinct>-Element kann verwendet werden, um Phrasen, die zu Subsprachen, Sprachregister oder Varietäten gehören, auszuzeichnen.

3.3.2.1. Foreign Words or Expressions

<formula>
formula
formule
Formel
contains a mathematical or other formula.
수식 또는 다른 식을 포함한다.
包含數學或其他方程式。
数式を示す。
contient une formule mathématique ou tout autre type de formule
contiene una fórmula matemática o de otro tipo.
contiene una formula matematica o di altra natura.
enthält eine mathematische oder andere Formel.
@notation
"TeX"
Using TeX or LaTeX notation

<formula notation="tex">$E=mc^2$</formula>

<formula notation="none">E=mc<hi rend="sup">2</hi>
   </formula>

<formula notation="mathml">
  <math>
    <mi>E</mi>
    <mo>=</mo>
    <mi>m</mi>
    <msup>
      <mrow>
        <mi>c</mi>
      </mrow>
      <mrow>
        <mn>2</mn>
      </mrow>
    </msup>
  </math>
</formula>

14.2. Formulæ and Mathematical Expressions

<front>
front matter
전면부 내용
正文前資訊
texte préliminaire
Vorspann (front)
paratexto inicial
peritesto iniziale
contains any prefatory matter (headers, abstracts, title page, prefaces, dedications, etc.) found at the start of a document, before the main body.
주 본문 앞에 나타나는 문서의 시작부에서 발견되는 서문 자료(헤더, 제목 페이지, 머리말, 헌정사 등)를 포함한다.
包含位於文件最前端、正文之前的項目 (標頭、題名頁、前言、獻詞等) 。
本文より前、文書の始めにある序文としてあるもの(標題、タイトル、序文、 献辞など)。
contient tout ce qui est au début du document, avant le corps du texte : page de titre, dédicaces, préfaces, etc.
enthält alle dem Textkörper vorangestellten Texte (Überschriften, Abstracts, Titelseite, Vorworte, Widmungen, usw.) zu Beginn eines Dokuments.
contiene cualquier material paratextual (encabezamiento, frontispicio, prefacio, dedicatoria, etc.) que aparece delante del inicio del texto.
contiene qualsiasi materiale peritestuale (intestazioni, frontespizio, prefazioni, dediche, etc.) che si trovi prima dell'inizio del testo vero e proprio

<front>
  <epigraph>
    <quote>Nam Sibyllam quidem Cumis ego ipse oculis meis vidi in ampulla
    pendere, et cum illi pueri dicerent: <q xml:lang="grc">Σίβυλλα τί
    θέλεις</q>; respondebat illa: <q xml:lang="grc">ὰποθανεῖν θέλω.</q>
    </quote>
  </epigraph>
  <div type="dedication">
    <p>For Ezra Pound <q xml:lang="it">il miglior fabbro.</q>
    </p>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <div type="dedication">
    <p>à la mémoire de Raymond Queneau</p>
  </div>
  <div type="avertissement">
    <p>L'amitié, l'histoire et la littérature m'ont fourni quelques-uns
    des.personnages de ce livre. Toute autre ressemblance avec des
    individus vivants ou ayant réellement ou fictivement existé ne
    saurait être que coïncidence.</p>
    <epigraph>
      <quote>Regarde de tous tes yeux, regarde <bibl>(Jules Verne, Michel
      Strogoff )</bibl>
      </quote>
    </epigraph>
  </div>
  <div type="preambule">
    <head>PRÉAMBULE</head>
    <epigraph>
      <quote>
        <q>L'œil suit les chemins qui lui ont été ménagés dans l'oeuvre
        <bibl>(Paul Klee, Pädagosisches Skizzenbuch)</bibl>
        </q>
      </quote>
    </epigraph>
    <p> Au départ, l'art du puzzle semble un art bref, un art mince, tout
    entier contenu dans un maigre enseignement de la Gestalttheorie :
    ...</p>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <div type="preface">
    <head>Préface</head>
    <p>Tant qu'il existera, par le fait des lois et des moeurs, une
    damnation sociale créant artificiellement, en pleine civilisation,
    des enfers, et compliquant d'une fatalité humaine la destinée qui
    est divine ; tant que les trois problèmes du siècle, la dégradation
    de l'homme par le prolétariat, la déchéance de la femme par la faim,
    l'atrophie de l'enfant par la nuit, ne seront pas résolus; tant que,
    dans certaines régions, l'asphyxie sociale sera possible; en
    d'autres termes, et à un point de vue plus étendu encore, tant qu'il
    aura sur la terre ignorance et misère, des livres de la nature de
    celui-ci pourront ne pas être inutiles.</p>
    <closer>
      <dateline>
        <name type="place">Hauteville-House</name>
        <date>1er janvier 1862</date>
      </dateline>
    </closer>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <epigraph>
    <quote>小燕子其實也無所愛，只是沉浸在朦朧而飄忽的夏夜夢里罷了。 </quote>
  </epigraph>
  <div type="dedication">
    <p>《憶》第三十五首</p>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <div type="dedication">
    <p>聲明啟事</p>
  </div>
  <div type="preface">
    <head>作者聲明</head>
    <p>書中所有情節內容皆為虛構，若有雷同，純屬巧合。</p>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <div type="dedication">
    <p>To our three selves</p>
  </div>
  <div type="preface">
    <head>Author's Note</head>
    <p>All the characters in this book are purely imaginary, and if the
    author has used names that may suggest a reference to living persons
    she has done so inadvertently. ...</p>
  </div>
</front>

<front>
  <div type="abstract">
    <div>
      <head> BACKGROUND:</head>
      <p>Food insecurity can put children at greater risk of obesity because
      of altered food choices and nonuniform consumption patterns.</p>
    </div>
    <div>
      <head> OBJECTIVE:</head>
      <p>We examined the association between obesity and both child-level
      food insecurity and personal food insecurity in US children.</p>
    </div>
    <div>
      <head> DESIGN:</head>
      <p>Data from 9,701 participants in the National Health and Nutrition
      Examination Survey, 2001-2010, aged 2 to 11 years were analyzed.
      Child-level food insecurity was assessed with the US Department of
      Agriculture's Food Security Survey Module based on eight
      child-specific questions. Personal food insecurity was assessed with
      five additional questions. Obesity was defined, using physical
      measurements, as body mass index (calculated as kg/m2) greater than
      or equal to the age- and sex-specific 95th percentile of the Centers
      for Disease Control and Prevention growth charts. Logistic
      regressions adjusted for sex, race/ethnic group, poverty level, and
      survey year were conducted to describe associations between obesity
      and food insecurity.</p>
    </div>
    <div>
      <head> RESULTS:</head>
      <p>Obesity was significantly associated with personal food insecurity
      for children aged 6 to 11 years (odds ratio=1.81; 95% CI 1.33 to
      2.48), but not in children aged 2 to 5 years (odds ratio=0.88; 95%
      CI 0.51 to 1.51). Child-level food insecurity was not associated
      with obesity among 2- to 5-year-olds or 6- to 11-year-olds.</p>
    </div>
    <div>
      <head> CONCLUSIONS:</head>
      <p>Personal food insecurity is associated with an increased risk of
      obesity only in children aged 6 to 11 years. Personal
      food-insecurity measures may give different results than aggregate
      food-insecurity measures in children.</p>
    </div>
  </div>
</front>

Because cultural conventions differ as to which elements are grouped as front matter and which as back matter, the content models for the <front> and <back> elements are identical.

Aufgrund von unterschiedlichen kulturellen Konventionen, die Angaben in Vorspann und Nachspann betreffend, sind die Inhaltsmodelle für die Elemente <front> und <back> identisch.

4.6. Title Pages 4. Default Text Structure

<fw>
forme work
조판 작업
印版文字
élément de mise en page
convenciones gráficas.
convenzioni grafiche
contains a running head (e.g. a header, footer), catchword, or similar material appearing on the current page.
현 페이지에 나타나는 현 표제부(예, 머리말, 꼬리말), 색인어, 또는 유사 자료를 포함한다.
包含一個欄外標題 (例如頁眉、頁腳) 、標語、或出現在所標記頁面的類似文字。
版面の周りにある柱やノンブルを示す。
permet d'encoder un titre courant (en haut ou en bas de la page), une réclame ou une autre information comparable, qui apparaît sur la page courante.
contiene un encabezamiento, pie de página, reclamo o similar relativo a la página corriente
contiene intestazione, piè di pagina, reclamo o simili relativi alla pagina corrente
@type
classifies the material encoded according to some useful typology.
유용한 유형에 따라 부호화된 자료를 분류한다.
用合適的分類方法將所標記的內容分類。
符号化された当該部分を分類する。
caractérise l'information encodée conformément à une typologie appropriée.
clasifica las convenciones usadas según una tipología funcional.
classifica le convenzioni usate secondo una tipologia funzionale
"header"
a running title at the top of the page
페이지 상단의 현 제목
頁面頂端的欄外標題
天にタイトル。
un titre courant en haut de la page
título o asunto en el encabezamiento de la página
titolo nell'intestazione di pagina
"footer"
a running title at the bottom of the page
페이지 하단의 제목
頁面底端的欄外標題
地にあるタイトル。
un titre courant en bas de la page
título o asunto a pie de página
titolo nel piè di pagina
"pageNum"
page number
페이지 숫자
página
numéro de page
numero di pagina
a page number or foliation symbol
페이지 숫자 또는 페이지 기호
編頁數號或是編張符號
ノンブル。
un numéro de page ou un symbole de foliotation
numero di pagina o simbolo di foliazione
número de página o símbolo de la foliación
"lineNum"
line number
행 수
número de línea
numéro de ligne
numero di riga
a line number, either of prose or poetry
산문 또는 시에서 행 번호
un número de línea, en prosa o verso
韻文・散文における行番号。
numéro d'une ligne en prose ou en vers
numero di riga di testo in prosa o componimento poetico
"sig"
signature
서명
signatura
firma
a signature or gathering symbol
서명 혹은 서명 기호
signature ou marque de cahier
簽名或是聚集符號
折丁記号。
firma o símbolo común
firma o simbolo comune
"catch"
catchword
색인어
lema
réclame
reclamo
a catch-word
색인어
標語
柱。
une réclame
reclamo
reclamo

<fw type="sig" place="bottom">C3</fw>

<fw type="sig" place="bot">C3</fw>

<fw type="sig" place="bot">徐閱</fw>

Where running heads are consistent throughout a chapter or section, it is usually more convenient to relate them to the chapter or section, e.g. by use of the @rend attribute. The <fw> element is intended for cases where the running head changes from page to page, or where details of page layout and the internal structure of the running heads are of paramount importance.

Quand le titre courant s'applique à tout un chapitre ou une section, il est habituellement plus commode de le relier au chapitre ou à la section, par exemple en utilisant l'attribut @rend. L'élément <fw> est utilisé pour des cas où le titre courant change de page en page ou quand il est primordial de relever des détails de mise en page ou la structure interne des titres courants.

柱に章や節が常に書かれている場合、属性@rendを使い、章や節と対応した方が便利である。柱の内容がページごとに異なる場合、またはページのレイアウトや柱の内部構造が重要である場合に、当該要素<fw>が使用される。

11.6. Headers, Footers, and Similar Matter

<g>
character or glyph
문자 또는 그림문자
文字或字體
caractère ou glyphe
carácter o pictograma
carattere o glifo
represents a glyph, or a non-standard character.
비표준 문자 또는 그림문자를 표시한다.
非標準的文字或字體。
非標準的な文字やグリフを示す。
représente un glyphe, ou un caractère non standard
representa un carácter no estándard o un pictograma.
rapperesenta un carattere o glifo non standard.
@ref
points to a description of the character or glyph intended.
連結到該文字或字體的描述。
当該文字やグリフの解説を参照する。
pointe vers la description du caractère ou du glyphe visé
indica la descripción del carácter o pictograma dado.
punta a una descrizione del carattere o glifo.

<g ref="#ctlig">ct</g>

This example points to a <glyph> element with the identifier ctlig like the following: <glyph xml:id="ctlig"/>

<g ref="#fr_flig">fl</g>

Cet exemple pointe vers un élément<glyph>à l'aide du code identifiantflig comme dans l'exemple suivant : <glyph xml:id="flig"/>

<g ref="#zh-tw_flig">fl</g>

<glyph xml:id="zh-tw_flig"/>

<g ref="#per-glyph">per</g>

The medieval brevigraph per could similarly be considered as an individual glyph, defined in a <glyph> element with the identifier per-glyph as follows: <glyph xml:id="per-glyph"/>

The name g is short for gaiji, which is the Japanese term for a non-standardized character or glyph.

Le nom g de cet élément est une abréviation pour gaiji, qui désigne en Japonais un caractère ou un glyphe non standard.

要素gの要素名は、日本語の「外字」を語源とする gaijiの頭文字である。

5. Characters, Glyphs, and Writing Modes

<gap>
gap
omission
Auslassung
indicates a point where material has been omitted in a transcription, whether for editorial reasons described in the TEI header, as part of sampling practice, or because the material is illegible, invisible, or inaudible.
텍스트 선정 시 TEI 헤더에 기술된 편집 기준 때문에, 또는 읽고 듣기 어렵기 때문에 사본에서 누락된 지점을 가리킨다.
指出轉錄時被省略部分的位置，省略也許是出於 TEI標頭裡描述的編輯上的理由、也許是因為抽樣轉錄而省略、或是因為資料不明難以辨認或聽懂。
TEIヘダーにある編集上の理由、または当該資料が判読できない・聞こえないことを理由に、転記の際に省略された部分の場所を示す。
indique une omission dans une transcription, soit pour des raisons éditoriales décrites dans l'en-tête TEI au cours d’un échantillonnage, soit parce que le matériau est illisible ou inaudible.
indicada un punto donde algún material ha sido omitido en una transcripción, bien por criterios de edición descritos en el cabezado TEI, bien como parte de una práctica habitual, o bien porqué el material es ilegible o incomprensible.
indica un punto in cui del materiale è stato omesso dalla trascrizione, sia per ragioni editoriali descritte nell'intestazione TEI, come pratica di campionatura, sia perché il materiale è illegibile o incomprensibile.
weist in einer Transkription auf eine Stelle hin, in der Text aus der Vorlage ausgelassen worden ist, sei es aus editorischen Gründen, die im TEI-Header beschrieben werden, sei es auf Grund der Auswahlpraxis, sei es weil das Material nicht lesbar, nicht sichtbar oder nicht hörbar ist.
@hand
@reason
reason
Grund
gives the reason for omission
누락의 이유를 제시한다. 그 값의 예들은 다음과 같다: "sampling", "illegible", "inaudible", "irrelevant", "cancelled", "cancelled and illegible"
說明省略的原因。屬性值的例子有"sampling"、、"inaudible"、"irrelevant"、"cancelled"、"cancelled and illegible"。
省略の理由を示す。例えば、 "見本"、"聞こえない"、 "無関係"、"取り消し"、"取り消しがありかつ判読できない"、など。
donne la raison de l'omission
declara la causa de la omisión
indica il motivo dell'omisione
gibt den Grund für die Auslassung an
"cancelled"
cancelled
abgebrochen
cancellato
cancelado
biffé
"deleted"
deleted
getilgt
"editorial"
editorial
for features omitted from transcription due to editorial policy
für Bestandteile, die aus editorischen Gründen nicht übertragen wurden
"illegible"
illegible
unleserlich
illegibile
ilegible
illisible
"inaudible"
inaudible
nicht hörbar
incomprensibile
inaudible
inaudible
"irrelevant"
irrelevant
irrelevant
irrilevante
irrelevante
non pertinent
"sampling"
sampling
Auswahl
campionatura
ejemplificación
échantillonnage
@agent
agent
Ursache
in the case of text omitted because of damage, categorizes the cause of the damage, if it can be identified.
훼손으로 인해 누락된 텍스트의 경우, 확인이 가능하다면 그 훼손 원인을 분류하여 기술한다.
若省略是由於內容遭受損毀，且可識別損毀原因，則針對損毀原因加以分類。
損傷が原因のテキスト省略の場合、特定可能であれば当該損傷を分類する。
lorsque du texte est omis de la transcription en raison d'un dommage, catégorise la cause du dommage, si celle-ci peut être identifiée.
En el caso de texto omitido a causa de algún daño, identifica (si es posible) la causa de tal daño.
nel caso in cui il testo sia stato omesse a causa di danneggiamento, indica la causa del danno qualora possa essere identificata.
bestimmt im Falle von Text, der wegen Beschädigung weggelassen wird, die Ursache für den Schaden, sofern er ermittelt werden kann.
"rubbing"
rubbing
Abrieb
damage results from rubbing of the leaf edges
책장 모서리 마모로 인한 훼손
損毀起因於書頁邊緣摩擦受損
daños resultantes del frotamiento de los bordes de la hoja
葉のこすれによる損傷。
dégâts provoqués par le frottement des bords de la feuille.
il danno è causato da segni di strofinamento sui bordi del foglio
Schaden, verursacht durch Abrieb an den Blatträndern
"mildew"
mildew
Schimmel
damage results from mildew on the leaf surface
곰팡이로 인한 책장 표면의 훼손
損毀起因於書頁表面發霉
daños resultantes de la acción del moho en la superficie de la hoja
葉の表面に付いた白カビによる損傷。
dégâts provoqués par de la moisissure sur la surface de feuille.
il danno è causato da macchie di umido sulla superficie del foglio
Schaden, verursacht durch Schimmelbefall
"smoke"
smoke
Ruß/Rauch
damage results from smoke
연기로 그을린 훼손
損毀起因於煙燻
daños provocados porl humo
煙による損傷。
dégâts provoqués par de la fumée.
il danno è causato dal fumo
Schaden, verursacht durch Ruß/Rauch
color: grey; content: '[..'; content: '..]'; color: grey; content: '[...]';

<gap quantity="4" unit="chars" reason="illegible"/>

<gap quantity="4" unit="chars" reason="illegible"/>

<gap quantity="1" unit="essay" reason="sampling"/>

<gap quantity="4" unit="字" reason="無法識讀"/>

<gap quantity="1" unit="文章" reason="抽樣"/>

<gap quantity="1" unit="essay" reason="sampling"/>

<del>
  <gap atLeast="4" atMost="8" unit="chars" reason="illegible"/>
</del>

<gap extent="several lines" reason="lost"/>

The <gap>, <unclear>, and <del> core tag elements may be closely allied in use with the <damage> and <supplied> elements, available when using the additional tagset for transcription of primary sources. See section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination for discussion of which element is appropriate for which circumstance.

The <gap> tag simply signals the editors decision to omit or inability to transcribe a span of text. Other information, such as the interpretation that text was deliberately erased or covered, should be indicated using the relevant tags, such as <del> in the case of deliberate deletion.

Les éléments du jeu de balises de base <gap>, <unclear>, et <del> peuvent être étroitement associés avec l'utilisation des éléments <damage> et <supplied> qui sont disponibles si l'on utilise le jeu de balises additionnel pour la transcription des sources primaires. Voir la section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination pour plus de détails sur l'élément le plus pertinent suivant les circonstances.

El <gap>, <unclear>, y los elementos de la etiqueta base pueden funcionar con los elementos de <daño> y elementos de <supresión>, disponibles al usar el conjunto de etiquetas adicional para la transcripción de las fuentes primarias. Ver la sección 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination para la discusión cuyo el elemento es apropiado para qué circunstancia.

コアモジュールの要素<gap>, <unclear>, <del>は、 転記モジュールの要素<damage>, <supplied>と連携するこ とができる。どのタグを使用すべきかについては、詳細については、 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combinationを参照のこと。

Die Elemente <gap>, <unclear> und <del> aus dem Core-Modul sind eng verwandt mit den Elementen <damage> und <supplied>, die mit dem transcr zur Verfügung gestellt werden. Die Unterschiede im Gebrauch dieser Elemente werden in 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination näher beschrieben.

Das <gap>-Element weist nur darauf hin, dass die Bearbeiter*innen sich entschieden haben, eine Textpassage auszulassen oder sie nicht transkribieren konnten. Ergänzende Informationen, wie die Interpretation, dass der Text absichtlich unlesbar gemacht wurde, sollten über die einschlägigen Elemente, wie z. B. <del> im Fall einer bewussten Tilgung ausgezeichnet werden.

3.5.3. Additions, Deletions, and Omissions

<graphic>
graphic
Abbildung
indicates the location of a graphic or illustration, either forming part of a text, or providing an image of it.
인라인 그래픽, 삽화, 또는 도형의 위치를 표시한다.
指出文字文件中內含的圖形、插圖、或圖表的位置。
テキスト列中にある図、絵、図表の場所を示す。
indique l'emplacement d'une image, d'une illustration ou d'un schéma intégrés.
indica la localización de un gráfico, ilustración o figura.
indica la posizione di un grafico, di una illustrazione o immagine.
gibt den Ort einer Bildressource an, die entweder Teil eines Texts oder ein Abbild dessen ist.

<figure>
  <graphic url="fig1.png"/>
  <head>Figure One: The View from the Bridge</head>
  <figDesc>A Whistleresque view showing four or five sailing boats in the foreground, and a
    series of buoys strung out between them.</figDesc>
</figure>

<figure>
  <graphic url="fig1.png"/>
  <head>Figure Une : Jan van Eyck, La Vierge du chancelier Rolin</head>
  <p>Si, attiré par la curiosité, on a l'imprudence de l'approcher d'un peu trop prés, c'est fini, on est pris pour tout le temps que peut durer l'effort d'une attention soutenue ; on s'extasie devant la finesse du détail ...    il va toujours plus loin, franchit une à une les croupes des collines verdoyantes ; se  repose un moment sur une ligne lointaine de montagnes neigeuses; pour se perdre ensuite   dans l'infini d'un ciel à peine bleu, où s'estompent de flottantes nuées. </p>
</figure>

<figure>
  <graphic url="fig1.png"/>
  <head>維納斯</head>
  <figDesc> 波提且利 1484-1486年 畫布、蛋彩 佛羅倫斯，烏菲滋美術館</figDesc>
</figure>

<facsimile>
  <surfaceGrp n="leaf1">
    <surface>
      <graphic url="page1.png"/>
    </surface>
    <surface>
      <graphic url="page2-highRes.png"/>
      <graphic url="page2-lowRes.png"/>
    </surface>
  </surfaceGrp>
</facsimile>

<facsimile>
  <surfaceGrp n="leaf1" xml:id="spi001">
    <surface xml:id="spi001r">
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="thumbnail" url="spi/thumb/001r.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="low-res" url="spi/normal/lowRes/001r.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="high-res" url="spi/normal/highRes/001r.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="low-res" url="spi/contrast/lowRes/001r.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="high-res" url="spi/contrast/highRes/001r.jpg"/>
    </surface>
    <surface xml:id="spi001v">
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="thumbnail" url="spi/thumb/001v.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="low-res" url="spi/normal/lowRes/001v.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="normal" subtype="high-res" url="spi/normal/highRes/001v.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="low-res" url="spi/contrast/lowRes/001v.jpg"/>
      <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="high-res" url="spi/contrast/highRes/001v.jpg"/>
      <zone xml:id="spi001v_detail01">
        <graphic type="normal" subtype="thumbnail" url="spi/thumb/001v-detail01.jpg"/>
        <graphic type="normal" subtype="low-res" url="spi/normal/lowRes/001v-detail01.jpg"/>
        <graphic type="normal" subtype="high-res" url="spi/normal/highRes/001v-detail01.jpg"/>
        <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="low-res" url="spi/contrast/lowRes/001v-detail01.jpg"/>
        <graphic type="high-contrast" subtype="high-res" url="spi/contrast/highRes/001v-detail01.jpg"/>
      </zone>
    </surface>
  </surfaceGrp>
</facsimile>

The @mimeType attribute should be used to supply the MIME media type of the image specified by the @url attribute.

Within the body of a text, a <graphic> element indicates the presence of a graphic component in the source itself. Within the context of a <facsimile> or <sourceDoc> element, however, a <graphic> element provides an additional digital representation of some part of the source being encoded.

L'attribut @mimeType doit être utilisé pour spécifier le type MIME de l'image référencée par l'attribut @url.

属性@mimeTypeは、属性@urlが指定する画像のMIME タイプを示すために使われるべきである。

Das @mimeType-Attribut sollte genutzt werden, um den MIME Medientyp des über das @url-Attributs spezifizierten Bildes anzugeben. Innerhalb des Textkörpers gibt das <graphic>-Element das Vorkommen eines Bildes oder einer Illustration in der Textvorlage an. Innerhalb eines <sourceDoc>- oder <facsimile>-Elements dagegen gibt das <graphic>-Element eine zusätzliche Repräsentation (eines Teils) der Vorlage wieder.

3.10. Graphics and Other Non-textual Components 11.1. Digital Facsimiles

<group>
group
groupe
Gruppierung
contains the body of a composite text, grouping together a sequence of distinct texts (or groups of such texts) which are regarded as a unit for some purpose, for example the collected works of an author, a sequence of prose essays, etc.
어떤 목적의 단위로 간주되는 일련의 서로 다른 텍스트(또는 그러한 텍스트군)를 모아 놓은 혼합 텍스트의 본문을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 한 작가의 선집, 일련의 수필 등.
包含複合文本的正文，所匯集的一連串單一文件 (或文件群組) ，因為某特殊目的被視為一個整體，例如一個作者的作品集合、一連串的散文集等。
ある単位として独立している個別テキストをまとめた複合テキストを示す。 例えば、ある著者の作品集やエッセイ集など。
contient un ensemble de textes distincts (ou des groupes de textes de ce type), considérés comme formant une unité, par exemple pour présenter les œuvres complètes d’un auteur, une suite d’essais en prose, etc.
enthält den Textkörper eines aus mehreren Einzeltexten bestehenden Textes, (oder eine Reihe solcher Texte), die zusammen als Einheit gesehen werden, zum Beispiel die gesammelten Werke eines Autors, eine Reihe von Prosastücken, etc.
contiene el cuerpo de un texto compuesto, es decir, que agrupa un conjunto de textos distintos (o grupos de textos) considerados como una unidad por criterios determinados, por ejemplo la obra completa de un autor, una serie de ensayos, etc.
contiene il corpo di un testo composito, che raggruppa cioè un insieme di testi distinti (o più insiemi di testi) considerati come unità per determinati scopi, per esempio l'opera completa di un autore, una serie di saggi, ecc.

<text>

  <front/>
  <group>
    <text/>
    <text/>
  </group>
</text>

<TEI>
  <teiHeader/>
  <text>
    <front/>
    <group>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>

    </group>
    <back/>
  </text>
</TEI>

4. Default Text Structure 4.3.1. Grouped Texts 15.1. Varieties of Composite Text

<head>
heading
표제부
標題
en-tête
encabezamiento
titolo
Überschrift
contains any type of heading, for example the title of a section, or the heading of a list, glossary, manuscript description, etc.
예를 들어 절의 제목 또는 용어집, 원고 기술의 제목 등과 같이 표제부 유형을 포함한다.
包含任何種類的標題，如章節、列表、詞彙表、寫本描述等的標題。
各種の見出しを示す。例えば、節のタイトル、リストや用語集、手書き資料 の解説などにある見出し。
contient tout type d'en-tête, par exemple le titre d'une section, ou l'intitulé d'une liste, d'un glossaire, d'une description de manuscrit, etc.
contiene cualquier tipo de encabezamiento, por ejemplo el título de una sección o el encabezado de una lista, glosario, descripción de un manuscrito, etc.
contiene qualsiasi tipo di titolo, per esempio il titolo di una sezione, di una lista, di un glossario, di una descrizione di manoscritto, ecc.
enthält eine beliebige Art von Überschrift, z. B. eines Kapitels, einer Liste, eines Glossars oder einer Handschriftenbeschreibung.
font-style: italic; font-style: italic; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;

The most common use for the <head> element is to mark the headings of sections. In older writings, the headings or incipits may be rather longer than usual in modern works. If a section has an explicit ending as well as a heading, it should be marked as a <trailer>, as in this example:

<div1 n="I" type="book">
  <head>In the name of Christ here begins the first book of the ecclesiastical history of
    Georgius Florentinus, known as Gregory, Bishop of Tours.</head>
  <div2 type="section">
    <head>In the name of Christ here begins Book I of the history.</head>
    <p>Proposing as I do ...</p>
    <p>From the Passion of our Lord until the death of Saint Martin four hundred and twelve
      years passed.</p>
    <trailer>Here ends the first Book, which covers five thousand, five hundred and ninety-six
      years from the beginning of the world down to the death of Saint Martin.</trailer>
  </div2>
</div1>

Die häufigste Verwendung von <head>-Elementen ist es, Überschriften von Abschnitten zu kennzeichnen. In älteren Schriften können die Überschriften oder Incipits länger sein, als es in modernen Werken üblich ist. Wenn ein Abschnitt eine explizite Endung und eine Überschrift hat, sollte die Endung mit dem <trailer>-Element markiert werden, wie in diesem Beispiel:

<div1 n="I" type="book">
  <head>In the name of Christ here begins the first book of the ecclesiastical history of
    Georgius Florentinus, known as Gregory, Bishop of Tours.</head>
  <div2 type="section">
    <head>In the name of Christ here begins Book I of the history.</head>
    <p>Proposing as I do ...</p>
    <p>From the Passion of our Lord until the death of Saint Martin four hundred and twelve
      years passed.</p>
    <trailer>Here ends the first Book, which covers five thousand, five hundred and ninety-six
      years from the beginning of the world down to the death of Saint Martin.</trailer>
  </div2>
</div1>

When headings are not inline with the running text (see e.g. the heading "Secunda conclusio") they might however be encoded as if. The actual placement in the source document can be captured with the @place attribute.

<div type="subsection">
  <head place="margin">Secunda conclusio</head>
  <p>
    <lb n="1251"/><hi rend="large">Potencia: habitus: et actus: recipiunt speciem ab obiectis<supplied>.</supplied></hi>
    <lb n="1252"/>Probatur sic. Omne importans necessariam habitudinem ad proprium
    [...]
  </p>
</div>

L'élément<head>est employé habituellement pour marquer les titres de sections. Dans d'anciens textes , les titres des textes conclusifs seront précédés de l'élément <trailer>, comme dans cet exemple :

<div type="chapitre">
  <head>Les Mille et une Nuits</head>
  <p>LES chroniques des Sassaniens, anciens rois de Perse, qui avaient étendu leur empire
      dans les Indes, [...]</p>
  <div type="histoire">
    <head>Histoire du Vizir puni</head>
    <p>IL était autrefois un roi, poursuivit-il, qui avait un<lb/> fils qui aimait
        passionnément la chasse. Il lui permettait<lb/> de prendre souvent ce divertissement ;
        [...] </p>
  </div>
</div>
<trailer>
  <hi rend="majuscule">fin du tome premier.</hi>
</trailer>

L'élément <head> est aussi employé pour donner un titre à d'autres éléments, dans une liste par exemple :

Les déictiques
       sont des termes qui ne prennent leur sens que dans le cadre de la situation d'énonciation.
         <list rend="bulleted"><head>déictiques</head><item>ici</item><item>hier</item><item>là</item><item>je</item><item>tu</item><item>nous</item><item>vous</item><item/></list>

<div1 n="I" type="book">
  <head>三國演義</head>
  <div2 type="section">
    <head>第一回 宴桃園豪杰三結義 斬黃巾英雄首立功</head>
    <p>滾滾長江東逝水，浪花淘盡英雄。是非成敗轉頭空。 青山依舊在，几度夕陽紅。 白發漁樵江渚上，慣看秋月春風。一壺濁酒喜相逢。古今多少事，都付笑談中。</p>
    <p>話說天下大勢，分久必合，合久必分。周末七國分爭，并入于秦。...</p>
    <trailer>三人救了董卓回寨。卓問三人現居何職。玄德曰：白身。...畢竟董卓性命如何，且听下文分解。</trailer>
  </div2>
</div1>

除了少數特例，連接詞均用於所有論述，例如描述、記敘、闡述、論說。<list rend="bulleted"><head>連接詞</head><item>上述的</item><item>因此</item><item>在…的對面</item><item>比鄰於</item><item>再次</item><item/></list>

The <head> element is also used to mark headings of other units, such as lists:

With a few exceptions, connectives are equally
useful in all kinds of discourse: description, narration, exposition, argument. <list rend="bulleted"><head>Connectives</head><item>above</item><item>accordingly</item><item>across from</item><item>adjacent to</item><item>again</item><item/></list>

Das <head>-Element wird auch verwendet, um Überschriften anderer Einheiten zu markieren, wie z. B. Listen:

With a few exceptions, connectives are equally
useful in all kinds of discourse: description, narration, exposition, argument. <list rend="bulleted"><head>Connectives</head><item>above</item><item>accordingly</item><item>across from</item><item>adjacent to</item><item>again</item><item/></list>

The <head> element is used for headings at all levels; software which treats (e.g.) chapter headings, section headings, and list titles differently must determine the proper processing of a <head> element based on its structural position. A <head> occurring as the first element of a list is the title of that list; one occurring as the first element of a <div1> is the title of that chapter or section.

L'élément <head> est utilisé pour les titres de tous niveaux ; un logiciel qui traitera différemment, par exemple, les titres de chapitres, les titres de sections et les titres de listes, devra déterminer le traitement approprié de l'élément <head> rencontré en fonction de sa position dans la structure XML. Un élément <head> qui est le premier élément d'une liste est le titre de cette liste ; si l'élément <head> apparaît comme le premier élément d'un élément <div1>, il sera considéré comme le titre de ce chapitre ou de cette section.

要素<head>は、各種レベル上にある見出しに使用される。例えば、 章や節、リストの見出しを扱うソフトウェアは、構造中の場所により要素 <head>の扱いを適切に行う必要がある。要素<head>が、リス トの第一項目に出現した場合、それは当該リストのタイトルになる。例えば、要素<div1>の第一項目として当該要素が出現した場合、それは章ま たは節の見出しとされる。

Das <head>-Element wird für Überschriften jeder Hierarchiestufe verwendet; Software, die zwischen Kapitelüberschriften, Abschnittsüberschriften und Listenbezeichnern unterscheidet, muss die entsprechende Zuordnung aus der Position des <head>-Elements in der Textstruktur ableiten. Ein <head>-Element, das als erstes Element einer Liste erscheint, ist der Listenbezeichner; ein <head>-Element, das am Beginn einer mit <div1> bezeichneten Struktur steht, ist die Überschrift dieses Kapitels oder Abschnitts.

4.2.1. Headings and Trailers

<hi>
highlighted
강조체
顯目標示
mis en évidence
subrayado
evidenziato
hervorgehoben
marks a word or phrase as graphically distinct from the surrounding text, for reasons concerning which no claim is made.
어떤 이유인지는 명세하지 않고, 주변 텍스트와 시각적으로 구별된 단어나 구를 표시한다.
標誌其字型外觀上和週遭文字有所區別的字詞，但不指出顯目原因。
周囲のテキストとは見た目が異なっている語句を示す。
distingue un mot ou une expression comme graphiquement distincte du texte environnant, sans en donner la raison.
marca una palabra o frase gráficamente diferente del resto del texto que la circunda, por causas sobre las que no se hace ninguna declaracion.
codifica una parola o sintagma in quanto graficamente distinta dal testo circostante, senza che vengano specificate le ragioni dell'evidenziazione.
markiert ein Wort oder eine Textpassage, das/die sich grafisch vom umgebenden Text abhebt, ohne dass ein inhaltlicher Grund dafür angegeben wird.
font-style: italic; font-style: italic;

<hi rend="gothic">And this Indenture further witnesseth</hi>
that the said <hi rend="italic">Walter Shandy</hi>, merchant,
in consideration of the said intended marriage ...

<p>Au fronton, on lit cette inscription : <hi rend="uppercase">attends. Tu verras.</hi> Le
    notaire encore prétend qu' elle ne saurait être antérieure au XVIII siècle, car, sinon, l'
    on eût écrit --<q>tu voiras</q>--. </p>

我的先生很可惜是一個<hi rend="italic">外國人</hi>。這樣來稱呼自己的先生不免有<hi rend="bold">排外</hi>的味道，但是因為語文和風俗在各國之間确有大不相同之處，我們的婚姻生活也實在有許多無法共通的地方。...

3.3.2.2. Emphatic Words and Phrases 3.3.2. Emphasis, Foreign Words, and Unusual Language

<imprimatur>
imprimatur
Imprimatur
contains a formal statement authorizing the publication of a work, sometimes required to appear on a title page or its verso.
작품 출판을 인가하는 공식적 진술. 이는 제목 페이지 또는 그 이면에 나타나도록 종종 요구된다.
包含作品出版的正式授權聲明，有時必須出現在題名頁或反頁上。
作品の出版に関する公式の情報を示す。場合によっては、タイトルページや その左ページに出現する必要がある。
contient une mention formalisée autorisant la publication d’un ouvrage, parfois exigée sur une page de titre ou à son verso.
enthält eine formelle Erklärung zur Autorisation der Veröffentlichung, die manchmal auf der Titel- oder Rückseite erscheinen muss.
contiene una declaración formal que autoriza la publicazione de una obra, normalmente contenida en el recto o en el verso del frontispicio.
contiene una dichiarazione formale che autorizza la pubblicazione di un'opera, di solito riportata sul recto o sul verso del frontespizio

<imprimatur>Licensed and entred acording to Order.</imprimatur>

<imprimatur>Paris, 20 juin 1968; E. Berrat, Vicaire général.</imprimatur>

<imprimatur>版權所有 翻印必究</imprimatur>

4.6. Title Pages

<item>
item
Listenpunkt
contains one component of a list.
목록에서 하나의 성분을 포함한다.
包含列表中的一個項目。
リストのいち項目を示す。
contient un composant d'une liste.
contiene un componente de una lista.
contiene un componente di una lista
enthält einen Listenpunkt.

<list rend="numbered">
  <head>Here begin the chapter headings of Book IV</head>
  <item n="4.1">The death of Queen Clotild.</item>
  <item n="4.2">How King Lothar wanted to appropriate one third of the Church revenues.</item>
  <item n="4.3">The wives and children of Lothar.</item>
  <item n="4.4">The Counts of the Bretons.</item>
  <item n="4.5">Saint Gall the Bishop.</item>
  <item n="4.6">The priest Cato.</item>
  <item> ...</item>
</list>

<list type="unordered">
  <head>Tentative d'inventaire de quelques-unes des choses qui ont été trouvées dans
        les escaliers au fil des ans.</head>
  <item>Plusieurs photos, dont celle d'une jeune fille de quinze<lb/> ans vêtue d'un slip
        de bain noir et d'un chandail blanc, agenouillée sur une plage,</item>
  <item>un réveil radio de toute évidence destiné à un réparateur, dans un sac plastique
        des établissements Nicolas,</item>
  <item>un soulier noir orné de brillants,</item>
  <item>une mule en chevreau doré,</item>
  <item>une boîte de pastilles Géraudel contre la toux.</item>
</list>

<list rend="numbered">
  <head>以下為第三部份的各個章節標題</head>
  <item n="3.1">人物的鑑賞</item>
  <item n="3.2">情節的鑑賞</item>
  <item n="3.3">環境的鑑賞</item>
  <item n="3.4">主題的鑑賞</item>
  <item n="3.5">語言的鑑賞</item>
  <item> ...</item>
</list>

May contain simple prose or a sequence of chunks.

Whatever string of characters is used to label a list item in the copy text may be used as the value of the global @n attribute, but it is not required that numbering be recorded explicitly. In ordered lists, the @n attribute on the <item> element is by definition synonymous with the use of the <label> element to record the enumerator of the list item. In glossary lists, however, the term being defined should be given with the <label> element, not @n.

Peut contenir un texte ou une succession d'extraits.

Toute chaîne de caractères utilisée pour étiqueter un item de liste dans le texte peut être utilisée comme valeur de l'attribut global @n, mais il n'est pas obligatoire de noter explicitement cette numérotation. Dans les listes ordonnées, l'attribut @n de l'élément <item> est par définition synonyme de l'utilisation de l'élément <label> pour noter le numéro de l'item de la liste. Pour les glossaires toutefois, le terme défini doit être donné avec l'élément <label>, et non pas @n.

散文または文塊を示す。

文字列が元資料中にあるリスト項目のラベルを表すために使用される使わ れる場合、グローバル属性@nの値として使用されるかもしれない。しかし、この数は明記される必要はない。 順序付きリストの場合、要素<item>の属性@nは、リスト項目の数を示す要素<label>と同じ意味で使用されている。 用語集の場合、当該要素は、属性@nではなく、要素 <label>と共に使用されるべきである。

Kann einen einfachen Fließtext enthalten oder eine Sequenz von Chunks.

Welche Zeichenfolge auch immer für die Kennzeichnung eines Listenpunkts in der Vorlage benutzt wird, kann als Wert des globalen @n-Attributs verwendet werden, dabei muss die Nummerierung nicht notwendigerweise erfasst werden. In geordneten Listen ist das @n-Attribut des <item>-Elements per Definition synonym mit dem Gebrauch des <label>-Elements, um den Zähler des Listenpunkts zu erfassen. In Glossarlisten sollte der zu definierende Term im <label>-Element und nicht im @n-Attribut angegeben werden.

3.8. Lists 2.6. The Revision Description

<l>
verse line
운문 시행
詩行
vers
verso
verso
Vers(zeile)
contains a single, possibly incomplete, line of verse.
미완성일 수도 있지만 운문의 하나의 시행을 포함한다.
包含詩文的一行，也許是不完整的詩行。
韻文中の1行を示す。行として完全でない場合もある。
contient un seul vers, éventuellement incomplet.
contiene un único verso, posiblemente incompleto.
contiene un singolo verso, anche incompleto.
enthält eine einzelne, möglicherweise unvollständige, Verszeile.
Abstract model violation: Lines may not contain lines or lg elements. margin-left: 1em;

<argument>
  <l>With ſighs and tears her love he doth deſire,</l>
  <l>Since Cupid hath his ſenſes ſet on fire;</l>
  <l>His torment and his pain to her he ſhews,</l>
  <l>With all his proteſtations and his vows:</l>
  <l>At laſt ſhe yields to grant him ſome relief,</l>
  <l>And make him joyful after all his grief.</l>
</argument>

3.13.1. Core Tags for Verse 3.13. Passages of Verse or Drama 7.2.5. Speech Contents

<label>
label
étiquette
Label
contains any label or heading used to identify part of a text, typically but not exclusively in a list or glossary.
목록의 항목과 관련된 표지를 포함한다; 용어집에서는 정의되고 있는 용어를 표지한다.
包含和列表中某項目相關聯的標號；在詞彙表中則用來標記被定義的字詞。
リスト中の項目に関連するラベルを示す。用語集においては、定義される用 語を示す。
contient l'étiquette attachée à un item dans une liste ; dans les glossaires, il marque le terme qui est défini.
contiene un concepto o enunciado asociado con un ítem en una lista; en un glosario marca el término que se define.
contiene l'etichetta associata ad una voce in una lista; nei glossari indica il dermine che viene definito
enthält ein Label oder eine Überschrift zur Identifikation eines Textteils, insbesondere in einer Liste oder einem Glossar.

Labels are commonly used for the headwords in glossary lists; note the use of the global @xml:lang attribute to set the default language of the glossary list to Middle English, and identify the glosses and headings as modern English or Latin:

<list type="gloss" xml:lang="enm">
  <head xml:lang="en">Vocabulary</head>
  <headLabel xml:lang="en">Middle English</headLabel>
  <headItem xml:lang="en">New English</headItem>
  <label>nu</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">now</item>
  <label>lhude</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">loudly</item>
  <label>bloweth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">blooms</item>
  <label>med</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">meadow</item>
  <label>wude</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">wood</item>
  <label>awe</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">ewe</item>
  <label>lhouth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">lows</item>
  <label>sterteth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">bounds, frisks (cf. <cit><ref>Chaucer, K.T.644</ref><quote>a courser, <term>sterting</term>as the fyr</quote></cit>
      </item>
  <label>verteth</label>
  <item xml:lang="la">pedit</item>
  <label>murie</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">merrily</item>
  <label>swik</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">cease</item>
  <label>naver</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">never</item>
</list>

Labels werden häufig für Schlagwörter in Glossaren verwendet; Beachten Sie die Verwendung des globalen @xml:lang-Attributs, um die Standardsprache des Glossars auf Mittelenglisch zu setzen sowie die Glossen und Überschriften als modernes Englisch oder Latein zu identifizieren:

<list type="gloss" xml:lang="enm">
  <head xml:lang="en">Vocabulary</head>
  <headLabel xml:lang="en">Middle English</headLabel>
  <headItem xml:lang="en">New English</headItem>
  <label>nu</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">now</item>
  <label>lhude</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">loudly</item>
  <label>bloweth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">blooms</item>
  <label>med</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">meadow</item>
  <label>wude</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">wood</item>
  <label>awe</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">ewe</item>
  <label>lhouth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">lows</item>
  <label>sterteth</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">bounds, frisks (cf. <cit><ref>Chaucer, K.T.644</ref><quote>a courser, <term>sterting</term>as the fyr</quote></cit>
  </item>
  <label>verteth</label>
  <item xml:lang="la">pedit</item>
  <label>murie</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">merrily</item>
  <label>swik</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">cease</item>
  <label>naver</label>
  <item xml:lang="en">never</item>
</list>

<label> est souvent employé pour identifier les mots dans des listes de glossaire ; on note l'utilisation de l’attribut global @xml:lang : l'ancien français est la langue par défaut du glossaire

<list type="gloss" xml:lang="fro">
  <head xml:lang="en">Vocabulaire</head>
  <headLabel xml:lang="fr">Ancien français</headLabel>
  <headItem xml:lang="fr">Français moderne</headItem>
  <label>amerté</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">amertume</item>
  <label>barquer</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">conduire une barque</item>
  <label>biberon</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">goulot d'un vase.</item>
  <label>bugle</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">jeune boeuf</item>
  <label>cestui</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">celui-ci</item>
  <label>chaitiveté</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">captivité</item>
  <label>duire</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">conduire</item>
  <label>dangier</label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">puissance, pouvoir</item>
  <label>sangler</label>
  <item xml:lang="la">singularis</item>
  <label>vespre </label>
  <item xml:lang="fr">tombée du jour (cf. <cit><ref>Lexique de Godefroy</ref><quote>de hautes vespres : tard dans la soirée.</quote></cit>)</item>
</list>

On emploie aussi <label> pour enregistrer le classement alphanumérique d'items dans des listes ordonnées.

L’unité mixte de
       recherche ATILF (Analyse et Traitement Informatique de la Langue Française) propose 3 types
       de ressources : <list rend="runon" type="ordered"><label>(1)</label><item>Des ressources linguistiques publiées.</item><label>(2) </label><item>Des ressources linguistiques informatisées.</item><label>(3) </label><item>Des ressources linguistiques logicielles.</item></list>

On emploie aussi <label> dans d'autres listes structurées, comme dans cet extrait du journal de Jules Renard.

<list type="gloss">
  <label>1er janvier..</label>
  <item> L'esprit inquiet mais clairvoyant, c'est-à-dire actif et sain, de l'homme qui ne
      travaille pas.</item>
  <label>7 janvier. </label>
  <item>On parle de Syveton. Elle aussi se rappelle avoir été, petite fille, poursuivie par
      un homme tout décolleté du bas et qu'on appelait l'homme au nez rouge. </item>
  <label>9 janvier. </label>
  <item>Jaurès dit que Syveton n'avait aucun intérêt à se tuer mais, à y regarder de près,
      oui, en cherchant bien, on trouve que nous avons tous un intérêt quelconque à nous tuer. </item>
  <label>13 janvier. </label>
  <item>Dans mon coeur froid, quelques rares jolis sentiments, comme des oiseaux aux petites
      pattes sur de la neige.</item>
</list>

<list type="gloss" xml:lang="zh">
  <head xml:lang="zh">字彙</head>
  <headLabel xml:lang="zh-CN">簡體中文</headLabel>
  <headItem xml:lang="zh-TW">繁體中文</headItem>
  <label>尘</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">塵</item>
  <label>业</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">業</item>
  <label>处</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">處</item>
  <label>个</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">個</item>
  <label>与</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">與</item>
  <label>军队</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">軍隊</item>
  <label>疏远</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">疏遠</item>
  <label>后汉</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">後漢<cit><ref>出師表</ref><quote>亲近小人，疏远贤臣，这是<term>后汉</term>所以倾覆衰败的原因</quote></cit>
      </item>
  <label>叹息</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">嘆息</item>
  <label>认为</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">認為</item>
  <label>诚实</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">誠實</item>
  <label>获得</label>
  <item xml:lang="zh-TW">獲得</item>
</list>

有關本書的版權問題，我做出以下兩點聲明。<list rend="runon" type="ordered"><label>(1)</label><item>未經授權許可，請勿擅自複印。</item><label>(2) </label><item>歡迎學術引用本文，然請詳細標明出處。</item></list>

<list type="gloss">
  <label>一</label>
  <item>今天晚上，很好的月光。 我不見他，已是三十多年；今天見了，精神分外爽快。...</item>
  <label>二</label>
  <item>今天全沒月光，我知道不妙。早上小心出門，趙貴翁的眼色便怪：似乎怕我，似乎想害我。還有七八個人，交頭接耳的議論我，...</item>
  <label>三</label>
  <item>...我翻開歷史一查，這歷史沒有年代，歪歪斜斜的每葉上都寫著“仁義道德”几個字。我橫豎睡不著，仔細看了半夜，才從字縫里看出字來，滿本都寫著兩個字是<q xml:lang="och">喫人</q>！書上寫著這許多字，佃戶說了這許多話，卻都笑吟吟的睜著怪眼看我。我也是人，他們想要吃我了！ </item>
  <label>六</label>
  <item>黑漆漆的，不知是日是夜。趙家的狗又叫起來了。 獅子似的凶心，兔子的怯弱，狐狸的狡猾，…… </item>
</list>

Labels may also be used to record explicitly the numbers or letters which mark list items in ordered lists, as in this extract from Gibbon's Autobiography. In this usage the <label> element is synonymous with the @n attribute on the <item> element:

I will add two facts, which have seldom occurred
in the composition of six, or at least of five quartos. <list rend="runon" type="ordered"><label>(1)</label><item>My first rough manuscript, without any intermediate copy, has been sent to the press.</item><label>(2) </label><item>Not a sheet has been seen by any human eyes, excepting those of the author and the
    printer: the faults and the merits are exclusively my own.</item></list>

Labels können auch verwendet werden, um die Zahlen oder Buchstaben explizit zu erfassen, die Listenelemente in geordneten Listen markieren – wie in diesem Auszug aus Gibbons Autobiographie. In diesem Fall ist das <label>-Element gleichbedeutend mit dem @n-Attribut des <item>-Elements:

I will add two facts, which have seldom occurred
in the composition of six, or at least of five quartos. <list rend="runon" type="ordered"><label>(1)</label><item>My first rough manuscript, without any intermediate copy, has been sent to the press.</item><label>(2) </label><item>Not a sheet has been seen by any human eyes, excepting those of the author and the
  printer: the faults and the merits are exclusively my own.</item></list>

Labels may also be used for other structured list items, as in this extract from the journal of Edward Gibbon:

<list type="gloss">
  <label>March 1757.</label>
  <item>I wrote some critical observations upon Plautus.</item>
  <label>March 8th.</label>
  <item>I wrote a long dissertation upon some lines of Virgil.</item>
  <label>June.</label>
  <item>I saw Mademoiselle Curchod — <quote xml:lang="la">Omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus
    amori.</quote>
      </item>
  <label>August.</label>
  <item>I went to Crassy, and staid two days.</item>
</list>

Note that the <label> might also appear within the <item> rather than as its sibling. Though syntactically valid, this usage is not recommended TEI practice.

Labels können auch für andere strukturierte Listenelemente verwendet werden, wie in diesem Auszug aus der Zeitschrift von Edward Gibbon:

<list type="gloss">
  <label>March 1757.</label>
  <item>I wrote some critical observations upon Plautus.</item>
  <label>March 8th.</label>
  <item>I wrote a long dissertation upon some lines of Virgil.</item>
  <label>June.</label>
  <item>I saw Mademoiselle Curchod — <quote xml:lang="la">Omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus
    amori.</quote>
  </item>
  <label>August.</label>
  <item>I went to Crassy, and staid two days.</item>
</list>

Das <label>-Element kann auch innerhalb des <item>-Elements, anstatt als sein Geschwisterelement, vorkommen. Obwohl syntaktisch gültig, wird diese Verwendung von der TEI nicht empfohlen.

Labels may also be used to represent a label or heading attached to a paragraph or sequence of paragraphs not treated as a structural division, or to a group of verse lines. Note that, in this case, the <label> element appears within the <p> or <lg> element, rather than as a preceding sibling of it.

      <p>[...]
<lb/>&amp; n’entrer en mauuais &amp; mal-heu-
<lb/>ré meſnage. Or des que le conſente-
<lb/>ment des parties y eſt le mariage eſt
<lb/> arreſté, quoy que de faict il ne ſoit
<label place="margin">Puiſſance maritale
entre les Romains.</label>
            <lb/> conſommé. Depuis la conſomma-
<lb/>tion du mariage la femme eſt ſoubs
<lb/> la puiſſance du mary, s’il n’eſt eſcla-
<lb/>ue ou enfant de famille : car en ce
<lb/> cas, la femme, qui a eſpouſé vn en-
<lb/>fant de famille, eſt ſous la puiſſance
[...]</p>

In this example the text of the label appears in the right hand margin of the original source, next to the paragraph it describes, but approximately in the middle of it.

If so desired the @type attribute may be used to distinguish different categories of label.

Das <label>-Element kann auch verwendet werden, um ein Label oder eine Überschrift zu kennzeichnen, die an einen Absatz oder eine Abfolge von Absätzen gebunden sind, die nicht als struktureller Abschnitt oder Gruppe von Verszeilen behandelt werden. Beachten Sie, dass in diesem Fall das <label>-Element innerhalb des <p> oder <lg>-Elements erscheint und nicht als deren Geschwisterelement.

<p>[...]
  <lb/>&amp; n’entrer en mauuais &amp; mal-heu-
  <lb/>ré meſnage. Or des que le conſente-
  <lb/>ment des parties y eſt le mariage eſt
  <lb/> arreſté, quoy que de faict il ne ſoit
  <label place="margin">Puiſſance maritale
    entre les Romains.</label>
  <lb/> conſommé. Depuis la conſomma-
  <lb/>tion du mariage la femme eſt ſoubs
  <lb/> la puiſſance du mary, s’il n’eſt eſcla-
  <lb/>ue ou enfant de famille : car en ce
  <lb/> cas, la femme, qui a eſpouſé vn en-
  <lb/>fant de famille, eſt ſous la puiſſance
  [...]</p>

In diesem Beispiel erscheint der Text des Labels im rechten Randbereich der Vorlage, neben dem Absatz, den er beschreibt, ungefähr auf mittlerer Höhe.

Zusätzlich kann das @type-Attribut verwendet werden, um verschiedene Kategorien von Labels zu unterscheiden.

3.8. Lists

<lb>
line beginning
행 바꿈
分行
début de ligne
inicio de línea
inizio di riga
Zeilenanfang
marks the beginning of a new (typographic) line in some edition or version of a text.
텍스트의 편집 또는 버전에서 새로운 (인쇄상의) 행 시작을 표지한다.
標記某版本文本裡 (在印刷上) 的新起行。
ある版における新しい(印刷上の)行の始まりを示す。
marque le début d'une nouvelle ligne (typographique) dans une édition ou dans une version d'un texte.
marca el comienzo de una nueva línea (topográfica) en alguna edición o versión del texto.
segna l'inizio di una nuova riga (tipografica) in qualche edizione o versione di un testo.
markiert den Anfang einer neuen typographischen Zeile in einer bestimmten Auflage oder Version eines Textes.

This example shows typographical line breaks within metrical lines, where they occur at different places in different editions:

<l>Of Mans First Disobedience,<lb ed="1674"/> and<lb ed="1667"/> the Fruit</l>
<l>Of that Forbidden Tree, whose<lb ed="1667 1674"/> mortal tast</l>
<l>Brought Death into the World,<lb ed="1667"/> and all<lb ed="1674"/> our woe,</l>

Cet exemple montre les sauts de ligne dans des vers, qui apparaissent à différents endroits selon les éditions.

<l>Of Mans First Disobedience,<lb ed="1674"/> and<lb ed="1667"/> the Fruit</l>
<l>Of that Forbidden Tree, whose<lb ed="1667 1674"/> mortal tast</l>
<l>Brought Death into the World,<lb ed="1667"/> and all<lb ed="1674"/> our woe,</l>

Dieses Beispiel zeigt typografische Zeilenumbrüche innerhalb von Verszeilen, so wie sie an verschiedenen Stellen in unterschiedlichen Ausgaben auftreten:

<l>Of Mans First Disobedience,<lb ed="1674"/> and<lb ed="1667"/> the Fruit</l>
<l>Of that Forbidden Tree, whose<lb ed="1667 1674"/> mortal tast</l>
<l>Brought Death into the World,<lb ed="1667"/> and all<lb ed="1674"/> our woe,</l>

This example encodes typographical line breaks as a means of preserving the visual appearance of a title page. The @break attribute is used to show that the line break does not (as elsewhere) mark the start of a new word.

<titlePart><lb/>With Additions, ne-<lb break="no"/>ver before Printed.</titlePart>

Cet exemple encode les sauts de ligne pour montre l'apparence visuelle d'une page titre. L'attribut @break est utilisé pour montrer que le saut de ligne ne marque pas le début d'un nouveau mot.

      <titlePart rend="italic"><lb/>L'auteur susdict supplie les Lecteurs
<lb/>benevoles, soy reserver à rire au
soi-<lb break="no"/>xante &amp; dixhuytiesme livre.
</titlePart>

Dieses Beispiel kodiert typografische Zeilenumbrüche, um das visuelle Erscheinungsbild einer Titelseite zu bewahren. Das @break-Attribut zeigt an, dass der Zeilenumbruch nicht (wie anderswo) den Anfang eines neuen Wortes markiert.

<titlePart><lb/>With Additions, ne-<lb break="no"/>ver before Printed.</titlePart>

By convention, <lb> elements should appear at the point in the text where a new line starts. The @n attribute, if used, indicates the number or other value associated with the text between this point and the next <lb> element, typically the sequence number of the line within the page, or other appropriate unit. This element is intended to be used for marking actual line breaks on a manuscript or printed page, at the point where they occur; it should not be used to tag structural units such as lines of verse (for which the <l> element is available) except in circumstances where structural units cannot otherwise be marked.

The @type attribute may be used to characterize the line break in any respect. The more specialized attributes @break, @ed, or @edRef should be preferred when the intent is to indicate whether or not the line break is word-breaking, or to note the source from which it derives.

Par convention, l'élément <lb> apparaît à l’endroit du texte où commence une nouvelle ligne. L'attribut @n, s’il est utilisé, donne un nombre ou une autre valeur associée au texte entre ce point et l’élément suivant <lb>, spécifiquement le numéro de la ligne dans la page, ou une autre unité de mesure appropriée. Cet élément est prévu pour être employé pour marquer un saut de ligne sur un manuscrit ou sur une page imprimée, à l’endroit où il se survient; on n’utilisera pas de balisage structurel comme une succession de vers (pour lequel l’élément <l> est disponible) sauf dans le cas où des blocs structurés ne peuvent pas être marqués autrement.

L'attribut @type sera employé pour caractériser toute espèce de caractéristiques du saut de ligne, sauf la coupure des mots (indique par l'attribut @break) ou la source concernée.

当該要素にあるグローバル属性@nは、要素<lb>に続く 行と関連する数値を示す。符号化する人は、改行を示す当該数値が、ページ内にある物理的行数またはテキストの論理構造と関連するかについて、 明確で一貫した方針を採るべきである。 一般には、要素<lb>は、参照する行の開始地点にあるべきである。

要素<lb>は、散文中における印刷上の行を示すためのものである。 韻文中の行を示す要素<l>とは注意して使い分けるべきである。

Es ist Konvention, dass <lb>-Elemente an der Stelle im Text stehen sollen, an der eine neue Zeile beginnt. Das @n-Attribut enhält gegebenenfalls die Nummer der Zeile oder einen ähnlichen Wert, der sich auf den Text bezieht, der bis zum nächsten <lb> folgt, typischerweise die Nummer einer Zeile auf einer Seite oder andere einschlägige Einheiten.

Das Element dient dazu, typographische oder paläographische Phänomene an der Stelle zu beschreiben, an der sie auf dem Schriftträger sichtbar sind; es sollte nicht für Struktureinheiten wie z. B. Verszeilen in Lyrik verwendet werden (wofür das Element <l> zur Verfügung steht), außer wenn derartige Struktureinheiten anders nicht markiert werden können.

Das @type-Attribut kann verwendet werden, den Zeilenwechsel näher zu beschreiben, wenn nicht die speziellen Attribute @break (Worttrennung), @ed oder @edRef (Textzeuge, in dem der Zeilenwechsel vorkommt) verwendet werden können.

3.11.3. Milestone Elements 7.2.5. Speech Contents

<lg>
line group
시행군
行組
groupe de vers
grupo de versos
un gruppo di versi
Gruppe von Vers(zeil)en
contains one or more verse lines functioning as a formal unit, e.g. a stanza, refrain, verse paragraph, etc.
예를 들어, 연, 후렴구, 운문 단락과 같이 형식적 단위로 기능하는 운문 행군을 포함한다.
包含形式上視為一組的詩行，例如詩節、疊句、韻文段落等。
形式単位としてある、ある韻文の行をまとまりを示す。例えば、連、リフレ イン、詩節など。
contient un groupe de vers fonctionnant comme une unité formelle, par exemple une strophe, un refrain, un paragraphe en vers, etc.
contiene un grupo de versos que funcionan como una unidad formal, p.ej. una estrofa, un refrán, un estribillo, etc.
contiene un gruppo di versi che costituiscono un'unità formale, per esempio una stanza, un refrain, un paragrafo in versi, ecc.
enthält eine oder mehrere Verse bzw. Verszeilen, die zusammen eine formale Einheit (z. B. Strophe, Refrain) bilden.
An lg element must contain at least one child l, lg, or gap element. Abstract model violation: Lines may not contain line groups.

<lg type="free">
  <l>Let me be my own fool</l>
  <l>of my own making, the sum of it</l>
</lg>
<lg type="free">
  <l>is equivocal.</l>
  <l>One says of the drunken farmer:</l>
</lg>
<lg type="free">
  <l>leave him lay off it. And this is</l>
  <l>the explanation.</l>
</lg>

<div type="sonnet">
  <lg type="quatrain">
    <l>Les amoureux fervents et les savants austères</l>
    <l>Aiment également, dans leur mûre saison,</l>
    <l>Les chats puissants et doux, orgueil de la maison,</l>
    <l>Qui comme eux sont frileux et comme eux sédentaires.</l>
  </lg>
  <lg type="quatrain">
    <l>Amis de la science et de la volupté</l>
    <l>Ils cherchent le silence et l'horreur des ténèbres ;</l>
    <l>L'Erèbe les eût pris pour ses coursiers funèbres,</l>
    <l>S'ils pouvaient au servage incliner leur fierté.</l>
  </lg>
  <lg type="tercet">
    <l>Ils prennent en songeant les nobles attitudes</l>
    <l>Des grands sphinx allongés au fond des solitudes,</l>
    <l>Qui semblent s'endormir dans un rêve sans fin ;</l>
  </lg>
  <lg type="tercet">
    <l>Leurs reins féconds sont pleins d'étincelles magiques,</l>
    <l>Et des parcelles d'or, ainsi qu'un sable fin,</l>
    <l>Etoilent vaguement leurs prunelles mystiques.</l>
  </lg>
</div>

<lg type="free">
  <l>把你的影子加點鹽</l>
  <l>醃起來</l>
  <l>風乾</l>
</lg>
<lg type="free">
  <l>老的時候</l>
  <l>下酒</l>
</lg>

contains verse lines or nested line groups only, possibly prefixed by a heading.

ne contient que des vers ou des groupes de vers enchâssés, éventuellement précédés d'un titre.

韻文の行または(普通は見出しが付く)入れ子化された行グループのみを示 す。

enthält lediglich Vers(zeil)en (<l>) oder verschachtelte Gruppen von Vers(zeil)en (<lg>); eine Überschrift ist fakultativ.

3.13.1. Core Tags for Verse 3.13. Passages of Verse or Drama 7.2.5. Speech Contents

<list>
list
liste
Liste
contains any sequence of items organized as a list.
목록의 형태로 정리된 항목을 포함한다.
包含以列表方式呈現的任何連續項目。
リストのような、項目列を示す。
contient une suite d'items ordonnés dans une liste.
contiene cualquier secuencia de ítems o elementos organizados en una lista.
contiene una qualsiasi sequenza di voci organizzate in una lista.
enthält eine Reihe von Listenpunkten, die als Liste organisiert sind.
The content of a "gloss" list should include a sequence of one or more pairs of a label element followed by an item element
@type
type
Typ
describes the nature of the items in the list.
beschreibt die Art der Listenpunkte.
"gloss"
gloss
Gloss
each list item glosses some term or concept, which is given by a <label> element preceding the list item.
목록의 각 항목은 선행하는 요소에서 제시된 용어 또는 개념에 대한 설명이다.
各列表項目為一些字詞或概念下註解，每個項目之前並帶有標籤元素。
cada item de la lista glosa algun término o concepto de los que han sido dados por un elemento de la lista de la etiqueta que precede.
リスト項目は、当該リスト項目に先行してあるラベル要素で示されたある用語や意義をまとめたものである。
chaque item de la liste commente un terme ou un concept qui est donné par un élément <label> précédant l'item de la liste.
ogni voce dell'elenco è la glossa di un termine o concetto dato da un elemento legenda che precede la voce stessa
jeder Listenpunkt erläutert einen Begriff oder ein Konzept, das von einem voranstehenden <label>-Element genannt wird.
"index"
index
Index
each list item is an entry in an index such as the alphabetical topical index at the back of a print volume.
jeder Listenpunkt ist ein Registereintrag z. B. in einem alphabetisch geordneten Sachregister am Ende einer Druckausgabe.
"instructions"
instructions
Arbeitsschritt
each list item is a step in a sequence of instructions, as in a recipe.
jeder Listenpunkt ist ein Arbeitsschritt in einer Folge von Anweisungen, wie z. B. in einem Rezept.
"litany"
litany
Litanei
each list item is one of a sequence of petitions, supplications or invocations, typically in a religious ritual.
jeder Listenpunkt ist Teil einer Reihenfolge von Gebeten, Bitten oder Anrufungen die üblicherweise in einem religiösen Ritual verwendet werden.
"syllogism"
syllogism
logischer Schluss
each list item is part of an argument consisting of two or more propositions and a final conclusion derived from them.
jeder Listenpunkt ist Teil eines Arguments, das aus zwei oder mehr Prämissen und einem daraus gezogenen Schluss besteht.

Previous versions of these Guidelines recommended the use of @type on <list> to encode the rendering or appearance of a list (whether it was bulleted, numbered, etc.). The current recommendation is to use the @rend or @style attributes for these aspects of a list, while using @type for the more appropriate task of characterizing the nature of the content of a list.

The formal syntax of the element declarations allows <label> tags to be omitted from lists tagged <list type="gloss">; this is however a semantic error.

La syntaxe formelle des déclarations d'élément permet d'omettre les étiquettes de balises des listes balisées par <list type="gloss"> mais c'est une erreur sémantique.

当該要素の宣言では、要素<label>は、タグ<list type="gloss">中で省略することができることになっているが、これは意味上のエラーになる。

In älteren Versionen dieser Richtlinien wurde empfohlen, mit dem Attribut @type am <list>-Element die Darstellung oder das Erscheinungsbild einer Liste zu kodieren (also ob sie z. B. nummeriert oder mit Symbolen versehen ist). Die aktuelle Empfehlung ist, dafür die Attribute @rend oder @style zu verwenden, während mit @type der Inhalt der Liste charakterisiert werden sollte.

Die formale Syntax der Elementdeklaration erlaubt es, Listen vom <list type="gloss"> ohne das Element <label> zu verwenden; das ist jedoch ein semantischer Fehler.

<list rend="numbered">
  <item>a butcher</item>
  <item>a baker</item>
  <item>a candlestick maker, with
<list rend="bulleted"><item>rings on his fingers</item><item>bells on his toes</item></list>
      </item>
</list>

<list type="syllogism" rend="bulleted">
  <item>All Cretans are liars.</item>
  <item>Epimenides is a Cretan.</item>
  <item>ERGO Epimenides is a liar.</item>
</list>

<list type="litany" rend="simple">
  <item>God save us from drought.</item>
  <item>God save us from pestilence.</item>
  <item>God save us from wickedness in high places.</item>
  <item>Praise be to God.</item>
</list>

<list rend="bulleted">
  <item>Thé sans sucre et sans lait </item>
  <item>Un jus d'ananas</item>
  <item>Un yaourt</item>
  <item>Trois biscuits de seigle </item>
  <item>Carottes râpées</item>
  <item>Côtelettes d'agneau (deux)</item>
  <item>Courgettes</item>
  <item>Chèvre frais </item>
  <item>Coings</item>
</list>

<div>
  <p> Selon des critères qui n'appartiennent qu'à lui, Rémi Plassaert a classé ses buvards
      en huit tas respectivement surmontés par :</p>
  <list rend="bulleted">
    <item>un toréador chantant (dentifrice émail Diamant)</item>
    <item>un tapis d'Orient du XVIIe siècle, provenant d'une basilique de Transylvanie
        (Kalium-Sedaph, soluté de propionate de potassium)</item>
    <item>Le Renard et la Cicogne (sic), gravure de Jean-Baptiste Oudry (Papeteries
        Marquaize, Stencyl, Reprographie)</item>
  </list>
</div>

<div>
  <p> [...] et tout autour, la longue cohorte de ses personnages, avec leur histoire, leur
      passé, leurs légendes :</p>
  <list rend="numbered">
    <item n="1">Pélage vainqueur d'Alkhamah se faisant couronner à Covadonga </item>
    <item n="2">La cantatrice exilée de Russie suivant Schönberg à Amsterdam</item>
    <item n="3">Le petit chat sourd aux yeux vairons vivant au dernier étage</item>
    <item n="4">Le crétin chef d'îlot faisant préparer des tonneaux de sable</item>
  </list>
</div>

<list rend="numbered">
  <item>一個屠夫</item>
  <item>一個糕點師父</item>
  <item>一個燭台工人<list rend="bulleted"><item>手上戴了戒指</item><item>腳趾上有鈴鐺</item></list>
      </item>
</list>

<div1 type="section">
  <head>青年守則</head>
  <list rend="numbered">
    <item n="1">守則一至五條包括八德：<list rend="numbered"><item n="1.1">一、忠勇為愛國之本 。</item><item n="1.2">二、服從為負責之本。</item><item n="1.3">三、孝順為齊家之本。</item><item n="1.4">四、勤儉為服務之本。</item><item n="1.5">五、仁愛為接物之本。</item></list>
         </item>
    <item n="2">六至九條意指四維：<list rend="numbered"><item n="2.1">六、整潔為強身之本。</item><item n="2.2">七、信義為立業之本。</item><item n="2.3">八、助人為快樂之本。</item><item n="2.4">九、和平為處世之本</item></list>
         </item>
    <item n="3">十至十二條就是三達德：<list rend="numbered"><item n="3.1">十、學問為濟世之本。</item><item n="3.2">十一、禮節為治事之本。</item><item n="3.3">十二、有恆為成功之本。</item></list>
         </item>
  </list>
</div1>

<p>我們二人謹定于2008年7月3日正午十二時，在台北舉行結婚典禮，寫下海誓山盟，終身遵守，在婚姻路上，共同經營，災難病情，互相扶持，永不分離。并就下列事項，立下承諾，即令滄海化為桑田，桑田再變為滄海，也要攜手共進，相親相愛，直到白頭。<list rend="simple"><item>我們宣誓：從結婚這一天開始，不但成為夫妻，互相敬愛，分擔對方的快樂和憂愁，也同時成為朋友，而且是諍友，互相勉勵，互相規勸，互相批評。</item><item>我們領悟：愉快的共同生活，全靠心靈溝通，所以，我們一定善用言語，不僅表達愛心、關心，也使彼此藉語言加深了解，一起成長。絕不粗聲叱責，絕不用肢體代替言語，絕不允許發生婚姻暴力。 </item><item>我們認知：家庭與事業是夫妻共同經營的果實，夫妻對家庭的貢獻等值，在家庭內或社會上，價值完全相同，社會工作薪俸無論多少，家務工作的薪俸都與其相同。</item><item>我們同意：將來我們有子女，管教上如果有不同的意見，甚至尖銳對立的意見，一定要克制自己，去請教專家，絕不把孩子當成實現自己希望的工具，也絕不用孩子來炫耀自己。 </item><item>我們認為：一夫一妻制，是社會安定的磐石，是孩子們成長最安全的溫床，我們喜愛并尊重這種制度，并用事實和行動，維護它的尊嚴。</item><item>我們警惕：婚姻生活并不多彩多姿，它不但平凡，而且瑣碎，如果不滋養珍惜，容易使生命憔悴，心靈粗俗，所以生活之中，我們一定保持適度的假期，與孩子一起長大。</item><item>我們謹記：我們孝敬自己的父母，也孝敬對方的父母，不僅是回報養育之恩，也是培養自己人格的完整，為我們的下一代立下榜樣。 </item><item>我們了解：我們將來會老，所以，我們從結婚這一天，就培養專業之外的其它藝朮興趣，如書、畫、音樂，使我們生命永遠充實燦爛。 </item></list>
   </p>

The following example treats the short numbered clauses of Anglo-Saxon legal codes as lists of items. The text is from an ordinance of King Athelstan (924–939):

<div1 type="section">
  <head>Athelstan's Ordinance</head>
  <list rend="numbered">
    <item n="1">Concerning thieves. First, that no thief is to be spared who is caught with
      the stolen goods, [if he is] over twelve years and [if the value of the goods is] over
      eightpence.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="1.1">And if anyone does spare one, he is to pay for the thief with his
          wergild — and the thief is to be no nearer a settlement on that account — or to
          clear himself by an oath of that amount.</item><item n="1.2">If, however, he [the thief] wishes to defend himself or to escape, he is
          not to be spared [whether younger or older than twelve].</item><item n="1.3">If a thief is put into prison, he is to be in prison 40 days, and he may
          then be redeemed with 120 shillings; and the kindred are to stand surety for him
          that he will desist for ever.</item><item n="1.4">And if he steals after that, they are to pay for him with his wergild,
          or to bring him back there.</item><item n="1.5">And if he steals after that, they are to pay for him with his wergild,
          whether to the king or to him to whom it rightly belongs; and everyone of those who
          supported him is to pay 120 shillings to the king as a fine.</item></list>
         </item>
    <item n="2">Concerning lordless men. And we pronounced about these lordless men, from whom
      no justice can be obtained, that one should order their kindred to fetch back such a
      person to justice and to find him a lord in public meeting.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="2.1">And if they then will not, or cannot, produce him on that appointed day,
          he is then to be a fugitive afterwards, and he who encounters him is to strike him
          down as a thief.</item><item n="2.2">And he who harbours him after that, is to pay for him with his wergild
          or to clear himself by an oath of that amount.</item></list>
         </item>
    <item n="3">Concerning the refusal of justice. The lord who refuses justice and upholds
      his guilty man, so that the king is appealed to, is to repay the value of the goods and
      120 shillings to the king; and he who appeals to the king before he demands justice as
      often as he ought, is to pay the same fine as the other would have done, if he had
      refused him justice.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="3.1">And the lord who is an accessory to a theft by his slave, and it becomes
          known about him, is to forfeit the slave and be liable to his wergild on the first
          occasionp if he does it more often, he is to be liable to pay all that he owns.</item><item n="3.2">And likewise any of the king's treasurers or of our reeves, who has been
          an accessory of thieves who have committed theft, is to liable to the same.</item></list>
         </item>
    <item n="4">Concerning treachery to a lord. And we have pronounced concerning treachery to
      a lord, that he [who is accused] is to forfeit his life if he cannot deny it or is
      afterwards convicted at the three-fold ordeal.</item>
  </list>
</div1>

Note that nested lists have been used so the tagging mirrors the structure indicated by the two-level numbering of the clauses. The clauses could have been treated as a one-level list with irregular numbering, if desired.

Das folgende Beispiel behandelt die kurzen nummerierten Klauseln von angelsächsischen Rechtstexten als Listen von <item>-Elementen. Der Text stammt aus einer Verordnung von König Athelstan (924-939):

<div1 type="section">
  <head>Athelstan's Ordinance</head>
  <list rend="numbered">
    <item n="1">Concerning thieves. First, that no thief is to be spared who is caught with
      the stolen goods, [if he is] over twelve years and [if the value of the goods is] over
      eightpence.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="1.1">And if anyone does spare one, he is to pay for the thief with his
        wergild — and the thief is to be no nearer a settlement on that account — or to
        clear himself by an oath of that amount.</item><item n="1.2">If, however, he [the thief] wishes to defend himself or to escape, he is
          not to be spared [whether younger or older than twelve].</item><item n="1.3">If a thief is put into prison, he is to be in prison 40 days, and he may
            then be redeemed with 120 shillings; and the kindred are to stand surety for him
            that he will desist for ever.</item><item n="1.4">And if he steals after that, they are to pay for him with his wergild,
              or to bring him back there.</item><item n="1.5">And if he steals after that, they are to pay for him with his wergild,
                whether to the king or to him to whom it rightly belongs; and everyone of those who
                supported him is to pay 120 shillings to the king as a fine.</item></list>
    </item>
    <item n="2">Concerning lordless men. And we pronounced about these lordless men, from whom
      no justice can be obtained, that one should order their kindred to fetch back such a
      person to justice and to find him a lord in public meeting.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="2.1">And if they then will not, or cannot, produce him on that appointed day,
        he is then to be a fugitive afterwards, and he who encounters him is to strike him
        down as a thief.</item><item n="2.2">And he who harbours him after that, is to pay for him with his wergild
          or to clear himself by an oath of that amount.</item></list>
    </item>
    <item n="3">Concerning the refusal of justice. The lord who refuses justice and upholds
      his guilty man, so that the king is appealed to, is to repay the value of the goods and
      120 shillings to the king; and he who appeals to the king before he demands justice as
      often as he ought, is to pay the same fine as the other would have done, if he had
      refused him justice.
      <list rend="numbered"><item n="3.1">And the lord who is an accessory to a theft by his slave, and it becomes
        known about him, is to forfeit the slave and be liable to his wergild on the first
        occasionp if he does it more often, he is to be liable to pay all that he owns.</item><item n="3.2">And likewise any of the king's treasurers or of our reeves, who has been
          an accessory of thieves who have committed theft, is to liable to the same.</item></list>
    </item>
    <item n="4">Concerning treachery to a lord. And we have pronounced concerning treachery to
      a lord, that he [who is accused] is to forfeit his life if he cannot deny it or is
      afterwards convicted at the three-fold ordeal.</item>
  </list>
</div1>

In diesem Beispiel wurden verschachtelte Listen verwendet. Die Auszeichnung spiegelt somit die Struktur der zweistufigen Nummerierung der Klauseln wider. Die Klauseln könnten auch als eine einstufige Liste mit unregelmäßiger Nummerierung behandelt werden.

<p>These decrees, most blessed Pope Hadrian, we propounded in the public council ... and they
  confirmed them in our hand in your stead with the sign of the Holy Cross, and afterwards
  inscribed with a careful pen on the paper of this page, affixing thus the sign of the Holy
  Cross.
  <list rend="simple"><item>I, Eanbald, by the grace of God archbishop of the holy church of York, have
      subscribed to the pious and catholic validity of this document with the sign of the Holy
      Cross.</item><item>I, Ælfwold, king of the people across the Humber, consenting have subscribed with
      the sign of the Holy Cross.</item><item>I, Tilberht, prelate of the church of Hexham, rejoicing have subscribed with the
      sign of the Holy Cross.</item><item>I, Higbald, bishop of the church of Lindisfarne, obeying have subscribed with the
      sign of the Holy Cross.</item><item>I, Ethelbert, bishop of Candida Casa, suppliant, have subscribed with thef sign of
      the Holy Cross.</item><item>I, Ealdwulf, bishop of the church of Mayo, have subscribed with devout will.</item><item>I, Æthelwine, bishop, have subscribed through delegates.</item><item>I, Sicga, patrician, have subscribed with serene mind with the sign of the Holy
      Cross.</item></list>
   </p>

May contain an optional heading followed by a series of items, or a series of label and item pairs, the latter being optionally preceded by one or two specialized headings.

Peut contenir un titre facultatif suivi d'une succession d'items ou d'une succession de couples constitués d'une étiquette et d'un item, ce dernier type pouvant être précédé par un ou deux titres spécifiques.

一連の項目またはラベルと項目の組の前に、選択的にヘダーをとることが ある。一連のラベルと項目の組の場合、選択的に、ひとつ以上のヘダーが先行することがある。

Die Liste kann mit einer Überschrift <head> beginnen. Sie kann auch aus Paaren von Labels und Beschreibungen bestehen, sodass dann für jeden Teil spezielle Überschriften (<headLabel>, <headItem>) verwendet werden können.

3.8. Lists

<listBibl>
citation list
인용 목록
書目列表
liste de références bibliographiques
lista de cita
lista di citazioni
Liste bibliografischer Angaben
contains a list of bibliographic citations of any kind.
여러 종류의 서지 인용 목록을 포함한다.
包含任何種類的書目資料列表。
書誌項目引用のリストを示す。
contient une liste de références bibliographiques de toute nature.
contiene una lista de citas bibliográficas de cualquier tipo.
contiene una lista di citazioni bibliografiche di qualsiasi natura.
enthält eine Liste von bibliografischen Angaben jeglicher Art.

<listBibl>
  <head>Works consulted</head>
  <bibl>Blain, Clements and Grundy: Feminist Companion to
              Literature in English (Yale, 1990)
          </bibl>
  <biblStruct>
    <analytic>
      <title>The Interesting story of the Children in the Wood</title>
    </analytic>
    <monogr>
      <title>The Penny Histories</title>
      <author>Victor E Neuberg</author>
      <imprint>
        <publisher>OUP</publisher>
        <date>1968</date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>

<listBibl>
  <head>Liste des ouvrages cités</head>
  <bibl>Les Petits Romantiques </bibl>
  <biblStruct>
    <analytic>
      <title>La poésie en prose</title>
    </analytic>
    <monogr>
      <title>Aloysius Bertrand, "inventeur" du poème en prose</title>
      <author>Bert Guégand</author>
      <imprint>
        <publisher>PUN</publisher>
        <date>2000</date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>

<listBibl>
  <head>參考書籍</head>
  <bibl>潘定衡、楊朝文: 蚩尤的傳說 (貴陽：貴州民族出版社，1989 ) </bibl>
  <biblStruct>
    <analytic>
      <title>中國古史的傳說時代 </title>
    </analytic>
    <monogr>
      <title>苗族蚩尤神话，與逐鹿之戰。</title>
      <author>吳曉東</author>
      <imprint>
        <publisher>北京：民族文學研究 </publisher>
        <date> 1998 </date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>

3.12.1. Methods of Encoding Bibliographic References and Lists of References 2.2.7. The Source Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<listPerson>
list of persons
개인 목록
lista de personas
liste de personnes
elenco delle persone
contains a list of descriptions, each of which provides information about an identifiable person or a group of people, for example the participants in a language interaction, or the people referred to in a historical source.
기술 목록을 포함하며, 그 개별 기술 각각은, 언어 상호작용 참여자 또는 역사적 원전에서 언급되는 사람과 같이, 식별 가능한 사람 또는 사람군에 관한 정보를 제공한다.
人物描述清單，其中每個項目包含一個已知人物的相關資料，例如語言互動中的參與者、或是歷史來源中提及的人物。
特定可能な個人やグループに関する情報のリストを示す。例えば、言語交流の参加者や、歴史資料中で参照される人物など。
contient une liste d'éléments, chacun d'entre eux apportant des informations sur une personne précise ou sur un groupe de personnes, par exemple les participants à une interaction linguistique, ou les personnes citées dans une source historique.
contiene una lista de descripciones, y cada una de las cuales proporciona información relativa a una persona específica o a un grupo de personas, p.ej, los participantes de una interacción verbal o las personas referidas en una fuente histórica.
contiene una lista di descrizioni, ciascuna delle quali fornisce informazioni relative a una persona specifica o a un gruppo di persone, per esempio i partecipanti a un'interazione verbale o le persone identificate da una fonte storica

<listPerson type="respondents">
  <personGrp xml:id="PXXX"/>
  <person xml:id="P1234" sex="2" age="mid"/>
  <person xml:id="P4332" sex="1" age="mid"/>
  <listRelation>
    <relation type="personal" name="spouse" mutual="#P1234 #P4332"/>
  </listRelation>
</listPerson>

<listPerson type="respondents">
  <personGrp xml:id="fr_PXXX"/>
  <person xml:id="fr_P1234" sex="2" age="mid"/>
  <person xml:id="fr_P4332" sex="1" age="mid"/>
  <listRelation>
    <relation type="personal" name="spouse" mutual="#fr_P1234 #fr_P4332"/>
  </listRelation>
</listPerson>

The @type attribute may be used to distinguish lists of people of a particular type if convenient.

L'attribut type peut être utilisé pour établir des listes par type de personne si cela présente un intérêt.

属性typeは、特別な種類の人物を区別するために使われるかもしれない。

13.3.2. The Person Element 15.2. Contextual Information 2.4. The Profile Description 15.3.2. Declarable Elements

<listPlace>
list of places
장소 목록
lista de lugares
liste de lieux
elenco dei luoghi
contains a list of places, optionally followed by a list of relationships (other than containment) defined amongst them.
장소 목록을 포함하며, 그 뒤에 수의적으로 그들 사이에 정의된 (포함 외의) 관련성 목록을 제시한다.
contiene una lista de lugares, seguida opcionalmente por una lista de interelaciones (a excepción de la inclusión) definidas entre ellos.
場所のリストを示す。選択的に、場所間の(包含関係ではなく)関連性を 示すリストが続く。
contient une liste de lieux, qui peut être suivie d'une liste de relations définies entre les lieux (autres que la relation d'inclusion).
contiene una lista di luoghi, eventualmente seguita da una lista di relazioni tra questi (ad eccezione di quella contenete-contenuto)

<listPlace type="offshoreIslands">
  <place>
    <placeName>La roche qui pleure</placeName>
  </place>
  <place>
    <placeName>Ile aux cerfs</placeName>
  </place>
</listPlace>

2.2.7. The Source Description 13.3.4. Places

<measure>
measure
mesure
contains a word or phrase referring to some quantity of an object or commodity, usually comprising a number, a unit, and a commodity name.
개체 또는 물체의 수량을 지시하는 단어 또는 구를 포함한다. 이들은 숫자, 단위, 물체명으로 구성되어 있다.
包含用來表示某物品數量的字詞，通常是由數字、單位和物品名稱所組成。
ある対象や商品の大きさを表す語句を示す。一般には、数値、単位、商品名 を含む。
contient un mot ou une expression faisant référence à la quantité d'un objet ou d'un produit, comprenant en général un nombre, une unité et le nom d'un produit.
contiene una palabra o sintagma referido a alguna cantidad de un objeto o producto, normalmente incluye un número, una unidad y un nombre de producto.
contiene una parola o sintagma che fa riferimento alla quantità di un oggetto o bene, contenente di solito il numero, l'unità e il nome del bene.
@type
specifies the type of measurement in any convenient typology.
편리한 방식으로 측정 유형을 명시한다.
用任何適合的分類方法來說明度量的種類。
当該計測種類を示す。
précise le type de mesure exprimée dans la typologie adaptée.
especifica el tipo de medición en cualquier tipología funcional.
specifica il tipo di misurazione in una tipologia funzionale.

This example references a definition of a measurement unit declared in the TEI header:

<measure type="weight"><num>2</num> pounds of flesh</measure>
<measure type="currency">£10-11-6d</measure>
<measure type="area" unitRef="#merk">2 <unit>merks</unit> of old extent</measure>

<encodingDesc>
  <unitDecl>
    <unitDef xml:id="merk" type="area">
      <label>merk</label>
      <placeName ref="#Scotland"/>
      <desc>A merk was an area of land determined variably by its agricultural
        productivity.</desc>
    </unitDef>
  </unitDecl>
</encodingDesc>

<measure quantity="40" unit="hogshead" commodity="rum">2 score hh rum</measure>
<measure quantity="12" unit="count" commodity="roses">1 doz. roses</measure>
<measure quantity="1" unit="count" commodity="tulips">a yellow tulip</measure>

<head>Long papers.</head>
<p>Speakers will be given 30 minutes each: 20 minutes for
presentation, 10 minutes for discussion. Proposals should not
exceed <measure max="500" unit="count" commodity="words">500
words</measure>. This presentation type is suitable for
substantial research, theoretical or critical discussions.</p>

<measure type="weight"><num>2</num> kilos de sucre</measure>
<measure type="currency">16,99 € </measure>
<measure type="area">5 hectares</measure>

<measure quantity="1" unit="liquide" commodity="vin">un hectolitre de vin</measure>
<measure quantity="12" unit="nombre" commodity="rose">1 douzaine de roses</measure>
<measure quantity="1" unit="liquide" commodity="moule"> un litre de moules </measure>

<measure type="weight"><num>1</num>市斤豬肉</measure>
<measure type="currency">人民幣20元</measure>
<measure type="area">一個巴掌大小</measure>

<measure quantity="16" unit="weight" commodity="vegetable">一台斤青菜</measure>
<measure quantity="12" unit="count" commodity="roses">一打玫瑰</measure>
<measure quantity="1" unit="count" commodity="tulips">一朵黃色鬱金香</measure>

3.6.3. Numbers and Measures

<milestone>
milestone
borne
Grenzpunkt
marks a boundary point separating any kind of section of a text, typically but not necessarily indicating a point at which some part of a standard reference system changes, where the change is not represented by a structural element.
텍스트의 절을 분할하는 경계점을 표지한다. 이는 표준 참조 시스템에서의 변화로 표시되며, 구조적 요소에 의해서는 표시되지 않는다.
標明文本中由標準參照系統變更所指示的任何區塊分界點，並且該章節未以任何結構性元素標記。
当該セクションが、構造要素により表現することができない場合に、標準的な参照機能により、テキストの各種セクション間にある境界点を示す。
marque un point permettant de délimiter les sections d'un texte selon un autre systeme que les éléments de structure ; une balise de ce type marque une frontière.
marca un punto de frontera que separa cada tipo de sección de un texto, indicado por cambios en el sistema de referencia estándard, donde la sección no es representada por un elemento estructural.
segnala il limite che separa ogni tipo di sezione di un testo, come indicato da cambiamenti nel sistema di riferimento standard, qualora la sezione non sia rappresentata da un elemento strutturale.
markiert einen Grenzpunkt, der Abschnitte eines Textes trennen kann, typischerweise (aber nicht notwendigerweise) den Wechsel eines Bezugssystems, der nicht durch ein strukturelles Markup beschrieben werden kann.

<milestone n="23" ed="La" unit="Dreissiger"/>
... <milestone n="24" ed="AV" unit="verse"/> ...

<milestone n="23" ed="La" unit="Dreissiger"/> ... <milestone n="24" ed="AV" unit="verse"/>
...

<milestone n="23" ed="拉丁文版本" unit="三十"/> ...
<milestone n="24" ed="聖經欽定版本" unit="韻文"/> ...

For this element, the global @n attribute indicates the new number or other value for the unit which changes at this milestone. The special value unnumbered should be used in passages which fall outside the normal numbering scheme, such as chapter or other headings, poem numbers or titles, etc.

The order in which <milestone> elements are given at a given point is not normally significant.

Pour cet élément, l'attribut global @n affecte un nouveau numéro ou une autre valeur à l'unité qui change à partir de l'élément <milestone>. La valeur unnumbered doit être utilisée pour les passages qui sortent du système normal de numérotation (par ex. titres de chapitres, numéros ou titres de poèmes, ou noms des personnages qui prennent la parole dans une pièce de théâtre).

L'ordre dans lequel apparaissent les éléments <milestone> à un endroit donné n'est en principe pas signifiant.

当該要素にあるグローバル属性@nは、当該標石要素が示す変化 の単位の、他の値を示す。特別な値unnumbered は、一般的な番号付けスキームから外れている一節中で使用されるべきで ある(例えば、章見出し、詩の番号やタイトル、詩劇における話し手の属 性など)。

標石要素の順番は、一般には重要ではない。

Das globale @n-Attribut gibt für dieses Element die neue Zahl (oder einen anderen Wert) der Einheit an, die an diesem Grenzpunkt wechselt. Der besondere Wert "unnumbered" (ungezählt) sollte für Abschnitte gewählt werden, die außerhalb des normalen Zählsystems fallen, wie beispielsweise Kapitel- oder andere Überschriften, Gedichtnummern oder -titel etc.

Die Reihenfolge des Auftretens von mehreren <milestone>-Elementen an einem gegebenen Punkt ist normalerweise nicht signifikant.

3.11.3. Milestone Elements

<name>
name, proper noun
이름, 고유명사
名稱，特定名稱
nom, nom propre
nombre, nombre propio
nome, nome proprio
Name, Eigenname
contains a proper noun or noun phrase.
고유명사 또는 명사구를 포함한다.
包含一個特定名稱 或名詞詞組。
固有名詞。
contient un nom propre ou un syntagme nominal.
contiene un nombre propio o un sintagma nominal
contiene un nome proprio o un sintagma nominale.
enthält einen Eigennamen in Form eines Nomens oder einer Nominalphrase.
@type
"person"
"forename"
"surname"
"personGenName"
"personRoleName"
"personAddName"
"nameLink"
"org"
"country"
"placeGeog"
"place"

<name type="person">Thomas Hoccleve</name>
<name type="place">Villingaholt</name>
<name type="org">Vetus Latina Institut</name>
<name type="person" ref="#HOC001">Occleve</name>

Proper nouns referring to people, places, and organizations may be tagged instead with <persName>, <placeName>, or <orgName>, when the TEI module for names and dates is included.

Les noms propres relatifs aux personnes, aux lieux et aux organismes peuvent également être balisés à l'aide de <persName>, <placeName>, ou <orgName>, lorsque le module TEI concernant les noms et dates est inclus.

TEI名前モジュールが使われる場合には、人々、場所、組織を示す固有名 詞は、それぞれ要素<persName>, <placeName>、 <orgName>を使い示されるかもしれない。

Eigennamen, die auf Personen, Orte und Organisationen verweisen, können stattdessen auch mit den Elementen <persName>, <placeName> oder <orgName> ausgezeichnet werden, vorausgesetzt, das TEI-Modul namesdates ist inkludiert.

3.6.1. Referring Strings

<note>
note
Anmerkung
contains a note or annotation.
contient une note ou une annotation
contiene una nota o aclaración
包含附註或註釋。
contiene una nota o un'annotazione
注釈・コメント。
enthält eine Anmerkung oder Annotation.
margin-left: 10px;margin-right: 10px; font-size:smaller; content:" ["; content:"] "; font-size:small;

In the following example, the translator has supplied a footnote containing an explanation of the term translated as "painterly":

And yet it is not only
in the great line of Italian renaissance art, but even in the
painterly <note place="bottom" type="gloss" resp="#MDMH"><term xml:lang="de">Malerisch</term>. This word has, in the German, two
distinct meanings, one objective, a quality residing in the object,
the other subjective, a mode of apprehension and creation.  To avoid
confusion, they have been distinguished in English as
<mentioned>picturesque</mentioned> and
<mentioned>painterly</mentioned> respectively.</note> style of the
Dutch genre painters of the seventeenth century that drapery has this
psychological significance.

  <respStmt xml:id="MDMH">
    <resp>translation from German to English</resp>
    <name>Hottinger, Marie Donald Mackie</name>
  </respStmt>

For this example to be valid, the code MDMH must be defined elsewhere, for example by means of a responsibility statement in the associated TEI header.

Im folgenden Beispiel hat der Übersetzer eine Fußnote mit einer Erklärung des als "painterly" übersetzten Begriffs "Malerisch" bereitgestellt:

And yet it is not only
 in the great line of Italian renaissance art, but even in the
 painterly <note place="bottom" type="gloss" resp="#MDMH-1"><term xml:lang="de">Malerisch</term>. This word has, in the German, two
   distinct meanings, one objective, a quality residing in the object,
   the other subjective, a mode of apprehension and creation.  To avoid
   confusion, they have been distinguished in English as
   <mentioned>picturesque</mentioned> and
   <mentioned>painterly</mentioned> respectively.</note> style of the
 Dutch genre painters of the seventeenth century that drapery has this
 psychological significance.

<respStmt xml:id="MDMH-1">
  <resp>translation from German to English</resp>
  <name>Hottinger, Marie Donald Mackie</name>
</respStmt>

Damit dieses Beispiel valide ist, muss der Code MDMH-1 an anderer Stelle definiert werden, beispielsweise durch die Angabe der Verantwortlichkeit im <respStmt>-Element des zugehörigen TEI-Headers.

<p>J'écris dans la<lb/> marge...<lb/> Je vais<lb/> à la ligne.<lb/> Je renvoie à une
      note<note type="gloss" place="foot"> J'aime beaucoup les renvois en bas de page, même si
      je n'ai rien de particulier à y préciser.</note>en bas de page.</p>

爾時王園精舍有比丘尼，名曰毘梨<note type="gloss">毘梨，秦言雄也。</note>時彼國人一切共為俱蜜頭星會

此片的膠片已不存在，但《明星月報》刊登的艾霞電影腳本大綱，仍可供我們咀嚼艾霞的創作旨趣。<note n="35" anchored="true">
    此時電影很少有完整的腳本，多是類似早期新劇的「幕表」
，也就是大綱，因為是默片，台詞也很簡單，主要依靠導演指示，演員臨場作戲。</note>從她的文字風格語主題特色裡，...

The global @n attribute may be used to supply the symbol or number used to mark the note's point of attachment in the source text, as in the following example:

Mevorakh b. Saadya's mother, the matriarch of the
family during the second half of the eleventh century, <note n="126" anchored="true"> The
  alleged mention of Judah Nagid's mother in a letter from 1071 is, in fact, a reference to
  Judah's children; cf. above, nn. 111 and 54. </note> is well known from Geniza documents
published by Jacob Mann.

However, if notes are numbered in sequence and their numbering can be reconstructed automatically by processing software, it may well be considered unnecessary to record the note numbers.

Das globale @n-Attribut kann verwendet werden, um das Symbol oder die Nummer anzugeben, die verwendet wird, um den Bezugspunkt der Anmerkung im Quelltext zu markieren, wie im folgenden Beispiel:

Mevorakh b. Saadya's mother, the matriarch of the
family during the second half of the eleventh century, <note n="126" anchored="true"> The
  alleged mention of Judah Nagid's mother in a letter from 1071 is, in fact, a reference to
  Judah's children; cf. above, nn. 111 and 54. </note> is well known from Geniza documents
published by Jacob Mann.

Wenn jedoch Anmerkungen sequenziell nummeriert sind und deren Nummerierung durch die elektronische Verarbeitung automatisch rekonstruiert werden kann, kann es als unnötig angesehen werden, die Nummerierung anzugeben.

L'attribut global @n indique le symbole ou le nombre utilisé pour marquer le point d'insertion dans le texte source, comme dans l'exemple suivant :

Mevorakh b. Saadya's
mother, the matriarch of the family during the second half of the
eleventh century, <note n="126" anchored="true"> The alleged
  mention of Judah Nagid's mother in a letter from 1071 is, in fact,
  a reference to Judah's children; cf. above, nn. 111 and
  54. </note> is well known from Geniza documents published by Jacob
Mann.

Cependant, si les notes sont ordonnées et numérotées et qu’on veuille reconstruire automatiquement leur numérotation par un traitement informatique, il est inutile d’enregistrer le numéro des notes.

3.9.1. Notes and Simple Annotation 2.2.6. The Notes Statement 3.12.2.8. Notes and Statement of Language 9.3.5.4. Notes within Entries

<num>
number
숫자
數字
numéral
número
numero
Zahl
contains a number, written in any form.
다양한 형식의 숫자를 포함한다.
包含一個以任何形式呈現的數字。
各種形式による数値を示す。
contient un nombre écrit sous une forme quelconque.
contiene un número, escrito en cualquier forma.
contiene un numero in qualsiasi forma.
beinhaltet eine Zahl, die auf beliebige Art geschrieben sein kann.
@type
indicates the type of numeric value.
수치의 유형을 나타낸다.
指出數值的種類。
数値の種類を示す。
indique le type de valeur numérique
indica el tipo de valor numérico.
indica il tipo di valore numerico
bestimmt die Art des numerischen Wertes.
"cardinal"
absolute number, e.g. 21, 21.5
예를 들어, 21, 21.5와 같은 절대값
絕對數，例如21、21.5
número absoluto, p.ej. 21, 21,5
基数。例えば、21、21.5など。
nombre entier ou décimal, par exemple 21, 21.5
numero assoluto, ad esempio 21 o 21,5
Kardinalzahl, z. B. 21, 21,5
"ordinal"
ordinal number, e.g. 21st
예를 들어, 21번째와 같은 서수
序數，例如第21
número ordinal, p.ej. 21º
序数。例えば、21番など。
nombre ordinal, par exemple 21ème
numero ordinale, ad esempio 21°
Ordinalzahl, z. B. 21., fünfter
"fraction"
fraction, e.g. one half or three-quarters
예를 들어, 1/2 또는 3/4와 같은 분수
分數，例如二分之一或是四分之三
fracción,p.ej. una mitad o tres cuartos
割合。例えば、1/2、3/4など。
fraction, par exemple une moitié ou trois-quarts
frazione, ad esempio un terzo o tre quarti
Bruchzahl, z. B. 1/2 oder drei Viertel
"percentage"
a percentage
백분율
百分比
un porcentaje
パーセント。百分率。
un pourcentage
percentuale
Prozentangabe

If a different typology is desired, other values can be used for this attribute.

Si une autre typologie est souhaitée, d'autres valeurs peuvent être utilisées pour cet attribut.

上記とは別の分類が必要であれば、それを使うことができる。

Je nach gewünschter Typologie können andere Werte für dieses Attribut verwendet werden.

@value
supplies the value of the number in standard form.
표준형의 숫자 값을 제시한다.
用標準形式來說明該數字所代表的值。
標準的な形式で数値を示す。
fournit la valeur d'un nombre sous une forme normalisée.
proporciona el valor del número de forma estándard.
indica il valore del numero in formato standard
beinhaltet den Zahlenwert in standardisierter Form.
a numeric value. une valeur numérique. ein numerischer Wert

The standard form used is defined by the TEI datatype teidata.numeric.

La forme normalisée utilisée est définie par le type de données TEI qui concerne les données numériques.

標準的な形式は、TEIデータ型teidata.numericで定義されている。

Die benutzte standardisierte Form wird im TEI-Datentyp teidata.numeric definiert.

      <p>I reached <num type="cardinal" value="21">twenty-one</num> on
my <num type="ordinal" value="21">twenty-first</num> birthday</p>
      <p>Light travels at <num value="3E10">3×10<hi rend="sup">10</hi>
            </num> cm per second.</p>

<p>Pierre eut <num type="cardinal" value="10">dix</num>ans le jour de mon<num type="ordinal" value="21">vingtième </num> anniversaire.</p>

<p>在<num type="ordinal" value="21">第二十一</num>歲的生日那天，我變成<num type="cardinal" value="21">二十一</num>歲了... 光以每秒<num value="10E10">10<hi rend="sup">10</hi>
      </num> 公分移動。</p>

Detailed analyses of quantities and units of measure in historical documents may also use the feature structure mechanism described in chapter 18. Feature Structures. The <num> element is intended for use in simple applications.

Les analyses détaillées des quantités et unités de mesure dans les textes historiques peuvent aussi utiliser le mécanisme de structure de traits décrit au chapitre18. Feature Structures. L'élément <num> est conçu pour un usage dans des applications simples.

歴史的文書の量や大きさの詳細な分析には、18. Feature Structuresで解説 されている素性構造機能を使うことになるかもしれない。当該要素<num>は、簡単なソフトウェアで使われることが想定され ている。

Detaillierte Analysen von Mengen und Maßeinheiten in historischen Dokumenten können auch den 'feature structure' Mechanismus verwenden, wie in Kapitel 18. Feature Structures beschrieben. Das <num>-Element ist für einfache Anwendungen vorgesehen.

3.6.3. Numbers and Measures

<opener>
opener
formule de début
groups together dateline, byline, salutation, and similar phrases appearing as a preliminary group at the start of a division, especially of a letter.
구역, 특히 편지의 시작부에 서문군으로 나타나는 날짜 표시란, 필자명 행, 인사말, 그리고 유사 구를 합하여 모아 놓는다.
匯集日期地點、署名、稱呼語及其他在區段開端出現的類似措辭，尤指信件開頭。
テキスト部分の始まりに、日付欄、署名欄、挨拶文言など、前置き的な部分としてあるものをまとめる。典型例は、手紙の場合である。
regroupe la date, la mention de responsabilité, la formule de politesse et d'autres expressions de ce type dans un groupe préliminaire au début d’une division, en particulier au commencement d’une lettre.
fasst Datumszeile, Verfasserangabe, Anredeformel und ähnliche Phrasen zusammen, die einleitend zu Beginn eines Abschnitts stehen, vor allem bei einem Brief.
agrupa la fecha, autoria, fórmula introductiva o de saludo o expresiones similares utilizades al inicio de una división textual, especialmente en una carta.
raggruppa dateline, byline, formule introduttive o di saluto ed espressioni simili utilizzate all'inizio di una partizione testuale, soprattutto in una lettera

<opener>
  <dateline>Walden, this 29. of August 1592</dateline>
</opener>

<opener>
  <dateline>Avignon, le 11 février.</dateline>
</opener>

<opener>
  <dateline><name type="place"> à Paris </name>, <date>le 2 septembre 1769</date></dateline>
</opener>
<p>Mais non, ma bonne amie, vous n' aviez pas raison de vous plaindre... </p>

<opener>
  <dateline>1983年7月3日</dateline>
</opener>

<opener>
  <dateline>
    <name type="place">杭州西湖</name>
    <date>2008年4月1日</date>
  </dateline>
  <salute>親愛的小張：</salute>
</opener>
<p>很抱歉，我今天有事無法赴約，希望您能諒解...</p>

<opener>
  <dateline>
    <name type="place">Great Marlborough Street</name>
    <date>November 11, 1848</date>
  </dateline>
  <salute>My dear Sir,</salute>
</opener>
<p>I am sorry to say that absence from town and other circumstances have prevented me from
  earlier enquiring...</p>

4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

<orig>
original form
원형식
原文格式
forme originale
forma original
forma orininaria
originale Form
contains a reading which is marked as following the original, rather than being normalized or corrected.
표준화 또는 수정된 것이 아닌 원형식을 따르는 해석을 포함한다.
標誌原文中呈現的文字，並且未經過任何修改或規格化處理。
正規化または校正は施されていない、元の形のまま符号化されている読みを 示す。
contient une partie notée comme étant fidèle à l'original et non pas normalisée ou corrigée.
contiene una lectura que se marca como fiel al original.
contiene una lettura codificata come conforme all'originale piuttosto che ad una versione normalizzata o corretta
enthält jene Schreibweise, die der Vorlage folgt und nicht normalisiert oder korrigiert ist.

If all that is desired is to call attention to the original version in the copy text, <orig> may be used alone:

<l>But this will be a <orig>meere</orig> confusion</l>
<l>And hardly shall we all be <orig>vnderstoode</orig>
      </l>

Wenn es nur darum geht, auf die originale Version der Textvorlage hinzuweisen, kann das <orig>-Element auch allein verwendet werden:

<l>But this will be a <orig>meere</orig> confusion</l>
<l>And hardly shall we all be <orig>vnderstoode</orig>
</l>

Si on veut privilégier la version originale du texte, <orig> sera utilisé seul:

<p>si mes pensées se sont entretenues des occurences <orig>estrangieres</orig> quelque
    partie du temps, quelque autre partie je les <orig>rameine</orig> à la promenade, au<orig>
      vergier</orig>, à la douceur de cette solitude et à moy. </p>

Généralement, <orig> sera associé à la forme corrigée dans un élément <choice>.

<l>Un bienfait perd sa grâce à le trop <choice><orig>oublier</orig><corr>publier</corr></choice> ; </l>
<l>Qui veut qu'on s'en souvienne, il le faut <choice><orig>publier</orig><corr>oublier</corr></choice>.</l>

<l>妹子是被大哥<orig>喫</orig>了，母親知道沒有，我可不得而知。 </l>
<l>母親想也知道；不過哭的時候，卻<orig>并</orig>沒有說明，大約也以為應當的了。</l>

<l>妹子是被大哥<choice><orig>喫</orig><reg>吃</reg></choice> 了，母親知道沒有，我可不得而知。</l>
<l>母親想也知道；不過哭的時候，卻 <choice><orig>并</orig><reg>並</reg></choice>沒有說明，大約也以為應當的了。</l>

More usually, an <orig> will be combined with a regularized form within a <choice> element:

<l>But this will be a <choice><orig>meere</orig><reg>mere</reg></choice> confusion</l>
<l>And hardly shall we all be <choice><orig>vnderstoode</orig><reg>understood</reg></choice>
      </l>

In der Regel wird ein <orig>-Element mit einer normalisierten Form in einem <choice> Element kombiniert:

<l>But this will be a <choice><orig>meere</orig><reg>mere</reg></choice> confusion</l>
<l>And hardly shall we all be <choice><orig>vnderstoode</orig><reg>understood</reg></choice>
</l>

3.5.2. Regularization and Normalization 12. Critical Apparatus

<p>
paragraph
문단
段落
paragraphe
párrafo
paragrafo
Absatz
marks paragraphs in prose.
산문에서 문단을 표시한다.
標記散文的段落。
散文の段落を示す。
marque les paragraphes dans un texte en prose.
marca párrafos en prosa.
indica i paragrafi in prosa
markiert einen Absatz in einem Prosatext.
Abstract model violation: Paragraphs may not occur inside other paragraphs or ab elements. Abstract model violation: Lines may not contain higher-level structural elements such as div, p, or ab, unless p is a child of figure or note, or is a descendant of floatingText. text-align: justify;

<p>Hallgerd was outside. <q>There is blood on your axe,</q> she said. <q>What have you
              done?</q>
      </p>
<p><q>I have now arranged that you can be married a second time,</q> replied Thjostolf.</p>
<p><q>Then you must mean that Thorvald is dead,</q> she said.</p>
<p><q>Yes,</q> said Thjostolf. <q>And now you must think up some plan for me.</q>
   </p>

<div>
  <p>C'était à Mégara, faubourg de Carthage, dans les jardins d'Hamilcar.</p>
  <p>Les soldats qu'il avait commandés en Sicile se donnaient un grand festin pour célébrer
      le jour anniversaire de la bataille d'Eryx, et comme le maître était absent et qu'ils se
      trouvaient nombreux, ils mangeaient et ils buvaient en pleine liberté.</p>
</div>

<p>我抬起頭，他打開了一扇窗戶，探出頭來。<q>先生？</q>
   </p><p><q>你要去哪。葛里葉？</q></p><p><q>去藥劑師那裡，先生。太太要我去，替男孩拿點東西。</q></p><p><q>你能不能也替我拿點東西？</q></p>ㄒㄒ
<p><q>當然能，先生。</q> 忽然間風好像沒那麼刺骨了。 <q>等一下，我把它寫下來。</q>
   </p>

3.1. Paragraphs 7.2.5. Speech Contents

<pb>
page beginning
페이지 바꿈
分頁
début de page
inicio de página
inizio di pagina
Seitenanfang
marks the beginning of a new page in a paginated document.
표준 참조 시스템에서 텍스트 페이지와 다음 페이지 사이의 경계를 표지한다.
以標準參照系統來標記頁與頁之間的分界線。
テキストのページ境界を、標準的な参照システム示す。
marque le début d'une page de texte dans un document paginé.
marca el inicio de una nueva página de un texto en un documento paginado.
segna l'inizio di una nuova pagina in un documento impaginato.
markiert den Anfang einer neuen Seite in einem Dokument mit Seitenzahlen.
display: block; margin-left: 4pt; color: grey; float: right; content: '[Page '; content: ']';

Page numbers may vary in different editions of a text.

<p> ... <pb n="145" ed="ed2"/>
       ... <pb n="283" ed="ed1"/>
       ... </p>

Die Seitenzahlen können in verschiedenen Ausgaben eines Textes variieren.

<p> ... <pb n="145" ed="ed2"/>
   ... <pb n="283" ed="ed1"/>
   ... </p>

A page break may be associated with a facsimile image of the page it introduces by means of the @facs attribute

<body>
  <pb n="1" facs="page1.png"/>

  <p/>
  <pb n="2" facs="page2.png"/>

  <p/>
</body>

Ein Seitenumbruch kann über das @facs-Attribut mit einem Faksimile der Seite verknüpft werden.

<body>
  <pb n="1" facs="page1.png"/>

  <p/>
  <pb n="2" facs="page2.png"/>

  <p/>
</body>

A <pb> element should appear at the start of the page which it identifies. The global @n attribute indicates the number or other value associated with this page. This will normally be the page number or signature printed on it, since the physical sequence number is implicit in the presence of the <pb> element itself.

The @type attribute may be used to characterize the page break in any respect. The more specialized attributes @break, @ed, or @edRef should be preferred when the intent is to indicate whether or not the page break is word-breaking, or to note the source from which it derives.

Un élément <pb> apparaît au début de la page à laquelle il se rapporte. L'attribut global @n donne un numéro ou une autre valeur associée à cette page. Ce sera normalement le numéro de page ou la signature qui y est imprimée, puisque le numéro d'ordre matériel est implicite avec l'élément <pb> lui-même.

L' attribut @type sera employé pour indiquer toutes ses caractéristiques du saut de page, par exemple comme coupure de mot ou non.

当該要素にあるグローバル属性@nは、当該要素<pb>があ る場所に続いてあるページと関連する数値を示す。符号化する人は、改ページと関連する数値が、物理的な一連の番号になるのか、または印刷されてい る番号になるのかについて、明確で一貫した方針を採るべきである。一般には、要素<pb>は、参照するページの始めに置かれるべきである。

Ein <pb>-Element soll am Beginn der Seite stehen, die es kennzeichnet. Das globale @n-Attribut gibt die Zahl (oder einen anderen Wert) an, der mit dieser Seite verbunden ist. Üblicherweise ist das die Seitenzahl oder eine auf der Seite abgedruckte Signatur, da die Position in der physikalischen Sequenz durch das <pb>-Element implizit ist.

Das @type-Attribut kann verwendet werden, den Seitenumbruch näher zu beschreiben, wenn nicht die speziellen Attribute @break (Worttrennung), @ed oder @edRef (Textzeuge, in dem der Seitenumbruch vorkommt) verwendet werden können.

3.11.3. Milestone Elements

<pc>
punctuation character
Interpunktionszeichen
contains a character or string of characters regarded as constituting a single punctuation mark.
contient un caractère ou une chaîne de caractères considérés comme un signe de ponctuation unique.
enthält ein Zeichen oder eine Zeichenkette, die ein einzelnes Interpunktionszeichen repräsentiert.
@force
indicates the extent to which this punctuation mark conventionally separates words or phrases
gibt an, in welchem Maß das betreffende Interpunktionszeichen Wörter oder Phrasen gewöhnlich voneinander trennt.
"strong"
the punctuation mark is a word separator
das Interpunktionszeichen ist ein Wortbegrenzungszeichen.
"weak"
the punctuation mark is not a word separator
das Interpunktionszeichen ist kein Wortbegrenzungszeichen.
"inter"
the punctuation mark may or may not be a word separator
das Interpunktionszeichen kann oder kann nicht als Wortbegrenzungszeichen fungieren.
@unit
provides a name for the kind of unit delimited by this punctuation mark.
gibt die Art der Einheit an, die durch das Interpunktionszeichen begrenzt wird.
@pre
indicates whether this punctuation mark precedes or follows the unit it delimits.
gibt an, ob das Interpunktionszeichen der Einheit, die es begrenzt, vorangeht oder folgt.

<phr>
  <w>do</w>
  <w>you</w>
  <w>understand</w>
  <pc type="interrogative">?</pc>
</phr>

Example encoding of the German sentence Wir fahren in den Urlaub., encoded with attributes from att.linguistic discussed in section .

<s>
  <w pos="PPER" msd="1.Pl.*.Nom">Wir</w>
  <w pos="VVFIN" msd="1.Pl.Pres.Ind">fahren</w>
  <w pos="APPR" msd="--">in</w>
  <w pos="ART" msd="Def.Masc.Akk.Sg.">den</w>
  <w pos="NN" msd="Masc.Akk.Sg.">Urlaub</w>
  <pc pos="$." msd="--" join="left">.</pc>
</s>

17.1.2. Below the Word Level 17.4.2. Lightweight Linguistic Annotation

<person>
person
personne
provides information about an identifiable individual, for example a participant in a language interaction, or a person referred to in a historical source.
예를 들어 언어 상호작용의 참여자 또는 역사적 문헌에서 언급된 사람과 같이 식별가능한 개인에 관한 정보를 제공한다.
提供一個已知人物的相關資料，例如語言互動中的參與者、或是歷史來源中提及的人物。
特定可能な個人の情報を示す。例えば、言語交流の参加者、歴史資料中で参 照される人物など。
fournit des informations sur un individu identifiable, par exemple un participant à une interaction linguistique, ou une personne citée dans une source historique.
proporciona información relativa a un individuo específico, p.ej. un participante de una interacción verbal o una persona identificada por una fuente histórica.
fornisce informazioni relative a un soggetto specifico, come i partecipanti a un'interazione verbale o le persone identificate da una fonte storica
@role
specifies a primary role or classification for the person.
사람에 대한 주요 역할 또는 분류를 명시한다.
說明該人物的主要角色或分類。
当該人物の第一位の役割や分類を示す。
précise un rôle principal ou une classification principale pour cette personne.
establece el rol o la clasificación primaria de una persona.
stabilisce il ruolo o la classificazione primaria di una persona

Values for this attribute may be locally defined by a project, using arbitrary keywords such as "artist", "employer", "author", "relative", or "servant", each of which should be associated with a definition. Such local definitions will typically be provided by a <valList> element in the project schema specification.

@sex
specifies the sex of the person.
사람의 성을 명시한다.
指出該人物的性別。
当該人物の性別を示す。
précise le sexe de la personne.
especifica el sexo de una persona.
indica il sesso di una persona

Values for this attribute may be defined locally by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

@gender
specifies the gender of the person.

Values for this attribute may be defined locally by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

@age
specifies an age group for the person.
사람의 연령군을 명시한다.
指出該人物所屬的年齡層。
当該人物の年齢層を示す。
précise une tranche d'âge pour la personne.
especifica un intervalo de edad para una persona.
indica la fascia di età di una persona

Values for this attribute may be locally defined by a project, using arbitrary keywords such as "infant", "child", "teen", "adult", or "senior", each of which should be associated with a definition. Such local definitions will typically be provided by a <valList> element in the project schema specification.

<person sex="1">
  <p>William Shakespeare, born in Stratford-upon-Avon, 26 April 1564, died in
    Stratford-upon-Avon, 23 April 1616, English playwright and poet</p>
</person>

<person xml:id="Stevenson" sex="m" role="writer">
  <p>
    <name type="surname">Stevenson</name>
    <name type="forename">Robert</name>
    <name type="forename">Louis</name>
  </p>
</person>

13.3.2. The Person Element 15.2.2. The Participant Description

<place>
place
lieu
contains data about a geographic location
지리적 위치에 관한 데이터를 포함한다.
contiene los datos sobre una localización geográfica
地理上の場所のデータを示す。
contient des informations sur un lieu géographique.
contiene informazioni relative a un luogo geografico

<place xml:id="Hereford">
  <p>
    <name type="place">Hereford</name>
    <name type="country">England</name>
  </p>
</place>

<place xml:id="Lithuania">
  <p>
    <name type="country">Lithuania</name>
    <name type="country" xml:lang="lt">Lietuva</name>
  </p>
  <place xml:id="Vilnius">
    <p>
      <name>Vilnius</name>
    </p>
  </place>
  <place xml:id="Kaunas">
    <p>
      <name>Kaunas</name>
    </p>
  </place>
</place>

13.3.4. Places

<postscript>
contains a postscript, e.g. to a letter.
예를 들어 편지의, 추신.
contiene una posdata, p.ej. en una carta.
追伸を示す。例えば、手紙の場合など。
contient un post-scriptum, par exemple au bas d' une lettre.
contiene un post scriptum, come nel caso di una lettera
enthält einen Nachtrag (Postskriptum), z. B. zu einem Brief.

  <div type="letter">
    <opener>
      <dateline>
        <placeName>Rimaone</placeName>
        <date when="2006-11-21">21 Nov 06</date>
      </dateline>
      <salute>Dear Susan,</salute>
    </opener>
    <p>Thank you very much for the assistance splitting those
logs. I'm sorry about the misunderstanding as to the size of
the task. I really was not asking for help, only to borrow the
axe. Hope you had fun in any case.</p>
    <closer>
      <salute>Sincerely yours,</salute>
      <signed>Seymour</signed>
    </closer>
    <postscript>
      <label>P.S.</label>
      <p>The collision occured on <date when="2001-07-06">06 Jul 01</date>.</p>
    </postscript>
  </div>

<div type="letter">
  <opener>
    <dateline>
      <date when="1942">Printemps 1942 </date>
    </dateline>
    <salute>Cher ami, </salute>
  </opener>
  <p>Le printemps vient maintenant. J'espère que là où tu es le climat à cette saison n'est
      pas encore pénible. C'est le moment des travaux des champs ; peut-être arrivera-t-on à
      quelque chose pour toi. S'il n'y a pas moyen de te faire venir en France, faut-il faire
      des démarches pour essayer de te faire quitter l'Europe ? Écris-le-moi. </p>
  <p>[...] </p>
  <closer>
    <salute> Crois à mon amitié fraternelle. </salute>
    <signed>Simone Weil </signed>
  </closer>
  <postscript>
    <label>P.S.</label>
    <p>Voici la traduction de quelques vers grecs d'Eschyle. Ils sont prononcés par
        Prométhée, le dieu qui, d'après les croyances des Grecs, avait sauvé les hommes de la
        destruction, avait volé le feu pour le leur donner et leur avait appris le langage, le
        nombre, l'astronomie, les métiers et les arts. Il en fut puni et fut cloué sur un
        rocher. La tragédie d'Eschyle commence par la scène où on le cloue ; il se tait
        pendant ce temps, puis, quand ses bourreaux sont partis, il dit : [...]</p>
  </postscript>
</div>

<div type="letter">
  <opener>
    <dateline>
      <date when="1911-03-26">辛亥三月二十六</date>
    </dateline>
    <salute>意映卿卿如晤：</salute>
  </opener>
  <p>吾今以此書與汝永別矣！吾作此書，淚珠和筆墨齊下，不能竟書，而欲擱筆！又恐汝不察吾衷，謂吾忍舍汝而死，謂吾不知汝之不欲吾死也，故遂忍悲為汝言之。...</p>
  <closer>
    <signed>夜四鼓<name>意洞</name>手書</signed>
  </closer>
</div>

4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

<publisher>
publisher
editorial
éditeur
Verlag
provides the name of the organization responsible for the publication or distribution of a bibliographic item.
서지 항목의 출판이나 배포에 책임이 있는 기구명을 제시한다.
提供負責出版或發行書目項目的機構名稱。
書誌項目の出版や頒布に責任のある団体の名前を示す。
donne le nom de l'organisme responsable de la publication ou de la distribution d'un élément de la bibliographie.
proporciona el nombre de la organización responsable de la publicación o la distribución de un elemento bibliográfico.
fornisce il nome
gibt den Namen der Organisation an, die für die Veröffentlichung und Verbreitung eines bibliografischen Objekts verantwortlich ist.
Omit if located in teiHeader.

<imprint>
  <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
  <publisher>Clarendon Press</publisher>
  <date>1987</date>
</imprint>

<imprint>
  <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>
  <publisher>Les Éditions de Minuit</publisher>
  <date>2001</date>
</imprint>

<imprint>
  <pubPlace>上海</pubPlace>
  <publisher>上海古籍出版社</publisher>
  <date>2008</date>
</imprint>

Use the full form of the name by which a company is usually referred to, rather than any abbreviation of it which may appear on a title page

Utiliser la forme développée du nom au moyen duquel l'organisme est habituellement cité, plutôt qu'une abréviation, cette dernière pouvant apparaître sur une page de titre.

会社を示す、タイトルページにある省略名ではなく、正式な名前を使う。

Außer bei der Transkription von bibliografischen Angaben, ist der vollständige Name des Unternehmens gegenüber einer abgekürzten Version, wie sie etwa auf der gedruckten Titelseite zu finden ist, zu bevorzugen.

3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information 2.2.4. Publication, Distribution, Licensing, etc.

<pubPlace>
publication place
출판지
lugar de la publicación
lieu de publication
luogo di pubblicazione
Verlagsort
contains the name of the place where a bibliographic item was published.
서지 대상이 출판된 장소명을 포함한다.
包含書目項目的出版地名稱。
書誌項目が出版された場所の名前を示す。
contient le nom du lieu d'une publication.
contiene el nombre del lugar de publicación de un elemento bibliográfico.
contiene il nome del luogo in cui un'unità bibliografica è stata pubblicata
enthält den Namen des Orts, an dem ein bibliografisches Objekt veröffentlicht wurde.
Omit if located in teiHeader.

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>Oxford University Press</publisher>
  <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
  <date>1989</date>
</publicationStmt>

<publicationStmt>
  <publisher>Editions Denoëll</publisher>
  <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>
  <date>1975</date>
</publicationStmt>

3.12.2.4. Imprint, Size of a Document, and Reprint Information

<q>
quoted
인용 부호로 주변 텍스트와 구분됨.
引用的言詞、思想、或文字
séparé du texte environnant par des guillemets
discurso citado, pensado o escrito
citazione di discorso, pensiero o testo scritto
in Anführungszeichen
contains material which is distinguished from the surrounding text using quotation marks or a similar method, for any one of a variety of reasons including, but not limited to: direct speech or thought, technical terms or jargon, authorial distance, quotations from elsewhere, and passages that are mentioned but not used.
직접 대화 또는 사고, 전문 용어 또는 은어, 작가의 거리두기, 외부로부터의 인용문, 그리고 사용되지 않고 언급된 단락 등의 이유로, 그리고 그 밖의 다른 이유로, 주변 텍스트와 어떤 방식으로든 차이가 있다고 (명시적으로) 표시된 부분을 포함한다.
包含標記為 (看似) 引用自他處的內容；在敘述文中，此元素用來標記直接或間接敘述；在字典中，用來標記實例或編者設計的範例；在寫本描述或其他上層資訊中，用來標記由來源文本中所摘錄的引文。
周りのテキストとは(表面上)異なっているようにマークアップされている部分を示す。例えば、直接話法や思考、技術用語や専門語、著者による区別、 引用、言及されているが使われていない一節など。
contient un fragment qui est marqué (visiblement) comme étant d’une manière ou d'une autre différent du texte environnant, pour diverses raisons telles que, par exemple, un discours direct ou une pensée, des termes techniques ou du jargon, une mise à distance par rapport à l’auteur, des citations empruntées et des passages qui sont mentionnés mais non employés.
contiene material que se marca como (ostensiblemente) citado de cualquier otro sitio: en la narrativa, este elemento se usa para marcar discursos en estilo directo o indirecto; en diccionarios puede usarse para marcar ejemplos reales o ideados de uso; en descripciones de manuscritos u otros metadatos, para marcar extractos citados de la fuente que se documenta.
contiene una citazione codificata come se fosse (formalmente) espressa da qualcun altro; in narrativa, l'elemento è usato per codificare discorso diretto o indiretto; nei dizionari, può essere usato per indicare esempi, reali o inventati, dell'uso di un termine; nelle descrizioni dei manoscritti o altre metainformazioni per codificare estratti citati da fonti documentate.
enthält Material, das vom umgebenden Text durch Anführungszeichen oder ähnliche Methoden abgesetzt ist. Die Abhebung kann beliebige Gründe haben, wie z. B. direkte Rede, wiedergegebene Gedanken, Fachbegriffe, Jargon, Distanzierung des Autors, Zitate aus anderen Texten, erwähnte aber nicht benutzte Passagen.
@type
type
Typ
may be used to indicate whether the offset passage is spoken or thought, or to characterize it more finely.
표시된 단락이 대화인지 사고인지를 나타내거나, 더 자세하게 규정하는 데 사용될 수 있다.
可用來指出引文內容為言詞或思想，或者做更詳細的引文描述。
当該部分が、発話されたものか、思考されたものかを示すため、またはより詳細に性質を示すために使われるかもしれない。
peut être utilisé pour indiquer si le passage cité correspond à une parole ou à une pensée ou encore pour le caractériser plus finement.
Puede usarse para indicar si el material citado es hablado o pensado, o para caracterizarlo con más precisión.
può essere usato per indicare se il brano citato è parlato o pensato, oppure per caratterizzarlo con maggior precisione.
kann verwendet werden, um anzuzeigen, ob die abgesetzte Textpassage gesprochen oder gedacht wird, oder um sie auf andere Weise detaillierter zu beschreiben.
"spoken"
spoken
gesprochen
representation of speech
대화의 표상
表示直接敘述，通常會標上引號。
発話。
notation du discours direct
representación del estilo directo, normalmente marcado mediante comillas.
rappresentazione del discorso diretto, di solito segnalato dalle virgolette.
Wiedergabe gesprochener Sprache
"thought"
thought
gedacht
representation of thought, e.g. internal monologue
사고의 표상, 예를 들어, 내적 독백
表示思考內容，例如內心獨白。
思考。例えば、内的独白。
représentation de la pensée, par exemple un monologue intérieur.
representación de un pensamiento o reflexión, p.ej. un monólogo interno.
rappresentazione del pensiero, ad esempio il monologo interiore.
Wiedergabe von Gedanken, z. B. eines inneren Monologes
"written"
written
geschrieben
quotation from a written source
문어 원본으로부터 인용
引用自一份書面來源文件。
書かれた資料の引用。
citation d'une source écrite
cita de una fuente escrita.
citazione da una fonte scritta.
Zitat aus einer schriftlichen Quelle
"soCalled"
so called
sogenannt
authorial distance
작가의 거리두기
distancia autorial
著者による区別。
distance prise par rapport à l'auteur
distanza dell'autore
Distanzierung des Autors
"foreign"
foreign
fremdartig
foreign words
palabras extranjeras
mots étrangers
parole straniere
"distinct"
distinct
distinkt
linguistically distinct
lingüisticamente distinto
linguistiquement distinct
linguisticamente distinto
linguistisch hervorgehoben
"term"
technical term
término técnico
terme technique
termine tecnico
Fachbegriff
"emph"
emph
betont
rhetorically emphasized
énfasis retórico
mis en valeur par un procédé rhétorique.
retoricamente marcato
rhetorische Emphase
"mentioned"
mentioned
erwähnt
refering to itself, not its normal referent
일반적인 지시체가 아니라 그 자체를 가리킴
se refiere a sí mismo, no a su referente habitual
一般的な指示対象ではないもの。
métalinguistic, i.e. faisant référence à lui-même et non à son référent habituel.
che si riferisce a se stesso e non al suo referente abituale
bezieht sich auf sich selbst, nicht auf den üblichen Bezugspunkt
margin-left: 10px; margin-right: 10px; content: '‘'; content: '’'; margin-left: 10px; margin-right: 10px;

It is spelled <q>Tübingen</q> — to enter the
letter <q>u</q> with an umlaut hold down the <q>option</q> key and press <q>0 0 f c</q>

<p>Si quelque serrure allait mal, il l'avait bientôt démontée, rafistolée, huilée, limée,
    remontée, en disant :<q>ça me connaît</q>.</p>

<p>Enfin je me rappelai le pis-aller d’une grande princesse à
qui l’on disait que les paysans n’avaient pas de pain, et qui
répondit : <q>Qu’ils mangent de la brioche.</q>
   </p>

三個魚字疊作 <q>鱻</q>， — 欲拼出此<q>鱻</q>字，可以<q>漢語拼音</q>
       輸入<q>xin</q>即可。

May be used to indicate that a passage is distinguished from the surrounding text for reasons concerning which no claim is made. When used in this manner, <q> may be thought of as syntactic sugar for <hi> with a value of @rend that indicates the use of such mechanisms as quotation marks.

Peut être utilisé pour indiquer qu'un passage est distingué du texte environnant par des guillemets, pour des raisons non explicitées. Lorsqu'il est utilisé ainsi, <q> peut être considéré comme un encodage plus lisible (sucre syntaxique) pour <hi> avec une valeur de @rend indiquant la fonction des guillemets.

Puede ser utilizado para indicar que un pasaje es distinguido del texto circundante mediante las comillas por las razones que sean sobre las cuales no se hace ninguna declaración. Cuando se utiliza de este modo, <q> puede ser considerado como una marca sintáctica para <hi> con un valor de @rend, lo que indica el uso de las comillas.

Das Element kann benutzt werden, um anzuzeigen, dass eine Textpassage sich vom umgebenden Text unterscheidet - aus Gründen, die nicht näher spezifiziert werden. Wenn das Element in dieser Weise benutzt wird, kann das <q>-Element als syntactic sugar (d.h. vereinfachte Schreibweise) für das <hi>-Element mit einem entsprechenden Wert im @rend-Attribut gedacht werden.

ある一節が、引用符などで周りのテキストから区別されていることを示す ために使われるかもしれない。この場合、要素<q>は、引用を示す属性@rendを伴う要素<hi>の糖衣構文になる。

3.3.3. Quotation

<quote>
quotation
인용
引文
citation
cita
citazione
contains a phrase or passage attributed by the narrator or author to some agency external to the text.
해설자 또는 저자에 의해, 텍스트의 외부 주체에 의해 생성된 것이라 밝혀진 구 또는 단락을 포함한다.
包含敘述者或作者引用自文本以外來源的字 (句) 詞或段落。
語り手や著者が、当該テキスト外にあるものに向けた、一節を示す。
contient une expression ou un passage que le narrateur ou l'auteur attribue à une origine extérieure au texte.
contiene una frase o pasaje atribuido por el narrador o autor a un agente externo al texto.
contiene una frase o un brano attribuito dall'autore o dal narratore a soggetti esterni al testo
If it is inside a paragraph then it is inline, otherwise it is block level content: '‘'; content: '’'; If it is inside a paragraph then it is inline, otherwise it is block level margin-left: 10px; margin-right: 10px;

Lexicography has shown little sign of being affected by the
work of followers of J.R. Firth, probably best summarized in his
slogan, <quote>You shall know a word by the company it
keeps</quote>
   <ref>(Firth, 1957)</ref>

C'est sûrement ça
qu'on appelle la glorieuse liberté des enfants de Dieu. <quote>Aime et fais tout ce que tu
  voudras.</quote>Mais moi, ça me démolit.

孟懿子問孝。子曰：<quote>無違。</quote>
<ref>(論語：卷一：為政第二)</ref>

If a bibliographic citation is supplied for the source of a quotation, the two may be grouped using the <cit> element.

Si une référence bibliographique est donnée comme source de la citation, on peut les regrouper dans l'élément <cit>.

Si una citación bibliográfica es proporcionada como fuente de una cita, las dos se pueden agrupar usando el elemento <CIT>

引用部分に書誌情報の引用がある場合、この2つの部分は、要素 <cit>でまとめられる。

3.3.3. Quotation 4.3.1. Grouped Texts

<ref>
reference
참조
referencia
référence
riferimento
Referenz
defines a reference to another location, possibly modified by additional text or comment.
부가적인 텍스트 또는 해설로 수정될 수 있는, 다른 위치로 참조를 정의한다.
標明與其他位置互相參照的符號，或許包含附加的文字或註解。
他の場所への参照を定義する。多くは、追加テキストまたはコメントを含む。
définit une référence vers un autre emplacement, la référence étant éventuellement modifiée ou complétée par un texte ou un commentaire.
define una referencia a otra localización, posiblemente modificada por un texto o comentario adicional.
definisce un riferimento ad un'altra posizione, può essere modificata da un commento o testo ulteriore
definiert einen externen oder internen Verweis, der auch durch einen zusätzlichen Text oder Kommentar ergänzt werden kann.
Only one of the attributes @target' and @cRef' may be supplied on

See especially <ref target="http://www.natcorp.ox.ac.uk/Texts/A02.xml#s2">the second
sentence</ref>

See also <ref target="#locution">s.v. <term>locution</term>
</ref>.

Cf. tout particulièrement <ref target="#SEC12">la section 12, page 34</ref>.

Cf. tout particulièrement
<ref cRef="B1/234">le vers 234 du Livre I</ref>

<ref target="http://www.natcorp.ox.ac.uk/Texts/A02.xml#s2"> 關於第二行，</ref> 請參考 <ref>下列
<term>慣用語</term>
 </ref>.

The @target and @cRef attributes are mutually exclusive.

Les attributs @target et @cRef sont exclusifs l'un de l'autre.

属性@targetと@cRefは、排他的に使用される。

Die @target und @cRef-Attribute schließen sich gegenseitig aus.

3.7. Simple Links and Cross-References 16.1. Links

<reg>
regularization
정규화
一般化
régularisation
regularización
regolarizzazione
Normalisierung
contains a reading which has been regularized or normalized in some sense.
어떤 면에서 정규화 또는 표준화된 해석을 포함한다.
標誌一般化或規格化處理過的文字。
正規化された読みを示す。
contient une partie qui a été régularisée ou normalisée de façon quelconque
contiene una lectura que ha sido regularizada o normalizada en algún sentido.
contiene una lettura è stata regolarizzata o normalizzata in qualche modo.
enthält eine normalisierte Schreibweise einer Textstelle.

If all that is desired is to call attention to the fact that the copy text has been regularized, <reg> may be used alone:

<q>Please <reg>knock</reg> if an <reg>answer</reg> is <reg>required</reg>
      </q>

Wenn es nur darum geht, darauf hinzuweisen, dass die Textvorlage normalisiert wurde, kann das <reg>-Element auch allein verwendet werden:

<q>Please <reg>knock</reg> if an <reg>answer</reg> is <reg>required</reg>
</q>

Si on veut attirer l'attention sur le fait que le texte a été régularisé, <reg> est utilisé seul :

<l><reg>Maître</reg> Corbeau sur un arbre perché,</l>
<l><reg>Tenait</reg> en son bec un fromage.</l>

Il est également possible d'identifier l'auteur de la régularisation, et avec les éléments <choice> et<orig>, donner à la fois la lecture originale et la lecture régularisée.:

<l><choice><orig>Maistre</orig><reg resp="#LB">Maître</reg></choice>Corbeau sur un arbre                perché,</l>
<l><choice><orig>Tenoit</orig><reg resp="#LB">Tenait</reg></choice> en son bec un            fromage.</l>

<q>你已經<reg>計劃</reg>我們<reg>下週</reg>旅遊的<reg>計畫</reg>了嗎？</q>

<q>你已經 <choice><reg>計劃</reg><orig>計畫</orig></choice> 我們 <choice><reg>下週</reg><orig>下周</orig></choice> 旅遊的 <choice><reg>計畫</reg><orig>計劃</orig></choice>了嗎？
</q>

It is also possible to identify the individual responsible for the regularization, and, using the <choice> and <orig> elements, to provide both the original and regularized readings:

<q>Please <choice><reg resp="#LB">knock</reg><orig>cnk</orig></choice> if an <choice><reg>answer</reg><orig>nsr</orig></choice> is <choice><reg>required</reg><orig>reqd</orig></choice>
      </q>

Es ist auch möglich, die für die Normalisierung verantwortliche Person zu identifizieren; mit den Elementen <choice> und <orig> können sowohl die originale als auch die normalisierte Lesart angeboten werden:

<q>Please <choice><reg resp="#LB">knock</reg><orig>cnk</orig></choice> if an <choice><reg>answer</reg><orig>nsr</orig></choice> is <choice><reg>required</reg><orig>reqd</orig></choice>
</q>

3.5.2. Regularization and Normalization 12. Critical Apparatus

<relatedItem>
contains or references some other bibliographic item which is related to the present one in some specified manner, for example as a constituent or alternative version of it.
구성물이나 대체 버전과 같이 현 항목과 특정 방식으로 관련된 다른 서지 항목을 명시적 방식에 따라 포함하거나 지시한다.
包含或參照到其他書目項目，該些項目與目前的書目項目在某種程度上相關，例如作為其組成或者替代項目。
当該内容と関連する書誌情報項目を示す、または参照する。例えば、構成要 素または他の版など。
contient ou référe à un autre élément bibliographique ayant une relation quelconque avec l'objet décrit, par exemple comme faisant partie d'une version alternative de celui-ci, ou bien en étant une version alternative.
contiene o si riferisce ad altra entità bibliografica legata alla presente tramite una relazione specificata quale, per esempio, versione costitutiva o alternativa
contiene o refiere algún otro elemento bibliográfico que se relaciona con el actual de alguna manera, por ejemplo como un versión complementaria o alternativa de este.
enthält oder verweist auf ein anderes bibliografisches Objekt, welches zu dem aktuellen in einer bestimmten Beziehung steht, z. B. als Bestandteil oder Alternativfassung.
If the @target attribute on is used, the relatedItem element must be empty A relatedItem element should have either a 'target' attribute or a child element to indicate the related bibliographic item
@target
points to the related bibliographic element by means of an absolute or relative URI reference
zeigt auf das in Beziehung stehende bibliografische Objekt durch eine absolute oder relative URI

<bibl xml:id="Shirley1953">
  <author>Shirley, James</author>
  <title type="main">The gentlemen of Venice</title>
  <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>
  <publisher>Readex Microprint</publisher>
  <date>1953</date>
  <extent>1 microprint card, 23 x 15 cm.</extent>
  <relatedItem type="otherForm">
    <bibl>
      <author>Shirley, James</author>
      <title type="main">The gentlemen of Venicd</title>
      <title type="sub">a tragi-comedie presented at the private house in
        Salisbury Court by Her Majesties servants</title>
      <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>
      <publisher>H. Moseley</publisher>
      <date>1655</date>
      <extent>78 p.</extent>
    </bibl>
  </relatedItem>
</bibl>

<relatedItem type="otherForm" target="http://www.example.com/bibliography.xml#Shirley1655"/>

If the @target attribute is used to reference the related bibliographic item, the element must be empty.

3.12.2.7. Related Items

<resp>
responsibility
책임성
responsabilidad
responsabilité
responsabilità
Verantwortlichkeit
contains a phrase describing the nature of a person's intellectual responsibility, or an organization's role in the production or distribution of a work.
개인의 지적 책임성에 관한 특성을 기술하는 구를 포함한다.
包含一個詞彙，來描述個人智慧責任的類型。
人物の知的責任の性質を表す一節を示す。
contient une expression décrivant la nature de la responsabilité intellectuelle d'une personne.
contiene un sintagma que describe la naturaleza de la responsabilidad intelectual de una persona.
contiene una frase che descrive la natura della responsabilità intellettuale di una persona.
enthält eine Phrase, die die Art der intellektuellen Verantwortung einer Person oder die Rolle einer Organisation bei der Herstellung oder Distribution eines Werkes beschreibt.

<respStmt>
  <resp ref="http://id.loc.gov/vocabulary/relators/com.html">compiler</resp>
  <name>Edward Child</name>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>compilateur</resp>
  <name>Edward Child</name>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>編輯</resp>
  <name>林偉</name>
</respStmt>

The attribute @ref, inherited from the class att.canonical may be used to indicate the kind of responsibility in a normalized form by referring directly to a standardized list of responsibility types, such as that maintained by a naming authority, for example the list maintained at for bibliographic usage.

Les attributs @key or @ref, issus de la classe att.canonical, peuvent être utilisés pour indiquer le type de responsabilité sous une forme normalisée, en faisant référence directement (par l'utilisation de @ref) ou indirectement (par l'utilisation de @key) à une liste normalisée contenant des types de responsabilité, comme celle qui est maintenue par une autorité de nommage, par exemple la liste à usage bibliographique.

Das @ref-Attribut, das aus der Klasse att.canonical vererbt wird, kann benutzt werden, um die Art der Verantwortlichkeit in normalisierter Form zu beschreiben. Es verweist direkt auf eine standardisierte Liste von Verantwortlichkeitstypen, wie sie z. B. in Normdatensätzen gepflegt werden, wie zum Beispiel folgende Liste für bibliografische Zwecke: .

3.12.2.2. Titles, Authors, and Editors 2.2.1. The Title Statement 2.2.2. The Edition Statement 2.2.5. The Series Statement

<respStmt>
statement of responsibility
책임성 진술
責任陳述
mention de responsabilité
declaración de responsabilidad
dichiarazione di responsabilità
Angaben zur Verantwortlichkeit
supplies a statement of responsibility for the intellectual content of a text, edition, recording, or series, where the specialized elements for authors, editors, etc. do not suffice or do not apply. May also be used to encode information about individuals or organizations which have played a role in the production or distribution of a bibliographic work.
텍스트, 편집, 녹음 또는 총서의 지적 내용에 대한 책임성 진술을 제시한다. 여기에서 작가, 편집자 등에 대한 특별한 요소는 충분치 않거나 적용되지 않는다.
當未使用作者、編輯者等特定元素，或元素內容不足時，在此補充說明文件、版本、記錄、或是叢書的智慧內容所屬負責人的責任陳述。
著者や編集者など特定の役割を示す要素が充分ではない場合に、テキスト、 版、記録などの知的内容に関する責任を示す。
indique la responsabilité quant au contenu intellectuel d'un texte, d'une édition, d'un enregistrement ou d'une publication en série, lorsque les éléments spécifiques relatifs aux auteurs, éditeurs, etc. ne suffisent pas ou ne s'appliquent pas.
proporciona la declaración de la responsabilidad para el contenido intelectual de un texto, edición, grabación o serie, donde no basten o no se apliquen los elementos especializados para autores, editores, etc.
fornisce una dichiarazione di responsabilità per qualcuno responsabile del contenuto intelletuale di un testo, curatela, registrazione o collana, nel caso in cui gli elementi specifici per autore, curatore ecc. non sono sufficienti o non applicabili.
enthält Angaben zur Verantwortlichkeit für den intellektuellen Inhalt eines Textes, einer Edition, einer Aufnahme oder Reihe, wo die spezialisierten Elemente <author>, <editor> etc. nicht ausreichen oder unzutreffend sind; auch verwendbar für Informationen zu Individuen oder Organisationen, die bei der Produktion oder Verbreitung eines bibliografischen Objekts eine Rolle gespielt.

<respStmt>
  <resp>transcribed from original ms</resp>
  <persName>Claus Huitfeldt</persName>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>Nouvelle édition originale</resp>
  <persName>Geneviève Hasenohr</persName>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>converti en langage SGML</resp>
  <name>Alan Morrison</name>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>謄寫自原始手稿</resp>
  <persName>徐大明</persName>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>轉換成SGML編碼</resp>
  <name>許雁</name>
</respStmt>

<respStmt>
  <resp>converted to XML encoding</resp>
  <name>Alan Morrison</name>
</respStmt>

3.12.2.2. Titles, Authors, and Editors 2.2.1. The Title Statement 2.2.2. The Edition Statement 2.2.5. The Series Statement

<rhyme>
marks the rhyming part of a metrical line.
운율 행의 운 부분을 표시한다.
標記韻律詩行的押韻部分。
韻文行の押韻部分を示す。
Marque la partie rimante d'une ligne métrique.
marca una parte del esquema métrico de un verso
segnala la stringa in rima all'interno di un verso
@label
provides a label (usually a single letter) to identify which part of a rhyme scheme this rhyming string instantiates.
운 문자열이 예시된 운 스키마 부분을 식별하는 표지를 제시한다.
提供一個標籤，識別此韻腳為押韻組合的哪一部份。
当該押韻が起こる韻スキーム部分を特定するラベルを示す。
Donne une étiquette pour identifier à quelle shéma métrique correspond cette alternance de rimes.
proporciona una etiqueta (normalmente una sola letra) que identifica qué parte del esquema métrico ejemplifica esta cadena de caracteres en cuestión.
fornisce un'etichetta che identifica quale parte dello schema rimico è rappresentata dalla stringa in questione

Within a particular scope, all <rhyme> elements with the same value for their @label attribute are assumed to rhyme with each other. The scope is defined by the nearest ancestor element for which the @rhyme attribute has been supplied.

Dans un cadre délimité, tous les éléments <rhyme> avec la même valeur pour leur attribut @label sont présumés rimer l'un avec l'autre. Ce cadre est défini par l'élément ancêtre le plus proche pour lequel l'attribut @rhyme a été fourni.

特定範囲中で、属性@labelに同じ属性値を持つ要素 <rhyme>全てが、互いに韻を踏んでいるとされる。この範囲は、当該属性@rhymeが付与されているものから直近の先行要素 により定義される。

<lg rhyme="abababcc">
  <l>'Tis pity learned virgins ever <rhyme label="a">wed</rhyme>
      </l>
  <l>With persons of no sort of edu<rhyme label="b">cation</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>Or gentlemen, who, though well born and <rhyme label="a">bred</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>Grow tired of scientific conver<rhyme label="b">sation</rhyme>:</l>
  <l>I don't choose to say much on this <rhyme label="a">head</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>I'm a plain man, and in a single <rhyme label="b">station</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>But — Oh! ye lords of ladies inte<rhyme label="c">llectual</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>Inform us truly, have they not hen-<rhyme label="c">peck'd you all</rhyme>?</l>
</lg>

<lg>
  <l>Tyger! Tyger! burning <rhyme label="a">bright</rhyme></l>
  <l>In the forests of the <rhyme label="a">night</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>What immortal hand or <rhyme label="b">eye</rhyme></l>
  <l>Could frame thy fearful <rhyme label="b" type="eye-rhyme">symmetry</rhyme>?</l>
</lg>

<lg>
  <l>"Hark! Lakshman! Hark, again that <rhyme label="a">cry</rhyme>!</l>
  <l>It is, — it is my husband's <rhyme label="b">voice</rhyme>!</l>
  <l>hasten, to his succour <rhyme label="a">fly</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>No more hast thou, dear friend, a <rhyme label="b">choice</rhyme>.</l>
  <l>He calls on thee, perhaps his <rhyme label="c">foes</rhyme></l>
  <l>Environ him on all sides <rhyme label="d">round</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>That wail, — it means death's final <rhyme label="c">throes</rhyme>!</l>
  <l>Why standest thou, as magic-<rhyme label="d">bound</rhyme>?</l>
</lg>

<lg type="quatrain" rhyme="aabccb">
  <l> Les étoiles, points d'or, percent les branches n<rhyme label="a">oires</rhyme> ; </l>
  <l> Le flot huileux et lourd décompose ses m<rhyme label="a">oires</rhyme>
      </l>
  <l> Sur l'océan blê<rhyme label="b">mi</rhyme> ;</l>
  <l>Les nuages ont l'air d'oiseaux prenant la f<rhyme label="c">uite</rhyme>,</l>
  <l>Par moments le vent parle, et dit des mots sans s<rhyme label="c">uite</rhyme>
      </l>
  <l> Comme un homme endor<rhyme label="b">mi</rhyme>.</l>
</lg>

<lg rhyme="ou">
  <l>故人西辭黃鶴 <rhyme label="lou2">樓</rhyme>，</l>
  <l>煙花三月下揚<rhyme label="jou">州</rhyme>；</l>
  <l>孤帆遠影碧山<rhyme label="jin4">盡</rhyme>，</l>
  <l>唯見長江天際流<rhyme label="liou2">sation</rhyme>。</l>
</lg>

6.5. Rhyme

<role>
role
rôle
contains the name of a dramatic role, as given in a cast list.
배역 목록에 제시되는 드라마 배역의 이름
角色名單所列的劇中角色名稱。
el nombre de un papel dramático, según los dados en el reparto.
配役リスト中にある、役名を示す。
le nom d'un rôle au théâtre tel qu’il est donné dans la distribution.
il nome di un ruolo teatrale, secondo la lista dei personaggi.
@gender
specifies the gender of the role.

Values for this attribute may be locally defined by a project, or they may refer to an external standard.

<role xml:id="jt">Joan Trash</role>
<roleDesc>A Ginger-bread-woman</roleDesc>

<role xml:id="fr_pr">Le professeur Rubeck</role>
<roleDesc>sculpteur</roleDesc>

<role xml:id="zh-tw_王">鄧肯</role>
<roleDesc>蘇格蘭國王</roleDesc>

It is important to assign a meaningful ID attribute to the <role> element, since this ID is referred to by @who attributes on many other elements.

Il est important de fournir un identifiant signifiant pour l'attribut @xml:id de l'élément <role> : l'identifiant donné sera utilisé pour renseigner l'attribut @who de nombreux autres éléments, et faire ainsi référence à l'élément <role>.

要素<role>の属性IDに有意義な値を付与することが重要である。 この属性IDの値は、他の要素にある属性@whoから参照される。

7.1.4. Cast Lists

<roleDesc>
role description
배역 기술
角色描述
descripción del rol
description du rôle
descrizione del ruolo
describes a character's role in a drama.
드라마에서 등장인물의 배역을 기술한다.
描述劇中人物所扮演的角色。
describe el papel de un personaje en un drama.
舞台芸術における登場人物の役を示す。
décrit le rôle d'un personnage dans une pièce de théâtre.
descrive il ruolo di un personaggio in un'opera teatrale.

<roleDesc>gentlemen of leisure</roleDesc>

<roleDesc>valet de chasse</roleDesc>

<roleDesc>悠閒的紳士</roleDesc>

7.1.4. Cast Lists

<row>
row
rangée
Tabellenzeile
contains one row of a table.
하나의 테이블의 한 행을 포함한다.
包含表格中的一列。
表の1行を示す。
contient une rangée d'un tableau.
contiene una fila de la tabla.
contiene una riga di una tabella.
enthält eine Zeile einer Tabelle.
@role
"data"
data cell
"label"
label cell
"sum"
row or column sum data
"total"
table total data
font-weight: bold; Insert table row.

<row role="data">
  <cell role="label">Classics</cell>
  <cell>Idle listless and unimproving</cell>
</row>

<row role="data">
  <cell role="label">Etudes classiques</cell>
  <cell>Inoccupé indolent et sans amélioration</cell>
</row>

<row role="data">
  <cell role="label">古文</cell>
  <cell>漫無目的且無精進的</cell>
</row>

14.1.1. TEI Tables

<rs>
referencing string
chaîne de référence
serie referencial
參照字串
stringa di riferimento
参照文字列
verweisende Zeichenkette
contains a general purpose name or referring string.
contient un nom générique ou une chaîne permettant de s'y référer.
contiene un nombre de intención general o una serie referencial.
包含一般名稱或參照字串。
contiene un nome generico o una stringa di riferimento
一般的な意味での名前や参照文字列。
enthält eine allgemeine Benennung oder eine verweisende Zeichenkette.

<q>My dear <rs type="person">Mr. Bennet</rs>, </q> said <rs type="person">his lady</rs>
to him one day, <q>have you heard that <rs type="place">Netherfield Park</rs> is let at
    last?</q>

<p>La famille s'était alors retirée en banlieue, à <rs type="place">Villemomble</rs>, mais
      <rs type="person">Alfred </rs>aimait se rendre à <rs type="place">Paris</rs> et un jour de 1917 alors qu'il sortait de <rs type="place">la maison des
      Arts et Métiers</rs> il était tombé inanimé dans la rue.</p>

<q>我親愛的 <rs type="person">
  班納特先生</rs>，
</q>一天，<rs type="person">班納特太太</rs> 對她的丈夫說：<q>你聽說過<rs type="place">尼日斐花園</rs> 終於租出去了嗎?</q>

13.2.1. Personal Names 3.6.1. Referring Strings

<s>
s-unit
s-단위
句子單元
phrase
oración
unità s
Satzeinheit
contains a sentence-like division of a text.
텍스트의 문장에 해당하는 부분을 포함한다.
包含文字中一個句子組成的區段。
文に相当するテキスト単位を示す。
contient une division textuelle de type phrase
contiene una oración del texto.
contiene la divisione del testo del tipo proposizione
enthält einen satzähnlichen Textabschnitt.
You may not nest one s element within another: use seg instead

<head>
  <s>A short affair</s>
</head>
<s>When are you leaving?</s>
<s>Tomorrow.</s>

<s><w>Quand</w><w>partez</w><w>-</w><w>vous</w><w> ?</w></s>
<s><w>Demain</w><w>.</w></s>

<s>士何事？”</s>
<s>尚志。 </s>

The <s> element may be used to mark orthographic sentences, or any other segmentation of a text, provided that the segmentation is end-to-end, complete, and non-nesting. For segmentation which is partial or recursive, the <seg> should be used instead.

The @type attribute may be used to indicate the type of segmentation intended, according to any convenient typology.

L'élément <s> peut être utilisé pour marquer les phrases ou toute autre segmentation existant dans un texte, pourvu que cette segmentation soit présente du début à la fin du texte, complète et sans imbrication. Dans le cas d'une segmentation partielle ou récursive, l'élément <seg> doit remplacer l'élément <s>.

L'attribut @type peut être utilisé pour indiquer le type de segmentation prévue, selon une typologie appropriée.

テキストや句レベルの要素が混在する。また、当該要素自身も含むかもし れない。

要素<s>が、ある単位の全体を完全に、入れ子なく示す場合には、 正書形の文や、他のテキスト部分を示すために使われるかもしれない。

Das <s>-Element wird verwendet um orthographische Sätze oder andere Textsegmente zu kodieren, vorausgesetzt das Segment ist lückenlos, vollständig und nicht verschachtelt. Für unvollständige oder rekursive Segmente soll stattdessen das <seg>-Element verwendet werden.

Das @type-Attribut wird verwendet, um den Segmenttyp entsprechend einer geeigneten Typologie anzugeben.

17.1. Linguistic Segment Categories 8.4.1. Segmentation

<salute>
salutation
挨拶文言
인사말
稱呼語
formule de politesse
Grußformel
saludo
formula di saluto
contains a salutation or greeting prefixed to a foreword, dedicatory epistle, or other division of a text, or the salutation in the closing of a letter, preface, etc.
머리말, 헌정 서한, 또는 텍스트의 다른 구역 앞에 첨부되는 인사말 또는 환영사, 아니면 편지, 서문 등의 결문의 인사말.
包含在序言、獻詞、或其他文本區段開頭的稱呼語或問候語，或是信件、引言等結尾處的致意詞。
(著者以外の)序文や献呈書簡などのテキスト部分に附属する挨拶文言または挨拶、または書簡や(著者による)序文の末尾にある挨拶文言を示す。
contient un dédicace ou une formule de salut qui précède un avant-propos ou autre division du texte; ou bien encore la formule de politesse qui conclut une lettre, une préface, etc.
enthält eine Anrede oder Grußformel, die einem Vorwort, einer Widmung oder einem anderen Abschnitt eines Textes vorangestellt ist oder die Grußformel am Ende eines Briefes, eines Vorworts, usw.
contiene una fórmula introductiva o de saludo previa a un prefacio, a una dedicatoria o a atra división textual, o bien una fórmula conclusiva o de saludo al final de una carta, prefacio, etc.
contiene una formula introduttiva o di saluto anteposta rispetto a una prefazione, una lettera di dedica o altra partizione testuale, oppure una formula conclusiva o di saluto alla fine di una lettera, prefazione, ecc

<salute>To all courteous mindes, that will voutchsafe the readinge.</salute>

<salute>Faites toutes mes amitiés à votre femme et recevez, mon cher ami, l'expression de
    mes sentiments affectueux et dévoués. </salute>

<salute>致敬啟者</salute>

4.2.2. Openers and Closers

<seg>
arbitrary segment
임의의 분절
隨機分割
segment quelconque
segmento arbitrario
segmento arbitrario
arbiträres Segment
represents any segmentation of text below the chunk level.
(다른 분절 요소를 포함하여) 텍스트의 임의의 구-층위 단위를 포함한다.
包含文件中任何隨機字詞層次的單元 (包括其他分割元素)。
任意の句レベルのテキスト単位を示す(要素segを含む)。
contient une unité de texte quelconque de niveau segment.
contiene cualquier unidad textual a nivel sintagmático (inclusive otros elementos de tipo seg.)
contiene una qualsiasi unità testuale a livello sintagmatico (ivi compresi altri elementi del tipo seg)
beschreibt Segmente eines Texts unterhalb des Chunk-Level.

<seg>When are you leaving?</seg>
<seg>Tomorrow.</seg>

<seg>Quand partez-vous ?</seg>
<seg>Demain.</seg>

<s>C' était à <seg type="toponyme">Mégara</seg>, faubourg de <seg type="topon">Carthage</seg>, dans les jardins d' <seg type="patronyme">Hamilcar</seg>. </s>

<seg type="preambule">La magnificence et la galanterie n'ont jamais paru en <seg type="toponyme">France</seg> avec tant d'éclat que <seg type="date">dans les dernières
      années du règne de <seg type="patronyme">Henri second</seg>. </seg>
  </seg>

<seg>你什麼時候出發?</seg>
<seg>明天。</seg>

<s>
  <seg rend="caps" type="initial-cap">此屬性值表示句首第一個字母大寫</seg>
</s>

<seg type="preamble">
  <seg>唐太宗李世民， <seg type="patronym">為唐高祖李淵與竇皇后的次子，</seg>是唐朝第二位皇帝。</seg>
  <seg>李承乾為其三子中的長子...</seg>
  <seg>娶長孫氏為妻，長孫皇后是北魏皇族拓跋氏之後...</seg>
</seg>

<s><seg rend="caps" type="initial-cap">So father's only</seg> glory was the ballfield. </s>

<seg type="preamble">
  <seg>Sigmund, <seg type="patronym">the son of Volsung</seg>, was a king in Frankish country.</seg>
  <seg>Sinfiotli was the eldest of his sons ...</seg>
  <seg>Borghild, Sigmund's wife, had a brother ... </seg>
</seg>

The <seg> element may be used at the encoder's discretion to mark any segments of the text of interest for processing. One use of the element is to mark text features for which no appropriate markup is otherwise defined. Another use is to provide an identifier for some segment which is to be pointed at by some other element—i.e. to provide a target, or a part of a target, for a <ptr> or other similar element.

L'élément <seg> peut être utilisé à la discrétion de l'encodeur pour baliser tout segment du texte intéressant pour un traitement informatique. L'un des usages de cet élément est d'encoder des caractéristiques textuelles pour lesquelles aucun balisage approprié n'est défini par ailleurs. Un autre usage consiste à fournir un identifiant pour un segment vers lequel pointe un autre élément - c'est-à-dire à fournir une cible, ou une partie de cible, pour un élément <ptr> ou pour un autre élément similaire.

要素<seg>は、何らかの処理対象を想定して、符号化する人の判断 により、使用されるかもしれない。当該要素は、適当な要素が定義されて いないときに、そのテキスト素性を示すために使われる。すなわち、簡易 拡張機能としてある。また、ある部分に識別子を付与するためにも使用さ れる。すなわち、要素<ptr>等から参照される対象を作る。

Das <seg>-Element kann nach Gutdünken verwendet werden, um jegliches Textsegment, welches für eine Weiterverarbeitung relevant sein könnte, auszuzeichnen. Eine Anwendung des Elements ist die Auszeichnung von Textmerkmalen, für welche sonst kein dediziertes Markup verfügbar ist. Ein anderer Anwendungsfall ist, einen Identifikator für ein Textsegment anzubieten, um von anderen Elementen auf dieses Segment verweisen zu können, z. B. um ein Ziel für einen <ptr> oder ein ähnliches Element zur Verfügung zu stellen.

16.3. Blocks, Segments, and Anchors 6.2. Components of the Verse Line 7.2.5. Speech Contents

<set>
setting
배경
determinación
contexte
scénario
contains a description of the setting, time, locale, appearance, etc., of the action of a play, typically found in the front matter of a printed performance text (not a stage direction).
(무대 지시가 아닌) 인쇄된 공연 텍스트의 전반부 자료에서 전형적으로 나타나는 희곡 이야기 전개에서 배경, 시대, 장소, 상황 등에 관한 기술을 포함한다.
包含一段演出的場景描述，像是佈景、時間、地點、景象等，這段描述通常出現在劇本中的前頁部分 (並非舞台動作指示) 。
contiene la descripción de la configuración, del tiempo, de la escena, de la apariencia, etc., de la acción de una obra teatral, situada normalmente en el inicio de un texto dramático impreso (no en la dirección de escena).
一般には、印刷された舞台テキストの前付にある、芝居の設定、時間、場所、 現れ方などの情報を示す。
contient une description du décor, du temps, du lieu, de l'ordre d'entrée en scène, etc., de l'action de la pièce, qu'on trouve généralement dans les préliminaires d’un texte imprimé d'une pièce de théâtre. (Ce n'est pas une indication scénique).
contiene una descrizione dell'ambientazione, dell'orario, della scena, dell'aspetto, ecc. dell'azione di un'opera teatrale, di solito inserita nel peritesto iniziale di una testo per la rappresentazione pubblicato (non nelle direttive di scena).

<set>
  <p>The action takes place on February 7th between the hours of noon and six in the
    afternoon, close to the Trenartha Tin Plate Works, on the borders of England and Wales,
    where a strike has been in progress throughout the winter.</p>
</set>

<set>
  <p>Bel après-midi de printemps en 1899. Madame Claire Roc est assise dans un fauteuil en
      osier et feuillette un magazine [...], on peut entendre des cris joyeux d'enfants. </p>
</set>

<set>
  <head>Une représentation à l'hôtel de Bourgogne</head>
  <p>La salle de l'Hôtel de Bourgogne, en 1640. Sorte de hangar de jeu de paume aménagé et
      embelli pour des représentations.</p>
  <p>La salle est un carré long ; on la voit en biais, de sorte qu'un de ses côtés forme le
      fond qui part du premier plan, à droite, et va au dernier plan, à gauche, faire angle
      avec la scène qu'on aperçoit en pan coupé.</p>
</set>

<front>
  <set>
    <list type="gloss">
      <label>TEMPS</label>
      <item>1640</item>
      <label>LIEU</label>
      <item>La salle de l'Hôtel de Bourgogne</item>
    </list>
  </set>
</front>

<set>
  <p>故事發生於九月八日正午十二點至三點間，位於台北中正紀念堂附近，有群眾包圍抗議政府的更名政策。</p>
</set>

<set>
  <head>場景</head>
  <p>在一個秋高氣爽的下午，中正紀念堂前</p>
</set>

<front>

  <set>
    <list type="gloss">
      <label>時間：</label>
      <item>2007</item>
      <label>地點：</label>
      <item>台北市中心</item>
    </list>
  </set>
</front>

<set>
  <head>SCENE</head>
  <p>A Sub-Post Office on a late autumn evening</p>
</set>

<front>

  <set>
    <list type="gloss">
      <label>TIME</label>
      <item>1907</item>
      <label>PLACE</label>
      <item>East Coast village in England</item>
    </list>
  </set>
</front>

Contains paragraphs or phrase level tags.

This element should not be used outside the front or back matter; for similar contextual descriptions within the body of the text, use the <stage> element.

7.1. Front and Back Matter

<sic>
Latin for thus or so
du latin, ainsi
原文照錄
Lateinisch für 'auf diese Weise', 'so'
contains text reproduced although apparently incorrect or inaccurate.
contient du texte reproduit quoiqu'il est apparemment incorrect ou inexact
contiene texto reproducido aparentemente icorrecto o inexacto.
包含看似錯誤但仍照實轉錄的文字 。
contiene un frammento di testo riprodotto anche se apparentemente errato o impreciso.
明らかに間違い、不正確ではあるが、そのまま収録してあるテキスト。
enthält Text, wie er in der Vorlage steht, obwohl er offensichtlich fehlerhaft ist.
content: '{'; content: '}';

for his nose was as sharp as
a pen, and <sic>a Table</sic> of green fields.

Des nuages, des
  <sic>cyrrhus</sic>, des nimbus, des cumulus, tant qu'on en veut, et assurément plus que
n'en voulaient le maître et le serviteur.

Si on veut seulement attirer l'attention sur ce qui paraît être un problème dans la copie du texte, <sic> est utilisé seul :

Tel est le
chat Rutterkin des sorcières Margaret et Filippa Flower, qui furent
<sic>prûlées</sic>brûlées à Lincoln, le 11 mars 1619, pour avoir envoûté un parent du comte
de Rutland.

Il est également possible, en utilisant les éléments <choice> et <corr>, de proposer une lecture corrigée :

Tel est le
  chat Rutterkin des sorcières Margaret et Filippa Flower, qui furent<choice><sic>prûlées</sic><corr>brûlées</corr></choice> à Lincoln, le 11 mars 1619, pour avoir envoûté un parent du comte de
Rutland.

Ouvrage très
  véridique et mirifique du Sieur Marcus Publius Dataficus du digne fils du seigneur comte,
  vicomte, duc et archiduc Johannus de Bessinguya<choice><sic> Percepteur</sic><corr>Precepteur</corr></choice> du digne fils du seigneur comte, vicomte, duc et archiduc Johannus de
Bessinguya.

賣饅頭的老頭，背著木箱子，裡邊裝著熱<sic>鰻魚</sic>，太陽一出來，就在街上叫喚。

人們走起路來是快的，嘴裡邊的呼吸，一遇到了<sic>嚴肅</sic>好像冒著煙似的。

人們走起路來是快的，嘴裡邊的呼吸，一遇到了<choice><sic>嚴肅</sic><corr>嚴寒</corr></choice> 好像冒著煙似的。

賣饅頭的老頭，背著木箱子，裡邊裝著熱<choice><sic>鰻魚</sic><corr>饅頭</corr></choice>，太陽一出來，就在街上叫喚。

If all that is desired is to call attention to the apparent problem in the copy text, <sic> may be used alone:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now
— how <sic>we can</sic> prove or disprove anyone's theories?

Wenn es nur darum geht, auf das offensichtliche Problem in der Textvorlage hinzuweisen, kann das <sic>-Element auch allein verwendet werden:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now
— how <sic>we can</sic> prove or disprove anyone's theories?

It is also possible, using the <choice> and <corr> elements, to provide a corrected reading:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now
— how <choice><sic>we can</sic><corr>can we</corr></choice> prove or disprove anyone's theories?

Es ist auch möglich, zusätzlich die Elemente <choice> und <corr> zu verwenden, um eine korrigierte Lesart anzubieten:

I don't know, Juan. It's so far in the past now
— how <choice><sic>we can</sic><corr>can we</corr></choice> prove or disprove anyone's theories?

for his nose was as sharp as
a pen, and <choice><sic>a Table</sic><corr>a' babbld</corr></choice> of green fields.

3.5.1. Apparent Errors

<signed>
signature
서명
簽名
Signatur
firma
firma
contains the closing salutation, etc., appended to a foreword, dedicatory epistle, or other division of a text.
머리말, 헌정 서한 또는 텍스트의 다른 구역에 첨부되는 결문 인사.
contient la dernière salutation, ajoutée à un avant-propos, à une dédicace ou à une autre division du texte.
包含結尾致意詞等，附加在序言、獻詞、或其他文本區段中。
(著者以外の)序文や献呈書簡などのテキスト部分にある、結びの挨拶などを示す。
enthält die abschließende Grußformel o.Ä. die ein Vorwort, eine Widmung oder einen anderen Abschnitt des Textes beendet.
contiene una fórmula conclusiva o de saludo pospuesta a un prefacio, dedicatoria, u otro tipo de división textual.
contiene una formula conclusiva o di saluto posposta rispetto a una prefazione, lettera di dedica, o altra partizione testuale.
text-align: right; font-style: italic;

<signed>Thine to command <name>Humph. Moseley</name>
   </signed>

  <closer>
    <signed>Sign'd and Seal'd,
<list><item>John Bull,</item><item>Nic. Frog.</item></list>
           </signed>
  </closer>

<signed>votre fidèle amante, <name>Manon Lescaut.</name>
  </signed>

<signed><name>李敖</name>，于台北。
</signed>

4.2.2. Openers and Closers

<sp>
speech
대화
演說
langue orale
discurso
battuta
Figurenrede
contains an individual speech in a performance text, or a passage presented as such in a prose or verse text.
공연 텍스트에서 개별 대화 또는 산문이나 운문 텍스트에서 공연적 텍스트로 제시된 단락
劇本中的個人台詞，或散文、韻文中的個人演說。
演技テキストまたは韻文・散文中にある個々の発話を示す。
monologue dans un texte écrit pour la scène ou un passage présenté sous cette forme dans un texte en prose ou en vers.
Un discurso individual de un texto dramático, o un pasaje en prosa o en verso presentado como tal.
Una singola battuta in un testo drammatico, o un brano presentato come tale in un testo in prosa o in versi
enthält eine einzelne Figurenrede in einem Dramentext oder eine entsprechende Passage in einem Prosatext oder lyrischen Text.

<sp>
  <speaker>The reverend Doctor Opimian</speaker>
  <p>I do not think I have named a single unpresentable fish.</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>Mr Gryll</speaker>
  <p>Bream, Doctor: there is not much to be said for bream.</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>The Reverend Doctor Opimian</speaker>
  <p>On the contrary, sir, I think there is much to be said for him. In the first place [...]</p>
  <p>Fish, Miss Gryll — I could discourse to you on fish by the hour: but for the present I
    will forbear [...]</p>
</sp>

<sp>
  <speaker> Valère.</speaker>
  <p>Hé bien ! Sabine, quel conseil me donneras-tu ?</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker> Sabine.</speaker>
  <p>Vraiment, il y a bien des nouvelles. Mon oncle veut résolûment que ma cousine épouse
      Villebrequin, et les affaires sont tellement avancées, que je crois qu'ils eussent été
      mariés dès aujourd'hui, si vous n'étiez aimé ... Le bonhomme ne manquera pas
      de faire loger ma cousine à ce pavillon qui est au bout de notre jardin, et par ce moyen
      vous pourriez l'entretenir à l'insu de notre vieillard, l'épouser, et le laisser pester
      tout son soûl avec Villebrequin.</p>
</sp>

<sp>
  <speaker>祝英台</speaker>
  <p>我就是英台。三年前我想出外求學，故而改扮男裝，不期与梁兄相遇，三載同窗多蒙照顧，英台感激不盡。</p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>梁山伯</speaker>
  <p>賢弟，哦，念書的時候，咱們是兄弟相稱，如今你這樣的打扮，我該稱你賢弟呢，還是…… </p>
</sp>
<sp>
  <speaker>祝英台</speaker>
  <p>讀書時節我是女扮男裝，理該兄弟相稱，如今不妨改稱兄妹。</p>
</sp>

The @who attribute on this element may be used either in addition to the <speaker> element or as an alternative.

L'attribut @who peut être utilisé soit en complément de l'élément <speaker>, soit comme une alternative à cet élément.

行または段落、ト書き、句レベル要素になる。

属性@whoは、要素<speaker>などと共に使用されるかも しれない。

Das @who-Attribut an diesem Element kann entweder zusätzlich zum <speaker>-Element eingesetzt werden oder alternativ dazu.

3.13.2. Core Tags for Drama 3.13. Passages of Verse or Drama 7.2.2. Speeches and Speakers

<speaker>
locuteur
講者
Sprecher
contains a specialized form of heading or label, giving the name of one or more speakers in a dramatic text or fragment.
forme particulière de titre ou de marque qui donne le nom d'un ou de plusieurs locuteurs dans un texte ou dans un fragment de texte écrit pour le théâtre.
una forma especializada de encabezamiento o etiqueta, que da nombre a uno o más interlocutores de un texto o fragmento dramático.
特殊的標題或標籤形式，用來表明劇本中ㄧ位或多位講者名稱。
Forma specializzata di intestazione o etichetta che fornisce i nomi di uno o più parlanti in un testo o frammento drammatico.
舞台関連の文章に出てくる1人以上の発話者の名前を示す。見出しやラベル として書かれる。
enthält eine spezielle Form von Überschrift oder Bezeichnung für einen oder mehrere Namen von Figuren in einem Dramentext oder -fragment.
font-style:italic;

<div type="Act" n="I">
  <head>ACT I</head>
  <div type="Scene" n="1">
    <head>SCENE I</head>
    <stage rendition="#italic">Enter Barnardo and Francisco, two Sentinels, at
      several doors</stage>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="Y">Who's there?</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l>Nay, answer me. Stand and unfold yourself.</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="I">Long live the King!</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l part="M">Barnardo?</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Barn</speaker>
      <l part="F">He.</l>
    </sp>
    <sp>
      <speaker>Fran</speaker>
      <l>You come most carefully upon your hour.</l>
    </sp>

  </div>
</div>

This element may be used to transcribe which character is speaking in a dramatic text as indicated by the source text; the @who attribute of an <sp> element may be used to point to another element (typically a <role>) which provides information about the character speaking. Either or both may be used.

Cet élément est utilisé pour indiquer quel personnage prend la parole dans une pièce de théâtre ; l'attribut @who est utilisé pour pointer vers un autre élément qui fournit des informations sur ce personnage. L'un et ou l'autre peuvent être utilisés.

3.13.2. Core Tags for Drama

<stage>
stage direction
무대지시
舞台指示
indication scénique
acotación
direttiva di scena
Regieanweisung
contains any kind of stage direction within a dramatic text or fragment.
극적 텍스트나 부분 내에 무대지시를 포함한다.
包含劇本中任何一種舞台場景或演出動作指示。
舞台芸術テキスト中にある、ト書き相当を示す。
contient tout type d'indication scénique à l'intérieur d'un texte ou fragment de texte écrit pour le théâtre.
contiene cualquier tipo de acotación que aparece en un texto o fragmento dramático.
contiene qualsiasi tipo di didascalie e direttive di scena all'interno di un testo o di un frammento di testo drammatico.
enthält jegliche Regieanweisung in einem Dramentext oder -fragment.
@type
indicates the kind of stage direction.
무대지시의 유형을 나타낸다.
指出舞台指示的種類。
ト書きの種類を示す。
indique le type d'indication scénique
indica el tipo de acotación.
indica il tipo di direttiva di scena
beschreibt die Art der Regieanweisung.
"setting"
describes a setting.
배경을 기술한다.
描述舞台佈景。
describe una configuración.
舞台設定を示す。
décrit une mise en scène
descrive l'ambientazione.
beschreibt die Szenerie.
"entrance"
describes an entrance.
등장을 기술한다.
描述角色進場。
describe una entrada.
出方を示す。
décrit une entrée
descrive un ingresso.
beschreibt einen Auftritt.
"exit"
describes an exit.
퇴장을 기술한다.
描述角色退場。
describe una salida.
はけ方を示す。
décrit une sortie
descrive un'uscita.
beschreibt einen Abgang.
"business"
describes stage business.
동작을 기술한다.
描述演員動作。
describe la realización de un fragmento.
所作を示す。
décrit une action sur scène
descrive attività sul palco.
beschreibt eine Bühnenhandlung.
"novelistic"
is a narrative, motivating stage direction.
이야기체의, 그리고 흥미유발적인 무대지시이다.
敘述性的，積極性的舞台指示。
es una acotación narrativa, o de dirección de escena
ト書きの意図を解説する。
texte explicatif de la direction de scène.
testo narrativo che indica le direzioni di scena.
beschreibt eine narrative Regieanweisung.
"delivery"
describes how a character speaks.
등장인물이 어떻게 대사를 말하는지를 기술한다.
描述演員說話方式。
describe cómo habla un personaje.
登場人物の話し方を示す。
décrit la façon dont parle un personnage
descrive il modo in cui un personaggio parla.
beschreibt die Art und Weise der Darbietung einer Figurenrede.
"modifier"
gives some detail about a character.
등장인물에 관한 상세한 정보를 제시한다.
提供一個角色的某些細節資訊。
proporciona algun detalle sobre un personaje.
登場人物の詳細を示す。
donne certains détails à propos d'un personnage
fornisce dettagli sul personaggio
gibt nähere Details zu einer Figur an.
"location"
describes a location.
장소를 기술한다.
描述場景位置。
describe una localización.
場所を示す。
décrit un lieu
descrive l'ambientazione
beschreibt einen Handlungsort.
"mixed"
more than one of the above
앞에서 제시된 것들의 여러 가지를 혼용
包含兩種以上的舞台指示類型。
más de uno de lo mencionado
上記の内容を複数示す。
plusieurs des indications précédentes
più di uno dei valori descritti.
mehrere der oben angeführten Funktionen.

If the value "mixed" is used, it must be the only value. Multiple values may however be supplied if a single stage direction performs multiple functions, for example is both an entrance and a modifier.

Der Wert "mixed" kann nur alleine benutzt werden. Mehrere Werte können in Kombination eingesetzt werden, wenn eine einzelne Regieanweisung unterschiedliche Funktionen erfüllt, z. B. sowohl einen Auftritt als auch eine Figurenbeschreibung.

font-style: italic;

<stage type="setting">A curtain being drawn.</stage>
<stage type="setting">Music</stage>
<stage type="entrance">Enter Husband as being thrown off his horse and falls.</stage>
<stage type="exit">Exit pursued by a bear.</stage>
<stage type="business">He quickly takes the stone out.</stage>
<stage type="delivery">To Lussurioso.</stage>
<stage type="novelistic">Having had enough, and embarrassed for the family.</stage>
<stage type="modifier">Disguised as Ansaldo.</stage>
<stage type="entrance modifier">Enter Latrocinio disguised as an empiric</stage>
<stage type="location">At a window.</stage>
<stage rend="inline" type="delivery">Aside.</stage>

    <l>Behold. <stage n="*" place="margin">Here the vp<lb/>per part of the <hi>Scene</hi> open'd; when
    straight appear'd a Heauen, and all the <hi>Pure Artes</hi> sitting on
    two semi<lb/>circular ben<lb/>ches, one a<lb/>boue another: who sate thus till the rest of the
    <hi>Prologue</hi> was spoken, which being ended, they descended in
    order within the <hi>Scene,</hi> whiles the Musicke plaid</stage> Our
Poet knowing our free hearts</l>

<stage type="setting">La scène est dans une place de ville.</stage>
<stage type="exit">, s'en allant.</stage>
<stage type="business">(Arnolphe ôte par trois fois le chapeau de dessus la tête d'Alain.)</stage>
<stage type="delivery">, à <name>Georgette</name>.</stage>
<stage type="setting">(Tous étant rentrés.)</stage>
<stage type="delivery">, riant.</stage>
<stage type="delivery">, lui montrant le logis d'<name>AGNÈS</name>.</stage>
<stage type="delivery">, à part.</stage>
<stage type="business">(Frappant à la porte.)</stage>
<stage type="delivery">, assis.</stage>
<stage type="business">(Il se lève.)</stage>

<stage type="setting">電梯開門</stage>
<stage type="setting">指揮聲</stage>
<stage type="entrance">小陳和小王騎車回來</stage>
<stage type="exit">搬家工人把家具搬進電梯</stage>
<stage type="business">小玉清點家具數量</stage>
<stage type="delivery">將簽收單交給搬家工人</stage>
<stage type="novelistic">家具佔去出入口，小玉顯得有些不好意思。</stage>
<stage type="modifier">小陳眼睛為之一亮</stage>
<stage type="location">電梯口</stage>
<stage rend="inline" type="delivery">悄悄話</stage>

The @who attribute may be used to indicate more precisely the person or persons participating in the action described by the stage direction.

Das @who-Attribut kann verwendet werden, um die Person oder Personen näher zu bezeichnen, die die Regieanweisung ausführen.

3.13.2. Core Tags for Drama 3.13. Passages of Verse or Drama 7.2.4. Stage Directions

<subst>
substitution
대체
substitución
sostituzione
substitution
groups one or more deletions (or surplus text) with one or more additions when the combination is to be regarded as a single intervention in the text.
결합이 텍스트에서 단일 조작으로 간주될 때 하나 이상의 삭제를 하나 이상의 추가 사항으로 대체한다.
regroupe une ou plusieurs parties de texte supprimées et une ou plusieurs parties de texte ajoutées, lorsque cette combinaison peut être considérée comme une intervention unique sur le texte.
agrupa una o más cancelaciones con una o más adiciones cuando la combinación se considera una única intervención en el texto.
追加と削除が一連の調整と考えられる場合、そのひとつ以上の追加部分や削除部分をまとめる。
raggruppa ona o più cancellazioni insieme a una o più aggiunte quando la combinazione va considerata come singolo intervento sul testo
must have at least one child add and at least one child del or surplus

... are all included. <del hand="#RG">It is</del>
         <subst><add>T</add><del>t</del></subst>he expressed

that he and his Sister Miſs D — <lb/>who always lived with him, wd. be <subst><del>very</del><lb/><add>principally</add></subst> remembered in her Will.

<ab>τ<subst><add place="above">ῶν</add><del>α</del></subst>
  συνκυρόντ<subst><add place="above">ων</add><del>α</del></subst>
  ἐργαστηρί<subst><add place="above">ων</add><del>α</del></subst>
   </ab>

<subst>
  <del>
    <gap reason="illegible" quantity="5" unit="character"/>
  </del>
  <add>apple</add>
</subst>

11.3.1.5. Substitutions

<supplied>
supplied
texte restitué
signifies text supplied by the transcriber or editor for any reason; for example because the original cannot be read due to physical damage, or because of an obvious omission by the author or scribe.
일반적으로 원본은 물리적 손상 또는 손실로 인해 읽을 수 없기 때문에 전사자 또는 편집자에 의해 제공된 텍스트를 표시한다.
指出一段由轉錄者或編者添加的補充文字，添加的原因是該位置的文字無法被辨認，也許是因為來源文件的損壞或內容遺失、或是任何其他原因導致難以辨認。
転記者や編集者にひょって付加されたテキストを示す。例えば、元のテキストが物理的損傷や欠損から判読できない場合などに付加されるもの。
permet d'encoder du texte restitué par l'auteur de la transcription ou par l'éditeur pour une raison quelconque, le plus souvent parce que le texte du document original ne peut être lu, par suite de dommages matériels ou de lacunes.
indica fragmentos de texto añadidos por el transcriptor o por el revisor en el lugar donde el original es ilegible, porqué presenta daños físicos, lagunas o por otros motivos.
indica porzioni di testo inserite dal trascrittore o dal revisore al posto di porzioni di testo illegibili per danneggiamento, lacune nell'originale o altri motivi
@reason
one or more words indicating why the text has had to be supplied, e.g. overbinding, faded-ink, lost-folio, omitted-in-original.
그 텍스트가 제시된 이유를 표시한다.
說明該文件當時必須補充的原因。
該テキストが付加された理由を示す。
donne la raison pour laquelle on a dû restituer le texte.
explica los motivos de dicha inserción.
spiega i motivi di tale inserimento
content:"<"; content:">"; content:"["; content:"]"; content:"("; content:")"; content:"{"; content:"}";

I am dr Sr yr
<supplied reason="illegible" source="#amanuensis_copy">very humble Servt</supplied>
Sydney Smith

Je reste votre ts he de svt <supplied reason="illegible" source="#amanuensis_copy">très humble et très dévoué serviteur
</supplied>Jean Martin

回首向來蕭瑟處，歸<supplied reason="faded-ink" source="#amanuensis_copy">去，</supplied>
也無風雨也無晴。

<supplied reason="omitted-in-original">Dedication</supplied> to the duke of Bejar

The <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> and <supplied> elements may be closely allied in use. See section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination for discussion of which element is appropriate for which circumstance.

Les éléments <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> et <supplied> peuvent être étroitement associés. Voir la section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination pour savoir quel élément est approprié à chaque circonstance.

要素<damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear>, <supplied>と共に使用されるかもしれない。これらのどの要素を使用するかについての詳細は、11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combinationを参照のこと。

11.3.3.1. Damage, Illegibility, and Supplied Text

<surface>
defines a written surface as a two-dimensional coordinate space, optionally grouping one or more graphic representations of that space, zones of interest within that space, and transcriptions of the writing within them.
직사각형의 좌표 공간과 그 내부에서 기록 표면부를 정의한다. 수의적으로 그 공간의 하나 이상의 그림 표상과 관심 있는 직사각형 공간을 모아놓는다.
define una superficie escrita en coordinadas rectangulares, agrupando opcionalmente una o más representaciones gráficas de ese espacio, y las zonas rectangulares de interés dentro de él.
矩形の座標により、書記の表面を定義する。選択的に、空間や矩形範囲中のひとつ以上の図表表現をまとめる。
définit une surface écrite comme un rectangle décrit par ses coordonnées spatiales, en regroupant éventuellement une ou plusieurs représentations graphiques de cet espace et des zones rectangulaires intéressantes à l'intérieur de celui-ci.
definisce una superficie scritta in termini di uno spazio rettangolare di coordinate, eventualmente che raggruppi una o più rappresentazioni grafiche di tale spazio, e delle zone rettangolari di interesse all'interno di questo
@attachment
describes the method by which this surface is or was connected to the main surface
"glued"
glued in place
"pinned"
pinned or stapled in place
"sewn"
sewn in place
@flipping
indicates whether the surface is attached and folded in such a way as to provide two writing surfaces

<facsimile>
  <surface ulx="0" uly="0" lrx="200" lry="300">
    <graphic url="Bovelles-49r.png"/>
  </surface>
</facsimile>

The <surface> element represents any two-dimensional space on some physical surface forming part of the source material, such as a piece of paper, a face of a monument, a billboard, a scroll, a leaf etc.

The coordinate space defined by this element may be thought of as a grid @lrx - @ulx units wide and @uly - @lry units high.

The <surface> element may contain graphic representations or transcriptions of written zones, or both. The coordinate values used by every <zone> element contained by this element are to be understood with reference to the same grid.

Where it is useful or meaningful to do so, any grouping of multiple <surface> elements may be indicated using the <surfaceGrp> element.

L'élément <surface> représente un secteur rectangulaire d’une surface physique faisant partie du matériau source. Ce peut être une feuille du papier, la façade d'un monument, un panneau publicitaire, un rouleau de papyrus ou en fait toute surface à deux dimensions.

L'espace de coordonnées défini par cet élément peut être considéré comme une grille d'unités horizontales@lrx - @ulx et verticales @uly - @lry. Cette grille se superpose à la totalité de toute image directement contenue par l'élément <surface>. Les coordonnées employées par chaque élément <zone>contenu par cette surface doivent être interprétées en référence à la même grille.

当該要素<surface>は、素材表面にある矩形範囲を示す。例えば、紙、碑、掲示板、パピルスの巻子など、2次元の面を持つもの。

当該要素で定義される座標空間は、幅が属性@lrx - @ulx、高さが属性@uly - @lryによるグリッド単位で示される。このグリッドは、要素<surface>を含む画面全体に重ね合わされる。この表面に含まれている要素<zone>で使われる座標値は、同じグリッドに対する参照と解釈される。

11.1. Digital Facsimiles 11.2.2. Embedded Transcription

<table>
table
tableau
Tabelle
contains text displayed in tabular form, in rows and columns.
행과 열의 테이블 형식으로 제시된 텍스트를 포함한다.
以表格形式呈現、包含在直行橫列中的文字內容。
表形式で示されるテキストを、行と列で示す。
contient du texte affiché sous forme de tableau, en rangées et colonnes.
contiene texto dispuedto en forma de tabla, con filas y columnas.
contiene testo visualizzato in forma di tabella, in righe e colonne.
enthält Text, der in Tabellenform, also in Zeilen und Spalten, dargestellt ist.
@rows
rows
Zeilen
indicates the number of rows in the table.
테이블의 행의 수를 표시한다.
指出表格中的列數。
当該表中の行数を示す。
indique le nombre de rangées dans le tableau.
indica el número de filas en una tabla.
indica il numero di righe della tabella.
gibt die Anzahl der Tabellenzeilen an.

If no number is supplied, an application must calculate the number of rows.

Rows should be presented from top to bottom.

Les rangées sont ordonnées de haut en bas

行は、上から下の順番で示される。

Wenn keine Zeilenanzahl angegeben wird, muss diese von einer Applikation berechnet werden.

Zeilen sollten von oben nach unten notiert werden.

@cols
columns
열
columnas
colonnes
colonne
Spalten
indicates the number of columns in each row of the table.
테이블의 각 행별 열의 수를 표시한다.
指出表格中每一列所包含的行數。
当該表中の列数を示す。
indique le nombre de colonnes dans chaque rangée du tableau.
indica el número de columnas por cada fila de la tabla.
indica il numero di colonne in ciascuna riga della tabella-
gibt die Anzahl der Tabellenspalten an.

If no number is supplied, an application must calculate the number of columns.

Within each row, columns should be presented left to right.

Si aucun nombre n'est fourni, une application doit calculer le nombre de colonnes.

Dans chaque rangée, les colonnes sont ordonnées de gauche à droite.

行中において、列は左から右への順番で示される。

Wenn keine Spaltenanzahl angegeben wird, muss diese von einer Applikation berechnet werden.

In einer Zeile sollten Spalten von links nach rechts notiert werden.

font-size: smaller; background-color: #F0F0F0;

<table rows="4" cols="4">
  <head>Poor Men's Lodgings in Norfolk (Mayhew, 1843)</head>
  <row role="label">
    <cell role="data"/>
    <cell role="data">Dossing Cribs or Lodging Houses</cell>
    <cell role="data">Beds</cell>
    <cell role="data">Needys or Nightly Lodgers</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">Bury St Edmund's</cell>
    <cell role="data">5</cell>
    <cell role="data">8</cell>
    <cell role="data">128</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">Thetford</cell>
    <cell role="data">3</cell>
    <cell role="data">6</cell>
    <cell role="data">36</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">Attleboro'</cell>
    <cell role="data">3</cell>
    <cell role="data">5</cell>
    <cell role="data">20</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">Wymondham</cell>
    <cell role="data">1</cell>
    <cell role="data">11</cell>
    <cell role="data">22</cell>
  </row>
</table>

<table rows="4" cols="4">
  <head>Persistance de la neige dans les Alpes suisses (Denzler). </head>
  <row>
    <cell role="label">A l'altitude de</cell>
    <cell role="data">650 m.</cell>
    <cell role="data">1300m.</cell>
    <cell role="data">1950m.</cell>
    <cell role="data">2700m.</cell>
  </row>
  <row>
    <cell role="label">la neige reste</cell>
    <cell role="data">77 jours.</cell>
    <cell role="data"> 200 jours.</cell>
    <cell role="data"> 245 jours.</cell>
    <cell role="data"> 365 jours.</cell>
  </row>
</table>

<table rows="4" cols="4">
  <head>台北飯店提供住房數目(2008年雙十國慶 )</head>
  <row role="label">
    <cell role="data"/>
    <cell role="data">經濟客房</cell>
    <cell role="data">標準客房</cell>
    <cell role="data">高級客房</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">圓山大飯店</cell>
    <cell role="data">203</cell>
    <cell role="data">168</cell>
    <cell role="data">66</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">凱撒大飯店</cell>
    <cell role="data">216</cell>
    <cell role="data">140</cell>
    <cell role="data">32</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">喜來登大飯店</cell>
    <cell role="data">197</cell>
    <cell role="data">160</cell>
    <cell role="data">50</cell>
  </row>
  <row role="data">
    <cell role="label">君悅大飯店</cell>
    <cell role="data">177</cell>
    <cell role="data">130</cell>
    <cell role="data">22</cell>
  </row>
</table>

Contains an optional heading and a series of rows.

Any rendition information should be supplied using the global @rend attribute, at the table, row, or cell level as appropriate.

Contient un titre facultatif et une suite de rangées.

Toute information relative à la restitution sera exprimée avec l'attribut global @rend appliqué au tableau, à la rangée, ou à la cellule selon le cas.

Enthält eine Reihe von Zeilen und optional eine Überschrift.

Jegliche Information die grafische Darstellung betreffend, sollte mit dem globalen @rend-Attribut auf der Ebene von Tabelle, Zeile oder Zelle verzeichnet werden.

14.1.1. TEI Tables

<TEI>
TEI document
TEI 문서
TEI文件
document TEI
TEI-Dokument
documento TEI
documento TEI
TEI文書
contains a single TEI-conformant document, combining a single TEI header with one or more members of the model.resource class. Multiple <TEI> elements may be combined within a <TEI> (or <teiCorpus>) element.
TEI 헤더와 텍스트로 구성된 단일 TEI 구조 문서를 포함한다. 독립 요소 또는 <teiCorpus> 요소의 부분.
包含符合TEI標準的單一文件，由一個TEI標頭及一份文本組成，可單獨出現或是作為元素<teiCorpus>的一部分。
一つ以上のmodel.resourceクラスを持つ一つのTEIヘッダを持つ、単一のTEI準拠文書を含む。<teiCorpus>エレメントには複数の<TEI>要素が含まれてもよい。
contient un seul document conforme à la TEI, qui comprend un en-tête TEI et un texte, soit de façon isolée, soit comme partie d’un élément <teiCorpus>.
enthält ein einzelnes TEI-konformes Dokument, das aus einem einzigen TEI-Header und einem oder mehreren Mitgliedern der model.resource-Klasse besteht. Mehrere <TEI>-Elemente können in einem <teiCorpus>-Element zusammengefasst werden.
contiene un solo documento conforme a la norma TEI, combinando un solo encabezado TEI (teiHeader) con uno o más miembros de la clase model.resource. Múltiples elementos TEI se pueden combinar al interno de un elemento <TEI> o <teiCorpus>.
contiene un documento TEI-conforme, comprendente un'intestazione e un testo, sia esso isolato o parte di un elemento <teiCorpus>
@version

<TEI version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>The shortest TEI Document Imaginable</title>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt>
        <p>First published as part of TEI P2, this is the P5
        version using a namespace.</p>
      </publicationStmt>
      <sourceDesc>
        <p>No source: this is an original work.</p>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <p>This is about the shortest TEI document imaginable.</p>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>

<TEI version="2.9.1">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>A TEI Document containing four page images </title>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt>
        <p>Unpublished demonstration file.</p>
      </publicationStmt>
      <sourceDesc>
        <p>No source: this is an original work.</p>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <facsimile>
    <graphic url="page1.png"/>
    <graphic url="page2.png"/>
    <graphic url="page3.png"/>
    <graphic url="page4.png"/>
  </facsimile>
</TEI>

<TEI version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>Le document TEI le plus court possible.</title>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt>
        <p>D'abord publié comme faisant partie de la TEI P2.</p>
      </publicationStmt>
      <sourceDesc>
        <p>Aucune source : il s'agit d'un document original.</p>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <p>A peu pres, le document TEI le plus court envisageable.</p>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>

<TEI version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>TEI中文指引</title>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt>
        <p>將與TEI 中文在地化計劃等文件一同出版</p>
      </publicationStmt>
      <sourceDesc>
        <p>譯自TEI P5 英文指引</p>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <p>這是TEI P5的中文指引...</p>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>

This element is required. It is customary to specify the TEI namespace http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 on it, for example: <TEI version="4.4.0" xml:lang="it" xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">.

El elemento es obligatorio. Normalmente se especifica el espacio de nombres (namespace) de TEI en su interior http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0, utilizando el atributo @xmlns

Cet élément est obligatoire.

当該要素は必須であり、@xmlns 属性を用いてTEIの名前空間 http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 を指定することになっている。

Dieses Element ist obligatorisch. Es ist notwendig, auch den TEI-Namensraum http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 anzugeben, z.B. <TEI version="4.4.0" xml:lang="it" xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">.

4. Default Text Structure 15.1. Varieties of Composite Text

<teiCorpus>
TEI corpus
TEI-Korpus
contains the whole of a TEI encoded corpus, comprising a single corpus header and one or more <TEI> elements, each containing a single text header and a text.
하나의 코퍼스 헤더와 몇 개의 TEI 요소로 구성된, 그리고 하나의 텍스트 헤더와 하나의 텍스트로 구성된 TEI로 부호화된 코퍼스 전체를 포함한다.
包含一套用TEI編碼的文件集，由單一文集標頭以及一個 (或多個) TEI元素所組成，各TEI元素包含單一文本標頭和一個文本。
TEI準拠のコーパス全体を示す。ヘダーが1つと、ひとつ以上の要素TEIから成る。各要素TEIには、テキストヘダーと要素textが1つある。
contient la totalité d'un corpus encodé selon la TEI, comprenant un seul en-tête de corpus et un ou plusieurs éléments TEI dont chacun contient un seul en-tête textuel et un texte.
contiene la totalidad de un corpus TEI codificado, comprendiendo un único encabezado y uno o más elementos TEI, cada uno de los cuales tiene a su vez un único encabezado y un texto.
contiene un intero corpus codificato TEI, comprende un intestazione del corpus e uno o più elementi TEI, ciascuno contenente un un singolo testo e la relatica intestazione.
enthält ein vollständiges Korpus, das in TEI kodiert ist, mit einem gemeinsamen TEI-Header und einem oder mehreren <TEI>-Elementen, die jeweils einen eigenen TEI-Header und Text enthalten.
@version
version
Version
specifies the version number of the TEI Guidelines against which this document is valid.
TEI 스키마의 버전
TEI架構的版本
当該TEIスキームの版。
la version du modèle TEI
La versión del esquema TEI
La versione dello schema TEI
gibt die Versionsnummer der TEI-Richtlinien an, gegen die dieses Dokument validiert wird.

Major editions of the Guidelines have long been informally referred to by a name made up of the letter P (for Proposal) followed by a digit. The current release is one of the many releases of the fifth major edition of the Guidelines, known as P5. This attribute may be used to associate a TEI document with a specific release of the P5 Guidelines, in the absence of a more precise association provided by the @source attribute on the associated <schemaSpec>.

Hauptausgaben der TEI-Richtlinien werden seit langem informell mit einem Namen bezeichnet, der sich aus dem Buchstaben P (für proposal) und einer Ziffer zusammensetzt. Die aktuelle Ausgabe ist eine der vielen Ausgaben der fünften Hauptausgabe der Richtlinien, bekannt als P5. Dieses Attribut kann dazu verwendet werden, um ein TEI-Dokument einer bestimmten Version der P5-Richtlinien zuzuordnen, sofern keine genauere Zuordnung durch das Attribut @source im assoziierten <schemaSpec>-Element angegeben ist.

<teiCorpus version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader/>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>

</teiCorpus>

<teiCorpus version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader/>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
</teiCorpus>

<teiCorpus version="3.3.0">
  <teiHeader/>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>
  <TEI>
    <teiHeader/>
    <text/>
  </TEI>

</teiCorpus>

Should contain one TEI header for the corpus, and a series of <TEI> elements, one for each text.

Cet élément doit contenir un en-tête TEI pour le corpus, et une suite d'éléments <TEI>, correspondant à autant de textes.

Cet élément est obligatoire quand il est applicable.

コーパス全体にはひとつのTEIヘダーが、要素<TEI>にはひとつの 要素textがある。

当該要素素は、適応できる場合、必須である。

Muss einen TEI-Header für das Korpus enthalten, und eine Reihe von <TEI>-Elementen, von denen jedes für einen Text im Korpus steht.

Das Element ist, wenn inhaltlich anwendbar, obligatorisch.

4. Default Text Structure 15.1. Varieties of Composite Text

<term>
term
terme
Fachbegriff
contains a single-word, multi-word, or symbolic designation which is regarded as a technical term.
전문용어로 간주되는 단일어, 복합어, 기호적 명칭을 포함한다.
包含作為專有名詞的一個單字、詞彙、或是表示符號。
技術用語とされる単一語、複数語、記号表示を示す。
contient un mot simple, un mot composé ou un symbole, qui est considéré comme un terme technique.
contiene una palabra simple, multipalabra o designación simbólica que se considera como un término técnico.
contiene una parola singola, un'unità formata da più parole, o una designazione simbolica che è considerata come un termine tecnico
enthält ein einzelnes Wort, Mehrworttermini oder symbolische Bezeichnungen, die als Fachbegriffe verstanden werden

<keywords>
  <term>huntin</term>
  <term>shootin</term>
  <term>fishin</term>
</keywords>

This element should only be used in the TEI Header

3.4.1. Terms and Glosses

<text>
text
texte
contains a single text of any kind, whether unitary or composite, for example a poem or drama, a collection of essays, a novel, a dictionary, or a corpus sample.
어떤 종류의 단일 텍스트를 포함한다. 예를 들어, 시 또는 드라마, 수필선, 소설, 사전 또는 코퍼스 표본과 같은 단일 텍스트 또는 혼합 텍스트.
包含一份任何種類的文本，無論是單一或複合的，例如詩詞或戲劇、散文集、小說、字典、或是文集範例。
ひとつのテキストを示す。単体でも複合体でもよい。例えば、詩、舞台芸術、 随筆、小説、辞書、コーパスなど。
contient un seul texte quelconque, simple ou composite, par exemple un poème ou une pièce de théâtre, un recueil d’essais, un roman, un dictionnaire ou un échantillon de corpus.
enthält einen einzelnen, eigenständigen oder kompilierten Text, zum Beispiel ein Gedicht oder Drama, eine Sammlung von Aufsätzen, einen Roman, ein Wörterbuch oder ein Korpus-Sample.
contiene un único texto de cualquier tipo, sea este unitario o combinado, p.ej. un texto en verso o teatral, una recopilación de ensayos, una novela, un diccionario, o una fragmento de corpus.
contiene un unico testo di qualsiasi tipo, sia esso unitario o composito, per esempio un testo in versi o teatrale, una raccolta di saggi, un romanzo, un dizionario, o una porzione di corpus
Error: The element is not permitted outside the header max-width: 80%; margin: auto; font-family: Verdana, Tahoma, Geneva, Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;

<text>
  <front>
    <docTitle>
      <titlePart>Autumn Haze</titlePart>
    </docTitle>
  </front>
  <body>
    <l>Is it a dragonfly or a maple leaf</l>
    <l>That settles softly down upon the water?</l>
  </body>
</text>

<text>
  <front>
    <docTitle>
      <titlePart>Souvenir de la nuit du 4</titlePart>
    </docTitle>
  </front>
  <body>
    <l>Il avait dans sa poche une toupie en buis.</l>
  </body>
</text>

Le <body> d'un texte peut être remplacé par un groupe de textes enchâssés, comme dans la structure suivante :

<TEI>
  <teiHeader/>
  <text>
    <front/>
    <group>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>
      <text>
        <front/>
        <body/>
        <back/>
      </text>

    </group>
    <back/>
  </text>
</TEI>

<text>
  <front>
    <docTitle>
      <titlePart>憶江南</titlePart>
    </docTitle>
  </front>
  <body>
    <l>江南好，</l>
    <l>風景舊曾諳。</l>
    <l>日出江花紅胜火，</l>
    <l>春來江水綠如藍，</l>
    <l>能不憶江南。</l>
  </body>
</text>

The body of a text may be replaced by a group of nested texts, as in the following schematic:

<text>
  <front/>
  <group>
    <text/>
    <text/>
  </group>
</text>

Der Textkörper kann durch eine Gruppierung von verschachtelten Texten ersetzt werden, wie das folgende Beispiel zeigt:

<text>
  <front/>
  <group>
    <text/>
    <text/>
  </group>
</text>

This element should not be used to represent a text which is inserted at an arbitrary point within the structure of another, for example as in an embedded or quoted narrative; the <floatingText> is provided for this purpose.

Cet élément ne devrait pas être utilisé pour encoder un texte inséré à un endroit non prévisible à l'intérieur de la structure d'un autre texte, comme par exemple dans un récit qui est enchâssé ou cité dans un autre ; c'est l'élément <floatingText> qui doit être utilisé à cet effet.

当該要素は、別の構造中、例えば引用された語りの任意の場所に挿入され るテキストを示すためには使うべきではない。この場合は、要素 <floatingText>が使われる。

Dieses Element sollte nicht benutzt werden, um einen Text wiederzugeben, der an irgendeiner Stelle in einer anderen Struktur eingefügt ist, wie z. B. eine eingebettete oder zitierte Erzählung. Für diesen Zweck wird das Element <floatingText> benutzt.

4. Default Text Structure 15.1. Varieties of Composite Text

<time>
time
temps
Zeit
contains a phrase defining a time of day in any format.
어떤 형식의, 하루의 시간을 정의하는 구를 포함한다.
包含一組字詞，以任何形式定義時間
時間を表す語句を示す。
contient une expression qui précise un moment de la journée sous n'importe quelle forme.
contiene un sintagma que define un momento del día en cualquier formato.
contiene un sintagma che si riferisce ad un ora del giorno in qualsiasi formato.
beinhaltet eine Phrase, die eine Uhr- oder Tageszeit in einem beliebigen Format bestimmt.

As he sat smiling, the
quarter struck — <time when="11:45:00">the quarter to twelve</time>.

Bonsoir, il est <time when="00:00:00">minuit</time> ici, l'heure de dormir, et chez vous
   à Paris, il est seulement <time when="07:00:00">7 h.</time> Je te
   rapporterai plein de souvenirs pour te faire partager cette
   expérience unique.

下班火車將於 <time when="11:45:00">差一刻十二點</time>出發。

3.6.4. Dates and Times

<title>
title
titre
Titel
contains a title for any kind of work.
다양한 종류의 작업에 대한 전체 제목을 제공한다.
包含任何種類作品的完整題名。
作品の完全なタイトルを示す。
contient le titre complet d'une oeuvre quelconque
contiene el título completo de una obra de cualquier tipo.
contiene il titolo completo di una qualsiaisi opera.
beinhaltet einen Titel eines beliebigen Werks.
@level
indicates the bibliographic level for a title, that is, whether it identifies an article, book, journal, series, or unpublished material.
제목에 대한 서지적 층위를 나타내어, 논문, 책, 학술지, 총서, 미간행의 여부를 식별한다.
指出題名的書目層次，即該題名之所指可以是文章、書籍、期刊、叢書或未出版的項目。
タイトルの書誌情報のレベルを示す。例えば、論文、書籍、雑誌、叢書、 非刊行物など。
indique le niveau bibliographique d'un titre, c'est-à-dire si ce titre identifie un article, un livre, une revue, une collection, ou un document non publié
indica el tipo bibliográfico para un título, si este se identifica como un artículo, libro, revista, colección o material inédito.
indica il livello bibliografico di un titolo, ovvero se indentifica un articolo, un libro, una rivista, una collana, o materiale non pubblicato.
gibt den bibliografischen Typ eines Titels an, d.h. ob er einen Artikel, ein Buch, eine Zeitschrift, eine Reihe oder unpubliziertes Material bezeichnet.
"a"
analytic
분석적
analytique
analitico
analítico
unselbständig
the title applies to an analytic item, such as an article, poem, or other work published as part of a larger item.
분석적 제목(보다 큰 항목의 일부로 출판된 논문, 시, 또는 기타 항목)
分析層題名 (文章、詩、或其他隸屬於一個較大作品的項目)
título analítico (de artículo, de poema, o de otro elemento publicado como parte de un elemento más grande)
分析的タイトル(例えば、論文や詩など、大きめの刊行物の部分と なるもの)。
titre analytique (article, poème ou autre, publié comme partie d'un ensemble plus grand)
titolo analitico (articolo, poesia o altra unità bibliografica pubblicata come parte di un'unità più grande)
der Titel gehört zu einer unselbständigen Publikation, wie einem Artikel, Gedicht oder einem anderen Werk, das als Teil einer umfangreicheren Einheit publiziert wurde.
"m"
monographic
단행본
monographique
monografico
monográfico
Monografie
the title applies to a monograph such as a book or other item considered to be a distinct publication, including single volumes of multi-volume works
단행본 제목(여러 권 중 한 권으로 출판된 경우를 포함하여, 독립된 항목으로 출판된 책, 모음집, 또는 기타 항목)
專題層題名 (書、選集、或其他獨立出版的項目，包含多冊作品的其中一冊)
título monográfico (libro, colección, u otro elemento publicado como elemento distinto, incluído los volúmenes individuales de trabajos multivolúmenes)
単行物のタイトル(例えば、書籍や叢書など、複数の巻に別れる作品のうちのひとつや、独立してある出版物)。
titre de monographie (livre, ensemble ou autre, publié comme un document distinct, y compris les volumes isolés d'ouvrages en plusieurs volumes)
titolo della monografia (libro, raccolta o altra unità bibliografica pubblicata indipendentemente, inculso il singolo volume di opere a più volumi)
der Titel bezieht sich auf Monografien wie z.B. ein Bücher oder andere selbständige Publikationen, also auch auf einzelne Bände in einem mehrbändigen Werk.
"j"
journal
학술지
rivista
título de revista.
Zeitschrift
the title applies to any serial or periodical publication such as a journal, magazine, or newspaper
학술지 제목
期刊層題名
título de diario, periódico o revista
雑誌のタイトル。
titre de revue
titolo di rivista
der Titel bezieht sich auf jede Art fortlaufender oder periodischer Veröffentlichungen wie z. B. Zeitschriften, Magazine oder Zeitungen.
"s"
series
연간물
série
serie
series
Reihe
the title applies to a series of otherwise distinct publications such as a collection
연간물 제목
叢書層題名
título de serie
叢書のタイトル。
titre de publication en série
titolo di collana
der Titel bezeichnet eine Reihe von ansonsten selbständig publizierten Veröffentlichungen, wie z. B. eine Buchreihe.
"u"
unpublished
unveröffentlicht
미간행
the title applies to any unpublished material (including theses and dissertations unless published by a commercial press)
미간행물(출판사에서 출판되지 않은 석박사 논문을 포함하여)의 제목
未出版的項目題名 (包括未經商業刊物發表的專題論文)
título de un material inédito (incluidas tesis y disertaciones que no sean publicadas por una editorial comercial)
非刊行物のタイトル(未刊の学位論文など)。
titre de matéria non publié (thèses et dissertations comprises, à l'exception de leurs éditions commerciales)
titolo di materiale non pubblicato (incluse tesi non pubblicate da case editrici)
der Titel bezieht sich auf unveröffentliches Material (incl. universitäre Qualifikationsarbeiten, soweit sie nicht von einem Verlag veröffentlicht worden sind).

The level of a title is sometimes implied by its context: for example, a title appearing directly within an <analytic> element is ipso facto of level a, and one appearing within a <series> element of level s. For this reason, the @level attribute is not required in contexts where its value can be unambiguously inferred. Where it is supplied in such contexts, its value should not contradict the value implied by its parent element.

Si le titre apparaît comme fils de l'élément <analytic>, l'attribut @level, s'il est renseigné, doit avoir la valeur a ; si le titre apparaît comme fils de l'élément <monogr>, l'attribut @level doit avoir la valeur m, j ou u ; si le titre apparaît comme fils de l'élément <series>, l'attribut @level doit avoir la valeur s. Si le titre apparaît dans l'élément <msItem>, l'attribut level ne doit pas être utilisé.

タイトルが要素<analytic>中にある場合、属性 @levelがあれば、値は必ずaとなる。タイトルが要素<monogr>中にある場合、属性 @levelの値は、必ずm, j, uのいずれかになる。要素<title>が要素<series>中にある場合、属性@levelの値は必ずsとなる。タイトルが要素<msItem>中にある場合、当該属性値は付与されない。

Der Typ eines Titels wird manchmal durch seinen Kontext bestimmt: wenn ein Titel z. B. innerhalb des Elements <analytic> verwendet wird, ist es ipso facto demnach Level a; ein Titel innerhalb eines <series>-Elements als Level s. Daher ist das @level-Attribut nicht zwingend notwendig, wenn die Position eindeutig erschlossen werden kann. Wenn es in derartigen Kontexten dennoch gesetzt wird, sollte der Attributwert dem impliziten Wert des Eltern-Elements nicht widersprechen.

@type
classifies the title according to some convenient typology.
어떤 편의적 유형에 따른 제목 분류
用合適的分類方法將題名分類。
当該タイトルを分類する。
caractérise le titre selon une typologie adaptée.
clasifica el título de acuerdo con alguna tipología funcional.
classifica il titolo seguendo una tipologia conveniente.
klassifiziert den Titel entsprechend einer geeigneten Typologie.
"main"
main title
(주)제목
主要題名
título principal
主タイトル。
titre principal
titolo
Haupttitel
"sub"
subordinate
부
titre de niveau inférieur, titre de partie
subordinato
subtítulo, título de una parte
untergeordnet
subtitle, title of part
부분의 제목인 부제목
副題名、部分題名
subtítulo, título de una parte
副タイトル、部分タイトル。
sous-titre, titre de partie.
sottotitolo, titolo di una parte
Untertitel oder Titel eines Teilbereichs
"alt"
alternate
이명
titre alternatif, souvent dans une autre langue, par lequel l'oeuvre est également connu
alternativo
título alternativo, a menudo en otra lengua por la cual la obra es también conocida.
alternativ
alternate title, often in another language, by which the work is also known
다른 언어에서 알려진 작품의 다른 이름
替代題名，通常以該作品著名的另一種語言呈現
título alternativo, a menudo en otro idioma, por el cual el trabajo también es conocido
別タイトル。多くは他言語によるタイトル。当該作品は、このタイトルで知られている。
autre titre, souvent exprimé dans une autre langue, par lequel l'ouvrage est aussi connu
titolo alternativo, spesso in altra lingua, con il quale è anche conosciuta l'opera
alternativer Titel, oft in einer anderen Sprache, unter dem das Werk auch bekannt ist.
"short"
abbreviated form of title
제목의 축약형
題名的縮寫形式
forma abreviada del título
タイトルの省略形。
forme abrégée du titre
abbreviazione del titolo
Kurztitel
"desc"
descriptive
기술적
paraphrase descriptive de l'oeuvre ayant les fonctions d'un titre
descrittivo
paráfrasis descriptiva que funciona como el título de una obra.
beschreibend
descriptive paraphrase of the work functioning as a title
제목으로 기능하는 작품의 기술적 바꿔쓰기
該作品的描述性改述，可作為題名
paráfrasis descriptiva del trabajo que funciona como título
タイトルのように当該作品を解説する言い換え。
paraphrase descriptive de l'oeuvre fonctionnant comme un titre
parafrasi descrittiva dell'opera che funge da titolo
Umschreibung des Werks, die als Titel fungiert.

This attribute is provided for convenience in analysing titles and processing them according to their type; where such specialized processing is not necessary, there is no need for such analysis, and the entire title, including subtitles and any parallel titles, may be enclosed within a single <title> element.

Cet attribut est utile pour analyser les titres et les traiter en fonction de leur type ; lorsqu'un tel traitement spécifique n'est pas nécessaire, il n'est pas utile de donner une telle analyse, et le titre entier, sous-titres et titres parallèles inclus, peuvent être encodés dans un élément <title>.

当該属性は、タイトルを分析し、処理する際に使用されるものである。このような処理を必要としない場合、タイトルを分析する必要はなく、副タイトルなどは全て要素<title>の中に入れてしまうことができる。

Dieses Attribut wird bereitgestellt, um die Analyse und die Verarbeitung von Titeln auf Basis ihres Typs zu vereinfachen; in Fällen, bei denen ein derart spezielles Vorgehen nicht notwendig ist, ist auch eine entsprechende Analyse nicht notwendig, und der gesamte Titel, inkl. Untertitel und allfälligen parallelen Titeln, kann mit einem einzigen <title>-Element ausgezeichnet werden.

color: red; font-size: 2em; font-style: italic; font-style: italic; font-style: italic; font-style: italic;

<title>Information Technology and the Research Process: Proceedings of
                                  a conference held at Cranfield Institute of Technology, UK,
                                  18–21 July 1989</title>

<title>La vie mode d'emploi. Romans.</title>

<title>Analyser les textes de communication</title>

<title>Mélanges de linguistique française et de philologie et littérature médiévales
    offerts à Monsieur Paul Imbs.</title>

<title>Les fleurs du Mal de Charles Baudelaire : une édition électronique</title>

<p>quand il rentre de ses chantiers de maçonnerie il dit rien, il pose son cul sur une
    chaise, toujours au même endroit, et il lit <title>l'Humanité.</title>
   </p>

<title>毛語錄</title>

<title>嚐書：視界與舌尖之外</title>

<title> 蒼天有淚—無語問蒼天，台北，1997年12月1日。</title>

<title>大般若波羅蜜多經：OCR辨識版本</title>

<title>Hardy's Tess of the D'Urbervilles: a machine readable
                        edition</title>

      <title type="full">
        <title type="main">Synthèse</title>
        <title type="sub">an international journal for
epistemology, methodology and history of
                                        science</title>
      </title>

The attributes @key and @ref, inherited from the class att.canonical may be used to indicate the canonical form for the title; the former, by supplying (for example) the identifier of a record in some external library system; the latter by pointing to an XML element somewhere containing the canonical form of the title.

Les attributs @key et @ref, hérités de la classe att.canonical sont utilisés pour indiquer la forme canonique du titre ; le premier donne (par exemple) l’identifiant d’un enregistrement dans un système externe de bibliothèque ; le second pointe vers un élément XML contenant la forme canonique du titre.

Die Attribute @key und @ref, die durch die Zugehörigkeit zur Klasse att.canonical verfügbar sind, können dafür verwendet werden, den kanonischen Titel anzugeben: Ersteres indem (z. B.) die Kennung eines Datensatzes einer externen Bibliothek herangezogen wird; Letzteres durch den Verweis auf ein XML-Element, das den kanonischen Titel enthält.

3.12.2.2. Titles, Authors, and Editors 2.2.1. The Title Statement 2.2.5. The Series Statement

<titlePage>
title page
제목 페이지
題名頁
page de titre
Titelseite
frontispicio
frontespizio
contains the title page of a text, appearing within the front or back matter.
전면부 또는 후면부 자료 내에서 나타나는 텍스트의 제목 페이지를 포함한다.
包含文本的題名頁，出現在正文前資訊或正文後資訊之中。
前付や後付中にある、テキストのタイトルページを示す。
contient la page de titre d’un texte qui figure dans les parties liminaires.
enthält die Titelseite eines Textes, die entweder im Vorspann (front) oder Nachspann (back) stehen kann.
contiene el frontispicio de un texto incluido en el paratexto inicial o final
contiene il frontespizio di un testo compreso nel peritesto iniziale o finale
@type
classifies the title page according to any convenient typology.
다양한 유형에 따라서 제목 페이지를 분류한다.
將題名頁分類。
タイトルページを分類する。
classe la page de titre selon la typologie appropriée.
klassifiziert die Titelseite entsprechend einer geeigneten Typologie.
clasifica el frontispicio de acuerdo con una tipología funcional.
classifica il frontespizio in base a una tipologia funzionale

This attribute allows the same element to be used for volume title pages, series title pages, etc., as well as for the main title page of a work.

Cet attribut est utile parce que c'est le même élément <titlePage> qui est utilisé pour les pages de titre de volumes, de collections, etc., et pour la page de titre principale d'un ouvrage.

当該属性は、いわゆる主タイトルページのよ うに、巻タイトルページや叢書タイトルページなどで使われるものと 同じ要素をとる。

Dieses Attribut erlaubt es, das Element <titlePage> sowohl für Bandtitelseiten und Reihentitelseiten etc. als auch für die eigentliche Haupttitelseite eines Werks zu benutzen.

text-align: center;

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart type="main">THOMAS OF Reading.</titlePart>
    <titlePart type="alt">OR, The sixe worthy yeomen of the West.</titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <docEdition>Now the fourth time corrected and enlarged</docEdition>
  <byline>By T.D.</byline>
  <figure>
    <head>TP</head>
    <p>Thou shalt labor till thou returne to duste</p>
    <figDesc>Printers Ornament used by TP</figDesc>
  </figure>
  <docImprint>Printed at <name type="place">London</name> for <name>T.P.</name>
         <date>1612.</date>
      </docImprint>
</titlePage>

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart type="main"> Histoire du Roi de Bohême</titlePart>
    <titlePart type="sub"> et de ses sept châteaux </titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <titlePart>Pastiche.</titlePart>
  <byline>Par <docAuthor>Charles Nodier</docAuthor>
      </byline>
  <epigraph>
    <q>O imitatores, servum pecus! </q>
    <bibl>Horat., Epist. I. XIX, 19.</bibl>
  </epigraph>
  <docImprint><name>PARIS</name>, <name>Delangle Frères</name> Éditeurs-libraires,
        <name>Place de la Bourse</name>
      </docImprint>
  <docDate>MDCCCXXX</docDate>
</titlePage>

<titlePage>
  <docTitle>
    <titlePart type="main">紅樓夢</titlePart>
    <titlePart type="alt">又名石頭記</titlePart>
  </docTitle>
  <docEdition>清乾隆四十九年甲辰（1784年）夢覺主人序本正式題為《紅樓夢》，在此之前，此書一般都題為《石頭記》。</docEdition>
  <byline>曹雪芹</byline>
  <figure>
    <head>HL</head>
    <p>紅樓夢圖詠</p>
    <figDesc>清光緒刊本的《紅樓夢》插圖，改琦畫。</figDesc>
  </figure>
  <docImprint>最早的抄本出現於清朝乾隆中期的 <date>甲戌年（1754年）。</date>
      </docImprint>
</titlePage>

4.6. Title Pages

<titlePart>
title part
Titelbestandteil
contains a subsection or division of the title of a work, as indicated on a title page.
제목 페이지에 제시되는 작품 제목의 소절 또는 구역을 포함한다.
包含作品題名的部分或區段，同於題名頁上所標示的題名。
タイトルページに示されている、作品タイトルの下位部分を示す。
contient une section ou division du titre d’un ouvrage telle qu’elle est indiquée sur la page de titre.
enthält einen Bestandteil eines Werktitels, wie er auf der Titelseite angegeben ist.
contiene una subsección o división del título de una obra, como se indica en el frontispicio.
contiene una sezione o partizione del titolo di un'opera, come specificato nel frontespizio
@type
type
Titelart
specifies the role of this subdivision of the title.
제목의 하위 구역에 대한 역할을 명시한다.
說明該題名部分的作用。
当該タイトルにおける、当該下位部分の役割を示す。
précise le rôle de cette subdivision du titre.
beschreibt die Funktion dieses Titelbestandteils näher.
especifica la función de tal subdivisión del título.
specifica il ruolo di tale sezione o partizione all'interno del titolo
main
"main"
main
Haupttitel
main title of the work
작품의 주요 제목
作品主要題名
título principal del trabajo
主タイトル。
titre principal de l'oeuvre.
titolo principale dell'opera
Haupttitel des Werks
"sub"
subordinate
부수적
subordinato
sous-titre de l’ouvrage.
Untertitel
subtítulo de una obra
subtitle of the work
작품의 부제
作品次要題名
subtítulo del trabajo
副タイトル。
sous-titre de l'oeuvre.
sottotitolo dell'opera
Untertitel des Werks
"alt"
alternate
이명
alternativo
titre alternatif de l’ouvrage.
Alternativer Titel
título alternativo de una obra
alternative title of the work
작품의 다른 제목
作品代換題名
título alternativo del trabajo
別タイトル。
autre titre de l'oeuvre.
titolo alternativo dell'opera
Alternativer Titel des Werks
"short"
short
Kurztitel
abbreviated form of title
제목의 축약형
題名的縮寫形式
forma abreviada del título
タイトルの省略形。
forme abrégée du titre.
forma abbreviata del titolo
Kurzform des Titels
"desc"
descriptive
기술적
descrittivo
description paraphrastique de l’ouvrage.
Beschreibung
paráfrasis descriptiva de la obra
descriptive paraphrase of the work
작품의 기술적 설명적 환문
作品的描述性改述
paráfrasis descriptiva del trabajo
説明的な言い換え。
texte qui paraphrase l'oeuvre.
parafrasi descrittiva dell'opera
beschreibende Paraphrase eines Werks

    <docTitle>
      <titlePart type="main">THE FORTUNES
AND MISFORTUNES Of the FAMOUS
Moll Flanders, &amp;c.
</titlePart>
      <titlePart type="desc">Who was BORN in NEWGATE,
And during a Life of continu'd Variety for
Threescore Years, besides her Childhood, was
Twelve Year a <hi>Whore</hi>, five times a <hi>Wife</hi> (wherof
once to her own Brother) Twelve Year a <hi>Thief,</hi>
Eight Year a Transported <hi>Felon</hi> in <hi>Virginia</hi>,
at last grew <hi>Rich</hi>, liv'd <hi>Honest</hi>, and died a
<hi>Penitent</hi>.</titlePart>
    </docTitle>

<docTitle>
  <titlePart type="main">Cinq semaines en ballon.</titlePart>
  <titlePart type="desc">Voyage de découvertes en Afrique par 3 anglais.</titlePart>
</docTitle>

<docTitle>
  <titlePart type="main">千年一嘆 </titlePart>
  <titlePart type="desc">這是一份真實的考察日記，記錄余秋雨在 20 世紀最後幾個月的數萬里行程。余秋雨與鳳凰電視台一行於 1999 年 9 月 27 日啟程，尋訪世界的古老文明。旅程開始時，5 輛吉普車從香港海運至埃及亞歷山大港，人員乘坐飛機至希臘雅典，考察完希臘本土和克利特島後至開羅，與吉普車會合，然後由吉普車走完全程，直至返回香港。</titlePart>
</docTitle>

4.6. Title Pages

<trailer>
contains a closing title or footer appearing at the end of a division of a text.
텍스트 구역의 종료부에 나타나는 마지막 제목 또는 꼬리말을 포함한다.
包含文本中一個區段結束時的結尾題名或尾錄。
テキスト部分の最後にある、結びのタイトルや脚注を示す。
contient un titre de fin ou de bas de page à la fin d’une division du texte.
enthält einen abschließenden Nachsatz oder eine Fußzeile am Ende eines Textabschnitts.
contiene una fórmula de clausura o un elemento a pie de página que aparece al final de una sección de texto
contiene una formula di chiusura o un elemento a piè di pagina che compare alla fine di una sezione di testo
color: green;

<trailer>Explicit pars tertia</trailer>

  <trailer>
<l>In stead of FINIS this advice <hi>I</hi> send,</l>
<l>Let Rogues and Thieves beware of <lb/>
<hi>Hamans</hi> END.</l>
  </trailer>

From EEBO A87070

<trailer>Explicit pars tertia</trailer>

<trailer>畢竟董卓性命如何，且聽下文分解。</trailer>

<trailer>
  <l>In stead of FINIS this advice <hi>I</hi> send,</l>
  <l>Let Rogues and Thieves beware of <lb/>
    <hi>Hamans</hi> END.</l>
</trailer>

Aus EEBO A87070

4.2.4. Content of Textual Divisions 4.2. Elements Common to All Divisions

<unclear>
unclear
poco claro
incertain
contains a word, phrase, or passage which cannot be transcribed with certainty because it is illegible or inaudible in the source.
원본에서 읽거나 듣기 어려워서 분명하게 전사할 수 없는 단어, 구, 단락들을 포함한다.
在來源文本中難以辨認或聽懂而無法確實轉錄的單字、詞組、或段落。
元資料からは判読できないまたは聞こえないという理由で、確実に転記でき ない語句や一節を示す。
contient un mot, une expression ou bien un passage qui ne peut être transcrit avec certitude parce qu'il est illisible ou inaudible dans la source.
contiene una palabra, frase o pasaje que no puede ser transcrito con certeza porque en la fuente es ilegible o inaudible.
contiene una parola, una frase o un brano che non può essere trascritto con certezza perché è parzialmente illeggibile o incomprensibile nell'originale.
enthält ein Wort, einen Satz oder eine Textpassage, welche in der Quelle nicht oder nur schwer lesbar bzw. hörbar ist.
@hand
@reason
indicates why the material is hard to transcribe.
전사하기 어려운 이유를 표시한다.
指出資料難以轉錄的原因。
当該資料から転記が困難である理由を示す。
indique pourquoi il est difficile de transcrire le document
Cuando la dificultad de transcripción se debe a un daño, se categoriza, si se puede, la causa de ese daño.
indica la ragione per la quale è difficile trascrivere il brano.
gibt den Grund an, warum das Material schwer zu transkribieren ist.
"illegible"
illegible
unleserlich
illegibile
ilegible
illisible
"inaudible"
inaudible
nicht hörbar
incomprensibile
inaudible
inaudible
"faded"
faded
desvanecido
ausgebleicht
"background_noise"
background noise
ruido de fondo
Hintergrundlärm
"eccentric_ductus"
eccentric ductus
ductus excéntrico
exzentrischer Duktus
indicates illegibility due to an unusual, awkward, or incompetent execution of a glyph or glyphs
indica ilegibilidad por una ejecución inusual, torpe o incompetente de un glifo o glifos.

<div>
  <head>Rx</head>
  <p>500 mg <unclear reason="illegible">placebo</unclear>
              </p>
</div>

One or more words may be used to describe the reason; usually each word will refer to a single cause.

Una o más palabras se pueden usar para describir la razón. Normalmente cada palabra se referirá a una causa concreta

Ein oder mehrere Wörter können verwendet werden, um den Grund zu beschreiben. In der Regel wird jedes Wort auf eine einzige Ursache verweisen.

@agent
Where the difficulty in transcription arises from damage, categorizes the cause of the damage, if it can be identified.
훼손으로 인해서 전사가 어려운 경우, 식별 가능하다면 훼손 원인을 분류하여 기술한다.
若因為內容遭受損毀而引起轉錄困難，且可辨別出損毀的導因，則在此加以說明。
損傷により転記が困難である時、その損傷の理由が分類できる場合には、 それを特定する。
lorsque la difficulté de transcription vient d'un dommage, catégorise la cause du dommage si celle-ci peut être identifiée
donde surge la dificultad en la transcripción a causa de un daño, categoriza, si puede ser identificada, la causa de tal daño.
qualora la difficoltà nella trascrizione emerga da danneggiamento, indica la causa del danno qualora possa essere identificata.
basiert die Schwierigkeit bei der Transkription auf einer schadhaften Stelle am Textträger, kann der Grund dafür hier genauer kategorisiert werden.
"rubbing"
damage results from rubbing of the leaf edges
책장 모서리의 마모로 인한 훼손
損毀起因於書頁邊緣摩擦受損
Daños resultantes del frotamiento de los bordes de la hoja.
葉の端がこすれたことによる損傷。
des dommages résultent du frottement des bords de la feuille
il danno è causato da segni di strofinamento sui bordi del foglio
Schaden, verursacht durch Abrieb der Blattkanten beim Umblättern
"mildew"
damage results from mildew on the leaf surface
곰팡이로 인한 책장의 훼손
損毀起因於書頁表面發霉
Daños resultantes por moho en la superficie de la hoja
葉の表面に白カビがあることによる損傷。
des dégâts résultent de la moisissure sur la surface de la feuille
il danno è causato da macchie di umido sulla superficie del foglio
Schaden, versursacht durch Schimmel auf der Blattoberfläche
"smoke"
damage results from smoke
연기로 그을린 훼손
損毀起因於煙燻
Daños provocados por el humo
煙による損傷。
des dégâts résultent de la fumée
il danno è causato dal fumo
Schaden, verursacht durch Rauch/Ruß
content: ' [?] ';

<add place="inspace">Envoyez-moi une épreuve <unclear cert="medium">W</unclear>
      <gap reason="inDéchiffrable"/>
   </add>

and from time to time invited in like manner
his att<unclear>ention</unclear>

Dans ce cas, les lettres à la fin du mot sont difficiles à lire.

<u> ...and then <unclear reason="background-noise">Nathalie</unclear> said ... </u>

The same element is used for all cases of uncertainty in the transcription of element content, whether for written or spoken material. For other aspects of certainty, uncertainty, and reliability of tagging and transcription, see chapter 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility.

The <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> and <supplied> elements may be closely allied in use. See section 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination for discussion of which element is appropriate for which circumstance.

The @hand attribute points to a definition of the hand concerned, as further discussed in section 11.3.2.1. Document Hands.

El mismo elemento se usa para todos los casos de incertidubre en la transcripción del contenido de un elemento, para material tanto escrito como hablado. Para otros aspectos relacionados con la certeza, incertidumbre y fiablilidad del etiquetado y transcripción, consultar el capítulo 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility.

Los elementos <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> y <supplied> pueden estar estrechamente relacionados en su uso. Consulta la sección 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination para ver una discusión sobre qué elemento es apropiado en qué circunstancias.

El atributo @hand dirige a una descripción de la mano implicada; se discute de manera más detallada en la sección 11.3.2.1. Document Hands.

Le même élément est utilisé pour tous les cas d'incertitude portant sur la transcription du contenu d'éléments, qu'il s'agisse de documents écrits ou oraux. Pour les autres aspects concernant la certitude, l'incertitude, et la fiabilité du balisage et de la transcription, voir le chapitre 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility.

Les éléments <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> et <supplied> peuvent être utilisés en étroite conjonction. Voir la section pour plus de détails sur l'élément le plus pertinent en fonction des circonstances.

当該要素は、文字情報と発話情報の両方で、転記が不確実な時に使用され る。転記が不確実である他の面については、21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibilityを参照 のこと。

要素<damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear>, <supplied>は、同時に使用されるかもしれない。どの場合にどの 要素が適切であるかについては、11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combinationを参照のこと。

Das Element wird für alle unsicheren Transkriptionen verwendet, egal ob es sich um geschriebenes oder gesprochenes Material handelt. Für andere Aspekte der Sicherheit, Unsicherheit und Zuverlässigkeit von Auszeichnung und Transkription, siehe Kapitel 21. Certainty, Precision, and Responsibility.

Die Elemente <damage>, <gap>, <del>, <unclear> und <supplied> werden oft im selben Kontext verwendet. Im Kapitel 11.3.3.2. Use of the gap, del, damage, unclear, and supplied Elements in Combination wird diskutiert, welches Element unter welchen Umständen geeignet ist.

Das @hand-Attribut verweist auf eine Beschreibung der betreffenden Schreibhand (siehe hierzu Kapitel 11.3.2.1. Document Hands).

11.3.3.1. Damage, Illegibility, and Supplied Text 3.5.3. Additions, Deletions, and Omissions

<w>
word
단어
單字
mot
palabra
parola
Wort
represents a grammatical (not necessarily orthographic) word.
문법적 (반드시 철자상이 아닌) 단어를 표시한다.
表示文法上 (但未必是拼字法上) 定義的單字。
文法上の語を示す(正書形である必要はない)。
représente un mot grammatical (pas nécessairement orthographique)
representa una palabra gramatical(no necesariamente ortográfica)
rappresenta la parola grammaticale (non necessariamente in modo ortografico).
repräsentiert ein grammatisches (nicht unbedingt orthografisches) Wort

<s n="1">
  <w ana="#NP0" type="open" lemma="Marley">Marley</w>
  <w ana="#VBD" type="verb" lemma="be">was</w>
  <w ana="#AJ0" type="complement" lemma="die">dead</w>
</s>

17.1. Linguistic Segment Categories 17.4.2. Lightweight Linguistic Annotation

<zone>
defines any two-dimensional area within a <surface> element.
<surface> 요소 내에 포함된 직사각형 영역을 정의한다.
define el área rectangular de la <superficie>.
要素<surface>にある表面上の矩形範囲を定義する。
définit une surface planaire de tout type par rapport à un élément <surface>.
definisce un'area bidimensionale contenuta all'interno di un elemento <surface>
beschreibt eine beliebige zweidimensionale Fläche innerhalb eines <surface>-Elements
@rotate
indicates the amount by which this zone has been rotated clockwise, with respect to the normal orientation of the parent <surface> element as implied by the dimensions given in the <msDesc> element or by the coordinates of the <surface> itself. The orientation is expressed in arc degrees.
gibt das Ausmaß der Drehung (im Uhrzeigersinn) dieser <zone> an. Als Bezugspunkt gilt dabei die natürliche Ausrichtung des <surface>-Elternelements, die entweder im <msDesc>-Element beschrieben ist oder durch die Koordinaten des <surface>-Elements selbst. Die Drehung wird in Bogengrad angegeben.
0

<surface ulx="14.54" uly="16.14" lrx="0" lry="0">
  <graphic url="stone.jpg"/>
  <zone points="4.6,6.3 5.25,5.85 6.2,6.6 8.19222,7.4125 9.89222,6.5875 10.9422,6.1375 11.4422,6.7125 8.21722,8.3125 6.2,7.65"/>
</surface>

This example defines a non-rectangular zone: see the illustration in section .

<facsimile>
  <surface ulx="50" uly="20" lrx="400" lry="280">
    <zone ulx="0" uly="0" lrx="500" lry="321">
      <graphic url="graphic.png"/>
    </zone>
  </surface>
</facsimile>

This example defines a zone which has been defined as larger than its parent surface in order to match the dimensions of the graphic it contains.

The position of every zone for a given surface is always defined by reference to the coordinate system defined for that surface.

A graphic element contained by a zone represents the whole of the zone.

A zone may be of any shape. The attribute @points may be used to define a polygonal zone, using the coordinate system defined by its parent surface.

A zone is always a closed polygon. Repeating the initial coordinate at the end of the sequence is optional. To encode an unclosed path, use the <path> element.

La position de chaque zone pour une surface donnée est toujours définie par rapport au système de coordonnées défini pour cette surface. Tout élément graphique contenu par une zone se représente par toute la zone.

要素<zone>が表す場所は全て、左表システムを参照して定義される。当該要素<zone>に含まれる要素<graphic>は、当該要素 <zone>が表す面全体を示す。

Die Position jeder <zone> einer <surface> ist immer durch Bezugnahme auf das Koordinatensystem dieser <surface> definiert.

Ein <graphic>-Element innerhalb eines <zone>-Elements repräsentiert stets die gesamte <zone>.

Eine <zone> kann jede beliebige Form haben. Das @points-Attribute kann genutzt werden, um ein Polygon zu beschreiben. Hierbei gilt das Koordinatensystem des <surface>-Elternelements als Referenz.

11.1. Digital Facsimiles 11.2.2. Embedded Transcription

Summary of changes

The TEI simplePrint schema uses the TEI infrastructure and gaiji modules unchanged.

Module tei	
Module gaiji	

A subset of 45 elements is selected from the TEI header module. In addition, elements <particDesc> and <settingDesc> are provided from the corpus module. The class membership of <particDesc> is changed to ensure that it can only appear inside <profileDesc>. Secondly, a Schematron rule is added to the <text> element to ensure that elements <term> and <biblFull> can appear only in the header element, even though the schema permits them additionally in text.

Module header	
Module corpus	

Some attributes and attribute classes are removed. The range of values available for several attributes is constrained.

Class att.datcat	delete
Class att.declarable	delete
Class att.declaring	delete
Class att.ranging	delete
Class att.global.linking	change
Class att.canonical	change
Class att.editLike	change
Class att.pointing	change
Class att.global.rendition	change
Class att.placement	change
Class att.dimensions	change

The following unused model classes are removed.

Class model.certLike	delete
Class model.egLike	delete
Class model.entryPart	delete
Class model.glossLike	delete
Class model.oddDecl	delete
Class model.offsetLike	delete
Class model.pPart.msdesc	delete
Class model.placeNamePart	delete
Class model.placeStateLike	delete
Class model.specDescLike	delete

The following elements are modified by the TEI simplePrint specification, mostly by the addition of a processing model, but in other cases by additional constraints on the attributes they may have, or the values those attributes may take. Additional examples are also provided for some of them.

Element <ab>	change
Element <abbr>	change
Element <actor>	change
Element <add>	change
Element <address>	change
Element <addrLine>	change
Element <am>	change
Element <anchor>	change
Element <argument>	change
Element <author>	change
Element <back>	change
Element <bibl>	change
Element <biblFull>	change
Element <biblScope>	change
Element <body>	change
Element <byline>	change
Element <c>	change
Element <castGroup>	change
Element <castItem>	change
Element <castList>	change
Element <cb>	change
Element <cell>	change
Element <choice>	change
Element <cit>	change
Element <closer>	change
Element <code>	change
Element <corr>	change
Element <date>	change
Element <dateline>	change
Element <del>	change
Element <desc>	change
Element <div>	change
Element <docAuthor>	change
Element <docDate>	change
Element <docEdition>	change
Element <docImprint>	change
Element <docTitle>	change
Element <editor>	change
Element <editorialDecl>	change
Element <email>	change
Element <epigraph>	change
Element <ex>	change
Element <expan>	change
Element <figDesc>	change
Element <figure>	change
Element <floatingText>	change
Element <foreign>	change
Element <formula>	change
Element <front>	change
Element <fw>	change
Element <g>	change
Element <gap>	change
Element <graphic>	change
Element <group>	change
Element <head>	change
Element <hi>	change
Element <imprimatur>	change
Element <item>	change
Element <l>	change
Element <label>	change
Element <lb>	change
Element <lg>	change
Element <list>	change
Element <listBibl>	change
Element <measure>	change
Element <milestone>	change
Element <name>	change
Element <note>	change
Element <num>	change
Element <opener>	change
Element <orig>	change
Element <p>	change
Element <particDesc>	change
Element <pb>	change
Element <pc>	change
Element <person>	change
Element <place>	change
Element <postscript>	change
Element <profileDesc>	change
Element <publisher>	change
Element <pubPlace>	change
Element <q>	change
Element <quote>	change
Element <ref>	change
Element <reg>	change
Element <relatedItem>	change
Element <rhyme>	change
Element <role>	change
Element <roleDesc>	change
Element <row>	change
Element <rs>	change
Element <s>	change
Element <salute>	change
Element <seg>	change
Element <set>	change
Element <sic>	change
Element <signed>	change
Element <sp>	change
Element <speaker>	change
Element <spGrp>	change
Element <stage>	change
Element <subst>	change
Element <supplied>	change
Element <table>	change
Element <taxonomy>	change
Element <fileDesc>	change
Element <revisionDesc>	change
Element <encodingDesc>	change
Element <teiHeader>	change
Element <TEI>	change
Element <term>	change
Element <text>	change
Element <time>	change
Element <title>	change
Element <titlePage>	change
Element <titlePart>	change
Element <trailer>	change
Element <unclear>	change
Element <w>	change